
- c>° 

o x 



v ' .* 









-> '- 






\> * ^< o f „ 







0" ^ 



,0o y 



a^ ^. 









./•*: 



OO 1 













:*° O 




































^\-..%' 






^ <> - ^ 



" 



3 cr 









V <"* 






o x 



*z- V> 



V. ' » 



.- 






0: v % 




^ /^ 



v"V 



e ^*V 



O 







V 



*' c.V 










O0 l 









Oo. 












" ,0° 









,0o. 



•>, 













J 



- 

^ ^ 



i0^ s s * 



'V- 






<P 







OO 



'^ v^ -.£ 












o 5 ^ r 



<v 






** <(? 



: 'J % l -"./' 












,0o. 




o cr 






O ^ A ° 5 <V 

^ * N ' ^ 



%' 




>\: 



.0 o. 






%/ ^ 



^% 










o o^ 




vOO 



^./ %^ 



^'-3^> 



■>. -c. 
*o X 




<* 



/ 



MEMOIRS 



LIFE AND GOSPEL LABOURS 



OF THE LATE 



DANIEL WHEELER, 



A MINISTER OF THE SOCIETY OF FRIENDS. 



"He brought me up also out of an horrible pit, out of the miry clay, and 
set my feet upon a rock, and established my goings. And He hath put a new- 
song in my mouth, even praise unto our God." — Psalm xl. 2, 3. 



LONDON: 

HARVEY AND DARTON, 55, GRACECHURCH STREET; 
CHARLES GILPIN, 5, BISHOPSGATE STREET. 

1842. 






LONDON: 

JOHNSTON AND BARRETT, PRINTERS 
MARK LANE. 



iiauEST ar 

WALTER R. ffflffiSfl 



S'36 



/ (>7 



PREFACE. 



In presenting to the public the following Memoirs, a few 
explanatory remarks may be requisite. 

For some years previous to the decease of our honoured 
parent, it was evidently a matter which he had much at heart, 
to leave behind him some narrative of his life ; no doubt believ- 
ing that a record, in which might be traced so many instances 
of Divine mercy and interposition, could not but be instructive 
and strengthening to others. This work, however, though com- 
menced in the year 1831, was never completed; and it has 
been our duty to supply the deficiency from whatever sources 
lay within our reach. From the period at which the auto- 
biography abruptly terminates, to the time of his removal to 
Russia, the recollections of his family, and, in some instances, 
the memoranda of his intimate friends, have furnished the 
only data : but it must be observed, that nothing has been 
allowed a place, which could not be stated with entire confi- 
dence ; more might undoubtedly have been given, by including 
incidents not so distinctly remembered, and matter derived from 
traditional, rather than personal knowledge, which in the 
present instance has been carefully avoided. 



IV PREFACE. 

Of the succeeding sixteen years, viz.: from 1817, the pri- 
vate correspondence of the deceased affords almost the only 
materials; but as this was tolerably copious, and generally 
written with the entire openness of friendship, it constitutes 
not the least valuable part of the Work. 

The narrative of his religious visit to the South Sea Islands, 
&c, has been carefully revised since its last publication, and 
some additional matter from the original notes has been inter- 
spersed : a map of some of the Islands, constructed from the 
best accessible authorities, is also introduced. 

For the closing years of his life, the private journal has 
again been quoted. The brevity of the American portion of it, 
will perhaps be regretted, though easily explained by the in- 
creasing age and infirmities of the writer ; but although short, 
it was thought to contain matter of sufficient interest to 
warrant its insertion. The record of his last illness has been 
furnished by the amiable family, who were then his kind 
attendants. 

The Appendix will be found to contain several articles which 
though not actually a part of the narrative, are yet interesting 
in connexion with it. The extracts from the notes of our 
brother Charles, written whilst accompanying his father 
amongst the islands of the Pacific, exhibit a somewhat succinct 
view of the condition of their inhabitants, and are the more 
worthy of notice, as their lamented author was not only himself 
well qualified to observe, but also to estimate the evidence of 
others. 

It will be seen, that the present work is to be regarded chiefly 



PREFACE. V 

in the light of a compilation. From the nature of some of the 
materials, it will also be evident, that it has occasionally been 
as much a duty to omit, as in other instances to insert ; but 
the reader may be assured, that the selection has been fairly 
and impartially made : and that whenever any alteration has 
been attempted, it has been merely a verbal correction, without 
affecting the sense of the passage. It is hardly possible that 
so near a relation to the deceased should be an entirely impartial 
Editor, and if any passages should be found indebted for their 
insertion rather to feeling than to judgment, it is hoped that 
both the judgment and feeling of the reader will combine to 
induce him to make some charitable allowance. 

It remains for me to acknowledge my obligations to all those 
who have in any way assisted in the present work, and parti- 
cularly to my esteemed friend A. R. Barclay, who has kindly 
superintended its publication. 

In conclusion, I would express my hope that no passage 
occurring in the present volume may give just cause of offence 
to any ; but that on the contrary, many may derive from it 
edification and comfort. 

DANIEL WHEELER. 

Eighth Month 18$, 1842. 



TESTIMONY OF 



A TESTIMONY 

Of Balby Monthly Meeting in the County of York, concern- 
ing Daniel Wheeler deceased. 

Our beloved friend Daniel Wheeler was the youngest son of 
William and Sarah Wheeler of Conduit-street, Hanover- 
square, Loudon ; and was born there the 27th day of Eleventh 
Month, 1771. 

His parents were rather above the middle rank in society, 
and being consistent members of the Established church, were 
strict in conforming to its rites and ceremonies, punctual in 
attending their place of worship, and careful to train up their 
children to devotional exercises. 

Before he was twelve years old, he was deprived of parental 
restraint by the death of his father and mother ; and was 
placed at a school at Fulharn, for the purpose of learning navi- 
gation, to prepare him for his future seafaring life. 

Thus left an orphan, through the interest of a relative he 
was entered on the King's books as midshipman at an early 
age : whilst he was preparing for the service, and before he 
had completed his thirteenth year, circumstances led to the 
breaking up of the family circle, giving rise to a long separation 
from his brothers and sisters, to whom he was very warmly 
attached. 

He now sailed for the first time, cruising on the coast of 
Portugal ; and after remaining six years in the navy, he finally 
quitted his ship, and entered the ranks of the army as a private 
soldier. 

' When about sixteen years of age, 1 he says, ' having been 
unwell, and probably led to reflect a little on that account, I 
was made sensible of a Divine visitation extended to me at that 



BALBY MONTHLY MEETING. 



time ; disclosing, with undubitable clearness, the vanity and 
emptiness of every earthly station, tarnishing the pride and 
glory of this perishing world in my sight ; and which, though 
little understood and less regarded at the moment, has since, at 
different times, been brought to my remembrance by Him that 
declareth unto man what is His thought, that maketh the 
morning darkness, and treadeth upon the high places of the 
earth, the Lord, the God of Hosts is his name ! When this 
occurred, although then entered into the bond of iniquity, yet 
I had not launched so fully into its awful abyss, as was after- 
wards most lamentably the case ; and from what I have since 
witnessed, in unutterable mercy, of the strength and power ot 
redeeming love, a belief is induced, that, if this warning voice, 
then sounded in the secret of my sinful heart, had been 
hearkened unto and waited upon, my footsteps, — even mine, 
would have been conducted from the horrible pit to which they 
were fast verging. 1 

It was after long exposure to the severity of the weather, 
during a harassing service in one of the most unhealthy 
districts of Europe, that Daniel Wheeler was seized with a 
prevailing fever, which swept away many of his fellow- 
soldiers ; and after all prospect of recovery seemed to be gone, 
he was in mercy raised up from the hospital, where numbers 
were daily perishing round him, to become, in future years, the 
messenger of mercy and glad tidings to others. At this 
period, however, although he maintained a fair character among 
his fellow-men, he was living in a state of much estrangement of 
heart from Grod, and often striving against his own secret con- 
victions. In the discharge of those duties belonging- to his 
station, he had acquitted himself to the satisfaction of his 
superiors ; he had been advanced to the rank of serjeant-major, 
and was afterwards further promoted. 

In 1794 or 1795, he paid a short visit to his eldest sister 
residing near Sheffield, who was married, and had become a 
member of the Society of Friends by convincement. He was 
not long allowed to enjoy this interval of quiet, before he was 
summoned to join the regiment, in which he had obtained a 
commission, on its departure for the West Indies. They set 



Vlll TESTIMONY OF 

sail ; twice the fleet put to sea, and as often encountered a 
dreadful hurricane; several of the vessels were lost, the troops 
perishing in them : but Daniel Wheeler was providentially 
spared, experiencing a narrow escape. 

Reflecting on these disasters, and the renewed occurrence of 
wonderful preservation, so unexpected and so undeserved, his 
heart was touched ; he could not resolve a third time to expose 
his life as he had done, but determined to quit the army, so 
soon as he could meet with suitable employment. He com- 
municated this resolution to his sister at Woodhouse near 
Sheffield, and returned thither, having given up his com- 
mission, in 1796. 

His mind was now opened to embrace the principles of 
Friends, and he attended our meetings at Woodhouse. This 
excited the ridicule of some of his nearest relatives and com- 
panions, whose astonishment was great at the thorough change 
that soon appeared in him. The work was not suffered to be 
long on the wheel ; the effect was decisive and permanent, 
affording a display of Divine power, not less remarkable in this 
rapid conversion, than where there has been a more gradual 
accomplishment of its purposes. 

He made an application to be admitted into membership 
with Friends : and after a suitable time, his request was com- 
plied with, in the Second Month, 1799. 

It is worthy of notice, that but little, if any, instrumental 
means was concerned in this remarkable change. Whilst 
attending the small and generally silent meetings of Wood- 
house, Daniel Wheeler had felt the truth of our principles, 
and had yielded to the conviction. His was a stability and 
growth in religion of no ordinary measure. In a very few 
years after his convincement he was appointed an overseer, and 
he was indeed a bright example of zeal, sincerity, and love to 
his friends, in that responsible station. 

An opening to begin business in a small way at Sheffield 
presenting itself was readily embraced ; and in this, as in his 
future undertakings, the Divine blessing appeared to attend 
him, and to crown his exertions with success. 

In the Sixth Month, 1800, he was married to Jane Brady, 



BALBY MONTHLY MEETING. IX 

the daughter of Thomas and Rachel Brady of Thorne, in whom 
he found a helpmate indeed, of sound judgment, guileless and 
faithful. He remarks in a letter written after her death, ' the 
heavenly Master's love has never ceased to follow us through 
all the vicissitudes of time, during a life, not a little chequered, 
for a term of more than thirty-two years and a half, when He 
was pleased to deprive me of my greatest earthly treasure, and 
to take back that which He gave : but it was His own, I verily 
believe, even His, — the same who enabled me to say, in the 
moment of my greatest distress, " Blessed be the name of 
the Lord. 1 " 

Asa tradesman, he was diligent in business; he was also 
" fervent in spirit ; serving the Lord." By the strictest 
attention to integrity in all his dealings, he gained the esteem 
of all with whom he had to do. Yet it was easy to see where 
his heart was fixed : his Bible was his favourite companion, and 
the few minutes that could be spared at a time amidst his daily 
concerns, were spent in the perusal of the inspired writings. 

For sometime previous to 1813, the impression had become 
strong upon his mind, that he would be called to advocate the 
cause of truth and righteousness upon the earth. Very deep 
were his conflicts, and very close was his application of soul to 
his heavenly Father for strength to perform his will ; and it 
was his practice, when he lived in the country, to withdraw 
early in the morning to a small field near his house, for the 
purpose of religious retirement and prayer. 

He was very watchful lest he should be led away from the 
grace vouchsafed to him ; frequently refraining from conver- 
sation apparently innocent, and in which he delighted, lest at 
any unguarded moment he might grieve that Holy Spirit, whom 
he felt to be his comforter and guide. He was recorded as an 
approved minister in the Sixth Month, 1816. 

About this period our friend was made sensible that some 
sacrifice would be called for on his part, as an evidence of his 
gratitude for the unutterable mercy and great condescension 
of the Almighty, in having plucked him as a brand from the 
burning ; and he saw clearly that it was indispensable for him, 
as much as might be, to separate himself from the world and 



X TESTIMONY OF 

the things of the world, by declining his prosperous trade, and 
retiring with his family into a smaller compass. The extent of 
his business was becoming a burden. He felt the force of our 
Lord's declaration : " Ye cannot serve God and mammon ;" 
and his obedience to the requirement was full and unreserved. 
' Not,' said he, ' that I have acquired a sufficiency, without 
doing something for my livelihood ; far from it. I have still 
a prospect of maintaining my family comfortably with care 
and industry, leaving the event to Him who knows the thoughts 
and intents of the heart. I have no desire to accumulate 
riches for my children, the blessing seldom attends it ; and 
the baneful effects thereof are too often visible, even in our 
Society. -1 

His mind was thus disposed to withdraw from his concerns 
in trade, and he was in a state of waiting preparation, when an 
inquiry was made, on behalf of the Emperor Alexander of 
Russia for a member of the Society of Friends, to superintend 
some works of drainage and of agriculture in the neighbourhood 
of Petersburg. Daniel Wheeler offered himself for the ser- 
vice, and finally accepted the appointment. 

On the 18th of Sixth Month, 1 818, he attended the meeting at 
Sheffield, when he took an affectionate leave of Friends there. 
He told them that nothing less than apprehended duty could 
have induced him to take the present step ; that four years 
ago it was clearly intimated to him, that it would be required 
of him to remove into Russia ; and though the prospect was 
very trying to the natural part, yet endeavouring to obtain 
resignation, he had been favoured to feel sweet peace. His 
mind had been deeply affected while sitting among them, in 
viewing the prospect before him, when he would be deprived of 
the precious privilege of thus assembling with his Friends ; 
that he wished none might suppose his case a hard one, for he 
thought that there was scarcely a person on the face of the 
earth, who had more largely partaken of the gracious dealings 
and protecting care of a merciful Providence. Twice he had 
been preserved from shipwreck, — he had been favoured to 
escape the devouring pestilence when numbers were falling 
around him ; and, when many were destroyed by the cruel 



BALBY MONTHLY MEETING. XI 

hand of war, his life had indeed been marvellously spared. 
And surely the Almighty Being, whose arm had been so often 
extended for his preservation, when he was running headlong 
in the paths of error, had a right to dispose of the residue of 
his days, and was worthy of obedience. 

He shortly after embarked for Petersburg, and took charge 
of the works committed to him. These operations appear to 
have been conducted successfully, much to the improvement of 
the extensive estates, and to the satisfaction of the parties con- 
cerned. There is also ground to hope, that his labours will at 
a future day prove a blessing to that empire. 

On account of circumstances connected with the religious 
profession of the country, the gospel services of our dear friend 
were much circumscribed to private interviews ; and in the 
line of his religious duty, he addressed the English residents in 
that city. The uniformly guarded and consistent life and con- 
versation, the unbending integrity which no self-interest could 
warp, — no influence from without could suppress, will be long- 
had in honourable remembrance in that land, to the glory of 
that Lord and Master ; whom diligently to serve and faithfully 
to obey, was more to our dear friend than the smiles of princes, 
or all that the world could bestow. 

Daring the abode of Daniel Wheeler in Russia, he was 
careful to keep up in his house the regular attendance of meet- 
ings for worship, twice on First days, and on Fifth days. An 
orderly and regular attention to the reading of the Scriptures 
was daily observed in his family ; nor did they omit the fre- 
quent perusal of the writings of Friends. 

For the distant members of his own Monthly Meeting he 
evinced his concern, by addressing them once a year, and occa- 
sionally at other times ; putting them in remembrance of the 
things which belonged unto their peace. 

In the Fourth Month, 1825, our friend Daniel Wheeler was 
liberated by his Monthly Meeting to attend the Yearly Meeting 
in Dublin, and for other religious engagements in Ireland. 
He was also concerned in Third Month, 1831, to visit Friends 
in Devonshire and Cornwall, as well as the inhabitants of the 
Scilly Islands. These services appear to have been accom- 



Xll TESTIMONY OF 

plished, much to the satisfaction of his Friends, and to the 
comfort of his own mind. 

At the end of 1832, whilst he was confined by indisposition 
at the house of a friend in Norfolk, the mournful intelligence 
arrived from Russia of the death of his beloved wife. This 
was one of the greatest trials that could have befallen him ; 
but the Almighty hand was near to comfort and sustain him ; 
and he was mercifully strengthened to say, "The Lord gave, and 
the Lord hath taken away ; blessed be the name of the Lord." 
A little before this he had laid before his Friends at their 
Monthly Meeting in Ninth Month 1832, his prospect of paying 
a visit in gospel love to the Islands of the Pacific Ocean, Van 
Diem en's Land, and New South Wales, in which, as well as 
in the Quarterly Meeting and the Morning Meeting of minis- 
ters and elders in London, he had their full concurrence and 
earnest desires for his preservation. 

For so very extensive a service, the necessary arrangements 
occupied a considerable time ; these being at length completed, 
he sailed from the Thames the 13th of Eleventh Month, 1833. 
The vessel was proceeding down the English Channel, when 
on the 21st they were overtaken by a heavy storm, which 
induced them to take shelter off the Isle of Wight ; and from 
adverse winds, and other causes, they were not able to take 
their final departure until the 15th of Third Month, 1834. 
He had been anxious to set out, and this detention was a 
great exercise to his faith. Yet, prompt in his movements as 
our dear friend was accustomed to be, when his duty was clearly 
defined, his example is strikingly instructive, in the patience 
and the stedfast faith with which he would wait until the true 
light so shone upon his path, as to point out not only the way, 
but the right time to move in it ; and closely as he had been 
tried on this occasion, he was at last permitted to see and 
acknowledge, that he had not been detained one day too long. 

The voyage out was a very tempestuous one, but he was 
preserved through all danger; and, accompanied by his son 
Charles, arrived safely at his destination. 

Amongst those distant islands he was long and acceptably 
occupied. Yet he was often made sensible, preparatory to 



BALBY MONTHLY MEETING. Xlll 

attending meetings, and other religious services, that he had. 
no ability or qualification of his own, until he was humbled as 
in the dust ; when after patiently waiting to be endowed with 
strength from on high, he has been enabled so to minister, that 
the Divine power has overshadowed the assembly ; softening 
and contriting these poor islanders ; filling their eyes with 
tears, and their hearts with love, until they could scarcely 
allow him to leave them. This arduous service, extended 
through the long period of nearly four years, was at length 
brought to a close ; and he returned safely to England. 

In the published accounts of our valued Friend's labours in 
these distant regions, there is abundant evidence of his care to 
direct his hearers to the Great Teacher and Sanctifier, and to 
wean them from a dependence on instrumental aid ; and it is 
gratifying to observe, that, in preaching the truth boldly, 
without respect of persons, he also gained the good- will of the 
resident missionaries, who received him with uniform kindness, 
and gave him on his departure very ample testimonials of their 
approval. 

It may not be unprofitable in this place to notice the exem- 
plary care which our departed Friend had exercised over his 
tender offspring, to train them up in the nurture and admo- 
nition of the Lord : that they might experience a growth in 
grace, was the fervent desire of his heart. He would rise at 
an early hour to read the Scriptures to them, and at night he 
would quietly withdraw from the room, when the children were 
gone to rest, to endeavour to direct their youthful minds in 
reverent approach to their heavenly Father. 

The blessing of Him who alone was able to preserve them, 
and render them meet for His kingdom, we believe was not 
wanting. For when, within a short period of each other, three 
of these young people were called from their afflicted parent to 
exchange time for eternity, he had the consolation of knowing 
that their end was crowned by a humble and confiding trust in 
redeeming mercy. 

Had it been in the ordering- of the Divine will, after so Ions 

ft 5 O 

a traveller in distant regions, and sensible of declining strength 
our dear Friend would have thankfully settled down for a season 



XIV TESTIMONY OF 

of rest. Hence it is scarcely in words to express the sympathy 
that was felt for him, when he informed his Monthly Meeting, 
on the return of his certificate for the South Seas, that it was 
required of him at once to set out for the American Continent, 
to visit more especially the cities on the coasts. At this time 
his son Charles Wheeler, his endeared companion amidst the 
perils and fatigues of the Southern hemisphere, was in a critical 
state of health, and for his sake his father might have felt 
anxious to delay his voyage. But so devoted was he to his 
Master's service, and so faithful to apprehend duty, that the 
yearnings of a father's heart could not stay him, nor call forth 
a repining word. He proceeded to America, and appeared to 
have pretty much carried out the work required of him, when 
he found himself released to pay a visit to the remnant of his 
family, who had now removed on account of Charles's declining 
state, to the more genial climate of France. At St. Grermains, 
near Paris, he witnessed the peaceful close of his dear son. He 
once more attended his own Monthly Meeting in Third Month, 
18-iO, and soon after sailed from this country for the last time, 
for New York. On preparing for his voyage out, he writes, 
' But now that the time draweth nigh, I feel more than ever 
the need of the prayers of the faithful for preservation and 
support in this the evening sacrifice about to be offered, when 
the natural strength of the poor body, and perhaps that of the 
mind also is weakened, as days have multiplied upon me, and 
vears have increased ; and, I think I never felt more at the 
prospect of being again severed from my beloved children r 1 
adding, ' Certain it is that nothing short of implicit obedience 
to what we believe to be a divine requirement will be accepted ; 
and nothing can so fully bring our love to the test, as the having 
to leave all and forsake all, without making any reserve for 
ourselves.'' 

A week after he sailed, Daniel Wheeler was taken ill, and 
continued so for the remainder of the voyage. The complaint 
appeared to be a cold attended with fever, and as he was unable 
to lie down from difficulty of breathing, his strength rapidly 
declined. He received every attention that could be rendered 
on ship-board, for he bore the respect and regard of all. When 



BALBY MONTHLY MEETING. XV 

he arrived at New York, he was conducted on shore by kind 
Friends there, and further medical advice was obtained. The 
opinion formed of his situation was decidedly unfavourable. 
On being told that he was thought to be in a very critical 
state, he said : ' All has been done that could be done ; — only 
write to my dear children, how it is.' The work has been 
going on with the day.' All I want is quietness, it is a great 
thing to be clear from pain. 1 ' Love to all my friends on 
this side the Atlantic as well as the other. 1 ' I want nothing 
but the love of my heavenly Father, and I witness it. The 
Lord is good to them who love and fear His name : great things 
hath He done for me ; things so wonderfully marvellous, that 
they could hardly be believed, were I to tell of them. 1 

He remarked to a friend ; As to himself, he had no doubt : 
he had the same faith that had been with him through life, 
and which was founded upon the gospel of Christ, which 
enabled him to say with the Apostle, " nevertheless I live ; 
yet not I, but Christ liveth in me : and the life which I now 
live in the flesh, I live by the faith of the Son of God, who 
loved me, and gave himself for me. 11 

All that the most assiduous care and tenderness, aided by 
medical skill, could do, proved unavailing to restore him. His 
exhausted frame gradually sunk under the disorder, and he 
quietly passed away on the 12th of Sixth Month, 1840, aged 
sixty-eight years ; having been a faithful labourer in the gospel 
vineyard above twenty- four years. 

The Christian warfare was thus ended. Full of years, his 
loins girded about, and his light burning, he was as one that 
waiteth for his Lord. 

We see abundant cause to exalt His holy name, who thus 
led forth our beloved friend, — who preserved him through 
many perils by sea and land — who conferred upon him strength 
in time of need, and sufficient qualification for His service ; — 
and who, in His own appointed time, we reverently believe, 
hath called him in redeeming love " to an inheritance incor- 
ruptible, and undefiled, and that fadeth not away. 11 

Signed in and on behalf of the Meeting aforesaid, held at 
Sheffield, the 3rd of Twelfth Month, 1840. 



TESTIMONY OP 



A TESTIMONY 

Of the Monthly Meeting of Friends of New York, con- 
cerning our Friend Daniel Wheeler. 

' At the Yearly Meeting of Friends held in New York, by 
adjournments, from the 24th of Fifth Month, 1841, to the 
28th of the same inclusive. 

' A Testimony of the Monthly Meeting of New York, con- 
cerning our late valued, and beloved friend Daniel Wheeler of 
Great Britain, approved by the Quarterly Meeting of West- 
bury, and by the Meeting for Sufferings, was read : — 

' This tribute of affection and of justice to his memory was 
very satisfactory to this meeting ; the Testimony was directed 
to be recorded, and the Clerk was requested to cause a copy of 
it, together with a copy of this minute, to be forwarded to the 
Monthly Meeting of Balby in England, of which our dear 
friend was a member.' 

Our beloved friend Daniel Wheeler of England, having 
finished his labours in the ministry of the gospel, and ended 
his days in this city, this meeting feels it to be incumbent 
upon it to make public some account of his religious services 
in this land, of the progress of his illness, and of his interesting 
expressions, when he laid down his head in peace amongst us. 

He first arrived in this city on a religious visit to Friends 
in this country, with certificates of unity from the meetings to 
which he belonged, on the 1st of the First Month, 183.9. 

During the following spring and summer, he attended the 
Yearly Meetings of Philadelphia, Virginia, New York, and 
New England. In the Eighth Month, he visited the British 
provinces of New Brunswick and Nova Scotia, and in the 
Ninth Month attended the Yearly Meeting of Ohio. During 



NEW YORK MONTHLY MEETING. 



his religious engagements amongst us, he was careful to seek 
for the guidance of the Holy Spirit, and to move no faster 
nor further than his way was thus opened. Hence his 
preaching was sound, weighty, and edifying, ministering grace 
to the hearers, and is fresh in our minds, accompanied by deep 
and feeling unity with his religious services. In all his move- 
ments he was remarkably watchful to wait for that Divine 
direction, which had so often and so remarkably preserved him 
in many seasons of peril, during his extensive travels by sea 
and land. 

In consequence of intelligence of the declining health of his 
son Charles, he sailed for England on the 1st of the Tenth 
Month, and found him in France, where he had gone with the 
hope of deriving benefit from the climate, and had the satis- 
faction of continuing with him until the peaceful close of his 
life ; after which our dear friend again embarked for this coun- 
try, and arrived in New York on the 28th day of the Fourth 
Month, 1840. 

During the voyage he was taken sick, and was so ill on 
arrival, that he was removed with difficulty to the house of our 
friend John Clapp. On the following day he was increasingly 
ill, and remarked to the physician that he could not endure 
another such a day. 

On the morning of the 30th, it appeared from his rapid 
respiration and the coldness of his extremities, as if he was 
sinking fast, and it was thought proper to inform him of it : 
he replied, * All has been done that could be done ; only write 
to my dear children how it is : the work has been going on 
with the day. Love to all my friends, on this side the 
Atlantic as well as the other. It is a great thing to be clear 
of pain. I desire nothing but the love of my heavenly Father, 
and I witness it.' 

He revived, however, in the afternoon, so as to write a few 
lines to his children. On the following day, he had returns of 
oppression. On the 3rd of the Fifth Month, after being bled, 
he said, ' Without blood there is no cleansing ;' upon which 
one ef the physicians remarked, " It is the blood of Jesus that 
cleanseth us from all our sins." 'Yes,' Daniel replied,' but 

b 



TESTIMONY OF 



not in our natural unrcgenerate state. If we walk in the 
light as he is in the light, then I believe it will cleanse us from 
our sins : yes,' he added with much emphasis, ' I know it.' 

In the evening he said he had had a hard struggle, and at 
one time he did not know but it was the cold sweat of death. 

On the morning of the 6th, he called for his clothes, and 
having given directions for the disposition of some papers 
which they contained, he said, ' Now I have done with the 
things of this world;' and further observed, that he had no 
wish to live, but for the sake of his family, and that the Lord 
Jesus might live in him ; that he had been his guide for many 
years, and he had declared his name unto thousands : that he 
had no hope but in Him, and he was the same Lord over ail : 
that it was not the prospect of immediate release, that led him 
to speak thus, but it was in his heart, and he must say it 
while he had words ; with much more, in a very impressive 
manner, and with a strong voice. 

Towards evening his mind appeared to overflow with adora- 
tion of the mercy and goodness of his dear Lord and Master, 
which had constantly attended him in his pilgrimage, and 
crowned him with loving-kindness and tender mercies. 

He briefly recapitulated what had occurred since he left 
America, alluding to the consolation he had received at the 
death of his son Charles ; so that he had to rejoice in the 
midst of grief, saying, " The Lord is good to them that love 
and fear his name : great things hath he done for me ;" things 
so wonderfully marvellous that they would hardly be believed 
were I to tell of them. If I have experienced any shortness 
in my journey Zionward, it has been on my side, and not the 
Lord's ; for he has been faithful, and his promises have been 
and remain to be, yea and amen, for ever. Whilst I was on 
ship-board, and thought by some to be nigh unto death, how 
did the Lord appear for my help and consolation ! and since I 
have been in this chamber, how has he appeared for my com- 
fort in the night season, and I have been enabled to sing- 
hymns of praises and thanksgiving unto him ! When the 
ship made her soundings I made my soundings, on that Rock 
which has never failed me, whose foundation is from everlasting 



NEW YORK MONTHLY MEETING. XIX 

to everlasting. I saw that I should be safely landed, though 
extremely weak in body, and was enabled to say, should the 
Lord see meet to raise me up, and strengthen me, still to show 
forth his wonderful works to the children of men, or cut short 
the work in righteousness, Thy will, O God, and not mine be 
done. I do not see how the end will be.'' 

9th. — He passed a distressing night, and one time said, ' I 
did not know whether I should live to see the light of another 
day. 1 

11th. — He said he felt the Saviour to be near him, every 
hour of the day. From this period there was some apparent 
improvement, and for a time he was more comfortable ; but 
the disease not being removed, his weakness again increased, 
and on the 29th he was very feeble. At one time he said, as 
to himself, he had no doubt : he had the same faith which had 
been with him through life, and which was founded upon the 
gospel of Christ, which enabled him to say with the apostle, 
" Nevertheless I live ; yet not I, but Christ liveth in me ; and 
the life which I now live in the flesh, I live by the faith of 
the Son of Grod, who loved me, and gave himself for me." 

12th of Sixth Month in the morning, he said, ' Perhaps this 
day will end all your cares and troubles.' In the afternoon 
he said, ' It is very doubtful whether I shall be permitted to 
return to England.'' In the evening his breathing became 
more laboured : after some time he was incapable of being 
aroused, and a little after twelve o'clock at night, he quietly 
passed away, in the 69th year of his age. 

Throughout all his extreme weakness and great distress. 
that faith and trust in the mercies and promises of his dear 
Redeemer, which had been so remarkably exemplified during 
his eventful life, remained firm and unshaken ; and that all 
things would work together for good, seemed to be the pre- 
vailing covering of his mind throughout his illness. 

He had ceased from his many and extensive labours ; and we 
feel an assurance that he has entered into that rest, which is 
prepared for the people of Grod. 

His remains were conveyed to Friends 1 Meeting-house, in 
Orchard-street, where a large and solemn meeting was held ; in 



XX TESTIMONY OF NEW YORK MONTHLY MEETING. 

which, testimony was borne to the sufficiency of that Divine 
power, by which he was prepared for usefulness in the church, 
and made instrumental in promoting the cause of vital Christi- 
anity in the world. After which the corpse was followed to the 
grave by many Friends and others, and interred in Friends' 
burial-ground, the loth of the same month. 

Signed by direction, and on behalf of the Monthly Meeting 
aforesaid, held in New York, 7th of Fourth Month, 1841. 






CONTENTS. 



CHAPTER I. 

PAGE. 



Introductory remarks by the Author — His parentage, education— 
Early becomes an orphan — Enters the merchant service, then the 
royal navy — Is paid off— Enters the army ..... 1 



CHAPTER II. 

The Author goes to Plymouth, thence with his regiment to Ireland 
— Kilkenny — Dublin — Harassing service — Personal danger — 
Recruits — Liverpool — Bristol — Southampton — Embarks thence 
with troops for the campaigu in Holland 14 



CHAPTER III. 

Nimeguen— Many dangers— Attacked by fever — Hospital treatment, 
heavy mortality among the sick — Disasters of the British army — 
RetreatHo Bremen — Returns to England 25 



CHAPTER IV. 

Sails with his regiment to the "West Indies — Remarkable preserva- 
tion — Serious impressions — Returns to England— Becomes con- 
vinced of Friends' principles — Received into membership in 
1797— settles in business and marries— Acknowledged a minister 
in 1816 38 



CHAPTER V. 

Prospect of duty in Russia— Offers himself to the Russian govern- 
ment to superintend agricultural improvements near Petersburg 
— Voyage to Cronstadt, 1817 — Interview with Prince Galitzin at 
Petersburg, also with the Emperor— Voyage homeward . . 49 



CONTENTS. 



CHAPTER VI. 

TAGL-. 

Removes with his wife and family to Russia —Voyage thither, 1818 — 
Settlement at Ochta near Petersburg— William Allen and Stephen 
Grellet— Agricultural success — Visit from the Emperor, &c. . 66 



CHAPTER VII. 

Severe -winter of 1S19-20 — His affectionate address to Balhy Monthly 
Meeting— Sundry letters to his friends in England— Visit from 
the Emperor Alexander 78 



CHAPTER VIII. 

Address to Balby Monthly Meeting in 1S22 and in 1823— Visit from 

the Emperor, <xc— Great flood at Petersburg . . . .97 



CHAPTER IX. 

Visits England, 1825 — Returns to Russia — Death of the Emperor 
Alexander, and occurrences consequent thereon — Address to 
Balby Monthly Meeting, 1826— Extensive flres, &c. . . .114 



CHAPTER X. 

Address to Balby Monthly Meeting, 1827 — The Emperor Nicholas 
— Address to Balby Monthly Meeting, 1828— General Corres- 
pondence 132 



CHAPTER XL 

Visits England -with his wife in 1830— His affectionate address to the 
members of the Church of England — Religious visit into Devon- 
shire, Cornwall, the Scilly Isles, &c 163 



CHAPTER XII. 

Return to Russia, 1831 — Cholera at Petersburg, &c. — Epistle to 

Friends of York Quarterly Meeting, 1832, &c. . . . .179 



CHAPTER XIII. 

PAGE. 

Prospect of distant religious service— Resigns his appointment in 
Russia— Leaves his family, and sails for England, 1832 — His pros- 
pect of visiting in gospel love the inhabitants of some of the South 
Sea Islands, &c. laid before his friends 196 



CHAPTER XIV. 

Correspondence — Attends Norwich Quarterly Meeting— Receives 
intelligence of the decease of his wife and of the severe illness 
of others in his family— Letters to his absent children . . .211 



CHAPTER XV. 



Journey to Russia in 1833— His return, and preparations for his long 
voyage — Sails from the Thames the 13th of Eleventh Month, 1833 
—Detention off the Isle of Wight from adverse gales— Letters and 
extracts from his Journal 229 



CHAPTER XVI. 

Departure from the British Channel, with a fair wind, 15th of Third 

Month, 1834— Voyage to Rio Janeiro 246 



CHAPTER XVII. 

Departure from Rio Janeiro — Proceed by the Cape of Good Hope for 
Van Diemen's Land — Heavy seas and stormy weather — Remark- 
able preservation — Continuance of stormy weather — Lightening 
the vessel — Plurricane— Frequently lying to — Tremendous storms 



CHAPTER XVIII. 

Van Diemen's Land — Anchor off Hobart Town — Meeting with James 
Backhouse and George W. Walker — Aborigines— Illness of Daniel 
Wheeler — Sail for Botany Bay— Arrival at Sydney — Interview 
with the governor — Public meeting at Sydney — Religious engage- 
ments 282 



CONTENTS. 



CHAPTER XIX. 

PAGE. 

Sail from Sydney— Arrive off Norfolk Island — Parting with James 
Backhouse and George Washington Walker — Sail for the Society 
Islands — Equinoctial gale — Enter the torrid zone— Maitea— Arrive 
at Tahiti — First interview with the natives — Visit from the king — 
Prohibition of ardent spirits — Meeting of the missionaries and 
natives at Papaoa 297 



CHAPTER XX. 

Tahiti — Visit of chiefs — The young king — Meeting for sailors— Distri- 
bution of tracts, bibles, &c. — Temperance ships — Introduction of 
ardent spirits — Visit to the schools — Attend the native meeting — 
Visitors on board — John Davies — Meeting on board — Importance 
of translating and circulating the Scriptures — Tahitian council — 
Native meeting 311 



CHAPTER XXI. 

Visit to Bunaauia — Native meeting— Kindness of the principal chief — 
Point Venus — Perilous situation— Meeting at Point Venus — Visit 
to Papara — Beautiful scenery— School at Teahupoo — Meeting of 
the natives— Letter from the native congregation — Native meeting 
at Papara — Return to the Henry Freeling — Letter from the Queen 
of Tahiti . . . 332 



CHAPTER XXII. 

Set out for Tautira— A native ' feeding'— Meetings at Tautira— visit to 
Hitea — Return to the Henry Freeling— Obstructions to the pro- 
gress of religion— Visit to the Queen— Meeting for the white 
residents on board the Henry Freeling— Letters from home— Dis- 
tribution of books 352 



CHAPTER XXIII. 

Visit from missionaries- Baron de Thierry— Meeting in the chapel — . 
Sail for Eimeo— Letters from home— Arrive at Eimeo— School- 
Native meeting . . . . 375 



CHAPTER XXIV. 

PAGE. 

Eimeo — Meetings with the natives — A Marai — Return to the Henry 
Freeling — Native meeting and with the mission families — Sail for 
Huahine — Prohibition of spirits there — Social meeting of the 
authorities — Distribution of tracts— Sail for Raiatea . . .389 



CHAPTER XXV. 

Raiatea — Native meeting — A place of human sacrifice— Bolabola — 
Desolating effects of intemperance— Meeting with the natives — 
Meeting with the rebel chief and his idolatrous party — Wretched- 
ness of the inhabitants — Distribution of clothing — Sail for the 
Sandwich Islands— Flint's Island— Oahu 411 



CHAPTER XXVI. 

Sandwich Islands — Anchor in the harbour of Honolulu— Native 
meeting — Visit from the King— Meeting at the mariners' chapel 
— Distribution of Tracts, &c. — Native meeting — Visit of the 
governor of Hawaii — Half-caste girls' school — Meeting at the 
chapel — Native marriages— Meeting at the chapel — Native girls' 
school 439 



CHAPTER XXVII. 

Interview with the Queen— Public meeting — Half-caste boys' school 
— Address to the rulers of the Sandwich Islands — Visit from the 

* mission families — Meeting at the chapel — An infidel ship's com- 
pany — Appointed meeting — Departure from Honolulu — Hawaii 
— Anchor in Kalakakua Bay — Public meeting — Interesting oppor- 
tunity with the mission family — Proceed to Kailua — Native 
meetings — Visit of the King— Departure for Waimea 



CHAPTER XXVIII. 

AVaimea — Native meeting — Sail for Koloa — Volcano — Byron's Bay — 
Native meetings — Sail with the mission families for Maui — 
Island of Maui— Anchor at Lahaina — Proceed to "Wairuku — 
School — Meetings at Lahaina— Sail for Oahu . . . 500 



CONTENTS. 



CHAPTER XXIX. 



TAGE. 

Oaliu— Annual meeting of the missionaries — Meeting with the 
members of the mission — Addressed by the senior missionary — 
Sail for Tauai— Native meeting at Koloa — "Waimea — Oppression 
of the natives— Final departure from the Sandwich Islands . 520 



CHAPTER XXX. 

Re-cross the equator— Hervey Islands — Visit the island of Rarotonga 
— Friendly reception — School — Native meetings— Kindness of 
the natives— Sail for the Friendly Isles 541 



CHAPTER XXXI. 

Vavau — Wesleyan missionaries— Native meetings at Neiafu, Feletoa, 
and Haalaufuli — Appointed meeting for seamen — Visit to the 
Island of Otea — Meetings at Hihifo — At Matika— Embarkation 
of the mission families— Sail for Lifuka .... 562 



CHAPTER XXXII. 

Island of Lifuka— Native meeting— Distribution of Bibles, &c— Visit 
of the King — meeting with the missionaries — Sail for Tongataboo 
— Anchor off the settlement at Nukualofa — Letter from the Wes- 
leyan missionaries — Distribution of clothing and medicines — 
Visit to the heathen settlement at Mua— Restraining influence of 
the missionaries — Native meeting at Nukualofa . . • 587 



CHAPTER XXXIII. 

Tongataboo — Meeting with the foreigners — Parting interviews with 
the natives and missionaries — Sail from the Friendly Islands — 
New Zealand— Anchor in the Bay of Islands — Visit the mission 
family — Native meeting at Koua-Koua — Desolating effects of 
intercourse with the shipping . . . . . . . 613 



CHAPTER XXXIV. 

PAGE. 

New Zealand — Visit to the mission-station at "Waimate— "War among 
the natives— Meeting with the mission families — Distribution of 
tracts— Native meetings at Korarareka — Address to the mission- 
aries—Sail from the Bay of Islands— Remarks on the character of 
the New Zealanders— Anchor off Sydney — Religious engagements 
there — Return to England ....... 635 



CHAPTER XXXV. 

Attends the Yearly Meeting in London, 1838— His prospect of reli- 
gious service in America — Visits his family in Russia, Eighth 
Month, 1838— Sails to New York, First Month, 1839— Travels in 
the United States— Attends Yearly Meetings of Philadelphia, 
Virginia and New York ........ 687 



CHAPTER XXXVI. 

Attends New England Yearly Meeting, &c. — Visits Nova Scotia and 
Canada — Returns to Philadelphia and proceeds to Ohio ; attends 
the Yearly Meeting at Mount Pleasant — Returns to England 709 



CHAPTER XXXVII. 

Alarming illness of his son Charles then in France, Daniel Wheeler 
arrives before the death of Charles— Returns to England — Again 
sails for New York— Last illness and death .... 727 



APPENDIX. 



Letters of the Empress Elizabeth to her mother, relative to the last 
illness and death of her husband, the Emperor Alexander of 

749 



CONTENTS. 



PAGE. 

Extracts from the account of the last illness of Jane, wife of Daniel 
Wheeler, at Shoosharry, in Russia, which is inserted in the 
Annual Monitor for 1S35 749 



Statement respecting the land in the neighbourhood of Petersburg, 

and its improvement under the care of Dauiel Wheeler . .751 



Extracts from the letters of Charles Wheeler, relative to the South 

Sea Islands, addressed to his family .... 752 




Draim & F.norEived bv J. * C Ws 



MEMOIRS OF DANIEL WHEELER. 



CHAPTER I. 



INTRODUCTORY REMARKS BY THE AUTHOR HIS PARENTAGE, EDUCA- 
TION EARLY BECOMES AN ORPHAN ENTERS THE MERCHANT 

SERVICE, THEN THE ROYAL NAVY IS PAID OFF ENTERS THE 

ARMY. 

Having frequently derived much valuable instruction, from 
the perusal of the narratives of those who have long since 
exchanged an earthly for an heavenly inheritance, the thought 
has at times occurred to me, that a short memoir of my own 
life, — however evil " the days of the years of my pilgrimage"" 
have been, — might, under the Divine blessing, be made 
in like manner useful to others. But perhaps, from the 
humiliating conviction, that days as without number have 
been miserably devoted to madness and folly, in forgetfulness 
of a long-suffering Lord God, who is abundant in goodness and 
truth, — the guilty mind would gladly hide the remembrance of 
these for ever in oblivion, and pass over them in silent abhor- 
rence ; or, conscious that there yet remains a stubborn and 
unsubdued residue of human corruptions, — a sense of unwor- 
thiness and unfitness may have hitherto operated to retard the 
undertaking ; lest the creature should in any degree be exalted, 
to whom shame only with blushing and confusion of face must 
ever belong. 

Whatever may thus far have impeded any attempt of the 
kind, I am induced, not as a matter of choice, but as a duty, 
now in the sixty-first year of my age, to commence the work ; 
humbly imploring the assistance of Him, who " knoweth the 



2 CHAPTER I. [1771 tO 

thoughts and intents of the heart," to enable me, as far as it 
may be carried forward, to accomplish it to his own praise and 
glory, as a faithful testimony for the advancement of our holy 
Redeemer's kingdom in the hearts of my fellow-creatures. 

Although no man can possibly be excusable for having done 
wrong, because others may have been as bad as himself, or 
even worse, — yet the magnitude of the present undertaking 
would, in my view, be diminished, if on reviewing writings 
of a similar kind, any thing like resemblance, or a parallel 
case could be discovered. But, alas ! all that have gone 
before, appear to me to have travelled a much shorter time 
than myself, in the broad way that leadeth to destruc- 
tion. Many have yielded again and again to the temp- 
tations of the unwearied and insidious enemy of mankind, and 
have been long in the fetters of sin and death ; yet I feel to 
have surpassed all others, that I have read any account of, in 
having drawn " iniquity as with cords of vanity, and sin as it 
were with a cart rope." I can adopt as my own, I hope in a 
degree of true abasement of self, the acknowledgment of the 
apostle, — " this is a faithful saying, and worthy of all accepta- 
tion, that Christ Jesus came into the world to save sinners, 
of whom I am chief." 

I was born in London, the 27th day of the Eleventh 
Month, 1771 : my parents, William and Sarah Wheeler, were 
members of the established religion of the country, and strict 
adherents to all its rites and ceremonies ; and although not 
particularly conspicuous as being more religious than others of 
the same class, yet they were highly esteemed and respected, 
by a large circle of acquaintance for uprightness and integrity, 
— of which there are at this day many living witnesses. 
They had a large family of children, whose minds they 
endeavoured to imbue at an early age with the fear of their 
great Creator, — taking them regularly to attend the per- 
formance of public worship, and also reading the Holy 
Scriptures in the family at home ; portions of which I well 
remember reading aloud when very young. 

By a document now in my possession, it appears that until 
some time after my father's marriage, he was not in any line 



1792.] CHAPTER I. 3 

of business ; but afterwards, to meet the demand occasioned 
by a great increase of family, he commenced the wine trade 
in a select way. To enter into minute family details is not 
the present object, nor is it within my reach, being too young, 
when deprived of both parents, to be able to speak from know- 
ledge of my own. I have but a very indistinct recollection 
of my father's person, not being quite seven years old when 
he died, at the age of forty-three years. Some time before his 
death, our once large family of children was reduced to five only, 
of whom I was the youngest. We then lived in London, at 
the Bond Street end of Lower Grosvenor Street ; but those 
parts of the premises which looked into Bond Street, were 
occupied by another person, as tenant to my father. 

My mother was endowed with a large capacity, combining 
great sweetness with firmness of mind : and although an 
entire stranger to every kind of business, she persevered in an 
extraordinary manner after the death of her beloved husband, 
in carrying on the trade for the support of the family ; and 
so long as she lived, it continued increasingly to flourish, 
our eldest brother being her assistant in the business. When 
she was attacked by the illness that deprived her family 
of their endeared and only surviving parent, I was sent for 
home on the mournful occasion, being then at a boarding- 
school at Parson's Green, near Fulham. Of the loss of such 
a mother, I was very sensible, being about twelve years 
old at the time ; and as I had a much greater personal 
knowledge of her worth and solicitous affection, than I could 
possibly have had of my dear father, the event of losing her 
made a deeper and more lasting impression. I had had much of 
her maternal society, and had largely partaken of her constant 
parental and tender care, of which, perhaps, from being the 
youngest of the family, I had more than an ordinary share. 

A clergyman related to my mother by marriage, who resided 
on a living in the West Riding of Yorkshire, had the whole 
management of our family affairs, being left sole executor. He 
came up to London at this eventful moment ; and after having 
examined into the state of things, it was judged eligible that 
the business should still be carried on for the benefit of us all, 

b2 



4 CHAPTER I. [1771 tO 

by our eldest brother ; whose character at that period, and 
known capability, seemed fully to warrant such a decision. 
Shortly after, I was sent again to school ; and our little family 
band, although lamentably reduced, still remained awhile longer 
unbroken. 

For a few months after this great bereavement, all things 
went on as well as could be expected with our solitary family ; 
but the deep affliction into which it had been plunged, by 
degrees began to wear away, although for a time it seemed as 
if it could scarcel}'- be borne, much less forgotten. Our brother, 
on whose conduct the welfare of the rest greatly depended, thus 
left without parental control, became less and less attentive to 
business ; and gradually sliding into bad habits, and mixing 
with evil associates, gave way to every excess and indulgence 
in his power. From his extravagance and negligence, the 
affairs entrusted to him at home became so much embarrassed, 
that it was now determined by the executor in trust, that the 
business should be disposed of; and the necessary steps were 
taken accordingly. It was not long before a person came for- 
ward, who was competent to purchase the stock on hand, and 
enter into the trade on his own account. 

Although by our brother's imprudence, the family were now 
banished from a comfortable home, and separated, never all to 
meet again in mutability ; yet the business itself received no 
material check, nor was it for a single hour suspended ; but 
was afterwards carried on to advantage for several years by our 
successor. When proper arrangements were made, our beloved 
but unhappy brother sailed for Jamaica, preferring in all pro- 
bability a foreign clime, rather than endure the reflections which 
he so justly merited at home, for having thus brought ruin and 
disgrace upon a family, whose prospects had been less clouded 
than those of many others in similar circumstances. It cannot 
be doubted that much sorrow of heart would be his portion : 
but I had never an opportunity of obtaining much information 
respecting him, from the time he left England until several 
years after his death. He died at the age of thirty-eight years ; 
and it appears that he had been comfortably settled for the last 
several years of his life, and been frequent in correspondence 



1792.] CHAPTER I. 5 

with those branches of our family that were more stationary 
than myself. My other brother had previously settled in the 
West Indies. At this time, my eldest sister went to reside 
with our relative in Yorkshire, to whom she looked up as a 
guardian, until married : my youngest sister was at a board- 
ing school at Putney; and I remained with the family which 
succeeded to the business. Having been previously removed 
from school to assist my brother in the counting-house, I had 
acquired considerable knowledge of its management ; it was 
therefore a convenience to them who were entire strangers to 
it, and for a time no other occupation offering for me to engage 
in, I was furnished with employment, and had still a com- 
fortable home. 

Our family compact was now for ever dissolved ; — we were 
scattered and widely separated from each other, without any- 
near relative in the world. My father was an only son, and 
my mother an only daughter, so that we had neither uncles 
nor aunts ; and I believe, in the strict application of the term 
cousin, not one that could properly be called so : neither were 
any of our grand-parents living, or had ever been known to us, 
except our dear mother's mother, who ended her days at our 
house three years before her daughter's decease. Our family 
being thus severed from each other, we were cast upon the wide 
world, as to relatives, in a peculiarly destitute situation ; but yet 
not altogether friendless, — for some who had long been bound 
to the family by ties of strong attachment, clearly evinced their 
sincerity, by never withdrawing from the orphan children, (now 
overtaken by adversity,) that regard and kindness, which had 
been extended to their deceased parents in the days of their 
prosperity ; — a test which the friendship of the world can but 
seldom bear. 

Having brought my little narrative to this poinx, it seems 
necessary to determine in what manner it shall be carried 
forward, before we proceed any farther. After due considera- 
tion, I am of the mind that it should be hereafter confined 
principally to events relating to myself ; only in future bringing 
into view other branches of the family, when the hand of time 
shall, through the over-ruling providence of Almighty God, 



6 CHAPTER I. [1771 tO 

have again led some of us into connexion with each other at 
periods far remote : one of which was made productive of the 
most striking and important change in the history of my life ; 
and which I humbly hope will lead to the accomplishment of 
another, transcendently greater and everlasting, at my death. 
But, reader, if the power to choose were mine, to draw an 
impenetrable shade over the next several years would best suit 
my natural inclination ; it would save me many pangs, and I 
should at once bring thee to the time when I could tell thee 
with delight, " what the Lord hath done for my soul."' 1 But 
with these years omitted, the long-sufFering and unutterable 
goodness of my gracious God and Saviour would be eclipsed, 
his tender mercies would be ungratefully robbed of their lustre, 
the riches of his grace obscured, and its glory hidden. I must 
therefore, like the regular and progressive gradations of nature, 
proceed from those days of childhood and youth, at which I 
had now arrived, — would that I could say, of innocency. But 
ah ! at this distance of time, I can painfully trace the spring- 
ing^ up of the evil root, which failed not at an early age to 
brino; forth fruit of those things " whereof I am now ashamed ;" 
having sorrowfully found from woful experience, that their 
" end is death." Canst thou then wonder at the shrinking 
of human nature from the task of thus re-opening a dark 
picture of guilt \ such as I pray it may never be thy lot to 
know, or to have to render an account of as thine own. Though 
now in full abhorrence of the same, through the mercy of God 
in Christ Jesus, I have a hope that my sins, though many, 
will be forgiven, and for ever blotted out as " a thick cloud ;" 
and that my tribulated soul will yet be cleansed by the precious 
" blood of sprinkling, that speaketh better things than that of 
Abel.'' 1 This only " cried from the ground" for vengeance 
against the offender ; whilst the blood of Him, who cried 
— " Father, forgive them, for they know not what they do," 
cleanseth from all sin, and was shed for many, for the remission 
of sins, — yea, for all that repent, believe, and obey the gospel in 
the secret of their hearts revealed, which is " the power of God 
unto salvation." But although ready to shudder at the pros- 
pect before me, I feel strengthened to proceed, so far as I may 



] 792.] CHAPTER I. 7 

rightly do, from a belief that the work in which I am now 
engaged, is prompted in mercy, and will not be in vain, perad- 
venture to myself, if not to another. For if permitted to finish 
it, I shall have had another opportunity afforded, even at this 
late hour, for repentance, — a truly great and blessed privilege 
to every sinner. And how much more shall I owe unto my 
Lord, if in the course of a diligent search, it should please the 
" faithful witness," in condescension to discover to the view of 
my mind sins, which, through the subtle working of the grand 
adversary, have been partly hidden and imperfectly repented of. 

For some time after the separation of our family before 
hinted at, had taken place, my attention w as fully occupied ; 
until the party, who had taken to the business, became 
acquainted with its usual routine. The master of the house, 
holding a post in a public office under government, which 
required his regular attendance, was absent every day until 
after dinner ; and as his family consisted only of very young- 
children, I had no associates but among the servants ; whose 
example did not fail to have in many things a baneful influence 
on my thoughtless mind, — though at the time imperceptible, — 
and the consequences unregarded. Yet I was at times desirous 
that a situation in a well conducted family, with whom in the 
days of my parents we had been intimately acquainted, would 
offer for me ; which in all respects would have been much more 
guarded, than that in which I was ; but in this my hope was 
disappointed. 

There was a merchant in the city, who had long shown much 
friendship for us ; on whom without any particular reason I 
kept an eye, as one who was likely to befriend me. He fre- 
quently called on business : and one day on perceiving him 
coming, it occurred to me immediately, that his business was on 
my behalf. This proved to be the case : for in a short time I 
was sent for, and informed that he had obtained a situation for 
me, on board a ship then lying in the Thames, fitting out for 
Oporto, commanded by a respectable man, a lieutenant in the 
navy, then on half pay ; she belonged to some merchants with 
whom he was connected in the import trade. This offer was 
at once accepted on my part, and I suppose that any other 



8 CHAPTER I. [1771 tO 

would at that time have been the same, without regard to 
choice ; as I do not remember that one occupation had any 
preference with me rather than another. I am not aware that 
any attempt was made to dissuade me from this undertaking, 
by those whose sentiments would have been regarded, or by 
any other person ; so that the needful preparation was imme- 
diately made for this unexpected change of station. 

I should not feel easy without noticing in this place, for 
the benefit of others, the manifold temptations to which young 
people are necessarily exposed, when brought up to trades 
similar to that in which I was then employed. From the 
nature of these trades, there is scarcely a probability of escape 
from insensibly falling into habits (much more readily acquired 
than shaken off,) of tasting different kinds of wines and strong 
liquors, which too often leads the way to intemperance. The 
injurious effects of these practices, and of such exposure at an 
early age, having been felt and witnessed by myself, make me 
the more desirous to warn others against the business. 

But a short time elapsed before I went on board the ship, 
which, in a few days, proceeded to Gravesend. The weather 
being rough, we were detained a day or two at the Nore ; and 
after reaching the Downs, we were again hindered by bois- 
terous and contrary winds for more than a fortnight. From 
these and other detentions at sea, the ship was too late to 
procure a cargo in Portugal, which resulted in our wintering 
in the Douro ; so that before we reached London again, the 
voyage had occupied fully six months. We were but a short 
time in the river, before we sailed again on the second voyage ; 
which was completed in les3 than half the time of the former. 
During our stay in England, my time was taken up in learn- 
ing navigation ; so that I had scarcely any opportunity of 
seeing either my sister, or any of our old friends. Whilst I 
belonged to this vessel, we had a providential escape from fire ; 
the danger was greatly increased by the river being frozen 
at the time : but with prompt assistance from other ships 
then in the Thames, the ice was broken, and sufficient water 
procured to extinguish the flames, before much damage was 
done. By the time our second voyage was completed, I had 



1792.] CHAPTER I." 9 

become tolerably accustomed to the situation ; and although we 
had experienced some rough weather, I wa's reconciled to it as 
much as could be expected. 

Soon after returning to London the second time, I found 
that some of my friends had succeeded in procuring for me the 
station of midshipman on board a ship of war, then commis- 
sioned at Plymouth, and preparing for the cruising service. 
This affair was brought about by an intimate friend of my 
late dear mother, whose brother was appointed to the com- 
mand of this vessel ; and it was considered by those who felt 
interested in my welfare, as an important foundation-stone, 
upon which my nautical career would at a future day be 
established. The change, however specious in appearance at 
the time, was to me but as an introduction to a school, which 
is not often equalled, and but seldom surpassed for vice and 
immorality. After the necessary equipments were provided, I 
took leave of my youngest sister, who was still at Putney 
at school, and of some of those with whom we were the most 
intimately acquainted, and I joined the ship at Plymouth. 
The situation I had now obtained, was for some time much 
less comfortable than the one in which I had been engaged. 
Before, I had been placed amongst only a few strangers, but 
now the crew altogether consisted of many ; and being an 
entire stranger to naval etiquette, my situation was dull and 
mortifying ; particularly as from my not having completed my 
fourteenth year, all those of the officers with whom I could 
use freedom, were several years older than myself. It was not 
long before we left the harbour, and sailed for the Isle of Man 
station. This was a stormy and dangerous passage, in which, 
through Divine mercy, we were favoured to witness a marvel- 
lous preservation from shipwreck, — the dawn of day discovering 
to us just in time the small island of Grasholm ; towards which 
the vessel was drifting in a direct course, and already within a 
short distance of the breakers. We were lying to at the time 
under two or three storm sails ; but there happily being room 
to wear clear of the rocky crags, the danger was soon left 
behind. After remaining in these parts about fourteen 
months, visiting alternately the coasts of Scotland, Ireland, and 



10 CHAPTER I. [1787 tO 

Wales, and putting into a variety of harbours for provisions 
and water, as occasion required, we reached Liverpool in a 
leaky condition. Here we expected to be repaired : but instead 
of being permitted to go into the dock for that purpose, 
instructions were received from the Admiralty to procure an 
extra pump and proceed immediately to Plymouth ; this, 
although attended with much risk, was at last accomplished in 
safety. 

Whilst in this harbour, interest was made on my behalf 
with an admiral of considerable estate and influence in the 
neighbourhood, with whom in former days some of our family 
had been personally acquainted. Through this medium, I was 
in a short time received on board a ship of the line, then 
bearing the flag of a rear-admiral. This advance, under such 
patronage, was considered to hold out a promising aspect ; but 
whilst it seemed to pave the way to promotion, it opened 
at once a door to an extensive range of acquaintance with 
officers on board, whose circumstances in life enabled them 
to deviate with less difficulty than myself from the path of 
virtue ; whose example I endeavoured to follow, until nothing 
but the want of means prevented my going still greater lengths 
than the worst of them. Whilst in this ship, when about 
sixteen years of age, having been unwell, and probably led to 
reflect a little on that account, I was made sensible of a Divine 
visitation being extended to me : disclosing with indubitable 
clearness the vanity and emptiness of every earthly station, 
tarnishing the pride and glory of this perishing world in my 
sight ; and which, though little understood and less regarded 
at the moment, has since, at different periods of my chequered 
life, been brought to my remembrance, by Him " who declareth 
unto man his thoughts, — who maketh the morning darkness, 
and treadeth upon the high places of the earth, — the Lord, 
the Lord of hosts is his name.' 1 '' When this occurred, although 
then entered into the bond of iniquity, I had not launched 
so fully into its dreadful abyss, as was afterwards most lament- 
ably the case ; and from what I have since witnessed in unut- 
terable mercy, of the strength and power of redeeming love, a 
belief is induced, that if this warning voice, then sounding in 



1792.] CHAPTER I. 11 

the secret of my sinful heart, — " Behold I stand at the door, 
and knock,'''' had been hearkened unto, and waited upon, my 
footsteps, even mine, would have been conducted from the 
horrible pit to which they were fast verging. 

I continued nearly six years in the navy : but were all the 
changes from ship to ship enumerated which took place during 
that time, and the great variety of incidents which befel me, 
they would swell this narrative far beyond the limits intended : 
whilst however I am desirous of avoiding the error of gratifying- 
self, or merely amusing others, I beg to be preserved from a 
greater, — in omitting any thing tending in the slightest degree 
to make known the aboundings of that wondrous goodness and 
mercy, which followed me all along through an unparalleled 
course of presumptuous and unrestrained liberty. It may there- 
fore suffice for me to say, that notwithstanding the many and 
great dangers I was exposed to, and the hardships and suffering 
I had to endure, through all which I was preserved and sustained 
in a manner at this clay inconceivable to myself; yet none of 
these things were sufficient to soften the rocky heart, or bring 
me to a sense of my lost condition : for whether on board or 
on shore, in harbour or at sea, or in whatever country, if I could 
meet with associates prone like myself to evil, I was always 
ready to hasten with them to it, either in word or in deed. 

An expected war with a foreign power had occasioned an 
unusually large fleet to collect at Spithead ; but after a time, 
the differences being adjusted, the ships were dispersed to their 
respective posts, and that to which I belonged was paid off. 
She was commissioned again the next day as a guard-ship, and 
I have no doubt that I might have resumed my station as one 
of her mates, had I made application : for with all my private 
failings as a poor sinful .creature, my public character had not 
suffered in any of the ships in which I had served, but rather 
the contrary ; for my pride and presumption had often 
prompted me in moments of extreme danger, in a daring 
manner to take the most hazardous post, even when duty did 
not require it, or warrant the risk. But instead of applying 
to be re-instated in my former birth, I remained on shore in 
pursuit of sinful gratifications with increased avidity ; and going 



12 CHAPTER I. [1787 tO 

up to London, so much time elapsed before my return, that I 
never afterwards attempted to procure a situation in the ship 
I had left, or in any other. In this way I left the service 
altogether ; and would I could say, that I left the service of sin 
at the same time : but I had not then filled up to the brim the 
measure of iniquity. For some time I remained without any 
employment ; at length I concluded to go to Canterbury, with- 
out any other motive than what arose from examining the 
names of places to which stage coaches ran from the inn at 
which I was then stopping ; and as I knew nothing of that 
place, it is very probable that I thought no person there knew 
any thing of me. 

I now found the disadvantage of not having been regularly 
brought up to a trade ; and although desirous of getting into 
some employ, no matter what, — yet for want of this knowledge, 
I was alike unfit for all ; and I could not bear the thought of 
making my forlorn situation known to those who had been the 
friends of my childhood, amongst whom there is no doubt but 
helpers would have been found. As my means became every 
day more scanty, I was at length reduced to complete poverty ; 
and after many fruitless attempts to procure a livelihood, there 
seemed left to me no other alternative, than that of entering as 
a volunteer into the army : this plan was accordingly adopted 
without delay. 

I must now digress awhile from the narrative, to mention a 
circumstance, which the facts just related have afresh awakened 
and impressed on my memory. Towards the latter part of the 
time of my being in the navy, it was suggested to my lost and 
bewildered mind, by the subtle destroyer of men, that nothing 
short of making away with myself, could extricate me from 
the difficulties by which I was surrounded, and shelter me 
from shame and disgrace ; and the method of its accomplish- 
ment was at seasons hinted at. But,— -blessed be the name 
of the Lord God of heaven and earth for ever ! his invisible 
arm of merciful interposition preserved me from this dreadful 
snare; and in the greatness of his love and strength he hath 
at this distant period, put it into the heart of his unworthy 
creature to record his mighty acts, to his praise and to his 



1792.] CHAPTER I. 13 

glory, with humble and reverend thankfulness. Greatly do I 
desire, that if this relation should ever fall into the hands of 
any poor sinners and servants of the cruel taskmaster, as 
was then my lot, — that such may be hereby strengthened and 
encouraged to look unto the Lord their God for help, even 
though they may be plunged into the very gulf of despair : for 
" his compassions fail not," — they are new e\erj morning ; his 
tender mercies are over all his works; and he will give power 
to the faint, and strength to them that have no might of their 
own, to resist this, and every other temptation of that wicked 
one,, who was a liar from the beginning. 



14 CHAPTER II. [1792 tO 



CHAPTER II. 

THE AUTHOR GOES TO PLYMOUTH, THENCE WITH HIS REGIMENT TO 

IRELAND KILKENNY DUBLIN HARASSING SERVICE PERSONAL 

DANGER RECRUITS LIVERPOOL BRISTOL SOUTHAMPTON 

EMBARKS THENCE WITH TROOPS FOR THE CAMPAIGN IN HOLLAND. 

It was a little remarkable, that, after all the pains I had taken 
to screen my fallen situation from the knowledge of those who 
had been acquainted with me, the regiment in which I had 
engaged, proved to be at that very time on duty at Plymouth, 
a place where, above all others, I had the greatest number 
of acquaintances ; but I was so completely metamorphosed in 
appearance, that I was never in one instance found out by any 
whom I had formerly known, even when brought into close 
contact with them. This change of condition, however, 
wrought in me no change of life. My conduct for a time was 
almost entitled to the appellation of reformed, but this period 
was short indeed ; for having speedily acquired a knowledge of 
all that was required of me in the way of duty, I began to 
rise above the impressions made by difficulties gone by, and 
again to look forward to a farther participation in the delu- 
sive and miserable pleasures of this transitory and wicked 
world. 

In less than a year we were ordered to Ireland ; and three 
transports having arrived for us in Oatwater, a short time 
completed the embarkation : we sailed for the Cove of Cork, 
reaching it in safety after a fine passage. While at sea, it was 
soon discovered, that I was no stranger to the management of 
a vessel; and though I concealed my having served several 
years in a superior station, yet I felt so much at home, that I 
voluntarily performed the duty of a sailor during my stay on 
board, not a little proud of my qualifications. It is most 
probable that pride and self-conceit were the only motives that 



1795.] CHAPTER II. 15 

prompted these endeavours to be useful ; few, indeed, of our 
actions, however specious in appearance, are wholly divested 
of self in some shape or other, when examined in the pure 
mirror of truth ; such is the depravity of the human heart in 
its natural state. 

Having frequently been sheltered before by the coves, 
bays, and harbours of Ireland, and frequently been on shore 
in different places, I was tolerably well acquainted with the 
character and customs of the people ; whose hospitality to 
strangers has long been acknowledged by all who have visited 
their shores : and although now unable to move in the same 
sphere as formerly, yet I still found opportunities to indulge 
the evil propensities of fallen nature. But as the miserable 
inhabitants in some of the provinces were rapidly ripening for 
rebellion, our time was much occupied by hard and laborious 
service. 

After landing at the Passage of Cork, we proceeded to that 
city, but shortly marched forward to Kilkenny. This place 
was a station that afforded more quiet and comparative ease, 
than any which afterwards fell to my lot, whilst engaged in the 
regular service ; but our stay here was of short duration, 
before entering upon the arduous duty of Dublin garrison. The 
agitated state of public affairs at that period, greatly augmented 
our fatigue ; and it frequently happened that we were on duty 
every other night, and this in the winter season. 

Discontent increasing and disturbances breaking out in the 
interior of the country, small detachments of troops were dis- 
patched from Dublin, to strengthen the authority of magistrates 
in their endeavours to maintain public tranquillity, and to afford 
protection to the peaceable inhabitants from the nightly depre- 
dations of numerous gangs of misled and intoxicated despera- 
does, to which they and their property were constantly exposed 
under a variety of diabolical pretences. It was my lot to be 
chosen with the first of the detached parties, to a share of this 
dangerous and harassing service ; on which, such was at one 
time the emergency, that we were kept on the alert night after 
night, without any intermission for a week together, with only 
such intervals of rest as could be procured in the day time. 



16 CHAPTER II. [1792. 

Whilst on this expedition, on a particular enterprise with a 
constable, I was to all appearance reduced to the necessity, of 
taking the life of another to save my own. The constable per- 
ceiving- the danger, had left me alone ; when I was suddenly 
attacked by a poor infuriated creature, in a state little short 
of perfect madness from continued intoxication, supported by 
several others, but in a less outrageous condition. I kept him 
at bay for some time ; but at last he got so near, that it became 
every moment more difficult to avoid being reached by the 
violent strokes he made with some kind of weapon, I think of 
iron, which were repeatedly received by the firelock in my 
hands, then loaded with ball. In this situation, there seemed 
left to me no other than the dreadful alternative of shooting 
him to save myself. I called in vain in the language of appeal 
to the other people to interfere : they stood by, as if to see how 
matters were likely to terminate, before they began to act or 
take a part of any consequence either way ; which they nearly 
carried too far : but when they saw me actually preparing to 
shoot the man, they hastily cried out, — ' spare life ! spare life I 1 
— which I only wanted their help to enable me to accomplish. 
They then seized him, and in the midst of the struggle and 
confusion which took place amongst themselves, my escape was 
happily effected. I cannot suppose at that time, when I wanted 
only the help of other men to enable me to spare life, that 
the principal motive was other than that of self-preservation, — 
accompanied by fear of the immediate consequences that would 
inevitably have followed, and must have resulted in my own 
destruction. Therefore it is greatly to be feared (although that 
heart must be callous indeed, which in all such cases does not 
recoil from the horrid act,) that it was not love to my fellow- 
creature, which prompted the desire in me to spare his life. Let 
none mistake it as such. I have frequently thought of this 
circumstance since it occurred, I hope with humble thankful- 
ness to the great Preserver of men ; and now on committing it 
to record, as one of those many events, in which there was but 
one step between me and the grave, and whilst shuddering at 
the strong recollection of it, — my soul magnifies that unmerited 
and amazing mercy, afresh displayed and multiplied to my 



1794.] CHAPTER II. 17 

understanding in a two-fold view : — on the one hand, in 
withholding me from the crime of taking away the life of a 
fellow-creature, like myself, " in the gall of bitterness ;"" and 
if I had escaped myself, thus sparing me, at this late hour, 
amidst the decay of nature, when the shadows of the evening 
are stretching out and my feet drawing near the margin of the 
grave, — the appalling thought of a brother's blood, yet unwiped 
away: — on the other hand, in rescuing from immediate death 
two miserable sinners, wholly unprepared to die ; for had I 
taken away the man's life, my own would doubtless have been 
forthwith sacrificed to the revenge of his enraged companions. 
Thus as my history rolls on, the enormous load of debt which 
I already owe unto my Lord still accumulates ; and verily 
it never can be liquidated, but in that infinite and won- 
drous mercy, which delighteth to forgive every repenting 
sinner, who in the depths of humility and abasedness of self, 
has indeed " nothing to pay 11 withal. 

On the arrival of some fresh detachments from the garrison, 
I learned that a vacancy had occurred during our absence on 
this seiwice, and that the blank was filled up by the promotion 
of myself. Although this circumstance was of trifling import, 
yet it served to flatter and feed pride, and eventually to open 
the way again for a renewal of those evil habits, from which 
for a time I had been sheltered. As each body of troops was 
relieved from this extra fatigue at a given time, our turn came 
in regular course at the expiration of a few weeks, when we 
again returned to Dublin. Not long after this, inquiry was 
made for a person qualified to assist in the writing department 
of the commander-in-chief, under his own personal inspection : 
I never knew exactly how it was brought about, but in the 
course of a few days, it was decided in my favour ; and I 
immediately entered upon this new and altogether unexpected 
employment. Being now on most days at liberty at an early 
hour, and freed from restraint and control, and from that inces- 
sant round of duties, which had before fully occupied my time 
and attention, and compelled in a degree to orderly conduct, 
together with having it more in my power by possessing 
greater means, — I soon began to take my swing in every inordi- 

G 



18 CHAPTER It. [1792 to 

dinate gratification to which I was naturally propense, and in 
which an extensive metropolis furnished ample opportunity to 
indulge ; thus adding sin to sin, and making farther woful 
work for repentance. And although at times, in the midst of 
these evil practices I was made sensible of convicting reproofs, 
sufficient to have awakened any one but myself; yet they only 
seemed to deter me for a short interval from persisting in them, 
or until another opportunity offered ; — such was their dominion 
over me. This course was however at last stopped, by my 
attendance being no longer necessary at the writing depart- 
ment, together with the sudden march of the regiment to 
Granard ; but not before my health had begun to suffer from 
my folly. 

Our stay was not long at this place ; for the French revolu- 
tion, which had occurred about two years before, now began 
to occasion more frequent movements and changes amongst the 
military. I was engaged in some hazardous enterprises whilst 
lying here ; and although the town was small, and our time in it 
short, yet there were sufficient temptations to be found for my 
unwary feet to fall into. From this place, a part of the 
regiment, consisting of two hundred picked men and a suitable 
number of officers, was drafted to serve in an expedition then 
preparing to act in the West Indies. The same quota was 
selected from every regiment in Ireland, then seventeen in 
number,— and possibly from every regiment in England also. 
From all the information that I could ever obtain, the greatest 
part, if not the whole of these poor devoted fellows, then 
declared to be the flower of the British army, fell victims to 
the climate and the war. I mention this lamentable fact, 
although foreign to my subject, to perpetuate all in my power, 
the ravages of this horrid and desolating scourge of the human 
race. At the same time, under a deep sense of my then sinful 
and still sinning condition, my mind is struck with admiration, 
that I was not included in the above-mentioned draft, to 
which I was no less liable than others ; were it only as a 
punishment which I so justly merited, for my unprecedented 
rebellion against a long-suffering and all-gracious Lord God. 

Our next remove was to Gralway ; where after some weeks I 



1794.] CHAPTER II. 19 

was again promoted, from what cause I do not now remember ; 
but, as had been the case in the navy, so now, however profligate 
my conduct in the general, I still kept up a fair name, by being- 
ready for all the duties that devolved upon me. 

By this time several new regiments were raising by field- 
officers, in expectation of promotion when the number of each 
was completed, according to the then existing proposals of the 
government ; at whose expense, and under whose particular 
patronage these measures were undertaken, for the purpose of 
more vigorously prosecuting the continental war. In order to 
expedite the formation of these new corps, application was 
made to the commanding officers of old established regiments, 
for persons competent to assist in their equipment and disci- 
pline, where such could be recommended. For one of these 
regiments, intended to be formed in Dublin of recruits raised 
from the different provinces, two others with myself were 
selected, and accordingly despatched immediately to commence 
the necessary operations in that city. After leaving Grranard, 
and to the time of my again reaching Dublin, perhaps my 
course of life, from one or other cause, might not be quite so 
dissipated as for some time previous. But this could only be 
attributed to an accumulation of duty, and not from any change 
wrought in myself : for alas ! the old evil root still remained 
in unabated strength, though dormant ; which in a while did 
not fail to shoot forth, and produce those works of unmortified 
flesh, which had so long and so often been manifested in my 
conduct and conversation, and were now not likely to be less 
frequent, from my being again promoted shortly after joining 
this new regiment. Some progress was made in organizing the 
new troops, as the different small detachments arrived in the 
course of the winter from the interior of the country ; and by the 
time the spring fairly opened, the whole number stipulated, was 
raised and accepted. Such was the urgency of affairs just then, 
that, whilst in a raw and incomplete state of discipline, almost 
beyond conception, from the wildness of character of the class of 
people, of which the principal part of the regiment was composed, 
immediate embarkation was ordered, and transports were 
actually in waiting to receive it. In two days, the whole were 

o.2 



20 CHAPTER u. [1792 to 

on board of three ships, which sailed with the first tide for 
Bristol. When the time for sending off these newly raised 
troops was fully come, the utmost despatch was necessary ; for 
it was very evident, that had time been allowed for the infor- 
mation to spread to any material extent, the embarkation could 
scarcely have been effected without bloodshed. As it was, 
though the preparations commenced soon after three o'clock in 
the morning, the concourse of people assembled together was 
immense, to behold their unfortunate countrymen in every 
relation of fathers, husbands, brothers, and sons, forced away 
from their native shores, — I may say forced away, for it was 
necessary to assemble a strong military force from the gar- 
rison to ensure the embarkation, which after all was not 
effected without some difficulty. From my own personal 
knowledge of the fate of many of these poor fellows, and of the 
destination of those remaining after I left them, I think it is 
possible but scarcely probable, that any of them ever returned 
to their families, friends, or country any more ; as will sub- 
sequently appear, if this narrative be proceeded with. 

We were favoured with a fine passage to the Severn, and 
landed about six miles below Bristol ; in which city we remained 
one night, and then marched forward to an encampment, where 
several other regiments were previously assembled, at Netley 
Abbey, not many miles from Southampton. From the undis- 
ciplined condition, with but small exception, of the officers and 
men who composed our regiment, it was only reasonable to 
suppose it had now reached its destination for the present ; 
but after a few weeks training, it was numbered with the line. 
We received a set of new colours, and embarked on South- 
ampton river, with the other regiments which formed the 
camp at Netley Abbey, to join the British army then on the 
Continent, under the command of the Duke of York. We 
dropped down to Spithead the next morning, and the same 
afternoon, Earl Moira, the commander-in-chief, having joined 
the expedition, we sailed, thirty-seven ships in company, under 
proper convoy to the coast of Flanders. 

The weather being thick, with light airs of wind, our passage, 
though fine, was rather tedious, before reaching an anchorage 



1794.] CHAPTER II. 21 

off the port of Ostend. From circumstances of an unfavour- 
able cast, unknown to us at the time, it was judged most 
prudent for the expedition to be free from every incumbrance 
likely to retard or impede its movements through the Nether- 
lands ; the success and safety of the enterprise wholly depend- 
ing upon its ability to evade and elude, by the rapidity of its 
movements, in forced marches by night, the greatly dispro- 
portionate strength of the enemy. The number of troops then 
under Earl Moira, was little more than 7000 ; whilst the 
French force, through which we had to pass, was estimated at 
80,000, and they were at the time so posted, as seemed to 
prohibit our junction with the Duke's army. It was there- 
fore concluded, that every article of baggage and stores belong- 
ing either to officers or soldiers, beyond what they could them- 
selves carry, should be left on board the ships. At an early 
hour of the morning after our arrival in the roads off the town 
of Ostend, every officer and soldier was furnished with a blanket, 
and an allowance of three days' provisions and water from 
the stores of the transports ; it being very uncertain whether 
any supplies could be obtained for some days to come. Thus 
provided, the troops were disembarked under cover of two 
large floating batteries, prepared for the occasion, to prevent 
any attempt to frustrate their descent. As the boats employed 
had many times to pass to and fro, between the ships and the 
shore, before the whole were conveyed, it was near night when 
the landing was fully accomplished. To expedite the landing, 
a large float was made use of, to assist in crossing a narrow 
space of water connected with the harbour ; so that the troops 
were enabled to land at more than one point at a time, and 
then unite. It was well for those who had nothing to do 
with this ill- adapted float ; for in the hurry, it became over- 
laden with soldiers, and was quickly overturned, causing the 
loss of many men, who, from their being encumbered with arms, 
baggage, and provisions, were incapable of making much effort 
to save themselves; this weight being strongly attached to 
their bodies, they sank before they could extricate themselves 
from it. I landed on the main shore of the harbour, and thus 
providentially escaped with only seeing the float then loading, 
just before the accident happened. 



22 CHAPTER II. [1792 to 

I do not know how it fared with others, but it is scarcely 
probable, all circumstances considered, that there could be any 
material superiority in the accommodation of one more than 
another. On the morning that we landed, I might doubtless 
have been supplied with a blanket, in common with others ; but 
as I occupied a station, in which little rest could be expected, 
even when others slept, and supposing that I should be able to 
borrow from some of the others, when they could not be used 
by themselves, this opportunity was lost ; but I afterwards 
regretted the non-acceptance of it. From the day we left the 
transports, several weeks elapsed before I got to sleep under 
the cover of a tent ; as these, with the rest of the luggage and 
stores, were left on board the ships to be conveyed to Helvoet- 
sluys, as a place more secure from the French than Ostend. 
We remained upon the sand hills near Ostend three days and 
nights after landing, and then commenced a march which 
could scarcely be equalled for fatigue and hardship ; as we 
were wholly unprovided with provisions, and every common 
necessary, with which the generality of troops are usually 
furnished at the opening of a campaign. 

It would be no very difficult task for me at this day, to enter 
into minute detail of particular circumstances, were it consistent 
with the declared object before me, in setting about to pen this 
memoir; for although so many years have rolled away since these 
miserable scenes were actually shared in and witnessed, — yet 
such are the strong impressions stamped on my memory by the 
sufferings endured, and the manifold deliverances which followed, 
that while endeavouring to insert such incidents only as are need- 
ful to preserve the chain of history, in sufficient links of con- 
nection to enable me to proceed with correctness, — transactions 
that have long been forgotten, though they once formed a pro- 
minent feature in the toils of the day, are recalled from oblivion 
in a remarkable manner. I must however forbear to intrude 
them here, and proceed again with saying, that on leaving the 
neighbourhood of Ostend, we passed through Bruges, and pene- 
trated into the country by way of Ghent. The first halting 
place of the army, in the evening of the same day that it left 
the coast, was called the ' Pigeon's Nest ;' but it did not prove 
a very quiet one, — for by two o'clock in the morning, the 



1794.] CHAPTER II. 23 

advance of the enemy was announced by the firing of the 
picquets, by which we were surrounded. Whether this attack 
was intended to alarm only, or to endeavour to take us by 
surprise, I never understood ; if the latter, it certainly failed, 
for the troops were literally sleeping on their arms, covered 
with their blankets, so that in a few minutes, a line was 
formed, with the commander-in-chief present. It was how- 
ever considered prudent to remain there no longer, and in half 
an hour this post was abandoned, and the march continued 
until noon the next day, when a stoppage occurred, from the 
French having occupied a bridge over which we had to pass. 
Notwithstanding the men were almost ready to faint for want 
of food, having scarcely tasted any thing for twenty-four hours; 
yet on its being proclaimed through the line that volunteers 
were wanted to force the passage over the bridge, a sufficient 
number immediately offered, apparently glad of such an oppor- 
tunity. After three hours 1 detention, the obstruction was 
removed, I am inclined to think by its being found that the 
force advancing against it, was much too strong for that by 
which the bridge was occupied. The army then moved for- 
ward until midnight, although its course was much impeded 
by a tremendous storm of thunder, lightning, and heavy rain, 
which commenced at nine, p. m., and continued several hours. 
I do not see how I could have sufficiently exalted the name 
of my Grod, and his gracious dealings with a poor benighted 
and rebellious creature, without mentioning the two facts just 
related ; inasmuch as they magnify in my view, his long-suf- 
fering and protection, to one who was utterly insensible of his 
loving-kindness, and who then knew Him not : and I trust I 
shall not be permitted to overlook or pass by any thing that will 
shew forth his praise, and tend to his glory ; or be prevented 
from acknowledging his power and his might ; who hath, accord- 
ing to his mercy, so many times delivered me out of every 
distress. For, notwithstanding the constant exposure to every 
shower of rain that fell, without covering over my head, and 
with no couch but the earth, and that at times soaked with 
wet ; whilst harassed with fatiguing marches night after night, 
and with little rest by day ; amidst hunger and thirst, being 



24 CHAPTER II. [1794. 

often short of food for days together, and occasionally no water 
to be had, without digging a well to procure it, to avoid the 
unwholesome waters of the stagnant pools; — and although for 
several weeks together my clothes were never taken off, but 
to renew a shirt, and my shoes but seldom off my weary feet ; — 
yet through all, my health was not materially affected, till near 
the approach of winter. But in the above description, not one 
half has been told of that marvellous mercy which was still 
extended for my preservation, when many fell by the sword, or 
were taken captives by the enemy, — when thousands were swept 
off by pestilence, — and whilst unhurt myself, I saw the wounds 
of others bleed. Once whilst gone to Helvoetsluys in search of 
some baggage, I entirely missed a contest, in which our regi- 
ment was deprived of twenty-eight men ; and, when at last 
overwhelmed with sickness and distress, the same Divine and 
compassionate arm of everlasting love and strength, was still 
underneath to bear up my helpless head, and in his own time 
to rescue me from the very jaws of death, to celebrate his 
praise, and to declare in humble thankfulness and gratitude of 
soul, " his wonderful works to the children of men.'" 



1794.] CHAPTER III. 25 



CHAPTER III. 

NIMEGUEN MANY DANGERS ATTACKED BT FEVER HOSPITAL 

TREATMENT, HEAVY MORTALITY AMONG THE SICK DISASTERS 

OF THE BRITISH ARMY RETREAT TO BREMEN RETURNS TO 

ENGLAND. 

As the winter approached, the health of the troops began to fail 
to an alarming and awful extent, from exposure to cold rains 
which fell almost daily ; and yet we were compelled to keep the 
field, being constantly on the retreat before the greatly superior 
force of the enemy. As we drew near the walls of Nimeguen, 
the British forces made a stand, probably to afford time for 
preparing a floating bridge across the Waal, to secure our 
retreat behind that river. At the same time, the French 
used -every effort in their power to intercept our retreat, by 
endeavouring to get between us and Nimeguen, which from 
the strength of its fortifications was capable of affording a 
cover for several days, or until our army had passed in safety 
over the bridge. 

The last two or three days the contest between the two 
armies became more severe, by the continual arrival of fresh 
divisions of the French at this point : on the last day the 
cannon scarcely ceased to roar from sun-rise to sun-set. The 
regiment to which I belonged, was ordered on the reserve 
with three others ; two of which were British, and the third 
Hanoverian. As the cannonade increased, the first regiment 
of reserve was called upon, in two hours after the second was 
summoned, and by eleven o'clock in the forenoon, the third. 
The direction from which the sound of the conflict issued, left 
no doubt that it was rapidly approaching the ground on which 
we stood ; and although, as the last reserve, we had not been 
ordered to march, yet our tents were struck, and every thing 



26 CHAPTER III. [1794. 

prepared to move on the first alarm.* I had been going about 
in the wet for several days previous, without the practicability 
of obtaining dry clothes; and this day being colder and more 
rainy than usual, with the increased exertion necessary on 
account of the threatening aspect of things close upon us, 
might hasten an illness, the foundation of which had already 
been deeply laid, and which began with shivering fits, just in 
the interval of waiting for the expected courier to call us to 
the field of slaughter. About three o'clock in the afternoon, 
a light dragoon arrived with a dispatch, but instead of its 
hastening us to the scene of action, it proved to be an order 
for us to join the rear of another regiment then retreating 
towards Nimeguen. Our army, after sustaining for many 
hours with great loss the unequal combat, was at length com- 
pelled to retire. Thus were we preserved when on the very 
brink of danger, in a manner as unlooked for as unmerited, from 
sharing in the disasters of a day, in which much human life 
was wasted, and which entailed great suffering and distress on 
many who survived it. After we had moved forward two or 
three miles, the coldness and shivering I had previously felt 
were succeeded by violent heat and fever, and my throat seemed 
almost closed up. For several days I had found swallowing 
very painful and difficult, from its extreme soreness, — but had 
taken little notice of it. In this condition I was still able 
to keep up with the body of the regiment ; but after entering 
the gates of Nimeguen, from the frequent stoppages which 
took place in the miry streets of the city, owing to accidents 
constantly occurring with the floating bridge, occasioned by the 
fire of the French upon it, — I became more and more affected 
with something of the cramp kind, which nearly prevented my 
standing upright. As the night drew on, it became colder, and 
my pain increased, but I kept going on as well as I could ; at 
length we came in sight of the bridge, when we were again 
stopped for some time. I was near the colours of the regiment, 
and an officer who carried one of them, made some remarks to 

* Our expedition landed without any tents, but a supply was furnished 
about six weeks afterwards, I think whilst we were encamped on the 
plains of Breda. 



1794.] CHAPTER III. 27 

me about the bridge ; but feeling myself much worse, I told 
him I should never go over that bridge. He endeavoured to 
cheer me up, saying, that I should go over that and many 
more; but however, my assertion proved correct, for before 
the line again moved forward, I had left it, and was leaning 
against the wall of a house, no longer able to proceed from 
increased illness. 

In this position I remained for some time ; and after having 
painfully beheld the last of the rear of the regiment pass on 
and leave me behind, there seemed to be no hope left, as the 
only men in the world from whom I could expect a helping- 
hand were all out of sight. But, although apparently forsaken 
by all, and left to perish unseen and unknown, yet that ever- 
compassionate Arm, which had so often been with me in 
extremity, was again stretched out, and did not long allow me 
to remain in this deplorable condition ; but in adorable mercy, 
my gracious Lord was pleased to put into the hearts of some 
of the regiment who knew the real cause of my absence, to send 
two of the men back to endeavour to find me out, and render 
every assistance in their power. As I had not gone from the 
place where I stopped, they had no difficulty in finding me, 
although it was by that time nearly dark ; but as I could not 
possibly go forward to the regiment, they at last concluded to 
leave me in the hands of a picquet of cavalry, which was left 
to cover the retreat of the army through the city. Having 
helped me to the place, and left me in charge of the picquet, 
they made off with all haste to overtake their companions. 
Here the wife of a soldier gave me some ground pepper mixed 
with heated spirits ; and although, from the state of my throat, 
I could scarcely swallow the fiery mixture, yet it proved useful, 
considerably relieving the pain in my stomach, and renewing 
the general warmth. As it was expected that the enemy 
would attack the batteries in the night, which however was 
not the case, although they kept up a heavy firing, I was 
helped into a loft to be out of the way ; here I remained until 
the morning, and was then assisted on board of a galliot, 
provided for the reception of those, who, like myself, were 
disabled by sickness or other causes. The hold of this vessel 



28 CHAPTER III. [1794;. 

was filled with as many people as could lie close to each other : 
they were in the various stages of a violent epidemic disorder, 
and from the heat occasioned by so many being crowded 
together, the air was very oppressive, and difficult to breathe. 
Two other galliots of a similar description, proceeded in com- 
pany with us up the river, in hopes of getting round a neck of 
land, at which the Waal and the Rhine unite. But although 
considerable exertions were made by the sailors, aided by such 
of the sick as were at all able to stand, of whom I made one, 
they had not succeeded in warping round the point, when a 
party of French hussars made their appearance on the shore. 
It was fully expected they would endeavour to prevent our 
escape, by opening a fire with cannon ; but before they had time 
to bring any near enough to bear on us, we had got fairly into 
the current of the Rhine, and were soon beyond their reach. 
Being much exhausted I went below, but soon became very 
ill from the closeness of the place. Whilst under this and 
other distressing circumstances, both of body and mind, one 
of our companions who lay next but one to me, was removed 
by death from all his troubles ; and although none of us could 
expect at the time, but that a similar fate would in all proba- 
bility soon overtake us, — yet, in my own case at least, notwith- 
standing I was worn down with fatigue and sickness, and 
without a glimpse of any thing to make life any longer 
desirable, except the fear of death, — still nature could not but 
feel appalled, when the dead body of a fellow-sufferer was 
dragged past, to be taken on to the deck of the vessel. As the 
evening came on, I became much worse ; and although the 
night was cold and frosty, I thought it better to get on deck, 
where I could breath more freely, rather than remain any 
longer below : accordingly three or four of the people helped 
me up, for I was now so faint for want of support, that I had 
scarcely any strength left. I remained on deck all night and 
got a little sleep ; in the morning, the cold compelled me again 
to go below, but I felt a little refreshed, and better able to 
bear the closeness of the place, keeping near the hatchway, 
where there was a greater circulation of air. In two days 
more we arrived at Rhenin, a town close to the bank of the 



1794.] CHAPTER III. 29 

Rhine, where an old monastery was fitted up as an hospital for 
the British sick. 

Sometime after reaching this place, a person came on board 
the galliot to see if there were any amongst the newly arrived 
sick, with whom he was acquainted. He came down below, 
and after looking round was about going away, when I made 
what effort I could for some one to stop him. He had looked 
at me amongst the rest, but I was so much reduced and altered 
in appearance that he had not recognised me, but passed by, 
although he had once known me very well. When brought 
back, he soon recollected me, and feelingly expressed great 
regret at finding his old acquaintance in such a weak condition. 
He had been a patient in this hospital himself, and when 
restored to health again, being found an active and useful 
person, he was retained as a ward-master for the benefit of 
others. Having had the fever, he was tolerably well acquainted 
with the best mode of treating it ; and soon after finding me, 
he administered a small quantity of strong cordial, which had 
the desired effect for a short time, by enabling me to get on 
shore. With his assistance I was conveyed to the hospital, 
where he soon procured one of the surgeons to examine me, 
and being very desirous to render every assistance in his 
power, he suggested to him the propriety of giving some par- 
ticular medicine, which had often proved useful in bad cases ; 
to which the surgeon replied, not aware that I heard all that 
was passing between them, ' he will not want any thing long.' 
By this it was evident that mine was considered a hopeless 
case ; which could not be wondered at, the disorder having been 
so fatal, that those who had recovered were said not to average 
more than one in fifty ; and as my attack had been so long- 
neglected, the conclusion was reasonable, although it did not 
prove correct. In a few days I was so much recruited as to 
be able to walk about the town : but it was a distinguishing 
characteristic of this complaint, that having once had it, was no 
security whatever against a second attack, — and that those who 
got well through it the first, or perhaps the second time, were 
frequently its victims on the third encounter. I found by 
experience that this report was not without foundation, for 



30 CHAPTER III. [1794. 

instead of being fully restored to health again, as for the first 
few days seemed probable, the disorder returned a second time, 
and with much more violent symptoms. As a state of high 
delirium soon came on, I was but a short time sensible of what 
transpired, after the application of a large blister ; except the 
workings of a terrified imagination, some of the impressions of 
which, even at this distance of time, are not wholly obliterated 
from my memory,— so deeply and strongly were they engraven. 
From the treatment which followed when no longer delirious, 
the disorder must have been of the nature of typhus, — as at 
one time a liberal allowance per day, of equal parts of brandy 
and port wine was given me, as hot as could well be taken. 
How long this continued I am not aware, but I was confined 
to my bed for such a length of time, as to be wholly unable to 
move in any direction from extreme weakness ; and so gene- 
rally was this the case in this disorder, that a man was 
appointed in every ward to go round occasionally, to turn from 
one side to the other, such of the patients as were incapable of 
turning themselves. 

I was at length brought so near the brink of the grave, 
that, to all appearance, no alteration for the better could be 
expected. I am not aware that I had even a wish to live ; 
but my mind was so reconciled to the prospect of death, which 
then seemed near and inevitable, that I had given my watch 
into the hands of the person who had visited the galliot, with 
a request, that he would inform my family where I had ended 
my days. Indeed, when some expectation of recovery was 
at last held out, I could not help looking forward with a feeling 
of regret, to the probability of having again to encounter the 
series of hardships and distress, to which I should unavoidably 
be subjected. As I regained a little strength, I began to take 
notice of the state of things around me; and having daily 
heard a noise like that of a carpenter's shop, I now ascer- 
tained the cause to be the nailing up of the coffins, each day, 
of those who had died in the last twenty-four hours ; and 
I found that the dead-house, or place where the dead were 
deposited previously to interment, when taken out of the 
wards, being opposite the windows of the room I was in, 



1794.] CHAPTER III. 31 

afforded full opportunity for my beholding the striking and 
affecting scene, which could not fail to excite feelings of horror 
and dismay, in one so much enervated by the very disease, 
which I now witnessed to be so fatal to others. The average 
number of deaths was twenty-seven in a day and night ; 
but sometimes the number so increased, that the Dutch 
could not furnish coffins sufficient for the demand of the 
day ; and then the method of sewing up the bodies in 
the bedding they had occupied, was resorted to. Several 
waggon loads of bodies were carried off every afternoon for 
interment.* 

When able to walk about the room with the assistance of 
my stick, it happened that the regiment to which I belonged, 
was quartered in a village about two miles from the bank of 
the Rhine, opposite to that on which the hospital stood. Some 
of the officers came over to ascertain for themselves, whether 
any of the missing from their regiment were amongst the sick ; 
at length they came into the ward where I was, and the second 
in command, with whom I was well acquainted, being with 
them, I requested his help to get me liberated from the hos- 
pital, — telling him, that I had no chance of becoming thoroughly 
well whilst in it, and of the danger to which I was constantly 
exposed of having another relapse. He immediately applied 
to some of the medical staff on duty, and conducted them to 
me through the wards ; but it ended in his informing me, 
that the doctors could not suffer my going out until farther 
recovered, as I was quite unfit for exposure. Not knowing 
how long I might be detained, I was now determined to make 
my escape on the first opportunity; and the next day being 
remarkably fine, I walked out two or three times into the air, 
though with much difficulty. The following morning I met 
with a person belonging to the regiment, who was going to join 
it again the same afternoon ; and as we were well acquainted, 
I did not hesitate to disclose my intention of quitting the 

* The accounts of the deplorable treatment of the sick, and of the dis- 
asters of the British army in their retreat to Bremen, as given in the 
Annual Register of 1795, more than confirm the description of the 
author of this biographical sketch. 



32 CHAPTER III. [1794. 

hospital in a clandestine manner, and resolved to accompany 
him, if possible. 

I returned again to the hospital as at other times ; and in 
the afternoon, as if going to take another walk, I proceeded to 
the river side ; and the ferry boat being just ready for setting 
off, I got into it undiscovered, and passed the Rhine, arriving 
at the village of Kesterne soon after dark the same evening, 
without taking cold, although the river was thickly frozen 
over, and a passage cut through the ice, to allow the ferry boat 
to cross backwards and forwards. From this time I rapidly 
gathered strength, and at the end of a week was so much 
recruited, as to venture back to the hospital to see how those 
fared, whom I had left behind ; at the same time, it is very 
probable, to show how I had fared myself; without any fear 
of being detained, as I was evidently much stronger than 
when under their roof. To lessen the fatigue, I procured a 
horse for the excursion, and proceeded accordingly towards 
the river side. The risk I then ran, however unwarrantable, 
afforded me another opportunity of seeing the effect of a 
renewed attack of this dreadful disorder, upon a Scotch ser- 
geant of the Highland watch, who had had the fever twice, 
and both times recovered from it. He was a very stout man, 
and when I left the hospital, appeared in perfect health and 
strength. In the interval of my absence, he had been seized 
with it a third time, and when I saw him, had nearly finished 
his course ; he was speechless, and survived but a short time 
afterwards : I think this last time, he was ill only three days. 
Although I escaped any farther infection, yet I was punished 
for my temerity before getting back again to Kesterne. After 
crossing the river in the boat, I had to pass through a small 
sheet of shallow water which had been frozen, but was then 
broken up by the loaded waggons that passed that way. On 
getting up to it, I found it in a half frozen state, the old ice 
not being sufficiently strongly united again to bear the horse, 
which refused to pass it ; and on my urging him forward, he 
lay down with me in the water. It was with difficulty that I 
could extricate myself from him, and it is doubtful whether I 
should have succeeded, without the assistance of another per- 



1794.] CHAPTER III. 33 

son then at hand. In this wet condition I had a long distance 
to go, in a keen frosty night, in an open waggon, which the 
day following threatened a renewal of my illness ; but by the 
timely use of medicines, I was favoured, not according to my 
desert, to escape without any serious indisposition. 

In looking back at the marvellous manner in which I was 
sustained through all this conflict, and again restored as one 
brought back from the dead, I cannot avoid adverting to that 
period of my illness, when my mind felt so reconciled to 
the prospect of death, as before-mentioned ; and I now fully 
believe, from what I have since been mercifully favoured to 
experience, that so far from being in any degree prepared for 
such an awful event, a deceptive feeling must have been super- 
induced by the state of torpor and insensibility in which I 
then was, and which totally benumbed any better feelings and 
desires as to the future. To this may be added a predomi- 
nating fear, of having to endure more of those sufferings, of 
which I had had no small share ; which, the probability of 
being again restored to health seemed to banish every hope of 
escaping. Truly awful is the thought which this view of my 
then lost condition occasions, when I contemplate the woe and 
misery which must have been my eternal portion, if unutterable 
mercy and long-suffering had been withdrawn ; and if the soul 
had been required of one, who had witnessed no repentance 
towards God the Judge of all, except what at times the fear of 
punishment had extorted ; and who was a stranger to that saving 
faith in the Lord Jesus Christ, as the " Lamb of God that 
taketh away the sin of the world," — without which, his precious 
blood would have been shed in vain for me : — I should thus have 
died in my sins, which unrepented of, would have followed after 
to judgment, in terrible array against my guilty soul — and yet 
when my end was apparently so near and inevitable, if such 
questions as are frequently proposed on the like occasions had 
been put to me, I have little doubt, but satisfactory answers 
would have been returned, as to my belief and hope in the 
essential truths of the gospel. But alas ! this would have been 
from hearsay and traditional report, and not from any heartfelt 



34 CHAPTER III. [1794. 

saving knowledge of my own : for it is now plain to my under- 
standing, that no man can have saving faith in Jesus Christ, 
who is unacquainted with, and does not walk in, the light of 
that Divine Spirit, which is so justly styled the Spirit of faith. 
It is through this alone, that the death and sufferings of Christ 
and his whole sacrifice for sin are availing, and truly applied 
to all those, who through faith lay hold of him, the true Light 
and Saviour of them that believe in his inward and spiritual 
appearance. These can say to others from sensible and blessed 
experience, — " Behold the Lamb of God, that taketh away the 
sin of the world :" they have received the atonement by Him, 
and they reap the glorious fruit and benefit of his death and 
suffering for sin, by the sacrifice of himself, and of his resurrec- 
tion and ascension ; in that he ever liveth to make intercession 
for those, who are thus willing to come unto God by him. A 
man may yield an assent to all the great and solemn 
truths of Christianity, — the miraculous birth, holy life, cruel 
sufferings, ignominious death, and glorious resurrection and 
ascension of our blessed Eedeemer; — he may believe in the 
abstract, in his inward and spiritual appearance in the hearts of 
mankind by his Holy Spirit ; and yet he may fall short of the 
prize immortal, — unless he comes to witness the saving opera- 
tion of the Hdly Spirit in his own heart, and to know thereby, 
through faith in it, a purifying preparation for the kingdom of 
righteousness, peace, and joy in the Holy Ghost. How can I 
sufficiently appreciate or declare the extent of the endless 
mercy, which suffered me not to perish in the midst of my 
sins, when so many were swept away by the same pestilential 
disorder ? 

After having mentioned the facts connected with my sick- 
ness and recovery, it seems only due, however feeble on my 
part the effort, to endeavour to commemorate such gracious 
dealings with humble gratitude and reverence ; earnestly 
desiring that no motive whatever may be allowed to prevail 
with me for making the attempt, but that of promoting the 
glory and honour of the great name ; that others may know, 
and fear, and believe in the all-sufficiency of that power, which 



1794.] CHAPTER III. 

hath " shewed me the path of life," and which alone can 
for their instruction what has been written, to press the 
necessity of contending for that saving faith " once delivered 
to the saints." Without it, all religious profession is a dream, 
a shadow, and a doubt ; but with it, a glorious reality ; — yea, 
" the substance of things hoped for, the evidence of things not 
seen," — even the salvation of the soul, through Christ Jesus 
our Lord. 

Whilst the severity of the winter greatly facilitated the 
operations of the French army, by enabling them to cross the 
frozen rivers without difficulty, and at almost any given point ; 
so it contributed most effectually to harass the diminished 
numbers of the retreating British forces. It was the more 
felt from the scarcity of provisions, occasioned by the inhabi- 
tants withholding from us every supply, in compliance with 
the intimidating threatenings of our victorious enemy ; so that 
we frequently could not procure needful food even for money : 
whilst our opponents were supplied by the terrified house- 
holders at free cost. In some places, the inhabitants openly 
declared they were withholding their provisions for the supply 
of the French, aware of the cruel treatment they should wit- 
ness at their hands, if unable to provide for them when they 
arrived ; although they considered the British to be their 
friends, and were well treated by them. 

Before I left the hospital at Ehenin, the French had 
approached so near, that the windows of the place frequently 
shook with the discharge of their artillery. Sometimes a 
waggon load of the wounded English would arrive at the hos- 
pital; when many, whose recovery would in a healthy situa- 
tion have been speedy and almost certain, were carried off in a 
few days, by the infectious disorder which prevailed at the 
place ; and from the disastrous issue of the campaign, how- 
ever greatly this was to be deplored, it could not be avoided. 
We were not long permitted to remain at Kesterne, before 
being obliged to move towards the north of Holland ; when the 
town of Rhenin with the hospital fell into the hands of the 
enemy. Soon after this event, the frost became more intense ; 

d 2 



36 CHAPTER III. [1794. 

and the Dutch could no longer make graves for the interment 
of the dead, but piled the coffins upon each other in great 
numbers, until a thaw took place. 

Although my strength was considerably recruited before we 
left Kesterne, I was yet very unequal to the subsequent 
exposure, having to pass great part of the first night in the 
frost after leaving that place : but although I slept in a cart 
with a canvass tilt, I do not remember taking cold, or other- 
wise experiencing any injurious effects, either then or after- 
wards, beyond what might have been expected from great 
fatigue and improper diet, there being at that time little to be 
procured, but coarse black bread and ardent spirits. During 
this harassing march, at such an inclement season, many of 
the poor men lost parts of their toes, by imprudently sitting 
down in the frost for too long a time at once, and from not 
having their feet properly protected. I can well remember 
having been so wearied myself, as to come to the determination 
to sit down, and risk the consequence, — although fully aware of 
the danger of falling asleep in such circumstances ; but I was 
prompted by a secret impulse to resist the inclination, although 
nearly overcome with fatigue : then after moving about awhile 
longer, I have again begun to give way, but still struggled on. 
And when at last, it seemed as if human nature must give up, 
the thought of relations in England, as if I had had a home, 
would cross my mind, and stimulate me to try again in hope, 
until something has occurred, to bring relief, and shelter, and 
repose. Perhaps, if more food could have been procured, the 
propensity to sleep, which exposure to cold occasioned, would 
have been irresistible. 

In this manner the winter wore away : but at length we got 
so far out of the reach of the French, as to allow a longer space 
of time for rest at each place we arrived at. The cold weather 
continued, until we reached the banks of the river Weser ; when 
the retreating wreck of our army was unexpectedly cheered 
with a sight of the mast-heads of the British fleet lying off 
Bremen-leke, and waiting to convey it from the shores of the 
Continent ; where it had witnessed so much distress, wasting, 



] 795.] CHAPTER III. 37 

and destruction, — to be attributed much, more to hardship, 
fatigue, and pestilence, than to the sword of the enemy, 
although greatly superior to us in strength, and possessing 
local advantages, of which we were wholly destitute.* 



[Here ends the Author's biographical sketch of his own life.] 

* It is stated in the Annual Register, that on the arrival of the British 
army at Bremen, the kind and cordial treatment they received from its 
inhabitants, was strongly contrasted with the hard-heartedness and hos- 
tility of the Dutch. ' It was something like a dream,' says a witness 
and partaker of their sufferings :' — ' we who had lately been so buffeted 
about, driven like vagabonds through frost and snow over the wilds of 
Holland ; and who, in our greatest extremities when we asked for any 
thing to refresh ourselves, with the money in our hands, were answered 
only with a shrug of the shoulders ' nothing for the Englishman !' — 
now to be seated in the most elegant apartments, — servants attending, 
ready to anticipate every wish, — beds of down to repose upon, without 
being disturbed in the morning by the thundering of cannon, or the 
usual alarms of war. They omitted nothing that could contribute to 
either our ease or pleasure : and a great number of the inhabitants 
accompanied us out of the town, and showed us every respect. — Annual 
Register, 1795, p. 55, 56. 



38 CHAPTER IV. [1795. 



CHAPTER IV. 

SAILS WITH HIS REGIMENT TO THE WEST INDIES REMARKABLE 

PRESERVATION SERIOUS IMPRESSIONS RETURNS TO ENGLAND 

BECOMES CONVINCED OF FRIENDS 1 PRINCIPLES RECEIVED INTO 

MEMBERSHIP IN 1797- — SETTLES IN BUSINESS AND MARRIES 

ACKNOWLEDGED A MINISTER IN 1816. 

It is matter of much regret, that for many years subsequently 
to this period, no biographical memoranda appear to have been 
made by our dear father ; and it is impossible at this distance 
of time, to supply any minute details of that important change 
in his sentiments and manner of life, which occurred shortly 
after the time to which the preceding narrative refers. 

In the autumn of 1795, he obtained a commission in 
a regiment destined for the West Indies, and sailed with 
the expedition appointed to this service, under Sir Ealph 
Abercrombie. After a most stormy and disastrous passage 
they were once in sight of the islands, but were driven back by 
a dreadful hurricane : in which several of the vessels foundered, 
and great numbers of the troops perished. A malignant fever 
also raged with fatal violence among the crews of the fleet, and 
in the ship in which he had embarked, no less than twenty- 
seven fell victims to it, within a short space of time. 

Our dear father experienced some remarkable preservations 
at this time, to which he often referred afterwards, as the 
merciful interpositions of an overruling providence in his 
behalf: of these, one in particular appears to have arrested 
his attention. The vessel in which he was appointed to sail, 
and which was considered a remarkably fine one, was exceed- 
ingly crowded, from the preference given to her by many of the 
officers. One morning after they had been some weeks at sea, 
a collier (being one of the vessels hired as transports,) coming 
alongside, he proposed to one of his friends, that they should 



1796.] CHAPTER IV. 89 

go on board of her. His fellow-officers ridiculed the idea of 
preferring an old collier to the noble ship in which they 
were ; but he and his friend persisted, and transferred them- 
selves to her. The same evening a hurricane arose, and the 
vessel they had quitted was never heard of afterwards. In 
connexion with this period, he once remarked to a friend, on 
being questioned as to the means made use of in the Divine 
hand for effecting " a new birth unto righteousness 1 ' in his 
heart, — that he could not remember any outward means having 
been employed, unless, indeed, he might except a storm at sea, 
during which his mind was deeply affected ; and when, under a 
feeling of his own lost condition by nature, he was mercifully 
enabled also to see the remedy, and the entire spirituality of 
the Grospel dispensation. In accordance with this feeling, he 
remarked, — ' I was at this time convinced of Friends 1 prin- 
ciples, they being neither more nor less in my estimation, than 
pure Christianity. I remember when the Friends visited me 
on my application for membership, I told them I was con- 
vinced at sea ; for I verily believed, in looking back, that this 
had been the case : no human means were made use of ; — it 
was altogether the immediate work of the Holy Spirit upon 
my heart. 1 Under these feelings, he became dissatisfied with 
the military profession, and resolved that, if permitted again to 
reach the shore, he would endeavour to lead a life of more 
circumspection, and which should tend to the glory of that 
Being, who had thus so mercifully visited him by His free 
grace. To this resolution he adhered : — he quitted the army 
in the early part of the year 1 796. 

For some time subsequently, to this event, he became an in- 
mate in the family of his eldest sister, Barbara Hoyland ; who 
was settled in the neighbourhood of Sheffield, in Yorkshire. She 
had married a member of the Society of Friends ; and before 
the period of my father's joining them, had herself become 
convinced of their principles, and united herself to them. While 
residing with these near relatives, his mind became renewedly 
impressed with the importance of Divine truth ; and in the 
course of a few months, he was led openly to espouse those 
views of it, of which in after years, he was an unflinching 



40 CHAPTER IV. [1796. 

advocate. The little meeting which he attended in the early- 
part of his religious course, that of Handsworth Woodhouse, 
was usually held in silence ; and he has been often known to 
refer to some of those solemn seasons, as times of peculiar 
instruction to his mind ; in which the power of the Lord was 
sensibly felt, and his Truth revealed. 

Being made a partaker of the great privilege enjoyed by 
those who are of the flock of Christ, in being enabled to dis- 
tinguish between the voice of the Good Shepherd and that of 
the stranger, he was earnestly desirous that obedience should 
keep pace with knowledge. He waited patiently upon the 
Lord for instruction in his various steppings; and being 
brought into a state of deep humility and prostration of spirit, 
he was made sensible, that the only path in which he could 
walk with safety, was that of self-denial. Much mental con- 
flict was at this season his portion ; but peace was only to be 
obtained by an entire surrender of the will : and in conformity 
with what he believed to be required of him, he adopted the 
plain dress. He once recounted to a friend in lively terms, 
the trial it was to him to put on a different hat to that which 
he had been accustomed to wear ; especially as in going to the 
meeting at Woodhouse, he generally met a number of his 
former gay acquaintances, whom he crossed on the way to 
their place of worship, which he had himself previously 
been in the practice of attending. In this instance, it was 
hard to appear openly as a fool before men; he thought if 
his natural life might have been accepted as a substitute, he 
would gladly have laid it down : — but this was not the thing 
required. He diligently examined his heart, and believed he 
clearly saw his Master's will in the requisition ; and that it 
was a discipline designed to bring him into a state of childlike 
obedience and dependence. In great distress he cried unto 
the Lord for help ; and a passage of scripture was powerfully 
applied to his mind, — " whosoever shall confess me before men, 
him will I confess also before my Father which is in heaven : 
but whosoever shall deny me before men, him will I also deny 
before my Father which is in heaven." His resolution was 
immediately taken : — he put on the hat, and with his mind 



1797. j CHAPTER IV. 41 

staid upon the Lord, set out to join his Friends at meeting. 
His difficulties vanished, — sweet peace was his covering ; and he 
was enabled experimentally to know the fulfilment of that 
declaration, — " greater is He that is in you, than he that is in 
the world." 

In the course of the year 1797, he was received into mem- 
bership with the Society of Friends ; and about the same 
time, he entered into business in Sheffield, in the seed trade. 
To this novel occupation he applied himself with that energy 
and assiduity, which characterized all his pursuits ; and by the 
Divine blessing on his exertions, he soon succeeded in obtain- 
ing a business fully adequate to his very moderate desires. It 
was striking to some of those around him, to observe how 
readily he adapted himself to this total change of habits ; 
and with what true content and cheerfulness he engaged in 
the drudgery and toil of a retail shop ; — the daily attendance 
in which, rested for some years exclusively on himself. He 
has been frequently heard to refer to this period of his life, 
as one of great peace and comfort ; and it appears to have 
been a time, in which his experience of the reality and power 
of Divine grace was deepened and enlarged. It was his daily 
practice, at those intervals when the attendance in his shop 
could be dispensed with, if but for a few minutes at a time, 
to retire to a small apartment behind it, and in a prayerful 
spirit to explore the contents of the sacred volume : the light 
which shone upon many passages as he read, and the clear and 
strong views of religious truth which were then unfolded to 
his seeking soul, were such, as greatly to confirm his faith, 
and strengthen him to persevere in that strait and narrow 
path, into which his feet had been so mercifully turned. The 
study of many of the prophetical books of holy writ, was at 
this time the means of great comfort and encouragement to 
him ; and the extensive and accurate knowledge of these parts 
of Scripture, for which he was afterwards conspicuous, was then 
chiefly acquired. 

It was his uniform practice, from his first commencement in 
trade, to close his shop during the hours of worship on week 
days ; and though this must have required a strong exercise of 



42 CHAPTER IV. [1800. 

faith, at a time when his future support seemed to depend on 
his assiduity and exertion, he was never satisfied to neglect 
the worship of Almighty God, from the prospect of any 
outward advantage ; and he has often expressed his belief, 
that a blessing had rested on this sacrifice of apparent interest 
to duty. 

Soon after settling in Sheffield, the acquaintance with our 
dear mother commenced ; and they were united in marriage, on 
the 13th of the Sixth Month, 1800. She was the daughter 
of Thomas and Bachel Brady, of Thorne ; and her family had 
been connected with the Society of Friends almost from its 
rise. Being a person of peculiarly mild and amiable disposition, 
and fully devoted to the promotion of the views and wishes 
of her beloved husband, she proved a true help-meet for 
him ; and their union was productive of much solid happiness 
to both. The great delicacy of her constitution, at times 
involved him in much solicitude, and seemed to give warning 
of an early termination of that domestic felicity, for the simple 
pleasures of which, few, perhaps, have ever possessed a keener 
relish than himself; but their union was mercifully pro- 
tracted to the lengthened term of thirty-two years : through 
all the vicissitudes that were permitted to attend them, she 
evinced that deep and devoted attachment, which led her 
cheerfully to forego every other enjoyment, and cordially to 
unite in every step which he felt called upon to take, however 
great the sacrifice it involved to her gentle and retiring nature. 
She may be said to have possessed pre-eminently the ornament 
of a meek and quiet spirit ; and notwithstanding the great 
mildness of her disposition, this was most happily tempered 
with a degree of firmness and moral courage, by which she was 
enabled calmly to meet those dangers and difficulties, before 
which a casual observer might have anticipated that her gentle 
spirit would have shrunk. As a wife and a mother, she has, 
perhaps, rarely been surpassed in disinterested affection, or in 
that constant and quiet consideration for those around her, 
which led her habitually to forget her own liability to fatigue, 
and cheerfully to put forth all her energies for the promotion 
of their comfort and welfare. 



1809.] CHAPTEE IV. 48 

Although my dear father for a series of years subsequently 
to this period, was actively engaged in attention to business, he 
was watchful to prevent its engrossing more of his thoughts, 
than was consistent with higher duties. As a tradesman, he 
uniformly maintained an unblemished character for integrity 
and fair dealing ; and his daily course of conduct was cha- 
racterised by an habitual reference to a higher principle than 
that of mere interest ; which insured for him, in no common 
degree, the respect and confidence of those with whom he was 
connected. At length his health began to give way, under the 
close attention which he had thought it needful to give to 
business; and about the year 1809, he removed to a short 
distance from Sheffield, for the advantages of greater quiet and 
more exercise in the open air. This proved a great relief to 
him ; but some time afterwards, finding that his concerns in 
trade continued to increase upon him, and demanded a closer 
attention than he felt satisfied to give, he thought it his duty 
to relinquish a branch, and that a very profitable one, of the 
business which he had so successfully established. When his 
mind was once satisfied as to the path of duty in the case, he 
hesitated not to yield a full and unmurmuring compliance ; 
although, with an increasing family dependent on his exer- 
tions, and the comparatively slender means which he pos- 
sessed, this step must have required no small exercise of faith, 
and in the eyes of the wise and prudent around him, appeared 
a doubtful one. To him^ however, it occasioned not one 
moment's regret ; and as he sought not great things for him- 
self, so the gracious and bountiful Master whom he served, 
failed not amply to supply his every want, and to grant him at 
the same time that blessing which maketh truly rich, and 
whereunto no sorrow is added. 

His attention was now a good deal turned to agricultural 
pursuits, in the management of which he took great delight : 
indeed, rural occupations and the simple pleasures of a country 
life, harmonized peculiarly with his pious feelings ; and he 
loved to trace in the works and beauties of creation, the good- 
ness and power of the great Creator. It appears to have been 
in reference to the step just adverted to, that the following 
note, addressed to some intimate friends, was written : — 



44 CHAPTER IV. [1809. 

' Forasmuch as it has pleased Almighty God, in his unut- 
terable mercy and great condescension, in so eminent a manner 
to rescue my soul from the paths of vice and inevitable destruc- 
tion, it seems incumbent upon me, in gratitude for such an 
unspeakable favour, to endeavour as much as in me lieth, to 
make all the return I am capable of; and as much as possible, 
through His Divine assistance, to dedicate the residue of my 
days to so gracious and merciful a Creator. I have at seasons 
for some years past, when it has pleased the Lord to humble 
me and make me sensible of my extreme unworthiness, been 
made willing to make a surrender of my life and my all to Him 
and His divine disposal ; and the query has often been raised 
in my heart, what shall I render unto the Lord for all his 
benefits towards me ? As I have from time to time endea- 
voured to dwell near, and abide in and under, the calming 
influence of His power, I have been led to believe, that some- 
thing sooner or later would be required as a sacrifice on 
my part : and having for a considerable time past, been fully 
convinced not only from my own feelings, but from impres- 
sions made upon my mind by divers testimonies borne by 
exercised Friends, of the necessity of my separating myself as 
much as may be from the world and from the things of the 
world, — and having felt the force of our Lord's declaration on the 
Mount, — " Ye cannot serve God and mammon ;" — I am sensible 
that the time is at hand, for me to put into practice what I believe 
to be an indispensable duty. After having experienced such a 
wonderful and great deliverance from the power of sin and 
Satan, even as a " brand plucked out of the burning, ,, it cannot 
be supposed that the remainder of my life ought to be spent in 
the hurry and bustle of business of any kind, and particularly 
in one which has so much increased as to require more attention 
than I am capable of paying to it, even if I had no claims of a 
higher and more important nature to attend to. I have fre- 
quently thought of late, that taking an active partner might 
answer the end intended, and be a means of removing part of 
the weight and care from off my shoulders, and at the same 
time set me at liberty to attend distant meetings, and take 
exercise in the open air, which my health very much requires : 
but having given this a solid consideration, I have found 



1809.] CHAPTER IV. 45 

that it would only be doing things by halves, — as great respon- 
sibility and anxiety would still rest upon me : it would seem also 
like making a reserve of the best of the sheep, and the best of 
the oxen, the bleating and lowing of which would be con- 
tinually in my ears. I therefore fully believe, that it will be 
most conducive to my present peace, as well as future well- 
being, entirely to give up the trade I am at present engaged 
in, and retire with my family into a small compass. Not that 
I have acquired a sufficiency, without doing something for a 
livelihood ; — far from it. I have still a prospect of maintaining 
my family comfortably, with care and industry, leaving the 
event to Him who knows the thoughts and intents of the heart : 
and though my income will be smaller than it is at present, my 
expenses will be smaller in proportion. It will no doubt be a 
matter of surprise to some, that one who has so young a family 
should think of declining so prosperous a trade, as many people, 
I believe, think mine is. To these I answer, that I have no 
desire to accumulate riches for my children ; the blessing 
seldom attends it, and the baneful effects thereof are too often 
visible, even in our society. This is a matter of no small im- 
portance with me, — it is not a sudden thing. I wish to consult 
my friends, and to take their advice in it. It has been a long 
time growing with me, and latterly has scarcely ever been out 
of my thoughts ; and not having frequent intercourse with my 
friends, it seemed best for me to state in writing the principal 
grounds for taking such a step, which might be readily handed 
to those most likely to impart counsel."' 

Perhaps the whole bearing of these impressions was never 
fully understood, even by himself, till some years subsequently ; 
when he was called upon to make a still further surrender of his 
will to that of his heavenly Father, by quitting his native 
country, and the bosom of that society which he so much 
loved, and going forth at the call of apprehended duty to sojourn 
in a strange land. But to return to the period of which we 
have been speaking. Though he had been necessarily much 
occupied with his own concerns, he had not been a useless or 
inactive member of the religious body to which he was united . 
For many years he filled the office of overseer in the meeting 



46 CHAPTER IV. [1809 to 

to which he belonged ; and in discharge of the duties connected 
with it, he was remarkable for his unwearied zeal and charity, 
his labour, his forbearance, and brotherly-kindness. The power 
of Divine grace having wrought so effectually on his own mind, 
his benevolence extended to the whole human family. 

For a number of years, the impression was strong upon his 
mind, that he should be called to the work of the ministry ; but 
in connexion with this feeling he was long harassed with doubts 
and fears. He was not rebellious, but his faith was weak; 
he earnestly desired to have indubitable evidence that such was 
indeed the will of his Lord and Master : but He who knew the 
sincerity of his heart, graciously condescended, in his own good 
time, to leave him without a doubt on this important subject; 
He underwent deep baptisms of spirit ; indeed such were his 
mental conflicts, that his health materially suffered. In re- 
ferring to this circumstance at a subsequent period, he remarked 
to a friend, that he regarded it as an especial blessing to him : 
for sometimes he slept little, and frequently his nights were spent 
in prayer ; at other times, prayer being his last engagement 
previous to consigning himself to sleep, he found in the morning, 
(to use his own expression) his ' mind still covered with the same 
precious influence. I think, 1 he added, ' I at that time knew in 
measure what it was to " stand continually upon the watch-tower 
in the day time, and to be set in my ward whole nights. 11 1 His 
mind at this time appeared to be particularly impressed with the 
feeling of the great uncertainty of time ; so that he has been 
heard to acknowledge, that for months together he seldom lay 
down in bed, without endeavouring to commit his soul into the 
hands of the Lord ; feeling it very uncertain whether he should 
be permitted to see the morning's light. In reference to this 
period, a dear friend remarks : — ' Of that time, and of many 
months previous to his appearance as a minister, my recollec- 
tion is very clear. We were then confidential friends, and often 
together ; and during the lapse of years that has intervened, 
I have frequently reverted to it. The exercise which then 
attended him, almost bore down the natural cheerfulness of his 
disposition ; — he was so serious, so humble, so watchful, lest at 
any time he should be thrown off his guard in the freedom of 



1816.] CHAPTER IV. 47 

conversation ; and lest he should dissipate the influence of that 
heavenly love and goodness, which often filled his mind, and led 
him into holy covenant with his Lord. He one day took me to 
a small field nearly surrounded by trees, on the south side of 
his house, where he told me he was accustomed to retire alone 
at an early hour of the morning and late in the evening, and 
often at noon when at home ; thus adopting the resolution of 
David: — "Evening and morning and at noon will I pray:" 
the spiritual communion he witnessed there, and at many other 
times, would strengthen him no doubt in his earnest endeavour 
to perform the will of his Divine Master. Yet it was only 
from his deportment that I judged my dear friend to be under 
preparation for the work of the ministry. He spoke of that 
exercise to no one, and when our friend, Sarah Lamley, who 
visited families in Sheffield in the summer of 1813, and in the 
sitting with his family, told him she was sensible that he was 
called to that important work, his dear wife heard it with 
extreme surprise.' 

Sitting in meeting on one occasion, he was particularly im- 
pressed with the language of our Saviour, after he had cleansed 
the leper; — " Were there not ten cleansed, but where are the 
nine I I tell you there are not found that returned to give glory 
to God, save this stranger." The remembrance that he had 
ever read such a passage in the sacred volume was entirely 
obliterated from his mind ; he thought he felt the requisition 
of duty to address it to the meeting, but he was perplexed ; he 
knew not at the time where it was to be found : he gave way 
to reasoning, — his dependence not being simply on the Lord 
alone ; and in great distress of mind, he allowed the meeting 
to break up. He hastened home, and opening his bible, the 
first passage that met his eye was, — "were there not ten 
cleansed," &c. He was deeply affected : — he entered renewedly 
into covenant with the Lord, that if He would be pleased again 
to visit him, he would be more faithful ; and when again he felt 
the requisition, he was strengthened in much brokenness to 
comply. A sweet and inexpressible feeling of peace was merci- 
fully permitted to follow this sacrifice ; confirming to his mind 
that it was indeed a sacrifice prepared of the Lord. From this 



48 CHAPTEH IV. [1816. 

time he continued occasionally to express a few words in the 
line of the ministry ; and not ^infrequently he was permitted to 
derive comfort from the united exercise of others engaged in 
this work, who were occasionally led to express the substance 
of the burden he himself was labouring under : — this was very 
confirming to his mind : and he has been heard to recount with 
gratitude to God, his condescension to him during this period 
of infancy in the work. 

At one time, accompanying a female minister, who had 
appointed a public meeting to be held in a Methodist meeting- 
house, he was prevailed upon to go with her into the pulpit. 
He had never spoken in a meeting of that description, and he 
had no apprehension that in such an assembly he should be 
called upon to take any conspicuous part. But his mind soon 
became involved in exercise ; and being unwilling to yield to 
it, the Friend's way was quite obstructed, — no door of utterance 
was given. He saw and felt this, and arose, but under such 
conflict, as made him involuntarily cover his eyes with his 
hands ; and in this attitude he addressed the meeting. His 
companion followed ; and through the Divine blessing, the meet- 
ing was crowned by the sensible feeling of the overshadowing 
love of their heavenly Father. 

He was acknowledged a minister in the year 1816; and 
shortly afterwards he accompanied another Friend in a visit to 
the meetings in Lancashire, and some parts of Yorkshire. 



1817.] CHAPTER V. 49 



CHAPTER V. 

PROSPECT OF DUTY IN RUSSIA OFFERS HIMSELF TO THE RUSSIAN 

GOVERNMENT TO SUPERINTEND AGRICULTURAL IMPROVEMENTS 

NEAR PETERSBURG VOYAGE TO CRONSTADT, 1817 INTERVIEW 

WITH PRINCE GALITZIN AT PETERSBURG, ALSO WITH THE 
EMPEROR VOYAGE HOMEWARD. 

A new field of action was now about to open before him, for 
which his mind had been secretly preparing, until a willingness 
had been begotten in his heart, to follow the requisitions of his 
Lord, whithersoever these might lead him, or whatever sacrifice 
to his natural feeling, an acquiescence in them might involve. 

For several years, he had an impression that it would be re- 
quired of him to go abroad. This prospect frequently cost him 
much exercise of mind ; and one day whilst pacing up and 
down his parlour, feeling unusually burdened under it, he 
was led earnestly to cry unto the Lord, desiring that he 
would be pleased to show him to what part of the world he 
must go. One of his children was in the room putting- 
together a dissected map, and as his father approached him, 
his eye rested on Petersburg with such an intimation that 
thither his Divine Master would send him, that, said he, in 
relating the circumstance many years afterwards to an intimate 
friend, 4 I never afterwards doubted :' he however kept the 
matter entirely to himself, believing that when the right time 
should come, way would be made for him. 

Early in the year 1817, enquiry having been made, by 
order of the late Emperor of Russia, for a person to undertake 
the management of an agricultural establishment in his 
dominions, Daniel Wheeler believed it his duty to offer him- 
self for this service. The Emperor, as the reader may recollect, 
visited this country, in the year 1814, and was much struck 
with the perfection of the English system of farming. His 
attention had been drawn in several ways to the Society of 

E 



50 CHAPTER V. [1817. 

Friends ; and a casual visit made to the farm of a Friend, on 
the Brighton road, had given him a favourable impression of 
their character as agriculturists. This impression, as the event 
proved, was not soon effaced ; for having three years after- 
wards concluded on the drainage and cultivation of certain 
marshes and waste lands, in the immediate neighbourhood of 
Petersburg, and enquiry being made in England for a suitable 
manager for this work, the Emperor particularly specified his 
wish, that a member of the Society of Friends should be 
selected. The information was circulated in the Society, by the 
late Richard Phillips of Wandsworth ; and the following extract 
from a letter received from a Friend of Sheffield, in reference 
to this subject, is inserted as showing the manner in which 
this undertaking was entertained by D. W. 

Second Month 15th, 1817. 
Little did I suppose on the receipt of thy letter of the 
22nd, that I should have occasion so speedily to reply to it. 
Soon after reading it, I observed to my wife, if such a Friend 
as Daniel Wheeler had believed it right to embark in such an 
undertaking, I knew of no person, that for all the purposes 
required, might be so fully recommended. But this idea did 
not at that time operate farther on my mind, than to induce 
me to conclude to take him into consultation, respecting some 
one well qualified. On the receipt of thy letter, he was 
engaged in a family visit in a neighbouring meeting. In con- 
sequence, I was prevented from communicating the subject to 
him, until yesterday ; when I perceived, to my surprise, that 
it made considerable impression on his mind, and that, from 
some questions he put to me, he was making the application to 
himself. Without noticing this, I told him, I wished he 
would give the overtures of the Emperor a place in his 
thoughts ; and if any eligible person occurred to him, to inform 
me within a week. But my surprise was increased this morn- 
ing, by his coming to inform me, that it would be mere form 
to defer acknowledging, that his mind was already made up to 
offer himself for the situation, for which it had been preparing 
more than two years. Great as the trial will be to many, to 



1817.] CHAPTER V. 51 

spare such an one out of our Monthly Meeting, there was an 
assent in my mind, like that of " thou art the man." I have 
often said, that in respect both to civil and religious attain- 
ments, I knew of no one, moving in a similar sphere, who is so 
much qualified for the superintendence and the direction of 
others. A novice as to the world, or one who had had little 
experience as to the ways of men, however much he might 
have had of agriculture, would want many requisites, essential to 
the filling with propriety a station, designed to be under the 
immediate eye of an Emperor. In his character, so much of 
true dignity is united with Christian humility, as qualifies him 
to appear before princes. 

After acquiring the first reputation in Sheffield as a trades- 
man, he took a farm, as if to give proof of his practical skill 
in agriculture ; which has excited the admiration of the 
neighbourhood, and demonstrated that his talents in this 
direction are of a superior kind. 

For a person of his qualifications, to come forward on the 
ground of religious sensibility, appears to me an extraordinary 
instance of devotedness ; but he has been heard to say, he has 
been forgiven so much, that he cannot give too great proof of 
gratitude and attachment to the King of kings. If he enter 
upon this undertaking, it will be no small sacrifice in a 
pecuniary consideration, which he will have to make. - 

One of the first difficulties which presented itself, in regard 
to this movement, was that of mentioning his prospect to 
our dear mother. He believed her timid nature would be 
ready to shrink under such a requirement. His distress there- 
fore on her account was great : but what was his surprise and 
comfort, when on informing her, and querying whether she 
could leave her friends and native land to go with him, she 
sweetly and calmly acquiesced ; stating her belief, that if it 
was the will of the Lord, strength would be given them to 
bear the trial, as well as ability to perform the service required, 
whatever it might be. 

His own explanation of the motives which induced him to 
enter into this engagement, is thus given by himself, in a 

e2 



52 chapter v. [1817. 

paper addressed to an official person in Petersburg, during his 
first visit to that city, from which the following is extracted : — 

Eighth Month 13$, 1817. 
It seems altogether unnecessary to preface what I am about 
to state in this memorial, seeing that the truth never did, nor 
ever will need any apology. I shall therefore proceed by 
observing, that it is now two years and a half since the subject 
of visiting Russia, and rendering myself useful in promoting 
the happiness of its numerous inhabitants, was presented to 
the view of my mind, by that inward principle of light and 
grace, a manifestation of which is given to every man to profit 
withal, in which I believe ; and Petersburg was the place 
pointed out to me as the scene of my operations. It was, I 
must acknowledge, a prospect at which I was ready to shudder: 
for, although we may at times feel a willingness, and even 
profess it, to go with our Lord and Master into prison and 
unto death ; yet such is the frailty and weakness of human 
nature, that when the trying hour cometh, like Simon Peter, we 
are ready to deny Him. But He who is touched with a feeling 
and compassionate sense of our manifold infirmities, I trust 
saw that it was not wilful disobedience, but human weakness ; 
and He who only knoweth the thoughts and intents of the 
heart, — yea, from whom " the darkness hideth not, but the 
night shineth as the day, — the darkness and the light [being] 
both alike to Him," — in adorable condescension and mercy, 
doth at seasons qualify his poor, dependent, humble followers, 
acceptably to breathe the aspiration, — " Lord thou knowest all 
things, thou knowest that I love Thee." However, I must 
honestly confess, that at the time I could not possibly devote 
myself to such an undertaking ; for I am certain, that no 
earthly consideration whatever, could have induced me to 
leave my beloved wife and tender children : but He, who 
" bloweth with his wind, and the waters flow," — at whose touch 
the mountains of opposition melt down and vanish, hath by 
His wonder-working power, reduced my mind to a willingness 
to go, whensoever and wheresoever He is pleased to lead, and to 
do whatsoever he is pleased to call for. 



I817-] CHAPTER V. 53 

Some time after this, as I was returning home late one even- 
ing, I had a sense of invitation after this manner, ' What if the 
Emperor of Russia should want a person for the superintend- 
ence of agriculture :' — at which time a willingness was begotten 
in my mind to go, if that should be the case ; but when, or in 
what manner, this was to come to pass, was totally hidden from 
me. The frequent conflict of soul I had to pass through, none 
can conceive or have an idea of, but those who have been alike 
circumstanced ; all which was permitted in infinite wisdom, for 
the subjection of the natural will, and is what I verily believe 
all must pass through, before they can in sincerity of heart say, — 
" Not my will, but Thine be done." 

In this manner I was prepared for this great event, and I 
cannot but record it, as a great and signal event in the life of a 
private individual : for when a letter was received from Russia 
by Richard Phillips of London, a copy of which was sent to a 
Friend in Sheffield, and by him handed directly to me, it did 
not create any surprise, as I was in a state of preparation to 
receive it, and in daily expectation of something important 
coming to pass. The circumstances which afterwards took 
place, are too well known to need enumerating. 

I have had to leave my family for short periods of time, 
having been called upon to proclaim the glad tidings of the 
everlasting gospel, and to endeavour to stir up the pure mind 
by way of remembrance of those things that are most excellent, 
in visits to my brethren and sisters, in their separate churches, 
in different parts of England ; and I humbly hope the day's 
work was keeping pace with the day : but now a greater trial 
of faith was to be exercised, a greater sacrifice to be made ; — I 
must not only leave my family, but my country also. The 
second letter arrived from Russia, and the time seemed fully 
come. Accordingly I drank the cup with all its bitter dregs 

of separation, and tore myself away. 

If my proposals be altogether rejected, I do not know what I 
can do more. I have not stood at a distance, but have actually 
come into Russia, and offered myself, my family, and the sacri- 
fice of nearly all the resources I possess. If this offer be refused, 
I humbly trust the will will be accepted for the deed, and that 



CHAPTER V. 



[181' 



obedience will have kept pace with knowledge ; for verily it 
matters little our knowing, unless we practise also. It is 
" not the hearers of the law, but the doers of it, that are justi- 
fied" in the sight of Almighty God: it is "not everyone 
that saith, Lord ! Lord ! that shall enter into the kingdom of 
heaven, but they that do the will," &c. : — and again, " If ye 
know these things, happy are ye if ye do them." In this case, 
I shall of course return immediately home, and resume my 
former occupations ; committing myself to Him, who will not 
break the bruised reed, nor suffer it to be broken ; and 
whom I earnestly desire to serve to the latest moment of my 
breath.* 

To return to the narrative : — it was concluded that Daniel 
Wheeler should, in the first instance, visit Petersburg alone ; 
and for this purpose he set out from his home, towards the close 
of the Sixth Month, 1817; and, after making a satisfactory 
journey, returned the same autumn. The following are extracts 
from memoranda made during this visit : — 

On board the ' Loft," 1 115 miles from the Holderness Coast. 
Sixth Month 29th, First day. — My mind constantly bending 
towards home, and tracing the various situations and occupa- 
tions of my dear wife and family, as the different periods of the 
day advanced, and I remembered my beloved Friends in their 
Meeting at Sheffield; but I had very little opportunity for 
retirement myself, the affairs of the ship being much unsettled 
on account of having so recently come from harbour, and the 
cabin subject to frequent interruption. Last night my 
mind was disquieted, and being very desirous of promoting 
the safety of the ship, I stayed on deck until after midnight ; 
and when I lay down in my cabin, it was with reluctance, 
as if the ship was not safe, unless I was upon the look-out. 
I have felt deserted and uncomfortable a considerable part of 
the day ; but have been this evening favoured to see that 

* The above was copied from the original in ' the Chancerv of drainage 
and cultivation of the neighbourhood of Petersburg.' 



1817.] 



CHAPTER V 



it arose from want of holding fast my confidence, — from not 
being sufficiently resigned into His hands, " who sleepeth not 
by day, nor slumbereth by night," and without whose protect- 
ing arm of help, " the watchman waketh but in vain ;" and I 
believe that I have nothing to do but to be quiet, and endeavour 
patiently to trust in the all-sufficiency of His power. 

oQtk. — As the forenoon advanced, the wind increased and the 
sea arose, and by degrees we were obliged to diminish our can- 
vass. I have been a passive beholder of what has been going 
on upon deck, my mind now and then recurring to the cause of 
my being here; and I can, with humble gratitude, acknowledge 
that I feel myself free from any accusation, believing I am in 
my proper place ; and truly nothing short of this will do to lean 
upon. 

After a series of boisterous and contrary winds, we 
were favoured to anchor in the roads of Elsineur, about one 
o'clock, p.m., on the Second day, the 7th of Seventh Month, 
and the tenth day from leaving Hull. The captain going 
ashore to clear at the Quarantine Office, I accompanied him ; 
and whilst he attended to his duties, I walked as far as 
Cronenburgh Castle, also to a royal palace and garden not far 
distant. Here I may remark the attention paid me by a 
young Englishman, an entire stranger to me, who was very 
desirous of going about with me. 1 soon found he wished to 
converse on religious subjects ; and I gave him all the oppor- 
tunity I could. Before we parted, I was strengthened to 
declare to him the way of life and salvation : and may He 
who has begun the good work in his heart, be pleased to carry 
it on, to the praise of His own great and excellent name, — for 
it is His own works only that can praise Him. I believe the 
language of our blessed Lord may be applied to this young 
man, — " thou art not far from the kingdom of God. 1 ' We 
reached the ship in safety, between 11 and 12 o'clock at 
night, taking a pilot on board with us. If I should have been 
instrumental, in any degree, in fanning the immortal spark, 
which I believe to be mercifully kindled in the heart of this 
young Englishman at Elsineur, I shall think myself amply 
compensated for coming so far. 



56 CHAPTER V. [1817. 

Seventh Month 8th. — I think the Danish coast surpasses all I 
ever saw before for beautiful plantations, interspersed with 
houses, from Cronenburgh Castle to Copenhagen : at this 
place, the devastations committed by the British fleet, under 
the late Horatio Nelson, are still visible, and are suffered to 
remain in nearly the same ruinous state as they were left by 
our shipping. The king's residence is principally here. I 
observed at Elsineur a few solid countenances ; but I thought 
the generality of them seemed to be living as without God in 
the world, and the faces of many plainly show the low price at 
which spirituous liquors may be purchased. The pilot, who 
brought us through the grounds, appeared to be a thoughtful 
man, and conducted himself in a solid manner while with us ; 
my heart yearned over him as he left the ship, and I could not 
help craving that the Divine blessing might rest upon him. 

10th, Fifth day. — Fresh gales and fine weather; pressing 
forward before the sea and wind. I felt myself rather 
unwell this morning, and when I endeavoured to hold my 
solitary meeting in the cabin, I might have said, as Mary did, — 
" They have taken away my Lord, and I know not where they 
have laid Him." But I trust I am endeavouring to learn in 
all states to be content, — a very necessary qualification (how- 
ever difficult of attainment) for all poor finite beings. In the 
afternoon, saw the Island of Gothland, and hauled to the 
northward a little, to obtain a fresh departure from it. In the 
evening, poverty of spirit and indisposition of body were my 
portion ; I retired to rest early, and in the morning was 
favoured to feel my mind quietly resigned and comfortable, 
and nature refreshed. 

1 1 th, Sixth day. — Off the east end of Gothland, still running 
before the wind and sea. One of our sailors had managed, 
whilst we were at Elsineur, to get a supply of Hollands, with 
which the poor fellow had kept himself in a state of intoxica- 
tion, and was twice dismissed from the helm, for not keeping 
the ship in her course before the sea. This man when sober 
is an excellent sailor, and well knows how much depends upon 
the steering of a ship in these narrow rocky seas ; but such 
is his love of liquor, that his own life, the ship, and all her 



1817.] CHAPTER V. 57 

crew may take their chance, if he can but get his darling grog. 
He looks very grave at the helm this morning. 

12#A, Seventh day afternoon. — Gulf of Finland. We are now 
very near a small island called Oxholm, on which resides a 
respectable English widow, who suffered shipwreck here about 
twenty years ago : her husband was captain of the ship, and 
perished at the time. She could never be prevailed upon to 
leave the island, and by the interest of Admiral Greig, of the 
Russian navy, and his friends, she was enabled to open a board- 
ing school, to which the children of very respectable English 
families in Russia are sent : last year she had about forty 
scholars. There are few other houses, besides those belonging 
to her establishment. She has cultivated a piece of land as 
a garden ; and from the view we had of it just now, it wears 
the appearance of management and neatness : she has also 
the care of the light-house close to her dwelling. The island 
is not more than from three to four miles in circumference, and 
only four leagues from the main land. 

IStfA, First day. — Steering towards the island of Hogland, 
and expecting shortly to see it. I have had my silent sitting 
in the cabin this forenoon; but ships at sea are not very 
quiet places. I was however favoured with a sense of my own 
weakness, and humbled therewith. My mind has for these last 
two days begun to feel a burden upon it, which increases as we 
draw nearer to Petersburg ; and He only, who seeth the end 
from the beginning, knows what is to befall me there. But I am 
fully sensible, He will require no more than what strength and 
ability will be furnished to perform ; and I have abundant 
cause to trust in Him, " who walketh upon the wings of the 
wind, and maketh the clouds his chariot ;" — who not only com- 
mands the storm, but at His pleasure rebukes it, and causes 
the undulating waves to be at peace : of which I have had re- 
newed instances during our passage from England. I have this 
morning thought more than usual of my dear wife and family, 
desiring they might be comforted by the Great Comforter ; and 
I have traced some of them to their seats in Sheffield meeting, 
among my beloved brethren and sisters ; whom, though absent 
in body, my heart is often with, and on whose account, I have 



5S CHAPTER V. [1817. 

frequently felt, and still feel an affectionate interest, that every 
age and every class among them may come to know Him, 
" who is from the beginning,'" and sit under His teaching ; 
whose teaching remains to be excellent, to those who are happily 
found in the counsel of His will : — " bread will be given them, 
their waters will be sure," — even that bread which the world 
knows not of, and that water which will be in them a well of 
water springing up into everlasting life. 

Seventh Month 15th. — Arrived at Oronstadt. After the ship 
was secured, we went on board an old ship of war, fitted up as 
the Harbour Master's Office. In the places where the public 
business is transacted, are paintings of the saints richly orna- 
mented, before which the members of the .Greek church repeat 
their prayers : they make a point of bowing and crossing 
themselves as soon as they see them. I observed the people, 
employed in the office, stared very much at me, principally I 
believe on account of my wearing my hat. On going into 
the presence of the Port Admiral, of whom I had to obtain a 
pass. I observed he also noticed my hat ; and finding he could 
speak English, on his coming to inquire my name, I said, I 
hoped the keeping on my hat would not be considered as 
intended disrespect, and entered into an explanation of my 
reasons, for not taking it off unto man ; when he stopped 
me by saying, when it was omitted from any motive of religion, 
he did not wish it. I left Croustadt in the steam-packet that 
afternoon for Petersburg, and on landing there I was met by 
one of the Bible Society's agents, who conveyed me to the 
Bible Office, the gift of the Emperor to the Bible Society ; at 
which place I was treated with great kindness and courtesy, 
and found in it a quiet asylum for several clays. 

The next morning, I had an hour's conversation with Basil 
Papoff : he is called ' his Excellency,' and I think with 
some propriety, as he appears an excellent man. He thought 
my business would go on slowly, as the Emperor was so much 
engaged on account of the marriage of his brother, the Grand 
Duke Nicholas. I was introduced to the minister of the 
Moravian congregation here, also to William Glenn, who is 
going to Astrachan to translate the Scriptures into the Persian 



1S1 7.] CHAPTER V. 59 

language. I have also met another person from Scotland, who 
I have since found is desirous of knowing the way of Truth 
more perfectly. 

11th. — I traversed a considerable part of the city, and 
went up the country opposite the summer palace of Kamenny 
Ostrof, where the Emperor now resides. I think the 
generality of the soil is better than I expected to see it. I 
recognised clover and several kinds of grasses by the roadside, 
and abundance of weeds in the gardens, of pretty much the 
same kinds as we have in England. In returning, Ave passed 
the hut that Peter the Great at one time inhabited ; and we saw 
the boat built with his own hands. We passed through the 
public gardens, which are beautiful. Most kinds of provisions 
are good here ; but the water at this season is unwholesome. 
Thirteen cart-loads of Bibles and Testaments have been sent 
off to-day for Moscow. 

21st. — Took possession of a room at an inn kept by an 
Englishwoman. Drank tea with an English family, and had a 
good opportunity of explaining to the head of it, the nature 
of our silent meetings, which was such as he had no concep- 
tion of. He had an idea that Friends went to meeting to 
meditate, and he thought that might be done at home ; and that 
on account of the young people, we should, at any rate, read 
the Scriptures. I told him we read the Scriptures to them at 
home. He then concluded, it must be the bias of education, 
that reconciled us to sitting in silence. I replied it could not 
be so, as related to myself, for I was brought up in what is 
called the Established Church of England. This led to many 
questions on his part, all of which I was enabled to answer ; 
and best Help being near, I explained to him the nature of true 
worship, and that there was at seasons a power to be felt, which 
was before words were, and which will remain when words have 
ceased. He asked whether I came to a knowledge of the truth, 
whilst I was in communion with the Established Church. No, 
I said, never whilst I was pestered with words. I could 
not help inveighing against words, as they seemed to place all 
their confidence and dependence in them. 

Seventh Month 23rd. — Keceived a message that I was to be 



60 CHAPTER V. [1817. 

introduced to Prince (lalitzin to-day : I had little time to 
spare for preparations, but had not many to make, having no 
clothes but what I landed in, my luggage having been detained 
at the Custom house. I was accordingly conducted to the 
splendid mansion of the Prince, the entrance and marble stair- 
case of which were well lined with attendants ; in whose 
countenances surprise and anger were evidently depicted, at my 
assurance in keeping on my hat. We waited a short time in 
an open gallery, as the Prince was engaged ; and took a turn 
into a spacious room, the walls of which were hung with pictures 
of all the imperial family of Russia, from the first to the last. 
In a short time a messenger came to say that the Prince 
was at liberty ; when we were ushered into his apartment of 
ample size. The Prince came forward, and met us in a very 

courteous manner; and on introducing me, he took me by 

the hand, and we retired to the back part of the room, and sat 
down at the end of a writing table. He asked many questions 
with great affability in Russian, — my companion interpret- 
ing betwixt us. Amongst others, he inquired what family I 
had ; which being answered, he wished to know whether I 
would bring them all with me, if I came to reside in Russia. 
I said, ' Yes ; I should not leave a hoof behind :' at which he 
seized my hand, and expressed his satisfaction. He then 
inquired, how I should do, as there was no place of worship for 
me, — no meeting — no society, — how was that ? I told him the 
worship of Almighty Grocl was not confined either to time or 
place, — that it is neither in this mountain, nor at Jerusalem ; 
but in every place incense should be offered to His name, and a 
pure offering. After pausing a little, he desired the sentence 
might be thoroughly explained to him. He then seemed quite 
to understand it, bowing his head in a reverent manner, and 
appeared to ponder over it. In the midst of this, I found my 
mind drawn into silence ; but the Prince kept asking question 
after question, as if afraid of losing time : my answers were now 
very short ; and at last, I endeavoured to explain to my com- 
panion the situation I was in, but could not make him under- 
stand me. The conversation then turned to agriculture, and the 
soil of the neighbourhood, and to the Emperor; but as a burden 



1817.] CHAPTER V. 61 

still remained with me, I cannot recollect all he said, or what 
answers I made him. At last, we rose from our seats as with 
one accord ; but before the Prince had time to bid me farewell 
in his way, I found my time was come : and I was enabled to 
declare unto him the everlasting foundation,— even Christ Jesus, 
the rock of ages, — who was "to the Jews a stumbling block, and 
to the Greeks foolishness ;" but to them that obey his gospel 
inwardly revealed in the secret of their hearts, Christ crucified, 
the power of God, and the wisdom of God unto salvation. As I 
stopped at the end of every sentence, my companion interpreted, 
as if he had been accustomed to the work, and might have 
known what he was going to do. After we had finished, we stood 
like statues for a short time ; 
liberty, the Prince took me 
our languages are different, the language of the Spirit is the 
same. -1 He held my hand till we got near the door, when I 
bade him farewell, and departed, comparatively as light as a 
feather. I cannot but admire how I was guided ; for in 
delivering what was upon me to the Prince, at the end of every 
sentence, all was taken from me, as if I should have nothing- 
further to say ; but when had had sufficient time to 

interpret, then a supply was again vouchsafed. Whereas if I 
could have proceeded, as it were without stopping, I should 
have overpowered the interpreter, and the work would have 
been marred altogether. Thus the blind are guided in wavs 
that they know not, and in paths that they have not seen : 
but truly the pillars of my tabernacle were mightily shaken. 
May I ever be preserved in that humility, through which 
alone the grateful heart can bless His holy name ; " who re- 
deemeth our lives from destruction, and crowneth us with 
loving-kindness and tender mercies." 

In the afternoon, I met with some very humiliating circum- 
stances in the course of my business at the Custom-house, 
which helped to keep under the creaturely part. 

[From this time to the 15th of Eighth Month, Daniel Wheeler 
was employed in examining the waste crown lands and the 
marshes in the vicinity of the capital, in preparing reports of 
his investigations, &c] 



62 CHAPTER V. [181 7- 

Seventh Month 27 th, First day. — After I had sat down in my 
room to hold my meeting, I was interrupted by the coming 
of an individual, whom I had before seen. He resides about 
twenty versts from hence, and had come on purpose to inquire 
into the principles of Friends. He had once had a sight of 
' Barclay's Apology,' but was never able to get it a second 
time, and I much regretted I had not one to give him. He is 
well acquainted with the Scriptures, but very desirous of having 
them expounded and explained. After a long conversation, I 
referred him to the never-failing and only key, the Holy Spirit, 
by which they were given forth, and without which the natural 
man will ever read them in vain, — or when he has done, if he 
thinks he knows any thing, he knows nothing as he ought to 
know. He gave me a kind invitation to his house, and we 
parted in a friendly manner. 

Eighth Month 3rd, First day. — I spent the day at home in re- 
tirement. In the evening the city was illuminated, and I under- 
stand there was a great display of fire and water-works at the 
country palace of Peterhoff, on account of its being the saint's 
day of the Dowager Empress Mary. 

On the 15th, I began a letter to my dear wife, and had 
finished two sides of it, when I seemed quite at a loss for a 
subject, which I could not account for. I went into the yard, 
and walked up and down for fresh air; but had not been 
there long, when I received a message, that the Emperor would 
see me that afternoon, and that I was to be at five o'clock at 
the lodgings of Prince Galitzin, which are close to the gate of 
the palace of Kamenny Ostrof. Having been kindly assisted 
in procuring a conveyance, I was there in time, and the Prince 
received me with his usual openness. In about half an hour a 
messenger came, and (bareheaded) conducted me through the 
garden, and the different guards, who stared at me not a little. 
At last we entered the palace, and after going through a range 
of rooms, I was shown into the apartment of the Emperor, who 
received me with more parade than I expected ; but I thought 
afterwards this was only on account of the page, for as soon as 
the door was shut, he took me by the hand, saying, ' Sit down, 
sir.' I was not however, quite ready to sit down ; for the salu- 



1817.] 



CHAPTER V. 



tation arose in my heart, of " Grace, mercy, and peace be multi- 
plied, from God the Father, and our Lord Jesus Christ," upon 
the noble Emperor, &c. As I proceeded I took off my hat, and 
the Emperor stood quite still, until I had finished ; when we 
both sat down. He had several questions to ask, and expressed 
his surprise and satisfaction at the manner in which I had 
been led into Eussia. I had a great deal to say to him, and 
full opportunity to express every thing that arose on my mind. 
He mentioned my memorial, and I think touched upon e\erj 
particular head distinctly, and said he agreed to the whole. I 
then gave him a paper I had ready in my pocket book, which 
brought the peculiar principles of our Society into view ; this 
he read, and questioned me about all of them ; which gave 
time to clear myself fully. I had a good deal to say to him on 
silent waiting. I remember my last words were, the ex- 
pression of a desire that attended my mind, c that when time 
shall rob thee of thy earthly crown, an inheritance incorruptible 
and undefiled — a crown immortal, may be thy happy portion.' 
He held my hand fast in his for some time, and did not utter 
another word. I then returned to Prince Galitzin, and on 
taking leave, I had a little matter to express to him', which, 

who was present, interpreted. The next morning, I 

finished my letter to my wife, in time for the post, and thought 
myself clear of Petersburg : but in the evening, I found 
something like an invitation to such of the English people as 
inclined to sit down with me. 

The next day, after dining with J. Paterson, he invited me 
to go to hear their sermon, which I declined ; but afterwards I 
told him, that if his friends inclined to sit down with me in a 
large room at the Bible Office, if I had any thing for them they 
should have it, and if not, they must forgive me. It was 
accordingly fixed that we should meet at seven o'clock the next 
evening. I repaired thither about the time, and found a 
larger number assembled than I had any expectation of, in- 
cluding four ministers of the Independent denomination. 
Scarcely an individual amongst them had sat in silence before, 
in this way : it was, however, exercising to me, and we had 
a solemn sitting. I was enabled to declare the truth amongst 



64 CHAPTER V. [1817. 

them about three-quarters of an hour, to the relief of ray own 
mind, and the sitting ended well : there seemed something 
like an unwillingness on their part to break up : I was, I 
trust, thankful when it was over. 

The forepart of the 18th and 19th instant, was employed in 
taking leave of my friends, and preparing for my homeward 
voyage. On the 20th, I went down to Cronstadt by steam-boat, 
and proceeded at once on board the Fortune, a fine ship, for 
Hull. I concluded to remain on board, although the ship was 
not quite ready for sea ; and, as night came on, I began to be 
very uncomfortable, and was fearful I had been making more 
haste than I should have done, and that in my hurry I had 
not hit upon the right vessel. I walked the deck till late, and 
a willingness was wrought in my mind to quit the ship in the 
morning, if required. This exercise, being amongst entire 
strangers, made the pressure very heavy. I retired to my 
cabin, and got some rest, and when I awoke in the morning, 
I found my accusers were all gone, and tranquillity again 
restored ; for which I was thankful. Going on shore in 
the course of the day, I found a long looked for letter from 
home, and thankfulness was raised in my heart to the Giver of 
every good and perfect gift, for the cheering account it con- 
tained. 

Eighth Month 23rd. — We got out of the Mole this morning, 
and having been boarded by the guard-ship, by eleven o'clock 
all impediments were removed, and we proceeded down the 
Gulf, with a fair wind. 

24>th, First day. — When I awoke in the morning, I found 
the ship was rolling, which she would not have done if the wind 
had not been fair, and the sea following us ; so that I got up 
cheerfully. I went into my state room in the forenoon ; but 
found I could not get into any settlement of mind. The thought 
of proceeding homeward with a fair wind was too much for me 
to be able to keep out of view ; but I trust the Father of mer- 
cies saw my weakness with his eye of compassion. 

olst, First day. — Having no opportunity of sitting down 
in the cabin, I held my sitting upon deck; and though I met 
with many interruptions, yet I was favoured with settlement 



181 7. J CHAPTER V. 65 

of mind in a good degree. In the afternoon, rounded the 
Falsterbo Eeef, on which lay the wreck of a large ship, and at 
five o'clock made a signal for a pilot to carry us through the 
grounds ; but could not perceive one coming off to us. As I 
was walking the deck, it just passed my mind, how soon our 
prospects are blighted ; and going to the quarter-deck, I heard 
the sailor who was heaving the lead cry, ' by the deep four, a 
quarter less four, — by the mark three, a quarter less three,'' — and 
immediately after I felt the ship strike on a rock ; in a few seconds 
she struck a second time, and then stuck fast. The crew were 
of course all in a state of consternation, and the captain was 
almost speechless ; and indeed it was a serious moment, for the 
ship was under full sail when she struck, and on a lee shore too. 
The first thing was to take the sails off her ; then the boats 
were lowered, and two anchors carried out with strong haw- 
sers. During this time several ships passed, to whom our 
captaiu waved his hat by way of signal to keep off ; and very 
mortifying it certainly was, to see the different ships take in 
their pilots, and make sail. Soon after, a large boat full of 
men approached, with whom, the captain agreed, after hard 
bargaining, to carry out a large anchor for us : this took up 
some time, and as night came on, the wind rose, and things 
began to wear a gloomy aspect. I was favoured however to feel 
quietness cover my mind like a canopy ; and a petition arose in 
my heart to the Father of mercies, to bless the endeavours of 
the toiling crew. Whilst the Danish boat was receiving the 
anchor and cable, finding I could be of no use, I went below, 
and stretched myself on the locker, with my arm supporting 
my head. I continued in this position till the sailors began to 
heave upon the cable ; and, at length, I plainly felt her keel 
grate upon the rock. Being fully satisfied that she moved, I 
hastened on deck with the pleasing intelligence. Shortly after 
one in the morning the ship floated, and was soon in deep 
water again, which was cause of humble thankfulness. We 
anchored in Elsineur roads the same afternoon. 
[The voyage to England was completed in safety.] 



6*6 chapter vr. [1818. 



CHAPTER VI. 



REMOVES WITH HIS "WIFE AND FAMILY TO RUSSTA VOYAGE 

THITHER, 1818 — SETTLEMENT AT OCHTA NEAR PETERSBURG 

WILLIAM ALLEN AND STEPHEN GRELLET AGRICULTURAL SUCCESS 

VISIT FROM THE EMPEROR, &C. 



During the ensuing winter, D. W. was actively engaged in 
winding up his affairs preparatory to leaving England. Ample 
provision of agricultural implements, seeds and cattle, was 
also made ; and, at length, all being in readiness, he embarked 
for Russia, with his wife, family and assistants, in all twenty 
souls, on the 22nd of Sixth Month, 1818. 

The following memoranda are from the pen of a friend, and 
refer to this period. 

On the 18th of Sixth Month, 1818, we were agreeably sur- 
prised b}^ seeing our dear friend Daniel Wheeler, come into our 
meeting at Sheffield ; for he had taken leave of us, not expect- 
ing to meet us again before embarking for Petersburg : towards 
the close of the meeting, he expressed himself nearly as 
follows : — 

' It has afforded me consolation once more to sit with my 
dear brethren and sisters, though in great weakness ; and pain- 
ful my feelings have been, when thinking that I may never 
have another opportunity of doing so ; being with my dear family 
about to be removed from scenes like these, to a land of strangers, 
amongst a people whose language we know not. I do not wish to 
multiply words unnecessarily; but as there are perhaps few pre- 
sent who are acquainted with my motives for leaving, I have 
believed it would be right for me, near the close of this meeting 
to inform you, as ability may be afforded. Nearly four years 
ago, in the vision of that light in which I believe, it was clearly 
manifested that it would be right for me to remove with my 



1818.] CHAPTER VI. 67 

clear family to that land. Many were the conflicts and deep 
the baptisms I passed through, known only to Him who seeth 
in secret ; but whilst abiding under these impressions, for he 
that believeth maketh not haste, I was brought into a willing- 
ness to give up thereto : and thanks be to the Preserver of 
men, I can now say without boasting, I am willing to go 
whithersoever He may be pleased to send me. With these 
feelings, I went over last summer to see this strange land ; 
and though I met with many trials, my faith was not shaken, 
but remained fixed on Him, " who walketh upon the wings of 
the wind.' 1 

' Painful as the separation is to me, I would not have my dear 
friends think that I consider my lot hard; for in sincerity I can 
adopt the language of, — " What shall I render unto the Lord 
for all his mercies;" Few have received greater benefits from 
His hand, — few have experienced greater deliverances ; and none 
more unworthy. I am weak and frail ; yet in me you behold a 
monument of His everlasting mercy. He has kept me from the 
devouring sword ; — He has preserved me from the raging pesti- 
lence, when thousands have fallen by my side; — He kept me 
alive in famine ; — He saved me from shipwreck, when the deep 
was ready to overwhelm, and the briny waves to swallow me 
up : — but, above all, He has showed me his marvellous Truth. 

' To this Power, my dear friends, I commend you, which is 
able to do all things for you. When we are far separated, we 
may still pray for each other ; and perhaps those prayers may 
prove more availing, than whilst we have been together. In 
the words of the Apostle, — to His grace, which is able to keep 
and preserve you alive in the most holy faith, I commend you, 
together with myself and my dear family, — all that go, and all 
that stay ; and in the love of the everlasting gospel, I salute 
you, and affectionately bid you farewell. 1 

The last visit our dear friend D. W. paid before leaving his 
native country for Russia, was at the house of Sarah Eglin of 
Hull, where he took his last meal on shore, the 22nd of Sixth 
Month. In a short opportunity, after dinner, he told us that his 
mind had been gratefully affected, in renewedly feeling the life- 

f2 



68 CHAPTER VI. [1818. 

giving presence of Israel's Shepherd, accompanied with a belief, 
that he should not be deserted in the time of need ; but, that He 
who had been with him in six troubles would graciously preserve 
him in the seventh : under which precious feeling he had been 
ready to adopt the language, — " Surely goodness and mercy 
have followed me all the days of my life, and I shall dwell in 
the house of the Lord for ever." 11 

[He proceeded on his voyage; in the course of which he 
addressed the following letter to his friend the late Samuel 
Smith of Sheffield.] 

Sixth Month 26th, 1818. 
My Dear Friend, 

According to my promise, I have the pleasure of informing 
thee, that we are now pushing for the roads of Elsineur, and 
expect to anchor in about two hours, having had a passage of 
four days and nights. It has been what the sailors call a fine 
run ; yet some of my company have thought it rough enough. 
The supper-table was well attended the evening we left Hull, and 
sailing was talked of with the greatest enthusiasm : but a great 
alteration had taken place by next morning the land was out of 
sight, the wind had got up, and we found a tumbling sea upon the 
Dogger Bank. But little breakfast was wanted, and at dinner- 
time, I had not one guest to bear me company. The Arethusa 
has proved herself a noble vessel ; and, although much weighted 
upon her decks with water-casks and cattle, she has borne her 
costly freight, (to me not only costly but precious indeed,) nearly 
seven hundred miles in this short time, without any leakage, 
though sorely buffeted by wind and sea. My dear wife has been 
very ill ; yet through all has been favoured with calmness and 
resignation, and I fully believe has never once let in fear. 

The sincerity and kindness of all our friends who have shel- 
tered me and my family, serve to make us the more regret being 
thus torn away from them. But amidst these painful sensa- 
tions, quietness has presided amongst us ; and in our silent 
meeting in the cabin yesterday, some of our hearts were ten- 
dered, under a sense of the continued regard of the unslumber- 
ing Shepherd. 



1818.] CHAPTER VI. 69 

We were so amply provided with every article of provision 
which our Hull friends could think of and prepare, that our fare 
has been very different from what is usual at sea. In short, 
we have so many things to be thankful for, that there is some 
danger of our being deficient in gratitude to the great Author 
of all our blessings ; but I humbly trust, we shall be preserved 
in humility and watchfulness, and in that fear which can alone 
entitle us to Divine protection and regard. 

[After his arrival at Petersburg, he again writes to his friend 
Samuel Smith, as follows :] 

Ochta, near Petersburg, Eighth Month 19^A, 1818. 
My Dear Friend, 

I am fully aware that thou hast long before this time heard 
of our being favoured to land in safety, complete in number as 
when we left our native country. After replenishing our stock 
of hay and water at Elsineur, we proceeded on our voyage, and 
arrived at Cronstadt, on the 16th day from Hull : one day was 
lost at Elsineur, so that we could not well have had a more 
favourable and expeditious passage ; for which, I humbly trust, 
all of us who are capable of reflection, are truly thankful. 
Several things combined to detain us at Cronstadt, so that it 
was eight days before we reached the habitation prepared for 
us, which is situated on the bank of the Neva, nearly opposite 
the Smolny monastery. It is a stuccoed brick house of two 
stories, with the necessary stabling and outbuildings ; and we 
have now got it into tolerable order. 

I have called upon my old acquaintances and friends of last 
year, and have met with the most handsome treatment from all 
with whom I have had to do ; and I have found, to my great 
comfort, the greatest sincerity in all those who made profession 
last year. Sometimes I cannot avoid partaking of their sump- 
tuous tables, which I can assure thee is no treat to me, though 
I believe it has its use : and if so, however mortifying, I hope 
I shall be willing to bear the cross of it. I always look forward 
to such times, as if I was going to be tried by a court-martial, 
or something of the sort ; but if it was not for these feelings, I 



70 CHAPTER VI. [1818. 

should be afraid that the creaturely part would be in danger of 
exaltation, from the caresses of these people. So that although 
much strippedness and abasedness is my lot, I believe that there 
only is my safety. Truly there is a precious seed scattered up 
and down in this place ; and I think it is very remarkable, that 
so many of those in high stations are not only great, but are 
sincerely desirous of doing good, and are so little in their own 
eyes. 

The greatest part of the time we have been here, it hath 
pleased Him, who best knows what is best for us, to dispense a 
season of poverty and barrenness, as far as relates to myself ; 
and my dear wife has been pretty much in the same condition. 
At the same time, a ray of light hath mercifully been permitted 
to shine upon the path, sufficient to strengthen the belief, that 
our being here is in the counsel of His will, without whose 
knowledge a single sparrow falleth not to the ground. If it was 
not for a gleam now and then of this kind, though faint and 
transient, how deplorable would our prospect be, — separated 
from those we dearly love, surrounded by many persons disposed 
to take every advantage of us, with a dreary half-year's winter 
gathering round us. 

We are now making preparations for the winter, and have 
laid in a large store of wood for fuel ; much more than I should 
have thought we could possibly consume. But as many 
fears are entertained by our friends here, lest we should suffer 
from the cold, we are forced to comply with their advice. The 
Russians keep themselves much warmer than we shall like ; and 
I think it will be better to wear a little extra clothing, than to 
keep our rooms so excessively heated. 

We have lately had some frosty nights, which have obliged 
us to try the stove in one room ; we are much pleased with 
its construction, and think it preferable to our open English 
tire- places. 

I have lately been inquiring the manner in which the winter 
here begins ; and am informed that, after some cold rainy 
weather, the English winter commences, which freezes over 
parts of the Lake Ladoga : these are soon broken up by the 
wind, when the ice comes down in large flakes, and blocks up 



1818.] CHAPTER VI. 71 

the Gulf of Finland and the Neva. Shortly after this, the 
winter comes in reality, and fixes the ice, often in a very rough 
state, just as it has been hurried down by the current, — many of 
the flakes lying one upon another. Often, the whole becomes 
solid in forty-eight hours ; after which roads are levelled over the 
rough ice, at those places where the pontoon bridges and ferries 
have been, which are marked out by fir trees set up in 
the ice. These crossings, frequently remain passable until the 
Fourth Month; for although the snow melts off the land 
three weeks earlier, yet the river remains frozen, owing to 
the frosty nights : — the roads are sometimes dusty before the 
ice breaks up in the river. This I believe is the season when 
people suffer the most, as the days are so warm that they change 
their clothing, whilst at the same time there are strong frosts 
by night. 

Ninth Month Mh. — Finding I have yet time, I feel disposed 
to lengthen my already lengthened letter. I do not wish to 
tire my friends ; but I believe they are so much interested in 
our welfare, as to accept it as an expression of that gratitude 
and love, which I trust will never cease to flow in my heart, 
whilst memory holds her place in this frail tabernacle, and how- 
ever distant we and our little ones may be exiled. I alluded in 
the forepart of my letter to the stripped situation of mind, that 
had for some time been my portion ; and have now, with humble 
thankfulness, to acknowledge the inexpressible comfort where- 
with I am comforted ; which nothing short of the great and 
promised Comforter could administer to the drooping mind. 
Last First day, in our little meeting, the Master was pleased to 
preside, and it was indeed " a feast of fat things ;" and the lan- 
guage which arose in my heart was, " Take eat ; this is my 
body."" I never remember being under such a covering, and my 
desire is, that I may never forget it : and oh ! that the fear of 
the Lord may so prevail amongst us, as to entitle us to His 
love, which can alone enable us "to run through a troop, or 
leap over a wall;" and which at this time enableth me to call 
every country my country, and every man my brother. 



72 CHAPTER VI. [1819. 

To Balby Monthly Meeting. 

Second Month 17th, 0. S. 1819. 

Dear Friends, 

In conformity with the desire expressed in your minute of the 
Fifth Month last, we have endeavoured to render an account 
of ourselves in the foregoing part of this letter. It was 
thought that by drawing up answers to such of the queries as 
were applicable to us, the most correct statement of our 
situation would be obtained. 

In thus drawing the attention of the Monthly Meeting to its 
distant members, a belief accompanies my mind, that tender 
sympathy and feeling are excited on our account ; and my 
heart is humbled within me, in the remembrance of the " goodly 
tents of Jacob, and the quiet dwelling places of Israel," — of those 
dear brethren and sisters, with whom I can no longer assemble 
before the Lord, and from whom my dear family and self are 
far separated, as from the bosom and fostering care of the 
church. Yet amidst a dispensation so painful to human 
nature, I have abundant cause to acknowledge the continued 
regard of Israel's great and compassionate Shepherd ; who 
faileth not to care for His sheep, however widely scattered, 
and who at seasons is graciously pleased, not only to afford 
the healing balm of resignation, but to replenish with His 
love, which many waters cannot quench, nor distance diminish ; 
but which at times is sensibly felt to flow towards the 
flock at home, even to the hindermost, — and to clothe 
with ability in secret broken aspirations to supplicate on 
their behalf, that " not a hoof may be left behind," and that 
none maybe missing in the great day; but that all of every age 
and of every class, may hear His voice, be known of Him, and 
follow Him : that when He, the Great Shepherd, shall appear, 
we may appear also, and be all bound up together in the Lord's 
" bundle of life ;" which is frequently, fervently, and at this 
time, the desire of vour friend, 

D. W. 



1819.] CHAPTER VI. 73 

To MoRDECAI CaSSON. 

Third Month 19^, 1819. 
1 do not know that we have ever had more than 21 



degrees of frost by E-eaumer's scale, (16° below zero, Faht.) 
— indeed, but few of the Russians recollect so mild a winter. I 
think we never passed a winter in England with less sickness 
in the family : the merciful Dispenser of all our blessings has 
indeed done more than we could have thought or asked for. 
During four months of the darkest season, we have had the 
company, generally two days in the week, of our beloved friends 
William Allen and Stephen Grellet ; through whom we have 
often been cheered and refreshed as with dainties from the dear 
Master's table. They have had a narrow path to tread in, yet 
are well satisfied with their labours here ; though they have 
been in a different way from what is customary with those who 
move on such errands : they have truly been led in paths that 
they knew not, and in ways that they had not seen, to their 
own admiration, and to the praise of the great and excellent 
Name. They left us ten days ago, with minds full of peace, — 
beloved and regretted by all who had the happiness to become 
acquainted with them. The stream of gospel love, which was 
at seasons permitted to flow, when channels were open to receive 
it, has made, I believe, an impression on the minds of some, 
which will never be obliterated ; and which has clearly evinced, 
" whose servants they are." They were, I think, of all men 
the most fit to move in such a work, in such a place, and under 
such circumstances . 

I saw them set off from the city, just at the edge of dark, in 
a covered sledge, in the midst of a heavy snow-storm. They 
are furnished with letters and documents, sufficient to open the 
way wherever they go : they have also a document called a 
podorojni, which obliges the post-masters to furnish them with 
horses as soon as they arrive at a station ; so that they are not 
likely to suffer detention on the road. Their luggage is put in 
the bottom of the sledge ; over it is a bed covered with black 
morocco leather, on which they can either sit or lie : they 



74 CHAPTER VI. [1819. 

have also provisions with them ; and a servant who can speak 
French, German, and Russian. 

Since the departure of our friends, we have felt much poverty 
and strippedness ; yet at times a renewed evidence hath in un- 
utterable mercy been vouchsafed to us, that the Rock remains, 
and that the Foundation standeth sure : so that there is still 
encouragement, even amidst the gloom by which we seem sur- 
rounded, humbly to hope that we shall be preserved and enabled 
to maintain our ground ; however feeble our attempts may seem, 
and however much our weakness may be felt. The responsible 
situation in which we are placed, is at times almost enough to 
overwhelm me with fear; lest I should let fall any of those pre- 
cious testimonies given us to bear, and thereby bring reproach 
upon the blessed cause of Truth. I have however great conso- 
lation in observing, that my eldest son also begins to feel 
the importance of this ; and it is a great favour when the 
eldest takes the right way, as there is then a hope that the 
younger ones will follow after. 

To Barbara Hoyland. 

Ninth Month 22nd, 0. S. 1819. 
My Dear Sister, 
Since I last wrote to thee, our work has made creat 



progress, and being now widely extended, is not likely to lessen 
my fatigue ; but I am looking forward to a little respite, as the 
winter is expected shortly to be with us. Since the spring 
opened, I have been much harassed, having been engaged from 
four in the morning until late at night, except on First days, 
when I do not suffer any work to be done, and of course I have 
no occasion to go out myself. It is a common practice here to 
transact business, and hold the principal markets on First days ; 
but I made a stand against it, as soon as I came, and have been 
under the necessity to this time strongly to object to it. On 
Fifth days also, I take the forenoons ; so that our little meet- 
ings are regularly held, which is a great comfort to me, as well 
as a respite from toil, and when at seasons the Great Master 
is pleased to preside and own the slender few. 

Since the spring opened, we have sown about forty acres 



1819.] CHAPTER VI. 75 

with clover, and other grasses, also with some oats, but merely 
to protect the smaller seeds from drought ; about four acres of 
potatoes have been planted, and ten acres of turnips sown 
with the Northumberland drill. On the whole, these have done 
well, particularly the turnips, which are bought up at a high 
price, as fast as 1 can get them into the market. But I am 
most surprised by the grass seeds, which in twelve weeks after the 
sowing were in full flower, looking like a full crop, the year after 
sowing in England ; such is the astonishing quickness of vege- 
tation here. 

Amidst the numerous avocations of the Emperor, time has 
been devoted by him for a thorough examination of the work 
carrying on by us; which gave me full two hours' time with him 
alone, and another hour was occupied at our house : so that I 
had an opportunity given of clearing myself, and I hope nothing 
was kept back on my part. I rejoice in believing, that a spark 
remains unextinguished in his noble bosom, which I trust will 
never be suffered to go out or diminish ; but may be permitted 
increasingly to brighten, even unto the perfect day. Yet I 
cannot help fearing, when dwelling on the critical situation in 
which he is placed, the exalted station he fills, and the many 
besetments by which he is surrounded. I will content myself 
with reviving his own expression; — when speaking on the sub- 
ject of war, I alluded to the vast army in this neighbourhood, 
and the state of mankind in general ; he replied, — ' the things 
that are not possible with man, are possible with God.' 

We have also had a visit from the reigniug Empress : she 
is a very amiable woman, — so unaffected and unassuming, that 
our fears of being embarrassed in her presence were soon 
changed into admiration and regard ; and though she mani- 
fested great condescension and affability, true dignity still 
appeared. She came to the house, and afterwards went to view 
the work ; and I shewed her every thing that I thought would 
please. She walked for a considerable time on the land, and 
was much gratified with its being so dry, as well as with the 
apparent change in the face of the country. The Empress 
speaks a little English, and had with her a companion who un- 
derstands.^ well. 

I remain, &c. 



76 CHAPTER VI. [1819. 

To David Mallinson of Sheffield. 

Ninth Month 22nd, 1819. 

How often have I thought of my beloved friend, and his dear 
wife and family, when in a situation in which I could not 
possibly address a few lines to them ; and as often lamented 
and grieved, as month after month has rolled away, when they 
have been again brought to my remembrance. 

In the winter, my time was much occupied in making prepa- 
rations for the ensuing campaign ; and since the ice left us, I 
have been constantly hurried and fatigued. This year my 
labour has been much increased, by my having been appointed 
to assist in the improvement of some land of the Dowager Em- 
press, situated about twenty-four miles distant . I have in con- 
sequence seen the Dowager several times ; and I find it a trying 
situation for a Friend, to pass through the apartments of a palace, 
amongst a host of servants and military, who stare as if I was 
not a fellow-man. I sometimes think no one was ever in a 
situation similar to mine, or so much like the pelican in the 
wilderness, or the solitary sparrow on the house top ; and am 
ready to query, whether my being here, can answer any good 
end. Yet there are seasons, when I am comforted in the belief, 
that some minds are led to consider and to inquire our motives, 
for differing so widely from the rest of mankind ;-. and I uni- 
formly find, when opportunities of this sort occur, something 
like an assent in the minds of such, and a lamentation raised 
that a larger portion of mankind do not follow our example. — 
Alas ! little do they know how frail I am, and how weak I feel ; 
— often stripped of every thing that can afford any real comfort, 
and apparently left to myself to walk in slippery places. 
Sometimes my mind glances at my dear friends at home ; but 
there I must not dwell, though I believe I shall always con- 
sider my country as my home, — and I trust my friends will ever 
remain dear to me, and that however separated or circum- 
stanced, we shall be dear to each other in that love, which is 
not subject to change, but " hopeth all things, endureth all 
things, beareth all things ; rejoiceth not in iniquity, but re- 
|oiceth in the truth ;" — which rests upon the meek as a diadem, 



1819.] CHAPTER VI. / 7 

and crowns the humble sufferer with eternal life, if constantly 
and earnestly laboured after and abode in. However we may- 
be permitted to feel our nothingness, let us remember it is " by 
these things we live :" and truly, my dear friend, and but 
lately very often my companion in tribulation, I believe He 
is a strong rock and an irresistible fortress to dwell in. For 
my own part, I need not ask the question, " whither shall I 
go ;" having no choice left, and consequently no merit, if I 
should be found frequently turning unto Him, who only " hath 
the words of eternal life." 

I know I am many letters in debt to many of my dear 
friends ; and I am afraid I should not be warranted in saying 
' have patience and I will pay you all :' and yet as it is really 
my intention to answer them, I hope they will be disposed to 
give me a little longer credit ; at the same time to attribute my 
long silence to the true cause, and not that they are any of 
them blotted out of my memory, or that my regard is in any 
way lessened. For I think I may say, that all the members of 
your meeting, with whom I have been acquainted during the 
time I have been permitted to dwell amongst you, are fre- 
quently the objects of my remembrance and regard, from the 
oldest down to the little child. But when my time is so limited, 
that I cannot keep up a regular correspondence, even with those 
that I have had the most intimate acquaintance with, I hope 
the charity of others will lead them to put the most favourable 
construction upon my long silence in this way, and I really 
believe they will be disposed to do so. 

Well, my much loved friends, it was. once very pleasant to 
be with you and the dear children ; but those days are over 
and past, when it was often my lot to drop in amongst you ; 
they are departed as a shadow when the light is withdrawn ; 
but the Ancient of days remains : He changeth not, neither 
do His years fail. May He be your happy portion, not only 
through time, but, when the struggle is over and the warfare 
at an end, through the never-ending ages of eternity. 

Believe me, though the restless Baltic rolls between us, your 
affectionate friend. 

D. W. 



CHAPTER VII. [1820. 



CHAPTER VII. 

SEVERE WINTER OF 1819-20 HIS AFFECTIONATE ADDRESS TO 

BALBY MONTHLY MEETING SUNDRY LETTERS TO HIS FRIENDS IN 

ENGLAND VISIT FROM THE EMPEROR ALEXANDER. 

To David Mallinson. 

First Month, 1820. 
My Dear Friend, 

Annexed are the answers to the queries from our slender 
meeting at Ochta, which I hope will be received in time for the 
Monthly Meeting in the Third Month next. 

We often wonder how you are going on in England, 
whether you are sharing in any degree our cold winter. I 
sometimes think yours must have been more severe than for 
several years past, as the wind has been between north and 
east for the greater part of the last three months. I cannot 
possibly describe what we have had to encounter here : the 
Russians say, there has not been so severe a winter since the 
year 1800. It came upon us all at once ; in the beginning of the 
Tenth Month, we could not get the plough into the ground, 
and we were shortly driven off altogether. The quantity of 
snow is great, and where it has drifted, it is very deep indeed, 
and the frost has been intense. This night we have twenty 
degrees, and it has been as low as thirty-one degrees by 
Reaumur's scale (37° below zero, Faht.) I was in the city 
on the coldest day, and did not suffer ; though when I shut 
my eyes, perhaps for half a minute, it was difficult to open 
them again. At one time our prospect was very gloomy, as 
the children seemed as if they could not bear it, — and the four 
youngest were ill at once with the scarlet fever ; — but the Great 
Physician helped us. I did not like the idea of sending for a 
doctor ; it seemed like distrusting the hand, that has so often 
been stretched forth for our deliverance : but one of our Rus- 



1820.] CHAPTER VII. 79 

sian domestics being ill, on his account a doctor was called in, 
and it was through him we learned what fever it was. They 
are now, through mercy, in usual health ; and are all enduring 
the cold, I think as well as the Russians themselves. 

We have abundance of wolves, which are drawn by the 
severity of the weather nearer than usual to the abodes of men. 
The intense cold sometimes drives them mad ; six cases have 
occurred within our knowledge, of people being bitten by wolves 
in this state, — four of which proved fatal, — and in the other 
two, the parties recovered, having had the parts cut out, and the 
wound seared with a hot iron. One man had his face torn by 
a wolf close by our house, but he succeeded in killing it ; we all 
saw it, and a terrible animal it is to encounter, I can assure 
thee.* When the frost is very great, the smaller birds fall to 
the ground ; I have several times seen this. But though the 
wolf prowles round our habitation by night, we are favoured to 
be quiet and peaceful within, and to partake of many consola- 
tions. 

To Balby Monthly Meeting. 

First Month 12th, 1820. 
Dear Friends, 

Through the continued mercy of Him, who " crowneth 
the year with his goodness," I am once more permitted to 
send you answers to the queries from our little meeting 
at Ochta. 

As great poverty and strippedness of mind are often, and 
particularly at this time, my portion, I feel quite discouraged 
in attempting to take up my pen on the present occasion ; but 
in these dispensations, I have frequently to admire, that a 
precious feeling of love towards my dear brethren and sisters 
at home, is vouchsafed and permitted to remain, when every 
other feeling of good is wholly withdrawn from me. This 
being afresh brought to my remembrance, a hope is revived 
and cherished in my heart, (although peculiarly situated, and at 
times made painfully to feel the prevalency of the power 

v This man though he submitted to the operation, subsequently fell a 
victim to hydro phobia. 



80 CHAPTER VII. [1820. 

of darkness by which I am surrounded,) that a small spark 
of life is yet unextinguished ; and which, while I am writing, 
kindles an ability, though under an humbling sense of great 
weakness, to hold forth a word of encouragement to the afflicted, 
and to those among you, unto whom it is not only given to 
believe in, but also to suffer for the name of Jesus ; which may 
have a tendency to strengthen minds that are often drooping, 
and in their own apprehension, no longer able to sustain the 
seemingly unequal combat, — who know what it is to be plunged 
into the depths of indescribable distress ; — for such I am per- 
suaded there are. " Fear not,"" was the gracious language of 
the Most High to " worm Jacob ;" and it continues to be so, 
to all the Lord's children, who are endeavouring faithfully to 
abide under, and patiently to endure the turnings and over- 
turnings of His holy hand upon them : and though for the 
present these trials are not joyous but grievous, yet afterwards 
the peaceful fruits of righteousness will be the blessed experi- 
ence of all those who are exercised thereby. It is indeed no 
other than the suffering path that leads to blessedness, which 
the dear Master himself trod ; and which all his tribulated 
followers must tread ; for the disciple cannot expect to be above 
his Master, nor the servant above his lord. So that, my 
dearly beloved friends, there is no real cause to be discouraged 
or to marvel at these things ; but rather to rejoice, in that you 
are counted worthy to suffer, and in that you are at times 
made sensible of pain : for truly, pain is a certain sign of life, 
as that which is dead can feel no more ; and it brings with it a 
consoling evidence, that such are living members of one and 
the same mystical body, whose members suffer not alone ; but 
whether one member suffer, all the members suffer with it,— or 
one member be honoured, all the members rejoice with it, of 
which Jesus Christ our Lord is the holy head. " Fear not, 
therefore ; " — the kingdom is appointed unto you : it is those that 
endure to the end that shall be saved. 

The trumpet has often sounded amongst us, my dear friends; 
but the alarming sound of late waxeth stronger and stronger ; 
sufficiently so, I trust, to arouse those who have long regard- 
lessly heard it. I would fain dismiss this painful subject, but 



1820.] CHAPTER VII. 81 

in attempting to do so, sadness covers my mind, and fear 
begins to shew itself, lest I should be found wanting in my 
duty to any : if such there are, who have long been neglecting 
the great business of their lives, and instead thereof, pursuing 
with avidity those things which perish with the using. Alas ! 
what will be the situation of these in a day that is fast 
approaching, when the heavens shall depart as a scroll when it 
is rolled together ; when every false delight will appear in its 
true colours, and nothing will be left for the poor mind to rest 
upon, not so much as a small island in the midst of this sea of 
perplexity and trouble, — not a single act of dedication to the 
Lord's righteous cause of Truth upon the earth to reflect upon ; 
when those things that have occupied the heart, will serve 
only as memorials of past folly. Let such be entreated by one 
who long hovered on destruction's brink, and who hath known 
the terrors of the Lord for sin and disobedience ; and under 
a sense thereof, is now most earnestly desirous that others 
may take warning, and thereby shun the fatal snares which 
keep the soul in bondage and in . darkness. Let such be per- 
suaded to seek the Lord, "while he may be found ;" and en- 
deavour to redeem the past and precious time, — to acquaint 
themselves with God and be at peace, — to come to the know- 
ledge of Him in the secret of their own souls, — who is " the 
way, the truth, and the life, - " — whom to know is life eternal ; 
who willeth not the death of a sinner, but that all should re- 
pent, return and live. Then let me beseech you, in the love of 
Him, who died for us and rose again, for the peace of your 
never-dying souls, to accept the gracious invitation, " be ye 
reconciled to God, — "before it be too late, and the things that 
belong to your peace are hid for ever from your eyes. 

There is another class to whom my attention is now turned, 
for whose best welfare I feel an affectionate and tender solici- 
tude ; in whose hearts the babe immortal hath been mercifully 
begotten, creating therein new desires and breathings after 
soul-sustaining food ; whose spiritual eyes are in a good degree 
opened to behold the beauty and excellency that dwell in the 
everlasting and unchangeable Truth. To you, my dear Friends, 
many of whom are young in years, my heart and pen are now 

G 



82 CHAPTER VII. [1820 

directed, — earnestly desiring your preservation in the alone 
path, that most assuredly leads to peace in this world, and 
in that which is to come ; may nothing be suffered to turn 
you aside therefrom, but may you be strengthened stedfastly 
to contend for the like precious faith, which was once 
delivered to the saints, — that inestimable gift of God — that life 
of the just — that substance of things hoped for and evidence of 
things not seen, " without which it is impossible to please 
God,''' and of which Christ Jesus is not only the holy author, 
but the blessed finisher. Here let us make a pause, — lest 
any should spend their precious time, that treasure of eternal 
consequence, in vain. This most necessary and heavenly 
gift cannot be obtained from man, nor from the doctrines of 
any set of men. What saith the great apostle ?— " Faith 
cometh by hearing, and hearing by the word of God. 1 ' Have 
not all heard \ Yes, verily, — the blessed sound hath gone forth 
from sea to sea, from shore to shore, and from the river to the 
uttermost ends of the earth. But let none be misguided by an 
imposing appellation given, I sometimes fear by design, to the 
Holy Scriptures, styling them " the word of God." Although 
the Holy Scriptures are replete with the most sublime truths, — 
the book of books, wonderfully preserved from the earliest ages 
of time, " given by inspiration of God 11 and " profitable for cor- 
rection, for reproof, for instruction in righteousness, that the 
man of God may be perfect, thoroughly furnished unto all good 
works," and " are able to make wise unto salvation ;" — yet let 
us mark what follows, — it is " through faith which is in Christ 
Jesus." For some of you this explanation may not be needful, 
but for me it is safe. Faith cometh then by that all creative 
Word, which was with the Father before the worlds were ; 
" all things were made by Him, and without Him was not any 
thing made that was made :" who in the beginning changed 
the wild chaos, when it was without form and void, into habit- 
able earth ; who spake, and the worlds were made : — and it is 
by this Divine Word alone, that we must all be changed from 
a state of nature to a state of grace, and renewed again into the 
heavenly image that man was in, before he by transgression fell. 
Behold then the Alpha and Omega, the beginning and the 



1820.] CHAPTER VII. 83 

end, the first and the last, the root and offspring of David, the 
bright and morning star ! Behold the marvellous display of 
everlasting love ! the all-powerful, saving Word, the blessed 
medium by which faith and hearing come, is nigh in the heart 
and in the mouth, as saith the apostle. Search then, my 
dearly beloved Friends, — seek and 5 I humbly pray the Father 
of mercies, that you may be favoured to find. Be of good 
courage ; — humble yourselves before God : ask in the language 
of unceasing prayer, and you shall receive ; knock, with 
earnest, faithful desires, and the door of boundless mercy shall 
be opened unto you. " For every one that asketh, receiveth ; 
and he that seeketh, findeth ; and to him that knocketh, it 
shall be opened.' 1 Remember it is on you that the weight of 
the law and the testimony must devolve, when the faithful 
standard-bearers of the present day are numbered with the just 
of all generations : and that on your example greatly depends 
the future bias of the tender minds of the dear innocent little 
children. In so doing you will not only be a blessing to them, 
but they will bring down a blessing upon you ; and the Lord 
Most High, in his infinite goodness and mercy will bless you 
altogether. 

With the salutation of that love which desireth the good of 
all, 

I remain your affectionate friend, 

D. W. 

To Samuel Smith. 

Second Month 2nd, 1820, 0. S. 

Thy account of towards the close of his day 

was truly consoling ; and I trust the retrospect of this period 
would have a tendency to comfort his dear widow in her affliction. 
We feel much for her; but she has a strong tower, into which the 
righteous have in all ages fled, and found refuge and safety, — even 
the power of the Most High God; who remains not only a judge 
for the widow, but will plead her cause himself, and be a Father 
to her fatherless children, if they are but willing to commit them- 
selves into His holy keeping. In love and tenderness this is 
what I very much desire on their account, — that they may 



84 chapter vn. [1820. 

choose the Lord for their portion, and the God of Jacob for the 
lot of their inheritance ; that so they may be taught of his 
ways, and walk in his paths : and then the great loss they have 
been permitted in unerring wisdom to sustain, will not only be 
sanctified to their dear bereaved mother, but to themselves 
also. And if happily the elder are good examples to the 
younger children, in humble walking with their God, and in 
uprightness and integrity amongst men, and by ordering their 
conversation aright, — they will be the blessed means of turning 
the feet of their dear little brothers into the paths of truth. 
The Lord himself will not be wanting to draw their minds into 
an early acquaintance with that light, which is the life of men, 
in their own hearts ; which if attended to will lead them out of 
all error into all truth : in righteousness will they be established, 
and great will be their peace. Our love is to them all. 

I will endeavour to give thee some idea of a plan which 

opened in my mind last autumn ; but I must in the first place 
make thee a little acquainted with the state of things here. 
The land belongs principally to the nobles, who have immense 
estates cultivated by the peasants born on them, who are the 
absolute property of their masters, man, woman, and child 
alike. They either work for their proprietor, or they deliver 
to him a part of their earnings, liable to be increased at his 
pleasure. The result is, that they have no interest in any 
thing ; and I have heard it said among them, that life is not 
worth a copeck, or the hundredth part of a shilling : this is a 
very affecting circumstance. My idea is, to make a trial of 
placing peasants in farms at a moderate fixed rent, on the land 
we have drained and cultivated ; and if these are favoured to 
prosper, I have a hope that the nobles will see it their interest 
to divide their large estates in a similar way, and place their 
peasants on the same footing ; and I am persuaded their 
incomes would be greatly increased. If when each peasant had 
paid his rent either in money or produce, the remainder was to 
be his own, he would be stimulated to industry ; there would 
be something worth living for. 

It was intended that the whole of the land which we drain 
and cultivate, should be farmed by us ; but this is now in part 



1820.] CHAPTER VII. 85 

set aside. The land is now to be divided into small farms, of 
from thirty to forty-five acres, to be let at a moderate rent, but 
sufficient to pay interest on the outlay for draining, cultivating, 
and building ; the tenants to be under wholesome restrictions in 
the management of their land, that their farms may be taken 
proper care of. On each piece of land where there are farms 
established, a part will remain in my hands, as an example 
for the small farms, where a complete establishment for 
agricultural purposes will be built. I have been very busy 
constructing a model for a farm-house, suitable for the object in 
view; and it is expected that several of these houses will be 
erected next summer. 

I had the happiness to see the land which has been drained, 
quite free from vapour, when all around it has been covered as 
with a cloud ; so that the surrounding neighbourhood cannot 
fail to become more healthy from its expulsion. This would 
be a pleasant picture for the mind to dwell upon, if there was 
not mourning and lamentation on other accounts : but the 
state of things, in a religious point of view, is very affecting and 
discouraging ; and the query often arises, what can be done for 
these people ; — to which the answer at .this time is, " vain is 
the help of man." And truly I am often fearful that the 
creaturely activity of man, instead of helping, is marring the 
good work already begun in the tender minds of many ; causing 
them to stop very far short of that undefiled rest, which is 
prepared for the people of God : but it is my most firm belief, 
that their earthly wisdom will be confounded, and that the Most 
High will scatter them as chaff is scattered before the wind ; 
and that He will magnify His own glorious power in the hearts 
of his children, who in simplicity are turning their faces to- 
wards his holy mountain, — taking of the things of Christ, and 
shewing them to these his little ones. 

For my own part I am a very poor creature, and sometimes 
fearful that I myself shall become a castaway ; yet after times 
of deep suffering, and self-abasement, love for the dear people 
here abounds more and more in my breast ; and often is the 
desire breathed, that the cultivation in their hearts may not 
only keep pace with, but abundantly surpass and excel, that of 



86 CHAPTER VII. [1820- 

the wastes, by which we are surrounded. Then would " the 
wilderness be as Eden, the desert as the garden of the Lord ;" 
joy, gladness, thanksgiving, and the voice of melody would be 
heard therein. 

The question — when shall we meet again ? I should be glad 
to have it in my power to answer ; but it is only known to Him 
who seeth the end from the beginning, whether again in this 
world or not. Let us look up with humble confidence to Him, 
to enable us through every dispensation yet to come, to say — 
" not my will, but thine be done;" at the same time labouring 
with unremitting assiduity to know, what His righteous will is 
concerning us. Evening, morning, and noon, let us pray, my 
much loved friend ; and He, who will not break the bruised 
reed nor suffer it to be broken, in his own time will not only 
reveal it to us, but will enable us to perform it, to the praise of 
His great and excellent name, and to our unspeakable peace. 
Farewell in the Lord, my dear friend. 

To Richard Cockin, Doncaster. 

21s* of Second Monti, 1820. 
My dear Friend, 
Hearing by letters lately received from England, that afflic- 
tion had visited your abode, I cannot help waiving all other 
considerations, however pressing at this time, and endeavouring 
to dip into sympathy and sweet feeling with my long loved 
friends ; to whom my spirit is united in the binding influence 
of that love, which extends from the river to the uttermost 
parts of the habitable globe : humbly desiring that the God of 
all consolations may be with you, and comfort you together, 
with the riches of peaceful resignation to His righteous will ; 
sustaining you in lowly patience, wrought by tribulation and 
suffering, in mysterious wisdom dispensed for sanctifying pur- 
poses, to His own glory, and the refinement of those who are 
precious in his Divine sight. "It is by these things men 
live ;" they have led the righteous in all ages to blessed 
experience, being productive of that glorious hope which 
maketh not ashamed, because the love of God is shed abroad 
in their hearts ; which in the true dignity of its character, 



] 820.] chapter vn. 87 

animates the Christian travellers with innocent boldness, to 
persevere in the tribulated path cast up for them, to meet with 
unshaken firmness the jet remaining storms of time, and to 
behold with the placid eye of faith, the " far more exceeding 
and eternal weight of glory " about to be revealed, and which 
awaits the ransomed and redeemed of the Lord in the kingdom 
of Christ Jesus, that will never have an end ; where pain and 
sorrow cannot enter, and all tears are for ever wiped away. 

I well remember the dear young woman, who has terminated 
at an early period her innocent career, and entered into ever- 
lasting rest ; and fresh in my memory is every part of the 
family, at whose hands I have so often had kindness shown 
me in simplicity and godly sincerity. These circumstances 
may not have been thought of by you ; but in my memory 
they will long retain a lively and sweet fragrance. This 
acknowledgment will apply to many of my beloved friends, 
and I would gladly make it to all of them : very pleasantly 
can I reflect on the intervals which I was permitted to enjoy, 
when a sojourner amongst you, when my mind has been 
refreshed with the countenances of my friends, as " iron 
sharpeneth iron ;" with some of whom, though a weak and 
feeble helper, I have been engaged in endeavouring to turn 
" the battle to the gate ;" whilst united together in love, and 
harmonizing in sentiment, as " our bows abode in strength, the 
arms of our hands were made strong " by the mighty God of 
Jacob. But as a dream vanishes when the sleeper awakes, so 
are these seasons departed ; leaving me to gaze in abasedness of 
self, to adore and tremble at the gracious dealings of that 
Almighty power, which has been with me all my life. Though 
few and evil have been the days of my pilgrimage, yet few lives 
have been more checquered with vicissitude and variety, since 
cast upon the wide world an orphan boy ; then cradled on a 
boisterous element and nursed in the free-school of iniquity, 
with sinners my companions, — but myself the chief ! Oh ! 
wondrous mercy, signally displayed ! — in saving from the fire a 
burning brand, and following up from time to time with judg- 
ment's rod, the far-fled wanderer ! — flying still, and still pursued ! 
until overtaken, and in matchless love obliged to yield, and 



88 CHAPTER VII. [J 820. 

reluctantly to retrace step by step destruction's mazy track, — 
and to stop at many a place ; and, I hope in sincere repentance, 
made to dwell on scenes of mispent time and sinful deeds 
innumerable, "gone beforehand " (I humbly pray) to judg- 
ment ; — not to " follow after," or where would be now my hope 
at this late hour, if forsaken by that gracious Lord ; — who in 
so great compassion, wrought the miracle, and in the greatness 
of his love and strength, has led my straying feet beside the 
still waters, and made me to lie down in the green pastures of 
life : — who brought me amongst the assemblies of his people, 
with whom I now feel precious unity of spirit in the bond of 
sweet consoling peace : — and though far separated from them, 
I am at this day, I trust, " sitting and clothed and in my 
right mind," under a sense of my own unworthiness, and of 
such great and unmerited mercy. 

When I began this letter, I had not the most distant 
thought of saying what I have done ; but on looking it over, I 
believe they are words of truth and soberness, and I do not feel 
at liberty to alter them. Truly my mind is at this moment 
humbled as in the dust, in taking a retrospective view of the 
things that have been, and of our present peculiar situation. I 
think I never knew a time, when watchfulness and prayer felt so 
needful, in order not only " to strengthen," but even to retain 
" the things that remain, that are ready to die." It is like 
contending for every inch of ground in a well contested field, 
and being unable at night to discover whether the morning's 
position has been maintained ; so that we stand in need of the 
prayers of our brethren in old England, that we may be 
preserved watchful, humble and faithful, amidst the various 
snares and temptations by which we are surrounded. 
Believe me thy truly affectionate friend, 

D. W. 

To Balby Monthly Meeting. 

First Month, 1821. 
Dear Friends, 
I now enclose the answers to the usual Queries from our 
little company, and at the same time acknowledge the receipt 
of your certificate on behalf of S. K. 



1821.] CHAPTER VII. 89 

I trust that none of my dearly beloved Friends will attribute 
the brevity of this letter to any thing short of the true cause ; 
— neither absence, nor distance, have in any degree lessened my 
love or diminished my regard for you. " Can the children of 
the bride chamber fast, while the bridegroom is with them ? As 
long as they have the bridegroom with them they cannot fast. 
But the days will come, when the bridegroom shall be taken 
away from them, and then shall they fast in those days." To 
you who have experimentally witnessed the truth of this 
saying of the Saviour of men, it is unnecessary to say more, 
than that these days are my days ; — the days are indeed come, 
when strippedness and weakness are all that I seem to possess. 
Should there be any of my dear brethren and sisters alike 
circumstanced, it is with me to say, for the encouragement of 
such, (although destitute myself of any claim, and totally 
unworthy of partaking thereof,) that if this humiliating, 
though purifying dispensation be patiently abode under, the 
result will be unspeakably glorious. Mourning will be turned 
into joy ; the painful and perhaps protracted fast, will become 
a precious and delightful feast, — even " a feast of fat things, 
of wine on the lees well refined :" — " know ye what I have 
done to you," will be sensibly understood ; and a language will 
be excited by gratitude and love, similar in kind to that of 
Simon Peter, when the dear Master silenced his objections by 
explaining the terms of apostleship, " Lord, not my feet only, 
but also my hands and my head. 1 ' 

The tree of the field sustains no injury by the wintry 
season's rest, on the contrary, it is invigorated, if sap remains 
in the root : so the foregoing dispensation, if the precious 
life remains, however low and hidden it may be, tends only to 
strengthen and establish the humble Christian more firmly in 
the heavenly vine ; and when the spring of life and love is 
permitted to return, buds and blossoms will again appear, and 
new fruit will be brought forth by these chosen ones, which 
will lastingly remain, to the praise and glory of the great and 
good husbandman, and their own eternal peace. 

Let me remind my dear Friends of every age and class, that 
another year hath passed swiftly over our heads ; this intima- 
tion is accompanied by an earnest desire, that as days are 



90 CHAPTER VII. [1821. 

multiplied and years increase, an increase of heavenly treasure 
may be ours, through an increasing knowledge of the only true 
God, and his Son Jesus Christ. 

I remain your affectionate friend, 

D. W. 



To John Hipsley. 

Second Month 7th, 1821 . 
My dear Friend, 
The prospect of approaching intercourse once more with our 
beloved friends in England, through the medium of the shipping, 
administered comfort to my mind, as I was about to take up 
my pen to address thee, and brings to my recollection, that this 
letter will probably reach thee about the time of our Quarterly 
Meeting held at Leeds. This circumstance awakens a feeling, 
which humbles my heart, and afresh revives in my view 
days that will never return, and precious seasons, in which 
I was permitted to assemble with my dear brethren and 
sisters, and even to partake of the same food, though unworthy 
to gather up the crumbs that fell from the table. But from 
scenes like these I am now set apart, and can no longer 
behold the venerable towers of Zion, nor mark her bulwarks, 
nor consider her palaces, — except from the reports of others. 
The accounts that have reached us in the course of the summer, 
have excited painful sensations ; lest any thing should tend to 
" divide in Jacob or scatter in Israel, 1 ' and cause a shyness 
amongst those who have been valiants in support of the law 
and the testimony, — or embitter the latter moments of any, who 
have laboured through a long life with uprightness and integrity 
of heart, for the welfare of Zion and the enlargement of her 
borders. I cannot contemplate these things, and divest myself 
of fear, lest a root of bitterness should spring up, and many be 
defiled. " Watch ye, stand fast in the faith, quit you like 
men, be strong ;" — is the language that presents itself on the 
present occasion ; and if not applicable to others, I am well 
satisfied it is to myself. For the older I grow, the more need- 
ful I find the watch : there is no other safe dwelling place ; 
— there is no cessation of arms ; the warfare is continual, and 
must be continually maintained, or there is no standing fast in 



1821.] CHAPTER VII. 91 

the faith. But to such as endeavour, through watchfulness and 
prayer, to quit themselves like men, strength will be adminis- 
tered in due time, not only to stand fast in the faith, but to 
become strong ; yea, they will be " strong in the Lord and in 
the power of His might." So that I very much desire, that 
the minds of all may be clothed with the invincible armour, 
wherewith they will be " able to stand in the evil day, and 
having done all to stand." 

The winter with us is considered a mild one. I do not know 
that we have at any time had more than twenty-five degrees of 
Reaumur's scale, (24° below zero, of Faht. ;) but there have 
been frequent changes, and I think we have all suffered more 
from the cold than heretofore, owing partly, we suppose, to the 
high winds which have prevailed with little intermission all the 
season. The roof of our house has been much damaged, and at 
this time at least thirty square yards of it are uncovered ; and 
we are told it cannot be repaired until warm weather comes 
again, as being made of sheet iron, the workmen cannot well 
handle it during the frost. 

To S. Smith. 

Third Month 12th, 1821. 

Having now dwelt among these dear people nearly 

three years, I think I can say with truth, that my love for them 
has not diminished, but on the contrary greatly increased, 
particularly for those who are of least account among men : 
their simplicity and sufferings, which I often witness, render 
them dearer than ever to my heart ; though I have often to 
turn aside, and lament in heaviness and mourning. My 
heavenly Father has been pleased of late, in retirement, to 
clothe me more and more with ability to pray, not only on 
account of the many evils that are in the world, but for His 
little ones wherever scattered ; and, for ever blessed be His great 
and adorable name, to pray for one who seemeth to need help 
more than they all — even for myself ; whose backslidings cannot 
be numbered for multitude, and whose sins and transgressions 
are more than the hairs of my head, twice told ; — whose day's 
work is drawing fast towards a close, — yea, the shadows of the 



92 chapter vn. [1821. 

evening are beginning to appear. Can it be any thing but 
Almighty love, that thus awakens and makes sensible a poor 
frail mortal? "As an eagle stirreth up her nest, fluttereth 
over her young, spreadeth abroad her wings, taketh them and 
beareth them on her wings, 11 — thus preparing them for flight ; 
so doth a compassionate and ever merciful Lord God, nourish, 
cherish, and strengthen in the tenderest manner, his unworthy 
and often ungrateful children. How often would He gather 
them ; — but oh ! they will not. How often in love unutterable 
doth He strive to save, by convincing their understandings, in 
the most indubitable manner, that "there is a reward for the 
righteous, and a Grod that judgeth in the earth ;" and, unwill- 
ing "that any should perish, but that all should repent, return, 
and live, 11 how often doth He alarm and shake the false rest 
of those, who are dwelling carelessly and at ease, and thus warns 
them of the uncertainty of their continuance here. By His 
judgments, all in mercy and in truth, how often doth He fill 
our hearts with sorrow, which worketh repentance never to be 
repented of, to reduce and bring us into humility ; that He 
may draw us nearer and nearer into acquaintance with Him, in 
whom humility and meekness are personified ; — who said " no 
man cometh unto me, except the Father, which hath sent me, 
draw Him ; — no man cometh to the Father, but by me ; — him 
that cometh to me, I will in no wise cast out. 11 

Oh ! that there was a willingness wrought in us to bear the 
turnings and overturnings of our heavenly Father's hand : — 
what blessedness would accompany that simple child-like state ! 
The dear Master would have many things to say unto us, but 
we cannot bear them now, — we are unprepared to receive the 
sayings of the heavenly guest. Then what abundant cause 
there is for the tribulated weary soul, to come unto the meek 
and lowly Jesus ; and in humble resignation, to receive His 
yoke, and learn of Him, whose teaching is ever sublime and 
excellent ; — peaceful and easy is His yoke, — light the burden, 
— sweet the rest. He can teach us to pray " in faith, even 
unto Him, who seeth in secret, 1 ' and who will condescend to 
hear from heaven, His dwelling place, and to accept the 
broken, humble, contrite breathings of the soul. 



1821.] chapter vir. 93 

I perceive that much of what I have written, applies to 
myself, which is often the case with what I write to others ; 
my friends will, therefore, have the better opportunity of know- 
ing and feeling the true state and condition of a poor shattered 
vessel, that has partaken of a tolerable share of buffeting 
(great part of which might have been avoided) through the 
voyage of life ; and is now drifting with a fleet of many others, 
that are endeavouring to reach the same port, but into which it 
is impossible to enter without a pilot. Some knowing the 
danger of delay, and the difficulty of obtaining a pilot, unless 
timely and earnestly sought after, prudently hearken to coun- 
sel, and provide at setting out. Such steer along safely, with 
wisdom at the helm ; but too many neglect this, till near the 
end of the voyage, when, as they begin to discover their great 
risk, by certain indications of danger which cannot be mistaken, 
they are continually making signals to other vessels, by way 
of warning them. To some who follow, the warning may be 
quite unnecessary, as such may be amply prepared, having a 
glorious prospect of an entrance being abundantly administered 
unto them. 

To B/ICHABD COCKIN. 

Tenth Month 3rd, 1821. 

It is necessary to make great allowances for those in 

high stations in every country, but particularly in this, which 
is but just emerging from a state of barbarism. The difficulties 
by which a few virtuous individuals here are surrounded, make 
it a matter of astonishment to me, how such are enabled to per- 
severe in a tolerable degree of well doing, amidst such a host 
of corruption and opposition. Scarcely a day passes over 
but we have cause to mourn and lament : but although 
there is much to grieve for, there is also a great deal to love 
and pity. 

There are a number of foreigners here, and not least my own 
countrymen, who have done a great deal of harm, by flattering 
some truly worthy characters ; and from self-interested motives, 
making them think more highly of their religious attain- 
ments, than otherwise would have been the case. This helps 



94 CHAPTER VII. [1821. 

to keep such wrapped up iu false garments, and renders the 
language of simple and undisguised truth more harsh and 
impalatable, when they do meet with it. Some time ago, a 
person of consequence and his secretary, visited the land we are 
cultivating on this side of the city. The crops were at the 
time in a very luxuriant state, with which they were much 
pleased. They wished to ascertain what the people about 
thought of the improvements, and asked several of them what 
they thought of it. These all expressed their approbation ; at 
last, one was asked, who said, ' if the Lord had not given the 
man wisdom to do it, it would have been a morass still. 1 
With this answer they seemed much pleased. The secretary 
said, ' our people have always faith, they ascribe every thing 
to God." 1 I said, ' I often hear them mention His name.' 
' Always, 1 said he. ' But, I said, I am sorry to hear them call 
the great name to witness what they say in the markets, and in 
their trade. 1 It was easy to perceive he did not like my 
remark. Almost invariably the people here, in asserting the 
price of an article, which is often a great falsehood, call upon 
the Almighty as a witness: — when rather than lose a customer, 
they will come down to one-half the price they first asked. 
Now, if I had assented to the observation of the secretary, and 
called them ' a good people, 1 (which is a common mode of 
expression here,) he would have been delighted. In short, 
they are so used to adulation and flattery, that they look for it 
every where, and from every person ; which makes the way 
more difficult for those who are not satisfied to feed them in 

this manner. 

I had a conference with the Emperor a short time since, 
and was never so much satisfied with any previous inter- 
view. He has passed through much conflict of mind within 
the last twelve months ; the state of political affairs and 
many other trying circumstances combined, have served to 
reduce him both in body and mind. A knowledge of his 
peculiar situation renders him in my estimation, an object of 
commiseration and sympathy. Few, I am persuaded, are 
really aware of the difficulties by which he is encompassed, or of 
what he has to contend with ; and when I consider the educa- 



]821.] CHAPTER VII. 95 

tion he has had and training up altogether, I am more 
than ever surprised that he should have any relish for serious 
things. He had been absent about ten months at the Con- 
gress ; and on my telling him, he had been a long time away 
from his large family, he said, ' I have had a great deal to do. 
It is a very difficult thing to act for a nation, but I hope I have 
acted under God ; and the measures I have taken I hope are 
approved by Him. I am encouraged to believe so, because not 
a drop of blood has been spilled. When the nations were in 
great distress and suffering during the late calamitous war, 
they then prayed to God : but they are like the Jews of old, 
they have now forgotten Him. There are societies of men in 
different places, who are disseminating bad principles under 
the cloak of bringing in Christianity : they are in many parts 
of Europe, — they are every where.'' I told him I had often 
thought of him, and that a petition had been raised in my 
heart on his account. ' Yes ;' he said, ' and I have often 
thought of you ; there has not been one day, not one day, but 
I have thought of you and of Messrs. Allen and Grellet, and 
always felt myself united to you three in spirit.' 

Previously to this conversation, we sat down in silence 
before the Lord ; and in the course of our sitting, my mouth 
was opened to declare unto him the goodness of God, and His 
great mercy, variously displayed to the children of men ; and 
to speak of the precious promises, which the humble heart 
only can sensibly partake of. After which, we continued our 
sitting until I had cleared my mind a second time ; in this I 
had to recite the invitation of the dear Master ; — " Come unto 
me, all ye that labour and are heavy laden," &c. After having 
sat some time in silence, feeling myself at liberty, I told him 
my mind was relieved ; when he gave me his hand, and 
attempted to describe his feelings, but was unable to utter any 
thing, except ' I have felt it,' laying his hand on his heart : 
I never saw him so brought down before. He stayed with us, 
I think, nearly three hours, and then left us in an affectionate 
manner, saying, ' I must leave you. I hope this is not the 
last time that I shall come : remember me in your prayers.' I 
attended him to his carriage, and as it drove off, he said, ' God 



96 CHAPTER VII. [1821. 

bless you/ Our large family Bible lay in one of the rooms ; 
on seeing it he opened it, and readily turned to the 119th 
Psalm, which he said he had read that morning. He had a 
copy of the Scriptures in the carriage, which he always carries 
with him. My mind was so covered with sadness during the 
remainder of the day, and at intervals long afterwards, that 
my clear wife said, she thought I must have said too little or 
too much to the Emperor. I told her, no ; — I felt satisfied as 
to that : but I could not help lamenting, that such a man 
should be in such a situation. 



1822.] chapter vrrr. 97 



CHAPTER VIII. 

ADDRESS TO BALBY MONTHLY MEETING IN 1822 AND IN 1823 

VISIT FROM THE EMPEROR, &C. GREAT FLOOD AT PETERSBURG. 

To Balby Monthly Meeting. 

First Month 20th, 1822. 
Dear Friends, 
Being once more permitted to send you the answers to the 
queries from our little company in this land, my mind is 
renewedly and affectionately turned towards my dear brethren 
and sisters, whom I have long and tenderly loved ; for whose 
welfare every way, an unabated solicitude remains, and I trust 
will ever have a dwelling-place in my heart. 

Great indeed is the weakness, and painfully discouraging the 
feelings I am under, on the present occasion. " What could 
have been done more to my vineyard," than hath been done 
unto it, is the language that presents itself to my mind. In 
the breast of every individual capable of reflection, I believe 
the acknowledgment will be found — ' Nothing, Lord.'' None 
can say, knowledge has been wanting ; for " the grace of God 
which bringeth salvation hath appeared unto all, teaching'''' all : 
" precept upon precept, line upon line," have been abundantly 
administered. How unavailing and ineffectual will be the 
feeble efforts of one, who feels himself less than the least of 
all the flock and family, to stir up the pure mind in any, to a 
remembrance of things that are excellent — things that accom- 
pany life and salvation ; when so many dignified servants have 
hitherto pleaded the blessed Master's righteous cause in vain. 
How many of the Lord's deeply baptized, faithful messengers 
have been sent from time to time, to " cry aloud and spare 
not," — clothed with indisputable authority to preach, rebuke, 
exhort ; — and in that love which causeth joy in the presence of 



98 CHAPTER VIII. [1822. 

the holy angels, beseeching us to be " reconciled unto God." 
What could have been done more, that hath not been done ? 
We ourselves must testify against ourselves, to the truth of 
this. 

Dearly beloved Friends, consider what I say ; and the Lord 
give you understanding hearts, rightly to estimate the great- 
ness of His love and mercy. " May the Lord direct your hearts 
into the love of God, and into the patient waiting for Christ," 
— strengthen your faith in Him, and enable you to obey His 
voice ; lest His glory should depart from Israel, and nothing be 
left but a name. 

Be pleased, Lord ! to remember them that sigh. Be with 
thy little ones, wherever scattered ; who for Zions sake cannot 
hold their peace, and for Jerusalem's sake cannot rest; "until 
the righteousness thereof go forth as brightness, and the salva- 
tion thereof as a lamp that burnetii.' 1 Strengthen them to cry 
day and night unto thee : sustain, support, and comfort them. 
Bless them, and continue with them to the end ; and crown them 
with everlasting glory. 

So prays your affectionate Friend and brother, 

D. W. 

To E. Bobson.* 

Tenth Month 27th, 1822. 
My Dearest Eliza, 
Notwithstanding I have hitherto been silent, the affecting 
events which have taken place since we last saw each other, 
have not been suffered to transpire unregarded ; on the con- 
trary, they have only served to heighten that love and affection, 
wdiich have long dwelt in my heart towards thee, and thy dear 
brothers and sisters. Believe me, my dear niece, that through 
all, you have had my nearest sympathy ; and that I have parti- 
cipated most feelingly and sincerely in all the painful afflictions, 
which ' ' the Father of mercies and God of all comfort,' 1 hath in 
His unsearchable wisdom been pleased to dispense unto you ; 
although I have been dumb as to the expression of it by letter. 

* It may be worthy of remark, that E. R., to whom the letter is 
addressed, expired the very day on which it was written. 



1822.] CHAPTER VIII. 99 

Often has a secret petition . been raised in my heart for your 
protection and preservation, to Him, whose Almighty power can 
sustain our minds through every conflict ; — who will not break 
the bruised reed, nor suffer it to be broken. When contem- 
plating your situation, I am often comforted by a knowledge of 
the many near and dear relations and friends who surround 
you, who are affectionately careful and solicitous for your wel- 
fare every way; but my greatest consolation arises, from a firm 
belief, that you are indeed the peculiar objects of Divine regard. 
Ah ! my very dear Eliza, what a blessed privilege to be under 
the superintending care and oversight of Him, who slumbereth 
not : such, though cast down, are not forsaken in the day of 
trouble ; — resignation's healing balm, which soothes the keen 
anguish of an afflicted mind, in purest love is given: — not 
a tear, not a sigh, escapes His ever- watchful eye, in those 
who strive to bow in meek submission to His holy righteous 
will. How do I long that I could find words to convey the 
sweet consolation which pervades my mind, when turned 
towards thee : it cannot be expressed. " Behold the tabernacle 
of God is with men," — is the language that arises in my mind, 
while dwelling under the precious influence of this feeling; and I 
humbly pray that it may be richly verified, to thy inexpressible 
comfort and delight, and to the admiration, gratitude and praise, 
not only of thyself, but of all thy dear connexions and friends. 
It is the broken, contrite spirit that the Lord regards; — it is the 
heart that wears the costly robe of sweet humility, in which the 
lowly Jesus makes His blessed abode. O the riches of His 
grace ! it is peace, joy and love ; — that precious peace, which 
the world with all its perishing enjoyments, however splendid 
and specious in appearance, cannot give; and, blessed be the 
name of the Lord the only Giver, neither can it take one 
particle away : — that joy, in which the ransomed and redeemed 
only can rejoice," unspeakable and full of glory :" — that love, 
which enlargeth the heart, ancPcasteth out all fear,. — even the 
love of God, through Jesus Christ our Lord, to the children of 
men. " He will dwell with them, and they shall be His 
people, and God himself shall be with them, and be their God. 
And God shall wipe away all tears from their eyes ; and there 

h 2 



100 CHAPTER VIII. [1822. 

shall be no more death, neither sorrow, nor crying, neither shall 
shall there be any more pain : for the former things are passed 
away." 

To a Friend under Affliction. 

Eleventh Month 22nd, 1822. 

I have been for many months desirous of writing to thee ; 
and be assured that my silence has not arisen from any diminu- 
tion of love or regard. On the contrary, the fight of affliction 
thou hast had to pass through, since we last exchanged letters, 
has rendered thee more than ever the companion of my thoughts, 
with increased affectionate solicitude ; and yet it is only of late, 
that I have come to the determination of addressing thee. 

Now, my dear friend, I hope I shall not awaken feelings of a 
painful nature, as from my own weakness and poverty I feel 
more than usually incapable of administering the smallest ray of 
comfort, or of lulling them again into quietness and repose. But, 
while it is not in my power to strengthen, I trust I shall be pre- 
served from weakening or lessening, in any degree, thy confidence 
in Him ; who hath been pleased to strip thee of, I believe, thy 
greatest earthly treasure. How mysterious to our poor finite com- 
prehension, are the ways of Infinite wisdom, to prepare and purify 
us for an inheritance, incorruptible and undefiled, and which 
will never fade away ! How difficult it is for us, in the hour of 
dismay and extremity, to distinguish, that the arm of everlasting 
mercy is still underneath for our support : but as humble resig- 
nation and submission to that Holy Will which cannot err, are 
patiently sought after, the poor tossed mind becomes mercifully 
strengthened to look unto Him, who gave, and who hath been 
pleased to take away; — and to say in the depth of humility, 
Amen, — Blessed be the name of the Lord ! This, I trust, has 
been thy sensible experience, my very dear friend, long before 
this time ; and that patient fortitude hath conspicuously shone 
forth to thy sympathizing relations and friends : that they who 
have been eye-witnesses, may also have been partakers with 
thee of that tranquil and peaceful resignation of mind, which 
sheds a lustre, consoling, comforting, and animating to all within 
its sphere. It is this that designates the true Christian, — rising 



1823.] CHAPTER VIII. 101 

with increased brightness through the gloom of affliction, — lowly 
and weak in self-estimation, and poor indeed,- — disrobed of self 
and what self most delighted in ; — but ah ! how rich in 
heavenly garb, attired and decorated with the costly gem of 
sweet humility, which has been won by keenest suffering, and 
which suffering alone can purchase ! 

These last seven weeks I have suffered from rheu- 
matism in my right arm, which has deprived me of much 
sleep: while it takes from my rest, it allows a larger por- 
tion of time for reflection, and I hope will teach me to number 
my days ; and if happily I am found applying my heart unto 
wisdom, it will be a blessing indeed ; that so the day's work 
may be finished, when the night draws nigh. For truly I am 
often filled with fear on this account, finding yet much to do, 
and many things alive, which ought to have been long ago slain. 
And ! the weakness and poverty that I daily feel ! and the 
want of that ability, which can alone qualify for every good 
thought, word and work ! If under feelings of this kind long 
dispensed, there be no cause for discouragement, then may. I 
hope yet to praise Him, who was the health of David's counte- 
nance and his God. 

To Friends of Balby Monthly Meeting. 

First Month 23rd, 1823. 
Dear Friends, 

I herewith enclose our answers to the queries which are 
usually considered at the Spring Quarterly Meeting, and at the 
same time am desired to acknowledge the receipt of your certi- 
ficate on behalf of . 

On looking towards my dear brethren and sisters, I am 
thankful in feeling a degree of that love, which alters not by 
separation, neither is subject to change amidst the vicissitudes 
of time ; in which I once more salute you, with desires for 
your present and eternal well-being. Under an humbling sense 
produced by the recollection of those precious seasons, when I 
have been permitted to assemble with you, previously to the 
Spring Quarterly Meeting in each year, I am induced to bring- 
to your remembrance the days that are over and past. Nearly 



102 chapter viir. [1823. 

five years have glided away, since I saw the well-gathered 
assembly on such an occasion ; at that time there were many 
vacant seats, which had been occupied by faithful labourers in 
the Lord's vineyard both in word and doctrine, and by those 
who were in their day and generation fathers and mothers in 
our Israel. During this period, others also of blessed memory 
have been called away, who " rest from their labours, and their 
works do follow them."" In thus calling to mind a succession 
of Friends whom I knew and loved, who have sooner or later 
finished their earthly course, fought the good fight, and kept 
the faith, for whom a crown of righteousness is prepared ; I 
feel an engagement of mind, that those who are left a little 
longer in this scene of conflict, may be thereby encouraged and 
strengthened to persevere in following Him, in whom they 
have believed ; that they also, at the end of their race, may 
obtain the immortal prize. And Oh ! my beloved Friends, upon 
whom the weight of the precious cause of truth and righteous- 
ness must soon devolve, when the few remaining pillars of the 
present day are gathered to their everlasting rest, how earnestly 
do I desire that you may be aroused to preparation, by a deep 
sense of the important station that awaits you. Let me entreat 
you seriously to consider, how far the time and talents, so 
richly and so mercifully bestowed, are employed and devoted to 
the service of the Most High God ; and whether the many 
vacant places would have remained unfilled up to the present 
day, if obedience had kept up with knowledge, which has been 
from time to time vouchsafed. To the just witness in every 
heart I appeal, and in tender love I refer you. 

And dear brethren and sisters, I wish to press it not only 
upon heads of families, but upon all who are capable of reflec- 
tion, to lay these things to heart ; for it is a glorious cause 
in which all are or ought to be concerned, inasmuch as all 
are called to glory and virtue. Let these things sink deep in 
your minds, — let them have a place equal to their vast impor- 
tance. How great is the responsibility, how awful the considera- 
tion, that by the influence of your example in faithfulness and 
upright walking, and by your religious care and oversight, the 
precious young people may be induced to choose the " Lord for 



1823.] CHAPTER VIII. 103 

their portion, and the God of Jacob for the lot of their inheri- 
tance." Of ourselves we can do nothing ; — but dear Friends, 
help is laid upon one that is mighty to save and to deliver : — 
unto Him all power in heaven and on earth is given ; even our 
Lord and Saviour Jesus Christ, — the blessed medium of access 
to God ! He hath graciously declared, — "Him that cometh unto 
me, I will in no wise cast out." All things are possible with Him : 
counsel is His, and sound wisdom : — He is understanding : — 
He is strength. What then remains, but for us, in humble 
prostration of soul, to draw nigh unto Him? By yielding simple 
obedience to His Divine requisitions, this work of eternal con- 
sequence begins. It is not limited to a chosen few ; it is ex- 
tended unto all : — " What I say unto you, I say unto all, 
Watch." The watch, with constancy maintained, will lead to 
prayer. Praying always with all prayer and supplication in 
the Spirit, and watching thereunto, will lead the soul to God ; 
to whom all power belongs. " Blessed will be those servants 
who are found so doing." Great will be their peace while here ; 
glorious their reward hereafter. They will be numbered with 
those, that shall shine as the brightness of the firmament, and 
amongst them, who, turning " many to righteousness," shall 
shine as the stars for ever and ever. 

I am your affectionate friend and brother, 

D. \\\ 

To Richard Cockin, Doncaster. 

Eighth Month 6th, 1823. 
Day after day passes away, leaving accumulated cause to 
regret how much I am indebted to thee, my dear and long- 
loved friend ; without being able to give thee an assurance of 
my unabated love, or to acknowledge the receipt of many affec- 
tionate tokens of remembrance, which have from time to time 
been conveyed in thy acceptable and welcome letters ; all of 
which, though unreplied to, have been regularly received with 
gratitude and renewed feeling of affection. I have long medi- 
tated writing to thee, but have always been prevented ; now, 
however, I have once more taken up the pen, and must 
endeavour, in some degree, to account for such apparent neglect , 



104 CHAPTER VIII. [1823. 

Laying aside all other causes, which time and paper will not 
permit my bringing forward, I must inform thee that sickness 
has hung about our dwelling since the middle of last winter. 
The severity of the weather laid us all by for a time ; but as 
spring opened, all the invalids came about again, with the 
exception of my dear wife and my Joshua, who lingered on 
until the fine weather fairly opened, and seemed likely to re- 
cover ; but great heat coining suddenly upon us, their already 
weakened frames could not support it. Every means was tried 
which a skilful physician could devise, without any material 
benefit being visible : returning to England seemed the only 
alternative he could point out. I believe nothing could have 
induced my wife to leave us, but the hope of the change being 
beneficial to her son ; however, she at length came to the reso- 
lution to make the attempt, and accompanied by my daughters, 
they sailed for London, on the 18th of last month. I was three 
days on board the ship with them, previously to their sailing, 
but was obliged to return home the evening before they got to 
sea : although this was a disappointment, I was very glad I 
had been with them, as the first night they slept on board, 
there was the most dreadful storm of thunder and lightning 
I ever witnessed. I felt thankful I was with them, for I think 
they would have been quite terrified, if they had not had some- 
body to cheer them a little. I hope by this time they are in 
sight of the ' white cliffs, 1 and I shall rejoice to hear of their 
safe arrival. 

I am grieved to find the character of our Emperor 

does not stand so high with many in England as it did ; 
and fully believe he has been prompted by evil-disposed 
persons to do things that he does not approve of, and 
would not have done, but at their instigation. We know of no 
difference here, in respect to the government of the internal 
affairs of this country. I think his judgment has been biased 
by some of the other crowned heads, with whom he has of late 
associated : at the same time there is reason to believe, he h#s 
seen through some of their devices. I only wonder how he 
bears up, amidst the many difficulties that surround him ; and 
the constant exercise of moderation, patience, and forbearance, 



1823.] CHAPTER VIII. 105 

he is in the daily practice of, is to me extraordinary. The 
manner in which he is imposed upon by many who enjoy his 
confidence, would scarcely be believed in its full extent. With 
my work, and as regards myself, I find no lack of assistance, 
when any thing that requires his aid is brought to his knowledge. 
I have frequently seen him passing on the road, since he re- 
turned from Verona. A few weeks ago, I was looking at some 
oats pretty soon in the morning, in the neighbourhood of a 
pavilion to which he was going with the Dowager Empress to 
breakfast ; and they passed close by me in a low carriage with a 
pair of horses. He looked very well ; and I observed he pointed 
me out to his mother. I am at present much occupied in the 
neighbourhood where he mostly resides in summer, about seven- 
teen miles from Petersburg ; and ten days ago, whilst laying out 
some ground in a wood, which is preparing for cultivation, a 
carriage stopped near the part where 1 was. My William was 
near, and called to me that it was the Emperor. On seeing 
him alight and spring over the ditch towards the place, I went 
to meet him. He gave me his hand, and immediately entered 
into conversation with his usual freedom. One of his Generals 
followed him ; but it appeared to make no difference in his 
manner. He remained for some time, made many inquiries 
about my family ; and having no doubt remarked our hay crops, 
he said, — ' You will have more hay than all the people in the 
neighbourhood.' I mentioned the indisposition of my family, 
and that my wife was gone to England : he seemed a little 
surprised, and directly asked if she would return. 1 said she 
intended it. He appeared greatly interested in my report of 
the abundant crops upon the ground. "Last year there was 
quite a dearth of fodder in this neighbourhood ; a large number 
of cattle were lost for want of food. After explaining to him 
what were my plans relative to the parcel of land on which we 
were standing, he shook me by the hand, and said, ' I will let 
you do what you like.' I understand that the next day he 
made some inquiry as to the cause of the sickness among us, and 
having learnt that it was occasioned by the coldness of the house 
in which we live, he gave orders that it should be altered im- 
mediately. On the third day after the interview, an architect 



106 CHAPTER VIII. [1823. 

arrived, to ascertain what was wanted ; and we are now well 
stocked with bricklayers, carpenters, and the like. 

I believe I have long been partaker of the tender sympathy 
of my friends in England ; but I think I never knew a time 
when I stood more in need of it, than the present. Exclusive 
of domestic enjoyments, I have long ceased to have any delights, 
the loss of which would give me an hour's pain or thought : 
in the bosom of my family was to be found all that could afford 
me gratification or comfort. With them about me, I had 
every thing I could wish for or desire, in this state of mutability. 
The compact is, however, unexpectedly and suddenly dissolved, 
and one-half diminished as in a moment. I have, however, one 
consolation, which is, that they will not feel it as I do : they, 
if permitted to reach their native land in safety, — strengthened, 
I humbly hope, through heavenly goodness and mercy, by the 
sea air, and their health in some degree restored, will be 
cheered and comforted by the countenances of many dear rela- 
tions and friends. 

I confess my prospects here wear a very different aspect ; 
but I trust I have in some degree learned in all states to be 
content. There is, my dear friend, and without any inclina- 
tion to boast, — I believe I may say, I know there is, — a soul- 
solacing presence to be felt in a retired and lonely mansion, as 
well as in a place where large assemblies crowd ; which, 
unbounded and unlimited by time and space, extends to every 
clime, to every place, to every heart : — and ! saith my soul 
in humble prayer, may it be felt by us all ! — that all our 
hearts may be so cleansed, so prepared and purified from every 
defilement, as to be in constant readiness to receive the heavenly 
guest. That the whole human race may be brought to the same 
blessed experience, is the earnest desire of thy tribulated friend 
at this moment of time ; that all may have life, that all may be 
washed, that all may be sanctified, that all may be " justified, 
in the name of the Lord Jesus, and by the Spirit of our God. 1 ' 

I must now come to a conclusion, after saying, that although 
my dwelling is in low places, I am frequently favoured to feel 
humble resignation of mind ; at the same time believing, that 
the hand of the Lord is in the present dispensation, I can 



1824.] CHAPTER VIII. 107 

freely commit my all to His divine disposal, who I am per- 
suaded will not break the bruised reed. 

To thy dear wife and family I beg to be remembered in love 
unfeigned, and assuring thee that thou art included in the same. 
I remain thy affectionate friend, 

D. W. 

To Sarah Smith, Sheffield. 

Second Month 16th, 1824. 

Thy last letter came duly to hand, and was welcome indeed : 
my beloved invalids, it is true, had furnished me with repeated 
accounts of their improving health ; yet to receive a confirma- 
tion from an affectionate eye-witness of the same, demands every 
acknowledgment of which I am capable, for thy kindness in 
thus adding to our comfort and consolation. Thou hast no 
doubt heard before this time, that a variety of circumstances 
combine to prevent my projected visit to England, which I 
most sincerely regret : although it must have been short, and 
professedly to accompany my dear family back to this country, 
as I could but have had a short space of time to perform it in, 
and of course should have seen but few of the faces of my 
Friends, and comparatively for a moment only ; yet this would 
have been very precious to me. Our present solitary situation 
may be better imagined than described ; I need not advert 
to it, except to acknowledge with gratitude and thankfulness, 
the preservation and support we have witnessed. I hope most 
sincerely, that the journey of my dear wife and children to 
England, will be productive of much future comfort ; not only 
through the restoration of the health of the invalids, but by 
causing a renewal of affectionate regard and intercourse with 
our friends; which, I trust, will be strengthened and increased, 
by a more frequent interchange of letters, which will have a 
tendency to keep alive feelings of love and sympathy for each 
other. I remember very well, it was the advice of our dearly 
beloved friend, Stephen Grellet, when in this country, that we 
should make a great point of keeping up a correspondence 
with our Friends in England. 

I am quite aware, my dear friend, that thou must sensibly 



108 CHAPTER VIII. [1824. 

feel the loss, when thy beloved niece is removed from under 
thy roof ; but thou needest not fear, thou wilt be cared for : 
thou hast cared for many ; her place will be filled, I believe, to 
thy comfort and admiration. I sometimes think that heavenly 
goodness and loving-kindness are plainly evinced in these things, 
and all in love and mercy to us poor creatures, gradually and 
progressively to separate us, and more perfectly to wean us, 
from every sensible delight, even from things which may at one 
time have been graciously dispensed, and whereon our affections 
may have been properly and lawfully fixed. In infinite wisdom 
they are withdrawn, for our farther refinement and purification, 
that our minds may become unfettered and loosened more and 
more from the things of time and sense ; that nothing may 
hinder or stand in the way of the complete removal of all that 
can be shaken, that those things only which cannot be shaken 
may remain, which are founded on the immutable Rock ; and 
that the great and good Grod may be all in all. So that we 
may not only have our lamps trimmed and lights burning, but, 
like the wise virgins, we may be ready and looking for the 
coming of the heavenly Bridegroom ; at the same time pre- 
pared to wait, should the time be prolonged, having a supply 
of " oil in our vessels with our lamps." 

[In the following letter he speaks of the safe return of his 
wife and party from England.] 

To John Hipslev, Hull. 

Fifth Month 31st, 1824. 

I have now the pleasure of informing thee, that we were 
much surprised by the arrival of the Fanny, after a passage 
of sixteen days, as we had had a succession of easterly gales. 
She was quite unlooked for on our part. A little before bed- 
time, on Fourth day, we were roused by the sound of wheels ; but 
had not the most distant idea who our guests could be. There 
were only a few moments to think about it, before the whole 
party were in the house ; and our surprise and joy may be 
more readily conceived than described. 

As I have once more got them safe at home, I may now tell 



1824-.] CHAPTER VIIT. 109 

thee somewhat of the trial of faith, patience, and feeling, under 
a lengthened-out sickness, which I have had to pass through for 
several months. It is near four months ago that I became 
seriously ill, and at one time there seemed little probability of 
my struggling through, until my wife could reach her home ; 
but as I could not bear the thought of making her uneasy 
whilst in England, and without a possibility of getting to me 
or affording any relief, I took great pains to keep it from her, 
either in letters from us, or from any other person that I knew 
was writing. At times, when at the worst, I blamed myself 
for having withheld the information, as it seemed almost pre- 
sumptuous to suppose I should recover ; but at seasons I had 
hope : and I trust I can in some degree adopt the language of 
the Psalmist, and say, — " The Lord is my strength and my 
shield; my heart trusted in Him, and I am helped:" and 
great cause I have to ascribe all to his goodness and mercy, 
and to put my trust and confidence in Him. 

I had intended visiting England this spring, attending the 
Yearly Meeting, and bringing home my family in the summer; 
but the Lord prevented me, and not man, as I had every 
permission that man could give me. This reconciles all, and 
raises consolation in my mind, and a hope that I am still an 
object of his divine compassion, although under a humiliating 
sense of my unworthiness. 

To David Mallinson, Sheffield. 

Tenth Month 25th, 1824, 0. S. 

According to expectation our dear friend Thomas 

Shillitoe arrived about seven weeks ago, and seems very 
comfortable amongst us. All who have seen him are much 
pleased with him ; and his having brought no books with 
him has prevented much trouble, and removed all suspicion 
far away. He is remarkably furnished with a sense of 
things in this place, and acts with the greatest prudence and 
caution. The more we know him, the more we love him ; his 
conduct and conversation are altogether consistent with his 
profession, without which he would make little impression on 
the minds of the people, whose views and expectations are alto- 



110 CHAPTER VIII. [1824. 

gether outward ; and they take more notice of external appear- 
ances perhaps, than the people in England or in other nations 
further advanced in civilization and religious sensibility. 

[The awful visitation upon the City of Petersburg, by the 
great inundation in the Eleventh Month, 1824, is thus de- 
scribed : — ] 

To John Hipsley, Hull. 

Eleventh Month Uth, 1824, 0. S. 

As it is probable that accounts of an alarming nature, relative 
to the situation of this neighbourhood will shortly reach 
England, and knowing from experience the lively interest 
which thyself and family at all times take in our welfare, I 
thought I would prevent your being disturbed with unneces- 
sary fears, occasioned by imperfect statements, as to our personal 
safety. 

On the 7th inst., the inhabitants of Petersburg experienced 
the most awful visitation that has ever occurred within the 
memory of the oldest person living, by a deluge, which 
threatened for several hours the destruction of the city and 
suburbs. A dreadful tempest came on during the night of the 
6th from the south-w r est, and continued to rage with unabated 
fury nearly the whole of the next day. Two days previously, an 
unusual roaring of the sea had been noticed about the head of 
the Gulf of Finland, and at Cronstadt. On the morning of 
the 7th, the sea began to rise, and shortly afterwards to push 
its waves into the heart of the city. The people at first sup- 
posed it w r ould only be one of the floods which have frequently 
occurred, and manifested no particular alarm ; but before noon, 
they became convinced of the necessity of flying for their 
lives. The road we live on exhibited a scene of terror and 
dismay not easy to describe : every one anxious to save himself 
and his cattle. As our situation is somewhat higher than the 
city itself, we had many applications for food for the cattle and 
shelter, which of course we were glad to comply with. Our 
neighbourhood was protected from sharing in the general 
calamity by the bank of the Ligofsky canal, which is raised 



1824.] CHAPTER via. Ill 

above the regular surface of the country ; but from the upper 
part of the house we could see over this bank, which discovered 
to us the city, standing as it were in the open sea. 

The water continued to rise until three, p.m., when the wind 
shifted to the north-west, and although its violence continued, it 
prevented the water from rising any higher. At that time the 
water was twelve feet deep in the main street on Vasily's 
Island. Buildings consisting of only one story were of course 
filled ; and the frightened occupants obliged to take refuge upon 
their roofs. In the afternoon, we made some attempt to go 
towards the city ; but found it unsafe to try much further than 
the bank of the canal just mentioned. The land under our 
care, between this and the city, was nearly all under water, so 
that we could hear nothing that night of the distress which 
prevailed there. 

By the morning of the 8th, the water had subsided so much, 
that it could only be seen about the low places ; in the after- 
noon I went off intending to see how our friend Sarah Kilham 
had fared, but after passing the barrier, I was compelled to 
return, as all the bridges were carried away by the force of the 
water. The 9th (a First day) arrived, and brought only our 
dear friend Thomas Shillitoe to meeting; who, although he 
knew enough of the general suffering to prevent his speaking 
for a short interval on first coming into the room, yet knew 
almost nothing in comparison of what has since been unfolded. 
The part where dear Thomas lives, stands pretty high, but 
in those streets the water stood only eighteen inches below 
the lamps. For three hours, a general silence prevailed in the 
city ; and from Thomas Shillitoe's windows, which command a 
view of four streets, nothing was to be seen but one poor 
struggling horse, and the police rowing about in boats to see 
where any assistance could be rendered. 

Our land before hinted at, is covered over with timber, boats, 
dead horses, cows, barrels of fish, crosses from the grave yards, 
parts of coffins, and other articles, and I regret to add, with 
many human bodies, drowned by this disastrous flood ; one is 
a female with a child under each arm, which she was endeavour- 
ing to save. 



112 CHAPTER VIII. [1824. 

It is now Third day night : I have been both to-day and 
yesterday in the city, and have heard such accounts of accumu- 
lated suffering, as are impossible to be set forth. I fear the 
number of lives lost will amount to ten thousand, and the loss 
of cattle and property is estimated at 20,000,000 roubles, 
(£800,000 sterling.) Whole squadrons of cavalry horses were 
drowned in their stables, and many saved by being led up 
stairs. One Englishman, a horse dealer, has lost all his horses. 
When the water began to rise above its usual height in 
floods, the Emperor went in person, and ordered the sentinels 
away from the different posts. When the palace became sur- 
rounded by water many feet deep, he appeared with the Em- 
press on the balconies, encouraging the people to exertion, and 
offering rewards to those who would endeavour to save life, 
wherever he saw any particular danger : by this, many were 
saved, who would otherwise have been inevitably lost. A sub- 
scription has been begun to-day for the benefit of the sufferers, 
to which the Emperor has given 1,000,000 roubles (^40,000 
sterling ;) and he has ordered the military governor to take care 
that the poor people are furnished with food. Yesterday, it was 
difficult to procure bread, as the bakers' ovens were mostly 
deluged by the water ; to-day, there is a supply. All the 
sugars at the Custom-house are melted, and all goods that will 
damage with water are spoiled. The shops in many places were 
full up to the ceilings : oats which have been under water in 
the stores, are selling at two and three roubles (from 20 to 30 
pence) the chetvert of five English bushels. The inhabitants 
and houses of three villages near the Gulph, are with their 
cattle, said to be entirely swept away. The Emperor has 
been to-day to several places, where the greatest suffering 
has occurred, to devise relief for the people. 

However affecting this visitation may appear, I cannot but 
view it with a hope, that it may yet prove a blessing in disguise, 
to those that remain: and I very much desire that it may have 
its proper and lasting effect upon all our minds ; that so all 
may repent, and turn unto Him, with whom is mercy and 
plenteous redemption ; lest a worse and more terrible warning 
should follow. There is, I think, reason to fear that another 



1824.] CHAPTER VIII. -IIS 

woe will succeed that which has now passed over, I mean the 
occurrence of pestilential disorders, which the dampness of the 
houses may bring on ; particularly, if intense frost should 
succeed, before they are in some degree dry and aired : last 
night it froze hard ; at present there is less frost, but with the 
appearance of more snow. ■ 

Our friend Sarah Kilham, is likely to suffer less than we 
feared, although her furniture was floating in her parlour. Her 
day scholars were in the house when the water rose, so that she 
was obliged to lodge them as she could. 

We scarcely know what to conclude about our friends at sea, 
as so much depends upon the situation of the different ships : 
we hear that some have been wrecked, and others have returned 
to Cronstadt. This island has been entirely under water. 

In the midst of the general distress, we have been permitted 
to partake of peace and quietness, of which we seem altogether 
unworthy. I sometimes fear we are not making an adequate 
return for the numerous comforts and blessings we enjoy ; and 
were it not to acknowledge with gratitude the loving-kindness 
and mercy which surrounded us, I should willingly omit saying 
any thing about ourselves : all belonging to us seem to shrink 
into nothingness, when we behold the surrounding scene of woo 
and misery. 



114 CHAPTER IX. [182- 1 ; 



CHAPTER IX. 



VISITS ENGLAND, 1825 RETURNS TO RUSSIA DEATH OF THE 

EMPEROR ALEXANDER, AND OCCURRENCES CONSEQUENT THEREON 

ADDRESS TO BALBY MONTHLY MEETING, 1826 EXTENSIVE 

FIRES, ETC. 



In the early part of 1 825, Daniel Wheeler visited England. He 
took the overland route, in company with Thomas Shillitoe, and 
landed at Harwich after a fatiguing journey of thirty-six days. 
His stay did not much exceed three months : during this time, 
he attended the Dublin Yearly Meeting, to which he had felt 
his mind drawn before leaving home ; also the Yearly Meeting 
held in London. 

The following extracts are from letters written on, and after, 
his return to Russia. 

To John Hipsley, Hull. 
Alster, of the Spurn, Sixth Month 23rd, 1825. 
The pilot being about to leave us, I hasten to inform 



thee that we shall shortly shape our course for the Naze of 
Norway. The vessel, I believe, will be very comfortable, when 
we get fairly out to sea, and the decks cleared up. 

It would have been very pleasant to have assembled once 
more with my dear Friends on shore, if it had been permitted ; 
as it is, I have great cause to be thankful, for having been 
allowed at seasons to partake, while on this side the Baltic, of 
the streams of that river, which makes glad the whole city and 
heritage of God. At the same time my heart is filled with 
gratitude, at the prospect of returning to my dear wife and 
family, with my health so much restored and renewed ; which 
cannot fail to raise in all our minds, the tribute of thanks- 
giving and praise to the great and good Shepherd ; unto whom 



1825.] CHAPTER IX. 115 

not only every sheep, but the most helpless lamb, of the 
flock is known, wherever situated, or however hidden. 

To ONE OP HIS FAMILY. 

Alster, Seventh Month 13^, 1825. 
In sight of Hogland. 
My dear , 

Within the last twenty-four hours we have only got 

about as many miles to windward ; but we must learn in all states 
to be content. I little thought when I wrote from Elsineur, 
that another fortnight would elapse without my reaching home, — 
and several days may yet intervene. There is, however, abun- 
dant cause for humble gratitude and thankfulness, that we have 
been so far preserved from accident. One night, since we have 
been in the Gulf, we drove very near the rocks on the Finnish 
coast. I had been up till after twelve o'clock, which is my usual 
practice at sea, as midnight often decides the weather we are 
likely to have : the mate had had the first watch, and when 
he called the captain at twelve o'clock, he asked whether the 
ship should go about. The captain said, ' No ; let her stand 
on. 1 I did not feel satisfied with this, particularly as the mate 
went to his berth, and the captain did not turn out : but I lay 
down in my cabin, and kept myself awake, as it was highly 
needful that somebody should be ready, if wanted. Before 
one, a.m., a sailor discovered the rocks, and had the captain 
alarmed, who without waiting to put on his clothes, went on 
deck, and immediately the sailors were called out, and the ship's 
head laid the other way. Had it been much darker, we might 
have gone ashore, before the ship could have been got round. 
But our great and merciful Helper was nigh to deliver ; to 
whom belongs all praise. 

Seventh Month 21 st. — After beating about two other days 
with a contrary wind, in the night of the 14th the wind 
altered, so that the vessel could lay on her proper course : the 
captain carried as much sail as she could bear, and at six in the 
morning we hove to, off the guard-ship ; and as soon as they had 
boarded, we filled sail and stood in for the Mole of Cronstadt. 
I succeeded in getting a passport without delay, and proceeded 

i2 



116 CHAPTER IX. [1825. 

in the afternoon steamer, and was favoured to find thy 
dear mother and all the family in good health. I trust we 
rejoiced together in humble thankfulness for being permitted 
to meet once more. 

Now, my dear child, I must bid thee farewell. Unite with 
me in grateful thanksgiving to the Lord Most High, for all His 
gracious mercies to us, and in humble prayer that he will be 
pleased to keep us meek and lowly in His fear, watching con- 
tinually ; that so we may be favoured to discover and escape 
every temptation, and be preserved from the many evils that 
are in the world, and alive unto Him who liveth for ever, 
through Jesus Christ, the Saviour of men : whose blessed Spirit 
dwelleth in the contrite and humble heart. 

To Richard Cockin, Doncaster. 

Moscow Road, Ninth Month 26th, 1825. 

My late visit amongst my dear friends in England, very 
frequently furnishes us, when the family is collected together, 
with a pleasant theme for conversation ; and when absent from 
them and alone, it is often with me the subject of contempla- 
tion. But while it serves to revive affectionate feelings for 
those I love, a sting of regret remains behind, at having 
enjoyed their company for so short an interval, and being again 
so widely separated from them, as has been my allotment for 
the last seven years. But, I trust, I have no disposition to 
murmur or repine; — on the contrary, I am often favoured to 
feel that resignation of mind, which, as it is abode in, has for 
its companion a feeling of sweet peace, of more value and 
more to be desired than the wealth of nations. 

No part of the journey leaves so much solid satisfaction 
when brought to remembrance, as my visit to Dublin. This 
was not a matter of choice, but undertaken and performed in 
the cross to my own natural will and inclination : and, although 
I am unworthy to be trusted with a sling and a few small stones, 
yet was I permitted to see how my brethren fared, and to take 
their pledge, — a pledge of love, which I believe will be long 
treasured up in my heart, and cannot diminish ; being im- 
pressed with a belief, that it sprung from an inexhaustible 



1825. j CHAPTER IX. 117 

source, a fountain of eternal duration, constantly flowing 
through innumerable channels, but still full to the margin of 
mercy and truth. There are several dear Friends in that 
land, with whom I feel a precious unity ; and whether they 
ever remember the stranger or not, he often thinks of them, 
with feelings which time and distance only serve to heighten. 

From what I have said of Friends in Dublin, my dear friend 
must not suppose that those in England are forgotten, or that 
any thing like a transfer of affection has taken place on my 
part. Such is the transcendent quality of true love, that 
whilst it embraces new objects, it does not lessen for those, on 
whom it has long and deservedly been fixed. Be assured my 
attachment has not lessened for those whom I have long known 
and loved ; on the contrary, it is strengthened by the renewal 
of intercourse. 

— I am informed on good authority, that John Gossner, 

the reformed Roman Catholic minister, is now allowed to preach 
in any part of the Prussian dominions. He has lately had an 
opportunity of preaching before the Crown Prince of Prussia, 
and also before another great personage at that court, who was 
so much affected, as to faint in the course of John Gossner's 
discourse. The wife of the latter personage, it is said, has long- 
been a serious character ; so that one cannot help rejoicing in 
the hope, that the great and good work is going forward in the 
hearts of some, and perhaps in the hearts of many, where 
least expected or looked for by poor short-sighted man. 

To Samuel Stansfield.* 
Fifth Verst, Moscow Road, Tenth Month 29ih, 1825. 

Thou wilt soon have been twelve months in England, 

and by this time canst form a judgment of the state of things 
in the meeting at Sheffield. I shall much rejoice to hear 
that there is a prospect of the younger branches coming 
forward to advocate the precious cause. The burden-bearers 
are thinly scattered in that large and once flourishing meet- 
ing ; and some of those who yet remain on the watch-tower, 

* Samuel Stansfield had resided some years in Petersburg', and been 
a constant attender of the little gathering at Daniel Wheeler's house. 



118 CHAPTER IX. [1825. 

cannot be expected to continue much longer, before they are 
called to receive the reward prepared for all, who have fought 
the good fight, and kept the faith. It so happened that I was 
not at a week-day meeting at Sheffield, when last in England: 
there seemed no deficiency on First days as to numbers; but, 
then, numbers do not always add to strength : on the contrary, 
large meetings are often painfully laborious, as it frequently 
happens that but a small remnant are rightly concerned in 
endeavouring to roll away the stone from the well's mouth; 
and there is reason to fear, on these occasions, that many 
return home without having been sensible that any of the 
assembly have been feeding upon that bread, which alone can 
nourish the immortal part. I think I have witnessed, in the 
course of my pilgrimage, that the most favoured meetings I 
have been permitted to share in, have been those held in the 
middle of the week, or on other days than First days. — — 

At our little meeting here, seven or eight is the greatest 
number that now collects, only one or two individuals besides 
our own family, ever attending. We often sit as in low 
places ; yet at times are permitted to feel that power, which 
can subdue all things unto itself, and enable us to draw near in 
the silence of all flesh to the " fountain," which is " opened to 
the house of David and to the inhabitants of Jerusalem 1, to 
wash and to bathe in. What a favour it is, although far 
removed from the fostering care of the church, not to be 
deprived of the privilege of worshipping Him, whose watchful 
unslumbering eye beholds the feeble endeavours of all, who 
desire to seek his face in sincerity of heart ; and who, in 
matchless and unmerited love, hath provided the blessed means 
to help our infirmities, which, though unutterable, are under- 
stood even in sighs and groans. 

[In the next letter, he gives an account of the death of 
the Emperor Alexander in the south of Russia, and of the 
occurrences at the capital consequent upon that lamented 
event.] 



1825.] CHAPTER IX. 119 



To John Hipsley, Hull. 

Twelfth Month ISth, 1825. 
When the intelligence of the death of our much 



lamented and justly beloved Emperor was made public in the 
city, consternation soon spread among all ranks of the people. 
At first, I thought it possible there might be some mistake, as 
the health of the Empress had been for some time declining, 
and had occasioned her journey to the south of Russia ; but 
the military being called upon to. swear allegiance to the new 
Emperor Constantine, removed every doubt. 

I was favoured with peaceful quiet and resignation on this 
mournful occasion, andfelt butonedesire — that the death of Alex- 
ander might have been a fair one ; and we have the most indu- 
bitable proof that it was unattended with any of those horrible 
circumstances, which, in some instances, have terminated the 
existence of the crowned heads of this country. I have often 
put up a feeble petition that the hand of violence might never 
be permitted to touch him ; and although I cannot help de- 
ploring, with the many millions of Russia, the loss of such a 
man, — yet a secret joy triumphs . over every selfish feeling, and 
raises in my heart a tribute of gratitude and praise to the great 
Preserver of men, who hath been graciously pleased to remove 
him in so remarkable a manner, from this scene of conflict and 
trouble. We could scarcely have desired more than has been 
given : I believe it has been the lot of few monarchs to end 
their days, whilst in the meridian of power, in a retreat so quiet, 
and so distant from all the pageantry of a court : it may be 
said, that he died in the bosom of his family. It appears, for 
the first two or three days of his indisposition, that he con- 
sidered it of no importance, and could not be prevailed upon to 
take any medicine, — he had a great aversion to medicine at all 
times. It is thought by some here, that if he had taken timely 
precaution of this kind, the fever, which is very prevalent in 
that part of the country, might have been kept off : it is pro- 
bable, its effects might have been less violent, and its progress 
impeded in some degree; but we learn from those who are 
acquainted with that neighbourhood, that strangers seldom if 



1-20 CHAPTER IX. [1825. 

ever escape an attack of it, and it is often fatal to them. The 
climate immediately round Taganrog, where the Emperor died, 
is considered very healthy ; but at a very short distance from it, 
it is considered quite the reverse ; and it seems that Alexander 
had been beyond the healthy boundary, and had taken cold on 
the south coast. 

It is very consoling to find, that his mind was so peaceful, as 
appears, when he was persuaded to take what is called the 
sacrament : it is probable that delirium came on afterwards, 
but towards the last he was perfectly sensible. On the morning 
of his death, the sun broke through the clouds, and shone into 
his room ; when he remarked, ' how beautiful the weather is i 1 — 
and the manner in which he committed the Empress to the 
care of Prince Volchonsky, his faithful adjutant, although done 
without the assistance of words, plainly shows that he was 
collected, though deprived of speech. 

From concurring circumstances of late date, my hope is 
greatly strengthened that he has exchanged an earthly crown 
for one immortal, that will never fade away. He had reigned 
about four months less than twenty-five years. The Russians 
say he was too mild, and too good for them. 

I enclose some translations of letters relating to the illness 
and death of the Emperor. The two first are from the Empress 
Elizabeth. Some of the expressions in them are not just 
such as we should use, but we must make allowances, for edu- 
cation. They were written to the Empress Dowager.* 

This event will naturally bring about many changes. I have 
endeavoured to look round as to myself and family, but all is 
at present enveloped as in a cloud. Every thing here has been 
conducted quietly. The army have all sworn allegiance to 
Constantine. 

First Month 1st, 1 826. — Before finishing my letter, another 
proof of the uncertainty of all human affairs is handed to us. 
I shall insert the copy of a letter I received the day after the 
foregoing was written. 

* See Appendix, A. 



1825.] CHAPTER IX. 121 

St. Petersburg, December 14^, 1825. 
6 Little did I think of giving you to-day such weighty news, 
as that of an accession to the throne of the Emperor Nicholas, 
who is proclaimed to-day ; and we are going to take the accus- 
tomed oaths, as the Grand Duke Constantine has entirely 
renounced the crown. I have not read the manifesto ; but 
those who have seen it say, that amongst other things, the 
Emperor tells the nation, that he will reign as his brother did ; 
and that his reign will be only a continuation of bis brother's. 
The Minister of the Interior, whom I saw this moment, says 
that the Emperor has verbally assured them of the same. Let 
God's will be done on earth, as it is in heaven. Wishing you 
well, I am 

Most sincerely yours.' 

This letter I received about two, p.m. : — before five o'clock, 
the scene was entirely changed, and rebellion most artfully 
contrived, had thrown off the mask. As the army about us 
had most willingly declared for Constantine, only ten days 
before, some hesitation in several regiments became visible. 
This moment seemed favourable for the wishes of some who 
were aiming at a general overthrow ; and they artfully spread 
a report among the troops, that Constantine was only two 
hundred versts from hence, but was prevented from coming 
forward ; and that the newly declared Emperor was only an 
usurper. This had the effect of drawing several large bodies 
of troops into the snare ; and I believe many of these poor 
fellows considered they were only acting faithfully to the oath 
they had so recently taken : it was very evident they had no 
pre-concerted design against the government. However, an 
armed force collected in the neighbourhood of the Senate House, 
and were joined by a number not in military garb, and a 
mob of intoxicated rabble, who had been stirred up to act on 
the occasion. In vain did the new Emperor send to them, to 
endeavour to persuade them to peace and quietness. At last, 
the military governor, an old soldier and a popular character, 
went to harangue them ; and might probably have prevailed, 



122 CHAPTER IX. [1825. 

but the real plotters amongst them, fearing the soldiers would 
become reasonable, had the audacity to fire upon him. This 
poor Count Myloradovitch, who had been unhurt, it is said, in 
thirty-four engagements, was now mortally wounded. He rode 
off towards the Emperor, but soon fell upon his horse's neck : 
he was carried home in a sledge, and died in the night. 

This circumstance led to a dreadful carnage. The Emperor 
was very unwilling to resort to force, and at first a volley 
of blank cartridges was fired ; but this only causing the rebels 
to advance, a fire of grape shot was opened upon them with 
terrible effect, followed by a charge of cavalry. As most of the 
rebels who were able fled towards the river, the cannon were 
pointed in that direction ; and the Academy of Arts on the 
other side of the river was struck with the shot. The carnage 
in the neighbourhood of the Senate House was dreadful, but 
all was cleared away before morning, except the blood upon the 
snow, which bore testimony to the great slaughter of the pre- 
ceding day. We cannot ascertain the number of poor creatures 
who were thus hurried into another world ; it is believed, 
however, that several hundreds perished. The city barriers 
were immediately closed, and no person allowed to leave the 
city, in order to secure all those implicated in this diabolical 
plot : the fort is full of prisoners. 

My feelings on this night were such, as no one need or would 
envy, except perhaps some of the wounded who were groaning 
in agony, exposed to the frost. The night was long and dark 
enough ; but we were favoured to pass through it, without the 
slightest molestation, in quietness, and, I trust, in confidence. 

The next morning, we found the whole of our neighbourhood 
patrolled with soldiers. As it was reasonable to suppose we 
should not long remain without visitors at our house, I had a 
little prepared my dear family for this ; and about one o'clock, 
p.m., a colonel with four other officers and seventy hussars 
entered our premises. These poor fellows had been summoned 
from a distance the day before, and were stationed on the roads 
near our house : they had been twenty-four hours in the frost, 
having passed the whole night in scouring the country to pick 
up the flying rebels. They were almost famished with hunger 



1825.] CHAPTER IX. 123 

and cold. It was very well they came to us, as there was no 
other house in their whole range, that could have provided 
food for both men and horses. They behaved with great civi- 
lity and thankfulness for their wants being supplied : they had 
only a confused idea of Friends, and inquired whether we came 
from England or Pennsylvania. There was only one line of 
conduct for us to pursue in this situation of affairs ; as it was 
difficult for us to come at the truth, whether these men were 
confederates in the plot, or faithful adherents to the govern- 
ment. If the government had really been overthrown, we 
should not have fared any better for having entertained a 
loyalist party ; and, on the other hand, if these men had been 
accomplices in the plot, we might have been censured by the 
government. In either case, we could do no less than relieve 
the great distress they were in : and we have every reason to 
believe, they were true to the government, as they talked 
amongst themselves very freely on the subject of the revolt in 
French, which they supposed none of my family understood. 
They had not been more than two hours with us, when the 
appearance of a Cossack riding in haste along the high road, 
caused their speedy departure. We had no further visit, 
although the roads were patrolled for several days and nights 
afterwards. 

Thus we have abundant cause to bow in reverent and 
humble gratitude, to the (rod and Father of our Lord Jesus 
Christ, for mercies innumerable, and blessings which have 
from time to time been graciously showered upon us, far 
beyond what we can ask or think. In the midst of a con- 
vulsion which has caused such a waste of life, and which 
will in a few days terminate the existence of others only 
waiting to receive their doom, — and which, from its extent, 
must prove the ruin of thousands who have been implicated 
and connected with the rebellion, we have been permitted to 
remain undisturbed, and almost as if nothing had happened ; 
— favoured with resignation and peace of mind, and supported 
and comforted beyond the reach of fear. What can we render 
in return for such unmerited favours ? In this there is just 
cause to fear, lest we should fall short in gratitude and 



124 CHAPTER IX. [1826. 

humility of heart ; and on this account, I believe, I daily 
fear, and daily feel the necessity of prayer, and am fully 
persuaded that I stand in need of the praj^ers of my dear 
friends in England, that I may be preserved in watchfulness and 
faithfulness unto Him, whose wondrous mercy has never been 
withheld, from the days of my youth unto the present hour.* 

To Balby Monthly Meeting. 

First Month 19*A, 1826, 0. S. 
Dear Friends, 

In forwarding the annexed answers to the queries at this 
time, my heart is bowed down under a sense of the continued 
loving-kindness of the Lord, and my own unworthiness to 
partake of the least of all His tender mercies : yet I have 
abundant and renewed cause, to exalt His great and ever 
excellent name, and to commemorate His wonderful works 
to the children of men. " Who can declare the mighty acts 
of the Lord? who can show forth all His praise?" Truly, in 
vain would such an attempt be on my part ; but duty, grati- 
tude, and humble admiration prompt me to acknowledge His 
might, to magnify His power, and to celebrate His praise, who 
hath been graciously pleased, in unmerited compassion and 
mercy, to preserve us in peaceful quiet and resignation of 
mind, beyond the reach of any fear, except the fear of Him, — 
at a period replete with events unusually affecting and appall- 
ing, which have swept many away from this stage of existence, 
as in a moment, and plunged thousands into inconceivable 
anxiety and fearful suspense. Blessing, and glory, and 
wisdom, and thanksgiving, and honour, and power, and 
might, be ascribed unto Him, who sitteth King for ever, — 
by all those who live in His fear, and place their trust and 
confidence in Him. 

And now, my beloved friends, in a feeling of that love which 
would gather all to blessedness, my soul salutes you once again ; 
desiring for all, as for myself, an establishment on the ever- 
lasting foundation, even Jesus Christ, by and through the 
revelation of his Holy Spirit, in the secret of every soul. 
* See Appendix, B. 



1826.] CHAPTER IX. 125 

Although deplorably deficient in this important knowledge, which 
I daily feel and daily mourn on my own account ; yet I am fully 
and awfully persuaded, that nothing short of this inestimable 
treasure can purify from every defilement of flesh and spirit, 
and can restore again that heavenly image, defaced and lost by 
sin and transgression, in which man was originally created. 
Nothing but this can reconcile the trembling soul to God. 
Conscious of its own sad need, my longing heart most ardently 
desires that all mankind were brought to feel the force of this 
great truth, and to behold its vast importance in the same 
unflattering mirror which presents it ; but without the same 
lamentable cause, which makes it doubly precious in my view. 
Strong is the desire I feel for myself, and for every member of 
our highly professing and highly favoured Society, that we may 
so sanctify the Lord God in our hearts, as to be ready always 
to give an answer to every man that asketh a reason of the 
hope that is in us, from sensible conviction, with meekness and 
fear, — not from traditional report, nor from education ; nor like 
those of old, who w T ere such strangers to the Lord of life and 
glory, that " some said he was John the Baptist, some Elias, 
and others Jeremias, or one of the prophets ;" but from the 
same living and eternal source, that enabled Simon Peter to 
say, — " Thou art the Christ, the Son of the living God. Jesus 
said unto him, — Blessed art thou Simon Barjona, for flesh and 
blood hath not revealed it unto thee, but my Father which is in 
heaven : and I say also unto thee," continued our gracious 
Lord, — " thou art Peter ; and upon this rock 1 will build my 
church, and the gates of hell shall not prevail against it." 

If what I have written has the effect of awakening in any of 
my dear friends a serious consideration of this important sub- 
ject, such as are building upon the immutable rock will not be 
discouraged or dismayed, but rather strengthened and confirmed 
in the hope of a sure and eternal reward. And should there be 
any who have neglected to examine the foundation on which 
the hope of their everlasting happiness is laid, let me warn 
these in the tenderest manner no longer to delay, not only to 
enter into a heartfelt inquiry, but to begin an earnest search, 
— if happily they may find the chief and precious corner stone, 



126 CHAPTER IX. [1826. 

elect of God, — whilst the day of visitation is mercifully length- 
ened out; lest the night approach, when no man can work ; and 
the language of our blessed Lord, be sorrowfully applicable, — 
" if thou hadst known, even thou, in this thy day, the things 
which belong unto thy peace ; but now they are hid from thine 
eyes." But seeing the arms of wondrous and boundless mercy 
are ever open to receive the returning penitent, and the grace of 
our Lord is indeed exceeding abundant, — none need despair, who 
are willing to come unto God by him. It is indeed a " faithful 
saying and worthy of all acceptation, that Jesus Christ came 
into the world to save sinners ; of whom I am chief." 

In the love of the gospel, I remain your affectionate friend 
and brother, 

D. W. 

To Richard Cockin, Doncaster. 

Dated about Fifth Month 30th, 1826. 

In the first place, I sincerely congratulate thee on the re- 
covery of thy dear wife, and in the prospect of her being spared 
to thee and to her friends a little longer. I am satisfied there 
is nothing in this scene of conflict and trial worth remaining 
for, but that the will of our good and gracious Lord God 
should be perfected in us, — excepting also, the company of our 
near and dear connexions, to whom we have been long and affec- 
tionately attached : with every thing else I could readily shake 
hands, and bid them a farewell for ever ; if but happily in a 
state of preparation to meet the great and awful event. On this 
head, I have many fears, as regards myself, from a knowledge 
of my own unworthiness ; and I am thoroughly persuaded, that 
if an attainment so high should ever be my happy experience, 
it must be through the great and unmerited mercy of God in 
Christ Jesus. 

What a change a few months have produced in this 

country ! The late reigning Empress has only survived her 
much lamented husband five months and fifteen days ; she 
died at Beliof, between Taganrog and Kalouga, about 280 
versts south of Moscow. Her death has been as private, as 
her life was retired and hidden from the world. She had arrived 



1826.] CHAPTER IX. 127 

at Beliof much exhausted the preceding evening, and retired to 
rest pretty soon, and about eleven o'clock at night became 
seriously ill. Her physician was sent for, but from some un- 
accountable circumstance, could not be found. On her being 
informed of this, and that they were about to send off to some 
distance, where he was expected to be, she desired them to 
desist, saying, ' it is of no consequence. 1 She then requested 
to be left alone ; and nothing further transpired, until three 
o'clock in the morning, when her confidential attendant went 
softly into her room, to see how she was, and found to her 
great astonishment, that nothing remained but the frail taber- 
nacle ; the countenance retained its usual composed and serene 
appearance, but the spirit had returned unto God who gave it. 
Her many virtues will long live in the memory of those who 
knew her worth ; and, although she has passed away as one 
almost unnoticed and unregarded, yet her memorial is on high, 
and will never perish. Her body is expected here about the 
middle of next month, and will be laid by the side of her late 
husband in the Fort. She had many enemies, but they were 
only those whose luxurious habits and vain inclinations were 
exposed and restrained by her humble, simple, and virtuous 
example. It may be said, she died generally beloved and 
regretted, and very deservedly so. Her decease took place on 
the 4th of Fifth Month, O. S. 

To One of his Family. 
Moscoio Boad, Ninth Month 13fA, 1826, 0. S. 

My Dear , 

I have spent great part of this season on the bogs of 



Shoosharry, returning home only on Fourth and Seventh day 
evenings, and leaving it again at noon on Fifth, and . in the 
morning on Second days. I hope that all the drains will be 
cut before the winter drives us from the work ; but we look for 
an early winter after so unusually long and hot a summer. On 
the 9th instant, we had a frost which froze the water in the 
drains, and on the 11th, there was a considerable fall of snow, 
but it did not lie long. We have had the advantage of being- 
allowed to burn all the surface rubbish, moss and brushwood : 



128 CHAPTER IX [1826. 

the large roots are preserved for fuel. But owing to the un- 
common dryness of the season, we have been unable to burn 
until lately, for fear of setting the soil itself on fire, as has 
been the case in many places around us. The damage done by 
fire in the course of. the summer is incalculable. The woods 
have been on fire for fifty versts together ; in the neighbourhood 
of Ijora many regiments of soldiers have been employed, 
in endeavouring to save the towns and villages : several of the 
latter have been destroyed by the devouring element. At 
times, we were alarmed for our own buildings : — in vain we 
tried to arrest the progress of the fire, when at a considerable 
distance from us ; but this could not be done, as the heat and 
smoke prevented the people from working when near it ; — 
so that we were obliged to content ourselves with form- 
ing a defence, in advance of the fire, at a sufficient distance 
from the buildings that the flames might not endanger them. 
This was done by removing the tree-roots and sods, in short 
every thing of a combustible nature, from the surface down 
to the clay, in the shape of a semicircle, about three-quarters 
of a mile in length, to the edge of which the fire actually 
came. Even with this precaution, it was necessary to station 
watchmen, as the sparks flew over the barrier and set the 
earth on fire in several places ; and our safety depended on 
extinguishing these places immediately, for if they had once 
gained strength, it would have been impossible to check them, 
as every pool in the neighbourhood was dried up by the long- 
continuance of heat and drought. For several weeks we were 
threatened by this formidable enemy; but were favoured to 
escape without accident. 

Latterly we have had some fine rains, and have been burning 
in the fields at every opportunity. The rubbish is piled up in 
lines a fathom wide, and nearly the same in height. The 
other day, we had upwards of a mile of them on fire at one 
time, which made a singular appearance when night came on. 

It is very pleasant to us to hear that the coronation 

has been attended with great satisfaction, far more than was 
expected. The unexpected appearance of the Grand Duke 
Constantine at Moscow seems to have diffused quietness 



1826.] CHAPTER IX. 129 

over the whole empire. The generality of the people had an 
idea, that it was without his full concurrence, that his younger 
brother was proclaimed Emperor. We have heard from very 
good authority, that the first interview between the two brothers 
was very affecting ; the behaviour of the Emperor was truly 
amiable and conciliatory, whilst that of Constantine gave ample 
proof of a noble and generous mind. 

As they rode together through the streets of Moscow on 
horseback, the population of the place were witnesses of the cor- 
diality that subsisted between them ; and shouts of joy resounded 
through the city. In the course of a day or two, a review of the 
troops took place. The army has been most of all dissatisfied, 
and were generally of the mind, that Constantine had been 
forced aside to make way for his brother ; but when the two 
brothers made their appearance in front of the troops, these 
were fully satisfied, and their shouts of approbation continued 
an unreasonable length of time. It is now generally supposed, 
that things will go on smoothly, and that every spark of 
sedition will be extinguished ; the Emperor will begin to feel 
himself more firmly seated on his throne, and will doubtless 
assume a more decided tone of character : it will soon be 
seen what he is ; from his abilities, much may be expected 
that is good. Much blood was shed on his ascension to the 
throne ; and it is really wonderful how his life was spared, 
when surrounded by violent and desperate men. I most 
earnestly desire that he may lastingly remember his then 
humiliating situation, and may be disposed to keep near to 
that power, which so evidently and remarkably directed his 
steps, and delivered him from the hands of his enemies. 

To Richard Cockin, Doncaster. 

Twelfth Month 14th, 1826, 0. 8. 

In vain would it be for me, to attempt to recount 

the multiplied favours and blessings that have been showered 
down upon us, since I last wrote. Perhaps, some might be 
disposed to think many of these circumstances too trifling to 
be noticed, or if noticed at all, only as things which happen in 
the common course of events. But upon my mind they make 



130 CHAPTER IX. [1826. 

a different impression ; and I cannot but record them as so many 
additional instances of the mercy and protecting care of Him, 
without whose knowledge a single sparrow cannot fall to the 
ground. At the same time, it is only proper that the effect 
should be more striking with me, as few others have witnessed 
so many great deliverances ; and none so unworthy, in my own 
estimation, as myself. I know not how it may be with others, 
who like myself are past the meridian of life, and in the common 
course of nature, cannot look forward to many days in this state 
of mutability ; but on looking over the actions and transactions 
in which I have been engaged in the course of my pilgrimage, few 
indeed are to be found, that can bear examination when brought 
before the penetrating and impartial glass of truth, and which 
are altogether divested of selfish motives ; although perhaps at 
the time, when performed, they may have afforded sufficient satis- 
faction to feed the creaturely part, and keep that alive which 
ought to have been slain. But what an unspeakable privilege it is, 
that none of these things are permitted to pass unnoticed or lie 
concealed, but are from time to time brought into remembrance ; 
whereby self may be abased, and judgment set over the trans- 
gressing nature ; which must not only be brought under con- 
demnation, but must actually die in us, before the lowly and 
precious seed can live and reign ; which delighteth in purity, 
and which will, if suffered to rise into dominion, wash, sanctify, 
and justify the believing heart, that is made willing to submit to 
the precious influence of its power. Verily, herein is the love 
of God manifested, " in the name of the Lord Jesus,, and by 
the Spirit of our God," through the one, great, sinless, spot- 
less offering, which hath perfected for ever them that are 
sanctified. 

I regret it is not in my power to gratify thee with any 
information as to our future prospects ; but things remain to the 
present time in the most clouded uncertainty. My dear 
friends and my native land are often the subjects of my 
thoughts. Sometimes I cannot help cherishing a hope that I 
may once more be permitted to return with my beloved family, 
and pitch a tent for a short time among them ; but I find it 



1826.] CHAPTER IX. 181 

will not do to dwell much upon what I earnestly desire, as it 
has only a tendency to unsettle the mind, and disrobe it of that 
peaceful resignation, which I can thankfully acknowledge is 
often my favoured portion. 

The nature of our employment, and the wide field of labour 
before our view, in which at times it appears as if we should be 
called to assist, create a feeling of dismay ; but again circum- 
stances occur, which for a season, darken any probability of 
this being the case : so that which ever way I look, it is but 
toiling in vain. " He that abideth of old," only knows what is 
in store for us ; and unto Him I commit myself and my all : 
well knowing from long experience, that a way can be opened, 
when perhaps there may be less expectation than at other 
times. 



k 2 



132 CHAPTER X. [1827. 



CHAPTER X. 



ADDRESS TO BALBY MONTHLY MEETING, 1827 THE EMPEROR 

NICHOLAS ADDRESS TO BALBY MONTHLY MEETING, 1828 

GENERAL CORRESPONDENCE. 



To Balby Monthly Meeting. 

First Month 26th, 1827, 
Dear Friends, 
Our little meeting being now reduced to only six members, 
who are those of my own family, and three of these in their 
minority, we have of late been brought more closely into the 
solid consideration of our humiliating and stripped condition. 
At our last meeting, under a painful sense of this, and in a 
feeling of our peculiar situation and weakness, we were unitedly 
of the mind, that the Monthly Meeting would not expect 
answers to the queries in the usual manner : as in our appre- 
hension it would be presumptuous to attempt it, and too much 
like upholding a lifeless form. I am therefore requested to 
give the Monthly Meeting some general information of its 
distant members, in the hope that our dear Friends will not 
only approve of this conclusion, but that they will feel as we 
have felt on the occasion, and concur in its propriety. 

But although the answers are not furnished as formerly, the 
queries have nevertheless been duly read and considered ; and 
I trust we have endeavoured, by individually applying the 
comprehensive particulars contained therein, seriously to reflect 
and examine how far we are fulfilling the important duties 
required at our hands, in the faithful support of our different 
Christian testimonies. 

Notwithstanding our depressed and disqualified situation, 
our meetings are regularly kept up as heretofore ; and although 
some of us may feel at seasons as " the owl of the desert," or 



1827.] CHAPTER X. 133 

the solitary " sparrow on the house top," yet there are 
intervals, when that gracious power is witnessed, which can 
set bounds to the tumultuous sea of thought, and arrest the 
wandering imagination ; — which can not only command the 
storm, but at his pleasure rebuke it, and cause the restless 
waves to be at peace. It is, my beloved Friends, a sensible 
evidence of this sustaining help, that diffuses comfort to the 
mind in our exiled allotment; and renders the lonely habitation 
a peaceful abode; wherein we are permitted to dwell together 
in love and harmony, whilst widely separated from the foster- 
ing care and bosom of the church, and excluded from a share 
of that tender counsel and advice, of which others so frequently 
partake in our highly favoured native land. And although 
subject to many privations, and often under feelings of extreme 
poverty, weakness and dismay ; yet such is the mercy, the 
goodness and compassion of a long-suffering and all-gracious 
G-od, "who maketh his sun to rise on the evil and on the 
good, and sendeth rain on the just and on the unjust," that 
all our wants are and have been abundantly supplied, through 
Christ the ever-blessed and only Saviour ; to whom be the 
glory and the praise for ever ! 

Lest I should be found deficient in love, gratitude, thank- 
fulness, and devotedness to the great and bountiful Author of 
such multiplied and utterly unmerited favours, the loving- 
kindness of the Lord maketh me even afraid, from a deeply 
engraven sense of my own unworthiness. In this state I 
earnestly desire to be preserved; for this, my spirit often 
breathes in the language of prayer. I find it, my dear Friends, 
a safe hiding place ; it is indeed that food which is most 
convenient for me, and daily needful, because it leads into 
lowliness of mind ; and whilst it chains down self in every 
appearance, the tribulated soul is preserved near to the inno- 
cent harmless life, which, dwelling in the light, recoils at the 
slightest impurity. Then our wants may all be plainly felt 
and seen ; how great is the need not only to implore for daily 
bread, but for a qualification and disposition to forgive those 
who trespass against us, that we also may be forgiven ; and that 
we may be permitted to feel a portion of that love, which would 



134 CHAPTER x. [1827. 

gather all into the heavenly garner of rest and peace, — even 
the love of God shed abroad to comfort and strengthen our 
hearts. 

I trust in a degree of this love, I once more salute my dear 
brethren and sisters, and remain their affectionate Friend, 

D. W. 

To John Hipsley, Hull. 

First Month 29th, 1827. 

The Emperor Nicholas is indefatigable in his exer- 
tions to support the interests of his people throughout the 
empire, by strictly insisting upon the most rigid adherence to 
justice in all causes ; which has given great satisfaction. His 
leisure hours, at least those absolutely necessary for exercise, 
he makes subservient to the general good, and is daily going 
about to inspect the hospitals and other public institutions, in 
the most minute manner, which has already had a salutary 
effect. 

I may be mistaken, but I think that he is almost the first 
crowned head that ever entered the doors of a prison, with the 
benevolent object of inquiring into, and improving its state : 
this he has lately done, and not in a superficial manner ; 
having, in many instances, entered closely into the examination 
of particular cases with great interest, and caused many to 
rejoice in being set free. This work is carried on without any 
parade ; he just steps into a sledge with a single horse, and no 
one knowing where he is going, of course there can be no 
preparation made to receive him ; in this manner all are taken 
by surprise, and the real state of things fairly developed, 
whether rough or smooth. He has a great work before him ; 
and stands in need of that wisdom, which is better than rubies, 
to direct and support him in such an arduous and responsible 
station. 

To David Mallinson, Sheffield. 

Twelfth Month 7th, 1827. 
I have duly received thy letter of the 13th ultimo, which 
was truly acceptable ; and particularly as it conveyed a more 



1827.] CHAPTER X. 135 

favourable statement of the health of thyself and thy dear 
family, than has been transmitted to us by any of our corre- 
spondents for a considerable time past ; and we shall rejoice to 
hear, that this inestimable blessing is continued to you all. It 
is indeed a blessing we cannot too highly appreciate, or be 
sufficiently grateful for ; as it enables us to bear the changes 
and vicissitudes incident to this state of probation, with greater 
calmness and fortitude, than when both mind and body are 
suffering at the same time ; which is sometimes in best wisdom 
permitted to be our portion. We have also great cause to number 
our blessings in this respect, as we have been favoured to enjoy 
an almost uninterrupted share of good health for many months 
past ; which I desire to be found daily sensible of, and humbly 
to acknowledge. 

Thy mention of having visited the Isle of Man, and of its 

having been of use to thee and thy dear , is very pleasant 

intelligence. The benefit, I trust, will be lasting to you both. 
It brought afresh to my remembrance its rocky coast ; although it 
is more than forty years since I traversed its bays and harbours. 
I was fourteen months on the station in a man-of-war cruiser, 
and have good reason to remember Douglas, having been there 
in a heavy tempest, when the light-house and eighty feet of the 
pier were washed away by the force of the sea. I was also riding 
in the bay, when the Hawk packet of Liverpool was driven in by 
rough weather ; though at that time a stranger to the treasure 
she had on board, — having for a passenger, that dedicated 
servant of the Lord, Sarah Grubb, on her way to Ireland in 
1785. (See her Journal). But she had finished her glorious 
career and received the crown immortal, some years before I 
heard of her name, or knew the Society of Friends. Ramsay 
bay was another sheltering place, in which we occasionally 
anchored. We sometimes stood in close to Castletown ; but 
could not go in for want of water. At other times, we looked 
at Peel and Port Iron on the opposite side of the island, 
ranging on both sides, from the Point of Aire to the Calf of 
Man. But I need not recount particulars, which will afford 
thee no satisfaction, nor yield myself any other than painful 
reflections, in the consideration, that so much valuable time was 



136 CHAPTER X. [1827. 

wasted, which ought to have been employed in a more noble 
and important pursuit ; the fruits of which, I should not now 
be ashamed of, nor have to remember with vexation of spirit. 

Our dear Friend Jane Doncaster, is greatly to be felt for in 
the loss of her son, who was a hopeful young man when I saw 
him last ; and I rather looked at him, as one likely to be a 
comfort to his poor mother in the evening of her tribulated day : 
she has had many trials, and has borne them with that Christian 
fortitude and meekness ; which plainly evince in what school 
she has been taught, and that her standing is on that sure and 
eternal foundation, against which the storms and afflictions of 
time can make no impression, beyond that of producing a 
renewed strain of acceptable devotion, in the sublime language 
of " Thy will be done. 1 ' 

To ElCHARD COCKIN, DoNCASTER. 

Eleventh Month \6th, 1827. 
It is long since I gave my endeared friend a proof of affec- 
tionate remembrance in this way, yet he may rest assured, this 
has not arisen from want of inclination. On the contrary, it 
is often cause of regret, that I cannot more frequently enjoy a 
privilege so congenial to my feelings, as that of maintaining 
through this medium, a more constant social converse with those 
I dearly love ; and with whom I am favoured at seasons still to 
feel a precious unity, although not dwelling amongst my 
brethren in religious fellowship, but in a land where nearly all 
around me seem insensible to such a source of comfort, con- 
solation, and strength. This circumstance perhaps, only serves 
to render that unity doubly precious to my often drooping mind, 
imparting to it a refreshing fragrance, as of the " ointment 
poured forth ;" for which my heart rejoices with humble thank- 
fulness. It is true I have numerous engagements, which 
naturally occupy a considerable portion of time, and not a 
little thought. But when at liberty from these things, there 
are hours afforded, upon which my beloved friends in England 
have a claim ; and in which much might be done in the way of 
correspondence, if it were not for the valley of humiliation in 
which it is frequently my lot to dwell ; where the past and the 



1827,] CHAPTER X. 137 

future are amply sufficient to constitute the distress of the 
present, and from their vast and awful importance, cannot fail 
to absorb in the most appalling manner, every faculty of sense 
and feeling in a poor worthless mortal ; and to bring down 
self into such a state of nothingness and abasement, that the 
tossed mind is left almost without a ray of hope, and ready to 
doubt whether the smallest progress has been made towards 
" the city which hath foundations, whose builder and maker is 
God." In these stripping seasons, I feel a total incapacity for 
letter-writing or any other thing that requires application of the 
mind ; which would gladly remain in a state of oblivion, rather 
than again emerge, and take a part in the things of time. 

These dispensations are far from palatable to the creaturely 
taste, yet I believe are very wholesome and absolutely needful 
for all, who like myself are encumbered with dross and tin ; 
in order that every thing that cannot stand the fire, may be 
removed out of the way, and the vessel be cleansed from those 
impurities, which render it unfit to contain heavenly treasure. 

But if these times of proving and trial, are permitted in 
the end to rank amongst those afflictions, of which the Apostle 
speaks, that work out for the tribulated soul " a far more ex- 
ceeding and eternal weight of glory,'' — then, indeed, they will 
appear light and momentary ; and they will be commemorated 
with humble gratitude, as the choicest blessings of redeeming 
love, administered in unutterable mercy to the sons and daugh- 
ters of men for their eternal welfare : greatly do I desire to 
be patiently resigned to these and all other dispensations yet 
in store, however painful to human nature to endure. 

Thy letters are at all times very acceptable to us, and if 
deprived of such a source of information, we should remain 
strangers to much that is passing relative to the movements of 
our Friends. Thy accounts of those dedicated servants, who are 
labouring in the excellency of the gospel, for the restoration of 
backsliders, and the general promotion of truth and right- 
eousness in the earth, as well as for the strengthening and 
comforting of the faithful, afford much heartfelt satisfaction. 
I trust we shall ever feel a lively interest in them, although 
excluded from partaking of the refreshment which others are 



138 CHAPTER x. [1827. 

permitted to enjoy, who have the privilege of picking up the 
crumbs which fall from the Master's table. 

I should greatly rejoice, if I had it in my power to render 
thee any satisfactory information, as to the probability of our 
labours terminating in this country. It is a subject on which 
my mind could dwell with great delight ; but when I have 
suffered myself to indulge in such a pleasant prospect, I have 
felt a restraint which has compelled me to desist. I have 
however been mercifully favoured with resignation, in the midst 
of trials which have befallen us, since our lot has been cast here ; 
and when from peculiar circumstances, home and dear relatives 
and friends have revived to my recollection, under feelings which 
made them doubly dear, I have, I think, uniformly endeavoured 
to commit myself to the Divine will, and to behave in some 
degree " as a child that is weaned of its mother. 1 ' But I must 
ever remember, with longing desires, those ties of love and 
long continued friendship, that neither length of time nor 
absence can efface or obliterate ; and of late, I have felt my 
mind in an unusual manner drawn towards my Friends in 
England, in the binding influence of that love, which seeks the 
good of all mankind. So that I have been almost ready to 
cherish a belief that the day is not far off, which may produce 
a change, and liberate us from these frozen regions ; but when 
I look around, it is beyond my finite comprehension to conceive 
how such a change is to be brought about. Yet I have abun- 
dant cause to know from marvellous experience, that all things 
are possible with Him, who bloweth with his wind, and the 
waters flow into every creek and inlet ; and when we are re- 
duced to a thorough sense of our own weakness, He is some- 
times in gracious condescension, pleased to magnify His power, 
and show forth His strength, to our humble admiration, far 
beyond our conception, and still further beyond our deserts : 
and, therefore, I desire to wait in patience, whether it be our 
lot to depart hence, or to remain in exile. 

We have heard no particulars of the death of dear 

Mary Fairbank ; who, having lived the life of the righteous, 
has finished her course with joy, we cannot doubt. We have 
just heard of the decease of dear John Kirkham, — another 



1828.] CHAPTER X. 3 39 

standard-bearer, summoned from works to rewards. How many 
seem to be removed from our poor Society, and others in readi- 
ness to depart ! And when we look around for those who are 
to fill their places, they seem very thinly scattered up and 
down. The prospect is to me very discouraging and gloomy ; 
but although the fathers and the mothers may be taken away, 
and the prophets do not live for ever, I am consoled with the 
recollection, that a gracious and compassionate Lord God 
remaineth ; whose years fail not, and whose power is the same 
to-day as yesterday, and will for ever endure. He can at his 
pleasure hasten the day, when a language formerly adopted, 
may again be truly applicable ; — " The anointing which ye 
have received of him abideth in you, and ye need not that any 
man teach you.''' 

To Balby Monthly Meeting. 

Second Month 4>th, 1828. 
Dear Friends, 

Being permitted to witness the dawning of another year, 
I am desirous of again renewing a correspondence, so justly due 
to those with whom I am united in the bonds of Christian love 
and religious fellowship ; and unto whom I feel accountable in 
the same degree, as if dwelling under their immediate care and 
oversight, as was once my favoured portion, in days that are 
over and past. Frequently, and I trust fervently, a petition is 
raised in my heart, on my own account and on that of my 
beloved family, that we may be preserved blameless in life and 
conversation ; lest by any means, through us, the precious cause 
of Truth should suffer, and the important testimonies borne by 
the Society, of which we enjoy the privilege of being members, 
should be neglected and laid waste in a distant land. 

Our meetings are kept up as heretofore, and although mostly 
held under feelings of great discouragement and sensible weak- 
ness, — yet there are seasons when a precious solemnity is 
witnessed amongst us, which sustains a humble hope, that the 
loving-kindness of our gracious Lord is not withdrawn from us, 
in this forlorn and solitary situation, unworthy as we are of 
partaking in the least of all his tender mercies. 



140 CHAPTER X. [1828. 

Although it is still my lot to be absent in body from 



my beloved brethren and sisters, they are often the endeared 
companions of my anxious thoughts. On the present occasion, 
my heart expands with a renewed feeling of earnest and 
affectionate solicitude for their present and eternal welfare. 
" I write unto you little children, because your sins are 
forgiven you for His name's sake. I write unto you, fathers, 
because ye have known Him that is from the beginning. I 
write unto you, young men, because ye are strong, and because 
ye have overcome the wicked one." This apostolic language, 
has unexpectedly fastened upon my mind ; I would to God 
that it was truly applicable, — comprehending, not only every 
member of our religious Society, but every age and every class 
of professing Christians, the world over ; then indeed there 
would be joy and gladness, and a good day, as " when the morn- 
ing stars sang together, and the sons of God shouted for joy." 
Mourning and heaviness are the present covering of my 
mind, arising from fear and jealousy on my own account, 
which produce alike feeling on account of others; lest the day's 
work should not be keeping pace with the day of merciful 
visitation, and that woful night of darkness overtake any of 
us, when the Spirit of God ceases any longer to strive with his 
creature man. " How often would I have gathered thy 
children together, as a hen doth gather her brood under her 
wings, and ye would not," — was the language of our ever-blessed 
Redeemer, when lamenting over the inhabitants of Jerusalem : 
and such was his unutterable love and compassion for the 
rebellious children of that city, that on beholding it, he wept ; 
saying, " if thou hadst known, even thou, at least in this thy 
day, the things which belong unto thy peace ; but now they 
are hid from thine eyes." By this, it doth evidently appear, 
that we may withstand the continued offers of Divine love and 
mercy, until we are left desolate, and the day of our visitation 
is passed for ever away. " If the tree fall toward the south 
or toward the north, in the place where the tree falleth, there 
it shall be." As death leaves us, judgment will find us ; " for 
there is no work, nor device, nor knowledge, nor wisdom in 
the grave," whither we are all hastening, and some of us 



1828.] CHAPTER X. 141 

apparently with lengthened strides. Whilst reviving these 
awful and momentous considerations, I feel their vast import- 
ance, and therefore long to impress others with a sense of the 
necessity there is for us without procrastination, (for we know 
not what a day may bring forth,) to " use all diligence to 
make our calling and election sure," before we go hence ; that 
so we may be amongst the happy number, who have an 
entrance ministered abundantly into the everlasting kingdom 
of our Lord and Saviour, Jesus Christ. 

Strong is my belief, that there are many amongst my dear 
Friends, to whom it may be said, " your sins are forgiven you, 
for His name's sake ;" who by patient submission to the 
cleansing and sanctifying operation of Divine grace in their 
hearts, are born again, — are " become as little children," meek 
and lowly ; whose eyes behold their heavenly Teacher, who 
seek to know His will ; and in humble resignation of soul, 
endeavour to perform it. These can testify from blessed and 
living experience, that peaceful and easy is his yoke, light the 
burden, sweet the rest : continuing in dedication and obedience 
to the pointings of duty, these grow " from strength to 
strength," from the state of little children, to that of young 
men, strong in the Lord and in the power of his might ; 
because " the word of God abideth in them, and they have 
overcome the wicked one." Standing fast in the faith once 
delivered to the saints, a more perfect stature is attained, even 
to that of fathers in the church, because they " have known 
Him that is from the beginning." It is this knowledge that 
I greatly desire for my dear Friends, as for myself; and I 
believe, that those who have been happily favoured to make the 
greatest advancement in this spiritual work, still find their 
safety dependent only upon watchfulness and prayer : nothing 
else can sustain the life of faith. The soul cannot be nourished 
to-day with manna gathered yesterday ; the brightest gleam 
of hope soon loses its lustre, unless renewed again ; and no 
past experience can support the drooping mind, when fresh 
trials are permitted to assail us. It is the Lord alone who 
can renew and increase our faith, and preserve that alive in us 
which is " born of Him." 



142 CHAPTER X. []828. 

I feel a desire which words cannot fully express, that my 
dear young Friends may be entreated to engage in this work of 
such great and individual importance. A sacrifice in the 
morning of life is made with much less difficulty, than if de- 
ferred till the day is more advanced, and the mind encumbered 
with the things of this transitory world. There are many 
things which although harmless and lawful in themselves, indis- 
pose the mind for the simplicity of the gospel, keep alive the 
evil propensities of fallen nature, and if suffered to occupy that 
time and those talents afforded in tender mercy for the most 
noble purpose, will have to be remembered at a future day, with 
"vexation of spirit. 1 " 1 Be willing then, my beloved young- 
Friends, to retire more frequently than the returning morning, 
from the perishing things of time and sense, to the precious 
" gift of God" in the heart ; and although you may have to 
descend again and again into the humiliating depths of painful 
reflection, there be willing to abide. It is in the deep, that 
" the mighty works of the Lord*" and his wonders are beheld. 
It is here that the mind can clearly discern those things which 
serve God, and those which serve him not ; and here, under 
the weight of trouble and affliction for the past, and anxiety 
for the future, the acceptable cry is raised unto Him, who de- 
livereth out of every distress. The Lord alone is exalted in that 
day, and the creature brought low and reduced to that humble 
childlike state, wherein only, the knowledge of " Him that is 
from the beginning" is revealed. Without this saving know- 
ledge, the ever blessed name of Christ can only be mentioned 
from hearsay or report ; but with it, you will be enabled to say 
from heartfelt experience, that " Jesus is Lord,"" even your 
Lord, and that " by the Holy Ghost." " This is life eternal, 
that they might know thee the only true God, and Jesus 
Christ, whom thou hast sent ;" " who is the beginning and the 
end, the first and the last." 

I remain your affectionate friend and brother, 

D. W. 



1828.] CHAPTER X. 143 

To RlCHARD COCKIN, DoNCASTER, 

Plains of Shoosharty, near Petersburg, Tenth Month 14th, 1828. 

Thy welcome letter forwarded from the Autumn Quarterly 
Meeting, reached me last evening in safety ; and although the 
perusal of it is not without administering cause for mourning 
and lamentation, yet many parts, at the same time, convey com- 
fortable and consoling information, and call for thankfulness. 

I do not remember hearing, at any previous time, of so many 
of our dear Friends moving to and fro with certificates. There 
ought to be fruit appearing in many places, for truly much seed 
has been sown ; and I long that nothing may be permitted to 
stop its growth, or prevent its flourishing, to the praise and 
glory of the great and good Husbandman ; who hath not been 
wanting in adorable condescension and mercy, to prepare and 
qualify, and send forth to labour in his vineyard, both at home 
and abroad, many faithful servants, whose reward will be sure 
and everlastingly joyful : — for " he that reapeth receiveth wages, 
and gathereth fruit unto life eternal ; that both he that soweth, 
and he that reapeth may rejoice together." I think I may 
say, " would God, that all the Lord's people were prophets ;"" 
then, whether they are ever called upon to prophesy or not, the 
feet of all would be " shod with the preparation of the gospel 
of peace ;" which, it is my belief, all ought to be, and is the 
case with all who faithfully maintain the Christian warfare, and 
obtain the blessed victory. 

Our present residence would be thought by most a 

lonely one, as it is several miles from any other house in the 
midst of a wild country, and on the margin of a huge boo-. We 
have no water fit for use, but what is supplied from rain or 
snow ; and I have several times remembered the many draughts 
of pure water that I have enjoyed when at Doncaster, a glass 
of which would now be a treat indeed. We have bored to a 
great depth in vain ; and from the nature of the sub-soil and 
other local circumstances, it is not probable, that any sprino-will 
be found in our neighbourhood. A very bad and almost un- 
frequented road leads to our habitation, so that we seldom see the 
face of a visitor of any kind. When it was fixed for us to 



14-4 CHAPTER X. [1828. 

remove hither, I had the offer of some soldiers to guard the 
premises, but declined it ; as I consider that watchmen selected 
from our workmen are quite sufficient. It is necessary to keep a 
good look out, as the whole of the premises are built of wood, and 
are consequently very inflammable ; and as the property belongs 
to government, proper precaution is needed both against fire and 
robbery : but I trust that my confidence in the all-sufficiency 
of the Divine arm (which hath so often and so eminently pre- 
served and supported us,) will never be at so low an ebb, as to 
induce me to place dependence upon the arm of flesh for pro- 
tection. Notwithstanding the dreariness of our abode, I should 
be deficient in gratitude, if I were to omit saying, that to myself 
it is a peaceful retreat. We have been here about four months, 
and I do not recollect having been permitted to enjoy so much 
solid peace and comfort, since my lot has been cast in this land, 
as hath been at seasons graciously vouchsafed within the wooden 
walls of our solitary mansion ; and I believe my wife has par- 
taken equally with myself in this comforting and precious privi- 
lege. So that our greatest difficulties, which might appear to 
others like mountains, are happily nothing but mole-hills, and 
not worth recording for a moment in our remembrance ; except 
as they serve to keep us in an humble and dependent state of 
mind, and produce the grateful tribute of thanksgiving and 
praise to an omnipotent, omniscient, and omnipresent Lord God, 
for all the blessings, comforts and benefits, which are permitted 
to descend upon the heads of such poor unworthy creatures. 

I often feel a longing desire that a path would clearly open, 
which would lead to a peaceful departure from this our exile ; 
but, I trust, that such a desire is never cherished, or dwelt upon, 
without being accompanied by a willingness to submit, in humble 
resignation, to the Divine disposal of Him, who knows best 
what is best for us ; who knows our frame, that we are but 
dust, and who pities our weakness. If I know my own heart, 
no earthly motive, no plans for the future, induce a desire to 
be released from this country ; but I do most earnestly desire 
that the remainder of my days, whether many or few, may be 
devoted to the glory of God, and the exaltation of my dear 
Eedeemer's kingdom in the hearts of mankind, — I need no^ 



1828.] CHAPTER X. 145 

add — and to the eternal welfare of my fellow-creatures, because 
the last must be the result of the first. Ease and indulgence, 
I think, I despise ; although I sensibly feel the decay of this 
frail tabernacle. My sight has failed considerably since I was 
last in England, my limbs are stiffened by the damp to which 
I am daily exposed, and are subject to pains on every approach- 
ing change in the weather ; and I find my strength is unequal 
to the fatigue, which but a few years back, I could bear with 
cheerfulness, if not with pleasure. But in the midst of all, 
my soul ventureth to hope in the goodness and mercy of God, 
and that, through the merits of a crucified Saviour, my sins — 
even mine — will be blotted out. 

To Sarah Smith, Sheffield. 

Twelfth Month 15th, 1828. 

Although no great length of time has elapsed since some of 
my family wrote to thee, yet I feel inclined to renew an assur- 
ance of unabated love and regard ; which, though not often 
expressed, never ceases to dwell in our hearts towards thee. I 
desire to record with humble thankfulness to the All-merciful 
Dispenser, the inestimable blessing of health, which is at this 
time our portion ; and I trust that thou art permitted to 
partake in the same enjoyment. 

Thou art probably aware, that we have changed our residence 
to a greater distance from the city, than where we lived for 
the last eight years. This has had the unavoidable effect of 
dividing our family, and depriving us of the constant society 
of each other, which is a privilege we have greatly enjoyed. 
From the extent of our work, it was necessary, in order to keep 
all the branches in proper motion, to station some one in a 
central position, and William being in all respects the most 
capable, remains at that post. Although thus circumstanced, 
and living in a most dreary situation, we are favoured with 
resignation and contentment of mind ; which sweeten the cup 
of solitude, and make the frozen desert a peaceful abode. The 
longest span of life is short ; and to such as like myself cannot 
look forward to the addition of many years, it is of little 
moment where we are scattered : and if we bring into view the 

L 



146 CHAPTER X. [1828. 

humiliating situation of the Lord of life and glory, who " had 
not where to lay his head," a quiet dwelling place in any part 
of the habitable earth is more than a poor sinful mortal is 
entitled to, and much more than he deserves. 

I am now more than a month entered into my 58th year ; 
and I think that thou, my dear friend, art as far, or perhaps 
farther advanced towards the end of the race. I often look 
round at my contemporaries, particularly those whom I have 
long known and loved ; but am placed beyond the practicability 
of any thing like comparing notes with them, on a subject in 
which we are all so deeply interested, and on which nothing 
less is depending than the prize immortal. If a sensibility of 
weakness, and a consciousness of utter unworthiness, under a 
feeling of increasing bodily infirmity, can entitle any one to 
boast, then I think it is allowable for me ; for truly I am a 
very poor creature every way. But when I contemplate the 
glorious gospel dispensation, and reflect that a thoughtless 
being like myself, nurtured in the very school of vice and folly, 
should ever have been brought, in any degree, under its benign 
and saving influence, — it is marvellous in my view, and none 
other than " the Lord's doing."" It is easy for me to say, 
what can I render to Him ? But the question is, what have I 
rendered to Him I Here is an appalling query indeed, — the 
consideration of which, makes me shrink into nothingness, and 
into fear of having fallen short of making an adequate return, 
not only of humble adoration, gratitude and praise for such 
amazing mercy, but lest dedication and obedience have not kept 
pace with the knowledge that has been from time to time 
bestowed upon me. At times, a ray of comfort is permitted to 
glimmer on my drooping mind for a short duration ; but 
soon it is again veiled by self-abasing clouds of suspense, which 
darken the whole atmosphere of hope. 

But although I have thus to go mourning on my way, yet 
a testimony lives in my heart to the all-sufficiency of that 
Divine grace, by which " I am what I am,"" — though nothing 
but a worm ; and with my latest breath, I would commend all 
mankind to seek after this pearl of endless treasure. 

It appears to me, that there are many in the present day, 



1828.] CHAPTER X. 147 

whose minds are constantly kept afloat by the great variety of 
publications almost daily issuing from the press. Many of 
these that I have seen, although replete with moral sentiment 
and learned remarks, which are not without Scripture founda- 
tion, — although very wide of the true intent and meaning of the 
text, — are strongly calculated to keep their readers in search of 
the lifeless shadow, and to divert their attention from the living 
and eternal substance. There are other persons again, who 
have actually commenced a reform in great sincerity, and have 
been drawn into solid and serious reflection ; but these unhap- 
pily, frequently fall into the way of a class of people, whose 
writings and conversation lead them to expect, that when they 
embrace the religion of Jesus, they will immediately witness 
some delightful sensations of heavenly joy. But, alas ! they 
calculate on the reward before the warfare is begun. If such, 
for a short season persist in communing with their own hearts, 
and are, through condescending love and mercy, favoured to 
draw near to the Saviour of men, their expectation is dis- 
appointed ; and they find that " He is without form or come- 
liness, 1- ' and hath no " beauty" to make him desirable. There 
is nothing to feed and support those airy and fantastic notions, 
which their minds have previously and so perniciously imbibed. 
Thus the inestimable pearl is overlooked, or set at nought ; 
— the language of the prophet is verified, and the blessed Master 
is, I fear, at this day, by too many in this way, " despised and 
rejected of men." 

I am apprehensive, that the enemy of mankind was never 
more effectually served than at the present time, and in a 
way most admirably adapted to the refinement of the age in 
which we live. The facilities for holding up the letter of the 
gospel, were perhaps never before equalled at any period ; nor 
greater eagerness generally evinced to peruse and swallow the 
fascinating baits, (particularly when garnished with declara- 
tions from the undefiled lip of Truth,) which serve to amuse 
and allure ; and by their painful and deadening effect upon the 
mind, prevent its coming under the influence of that pure and 
" quickening Spirit," which only giveth life. By this stratagem, 
an easy and broad way is open for the poor deluded traveller, 

l2 



148 CHAPTER X. [1823. 

so well accommodated to flesh and blood, that there might 
seem to be no necessity for any to " strive to enter in at the 
strait gate ;" and yet the exaltation of the Saviour's kingdom, 
is professedly the object of many of these authors, without 
pointing out where it is to be found, and the terms on which 
only it is to be obtained. Regenerating grace is hinted at ; but 
self-denial, and the daily cross, are seldom heard of. I am 
often bowed down under the consideration of these things, and 
of what will be the end thereof ; and am sometimes ready to 
conclude, that a day of calamity will come, when these chaffy 
imaginations and beguiling inventions will be dispersed like 
withered leaves before an autumn blast ; when the minds of 
men will be brought low, and humbled under the necessity of 
turning to Him, who hath been so long smitten and afflicted, 
and be made willing to sit under His holy teaching. That so 
all men may be brought to know Him in all His heavenly 
offices, not only as a reprover and convincer of sin, but as a 
Comforter, and a gracious Redeemer indeed : and may the Lord 
hasten the dawning of that glorious day, when He, who " was 
despised and rejected of men, 1 ' 1 shall become the chiefest of ten 
thousand and altogether lovely, saith my soul. 

I should much like to know how thou farest amid the storms 
of time ; thy day, I am aware, hath not passed over without 
its trials ; but few persons have moved on more quietly and un- 
complainingly than thyself, and I trust the evening is peaceful 
and serene. 

From the long continuance of severe cold, which we have 
witnessed, I think it must have been felt in every part of 
Europe. There has not been so intense a frost for so long a 
time together, since we have been in Russia. It was really 
impossible to make the house sufficiently warm ; so that 
we have had a suffering time, but have been mercifully sup- 
ported through it, and have renewed cause to be humble 
and thankful. 

I don't know whether thou wilt be able to make out 

this scrawl ; but I cannot see to mend pens as formerly, and in 
other respects the earthly tabernacle is failing ; which must be 
looked for as the awful moment draws nigh, which I desire 



1829.] CHAPTER X. 149 

daily to keep in view. No prospect of liberation* yet appears ; 
perhaps it is too much longed for ; and the will of the creature 
must be slain, that the will of the Lord may be done, and His 
name glorified. 

Farewell, my dear friend ; may heavenly goodness encircle, 
and comfort, and strengthen thy heart. 

To a Friend. 
Skoosharry, Third Month loth, 1829. 

Our mutual friend , who went last spring to 

the South of France and Switzerland, for the benefit of his 
health, has lately returned to this neighbourhood, quite 
recruited. He says, that in several parts where he has been, 
there are many people seriously disposed, and hungering after 
substantial food ; but it appears from his description, that they 
are nearly all looking outward for that which can only be 
found within. Many or most of them are expecting the 
millenium shortly to come ; and I believe none are so difficult 
to persuade as these, where this peaceful reign is to take place ; 
for their expectation is altogether outward, and they consider 
the idea of looking into their own hearts, to find it there, is 
quite presumptuous. Nothing short of a great out-pouring of 
the Holy Spirit, it is said, will do for them ; but it is my 
belief, that nothing but a day of calamity will bring these and 
many others to their senses. 

I find, by a letter lately received from England, that an 
eventful period is thought to be at hand for Christendom ; and 
perhaps the bringing forward again of the Catholic question, in 
the House of Commons, may add a little to this apprehension. 
The signs and seasons most certainly indicate great events ; 
but whilst pride, hardness of heart, excess and luxury, so 
generally prevail, to which may be added the almost universal 
disbelief that the kingdom is within, what can be expected 
but desolation ? Our blessed Saviour foretold, that many' 
should come in his name and deceive many, with, " Lo, here 
is Christ, or lo, he is there." I cannot help thinking, that 
the signs of the present times bear a striking resemblance to 
* From his engagement in Russia. 



150 CHAPTER X. [1829. 

what was thus foretold : for truly, there is great profession of 
religion in the present day ; and amongst the various pro- 
fessors, scarcely any but who recognise the name of our blessed 
Lord ; but how few the number of those that are his followers 
upon the terms He prescribed, — in a life of self-denial, and the 
daily cross ; or that can believe in that faith, which works by 
love, to the purifying of the heart. AVe often hear of declen- 
sions in the church, which are said to have occurred in the 
long dark night of apostacy ; as if that night had passed away, 
and the true gospel light now shone, and that day had dawned, 
which hath restored all things to their primitive beauty. But, 
alas ! 1 cannot help fearing, that the apostacy still continues ; 
only the shade of darkness is a little varied from what it was, 
and things rendered more plausible by this variation. I verily 
believe, that the light of the glorious gospel would shine forth 
abundantly in the present day, if man would but look where 
it is to be seen ; but instead of this, how many, by not keeping 
their spiritual eye turned towards it, behold nothing but the 
shadow, and yet think they are in possession of the substance. 
For true it is, as regards the sun or moon in the outward 
firmament, so long as we look directly towards them, we see 
no shadow ; but if we turn a little on one side, immediately 
the shadow begins to appear, and if we turn our back on them 
altogether, it is all shadow, and the substance is lost to our 
view. I remember a simile of this kind, drawn by an eminent 
servant of the Lord in his day, who has long since been 
numbered with the just of all generations, very descriptive, 
and very applicable and beautiful. 

There is no part of our dear Redeemer's doctrine, in my 
estimation, more plain, simple, and easy to be understood, and 
less wrapped up in metaphor or parable, than that the kingdom 
is within. When he was demanded of the Pharisees, when 
the kingdom of Grod should come, he answered them and said, 
" The kingdom of Grod conieth not with observation, neither 
shall they say, Lo here ! or lo there ! for behold the kingdom 
of Gfod is within you :" — again, " and I will pray the Father, 
and He shall give you another Comforter ; that he may abide 
with you for ever : even the Spirit of Truth, whom the world 



1829.] CHAPTER X. 151 

cannot receive, because it seeth him not, neither knoweth him ; 
but ye know him, for he dwelleth with you, and shall be in 
you. I will not leave you comfortless, I will come to you." 
Can there be any thing more clear and decisive than these 
assertions ? And yet if we read over the modern writings of 
men in high esteem for learning and piety, we can scarcely 
find any allusion to them. Much is said about fundamental 
doctrine and faith ; but in many instances, true faith seems 
altogether lost sight of, and what are called the doctrines of 
the gospel brought into view, and I had nearly said, substi- 
tuted in lieu of faith. 

Every sect of Christians seems to have its own peculiar 
faith or belief; but the apostle tells us only of " one Lord, one 
faith, one baptism ;" and all who profess any other faith than 
that of the apostle's, must certainly be in a state of apostacy 
from the true, living, gospel faith. Now until mankind are 
brought to an acknowledgment of the one true and holy faith, 
it is no wonder that things remain in their present state ; and 
whilst they are thus permitted to continue, in my apprehension 
" the abomination of desolation" is still set up, and stands 
where it ought not, — even in the holy place, or in the place 
where true and vital religion ought to stand, instead thereof. 
It is no marvel then that the earth is so destitute of the 
presence of the Lord, in whose presence only there is life. 

I have no doubt that many are acting in great simplicity of 
heart and sincerity of intention, but certainly without proper 
reflection and due consideration, on a subject of such eternal 
consequence. If people were but willing to " cease from man, 
whose breath is in his nostrils," and turn inward to the un- 
flattering witness for God — the precious gift, which as " a 
light in a dark place," shineth more or less in every 
heart, they would certainly be favoured in due time to dis- 
cover where they are, and in what they are trusting. But 
poor finite man, in his natural strength and wisdom, can 
never effect this : nothing short of an Almighty power can 
open the blind eyes, and change the stony heart to a heart of 
flesh, capable of receiving the impressions of the everlasting 
and unchangeable Truth. 



152 CHAPTER X. [1829 

John Hipsley, Hi i i .. 

Fourth Month 2nd, 1829. 

The signs and seasons with us are very appalling, 

and strongly indicate an eventful period. Some think that 
there will be a great outpouring of the Spirit ; others are looking- 
for the millenium ; but in the present state of affairs, a day of 
calamity, to bring the unstable world to their senses, in my 
apprehension is likely to take place, to check the torrent of vice 
and dissipation, to silence the " Lo ! here," and " Lo ! there ;" 
— and banish from the earth those desolating scourges, which 
make it so destitute of the presence of the Lord. 

To David Mallinson, Sheffield. 

Shooshany, Tenth Month 11th, 1829. 

The removal of my beloved sister, Barbara Hoyland, 

has been very affecting, and the more so, because our situation 
precluded our hearing of the awful event, until several weeks 
after it took place. Mary Hustler has kindly transcribed and 
forwarded to me the expressions, which dropped from her lips 
at different times during her last days, many of which are 
deeply instructive. Her trials and afflictions have been many ; 
but there is strong consolation in believing, that they have 
worked for her " a far more exceeding and eternal weight of 
glory ;" and that through the mercy of God in Christ Jesus, 
her tribulated spirit now resteth in the joy of its Lord. What 
poor short-sighted creatures we are ! I little thought, when 
parting with my dear sister in Liverpool, on my return from 
Ireland, that it was a last farewell : but I desire to bow in 
humble resignation to His Divine will, which is ever excellent ; 
and reverently and thankfully to bless His holy name, who by 
the powerful operation of His all-sufficient grace, made her 
what she was. 

What a variety of changes we have both witnessed, since 
children together under the parental roof, from which we were 
severed at an early age, by the loss of both father and mother, 
and left in an orphan state to struggle in a wide and wicked 
world. Many years have now passed away, since we found a 



1829.] CHAPTER X. 153 

shelter iu the bosom of our highly favoured Society ; but still 
changes have been our portion, though of different kinds, yet 
all permitted in wondrous mercy, and ought to be sufficient 
abundantly to show, that here there is " no continuing city." 
My beloved sister is now beyond the reach of conflict, where 
pain and sorrow cannot come ; and as she drew near the boundary 
of time, she was mercifully supported by the everlasting arm of 
strength, that sure foundation and eternal rock, Christ Jesus, 
in whom she had believed. She is gone ! but I am left a 
little longer, a living monument of the same matchless mercy : 
and although encompassed by human frailty, and conscious of 
manifold deficiencies, yet I am enabled to testify for the 
encouragement of others, that beyond the shadow of a doubt it 
is no " cunningly devised fable" which we have followed, but a 
glorious reality ; of which I feel more and more anxious that 
all should come to the saving knowledge, and partake of the 
blessed and peaceful enjoyment thereof. 

Since taking up my pen to address thee, I have felt particu- 
larly interested on behalf of the dear young people of thy 
family, with whom my heart seems interwoven, with an affec- 
tionate solicitude, which words fall short either to express or 
convey to its full extent ; that they may unceasingly labour 
to know and experience for themselves individually, the secret 
working of that power in their hearts, which is Divine ; and may 
be willing to dwell under its purifying influence, until all 
things are subdued and brought into subjection to His holy will, 
whose exclusive right it is to rule and reign in the hearts of 
the children of men : — " of the increase of His government and 
peace there shall be no end ;" for the kingdom of Christ Jesus 
is an everlasting kingdom, and the covenant made with the 
house of Jacob an everlasting covenant, universal and ever 
new, in and through its blessed and holy Mediator. There can 
be no stronger proof of sincerity in those who desire to fear, love, 
and serve a good and gracious God, than their perseveringly 
endeavouring to wait upon Him, in a watchful humble state of 
mind ; not only at set times and on particular occasions, but 
making it at all times the chief business of their lives. His 
unslumbering eye is ever open to regard the most feeble effort 



154 CHAPTER X. [1829. 

of the weakest child : every gracious promise will be fulfilled 
for His great name's sake; — "They shall renew their 
strength,"" — " they shall not be ashamed ;" — the cry of 
wrestling nature will be heard on high, by Him " that 
speaketh in righteousness, and is mighty to save," and "able 
to deliver." He will deliver from the horrible pit of sin, and 
from the things of time, which cling like the adhesive miry 
clay : — yea, He will set their feet upon an everlasting rock, 
against which the combined powers of darkness in vain may 
beat : — He will establish their goings, and put the new song 
of praise in the mouth of all who diligently and patiently wait 
for Him. The heart is the field in which the hidden treasure 
lies ; and such is its inestimable value, that nothing short of 
all that a man hath, can purchase it. All must be surrendered 
to obtain the heavenly pearl : the whole is required without 
reserve. And what is all that we possess, when compared with 
the stupendous act of suffering love, that purchased our re- 
demption ? it lies in a small compass, yet it is capable of frus- 
trating the Divine intention, and therefore is of vast importance; 
and I believe the unsubjugated will of the creature comprehends 
the whole. Not a word or an action, which fills the catalogue 
of the deeds of the body, can be conceived and performed 
without the assent and will of the creature, — all have their 
origin in thought ; and therefore the ever-blessed Master at 
once pointed out a remedy against every temptation to which 
we are liable, in the general injunction, — " What I say unto 
you, I say unto all, watch." Here then is the Christian's only 
tower of safety, and the path that leads to prayer. Oh ! that 
I could induce all to this engagement of mind : the tendency 
of every thought would be discovered by the light which 
shineth in darkness ; whatsoever is earthly and sensual, and 
even the tendency of the heart in the natural state, would be 
exposed ; — " the lust of the flesh, the lust of the eye, and the 
pride of life," would be clearly distinguished to be " not of the 
Father, but of the world, — which " passeth away, and the lust 
thereof : but he that doeth the will of Grod, abide th for ever." 
Those who steadily and carefully maintain the watch, will be 
strengthened to suppress every intrusive thought, and will be 



1829.] CHAPTER X. 155 

more and more placed in a capacity to wait ; for there cannot 
be a true waiting, without a ceasing from our own imagina- 
tions, that God may be all in all : in whose presence only 
there is life, and love, and peace, and joy, — the blessed reward 
of all those, who fear, serve, and love Him, in his inward 
appearance. 

I was not intending to say so much, when I began with this 
subject, but I think my pen could not be employed in a better 
cause, or for a better Master : at the same time believing, that 
it will be accepted in the same love, that prompted me to 
write it. 

To a Friend, (residing in Finland.) 

Shooskarry, Eleventh Month 29th, 1829. 
I enclose the Yearly Meeting's Epistle, and trust 



the perusal of it will afford thee satisfaction, as it appears that 
assembly was owned by the great Head of his church, to the 
consolation and comfort of the upright and faithful standard- 
bearers. But ! my dear friend, I am fearful lest thou 
shouldest suppose, that the number of those to whom is com- 
mitted the weight of the law and of the testimony, is larger 
amongst us, than is really the case. It is a sorrowful fact, 
but not the less true, that there are but " two or three berries 
in the top of the uppermost bough, four or five in the outmost 
fruitful branches thereof," in the present day of our once 
flourishing Society : it is indeed a truly mournful consideration, 
when we look back at what it was, in the day when it first came 
forth. If we look at the ancient writings of Friends, we shall 
find that originally the Society consisted wholly of such as had 
joined by convincement, and were actually in possession of what 
they professed to be led and guided by. When these were 
gathered to their everlasting rest, their children became the 
burden-bearers : many of whom stood firm to the principles of 
their fathers, and the cause of Truth was precious in their eyes. 
As this generation passed away, others sprung up, who entered 
into the privileges, to procure which their worthy predecessors 
had laboured and suffered : thus the Society gradually became 
composed mainly of members by birth- right. Then persecu- 



156 CHAPTER X. [1829. 

tion ceased in great measure, and worldly prosperity, accom- 
panied with ease and indulgence followed : combining to induce 
a relaxation in their vigilance against the attacks of the great 
enemy of man's happiness ; who did not fail to avail himself 
of the opportunity, more widely and cunningly to spread his 
snares and baits against a people, who, perhaps, of all others, 
had the most contributed to undermine his kingdom ; as it is 
always his aim to attack those from whom he is the most in dan- 
ger of being kept at a distance. There is no need for him to be 
jealous of such as are the " children of disobedience," 11 in whose 
hearts he already rules aud reigns : they may go on their way 
quietly, as he has them safe enough. In this manner, things 
have been getting worse and worse, until unhappily it may 
be said, that, to a great and lamentable degree, the glory has 
departed from our Israel, and little is now left us but a name. 

The picture which I have laid before thee is a very dis- 
couraging and appalling one ; but I was afraid of thy being 
dazzled by that which only glitters, and is not the pure gold 
that has been tried in the fire. Notwithstanding things are 
in this deplorable condition, " the foundation standeth sure," — 
the Rock of ages remains unimpaired, and cannot change ; 
the precious seal is yet unbroken, — " the Lord knoweth them 
that are his ;" and there is a little remnant yet preserved alive 
in that which lives for ever, who are enabled to call Jesus their 
Lord, and that by the Holy Ghost. 

The present state of our religious Society, in my appre- 
hension, very strikingly resembles that of the Jewish nation 
in former days : — they were a highly favoured people ; and 
our Society has been favoured in a very eminent degree : — both 
have proved themselves unworthy of the tender regard and 
mercy of a long-suffering Lord God. I need not mention the 
final overthrow of the Jews to thee, who art so well versed in 
these things ; but it is my belief, that unless the Father of 
mercies is pleased to stretch out his everlasting arm, either to 
produce a thorough change in the hearts of our members, or 
to send a day of winnowing that will scatter and disperse the 
chaffy spirit that so widely and alarmingly prevails, so that 
none can stand but such as are upon the true foundation ; — I 



1829.] CHAPTER X. 157 

say, I believe, that unless there is an interference superior to 
the power of man, the major part of our members will be 
amalgamated with the general mass of the people, when a few 
more fleeting years have passed away. But as in the destruc- 
tion of Jerusalem, there was a place of refuge provided for the 
faithful Christians ; so I humbly trust, that if the bulk of our 
Society should be scattered, there will be a Pella* cast up for 
the honest-hearted amongst us : for the Lord will never 
forsake those that put their trust and confidence in him. 

I remember a remark once made to me by an honest Friend 
in London, during the time of the Yearly Meeting ; he was 
probably lamenting the low state of things, when I said, 
' What would have become of me, if it had not been for our 
Society V To which he replied, ' What would have become of 
the Society, if it were not for those who have come in by con- 
vincement.' > I have since thought there is a great deal in what 
he said ; for I believe, many who have come in by convince- 
ment, have been greatly instrumental in keeping the building 
together. An individual thoroughly convinced of our prin- 
ciples, and keeping close to that which has convinced him, will 
undoubtedly, as he continues faithful, be converted by it ; and 
one such person is certainly of more value in the Society, than 
many who are mere nominal members by birth-right only. 
Such as these have bought the Truth, at the price of becoming- 
fools before men for Christ's sake : they have believed in the 
sufficiency of His power revealed in the heart, to cleanse and 
purify them from all sin ; and although they may have had to 
pass through many conflicts, occasionally for several years, 
without appearing to gain any ground, they have been 
strengthened to persevere, and still to wait for Him. The 
weight of former sins and transgressions has been long and 
painfully felt to rise in humiliating retrospect before the view of 
the mind, time after time, in terrible array ; working for each, 
true sorrow and repentance never to be repented of. But 
although at seasons he is ready to faint, when faith and hope have 
been reduced to a low ebb, yet the invisible arm of strength 
is still underneath unseen and unfelt, supporting the tribu- 
* See EuseMus. 



158 CHAPTER X. [1829. 

lated traveller in the apparently unequal warfare : until every 
sin has passed before-hand to judgment ; and at last the 
glorious day begins to dawn, when He, who has been "as a 
refiner's fire, and like fuller's soap," before whom nothing can 
stand (of a transgressing nature) " when he appeareth,' 1 or can 
" abide the day of his coming, 11 — is now discovered to be " the 
sun of righteousness " arisen " with healing in his wings, 11 to 
the joy and comfort of the wounded soul. Then the love of 
God is truly known ; and until this blessed day is felt in the 
great and heartfelt work of regeneration, none can experi- 
mentally and truly say, that " God is love:' 1 — they are mere 
words to all who have not witnessed the inward workings of 
his power in their heart : — but now, they feel him to be a God 
of love and mercy too, and are renewedly made willing in the 
love of Him to wait for Him. In this waiting, watchful frame 
of mind, we come to the place where true prayer is wont to be 
made ; which rises as sweet incense before the throne of grace, 
because not of our creating. Here is the Christian's watch- 
tower, — his only place of safety, which was pointed out by our 
ever blessed Lord to all, — " What I say unto you, I say unto 
all, watch :*'' — again, " watch and pray, lest ye enter into temp- 
tation. 11 The soul that faithfully watches, cannot be long with- 
out praying ; although but in the language of a sigh. It is 
enjoined also by the great apostle, where he says, — " praying 
always with all prayer and supplication in the Spirit, and 
watching thereunto with all perseverance. 11 Here every thought 
is detected in the light of Christ, and brought to judgment, 
and into the obedience of Him, who casteth down every imagi- 
nation, and every high thing that exalteth itself against the 
knowledge of God, — to the pulling down the strong holds of 
sin and Satan. 

It is such as these, my dear friend, who have thus far 
advanced in the heavenly race, that have had their hearts 
directed " into the love of God, and into the patient waiting 
for Christ ;" which, I trust, thou hast in part, if not wholly, 
witnessed : and I think thou wilt agree with me, that a single 
individual coming into our Society thus convinced, and thus 
converted to the true faith in Jesus Christ, is of more value 



1829.] CHAPTER X. 159 

to it, than a hundred members who have nothing to show but 
a birth-right. And it is these that have followed their Lord 
and Master in the regeneration, that are qualified from heart- 
felt experience to be employed in his service, if it be His will 
to call for them, and send them to speak a word in due season 
to others. 

To his Son Joshua. 

Twelfth Month 12t7i, 1829. 

What an unaccountable thing it is, that when such 

pains are being taken to educate the lower orders of the people, 
and such an earnestness apparent in pursuing plans of philan- 
thropy and benevolence, as has never been equalled in any 
former age, and so many efforts made to spread the knowledge 
of the gospel ; yet there should be so bold a front and an atrocity 
in crime, surpassing even barbarous and uncivilized nations ! 
To me, it seems as if many people were sensible of the tottering 
situation we are in, and thought it necessary to be doing some- 
thing that in their apprehensions will be productive of good. 

As to the increased efforts to spread the knowledge of the 
gospel, but little fruit can be expected, so long as they continue 
to be so blended with the inventions and contrivance of man. 
I verily believe this is one great means of preventing the people 
from coming to a knowledge of the true gospel, which remains 
to be " the power of Grod unto salvation." If the minds of the 
people were turned to an inward and vital knowledge of this 
work, there would be some hope ; provided the teachers them- 
selves were really called to and qualified for the work ; and 
not, as is to be feared too many of them are, strangers to the 
inward work themselves. 

In my apprehension nothing short of a day of calamity will 
bring the people to their senses, and reduce them to a state of 
simplicity and humility ; which in the end would prove an un- 
speakable blessing, if happily it were the means of turning 
their attention to the true Teacher in their own hearts, who 
giveth life to those that hear and obey him, and would cause 
them to " cease from man whose breath is in his nostrils,'" by 
whom they have been so long kept in darkness. That so those 



1 GO CHAPTER X. [1829. 

abominations which are set up, and standing in the place of the 
true Christian religion, and which make the earth so destitute 
of the presence of the Lord, may for ever be swept away from 
its surface. 

Should such a day be permitted, it will certainly try the 
members of our highly professing Society, and show who are 
on the foundation that standeth sure ; these will be preserved 
as in the hollow of the Lord's hand, from " the blast of the 
terrible ones;" but the chaff, — such as have nothing but an 
empty profession to stand upon, will assuredly be scattered 
before the storm. 

To hear of thy welfare in those things that are of eternal 
consequence, is the principal desire of my heart for thee ; with- 
out this, worldly prosperity will avail nothing in the great day 
of account. But, little is enough, when our desires are bounded 
by moderation ; and I am fully persuaded that no good and 
necessary thing will be withheld from them that walk uprightly. 
As for myself, I can truly say, that when I began business, I 
had no artificial wants, and my real wants were very few. I 
never studied to keep up appearances, and be like other people ; 
all around me knew 7 that I had but small means, and I made 
no other pretensions. I endeavoured, I think, to the best of my 
ability to seek the Lord, and positively did not look beyond a 
sufficiency of food and raiment ; and although an utter stranger 
to business in every shape, yet my way was made prosperous ; 
though perhaps what I thought prosperity, would be despised by 
most in the present day, and probably by many in that day also. 

To one of his Children. 
Shooshamj, Twelfth Month 18$, 1829. 

My Dear , 

Truly there is nothing in this fading world to be 



compared with an inheritance in another and a better, which is 
to come, and into which we none of us know how soon we may 
be summoned. But if we be happily found amongst the number 
of those who " fear God and work righteousness," we shall 
most assuredly " be accepted of him ;"" and shall praise His 
great and ever excellent name through the never ending ages 



1830.] CHAPTER X. 161 

of a glorious eternity : which is my frequent and earnest 
prayer for us all. 

The great apostle also enjoins " praying alwaj-s, with all 
prayer and supplication in the Spirit, and watching thereunto." 
What a privilege it is that we have this in our power at all 
times, out of meetings as well as in meetings, and on all occa- 
sions whatsoever ; and as we know for our encouragement, 
that we are constantly day and night in the presence of Him, 
" in whom we live, and move, and have our being,'" who 
" knoweth the thoughts and intents of the heart ;" we shall in 
this inward exercise be preserved in His fear and in His love : 
for the Shepherd of Israel neither slumbers nor sleeps, — His 
watchful eye is never closed. 

Thou, no doubt, art present regularly during the family 
readings of the Scriptures ; but I would advise thee to read a 
portion in them every night before retiring to rest, with an 
earnest desire, that it may be given thee to understand them : 
for they will be but as a dead letter, without the assistance of 
the Holy Spirit which gave them forth ; with it, they will 
afford thee great instruction and consolation, and thou wilt be 
taught the true meaning and application of them. They are 
the only treasure worth storing in memory : this I can truly 
testify from long and sensible experience. 

I have lately received a letter from thy uncle Charles, giving 
but a poor account of his health, and that of thy aunt : they, 
like myself, and thy dear mother, are feeling the infirmities 
attendant on advanced age ; and I hope these will serve as 
warnings to stir us all up, to endeavour to be prepared for the 
change, that will certainly overtake us ; that we may be like 
the wise virgins, provided with " oil in our vessels with our 
lamps." 

To Richard Oockin. 
Shoosharry, Fourth Month 30th, 1830, 0. S. 
Thy letter was, indeed, most heartily welcome to us all, and 
as the harbinger of another returning spring, afforded us much 
comfort and consolation, after the long winter that has just 
passed over our heads. 

M 



162 CHAPTER XT. [1830. 

Our work upon the land was suspended by the frost six 
months and nine days ; and if we reckon the rough weather 
previously to the setting in of the frost, with what we have 
lately had, the winter has been more than seven months in 
length. 

At the time when 1 have usually written to Balby Monthly 
Meeting, I was not unmindful of my dear friends ; but alas ! 
we were all laid by with sickness just then. This, however, as 
to myself, was not of long duration ; but I found my mind 
entirely closed up, not having a sentence of any kind to trans- 
mit to the meeting ; and yet I never witnessed a greater 
weight of exercise than at that period, which remained with 
me for several weeks afterwards, and is yet at seasons my 
portion. Thy letter has been particularly comforting to me on 
this head, because it is now very evident, that any communi- 
cation from me would have been out of its place, and altogether 
out of season, and must have clashed with the address from 
dear Mary Hargreaves ; and the blessed Master is not the 
author of confusion but of peace, and that in all the churches. 
I wish to enjoy the privilege of being a member of Balby 
Monthly Meeting, and therefore request on behalf of my 
family and self, that thou wilt procure for us a copy of the 
address. 



1831.1 chapter xr. loo 



CHAPTER XL 

VISITS EXGLAXD WITH HIS WIFE IX 1830 HIS AFFECTIOXATE 

ADDRESS TO THE MEMBERS OF THE CHURCH OF EXGLAND 

RELIGIOUS VISIT INTO DEVONSHIRE, CORNWALL, THE SCILLY 
ISLES, &C. 

This year (1830) the health of our dear mother having again 
failed considerably, she was recommended to pass the ensuing 
winter in England ; and my father having concluded to 
accompany her, they came over together in the autumn. The 
interval of leisure thus afforded, was not suffered to pass unim- 
proved. Besides the attendance of the various meetings that 
fell in his way, he wrote and published, during the winter, a 
pamphlet entitled, An affectionate Address to the Members of 
the Church of England ; which it is believed was widely cir- 
culated at the time. 

In the First Month 1831, he applied for and obtained a 
certificate from his Monthly Meeting, enabling him to visit 
parts of Devon, Cornwall, and the Scilly Isles. On the 
conclusion of this service, he attended the Dublin Yearly 
Meeting, and afterwards that held in London, returning to 
Petersburg in the Sixth Month following. 

The succeeding extracts are from letters written during this 
period. 

To Sarah Smith, Sheffield. 

York, First Month 8th, 1831. 

On Second day morning, the 3rd instant, I shaped 

a northerly course for Durham Quarterly Meeting, held at 
Darlington. We had a very solemn meeting for worship the 
next morning, in the course of which, the great cause was ably 
advocated by several present ; and I had to throw in my poor 
mite amongst them, and in a particular manner to call their 
attention to myself, as one exhibiting, and that without boasting, 

m2 



I 64* CHAPTER XI. [1831. 

the triumph of Divine grace, over human nature in its most 
depraved state. It was indeed a memorable time ; — the 
Truth rose into dominion over all, and many minds were sen- 
sibly humbled under the power thereof. I stayed over their 
week day meeting on Fifth day last ; and had again to declare 
of the goodness and mercy of our God. This meeting ended 
well, but was not quite so highly favoured as that preceding 
the Quarterly Meeting. 

After meeting, I left Darlington for York ; where I was 
favoured to find my wife better than when I left her. For 
this, and for all the blessings and favours I daily and hourly 
enjoy, what shall I render unto the great and bountiful Giver, 
but the acknowledgment of being utterly unworthy of the least 
of all His tender mercies. On the way from Darlington, 
during the half hour allowed for dining, I called on a person 
who has lately joined the Society by convincement : he has 
a daughter in a very delicate state of health. I was gratified 
with my visit ; and have since felt such a draught of love 
towards this dear young woman, that I have had to address a 
letter to her father on her behalf, which, I trust, will be 
received in the same love in which it was written. 

Yesterday I went to sit by the death-bed of a young man, 
who is not expected to be long on this side the grave. It was 
a season to be long and gratefully remembered ; for the Son of 
peace had mercifully visited this habitation. I had to bow in 
thankfulness for the precious quiet vouchsafed, and to petition 
the Father of mercies, on behalf of the humble patient sufferer. 
I believe that many have been instructed by this bed-side. 

My little address is now in the press, in York, as well as in 
London, so that I hope it will shortly appear at Sheffield. 

To HIS ABSENT FAMILY. 

York, Third Month Std, 1831. 
My dear Children, 

I find things, as I go on, much altered as regards our 

Society ; but it is a great consolation that there are here and 
there a few, comparable to the odd berries on the uppermost 
the fruitful branch, who are preserved alive at 



1831.] CHAPTER XI. 165 

the root, and I trust growing from grace to grace, and that they 
will continue to grow, until they attain to " the measure of 
the stature of the fulness of Christ.' 1 There are others again, 
whom the everlasting Father is graciously drawing by mer- 
ciful visitations to that Saviour, who will in no wise cast 
them out. In Sheffield, Doncaster, York, and Darlington, 
there are of this description, as well as at many other places, 
where my lot has been cast. It is astonishing what a striking 
difference there is between some meetings and others ; but the 

most barren sittings I have been at, were at =. I found 

it my place to dwell low with the suffering seed, and was quite 
closed up in both the meetings there. " If any man serve 
me, let him follow me ; and where I am, there shall also my 
servant be," — was the declaration of the Saviour of men, when 
personally upon earth : and truly there is no alteration in the 
Christian course ; — if we would reign with Christ, we must be 
willing to suffer with Him. We must indeed, according to 
our measure, drink of the cup which He drank of, and with 
the baptism that He was baptized withal, must we be bap- 
tized ; or how can we know a fellowship with His sufferings, 
or witness the power of His resurrection ? In some meeting's 
I have had to deal very plainly, and to declare amongst them 
without reserve, that however they might disregard the pre- 
cious gift in their own hearts, and keep aloof from its warnings 
and monitions, that the same would judge them at the last 
day, according to the words of our holy Redeemer, when he 
said, — " I judge no man," but " the word that I have spoken, 
the same shall judge him in the last day ;" — or to this effect. 

There is a new work, published by a minister of the Inde- 
pendent denomination of Sunderland, entitled The Book of the 
Priesthood, proving from Scripture, that under the gospel, the 
whole institution is at an end. I have procured a copy ; also 
one of a smaller work, The Church in Danger from itself and 
of another, Hum's reasons for Secession from the Church of 
England. The author of The Book of the Priesthood, is now said 
to be employing his pen on the subject of tithes. In short, the 
nation seems at last to open its eyes, or rather to permit their 
being opened ; and I believe that the day is fast approaching, 



166 CHAPTER XI. [1831 

when the hireling will flee, " because he is an hireling-." I 
have met with a work lately on Christian perfection, which 
has pleased me not a little, because there are so few of the 
different professing Christians who will admit this doctrine. I 
believe the author is a Wesleyan Methodist ; and although he 
retains things which we do not deem essential, he very ably 
maintains the possibility and necessity of Christian perfection. 

I have mentioned these things to show you what is doing 
in the world this way. It is wonderful to behold the great 
shaking there is in the minds of men at this time ; all I hope 
indicating, that the day has begun to dawn, when u the know- 
ledge of the Lord shall cover the earth, as the waters cover 
the sea,'" — even the knowledge of that " word of Cod, which 
liveth and abideth for ever ;" and which in the days of the 
apostles so mightily grew and prevailed, to the utter exclusion 
of the earthly nature from every heart in which it is permitted 
to operate. 

For some months past, I have been rather looking forward 
towards paying a visit to the Scilly Islands, and to the 
different meetings of Friends in Devonshire and Cornwall ; and 
latterly, the track has been so defined, that there seemed no 
doubt in my mind respecting it. I was strengthened to cast 
the subject before the Monthly Meeting, held on the 21st 
ultimo, and was favoured to receive every encouragement that 
could be desired ; and since taking this step, I have felt the 
reward of peace, for this small act of obedience to what I 
believe is required of me. I am now making preparations for 
leaving Yorkshire for a season. As I am very much a 
stranger to every one in those parts, the prospect at times 
feels rather heavy ; but having been mercifully favoured to 
taste of that soul-sustaining food, upon which a man may [in 
a spiritual sense] travel forty days, I am encouraged to hope, 
that He, who has been graciously pleased to be with me in so 
many troubles, will not now forsake me. 

I trust you will still continue to be cared for : — " as 

the mountains are round about Jerusalem, so is the Lord 
round about his people, from henceforth and for ever." Those 
who fear, love, honour, and obey Him, they are His people : 



1831. J CHAPTER XI. 167 

and " the Lord will bless His people with peace ; 11 and truly 
there is no peace like the peace of the righteous ; no love like 
the love of God shed abroad in the heart ; and no joy like 
unto the joy of God's salvation. Love was the distinguishing 
characteristic of the first and great commandment under the 
law : and it is the first fruit of the Spirit in the gospel dis- 
pensation ; which is exhibited in love to God, and love to 
man. If we are but once favoured with this inestimable 
treasure, the whole train of Christian virtues will follow in 
beautiful succession, — joy, peace, long-suffering, gentleness, 
goodness, faith, meekness, temperance ; against which there 
is no law. " Love is the fulfilling of the law," and the end 
of the commandment. It is indeed the heavenly badge that 
designates the disciples of the one same compassionate Saviour ; 
it outlives faith and hope ; it casts out fear ; and animates the 
Christian traveller to persevere in the tribulated path, which 
leads to life everlasting. Then let us individually wrestle for 
this unutterable blessing ; for we are told that " God is love :" 
if we find it, we find Him. Let us press through the 
crowd of encumbering things, even things perhaps harmless 
in themselves, which serve to keep alive in us the evil and 
hindering propensities of fallen nature ; that so we may happily 
come in heart to the Saviour, who only can enable us to banish 
the things of time and sense. Though they may compass 
us about like bees, in the name of the Lord 2 we will destroy 
them ; for through Him we can do all things, but without 
Him nothing, as it should be done. 

Island, called St. Mary's, the largest of the Scilly growp, 
31s£ of Third Month, 1831. 
My dear Children, 
I think my last letter mentioned the probability of my 
visiting the counties of Devon and Cornwall, together with 
these islands. At the last Balby Monthly Meeting, a certifi- 
cate was granted me for this purpose. On the 5th instant, I 
left York, by way of Leeds, to Bradford, and was at both their 
meetings the next day ; in which I had to labour amongst 
them, to my own comfort at any rate. When at this meeting, 



168 CHAPTER XI. [1831. 

a few weeks previously, there seemed no door of entrance to be 
found amongst them, and I was shut up in both meetings. 
The next, day I came on to Sheffield, and on the 10th attended 
the Monthly Meeting, and received my certificate. The same 

day, accompanied by , I went to Woodhouse, Hacken- 

thorpe, Burleigh, and two places at Handsworth, to pay a 
small debt due from me to some invalids at these places, — two 
or three of them far advanced in years, who were absent 
when I visited Woodhouse meeting some time before. The 
next day I went in the mail to Birmingham, and pro- 
ceeded the same evening towards Bristol ; here we arrived 
early in the morning, and after some refreshment, went forward 
to Wellington ; where I found Samuel and Maria Fox, (whom 
1 think you know,) were intending to unite with me as far as 
our routes might continue together. I attended both their 
meetings on First day, and had a little to do amongst them 
in the morning ; but in the afternoon was silent. On the 
14th, Ave proceeded to Kingsbridge, where a meeting was 

appointed for the next day. I slept at 's, whose wife is 

an old acquaintance of mine. Our mutual satisfaction at thus 
meeting, was very much damped by the poor state of her 
health. The meeting was a highly favoured time, and we all 
had to labour together in love, unity and harmony. Next day 
we proceeded to Modbury, to another meeting ; this was 
rather more dull at first, but was favoured to end comfortably. 
We reached Plymouth the same evening. At this place, Samuel 
and Maria Fox had a prospect of visiting families. It was I 
believe best that we separated ; as when united, we seemed 
rather to depend on the strength of each other, and perhaps 
even felt a little too strong. 

The next day, I proceeded alone to a newly settled meeting 
at Tavistock, consisting mostly of convinced Friends. I was 
a little disappointed to find this meeting flat and dull : at the 
first, perhaps I expected too much ; but towards the latter end 
Truth rose into dominion, to our mutual comfort and consola- 
tion. I returned to Plymouth the same night. 

As way opened, I accompanied Samuel and Maria Fox in some 
of their family visits. On First day the 20th, sat with two 



1831. J CHAPTER XI. 169 

families, and attended both the regular meetings, in which I 
was enabled to obtain considerable relief : towards the close of 
my testimony in the afternoon, the way seemed clear for taking- 
leave of Friends there, to some of whom I felt closely attached. 
In the evening, was at a public meeting, held in the Bethel at 
Devonport, at the request of Samuel and Maria Fox. It was well 
filled ; and after the people were informed of the object of our 
meeting together, great solemnity prevailed over the assembly. 
Samuel Fox had to break the silence with the voice of prayer. 
I suppose almost the whole congregation, consisted of persons 
connected with the sea-faring life, with their families. My 
heart was greatly enlarged towards them, as companions and 
shipmates in the voyage of life ; having the Lord God, merciful 
and gracious, and abundant in goodness and Truth, for our 
commander; and an all-sufficient Saviour and holy Redeemer 
for a heavenly pilot ; who would never leave His vessel, 
but would safely conduct us through all the dangers and 
difficulties of time, and would remain with us through the 
never ending ages of eternity. Towards the close, I had to 
call the attention of the meeting to myself, as an example for 
their encouragement, that none need despair; for in me they 
might behold a living monument of the Lord's everlasting 
mercy, and the triumph of Divine grace over human nature in 
its most depraved state ; — in one, who, like themselves, had 
been cradled on the ocean, whom the everlasting arm had oft- 
times been stretched out to save, when the briny wave had 
nearly prevailed against him. Maria Fox concluded the meeting 
in supplication. The people seemed in no hurry to leave the 
place, many coming to shake hands in a very friendly way. 
By what I have said, you will have some idea what sort of a 
meeting it was ; and I think you cannot refrain from joining 
with me in the grateful tribute of admiration, gratitude, and 
praise, to Him who " sitteth upon the flood," who " sitteth 
King for ever ;" — who only can " give strength unto His 
people, — who will bless the provision of Zion, and satisfy her 
poor with bread, — and fill with that peace, which the topaz of 
Ethiopia cannot equal in value. 

Being clear of Plymouth, next morning I crossed the Tamar 



170 CHAPTER XI. [1831. 

in a boat to the Cornish side of Hamoaze, passing close 
under the stern of the Malta man-of-war. We proceeded to 
Looe, where a meeting was appointed : few Friends live 
here ; but one of the few is that faithful servant, Sarah 
Tucket. We were favoured with a comfortable meeting, to 
mutual refreshment. After dinner, we proceeded to Tideford, 
and next morning attended their meeting. This was a memo- 
rable time from beginning to end : I can scarcely calculate 
upon being again permitted to partake of such another hea- 
venly banquet in the course of this journey, if ever : but my 
soul right well knoweth that there is a power, in whom I am 
happily taught to believe, and with whom all things are pos- 
sible ; who can at His pleasure " bind the sweet influences of 
Pleiades, ,, loose the bands of Orion, " bring forth Mazzaroth 
in his season, and " guide Arcturus with his sons ; ,? — " He 
that openeth, and no man shutteth ; and shutteth, and no man 
openeth " the heavenly treasury of peace, love, and joy, which 
are at times revealed through the riches and glory of His 
grace, to His praise. 

We dined at Liskeard. This meeting was appointed at six 
in the evening, and was much hurt, by the disorderly gathering 
of the town's people, attracted by the lights in the windows of 
the meeting-house, perhaps a rare thing. However, at last, 
we were favoured, and light sprung up, which brought weight 
and solemnity over all ; under a feeling of which we separated. 
S. E., an elderly minister, appeared after I sat down, in 
a weighty and confirming testimony. The next meeting was 
at Austle, at three p. m. on the following day : it was small, 
but upon the whole, comfortable : after which I went on to 
Truro, and attended their meeting held in course next day. 
This proved a refreshing season to many present, and to 
some a time of rejoicing. In the afternoon, W. T. kindly 
accompanied me to Camborne ; and the next day I proceeded 
to Penzance : the ground here was covered with snow, and the 
morning very cold and boisterous. I had hastened to be in 
time for the packet for Scilly, but found she had been detained 
by stress of weather five days behind her time. The next 
day was very stormy, and there was rough work among the 



1831. j chapter xr. 1/1 

shipping. An East Indiaman, the Andromache, put into 
Mount's Bay for shelter, and landed her passengers here from 
Calcutta. 

On First day the 27th, I attended both meetings at Pen- 
zance, which were refreshing and comfortable seasons : Friends 
in these parts are not numerous. I was lodged at the house 
of J. S., who has kindly accompanied me to these islands. 
We sailed the next afternoon, and had a fine but tossing 
passage. It is not often otherwise at any time, as the set of 
the tide into the British and George's Channel, and the expo- 
sure to the Bay of Biscay and the mighty Atlantic, cannot 
fail to cause great agitation of the water, particularly when it 
has blown hard for several previous days together. The Wolf 
Hock lies in the run of the packet, and is only discovered by the 
breaking of the sea upon it. We bore up for it about ten, p. m., 
distant from four to five hundred yards : — I had just fallen 
asleep at the moment, and so missed seeing it, which I rather 
regretted, as I have formerly been several times near it, but 
have never seen it. In light winds it makes a roaring noise 
from being hollow, and the breaking of the sea into it may be 
heard at a considerable distance. At eleven p. m., we were in 
lull sight of the fine revolving light on the island of (St.) Agnes; 
and in a couple of hours afterwards were anchored safely in 
the roads of (St.) Mary's. 

We landed immediately, and were glad to get to an inn, 
where the people kindly made us a fire, as the night was cold. 
The next day, a meeting was appointed on the Isle of Tresco ; 
the people were long in gathering, but behaved solidly ; and I 
was favoured with encouragement to persevere with my engage- 
ment. Next day we had a meeting on Sampson's Island in 
the afternoon, and another on Boyer's Isle in the evening ; 
both were satisfactory and comforting seasons, tending to 
administer an increase of strength, and begetting humble 
thankfulness of heart. 

Fourth Month \st. Last evening we had a meeting on 
Martin's Isle, which ended in a very solemn season. A class 
of Methodists called Bryanites abound here ; their minister, 
and many that were present, made a continual groaning. One 



172 CHAPTER XI. [1831. 

poor woman in particular, who seemed much struck with the 
solemnity of the occasion ; I was upon my feet at the time, but 
was favoured with calmnes3. I could plainly hear the words, 
'praises,' ' praises,' from the lips of the minister and others. 

Fourth Month 2nd. Yesterday, we crossed to the island 
called St. Agnes, and found the landing rather difficult on 
account of the surf : in consequence of the great ebb and flow 
of the tides, few of these islands have proper landing places. 
It being what is called Good Friday, the people were mostly at 
home ; and their Bryanite minister, knowing we were amongst 
the islands, had appointed a meeting for us at six in the 
evening, saying, that if we did not come, he would preach 
himself: — so that all was made ready to our hands. There 
is a good new school-house on this island belonging to the 
Protestant establishment ; but the clergyman will not allow 
it to be used for any other purpose than as a school. He 
seldom comes near these people himself, although there is a 
regular church-house for his use ; and yet he does all he can 
to make it inconvenient for Dissenters to come among them. 
Our meeting was necessarily held in a dwelling-house, in two 
lower rooms, which were excessively crowded ; and after all, 
many had to stand outside the open doors and windows. You 
know that I can bear a tolerable portion of heat, but this was 
almost too much for me. There was much groaning around 
us; but no particularly wild extravagances were exhibited, 
and on the whole it was a highly favoured meeting. We 
drank tea at the same house with their minister ; but carrying 
our materials with us, we made a distinct table. It was 
striking to see the homely fare he partook of ; in his absence, 
I inquired of our hostess how he was supported ; she said, they 
could not afford to pay him much, so had agreed amongst 
themselves, that they should take it by turns to board him 
one day each, in the same manner as they lived themselves ; 
so that he is at a fresh house every day : but that one person 
had agreed to find him a lodging at her sole expense ; and 
that the society of which he was a member allowed him £8 
per annum. He is a kind, sincere-hearted, and unpretending 
young man, and I felt a regard for him. 



1831. J CHAPTER XI. 173 

I am very thankful that I am favoured to have finished 
visiting all the straggling distant islands ; and it is due from 
me to acknowledge the great support and strength that have 
been afforded me. It has blown strong ever since I have been 
here, so that getting about has been difficult, particularly embark- 
ing in the dark in strange places, amongst rocks slippery with 
oozy sea-weed ; we could not avoid getting our clothes 
wet every day, and sometimes twice a-day. My companion 
is a plain, honest, worthy Friend, to whom I feel under many 
and great obligations for his kindness and attention. 

After the two meetings in prospect on the island called 
St. Mary's, I know of nothing more to detain me here ; but 
do not like exactly fixing my return to Yorkshire. I hope to 
be rightly directed, though but an unprofitable servant ; 
but to be admitted a servant of such a Master on any terms, 
ought to be sufficient for any of us unworthy creatures. 

I have lately received an extract from your last letter, and 
am sorry to find there is so much sickness near you, and that 
a fear prevails of the cholera approaching your borders. But 
we have "a strong city ;" and I humbly hope, we shall be 
mercifully prepared for an entrance therein, through the strait 
gate ; that we may indeed be amongst the number of the few, 
out of the many called, who are happily chosen ; — this gate 
of the Lord through which the righteous enter into the city 
of their God ; all the inhabitants of which are " redeemed with 
judgment, 1 ' and converted with righteousness, even the righte- 
ousness of Him who died for the sins of all mankind. 

Fourth Month 6th. Penzance. — On First day, we had two 
meetings on (St.) Mary's Isle : the first, at Holyvale, was a 
little disturbed by some rude people ; I reproved them for it ; 
and I believe many thought it a solemn time. The meeting 
in the Garrison town, was larger than any preceding it ; and 
was a highly favoured time throughout. 

To Sarah Smith, Sheffield 
Barnstaple, North Devon, Fourth Month 18th, 1831. 
Presuming that my dear wife has before this time taken 
her departure from thy hospitable dwelling, I am at a loss 



174 CHAPTER XI. [1831. 

how to direct to her, and shall therefore be greatly obliged, if 
thou wilt forward the enclosed letter, as thou art doubtless in 
possession of the secret. 

Since arriving at Penzance from the Scilly Isles, I have 
been searching out the infirm and invalids at Marazion, who 
did not get to the meetings when I was at Penzance, previously 
to embarkation. On the Sixth day following, went eighteen 
miles to sit with some Friends at Portreath, a small port 
near the entrance of the North Channel ; and afterwards 
to Redruth, where a meeting was appointed for the next 
day. This was a comfortable time I trust to many present, 
and a relieving one to myself ; which I desire to remember 
with gratitude of heart to the great Giver. 

On Fourth day the 18th, the Quarterly Meeting was held : 
this was a favoured time ; though in all these meetings I had 
some heavy work to do, but was strengthened to perform it 
faithfully. There seemed no getting out of Falmouth without 
holding a public meeting with the inhabitants, to which the 
sailors were specially invited. The house was well filled, and 
it proved a solemn opportunity ; which I hope will be lastingly 
and profitably remembered by some present. I had to tell 
them, that like themselves, 1 had been cradled on the boisterous 
ocean : that the mercy of the Lord was unbounded as His 
love : that none need despair, for that Jesus Christ came into 
the world to save sinners, of whom I am chief, &c. 

The time of liberation was now come, and I set out the next 
day for Plymouth, and finally for this place. Yesterday, I 
was at a meeting at Newton Tracey in the morning ; none 
who attend it are members, — it was a refreshing season, and a 
thankful time for me. In the evening sat with Friends of this 
place ; many strangers came in, and we were refreshed 
together. 

I have lately been anticipating the pleasure of returning to 
my dear wife and all my friends at Carr Wood, intending to 
stop next First day at Birmingham ; but what poor short- 
sighted creatures we are ! I was on the morning watch yester- 
day soon after four o'clock, when the love of God filled my 
heart ; and a public meeting with the inhabitants of this town 



1831.] CHAPTER XI. 175 

presented to my mind. A willingness was wrought imme- 
diately on the opening : the Yearly Meeting in Dublin fol- 
lowed ; and I bowed in humble resignation to what I believe 
to be the Divine will. In obedience to this, I have informed 
the Friends here ; and the Wesleyan meeting house is pro- 
cured for seven o'clock this evening. I feel that I am left 
single handed amongst strangers ; but happily I know that 
there is a Power, which can yet enable me to " run through a 
troop, or leap over a wall ;" in whose blessed will I rest, and 
in whose mercy I trust. 

After the Quarterly Meeting at Exeter, I must press for- 
ward with all speed to Bristol, as there will be barely time 
for me to get to Dublin, if I find a steam-boat starting the 
same day. It is very clear that this is not the place of rest 
for me, but I humbly hope it is a road that leads to it. 

To his Wife. 
Dublin, Fourth Month 25th, 1831. 
My dearest Jane, 

I have now the pleasure of informing thee, that I arrived in 
this city early yesterday morning. I wrote to thee last from 
Barnstaple, then looking forward to a meeting at that place 
the same evening, which proved in the end a truly comforting 
season : such an one as I have seldom witnessed. It was held 
in the Wesleyan meeting house, which was much crowded. 
The people were very quiet and attentive, and I had full 
opportunity to relieve myself among them, and have since been 
favoured to finish my visits to the remaining meetings in 
Devon, and to leave the country in peace ; although humbled 
under a sense of my unworthiness to partake in the least of 
the Lord's mercies, and thus preserved by sea and land, and 
enabled to give the glory and the praise to Him to whom 
all belongs. 

I left for Exeter the next day, and attended the Select 
Meeting the same evening, which to me was a heavy time. 
Here I again met with Samuel and Maria Fox. Next morn- 
ing the Quarterly Meeting began with a meeting for worship, 



176 CHAPTER XI. [1831. 

which was for some time very flat ; but gradually improved, 
and in the end a relieving time was obtained, but not without 
plain dealing. The next appointed meeting was at Spiceland, 
about twenty miles distant, on the following evening ; but it 
did not prove a land of spice for any of us. We had to 
experience the truth of the apostolic declaration, of the sym- 
pathy in the members of the mystical body : " if one member 
be honoured, all the members rejoice with it ;" but our lot was 
to suffer together : — " whether one member suffer, all the 
members suffer with it. 1 ' 

We reached Wellington the same night, and I had the 
pleasure of seeing my beloved companions restored to the bosom 
of their family, to the great delight of all around them. We 
were favoured to separate under feelings not soon to be for- 
gotten, in that love which absence and distance only serve to 
strengthen. I pursued my course to Bristol, lodging at the 
hospitable mansion of Benjamin Thomas, and embarked the 
next day in the Killarney steamer, for Dublin ; a very fine 
vessel, crowded with passengers, but all strangers to me. Our 
progress was impeded b}>" contrary wind, and an old sea swell ; 
so that although the vessel possessed the power by steam of 
220 horses, we were several hours beyond the usual time of 
arrival. The two first inns were full of guests, but the third 
took in the stranger, but could only give him a bed in a double 
bedded room. Thou knowest I often say. — ' any port in a 
storm \ but I believe there was a secret hand in all this. 
The other bed was occupied by a stranger, with whom I had 
some satisfactory conversation before we got to sleep. It was 
renewed at an early hour next morning, and I never remember 
to have seen any person so completely overcome by the force of 
Truth. My feelings were such as led me to conclude, that 
if I had no other service in Ireland, this was enough, and my 
reward was ample for coming. 

The meeting, so far, has been a solemn time : I have not 
had to open my mouth in any of the sittings. The disturbed 
state of this country is certainly appalling. 



1831.] CHAPTER XI. 177 

Liverpool, Fifth Month 3rd, 1831. 
My dear Children, 
Although I have had but rouoh doings on board the Etna 

to to o 

steam-packet all night, yet I do not like the thoughts of 
letting this letter be sent off, without an assurance of dear love 
on my own behalf; at the same time not doubting that your 
dear mother has said all that is needful, in her letter. 

We have had a very solemn Yearly Meeting, which con- 
tinued nearly the whole of last week. The dreadful situation 
of the people in Ireland seems to have created very general 
apprehension in the minds of Friends, and I think very justly : 
in some counties open rebellion is the order of the day, and 
some bare-faced murders have been committed in broad day- 
light. These things, and the altogether appalling signs of 
the times, have combined to bring the minds of many into 
great humility and abasement of self. In addition to these 
outward circumstances, the general call from the ministry has 
been in effect, ' how long will ye see the standard, and hear 
the sound of the trumpet ? How long will you hear, and see, 
and disregard the loving-kindness of the Lord V It was rather 
remarkable, that the strangers present were all from places 
distant from each other ; and yet all uniformly had to raise a 
similar language, and to warn the revolting, backsliding sons 
and daughters in our Society, of a day that is fast hastening 
upon them, that would shake every building not upon the true 
foundation — the eternal Rock of ages, Christ Jesus our Lord. I 
trust the call will sink deep into the minds of many, and bring 
into thoughtfulness, about their own soul's peace, such charac- 
ters as the great Apostle describes, when he says, — " of whom 
I told you often, and now tell you even weeping, that they are 
the enemies of the cross of Christ." 

I understand that poor was last week seized with 

illness, and died the next day : it was quite my intention to 
have paid him a visit, when I reached his neighbourhood ; but 
I shall now be too late. I believe he has been much softened, 
since an illness which he had a few weeks previous to this last 
attack ; and has been heard to lament the manner in which 



] 78 CHAPTER XI. [1831. 

his family have been educated. We have but one instance 
recorded in Scripture of any being accepted at the last hour, 
that none may presume ; but there is one, that none should 
despair. 

Hoping shortly to speak to you all face to face, and to 
recount the mercies, the blessings, and the loving-kindness of 
the Lord to his poor finite creatures ; 1 remain with full assur- 
ance of love, your affectionate father, 

D. W. 



1831.] CHAPTER XII. 179 



CHAPTER XII. 



RETURN TO RUSSIA, 1831 CHOLERA AT PETERSBURG, &C. 

EPISTLE TO FRIENDS OP YORK QUARTERLY MEETING, 1 832 &C. 



To Sarah Smith, Sheffield. 
Sixth Month 28th, 1831, Ship Army, in the Cattegat. 

I think I never witnessed greater variety and 

changes in the weather, than have befallen us since embarking 
on the 22nd. Each revolving day has been fraught with 
changes, again and again reminding us of the uncertainty of 
all things here below : each day has produced a calm, and 
each calm has been followed by boisterous winds. My dear 
wife has suffered greatly from sea sickness ; I think I never 
before saw her so much reduced from this cause. 

It has often been my lot, (and it seems as if the measure 
was not yet filled up,) to witness and to share many painful 
scenes ; I sometimes think that a greater portion of suffering- 
is necessary for me than for others, to hold in check and 
humble a disposition, which is naturally so prone to rebel. It 
is, at any rate, no more than I deserve, after the days without 
number that have been passed in folly and forgetfulness of 
that gracious Being, who hath in unutterable condescension 
and mercy followed me from my youth up, even to the present 
day ; and who, I humbly trust, will never forsake His poor 
unworthy creature : but by renewed trials and baptisms, will 
keep alive the vital spark, until He is graciously pleased to 
say, ' it is enough. 1 If I know myself, I think that I do not 
desire a life of ease ; but I would gladly devote the few remain- 
ing days which may be my portion here, in declaring " the 
mighty acts of the Lord to my benighted fellow-creatures," 
though unequal and unworthy to show forth half His praise. 

N 2 



180 CHAPTER XII. [1831 

[About this period the cholera prevailed with great virulence 
at Petersburg ; the two following letters give some description 
of this awful visitation.] 

To Sarah Backhouse, York. 

Plains of Shoosharry, near Petersburg, 
Eighth Month, S\st, 0. S. 1831. 
Let me acknowledge with reverent thankfulness and 



gratitude, that we are all in the enjoyment of the inestimable 
blessing of health, which nothing earthly can bestow ; a high 
privilege at all times, but how much enhanced, when the earth 
has been opening around us, and swallowing up the people to a 
fearful extent from cholera, in some cases at the short notice 
of from two to three hours. Old and young, strong and weak, 
rich and poor, have fallen ; but such as were in the constant 
habit of drinking spirituous liquors were amongst the first 
victims. Although we have had to stand as with our lives in 
our hands, yet we have been favoured beyond precedent ; as 
out of our establishment, employing this year more than five 
hundred persons, not a single man has been taken off by 
this disease : when it is a well authenticated fact, that in one 
house in the city, (a large one of course, containing several 
families,) forty persons have died. What, indeed, can we 
render to the Most High, for such unmerited mercies showered 
down upon such poor unworthy creatures ; whilst so many 
thousands have been hastily summoned hence by the unde- 
niable herald of the grave ! " Who can utter the mighty acts 
of the Lord I Who can show forth all His praise V Truly in 
vain is the attempt, my soul right well knows, for any of 
us to exalt and magnify His ever great and adorable name, 
without his strengthening aid ; though glowing with renewed 
desires to proclaim to all mankind, if it were possible, his 
matchless and unutterable love. 

From a variety of circumstances which occurred both before 
reaching the Sound, and after leaving it, our suspicions were 
awakened as to the state of things, in regard to the fatal 
disease at the place to which we were bending our course ; 
but the weather threw us out of the track of the homeward- 



1831.] CHAPTER xir. 181 

bound ships, and prevented our getting the least information 
till we entered the Gulf of Finland. From all the accounts we 
received from the vessels then spoken with, there seemed no 
doubt, but that the cholera was raging both at Cronstadt and 
Petersburg ; and the nearer we approached to these places, the 
more alarming the reports became. One night, when off that 
part of the coast nearest to the seat of war, we were quite 
annoyed with the unpleasant state of the air, — although we 
were not in sight of the land, I believe, but the wind blew from 
that direction: it pervaded the whole ship, so that my wife, 
though in bed, discovered it, and thought it arose from some- 
thing on board : the atmosphere seemed filled with tainted air. 
From this time our captain fumigated the ship daily, making 
free use of the chloride of lime, of which he had a plentiful 
supply. 

The long continuance of contrary winds had hitherto tried 
our stock of patience rather severely ; but now the time was at 
hand for a trial of faith, and of our resignation to that holy 
will, which is ever excellent, though it is beyond the reach of 
poor finite man to develope its ever merciful and all gracious 
designs. The captain had been told shortly after we sailed, that 
I had regularly arrived in Russia on one particular day ; and 
he now began to talk of this in rather a sneering manner, say- 
ing, that my calculation had failed, for the ship was a long way 
off her port, and the wind still contrary. I told him we should 
be there soon enough in all probability, merely alluding to the 
sickness. When we had been twenty-two days from Hull, the 
wind changed, and once again blew a fine fresh gale from the 
westward, which, in ordinary cases, would have brightened 
every countenance on board ; but such was the gloomy prospect 
before us, that even this, so often hoped for, had no power 
to charm. The breeze continued through the night, and the 
rising sun increased its strength ; and our noble vessel seemed 
to rush onward with more speed than we desired, except as the 
recollection arose of the three dear children, whom we dared 
new only to look forward with a very trembling hope to 
behold again in mutability. As the day advanced, the wind 
became stronger and stronger, so that by noon we were 



182 CHAPTER XII. [1831. 

favoured to anchor safely off the entrance to the Mole of 
Cronstadt, amidst a crowd of shipping. Is it not worthy of 
something more than ordinary remark, that we should arrive 
on the very same day, on which I had three times before been 
permitted to do so — the 15th of Seventh Month, N. S. ? To 
me, this had a promising and strengthening effect ; it was 
a pleasing coincidence, bringing to remembrance many great 
mercies and favours in times that are past, but now signally 
to be commemorated with admiration, gratitude, and praise to 
Him, who " commandeth the morning, and causeth the day- 
spring to know its place." It was indeed a day of humiliation, 
self-abasement, and bowing down amongst all around us, pro- 
ducing from the hardy captain the appropriate exclamation, 
' there is nothing but the Almighty for it, at any rate r 1 and 
I believe he never spoke more strictly in adherence to truth in 
his life; for what could the possession of the whole world have 
done for us in this day of distress ? The " secret tabernacle 
of the Most High" was the only hiding-place, the only pavilion 
of safety and refuge. I would gladly impart to my dear 
friends, a share of the marvellous loving-kindness and tender 
mercy, which were so graciously displayed for our relief and 
consolation on this memorable day ; but language is utterly 
incapable of conveying it, — words cannot set it forth. I think 
that nothing short of being placed in an exactly similar situa- 
tion, could make it be felt and understood to its full extent. 
However much it may be thought an uncharitable desire, I 
cannot help craving, that all my beloved Friends were brought, 
by any means, under a similar state of feeling ; — not a mole-hill 
to rest upon, humbled in the dust. How softened every heart ! 
— how tearful every eye ! — the Lord alone exalted ! This is 
what I want all to witness for themselves ; that they may indeed 
witness the power of everlasting love, to comfort and strengthen 
their hearts ; and enable them to assert, in similar language 
with the great Apostle of the Gentiles, and from the same 
heart-felt knowledge, " we glory in tribulation." 

I have made a long digression from the subject of our 
arriving at Cronstadt, but my heart warms with the remem- 
brance of the sustaining evidence, with which our minds were 



1831.] CHAPTER XII. 183 

favoured in the midst of the scene of terror that awaited us. 
My poor wife was greatly supported, and only in one instance 
expressed any thing" like discouragement, and that was at the 
thought of my having to expose myself amongst the people on 
shore. But it was not a time for any one to flinch, particu- 
larly when mercifully favoured, as was my happy portion, to 
banish all fear, and not experience a single desire to arise, to 
be any where but where my lot was cast. 

On landing, some difficulties arose from a new law respecting 
passengers 1 luggage : the captain proposed applying to the 
British Consul for advice. I felt averse to this ; but nothing- 
else suggesting, it was attempted. It was soon ascertained that 
no person was admitted into his office ; and that letters, &c, 
Avere received with a pair of tongs, for fear of infection. It 
seemed as if nothing was to be achieved by any contrivance of 
our own ; but the very barrier which at first appeared insur- 
mountable, proved to be the channel through which relief and 
comfort were to flow. This new law occasioned my having to 
go to a particular department of the Custom House, when I 
was accosted by a stranger with a letter in his hand, who asked 
if it was for me. The measure was now filled ; the tide which 
had flowed in such an appalling current, was now at its height, 
and beginning to turn. The letter was in dear William's hand 
writing ; and I had the joy of finding, that my children had 
wholly escaped the ravages of this awful disease ; which was 
considered to be at its height, just about the time of our arrival. 

I hastened on board again with my letter, and will leave 
thee to judge of what followed, and to partake of the joy which 
once more we were permitted to share together, — I hope with 
humble gratitude. I was on shore again until late ; but every 
thing moved tardily, and no wonder, when the judgments of 
the Almighty were at the very doors of most, in so striking a 
manner. In this small town one hundred and fifteen died that 
day. 

After another day unavoidably spent at Cronstadt, we got 
into the steam-boat on the 1 7th of Seventh Month, and 
reached the city about noon. It being First day, it was 
expected that a considerable number of persons would be 



184 CHAPTER XH. [1831. 

waiting the arrival of the steam-boat, as in former similar 
instances, it has sometimes been difficult to get through the 
crowd. But the contrast was so remarkable, that I did not 
suppose we had reached our proper destination, as there were 
only three or four people belonging to the wharf to be seen, 
and not a single carriage standing for hire : scarcely any 
body was to be seen in the streets, and in some the grass 
was growing. We were at length favoured to reach our 
abode, and to find all well, to our mutual rejoicing, — such 
was the abundant and unmerited mercy bestowed upon us. 
William had anticipated our arrival, and thoughtfully got 
the letter conveyed only the day before, which afforded us so 
much relief. If it had not been for the new regulation, it is 
probable the letter would not have found me, as I should not 
have had occasion to go to the Custom House. How admirably 
things are brought about, and a way made, when to finite 

comprehension none could be expected. 

I hope thou art at seasons favoured sensibly to feel the 

presence of the ever blessed Master: do not suffer thyself to be 
discouraged, though He may seem to tarry long; but remember 
that " in due season we shall reap, if we faint not." The path 
of suffering is that which leads to blessedness and glory ; and 
it is only those who are willing to suffer with Christ Jesus, 
who can expect to reign with Him : therefore be not weary 
in well-doing. Let us humbly endeavour to dwell low, and abide 
with Him ; being " buried with Him in baptism ;"" that so we 
may be among the happy number that shall rise with Him to 
life everlasting. I am more and more confirmed in believing, 
that nothing can separate us from His love ; neither naked- 
ness, nor peril, nor sword. Though we may indeed be as 
' ; killed all the day long," and " accounted as sheep for the 
slaughter ;"" yet as we abide in His fear, " watching unto 
prayer," " praying always with all prayer and supplication in 
the Spirit,'''' — the incense will be continually burning : and " in 
all things we are more than conquerors, through Him that 
loved us ;" — to whom be the praise and the glory for ever. 



1831.] CHAPTER XII. 18-3 

To Richard Cockin, Doxcaster. 
Shoosharry Establishment, Ninth Month 22nd, 1831, 0. S. 
In my last letter, I could give few particulars as to 



the number of persons that has fallen victims to this disorder, 
nor will the total number ever be known or made public. I 
have heard through a channel that cannot be doubted, that on 
the day we landed, eight hundred died in Petersburg. The 
published accounts state the total loss throughout the empire, 
at fifty-two thousand ; and, we may be sure, that this is 
a very moderate calculation indeed. Through mercy, this 
calamity seems nearly overpast ; and how should I rejoice if 
it was in my power to say, that the inhabitants have learned 
righteousness, whilst the "judgments of the Lord 1 ' have 
been so signally manifested in the earth. 

It is really astonishing what a degree of ignorance prevails, or 
what cause can have operated to deceive the people ; many of 
whom at this day do not believe that such a complaint has ever 
existed; but suppose the mortality has been occasioned by 
poison administered by persons in the employ of the Poles. 
This delusion has itself caused a waste of human life. It would 
of course help to exasperate the public mind against the Poles ; 
but this was not all, for it caused the lower orders to rise, and 
in their blind zeal, it is said, people were actually destroyed 
on suspicion of being paid agents : the doctors were implicated 
in this suspicion ; and I believe at least one was killed by the 
rabble. The fact is, the doctors were altogether at a loss how 
to treat the disease : all their skill was baffled completely ; and 
as almost every case was fatal to which they were called, 
when this awful visitation first commenced, it was considered 
sufficient proof that they were the authors of the mischief. 
When we arrived, not above five out of every hundred cases 
recovered. Some of these objects of suspicion were seized and 
searched, and compelled to swallow any article found upon them, 
supposed to be poison, in order to ascertain their guilt. We 
heard of one on whom a smelling bottle containing strong French 
salts was found ; the test in this case, it is said, proved fatal. 



186 CHAPTER XII. [1831. 

In another instance, the owner of a set of castors was compelled 
to swallow the contents ; but by taking an emetic, he escaped 
material suffering. The rabble broke into some of the hospitals, 
and speedily liberated the patients : in one instance, they threw 
the doctor out of the window ; he escaped being much hurt, 
and was actually carried up stairs and thrown out a second 
time, and fell a sacrifice to their fury. The confusion was at 
one time so great, that some people are said to have died of 
fear, and many fled from the neighbourhood. Others shut 
themselves up to escape this terrible malady, but in repeated 
instances, those who took the greatest precautions, were the 
first carried off. 

We cannot wonder at every effort being used on the part 
of the government, to endeavour to check the progress of the 
disease ; but these efforts were not always well devised or 
executed. The police very improperly took up every man, 
whom they suspected of having the complaint, and carried him 
off to an hospital ; where, in spite of all he could say, he was 
immediately treated as a patient, and many such, perhaps from 
afterwards taking the complaint, never came out again alive. 
This treatment exasperated the people to such a degree, that 
they broke through all bounds, as they thought, in self-defence. 
One of our men was taken up, charged with having the 
disease ; in vain he declared that he was in perfect health,. — 
nothing would serve but his going to the hospital, where he 
was forthwith treated as a patient ; but was released from his 
perilous situation by the multitude getting possession of the 
hospital, when he ava'led himself of the opportunity of escape, 
and returned to his work. With a view to prevent the 
contagion from spreading, the dead were hastily put into 
coffins, and it is very possible, that some were coffined before 
they were actually deceased, — of course unintentionally. How- 
ever, some coffins were detected with living bodies in them ; so 
that altogether the scene of confusion scarcely ever had its 
parallel. 

Shortly after we arrived at Cronstadt, my attention was 
directed to a large open lighter, full of men and horses, crowded 



1831.] CHAPTER XII. 187 

in all positions. These people were in the act of flying from 
the infection, hoping to reach the other side of the Gulf, and 
get off to the villages up the country. I think I never before 
saw such a closely stowed cargo of men and beasts, in all the 
course of my pilgrimage. 

At one of the military colonies a dreadful affray took place, 
arising from a similar cause, in which the soldiers suspected 
their own officers : it is impossible to say how many, but it is 
reported, that a considerable number of officers were killed, and 
some of them with unheard-of cruelty. It really seemed as if 
the most trifling cause was enough to " turn every man's hand 
against his fellow." I mentioned in a former letter, that no 
part of our establishment had lost a single man ; but we 
afterwards lost a poor woman, who had been in the city, and 
fell ill the next day. Every thing in our power was done 
for her, but all was in vain. Two women were employed to 
attend on her ; but it was quite needful to look well after 
them : as an instance, the poor creature had had a warm 
bath, and in getting her out, her nurses perceived that her 
countenance was distorted, which so alarmed them, that they 
let her fall upon the floor, and ran away from her ; so that 
it was absolutely necessary to compel them to return, and stay 
with her. Now, what must have been the neglected situation 
of thousands of these poor people, when it was with great 
difficulty that we could procure tolerable assistance for even one. 

The past has been a memorable year indeed ; I seemed to 
partake pretty largely of changes, whilst hovering about my 
native land; and yet how much was to be passed through to 
complete a year, from the date of our leaving this country 
to its next anniversary. 

I have brought back with me impressions, to which 

my mind continually reverts, when looking at the past ; 
impressions strongly engraven on my heart by the love, 
unity, and, may I not say, godly sincerity, and kindness, of 
many of my friends in England and Ireland. Although 
deprived of all these as to the outward, the remembrance 
of them remains sweet and precious, and I trust will 
lastingly endure with freshness and fragrance, and brighten 



188 chapter xn. [1832. 

the days, that I may yet have to sojourn in Mesech, and dwell 
in the tents of Kedar. 



To Friends of York Quarterly Meeting. 

Near Petersburg, First Month 2bth, 1832. 

Under a renewed sense of the Lord's manifold and tender 
mercies, which, to His praise and to His glory be it spoken, 
have compassed us about " as with a shield,'"' since we last 
saw each other ; my soul feels bound thus to recognize the 
good hand that has led us, and to salute my dear brethren 
and sisters, in a feeling of that love which cannot change : 
earnestly desiring that " grace, mercy, and peace, from God 
the Father, and our Lord Jesus Christ, may be multiplied to 
them ;" causing the hearts of the faithful to rejoice, — and joy, 
gladness, and thanksgiving to abound amongst them. 

Although far separated from each other as to the outward, 
yet such is the glorious privilege of the least living member of 
the true church universal, that nothing can separate, or pre- 
vent us from standing fast in the one Holy Spirit, striving 
together in one mind, for the faith of the gospel ; — " till we all 
come in the unity of the faith, and of the knowledge of the Son 
of God, unto a perfect man, unto the measure of the stature of 
the fulness of Christ .'' , For assuredly, my beloved Friends, a day 
of trial is approaching, yea, hastening upon the nations, when 
nothing short of an individual heartfelt knowledge of Him, in 
whom we profess to believe, will stand unshaken by the storm. 

Great is the solicitude I feel on behalf of our highly favoured 
religious Society, that it may be preserved immovable upon 
this its ancient and sure foundation, Jesus Christ — " Christ 
in you the hope of glory ;" which never did, and never will, 
fail those, who in simplicity believe, and faithfully build 
thereon, nothing doubting. By diligently maintaining the 
watch in that holy light, bestowed in redeeming love on 
every individual of the human race, the snares of the insidious 
adversary, although laid in the most insinuating manner, will 
be detected and broken ; the specious guise of a false religion 
itself will be penetrated. This has assuredly slain its thou- 
sands, who dazzled and distracted by creaturely activity and 



1832.] CHAPTER XII. 189 

excitement, have thus been corrupted from the simplicity that 
is in Christ. " Watch ye therefore, and pray always ; that 
ye may be accounted worthy to escape all these things that 
shall come to pass, and to stand before the Son of man."" 
Blessed and holy injunction, — never out of season, — never more 
needed ! 

We may feel lamentably conscious of unworthiness, weak- 
ness, and incapacity from our manifold backslidings, to come 
up " to the help of the Lord against the mighty," or to unveil 
the subtle workings of the mystery of iniquity to the sight of 
others . These feelings are painful ; and how great is the need, 
of circumspection under them, lest, in the impatience of our 
spirits, heightened as this too often is, by the ill-advised 
example and counsel of those about us, we should attempt to 
stay the ark with unsanctified and unauthorized hands ; or 
lest we should countenance to our own condemnation willings 
and runnings, on the part of those with whom we may stand 
connected, which, however specious in themselves, nevertheless 
contribute most essentially and insidiously to promote the 
kingdom of anti-christ, already alas ! extensive in the earth. 

Frequently am I brought under appalling apprehensions 
for us, as a people, sought out and chosen of the Lord : for 
had we followed the footsteps of our honourable predecessors in 
religious profession, who bore the burden and heat of a day of 
deep suffering, in the faithful support, in their original bright- 
ness, of those principles, which they transmitted to us, — the 
spiritual beauty of the gospel church might have shone 
forth even through us, with a splendour which the different 
professors of the Christian name, could neither have gain- 
sayed nor resisted. And it is awfully impressed upon my 
mind, I might almost say, it is given me awfully to believe, 
that if the " world, and the things of the world,"" which " are 
not of the Father," had not stolen away our hearts from His 
love, the glad tidings of that gospel, which is indeed " the 
power of God unto salvation," would, long ere this, have been 
proclaimed in remote, in heathen portions of the habitable 
globe, by instruments raised up from amongst us, duly prepared 
and clothed with the true baptizing authority of the Lord 



190 CHAPTER XII. [1832. 

Jesus ; whose " inheritance is the heathen, and the uttermost 
parts of the earth his possession." He alone can endue His 
messengers with " power from on high," in His name to open 
the eyes of the spiritually blind, to turn them from darkness 
to light, and from the power of Satan unto God. Mark, then, 
the awful consequences of our short-comings as a people ; and 
let us tremble, lest God should visit our iniquity upon us ; and 
the awful language should be sounded in our ears : — " The 
kingdom of God shall be taken from you, and given to a 
nation or people bringing forth the fruits thereof. 11 " Watch ye, 
therefore, 11 and remember, " and pray always ;" for " the time 
is come that judgment must begin at the house of God ;" 
what then " shall the end be of them that obey not the gospel 
of God V 

" Fear, and the pit, and the snare are upon thee, O ! inha- 
bitant of the earth !" from which nothing but a Saviour's all- 
powerful arm, can extricate and deliver. All are involved in 
the momentous consequences ; yet it is an individual work, 
and admits of no delay. Then, dear Friends of every age and 
of every class, let us hasten to it in earnest : let us " humble 
ourselves under the mighty hand of God," even to the state of 
little children ; and turn inward to his pure unflattering witness, 
which cannot deceive, or be deceived. Let us accomplish a 
diligent search, and patiently examine how far those indis- 
pensable conditions are submitted to on our part, without which 
none can follow the blessed Jesus. Where is that self-denial 
and the daily cross He enjoins ? Are we denying ourselves 
those gratifications of time and sense, which nourish sin, 
and keep alive in us the evil propensities of fallen nature ? 
Have we taken up that daily cross, and offered all to Him, 
" who died for us and rose again V It is not giving up this 
or that particular thing that will suffice : a full surrender of the 
will must be made to Him, " whose right it is to reign." Let 
none plead for disobedience in what they may think little 
things, on the ground of their being so. If such they really 
are, they are the more easily parted with ; and our tenacity in 
wishing to reserve them, assuredly indicates that they are of 
more importance in our practical estimation than we may be 



1832.] CHAPTER XII. 391 

disposed to allow. Let no man deceive himself ; — unqualified 
obedience is the necessary condition of discipleship. Without 
it we cannot be consistent followers of our Lord ; and if not 
followers of Him, we cannot serve Him, be where He is, nor 
learn of Him that meekness and lowliness of heart, which 
draw down heavenly blessings and regard, and which he alone 
can bestow. 

As the sorrowful declension which has so marred the beauty 
of our religious Society, may be traced to departing from 
this heavenly indwelling principle of light, life, and love ; 
so our restoration to primitive purity can only be effected by 
returning unto the Lord with full purpose of heart, in the 
depths of humility and self-abasement : — yea, my Friends, 
nothing less than this will do. We must deny ourselves, take 
up our daily cross, and follow Him, who is " holy, harmless, 
undefiled, separate from sinners, and made higher than the 
heavens ;-" — ever mighty to save, and to deliver ; and who will 
deliver out of every distress the soul that in sincerity seeketh 
Him. 

Come brother — come sister — come all my dear Friends ; let 
no earthly consideration whatever be suffered to hinder this 
important work : for " the night is far spent, the day is at 
hand; let us therefore cast off the works of darkness, and let us 
put on the armour of light ;" that we may no longer bring forth 
fruit, whereof we are ashamed, — for the end of those things is 
death ; but that we may " be strong in the Lord, and in the 
power of His might, to stand against the wiles of the devil. 
" For we wrestle not against flesh and blood, but against prin- 
cipalities, against powers, against the rulers of the darkness 
of this world, against spiritual wickedness in high places." Let 
us " pray always, with all prayer and supplication in the Spirit, 
watching thereunto, with all perseverance ;"" striving together 
in one mind for the faith of the gospel, even for that faith which 
worketh by love, purifieth the heart, and giveth victory over 
the world. Thus shall we indeed be found with " our loins 
girded about, and our lights burning, we ourselves like unto men 
who wait for their lord, that when he cometh and knocketh, they 
may open unto him immediately;'" even unto Him who said — 



192 CHAPTER XII. [1832. 

" Behold I stand at the door and knock, if any man hear my 
voice, and open the door, I will come in to him, and will sup 
with him, and he with me." Then " lift up your heads, O 
ye gates ! even lift them up ye everlasting doors ! and the 
King of glory shall come in. Who is this King of glory ? 
The Lord of hosts, He is the King of glory.''' 

In the love of the gospel, I remain your affectionate friend 
and brother, 

Daniel Wheeler. 

To John Hipsley, Hull. 

Second Month 3rd, 1832. 
I sincerely hope that fruit will result from the labours 



of the Committees [of Yearly Meeting] in different parts of 
the country : it is high time for the Society to be roused, and 
awakened to a sense of its deplorable state, which appears to 
me, in too many instances, to be quite affecting and mournful. 

I have lately written a letter and forwarded it to Sheffield, 
for the examination of the Friends of Balby Monthly Meeting, 
addressed to Friends of York Quarterly Meeting. I began it 
with the expectation of writing to Balby Monthly Meeting ; but 
I found it must have a more general circulation than the Monthly 
Meeting could give it. If it should be approved and accepted, 
it cannot be too widely spread ; and with its present address it 
may probably be sent to the different Monthly Meetings, and 
from thence to the Preparative meetings, which would be a 
great relief to me. But whichever way it may terminate, I 
must rejoice ; for if accepted, a great weight will be removed 
from my shoulders ; and if thought objectionable, I shall still 
rejoice in having endeavoured to discharge my duty ; which 
will enable me to bear the disappointment with patience and 
submission. 

To Elizabeth Backhouse, York. 

Third Month 29th, 1832. 
Although a very poor creature myself, and often 



bowed down under a weight of exercise, yet I am at times 
comforted to feel great love in my heart for my dear friends in 



1832.] CHAPTER xn. 193 

England ; greatly desiring that the present awful aspect of 
things may be an effectual means of driving every individual of 
us home to the precious principle of Truth, so mercifully im- 
planted in every heart. The importance of this, as regards our 
own highly favoured Society as well as mankind in general, is 
more and more stamped upon my mind ; believing that a great 
weight of responsibility will rest upon us, if instead of letting 
our light so shine, that others may see and glorify our heavenly 
Father, we should unhappily be found darkening by our conduct 
and conversation the path which leads to the kingdom ; and 
thereby causing others to stumble and turn aside. Inde- 
pendently of this consideration, how great is the loss we are 
sustaining, in contenting ourselves with merely hearing of the 
inestimable treasure, instead of possessing the thing itself ; 
which at seasons would fill our hearts with love, and peace, and 
joy unspeakable. 

I cannot help mourning over some who are seriously dis- 
posed, and desirous of doing what is right ; and yet suffer their 
minds to be led astray with a continued round of publications, 
containing accounts of the experience of others, — things perhaps 
valuable in themselves, but still only tending to keep the mind 
afloat on the surface ; feeding upon visibles which can never 
nourish the vital part, which remains still unsatisfied and 
hungering : and all for want of sinking down to the living and 
eternal substance ; which if once tasted, nothing short of the 
same soul-sustaining food could ever satisfy again. 

Now this is what I want all my beloved friends to enjoy, 
and to give up all to purchase ; to offer up all in measure, upon 
the same cross to the natural will and inclination, as that on 
which the meek and lowly Saviour of the world was crucified ; 
and I verily believe, that this must be the heartfelt expe- 
rience of us all, before we can witness the fellowship of His 
sufferings, and know Him, and the power of His resurrection, 
being made conformable to his death. It is those only, 
who are buried with Him in baptism, that will rise with 
Him ; it is only those, who are willing to suffer in this life 
with Him, who will reign with Him in life everlasting. There 
are none who can enter into this truly interesting employment, 

o 



194 CHAPTER XII. [1832. 

of engaging in the blessed and heavenly warfare, with the same 
advantages as those in early life ; because the minds of such 
are undoubtedly much less charged and encumbered with the 
surfeiting cares and perplexities of this transitory and perishing 
world. To these, therefore, I would particularly address myself, 
with an earnest recommendation in tender solicitude, that they 
would look at the great and holy pattern ; who, though the Son 
of the Highest, " made himself of no reputation, and took 
upon Him the form of a servant, and was made in the likeness 
of men : and being found in fashion as a man, he humbled 
himself, and became obedient unto death, even the death of the 
cross. Wherefore God also hath highly exalted him, and 
given him a name which is above every name ; that at the 
name of Jesus every knee should bow." And greatly do I 
desire, that we may all be amongst the number of those that 
believe in his power ; that so our hearts may be softened into the 
same child-like obedience, even to the death of every thing in us, 
that stands opposed to the Divine will. Then, indeed, with the 
heart shall we believe unto righteousness, and with the tongue 
confession will, unavoidably and involuntarily, be made unto 
salvation, even " that Jesus Christ is Lord, to the glory of 
God the Father." 

I hope that all your fears and anxieties are hushed 

at present, and changed into gratitude and thankfulness to 
Him, who hath thus far conducted the steps of your brother 
in safety, and borne up his head upon the mighty ocean ; 
enabling him to put full trust and confidence, in the Almighty 
and compassionate arm of never-failing strength, as an infant 
slumbereth on the bosom of its mother. He is often present 
in my thoughts, and my heart often follows him in love 
and sympathy across the trackless deep ; but thus far no 
feeling of discouragement as to his safety has dared to show 
itself. I do greatly desire that the work in which he is 
engaged may abundantly prosper, to the promotion of the 
Divine glory, the welfare of our fellow-men, and his own 
peace and comfort, — the blessed and sure rewards which crown 
the faithful labourer. For " he that reapeth receiveth wages, 
and gathereth fruit unto life eternal ; that he that soweth and 



1832.] CHAPTER XII. 195 

he that reapeth, may rejoice together." May that Almighty 
power, in whose presence is life, continue to surround him by 
night and by day, and strengthen him to proclaim the day of 
the Lord, even amongst those who are strangers to His ever 
great and excellent name ; that glory to the righteous Lord 
may resound from far, and the voice of thanksgiving and praise 
be heard on high. 



196 CHAPTER XIII. [1832. 



CHAPTER XIII. 

PROSPECT OF DISTANT RELIGIOUS SERVICE RESIGNS HIS APPOINT- 
MENT IN RUSSIA LEAVES HIS FAMILY, AND SAILS FOR ENGLAND, 

1832 HIS PROSPECT OF VISITING IN GOSPEL LOVE THE INHA- 
BITANTS OF SOME OF THE SOUTH SEA ISLANDS, ETC., LAID BEFORE 
HIS FRIENDS. 

[About this time, under a prospect of distant religious ser- 
vice, our dear father believed it right to resign his appointment 
under the Eussian government, and to repair to his native 
country. The commencement and progress of this move- 
ment, are alluded to in the following extracts from his letters.} 



To John Hipslev, Hull. 

Seventh Month 5th, 1832, 0. 8. 

■ I hinted to thee some time back, the probability of 

a change being about to take place, as to our prospects in this 
country ; which is now so far developed, as to enable me to 
inform thee, with some little certainty, how things are going on, 

For many months past, it has clearly appeared to be my 
duty to relinquish my engagements in this land ; and as way 
has from time to time opened, I have gradually moved forward 
under this apprehension ; and have been mercifully, peacefully, 
and abundantly confirmed in this step, by the difficulties, 
which at first appeared too mountainous to be overcome, having 
shrunk into insignificant mole-hills, as the time approached to 
encounter them. Now every obstacle seems to be removed : I 
have, I think, proceeded throughout, as things were opened 
before me, consulting with my beloved family, as each suc- 
ceeding step has been taken ; and in every instance, what has 
been proposed to them, has found a place in their minds, and 
been assented to. To break up all at once an establishment so 
extensive as that in which I have been engaged, would be 
attended with serious loss and inconvenience ; and when the 
unbounded confidence which has been reposed in us is taken 



1832. J chapter xni. 197 

into view, extra care and caution seem the more needful, that 
there should be no unhandsome conduct to complain of ; and 
I trust that I have always been anxious to avoid every thing, 
in the smallest degree calculated to cast a shade upon our 
religious Society, the principles of which, I have good reason 
for believing, are held in considerable estimation at this day 
by many high in office, as well as by others who have had 
more frequent intercourse with us. After stating undis- 
guisedly my true motive for wishing to retire, it was proposed 
that my eldest son should succeed me as head of this concern ; 
and that in all respects, every thing else should remain on its 
original footing. 

Although this outline seems to occupy but a small space on 
paper, it has, from first to last, taken about seven months to 
bring all the particulars to bear ; but the Ukaze [or imperial 
edict] is now actually signed. 

I have frequently mentioned having arrived on the same 
day, when coming here from England, viz. the 3rd of Seventh 
Month, O. S. ; and now it has come to pass, Avithout the 
possibility of any contrivance, that on that very same day I 
am liberated from Russia. I have already had a parting and 
affecting interview with Prince Galitzin : he particularly stipu- 
lated that I should write to him, saying, ' What is good for 
your soul, is good for mine." 1 I feel thankful in being able to 
say, that there is no perceptible alteration in him, after an 
acquaintance of fifteen years. He has ordered a certificate to 
be prepared for me in English, for the satisfaction of my 
friends, which he will sign on behalf of the Emperor. 

But although things seem to have been so far set in order, 
as to enable me to leave this country in a comfortable manner ; 
yet the trial of faith, and patience, and of every affectionate 
feeling has still to be passed through, as regards my dear wife 
and family here : for though the way is clearly seen and opened 
for my going to England, yet I have not the slightest prospect 
of any settled residence there ; but from the impressions which 
have been sealed upon my mind, by day and night for many 
months past, very different scenes are open before me. As 
I have from the first, made my wife acquainted with the 



198 CHAPTER XIII. [1832. 

uncertainty to which I am looking forward, she feels best 
satisfied to remain, for the present at least, in this country. 

I have sometimes thought, as so great a willingness has been 
wrought in my mind to part with every earthly thing, that 
perhaps, when all was settled as to outward affairs, it might 
be only as a preparation for quitting this scene of conflict alto- 
gether : but I have been enabled to look forward to this result, 
with the same calmness and resignation, should it be the will 
of Him who hath done so great things for me, and shown me 
the path of life ; whose excellency is over Israel, and who 
giveth strength and power to His people, to praise and " glorify" 
Him, even " in the fires." 

[Soon after the date of the foregoing, he took leave of his 
family, and set sail for England : — the following letter is 
written when on the point of quitting the port of Cronstadt.] 

To his Wipe. 
Cronstadt Mole, Seventh Month 20th, 1832, 0. S. 
My Dearest Jane, 

As the captain talks of getting out of the Mole in a short 
time, I think it is advisable to scribble a few lines before the 
scuffle begins, lest I should then be prevented. 

I cannot, of course, have much to communicate as to fresh 
events, the time is so short since thou and the rest of my dear 
family have been removed from my sight : I have, however, 
abundant cause to magnify that never-failing arm of power, 
which has so marvellously supported us through a dispensation, 
not of an every day sort ; and which still continues to preserve 
in that lowly quiet of mind, which subjects the will of the 
creature to that of the Almighty Creator, — even to the binding 
of the sacrifice as to the horns of the altar, without reserving 
any thing which might, like the " bleating of the sheep, and 
the lowing of the oxen,"' 1 tend to self-condemnation, or open a 
door for reproach and accusation, wherein the enemy could exult 
or rejoice. 

I hope we shall have rather more settlement when we get 
to sea, as the captain is now much harassed in concluding his 



1832.] CHAPTER XIII. 199 

arrangements with the Custom-house, &c. Last evening, both 
he and the mate stayed with us, whilst I read a psalm or two ; 
but it seemed as if they could scarcely be still during the reading, 
and it was almost an impossibility afterwards. This morning 
we have had it to ourselves in a comfortable manner, as both 
captain and mate have been closely engaged. I find my 
fellow-passenger a very agreeable companion. 

I regretted to find thou hadst been writing so late the night 
I left home ; although it was very consoling to me to receive 
thy note, which I did not read till this morning, as I was not 
aware the packet contained any thing for me. It has been 
indeed a trying circumstance for a long time past to me, when- 
ever I have looked forward to taking my departure from thee, 
although I have endeavoured to keep it wholly to myself; but 
I am comforted in a belief that has been graciously begotten 
for some time past in my heart, that no less reward will await 
thee and our dear children, in thus fully resigning me up in 
meek submission to the Divine will, than will be my portion, 
who have to leave you all, if found faithful to the farther 
unfoldings of it. A fresh evidence of this has been sealed 
upon my mind this morning, in an encouraging manner ; and 
I do greatly desire that we may all, by keeping close to our 
heavenly Teacher in humble watchfulness, be favoured to 
witness that peace, which " the God of peace, that brought 
again from the dead our Lord Jesus, that great Shepherd of 
the sheep,' 1 alone can bestow. 

I am thine, very affectionately, 

D. W. 

To the Same. 
Seventh Month 29th, in sight of Gothland. 
My Dearest Jane, 

We have now been out of Cronstadt nine days, and 

with the exception of one day, it has been so far, I think, the 
finest passage I ever experienced, either of late or in former years. 
Almost every day there has been a fair wind, but gentle ; and 
when against us, so light as scarcely to raise a desire for it to be 
otherwise. I have spent much of my time on deck, both by 



200 CHAPTER XIII. [1832. 

day and by night, and am thankful in being able to say, that I 
can look back with renewed satisfaction and comfort, at having 
thus far proceeded in an apprehended line of duty : although at 
times I feel as the lonely sparrow on the house top, or as the 
rambling swallow without a home, and still only preparing to 
take flight for distant climes, whilst pressing onward farther 
and farther, from all that I hold dear in this transitory 
world. 

We have been thus far enabled to keep up our readings twice 
a-day in the cabin, although at times a little unsettled ; the 
captain and mate mostly remain with us. On First day, I 
furnished each sailor with a tract ; either Thoughts by the sea 
side, or The Lighthouse, with which they all seemed pleased ; 
and the captain requested to have one of each for himself. 

Two or three days after leaving Oronstadt, I began to 
suspect, from some remarks which I had made about the ship, 
that she was not quite so tight as had been represented. She 
had been pumped that morning in a superficial manner ; but 
after a few hours I took an opportunity of sounding the well 
myself, when no one was near, and found there were twenty-two 
inches of water in it. I then told the captain, when she had 
been pumped, and what water was in her, — to his great surprise 
and mortification. This circumstance made no small stir, and 
every possible exertion was made to discover the cause, as it 
was no light matter. The ship's company, who sleep under 
the forecastle, declared that when she plunged into the sea, 
they could hear the water rush into her : this led to further 
investigation, and the carpenter cut his way down into the 
cargo so low, that no doubt remained but this was the case. 
Yesterday being fine, with little wind and a smooth sea, the 
carpenter went overboard on a stage, and actually found the 
leak under the surface of the water ; but not deeper than he 
could get at, by sitting up to the waist in the water, except 
when she plunged him now and then up to the shoulders. 
It is a great favour this was discovered before a large quan- 
tity of water had collected in her, and the cargo damaged, if 
nothing worse. I intend, if permitted, to keep a sharp look 
out upon it still. 



1832.] CHAPTER xnt. 201 

To Sarah Smith, Sheffield. 

Ninth Month 3rd, 1832. 
Through that loving-kindness which is better than life, I am 
once more permitted to announce myself upon British ground, 
favoured with the rich blessing of health. 

It is six weeks this night, since I left my beloved wife at 
Shoosharry, and, accompanied by my children, went down to 
Cronstadt to embark for Hull. My dear wife was as well as 
usual ; but remained at home, as her going to Cronstadt would 
have been beyond her strength, particularly at a moment when 
every feeling was stretched as far as human nature could well bear; 
it would have been adding anguish to the cup of affliction and 
distress about to be handed. " Hath God forgotten to be gra- 
cious V nay verily, my dear friend ; His mercies, unbounded as 
his love, enabled us to drink it with all its dregs, bitter indeed 
to flesh and blood : but if He hath blessed it, it will — it shall 
be blessed. I am very thankful in being able to tell thee, that 
my beloved wife was supported throughout the whole conflict 
in a marvellous manner ; and she evinced to her dear family a 
calmness, resignation, and fortitude, not often equalled in like 
painful circumstances, and but seldom surpassed ; giving me 
up without a murmur, though without a glimpse of when we 
shall meet again. Surely the incense is still burning, and I 
humbly trust the sacrifice will be accepted by Him, who more 
than thirty-two years ago brought us together ; and who now in 
the excellency of His will, is pleased to separate us again from 
each other ; and who alone can sanctify to us and our dear 
children, this and every other trial yet in store for us, to His 
own praise and glory. 

I purpose returning to Doncaster in a day or two, where I 
think I shall be more secluded than at Sheffield, and out of the 
reach of numberless kindly intended inquiries, which are at 
present likely to remain unsatisfied ; besides, my present 
situation renders me only fit company for owls and pelicans, 
and other inhabitants of the wilderness, to which the desert 
place is most congenial, — feeling as one born out of due time, 
and as an alien even in my father's house. 

D. W. 



202 CHAPTER XIII. [1832. 

P. S. — What a favour it is, that my dear wife and family 
are strengthened, not only to rise above every disposition to 
repine, but rather to rejoice in that we are accounted worthy 
to suffer for the great name's sake, — in the promotion of the 
cause of truth and righteousness in the earth, according to the 
measure allotted us. 

To his Wife. 

Sheffield, Ninth Month 5th, 1832. 
My Dearest Jane, 

The meetings in this town on First day were both 

heavy laborious seasons ; but a public meeting held the follow- 
ing evening, was an open favoured time. Being again per- 
mitted to sit in the meeting house at Sheffield with many of 
our old friends, was a circumstance which had never formed a 
part of my finite calculations, when I left this neighbourhood 
last year ; and more particularly in so short a time as has 
elapsed: it seemed for a season something like a dream. I 
had no share in the labour of the public meeting (appointed by 
Elizabeth Robson,) but the will of the creature was I think 
prostrated before its Almighty Creator : and being emptied of 
self, I was mercifully enabled to prefer a feeble petition on 
behalf of thee and the dear children, under a sensible evidence 
of near access being vouchsafed to the throne of grace, in silent 
breathings for your preservation and welfare. 

Ninth Month 22nd, 1832. 
I informed the Select Meeting held at Doncaster on the 
12th (nineteen persons being present,) of the object which has 
brought me to England. I had also to bear a short testimony 
to the worth of dear William Smith, who it appeared had 
been appointed a representative for the last Quarterly Meeting ; 
but was prevented attending it by the sickness which preceded 
his death. His loss has been greatly lamented by people of 
various denominations, and I think it may be safely said, he 
was one in whom there was no guile. His end was truly con- 
soling ; although scarcely able to move hand or foot from 
extreme debility, his mouth was filled with praises to the 



1832.] CHAPTER XIII. 203 

Lord ; so that the physician who was present, was quite struck 
with the scene. He was interred, T think, about six hours 
afterwards, — almost immediate burial being insisted on in cases 
of cholera. 

Next day, the Monthly. Meeting was held ; at the close of 
which, members were requested to keep their seats. Ann 
Fairbank returned a certificate which had been granted her 
to visit the meetings in and about London. When this was 
finished, I was strengthened to spread before Friends, the 
prospect which had been presented to the view of my mind, 
of visiting in the love of the gospel the inhabitants of some of 
the islands of the Pacific Ocean, New South Wales, and Van 
Diemen's Land. I stood up with the words, " the cup which 
my Father hath given me, shall I not drink it ;" — and even- 
tually laid the whole affair fully before the meeting. A very 
solid and solemn interval succeeded. I warned the meeting 
not to let affectionate sympathy bias their minds, and recom- 
mended that all should endeavour to sink down to the precious 
gift in every heart, that so a right judgment might be come to; 
seeing it was a subject in which much was implicated, not only 
as regarded myself and the Society at large, but the Truth 
itself. At length, a general expression of concurrence and near 
sympathy broke forth, from the head to the uttermost skirts 
of the garment, as the ointment poured forth, which draws 
•down the heavenly blessing. Many vocal petitions ascended 
on the occasion, as well I believe as universal mental ones. 
It was, indeed, a memorable day, and one in which I most 
earnestly desire you may all be permitted to share, though far 
distant, through the influence of that Almighty power, which 
is omnipotent and omnipresent. A committee was appointed 
to prepare a certificate for me. 

I do not know how I may fare in our Quarterly Meeting, 
but I feel resigned as to the result. I have enjoyed feelings, 
which are quite undeclarable, since my concern has been 
brought forward ; and greatly do I desire, that all my dear 
family may come to the same blessed experience, — which will 
most assuredly be their happy portion, if they are but willing 
to resign all into the hands of the dear Redeemer, and not be 



204 CHAPTER XIII. [1832. 

ashamed of- acknowledging Him before men, although they may 
be accounted fools by the worldly wise. But I am thoroughly 
persuaded, that nothing short of the whole heart, without the 
smallest reservation, must be offered, however great the cross 
to the natural will ; for it is in little things that the 
enemy keeps the soul in bondage, which answer his purpose 
as well as greater matters, which would be too glaring to be 
submitted to. For the Lord of life and glory will not dwell 
in the same temple with idols, however insignificant such 
may be in our estimation ; the day of the Lord " will not 
come, except there come a falling away first " from these little 
things, or a turning from them ; " and that man of sin be 
revealed, the son of perdition :" for " he who now letteth will 
let, until he be taken out of the way ; and then shall that 
wicked be revealed, whom the Lord shall consume with the 
spirit of his mouth, and shall destroy with the brightness of 
His coming.' 1 The heart thus cleansed, will become the secret 
place, or the holy place of the tabernacle of the Most High ; 
through which the crystal river flows, and in which nothing 
but unmixed sacrifice is accepted : the least impurity in our 
affections will be beheld in its transparent stream. 

I am obliged by the kind messages from and ; 

and feel greatly desirous that they may all be favoured to see 
beyond the shadows of things, to the living and eternal sub- 
stance, which is durable as the days of heaven ; that they may 
indeed be able to say, from living and heartfelt experience, 
" We know that the Son of God is come, and hath given us 
an understanding, that we may know Him that is true ; and 
we are in Him that is true, even in His Son Jesus Christ. 
This is the true God, and eternal life." " He that believeth 
on the Son of God hath the witness in himself :" — yea, " he that 
hath the Son hath life ; and he that hath not the Son of God 
hath not life." 

York, Ninth Month 28th, 1832. 
My dear Children, 

On Fourth day, the 26th, the Quarterly Meeting 



was held. After a solemn meeting for worship, it was pro- 



1832.] chapter xm. 205 

posed that the women Friends should keep their seats. After 
the clerk had opened the meeting with the usual minute, and 
called over the names of the representatives from each Monthly 
Meeting, this large assembly again dropped into silence, which 
remained uninterrupted, until broken by myself nearly in the 
following words : — ' No wonder if a trembling mortal feels 
appalled at approaching conflict, when the dear Son of God 
himself exclaimed, " Father save me from this hour :""■ — for 
although we may at times feel a willingness to go with our 
Lord and Master, as unto prison and unto death ; yet such is 
the frailty and weakness of human nature, that when the 
trying hour cometh, we are ready to deny Him. But we 
have a great and glorious High Priest, whose most precious 
attribute is mercy ; who will not break the bruised reed, nor 
suffer it to be broken ; who is touched with a feeling — a compas- 
sionate sense of our infirmities, — is mighty to save and to deliver, 
and who will deliver out of every distress, all those that put 
their trust and confidence in Him. -> And thus, eventually, 
was laid the whole weight of the concern upon the shoulders 
of the Quarterly Meeting. As I thought you would like to 
have minute particulars, I have endeavoured to remember 
what passed, and I think the above is almost verbatim. 

The meeting now began to feel the weight of the responsibility 
cast upon it, and again settled down in great solemnity. A 
considerable number of Friends expressed their unity and con- 
currence ; and my dear wife and family had a full share in the 
prayers and sympathy of their friends, to my great rejoicing 
and thankfulness. After a full hour occupied in this manner, 
it was concluded that a committee should be appointed to 
express the sense of the meeting, in an endorsement of my 
certificate. 

[The same letter contains the following account of a remark- 
able communication made in the Yearly Meeting of 1832.] 

Thinking the substance of a testimony borne in the 

Yearly Meeting this year, will interest you, I shall transcribe 
it, as follows : 



206 CHAPTER XIII. [1832. 

In a striking and awful manner adverted to the 

permitted visitation of the pestilence in this country ; and after- 
wards she had a very close and powerful testimony to the meeting, 
on the present state of our religious Society, by way of solemn 
warning of the approaching judgments of the Lord upon us for 
the neglect of those things, which in a peculiar manner, were 
given us to bear in the early times of our Society, when Friends 
were called out from the world to be a separate people. Her 
concern was, that we should return to first principles ; but her 
more especial warning was, that if there were not a coming 
down from the heights to which many have climbed, there were 
those amongst us who might be compared to the golden vessels 
of the temple, such as had really stood the fire, and had not 
only been rightly filled, but employed of the Lord to communi- 
cate to the people, who would be permitted to be carried away 
captives to Babylon. That there was and is amongst us, a 
Babel now building, whose top is intended to reach unto 
heaven, which must and will come down ; that there is, 
(though not clearly seen by ourselves,) a peeling and scattering 
amongst us, which is clearly shown in the vision and light of 
the Lord ; — and that if we did not repent and return, we 
should be left very few in number. But that the Lord would 
not leave himself without a people, &c. She spoke farther in 
reference to some, who had been rightly gifted to speak the 
word of the Lord as from the mouth of the Lord ; but who for 
want of dwelling low and deep enough, had had their brightness 
dimmed, — adding, '.' when Ephraim spake trembling, he exalted 
himself in Israel, but when he offended in Baal, he died."" 

It does seem as if what has hitherto been dispensed, had 
made but little impression on the minds of the people in this 
land ; and I fear this is the case in many other places. What 
could have been done, that hath not been done, to bring mankind 
to the knowledge of Him, who is the author of eternal salvation 
to all them that obey him ? but if they will not hearken, how 
shall they obey ? How ready and willing most are, to hearken 
to the teaching of poor finite man ; but how reluctantly they 
will submit to hearken to the voice of God ! Like the Israel- 
ites of old, they would rather hear the voice of Moses than of 



1832,] CHAPTER XIII. 207 

Him ; and if we consider the hundreds who are busily engaged 
in turning the attention of the people to the letter, to the tra- 
ditions and ordinances of man, " after the rudiments of the 
world, and not after Christ," what must be the end thereof? 

Sheffield, Tenth Month 8th. 
I was at both meetings at Sheffield yesterday; that 



in the forenoon was large and satisfactory. I had to set forth 
the beauty, purity, and loveliness of the gospel church, and 
to put the people upon considering whether they were mem- 
bers of this glorious church, that is without spot or wrinkle, 
or any such thing ; because if not attained to happily whilst 
here, it cannot be done hereafter ; for as the tree falls, so it 
will lie, whether it be to the- south or to the north: — that 
such a state is evidently attainable in this life, from the 
language of the apostle Paul to the Hebrews, — " For we 
are not come to the mount that might be touched, and that 
burned with fire, nor unto blackness, and darkness, and tem- 
pest, and the sound of a trumpet, and the voice of words ; " — 
"but ye are come unto Mount Zion, and unto the city of the 
living God, the heavenly Jerusalem, and to an innumerable 
company of angels, to the general assembly and church of the 
first-born, which are written in heaven ; and to God the 
Judge of all, and to the spirits of just men made perfect; and to 
Jesus the Mediator of the new covenant, and to the blood of 
sprinkling, that speaketh better things than that of Abel." 
The blood of Abel cried from the ground for vengeance upon 
the offender ; but, " Father forgive them, they know not 
what they do," was the cry of Him, whose precious blood was 
shed for the - sins of all mankind. I had to query of them, what 
they knew of " this blood of sprinkling," which " cleanseth from 
all sin ;" — pressing the necessity of living faith, which could only 
be obtained by coming to Jesus, who would beget in them 
" the faith of the gospel," and would be found not only the 
author, but the finisher thereof. Without this, the highest 
profession of the Christian religion is but a dream, a shadow, 
and a doubt ; but with it, a glorious reality, — the life of the 
just, who " live by the faith of the Son of God," — the very 



208 CHAPTER XIII. [1832. 

" substance of things hoped for, the evidence of things not 
seen, 1 " 1 — even the salvation of the soul. 

On the 27th of Tenth Month, I returned to Tottenham, 
and attended both meetings there next day, as to myself in 
silence ; but several others were engaged to advocate the great 
cause. The next morning the Committee of Friends appointed 
by the Yearly Meeting to revise the Book of Extracts sat down, 
consisting of some members from almost all the Quarterly 
Meetings in England, who with the members of the Meeting 
for Sufferings, formed a numerous body. My concern could 
not be brought forward till the regular time for the Morning 
Meeting to assemble, which was that day fortnight ; so that 
I had to struggle on under its weight as well as I could. I 
have however great cause to be thankful for the privilege 
of attending so memorable a conference ; particularly as it 
appeared that only one other individual besides myself had 
been at the last revision of that book thirty years ago. It is 
remarkable, that one so circumstanced as I have been, should 
have been permitted to share twice in so solemn and exercising 
an occasion. 

After attending twenty-two sittings of the conference, also 
a Monthly Meeting, and six meetings for worship, the day 
arrived which brought the seal of confirmation to what had 
already been sanctioned by my own Quarterly and Monthly 
Meetings. But before entering on this description, I must 
tell thee, that the conference, although at seasons truly painful 
on account of the visible and alarming stature of the uncircum- 
cised in heart, was at times highly instructive and eminently 
favoured with the life-giving presence of Him, who abideth of 
old, who did not fail to give power to the faint, and to increase 
the strength of those that have no power of their own ; 
according to the prediction of the evangelical prophet, He was 
indeed, for a crown of glory, and for a diadem of beauty unto 
the residue of his people, and for a spirit of judgment to those 
that sat in judgment, and for strength to them that truly 
turned the battle to the gate ; and to His own praise and glory 
did He marvellously enable them that fear Him, to display the 
banner which He had given them, " because of the Truth." 



1832.} chapter xnr. 209 

The conflict of mind which I had to pass through, early in 
the day that I had to stand before the Morning Meeting, is 
utterly undeclarable by the tongue of any mortal ; and I could 
not at the time account for it : but I was afterwards favoured 
to see that this dispensation was highly needful for me. I 
stood up with the words, — " I have a baptism to be baptized 
with, and how am I straitened until it be accomplished ;" 
adding, — ' but the God of Israel is He that giveth strength 
and power to His people, — blessed be (rod. 1 I then proceeded 
to state, that my mind had been long preparing, in order to 
loosen me from every earthly occupation, and to wean me 
from every social tie, of which I had been blessed with more 
than an ordinary share ; and that shortly after my return 
from this country last year, to a land of desolation and sorrow, 
my heart was at times filled with the love of God in a remark- 
able manner ; — that in one of those delightful seasons, a pros- 
pect was opened before me, the magnitude of which made 
human nature shrink. But He who had redeemed my life from 
destruction, and crowned me with loving-kindness and tender 
mercies, was graciously pleased to beget in me a willingness to go 
wheresoever He was pleased to lead. My engagements were at 
the time such, as seemed to preclude the possibility of my being 
extricated from them for this work ; but the pathway was clearly 
defined, in which as I moved step by step, the mountains became 
mere mole-hills, and I was at length enabled to lay my concern 
before my own Monthly and Quarterly Meetings, &c. &c. : 
and that although some relief had been obtained by casting 
a share of the weight upon the shoulders of my Friends, yet 
the burden still remained with me day by day, and at intervals 
in the night season ; desiring that a right judgment might be 
come to, whether this thing was of the Lord or not. 

After a long pause, it was thought that the Morning Meeting 
could not set me at liberty, without knowing what I expected 
to do in those distant parts. To this I replied, that no specific 
line of duty was pointed out to me, in this early stage of the 
business ; but that what had passed in my mind led to a belief, 
that I should have to turn the people " from darkness to light, 
and from the power of Satan unto God," — and to teach them 



210 CHAPTER XIII. [1832. 

that they lived, and moved, and had their being in that God, 
whom they worshipped, it was probable, as at a distance : — 
that as to the missionaries I might meet with, I could embrace 
them with open arms, as fellow-men, countrymen, and 
labourers in the same great work, although, perhaps in a 
different stage of it. 

The certificate will show how the matter issued. The meet- 
ing ended in a truly solemn manner. Our dear aged friend 
William Rickman, was constrained to declare, that l the 
Truth reigned over all. 1 Many prayers were put up for you 
all, as well as for myself and others, who may be engaged to 
the same work. 



1832.] CHAPTER XIV. 211 



CHAPTER XIV 



CORRESPOXDEXCE ATTEXDS NORWICH QUARTERLY MEETIXG 

RECEIVES INTELLIGENCE OP THE DECEASE OF HIS WIFE AND OP 

THE SEVERE ILLNESS OF OTHERS IX HIS FAMILY LETTERS TO 

HIS ABSENT CHILDREX. 

To Sarah Smith. 
Tottenham, Eleventh Month 24th, 1 832. 

I have been told by a respectable ship-owner this 

morning, that I should not be later than the Second Month 
in leaving this country, or it will be too late to reach 
Cape Horn, before the winter sets in, when sailing be- 
comes hazardous in those latitudes. He can speak feelingly 
on this head, having just lost that fine ship the Science, on her 
homeward passage, which carrried out our friend James Back- 
house and his companion. I should much regret, if this 
account should reach my beloved wife and family, lest it cause 
painful forebodings on my behalf ; for believe me when I say, 
that the most painful feelings I have to encounter are on their 
account. I can look forward with composure to hardships and 
privations, as regards myself; but for them and over them I 
yearn, and reverently crave in humble prostration and broken- 
ness of spirit the blessing of preservation and support, and 
that my ever-gracious Lord will condescend, in the multitude 
of his everlasting mercies, through the all-sufficient power of 
his grace, to be a husband and a father to them ; and in the 
mysterious workings of His wondrous Providence, abundantly 
to supply all their wants, shedding abroad in their hearts a 
portion of that heavenly love, which banisheth fear from the 
innocent habitation, and at seasons causeth even the widow and 
the fatherless to sing, in praise of the majesty of the Lord and 
the glories of his kingdom. 

Although surrounded with many dear friends, both brethren 

p2 



212 CHAPTER XIV. [1832. 

and sisters, yet I feel amongst them as one born out of due 
time, and wading in secret silence under a burden, known only 
to Him, who beholds the inmost recesses of the heart, and who 
with an invisible hand sustains under its heaviest pressure ; 
whilst according to His loving-kindness, which is better than 
life, my tribulated soul is humbled into nothingness, and therein 
brought nearer and nearer to my meek and lowly Saviour, and 
taught from sensible feeling to magnify His all-redeeming 
power, and to bless his holy name in the depths of self-abase- 
ment. Thus my dear Lord and Master is leading me along, 
and I trust preparing me to do his righteous will, which can in 
no other way be accomplished, than by the total surrender of 
our all to Him, without reservation. 

To his Wife. 

Garwood, Twelfth Month llth, 1832. 
My Dearest Jane, 
At the close of the last letter, I mentioned having been 
invited to attend the remains of our late valued friend, Martha 
Smith, to their long home. I reached Doncaster the next day, 
and found a large number of Friends collected for the same 
object. Her long residence at Doncaster, and extensive ac- 
quaintance in the Society, to many of whom she had long 
been very dear, caused a large assembling ; about sixty persons 
came from other parts, besides the Friends of her own meet- 
ing. According to instructions she had left, the coffin was 
taken into the meeting-house, agreeably with the ancient prac- 
tice of the Society. It was truly a memorable and solemn 
opportunity, I believe both to her friends and to many strangers 
present. M. T. and another minister were engaged in the 
fore-part of the meeting, but the weight of the service pretty 
much devolved upon myself: — " Daughters of Jerusalem, 
weep not for me, but weep for yourselves and for your children," 
Were the expressions opened to my mind ; after which I had to 
declare a belief that if the voice of our dear departed sister, 
which had so often proclaimed within those walls the wonders 
of redeeming love and mercy, could then be heard, the language 
of her purified spirit would be " weep not for me, but weep for 



1832,] CHAPTER XiV. 213 

yourselves and for your children C — and as she could not 
return to us, but we must follow her, that we should endeavour 
so to follow her, as she had endeavoured to follow Christ, in 
the path of self-denial and the daily cross, without which there 
would be no crown. I had afterwards to declare at the grave 
side to a crowd of fresh faces from the street, the day of the 
Lord, which would assuredly try the foundation of all their 
works. The remainder of the day was I trust profitably spent. 

I set off the next morning for Hull, in company with John 
Hipsley and I. Casson, who had also been invited to the inter- 
ment : we were favoured to reach Hull in safety that afternoon. 
I attended their meeting next day to my comfort, and started 
for York, the day following. 

Tottenham, Twelfth Month 1 7tk, Seventh day. — I have again 
taken up the pen to resume my delightful employment of con- 
versing in this way with thee, not I think without a degree of 
thankfulness, that such an alternative is permitted, however 
short it may seem of the reality so much desired, I believe by 
each of us. 

I reached Nottingham on Fourth day evening as intended. 
We had a very comfortable meeting there next day : at this as 
at other places, the hand of time has swept away many, with 
whom I was well acquainted. It was a solemn meeting: — 
" He that abideth of old, 11 was graciously pleased to crown the 
little company with His presence. Being the week-day meeting, 
it may be presumed that few were present, that had not made 
more or less sacrifice to attend it ; and I believe all these were 
rewarded. 

A Friend largely concerned in the South Sea fishery, has 
suggested a plan altogether unthought of by any of us ; 
and that is, the purchasing a vessel in all respects adapted 
not only to the voyage out, but also to conveying us from 
island to island. He particularly recommends her being quite 
a small cutter, both for safety and expedition, and because 
capable from her small draught of water of running into shallow 
harbours and creeks, which a large vessel could not enter. 
He thinks a crew could be procured, who would be willing to 
substitute cocoa, tea, &c, for spirits, except for medicinal pur- 



214 CHAPTER XIV. [1832. 

poses ; and that when no longer required, she would be readily 
sold in New South Wales. I quite approve of the plan, be- 
lieving it would have many advantages ; but particularly as on 
a moderate calculation, it would save a year in the time of 
absence, which is to me of too great importance, to allow the 
idea to be dropped without further scrutiny. It may yet be 
proved that much expense would be saved by it; and that the 
object in view would be more completely embraced in all its 
points. 

Do not fail to write, that I may hear of you whilst I remain 
in the way of doing so. In dearest love, believe me, however 
circumstanced, or wherever placed, daily found in prayer to 
Almighty God for the preservation and welfare of you all. 
In truest affection, 

D. W. 

To his Children in Russia. 

Norwich, Twelfth Month 29th, 1832. 
My Dear Children, 

Last Third day, the 25th, I attended the Quarterly 

Meeting for London and Middlesex, held in Devonshire House 
Meeting House, which was crowded to excess ; many could not 
be accommodated with seats, although every avenue was fur- 
nished with temporary forms, and I understood that a consider- 
able number could not gain admittance in any way. It fell to 
my lot to revive amongst them some expressions, which occurred 
• at the memorable interview between the Saviour of the world 
and Martha, soon after the death of Lazarus; — opening the sub- 
ject with — " Lord, if thou hadst been here, my brother had not 
died : but I know that even now, whatsoever thou wilt ask of 
God, God will give it thee." " Thy brother shall rise again," 
our Lord replied. " I know," said Martha, " that he shall 
rise again, in the resurrection at the last day." " I am the 
resurrection and the life ; he that believeth in me," declared 
the Saviour of men, " though he were dead, yet shall he live ; 
and whosoever liveth and believeth in me, shall never die. 
Believest thou this V The explanation of these words was 
opened in this manner : he that believeth in Christ, though he 



1832.] niAPT. it xiv. 215 

were dead in trespasses and sins, yet shall he live ; and who- 
soever liveth, after having been thus quickened from spiritual 
death unto life, in the hope of His everlasting mercy, and in 
the belief of His inward and spiritual appearance, and in 
obedience to His will therein made manifest, shall never 
die. " Believest thou this V — They shall have part in the 
first resurrection ; and the second death will have no power 
over them. They must share in the common lot of mor- 
tality, — the separation of the soul from the body ; but they 
Avill never be separated from their Grod. For " neither death, 
nor life, nor angels, nor principalities, nor powers, nor things 
present, nor things to come, nor heights, nor depths, nor 
any other creature will be able to separate them from the love 
of God, which is in Christ Jesus our Lord." After this, 
I had to branch out into the necessity not only of performing 
the Divine will, but also of endeavouring to prove what is that 
good and acceptable and perfect will of Gfod : that knowledge 
however will verily profit us little, without obedience keeps 
pace with it, as it is not the hearers of the law, but the doers 
that are justified. 

I went down by mail the same night to Norwich ; and attended 
the Quarterly Meeting for Norfolk and Norwich on the 27th. 
After E. F. had appeared in supplication, I had to declare of the 
mercy and goodness of the Lord to those that fear him ; and 
to point out the inhabitants of that heavenly city, Mount Zion, 
which he hath chosen and founded, and which the poor of his 
people shall trust in, — all of whom are redeemed with judgment, 
and her converts with righteousness : the judgments of the 
Lord having been suffered to pass over the transgressing nature 
in their hearts, in order to redeem therefrom, and they having 
believed in the righteousness of Christ Jesus, and being con- 
verted by the sanctifying power of his grace. W. F. spoke for 
a considerable time after I sat down with instructive clearness. 
At the request of John Wilbur, [a minister from America,] a 
meeting was held the next day, and was well attended. I 
found it my place first to break through its solemnity, and to 
supplicate that the great Name might be exalted, and the king- 
dom of Christ Jesus established in the hearts of the people. 



216 CHAPTER XIV. [1882. 

John Wilbur had full opportunity to relieve himself, and stood 
nearly an hour and a half to the satisfaction of the meeting ; and 
I trust to the peace of his own mind. He had in true gospel 
authority, like the well taught scribe, to bring forth from the 
treasury of wisdom and knowledge things new and old. 

[The above was writtten at the house of Joseph Johti 
Gurney, at Earlham, where during some weeks of indisposition, 
he was attended and cared for with a tenderness of which 
he ever retained a grateful recollection. It was during this 
period, that intelligence arrived of the decease of our beloved 
mother, and the alarming illness of three other members of the 
family. 

Perhaps it may be desirable, in order to elucidate some pas- 
sages in the succeeding letters, to enter into a short explanation 
of the series of domestic afflictions, with which that part of 
the family left at Shoosharry was visited at this time ; 
and the difficulty of making public the details of private 
sorrow, seems greatly diminished by the fact, that the 
parties to Avhom they relate are no longer our fellow-proba- 
tioners ; but were all called to precede our beloved parent to 
that better world, where we reverently believe their spirits are 
now eternally blessed. 

About the 20th of Eleventh Month, our brother Charles 
was attacked with an inflammation of the lungs, which for a 
time threatened his life : the complaint had at length yielded 
to the means employed, when our dear mother and sister Jane 
were at the same time stretched on a bed of sickness. Our 
mother's disorder proved to be fever, and though apparently 
of the mildest kind, it terminated fatally within nine days. 

At this time dear Jane was lying in a very alarming 
state from inflammation of the brain. For several days the 
issue appeared doubtful ; but through mercy her life was 
spared, and space allowed her for the all important work of 
repentance and reconciliation. 

At the time of our dear mother's death, our eldest brother 
William was suffering from an affection of the chest, which 
shortly afterwards reduced him to a state of great exhaustion. 



1833.] CHAPTER XIV. 217 

Whilst both he and Jane continued unwell, and the former in 
a very precarious state, Charles was seized with the fever, 
which had already deprived us of our mother, and of two 
other members of the household. For three weeks his dis- 
order raged violently, and when it had in some measure 
abated, whilst he was still extremely weak, all hope was 
again destroyed by the re-appearance of inflammation of the 
lungs. Once more he was permitted to rally ; and after 
being forty-eight days entirely confined to his bed, he was 
gradually restored to a comfortable state of health. To 
him also, through the visitations of infinite love, the season 
of sickness was made one of deep instruction ; and during 
the remainder of his brief career of life, he was strength- 
ened steadily to pursue a heavenward course. It was after 
receiving the account of Charles being attacked with fever, 
that his father resolved on returning for a season to Russia. 
On his arrival there on the 1 2th of Fourth Month, 1833, he was 
favoured to find the invalids of his family gradually recruiting. 
But to proceed with the correspondence. The announce- 
ment of the decease of our beloved mother is thus described by 
himself.] 

First Month llfA, 1833. Some days ago, when dear Mary 
Gurney came to my bed-side (a sweet spirited Friend,) I told 
her, that I quite enjoyed the rest I was permitted to partake 
of; that I had been looking towards home, and had been 
favoured with a peaceful feeling respecting you all ; that I did 
believe all was right, and in the ordering of the Master, or 
something to that effect. When she replied, — ' it is a rest of 
preparation. 1 I do not recollect that she added more at that 
time. On the 9th instant, several letters were brought into 
my room, when I said, — ' No letter from Petersburg V to which 
I got no answer. In the evening, as I lay on a couch, J. J. 
Gurney adverted to the health of my family, hinting that 
later accounts than my own had been received. I heard 
it without much suspicion, — little expecting what was in store, 
and that a cup filled with the wine of astonishment, was about . 
to be handed to me. By degrees something more was unfolded ; 



218 CHAPTER XIV. [1833. 

until I requested to know the whole that awaited me. But 
who can picture my distress and anguish of soul, when the 
awful reality was discovered \ But the everlasting arms of 
mine Almighty helper were underneath to bear me up, that 
the waves "of affliction should not overwhelm beyond the 
decreed limits, nor infringe upon the margin of mercy and 
compassion. After a time I was enabled to say, ' it is a bitter 
cup : but I accept it at the hand of the Lord ; for I am sure 
there is a blessing at the bottom of it.' The whole letter was 
then read; and to my unspeakable comfort, I was enabled to 
perceive, that my peaceful feelings about you all, were abun- 
dantly confirmed by a consoling evidence, that everlasting love 
and mercy had conspicuously covered the judgment seat, even 
to a hair's breadth : — that the beloved and precious partner in 
all my joys and sorrows for more than thirty-two years had 
passed, not from life to death, but from death unto life 
eternal ; — and that my darling Charles and Jenny are yet 
spared, I humbly trust and pray, (whether their time here may 
be longer or shorter,) so to believe in the Lord Jesus Christ, 
as to be saved with an everlasting salvation. — And may we all 
be enabled to say in the language of the apostle, " I am 
crucified with Christ ; nevertheless I live, yet not I, but Christ 
liveth in me ; and the life that I now live in the flesh, I live 
by the faith of the Son of God ; who loved me and gave him- 
self for me :"" that in the winding up of time, we may all be 
permitted to meet again, with the purified spirit now fled — of 
her we dearly loved, with palms and harps in our hands, — 
those emblems of victory and praise ; — joining a numberless 
multitude in the never-ceasing anthem of " Hallelujah unto 
the Lord God and the Lamb, who liveth and reigneth for 
ever ;"" who giveth the victory, and to whom belong the praise 
and the glory ! 

I shall anxiously expect another letter. — I have been merci- 
fully strengthened to say, — " the Lord gave, and the Lord hath 
taken away, blessed be the name of the Lord." Not a wish 
dares to intrude upon the peaceful resignation of my mind. I 
only regret that I had not a personal share in the general 
distress and conflict of the occasion. 



1838.] CHAPTER XIV. 219 

First Month 19th, J 833. 
My dearest Charles and Jane. 

When I quitted Shoosharry, I thought I had given 



up much ; and when fairly away from Cronstadt, I seemed to 
have parted with every thing in this world : but I have 
since sorrowfully found, that there remained ties which bound 
the soul to earth, which were yet to be dissolved before 
the sacrifice was complete. The visitation was so unex- 
pected and sudden, that for a time every effort to bear up 
against the overwhelming realit} r , seemed altogether unavailing. 
It is indeed a cup exceeding in bitterness all that had pre- 
viously been handed, — filling my heart with anguish, inde- 
scribable and irresistible. Yet, blessed be the name of the 
Lord Grod of heaven and earth for ever, He, who had com- 
manded the storm, was, in gracious condescension and compas- 
sionate mercy, pleased to rebuke its raging billows, and to 
bear up my helpless head above them all ; enabling me to 
glorify His holy name " in the fires " of this baptism of suf- 
fering, to His own praise. And although the dispensation 
is altogether incomprehensible at present, yet I firmly believe, 
the merciful design of the Divine Will, as it is patiently 
abode under, will be more and more developed to our under- 
standings, and will not fail to raise in us a grateful tribute of 
thanksgiving. " What I do, thou knowest not now, but thou 
shalt know hereafter :'- — and O ! that we may all be found 
worthy to be entrusted with the heavenly secret, whether it be 
to be laid up in our own hearts, or to be declared to many. 

When I have been led to contemplate the suspense and 
anxiety, which my long silence must have unavoidably occa- 
sioned to your dear mother, when more distantly separated 
by mighty oceans, together with the expectation of my being 
amongst barbarous nations, and exposed to various hardships, 
— how often have I desired that opportunities might occur for 
me to send at frequent intervals, some even short account of 
my safety and preservation ; that she might be comforted 
from time to time, and not be permitted to droop with hope 
again and again deferred; — feeling a willingness to suffer 



220 chapter xiv. [1833: 

myself, and to trust her and my precious family to the tender 
care of our heavenly Father, though months and months 
might pass away without a probability of hearing of or from 
them, — if only they might be cheered and animated now and 
then with but a gleam. But whilst human nature deeply 
feels, and every chord of tenderness and affectionate remem- 
brance vibrates at the recollection of what we have all lost ;. 
yet my soul doth secretly rejoice and magnify my good and 
gracious God, in humble thankfulness, that her lamb-like spirit 
is now spared this painful dispensation ; and that the suffering- 
will be only mine ; and, mingled with many other tribulations 
which may yet await me, serve to fill up the allotted measure ; 
in which I humbly trust I shall be permitted to glory, from 
the certain knowledge that tribulation worketh patience and 
experience and that hope " which maketh not ashamed," nor 
afraid, " because the love of God is shed abroad in the heart." 
I think the finger of the Divine Artist may already be traced 
in the present afflictive dispensation, as regards us all ; but 
more particularly in the effects which have already resulted, 
both to thee and to dear Jenny, giving you to see in a remark- 
able manner and in wondrous mercy, that every thing in this 
world is but vanity, and will most certainly end in vexation of 
spirit, if we have not an interest in the Saviour, and if destitute 
of that knowledge which alone can save. It is therefore my 
most humble prayer, that you may both endeavour to the 
utmost, to keep near to that Power which hath so graciously 
opened your understandings to perceive his tender mercy and 
loving-kindness, which is better than life, in thus gathering 
your beloved mother into everlasting rest and peace, removing 
her from the troubles of time to the enduring riches of eternity, 
in holy quietness, because death had lost its sting, and the 
grave its victory. I am very sure that you must both have 
had convincing proof of the necessity of seeking after an 
acquaintance with the precious gift of God, which is so merci- 
fully vouchsafed in measure by Christ Jesus in every heart ; 
and which is sufficient, if attended to, to restore every son and 
daughter of Adam from a state of nature to a state of grace, 
into the heavenly image from which man by transgression fell. 



1833.] CHAPTER XIV. 221 

I think you must both have seen how insignificant this 
world and all that belongs to it appear, when the pale herald 
of the grave hovers around us. Nothing short of that Divine 
power, which thus showeth us these things, can prepare and 
purify us for an " inheritance undefiled, and that fadeth not 
away:" and be assured of this, that however homely this 
unflattering Witness may appear, though it seem but "as a 
tender plant, and as a root out of a dry ground, 1 ' and when 
perceived there is no beauty to render Him desirable to the 
unregenerate mind ; yet this, my dear children, is nothing less 
than a manifestation of the Spirit " of the Lord of life and 
glory, which is given to every man to profit withal;" and 
well will it be for us, if we are profiting thereby, and faith- 
fully occupying therewith. This Holy Spirit hath long been 
oppressed and afflicted in all our hearts, whilst we have been 
employed in perishing pursuits, and altogether regardless of 
Him or his secret touches and reproofs, until perhaps cast 
upon a sick bed, or brought into a situation where His voice 
will be heard. It is to this power that we must be willing to 
turn, and it is by this power only that we can be saved, seeing 
it is the Spirit of Him our dear Eedeemer, whom " God hath 
highly exalted, and given him a name which is above every 
name ; that at the name of Jesus every knee should bow, of 
things in heaven, and things in earth, and things under the 
earth ; and that every tongue should confess that Jesus Christ 
is Lord, to the glory of God the Father," either in mercy or 
in judgment. And ! saith my soul, that our confession 
may be to His wondrous love and mercy, and not in the 
acknowledgment of His just judgments for our hard-hearted- 
ness and unbelief in the day of his visitation, wherein he would 
have gathered us, "as a hen doth gather her brood under her 
wings," and we would not. For true it is, that if we are 
willing to attend to this in-speaking, heart-searching voice, to 
turn at its reproofs, we shall find that they are full of instruc* 
tion, and the way to life everlasting. It will not fail to show 
us the deceitfulness of sin, the sinfulness of sin, and the wages 
of sin, which is death. As we patiently abide under the 
turnings and overturnings of the Lord's hand thus upon us, 



222 CHAPTER XIV. [1833. 

however humbling and painful to the unsubjected mind, we 
shall indeed know the Saviour of the world in all his offices ; 
not only as a convincer and reprover of sin through His Spirit, 
but as a purifier and cleanser from it : and as the great work 
of regeneration gradually advances, our spiritual eye will at 
last be opened to perceive and to look on Him whom we have 
so long pierced, and to mourn in godly sorrow unto unfeigned 
repentance not to be repented of. Then indeed shall we bow 
to His name, which is His power, on the bended knees of 
contrition and self-abasedness ; and be enabled from living and 
actual experience to say, " I have heard of thee by the hearing 
of the ear, but now mine eye seeth thee ; wherefore I abhor 
myself, and repent in dust and ashes."" Here then is " repent- 
ance toward God, and faith toward our Lord Jesus Christ, 1 "' 
whereby we forsake sin, and believe in the efficacy of that 
power which alone can save from it. Then, indeed, shall we 
become willing to confess Him before men, not being ashamed 
to acknowledge His power and His might, nor afraid of being 
thought His followers, by the votaries of a world which " lieth 
in wickedness ;" but to boldly take up the cross — a daily cross 
to our own corrupt walls and inclinations, and follow Him 
whithersoever He may be pleased to lead ; remembering for our 
comfort and encouragement his gracious declaration, " whoso- 
ever shall confess me before men, him shall the Son of Man also 
confess before the angels of God : but he that denieth me before 
men, shall be denied before the angels of God."''' This indeed will 
be confessing to His name in the belief of His power, and in the 
hope of His mercy ; and a bowing in earnest in obedience to 
His holy will. But if unhappily unwilling to bow the knee of 
our minds, we should stubbornly resist the offers of unutterable 
love and mercy, refusing to confess with the tongue " that 
Jesus Christ is Lord, by the acknowledgment of His power in 
our hearts to save, and by submissive obedience to it, in the 
way of the cross, — we shall one day find to our indescribable 
distress, when it is too late, and the language is uttered, " he 
that is filthy, let him be filthy still. 1- ' 

But although it is with me thus to write, yet my prayers 
are incessant on your behalf for better things, even things 



1833.] CHAPTER XIV. 223 

that accompany life and salvation ; that mercy and truth may 
meet together, that righteousness and peace may kiss each 
other, in our heart-felt experience ; which most assuredly will 
be the case, if the fault be not our own. We shall find that 
watchfulness, prayer, and fasting, are the Christian's strength, 
his safe retreat, and never-failing weapons of defence ; even a 
constant watch over all our thoughts, tracing from whence they 
spring ; for thoughts are the origin of all our words and 
actions. As we thus maintain the watch we shall soon begin 
to groan, being burdened with the frailty and helplessness of 
human nature ; which unavoidably and happily for us, cannot 
fail to incite to prayer, though perhaps but in sighs and groanings 
which cannot be uttered ; but which are accepted and recorded 
by Him, who is a God ever hearing prayer, and who will in 
tender mercy strengthen us, if on our parts we are but willing, 
to pray always, " with all prayer and supplication in the Spirit, 
watching thereunto with all perseverance." This will almost 
imperceptibly lead us habitually to fast from the gratifying- 
things of time and sense, which do but serve, however insigni- 
ficant they may appear in the world's estimation, to prevent the 
sacrifice of the whole heart ; and as nothing short of this will be 
accepted, in the Divine sight, the enemy's purpose is still effected. 

I have craved in the tenderest manner for you, that you may 
henceforth be preserved and strengthened in faithfulness to 
resist those things, whatever they be, that were burdensome to 
you when on a bed of sickness, the fruit of which is bitter 
indeed, and productive only of shame, remorse, and anguish 
of spirit. Let the time past suffice, and the future be em- 
ployed not in living to ourselves, " but unto Him who died for 
us and rose again.' 1 

First Month 30tfA. — I am thankful in being able to say that 
I am nicely recovered. I have met with such unfeigned love 
and kindness from the family here, as can never be repaid, 
either by me or mine. On First day afternoon, I found that 
the time was fully come for me to take leave of the Friends of 
this place ; when they were commended in apostolic language 
" to G-od and the word of his grace," in which all their beloved 
families as well as my own were included. The meeting con- 



224 CHAPTER XIV. [1833. 

eluded with ecirnest prayer, and we separated under feelings 
of thankfulness and praise. 

I must now bring this letter to a conclusion, earnestly 
desiring that nothing may be permitted to prevent your unre- 
mitting pursuit after that kingdom, which our Lord declared 
to be within ; and that " no man may spoil you through philo- 
sophy and vain deceit, after the rudiments of the world, after 
the tradition of men, and not after Christ, 11 is my earnest 
and constant prayer for you. 

P. S. — Second Month 4th, Stamford Hill. — On arriving 
at this place, I found dear William's letter containing the 
painful intelligence of dear Charles being seized with the pre- 
vailing fever. My situation is very trying, seeing I have not 
the power of rendering the smallest assistance to the wreck of 
my family. I can only put up a feeble petition for him and 
for you all ; and with you wait and lean on the bosom of the 
beloved and only availing Comforter, in humble prostration 
of soul ; trusting that I shall be favoured to stand resigned, 
to whatever may be the Divine will. 

To one of his Children. 
Stamford Hill, Second Month 20th, 1833. 
My dear S. 

All the part that I seemed capable of perform- 



ing during the turnings and overturnings of the Lord's holy 
hand upon us, has been, as it were, to turn my face to the 
wall, and labour after humble resignation and patient sub- 
mission of soul, and therein wait until he should be graciously 
pleased to say, " It is enough. 11 

The interest that has been awakened amongst our friends 
in this country, has burst forth on all sides in letters of con- 
dolence and sympathy in our great bereavement, and in the 
accumulated affliction which has continued to press upon the 
wreck of my family : I believe that more heartfelt solicitude 
was never felt on an occasion of a parallel nature, when only 
individuals in humble life have been concerned ; and I have no 
doubt that the prayers of many have been put up on our 
account, to the God of all comfort, for his Almighty help and 



1833.] CHAPTER XIV. 225 

deliverance : I humbly trust they have been permitted to 
ascend as sweet incense before the Lord Most High, whose 
ears are ever open to the prayers of His people ; more especially 
of such as dwell continually in His temple, and behold His 
beauty in the holy place. And be assured that my feeble, 
though frequent petitions and aspirations have been mingled 
amongst others for your preservation, and for the restora- 
tion of the dear invalids, in this day of visitation and sore 
conflict. From an accurate knowledge of circumstances as 
well as place, I believe I have been enabled to travail with 
and for you, and to wade in the depths of distress in degree, 
through the same conflict, — not only as to the bodily suf- 
ferings of dear Charles and Jenny, having myself had to 
pass through sickness and distress, under circumstances of 
hardship which I am totally unable to describe, and when 
recovery was equally doubtful ; but I have also had to pass 
through the same agonizing conflict of mind, heightened 
to a much more dreadful degree, because charged with sins 
of deeper dye, than I fully believe have laid at their door. 
And though I can say with the great Apostle, — "this is a 
faithful saying and worthy of all acceptation, that Jesus Christ 
came into the world to save sinners, of whom I am chief; 1 ' 
yet to the praise of the riches of His grace, I can also say, 
— " behold the Lamb of God, that taketh away the sins of the 
world," — He that speaketh " in righteousness, mighty to save." 
And I do most earnestly desire, that my dear Charles and 
Jane may not suffer themselves to lose sight of the wondrous 
mercy that has been so plainly and marvellously extended, 
nor let the remembrance of it depart from their minds ; but 
that they may faithfully wrestle to maintain the watch, and 
may become of quick understanding in the fear of the Lord, — 
that fear which keepeth the heart clean, and endureth for ever. 
I do exceedingly crave, that if comfortable health is permitted 
to return, they will endeavour to keep low in their spirits, 
and dwell near the root of life, with Him who declared himself 
to be, " meek and lowly in heart. 1 ' And ! that they may 
not suffer doubtings to arise, as regards that power which has 
thus in matchless love and mercy said unto them "live ;:' or be 



226 CHAPTER XIV. [1833. 

disposed to question, or to say, is this " He that should come, or 
look we for another," — like the disciples of John formerly. For 
surely their blind eyes have received sight, their lame ideas, 
notions, and comprehensions are changed ; and the feet of their 
minds strengthened, and prepared to walk in a new and living 
path. Have they not witnessed the leprosy of sin to be 
searched into, and brought into view, in order to be cleansed 
by that which alone " searcheth all things ?" Have not their 
deaf ears been unstopped, so that even the still small voice could 
be heard in the soul, and is found to be powerful, a mighty 
and irresistible voice, causing a guilty conscience to tremble ; 
as described by the kingly prophet, when he said, "the light- 
nings lightened the world, the earth trembled and shook," — 
when that " light which lighteth every man that cometh into 
the world," so shines in our hearts, as to discover the earthly 
nature, and make it tremble, — bringing all our sins in order 
before us in terrible and to our awakened understandings fearful 
array. When personally on earth, after He had said to John's 
disciples, " the blind receive their sight, and the lame walk, the 
lepers are cleansed, and the deaf hear, the dead are raised up, and 
to the poor the gospel is preached ;" — He added, " and blessed is 
he whosoever shall not be offended in me." So that I feel more 
than I can embody in words, that with those on whom such mira- 
cles have been wrought, who have been raised up as from the dead 
in sins and trespasses, as well as rescued from the grave, and 
who when brought low, humbled, broken, contrited, and made 
poor in spirit, have had the gospel preached to them, demon- 
strating in a manner incontrovertible, that it is " the power of 
G-od unto salvation," — that nothing may be permitted to turn 
them aside from the blessing promised to those, who are not 
offended at this heavenly visitant. For this I pray ; and 
that they may be strengthened, saith my soul, to give up 
all to follow Him in the regeneration faithfully : for it is 
only those that endure unto the end that shall be saved, and it is 
only those that give up all, who can endure all things for his 
sake. Whatever interferes with His Holy Spirit, whose right 
it is to rule and reign in our hearts, must be given up, be it 
what it may. " He that loveth father or mother more than 



1833.] CHAPTER XIV. 227 

me, is not worthy of me ; and he that loveth son or daughter 
more than me, is not worthy of me." Whatever is suffered to 
occupy our attention, tending- in any degree to draw aside from 
watchfulness, prayer, and waiting upon Him, beyond what is 
allowable and needful in our passing through this pilgrim state, 
either in thought, word, or deed, — robs us of a sense of His 
inestimable presence, and of a share of the soul-enriching peace 
which flows from Him, and lessens our love towards Him, to 
whom the whole heart belongs ; who " will not give His glory 
to another, - " nor His praise to graven or any other images, 
which we may suffer to be set up in our minds, however inno- 
cent and insignificant we may think such to be. 

And though it may please Him in inscrutable wisdom for 
his own great purposes, to withdraw at times the sensible 
evidence of his life-giving Spirit, so that we may have to 
deplore with Mary, that " they have taken away my Lord ;" 
yet as we remain stedfastly endeavouring to wait, and watch, 
and pray towards His temple, He will in his own time, most 
assuredly return to us, as the morning breaking through and 
dispersing the heaviest clouds that may have gathered, to the 
strengthening of our faith in Him, and the increasing of our 
love : proving himself the ever-blessed and ever- living Com- 
forter, the Spirit of truth, and leading out of all error into all 
truth ; whom the world cannot receive because it knoweth 
Him not. 

I am not surprised to hear, that my dear William has been 
dipped again and again, into a state of feeling something like 
that of baptism, on account of the sufferings of others; — for 
unless this was the case, how should we be capable of entering 
into their joys and sorrows. And now that the whole weight 
of responsibility and care of the family devolves upon his 
shoulders, it is no marvel with me, that this increased burden 
should be felt. I think this has a very instructive and signi- 
ficant meaning ; and although in degree inferior, is notwith- 
standing the same in kind, as that felt and witnessed by the 
several members of the gospel church, where all suffer, rejoice 
and sympathize with and for each other. I believe that the 
head of a family or tribe, when endeavouring to act under the 

q2 



228 CHAPTER XIV.' [1833. 

guidance of Him, who was touched with a feeling and compas- 
sionate sense of our manifold weakness and infirmities, may be 
favoured to administer, according to the ability given, to the 
wants and necessities of those about him, entering into their feel- 
ings, and sharing in whatever conflicts may be allotted to them. 

I wish to make a grateful return to all those kind friends 
in Petersburg, who have lent their aid in any shape in the 
day of your distress. I am indeed one of those who owe 
much unto their Lord, both in these respects, and in things 
more nearly connected with eternal consequences ; and having 
nothing to pay with, I do humbly trust, that as he that 
administereth a cup of cold water only to a disciple, in the 
name of a disciple, shall in no wise lose his reward ; so also 
that all who have administered to the necessities of these little 
ones that believe on Him, will witness the Divine blessing to 
rest upon them ; inasmuch as they, however unconsciously, 
" have done it unto me," was the declaration of our Lord 
himself. 

As to myself, I have truly little to communicate, for since 
it has pleased our heavenly Father to magnify his power in 
the midst of our long unbroken and highly favoured circle, but 
little has transpired with me. I told the Committee under 
whose care I move along, at their last meeting, that in con- 
sideration of the state of my family, I should be best satisfied 
to lie upon my oars at present, until these calamities are 
overpast ; of which I think approval was expressed. I have 
attended the meetings in and about this metropolis, in all of 
which, I have had to proclaim the spirituality of the dear 
Redeemer's kingdom, and to direct the people to the Holy 
Spirit in their own hearts, of a crucified, risen, and glorified 
Lord. It is indeed a day of lamentation, mourning, and woe, 
— for the expectation of the people is almost altogether out- 
ward, from man, although vital Christianity was never more 
talked of. 



1833.] CHAPTER XV. 229 



CHAPTER XV. 

JOURNEY TO RUSSIA IN 1833 HIS RETURN, AND PREPARATIONS 

FOR HIS LONG VOYAGE SAILS FROM THE THAMES THE 13tH 

OF ELEVENTH MONTH, 1833 DETENTION OFF THE ISLE OF 

WIGHT FROM ADVERSE GALES LETTERS, AND EXTRACTS FROM 

HIS JOURNAL. 

[Several circumstances having combined to delay the pro- 
jected voyage to the South Seas till the succeeding autumn ; 
our beloved father felt himself at liberty to employ a part of the 
interval thus occasioned, in visiting his family at Shoosharry. 

The following letter describes some of the hardships of 
travelling between Holland and Russia in that day : since 
that time, however, macadamized roads and good post-houses 
have been constructed along the whole line from Hamburgh 
to Petersburg.] 

To one of his Sons. 

Memel, Fourth Month 1st, 1833. 
My dear Joshua, 

I was favoured to reach Hamburgh in safety, after 

a cold rough passage. There was only a small number of 
passengers ; but amongst these was a German family, consisting 
of a mother and two little girls, and her brother, on their way 
to Memel, where they reside. We soon formed an acquaint- 
ance, and it afterwards appeared, that we had almost from the 
first kept an eye on each other, as likely to continue com- 
panions in travel ; this has now been fully and agreeably 
realized, confirming a belief which had fastened on my mind 
previously to setting out, that I should be provided for on my 
long and weary way. Though Germans, they speak English 
so well, that I have had no difficulty as to language, as we 
have passed along. We purchased a carriage in Hamburgh 



230 CHAPTER XV. [1833. 

for about i?20 sterling, which when divided was easy ; and 
our expenses have amounted to little more than they would 
have done by diligence, of which there are none running at 
this time of the year between Hamburgh and Berlin. It is 
a britchka with a good head, and a leather covering from the 
head, fastened to iron stanchions in front. The mother and 
children were of course placed under the head, as the most 
comfortable and secure place, whilst J. J. F. and myself 
occupied the front seat the whole way : — on it, however, the 
man must be weary indeed who could get much sleep. The 
roads through the Mecklenburgh district cannot easily be 
described ; but I can tell thee, that many articles of clothing 
ware actually chafed into holes. I ought however with 
thankfulness to add, that we were not once overturned, though 
we frequently expected it. We reached Berlin after thirty- 
nine hours travelling, and were accommodated at the King 
of Portugal hotel. The falls of sleet now seemed over ; but the 
cold was still very piercing. We started the next day, and, with 
the exception of two intervals of four hours each, travelled 
on for five days and four nights. Two stations on this side of 
Friedeburgh we seemed again to overtake the winter, and 
have kept possession of it ever since. Even to this day, those 
parts of Prussia which anciently belonged to Poland are dis- 
tinguishable : the people still look different from their neigh- 
bours, and their houses and modes of living are quite peculiar. 
At one place they gave us the flesh of the wild boar ; but 
hunger reconciled us to it pretty well, though otherwise it 
would have gone slowly down. 

At Custrin, we passed the Oder, which was free from ice, 
but some huge blocks were lying about the shores of the 
Vistula ; and we were informed, that the bridge had only been 
passable one day, so that had we reached it earlier, we must 
have been detained. We crossed the Nogatt at Marienburgh, 
and the Vistula at Dirschau, where in 1825, I crossed it with 
dear Thomas Shillitoe ; and the mercies of the Lord so com- 
passionately bestowed upon us at that time, were renewedly 
brought to my remembrance. From the advanced stage of 
the season, and the state of the roads, it seemed dangerous 



1833.] CHAPTER XV. 231 

to attempt going round by Tilsit, as the river (Niemen) 
generally overflows the surrounding flat country, to the pre- 
vention of travelling in the spring. The only alternative was, 
to travel along the Courish Nerung, a strip of land separated 
from the main land of East Prussia by the Haafe, a navigable 
bay or arm of the Baltic. 

On returning to England in 1825, I promised thy dear 
mother, that I would not go over this sand on that journey, 
and the recollection of this was trying to me ; but the advan- 
tages in the present case were so great, that at length I agreed 
to venture. No sooner had we left the regular post road, than 
the roads became heavy, and were at last so bad, as to make 
it doubtful whether we should be able to proceed by this route. 
As night came on, our situation became more critical, and 
the carriage seemed every few minutes in danger of being- 
dashed to pieces against tree-roots, stones, or frozen masses 
of mud and snow. On reaching the next station, a fifth horse 
was yoked, unasked for by us, and uncharged by the keeper, 
but a fearful omen of the road to come. Having now addi- 
tional strength of horses, the carriage seemed the more certain 
to be destroyed, having to pass through a forest amongst 
many obstructions ; frequently we were thrown almost from 
our seats, and the shock so violent as to produce pain in the 
head. Sometimes we hove down on one side, then on the 
other; and again for short intervals, rumbling with great 
rapidity over a frozen level surface, which generally concluded 
with a violent concussion against some hard substance. As 
we had only one driver to our five horses, his principal 
business seemed to consist in cracking his long whip, which, 
performed with great dexterity, made the forest echo and 
re-echo with the sound. Late in the night we reached a 
lonely dwelling, and, to our surprise, without any damage done 
to the carriage. Here we waited till clay dawned, and after a 
comfortless repast of coffee and black bread, again proceeded. 
From the nature of the quicksand of this part of the Nerung, 
we could only travel close to the margin of the sea, where it is 
the most solid. On our right hand were masses of ice, thrown 
into piles higher than the top of the carriage, by the force of 



232 CHAPTER XV. [1833. 

the sea during the late gales. At first the sea was pretty 
smooth ; but the wind soon shifted dead upon the shore, and 
as the gale increased, the surf broke violently on the beach, 
occasionally forcing itself many yards higher up the shore 
than our carriage, so that we seemed at times to be travelling 
actually in the sea, until it again recoiled and shewed the 
naked strand. In this manner several hours passed, until at 
length we began to edge away from the cutting blast, amidst 
a heavy fall of snow, until we finally reached the Niemen or 
Mem el river. We were favoured to land in perfect safety on 
the quay of Memel, — though such was the fury of the gale, 
that the carriage, after it had been lashed in its chucks, had 
to be lowered to the bottom of the boat, for fear of being upset 
in crossing. 

Thus have loving-kindness and tender mercy still followed 
me ; and I actually feel better in health than when I left 
London, though my legs and hands are somewhat swelled, 
probably with the cold. 

[He returned to this country in the Sixth Month following, 
where he was shortly afterwards joined by our brother Charles, 
who had believed it his duty to offer himself as a companion 
to his father, and was finally accepted in that capacity by the 
Meeting for Sufferings. In a letter written on this subject, 
dated the 2nd of Sixth Month, 1833, Charles Wheeler says, 

' Though by no means unconscious of my incapacity to 
act in a concern of such importance, and however inexpe- 
dient to the eye of mere reason such a step may be in a tem- 
poral point of view ; yet I cannot omit offering my assistance 
in any way which shall be deemed best to promote the object, 
allowing that it shall ultimately be deemed proper. Nature, 
as might be expected, shrinks from a step which involves such 
important consequences, and which in itself simply considered, 
is by no means such as I should have chosen ; yet my only 
wish in the case is, I trust, to act faithfully the part designed 
for me by that gracious Being, who has an undoubted right to 
dispose of his creatures according to the good pleasure of His 
will ; and keeping my obligation to do so in view, I do not see 



1833.] CHAPTER XV. 233 

how I can do other than make the offer which this is intended 
to convey.'' 

After the concern of our dear father had received the 
sanction of the Morning Meeting of ministers and elders in the 
Eleventh Month of 1832, as it appeared a question of some 
intricacy, how such an undertaking, requiring many voyages 
from island to island, could best be accomplished, a Committee 
of the Meeting for Sufferings was appointed to take the sub- 
ject into consideration, and to make such arrangements as 
might appear requisite for the object in view. Having devoted 
much time and attention to the investigation, after consulting 
several persons likely to give accurate information, and after 
very mature deliberation, the Committee came at length to the 
conclusion, as recommended by those whose local knowledge 
enabled them to form a correct judgment, to purchase a small 
vessel for the purpose, not only as the most suitable, but pro- 
bably in the end, the least expensive mode of conveyance. 

During the following summer, an opportunity occurred of 
purchasing, on reasonable terms, the Henry Freeling, lately a 
post-office packet, of 101 tons register. A number of Friends 
generously came forward, not only to pay for the vessel, but at 
a considerable expense to prepare her for the voyage. This 
offer the Committee gratefully accepted. 

The necessary arrangements having been completed, they 
sailed from the river Thames on the 13th of Eleventh Month, 
1 833, and were proceeding down the English Channel, when on 
the 21st they were overtaken by a heavy storm, which induced 
them to seek for shelter near the Isle of Wight. The fol- 
lowing extracts are from his journal and letters written, at this 
time.] 

To a Friend. 
Mother-bank, Eleventh Month 2lst, Six o'clock, p.m. 

Some ships that sailed with us have already reached 

the Mother-bank ; but it is thought that many will have to 
return to the Downs, as the weather is now becoming very 
stormy, and the wind directly opposed to our course down the 
channel. It is indeed a great favour to be enabled to find a 



234 CHAPTER XV. [1833. 

place of safety, and demands our humble gratitude and thank- 
fulness to Him who presides over every storm, whether of 
outwardly contending elements or of spiritual conflicts ; and 
though the present dispensation may impede our progress 
towards Cape Horn : yet it is my belief, and I am comforted 
in it, that all will be well at last, because ordered by Him 
in whose will I desire to rest, and in whose tender mercy I 
trust. 

To Mary Backhouse. 
Henry Freeling, Spithead, near Portsmouth, 
Eleventh Month 22nd, 1833. 
Thou wouldest perhaps hear from some kind friend, 



how much I had been engaged previously to taking a final 
departure from London ; so that I could not write to any one, 
my time was so fully occupied day by day, in rendering what 
assistance I could in the outfit of our little vessel. In addition 
to the bodily fatigue which pressed upon me, thou wilt, I am 
sure, be at once aware and capable of entering into the state of 
mind of one about to leave almost every thing near and dear 
on earth, and that one already stripped of the crown, far 
beyond the " price of rubies ;" but who can know it, like 
him that has to bear the loss of a virtuous woman : truly 
her children have abundant cause to " rise up and call her 
blessed, her husband also, and he praiseth her." But how- 
ever I may desire to be preserved, and to strive against a 
disposition to murmur at the dispensations of an ever-gracious 
and most merciful Lord God : yet I cannot cease to feel as one 
born out of due time, and as standing alone in many things 
amongst my brethren and sisters, and even as an alien in my 
Father's house. 

And now being far advanced in years, and on the point of 
quitting these shores for remote climes, can it be wondered at, 
if nature shrinks at the prospect before me ; and were it not 
for a knowledge in some degree of that Almighty power, whose 
arm of strength is made perfect in weakness, often to our 
humble admiration, and whose saving grace is at all times 
sufficient for us, what would be my situation at this day I 



1833.] CHAPTER XV. 235 

But blessed be the Lord God of heaven and earth for ever, He 
hath sustained me in a marvellous manner, and borne up my 
head at seasons, when the waves and the billows have swelled 
and threatened to overwhelm my soul. And now in mercy He 
enables me to look forward with calmness and resignation to 
His holy will ; shedding- abroad in my heart the constraining 
influence of that love which niaketh not afraid, but which, in 
the true dignity of its character, casteth out fear, and enableth 
the Christian traveller to persevere in the path that leads to 
blessedness. Having been strengthened thus far to come 
up in the obedience of faith, that justifying heavenly principle, 
I think I may say without a disposition to boast, (for truly all 
boasting is excluded, and the creature laid low as in the dust,) 
in the words of the great Apostle, — " we have peace with God, 
through our Lord Jesus Christ ; by whom also we have access 
by faith into this grace wherein we stand, and rejoice in hope 
of the glory of God. And we glory in tribulation also, know- 
ing that tribulation worketh patience, and patience experience, 
and experience hope, which maketh not ashamed ;" — a hope 
full of immortality, through the mercy of God in Christ Jesus : 
which has been hid from ages and generations, and is still hid 
from the great bulk of mankind because of unbelief. 

Our little Henry Freeling being nearly equipped and ready 
for sea, I took leave of the Committee of the Meeting for 
Sufferings, about a fortnight ago. It was a solemn interview, 
in which all were encouraged in the belief, that Friends had 
adopted the best mode that could be devised for accomplishing 
the service which I have in view, which was very satisfactory 
to many minds. From one circumstance or other, I was 
detained in the neighbourhood of London until the Morning 
Meeting held in course on the 11th instant ; when I found that 
I was not clear without bearing a testimony to the alarming- 
state of things amongst us, in a very close manner, and with a 
warning voice. But although my exercise was great, great 
was my consolation and peace after this was accomplished ; my 
way then seemed to open with clearness to depart. 

On the ]3th, accompanied by several Friends, we took 
passage in a steamer to Gravesend, whither the vessel had 



236 CHAPTER XV. [1833. 

preceded us ; and on account of the unsettled state of the crew, 
it was judged proper that we should repair on board that night. 
Before separating, we were favoured with a parting opportunity 
truly precious, and like au earnest of Divine regard ; in which 
our minds were united and solemnized together by the over- 
shadowing of everlasting love. It was as if the blessed Master 
was graciously pleased himself to preside, and to sanctify the 
offering which he had called for ; and under the consoling, 
contriting influence of this merciful visitation, we bade adieu. 
A coach was ready to take our Friends back to London, as 
soon as they had seen us down to the beach, where dear 
Charles and I embarked ; and after a long row in the dark, we 
found the Henry Freeling lying at the Lower Hope. The 
next morning we sailed for the Downs ; but the wind being 
contrary, we did not reach our anchorage till the 17th instant. 
The next day, we sailed with light airs of wind in our favour ; 
but after having served us a little further than Dover, they 
forsook us, and from that time we had to beat down the 
channel. On the 20th, the weather assumed a threatening- 
aspect ; and yesterday, it became so boisterous, with such 
strong and never-failing indications of tempestuous westerly 
gales, that it was deemed most expedient to bear up for the 
nearest port. A signal being made, we were favoured to obtain 
a pilot, as we stretched in upon the Isle of Wight ; soon after 
this it blew violently, and we were happily permitted to find 
shelter here, about an hour after night-fall. It has blown a 
tempest all the night, which still continues, so that at present 
all communication is cut off between us and the shore ; but 
last night I dispatched a few lines for the information of the 
Meeting for Sufferings. 

[On the 31st of Twelfth Month, he writes ;] in two days 
more we shall have been six weeks hereabouts, and I am 
sometimes ready to think our dear friends will be weary of 
hearing again and again, that we are still buffeted by adverse 
gales at the Mother-bank ; but the will of the Lord must be 
done : and I endeavour to wait patiently to see what He will be 
pleased to do for His great name's sake ; for He knows my 
downsitting and my uprising, and understandeth my thoughts 



1834.] CHAPTER XV. 237 

afar off ; and that the sole cause of my being here, is no other, 
than that I may be found coming up in the path of obe- 
dience to what I believed to be required of me. The con- 
sciousness of not being here in my own creaturely will and 
activity, reconciles me to all the turnings and overturnings of 
His holy hand ; and that He will continue to bear me up, is 
my humble prayer, until He shall be pleased to say, ' it is 
enough. 1 

To Hannah Brearv. 
Henri/ Freeling, 22nd of First Month, 1834. 

Still at the Mother-bank. I look round at others, 

but feel myself a close prisoner ; and forlorn indeed would be 
my condition, were it not for a most merciful and heavenly 
Keeper, whose unslumbering eye beholds the most solitary 
dwelling of his poorest creatures, and regarding all their wants, 
He openeth his bounteous hand and " satisfieth the desire of 
every living thing.'' 1 I have written very few letters of late, 
for my mind has been otherwise engaged, and often not a little 
depressed : but as regards our delay here, although trying to 
the will of the creature, I am comforted by a consoling evi- 
dence of having done all that I could to forward the work, to 
which I believe myself called ; and therefore I can rest peace- 
fully amidst the restless waters, which incessantly burst and 
foam within a few inches of my pillow. 

It is now thirty-eight years since I was witness to a season 
similar to this for south-westerly and westerly gales ; but 
with this difference, that the greater part of the winter was 
then spent at sea, instead of at Spithead, and much more 
disastrously : for after having been at one time seven weeks 
out of sight of land in a leaky ship, we were driven back to 
Spithead at last, with the loss of twenty-seven of our people. 
Should the present season be permitted to resemble that I 
allude to throughout, we have now been only half the time 
that we have to be detained. 

My dear Charles is as well as can be expected, but looks 
thin, and although he says little, it is evident he feels the time 
long ; but he bears up with a good degree of Christian patience. 



238 CHAPTER XV. [1834. 

My heart often yearns over him, having some knowledge of 
the bitterness he feels, and gladly would I share in his conflict 
to spare him ; but I am sometimes reminded of those expres- 
sions — ' Heaven tempers the wind to the shorn lamb ;' and it 
may be added, — ' Shorn indeed, and to the quick. -1 

On Fifth days, we regularly sit down together in my cabin, 
to wait upon the Lord ; and though frequently feeling some- 
thing like what is described as the solitary " sparrow on the 
house-top," — yet we know that even these poor outcasts are 
cared for ; and are sensible that strength is renewed, though 
perhaps, but in small degree. 

[During the detention of the vessel, it appeared that advan- 
tage would arise from a change being made in the person 
who had the charge of her ; and whilst the Committee were 
looking out for a more suitable one to supply his place, Daniel 
Wheeler thus writes, under date of 15th of Second Month, 
1834.] 

In treating with a person to take the command of our 
vessel, there are many stipulations which ought to be made 
and insisted upon, besides nautical skill and other qualifications. 
In the first place, it should be understood by the person in 
treaty for the station, that we are a Temperance vessel ; — 
secondly, that the crew are regularly assembled in the cabin 
twice on every First day, for devotional purposes ; and also that 
the Scriptures are read every morning and evening in the 
cabin on other days, when both the captain and mate are 
expected to (and now do) attend ; thirdly, that as much as 
practicable, all unnecessary work is dispensed with, as regards 
the sailors, on the First day of the week, to afford them a 
portion of time for themselves. These things ought, I think, 
to be thoroughly understood in the outset, so that nothing 
unpleasant may afterwards occur, when perhaps it would be 
too late to make them obligatory and bring about their esta- 
blishment. My motive for mentioning these particulars, is 
not to make the way more difficult for my dear Friends; 
but in order to save both time and trouble, and perhaps pre- 
vent much disappointment and uneasiness in future. 



1834..] CHAPTER XV. 239 

[Owing to a succession of contrary winds and boisterous 
weather, very unusual for such a length of time, their vessel, 
with many others, was detained until the 15th of the Third 
Month, 1831, when they set sail. On the 14th, Daniel Wheeler 
writes,] 

It is more than three months since I had my foot on the 
shore ; but if I had not persisted in remaining on board, I should 
not have been in possession of the true character of our seamen, 
nor of every minutias of the state and condition of our vessel. 
We have put her in the best trim which we are capable of 
doing, and must rely on One who is Almighty to help ; and if 
He is but with us, we shall have nothing to fear. Good 
indeed, [he adds,] has it been for me to be here ; and true it 
is also, that sufferings and tribulations have only been per- 
mitted in boundless mercy to draw me nearer and nearer to 
the bosom of my Lord, the only but never-failing source of 
consolation in every time of trial and distress : however dark 
the hour of conflict, the entrance of His word is light and life. 
[He further observes,] that the present great object of my life, 
the service before me, revives at seasons with increasing and 
encouraging brightness to my view. 

[The same day, being that previous to their sailing, he 
addressed a farewell letter to the Committee of the Meeting 
for Sufferings, as follows :] 

Henry Freeling, Mother-bank, Third Month 14>th, 1834. 

Upon reference I find that it is now considerably more than 
three months since I began a letter for the information of my 
clear friends, when anticipating that ere long we should be 
permitted to direct our course across the trackless ocean to 
the southern hemisphere ; but I had not completed more 
than half a sheet of paper, when the progress of my pen 
was arrested, by circumstances which have prevented any 
further addition being made until this day, when the way 
seems to open for resuming the subject — our departure bein g 
at hand. 

Among the many multiplied mercies and blessings which 
unceasingly flow from the bounteous and compassionate hand 



240 CHAPTER XV. [1834. 

of Him, who " crowncth the year with his goodness," and 
" satisfieth the desire of every living thing, 11 — I feel bound to 
acknowledge with humble thankfulness and admiration, our 
long detention on these shores. Notwithstanding there have 
been many gloomy days, and days of darkness, "as the 
morning spread upon the mountains, 1 '' and many long and 
dreary winter nights to pass through, when the raging storm 
has again and again whitened with foam the surface of the 
agitated deep around us ; and not only the strife of elements 
to witness without, but a conflicting and spiritual strife within, 
" tossed tt-ith tempest and not comforted ;" yet how unspeak- 
ably great the faithfulness of our good and gracious Lord 
God ! " His compassions fail not," but have been, and still 
continue to be, " new every morning," as the returning day; 
for in moments of the greatest conflict and trial there has been 
something permitted, like the " bow in the cloud,'"' for the 
poor mind to look at, to animate, and cheer, and to strengthen 
with hardness to endure and to stand firm. 

But although moon after moon hath waned, and faith and 
patience have been beset as on the right hand and on the left, 
and the afflictions of the gospel have at times been permitted 
to abound ; yet to the glory, and honour, and praise of Him, 
whose name ever excellent and adorable, shall be great among 
the nations, from the rising of the sun to the going down of 
the same, — the consolations of the gospel have also abounded, 
in a degree of the fulness of that heavenly blessing which 
makes truly rich, and whereunto no sorrow is added ; when 
faith hath been mercifully strengthened, and patience renewed 
under the tribulations of the day. And notwithstanding an 
untrodden path has been my portion, yet after all, though 
weakness and fear are my constant companions by the way, 
safety and peace have been hitherto found. I would, there- 
fore, encourage all my beloved friends to keep near to their 
heavenly Teacher and Leader ; who, if faithfully followed, will 
not only conduct their steppings to a hair's breadth, but will 
preserve and keep the mind in calmness and serenity, securely 
as in a pavilion, from the strife of tongues. 

In addition to the marvellous loving-kindness I have thus 



1834.] CHAPTER XV. 241 

endeavoured to pourtray, many other mercies and blessings have 
been showered upon our heads, during the apparently long and 
unaccountable detention of our little bark upon our own coasts ; 
these I have often had to number with grateful sensations, 
when the light has shone brightly, and manifested clearly to 
my finite understanding how much we should have missed, if 
our progress had not thus been arrested. So that with myself, 
instead of this delay having been productive of regret, or the 
cause of letting in fear or doubt, to stagger or depress my 
tribulated mind, — I do, my dear friends, hail it with gratitude 
and thankfulness, as the gracious and compassionate dealing 
of my Lord and Master ; not only as a time of Divine favour 
and condescension, but as an earnest of His love and mercy, for 
our encouragement, instruction, and future benefit, graciously 
vouchsafed, — a time of preparation for the important work 
before us, and of weaning from every dependence and guidance 
which are not of Him, to strengthen our confidence in His 
power to help and deliver out of every distress ; who not only 
commands the storm, but at whose rebuke the mountain billows 
cease to undulate, and lo ! " there is a great calm." 

Within the last two or three days, the prospect of liberation 
has begun to dawn with clearness ; but I trust, that if even a 
further detention should be meted out to us, either here or in 
some other port, the same resignation to the Divine Will, will 
be vouchsafed: for although I have for more than two years 
past, felt anxious to move forward in a work, which has yet to 
begin when the decay of nature is visible, and the shadows of 
the evening proclaim, as they lengthen around me, the steady 
decline of life's setting sun ; yet I have been frequently com- 
forted by a renewed evidence, that we have not yet been here 
one day too long. 

It will, I feel assured, afford my dear friends much satisfac- 
tion to know, that the crew of the vessel, notwithstanding the 
frequent though unavoidable communication with the neigh- 
bouring shore for so great a length of time, have given no 
cause for uneasiness by improper conduct, and that they have 
at all times behaved, with scarcely an exception, in an orderly 
and agreeable manner : the captain now provided for us seems 



242 CHAPTER XV. [1834 

to be judiciously selected, and the man who, beyond all expec- 
tation, is admirably adapted to aid and assist, by example and 
experience, in the accomplishment of the important object before 
us : so that I hope what has passed, and what may yet be in 
store for us, will be found and acknowledged to be among the 
" all things that work together for good. 1 ' I must not omit 
adding, that the solemn covering frequently witnessed in 
mercy to prevail and preside over us, when sitting together 
before the Lord, is worthy to be commemorated with humble 
gratitude, as the strongest and most indubitable evidence for 
our encouragement, that at seasons " He is with us of a truth." 

As it is now a period of the year when ships seldom sail to 
those parts to which we are destined, — whether we proceed by 
the Cape of Good Hope, which is most probable, or by Cape 
Horn, in either case a wintry season awaits us ; but my trust 
is in the Lord, not doubting but that we shall have the privi- 
lege of the prayers of the faithful for our preservation : and 
though conscious of our own weakness and utter unworthiness, 
and often under a feeling of being less than the least of all my 
dear brethren and sisters that are alive in the unchangeable 
Truth ; yet I think I can say that these things trouble me not, 
nor move me, neither count I my life dear unto myself, so that 
I might finish my course with joy, and the ministry which I 
have received of the Lord Jesus, to testify of the gospel of 
that grace, " which bringeth salvation, and hath appeared unto 
all men," teaching all ; that so from the uttermost parts of the 
earth songs of praise may be heard, and the grateful tribute 
of " thanks be to God for his unspeakable gift," may resound 
to his glory : for it is not of him that willeth, nor of him 
that runneth, but of God that showeth mercy ; it is " not 
by might nor by power; but by my Spirit, saith the Lord 
of Hosts." 

And now, whilst my heart is bearing towards the isles afar 
off, the same constraining love which wrought the willingness 
to leave all for my gracious Lord's sake and His gospel's, 
extends its binding influence to all my dear brethren and 
sisters, of every age and of every class, wherever situated, and 
however circumstanced ; desiring in tender and affectionate 



1834.] CHAPTER XV. 243 

solicitude, that they may be found stedfastly following the 
footsteps of those honourable and worthy predecessors in the 
same religious profession with ourselves, who have long since 
rested from their labours, and whose memorial is on high ; 
who bore the burden and heat of a day of deep suffering, in the 
faithful discharge of their duty, for the support of those prin- 
ciples in their original purity and brightness, which have been 
transmitted to us. If any should feel sensible of having fallen 
short in this important work, let me in tenderest love encourage 
such to be willing to humble themselves under the mighty 
hand of Grod, even to the state of little children ; and to turn 
inward to the pure, unflattering Witness, which cannot deceive 
nor be deceived ; to be willing to enter into a diligent and 
heart-felt search, and patiently and impartially examine how 
far those indispensable conditions are submitted to on their 
part, without which none can be followers of the meek and 
lowly Jesus. Where is that self-denial and the daily cross 
He first enjoined I Are we denying ourselves those gratifica- 
tions of time and sense, which cherish and keep alive in us the 
evil propensities of fallen nature, that separate man from his 
Maker, and like the little foxes which spoil the tender vines, 
designed in richest mercy to bud, blossom, and bring forth 
fruit, lastingly to remain to the praise and glory of the great 
Husbandman ? Without faithfulness, there will be no fruit- 
fulness. It is not giving up or forsaking this or that little 
thing, to part with which is little or no sacrifice or privation, 
that will suffice ; a full surrender of the whole will in all 
things, must be made to Him, whose sovereign right it is to rule 
and reign in our hearts. Let none plead for disobedience in 
these little things, on the ground of their being such ; for if such 
they really are, they are the more easily dispensed with, and 
not worth retaining ; and a tenacity in wishing to preserve 
them, assuredly indicates, that they have more place in our 
affections than perhaps we are aware of : "he that loveth 
father or mother more than me, is not worthy of me ; and he 
that loveth son or daughter more than me, is not worthy of 
me ; and he that taketh not his cross, and followeth after me,, 
is not worthy of me." 

r2 



244 CHAPTER XV, [1834. 

And now, my dear brethren and sisters, " may the God of 
peace, who brought again from the dead our Lord Jesus, that 
great Shepherd of the sheep, through the blood of the ever- 
lasting covenant, keep all your hearts and minds ;" and " make 
you perfect in every good work to do His will, working in you 
that which is well-pleasing in His sight, through Jesus Christ ; 
to whom be glory for ever and ever." 

In the love of the everlasting gospel, accept this expression 
of farewell, from your affectionate friend and brother, 

Daniel Wheeler. 

loth of Third Month, at Sea, and clear of 
the Needle Rods, all well. 

[During their long stay at the Mother-bank, Daniel Wheeler 
says in his journal.] — It has been our usual practice, except 
when prevented by particular and sufficient causes, to assemble 
the crew in the cabin twice on every First day of the week 
with the captain and mate, to read to them a portion of the 
Holy Scriptures, and to sit together before the Lord in solemn 
silence. The first time of our assembling in this manner, it 
was my lot to break in upcn the silent solemnity which pre- 
vailed in a remarkable manner over us, and to call their 
attention to the magnitude of the voyage in contemplation ; 
feeling no hesitation in believing, that every individual present 
was desirous that it might be prosperous ; and the desire of my 
heart was, that it might be so in reality, not only as regarded 
the safety of the ship and of ourselves, but that it might prove 
a voyage towards the kingdom of heaven, into which nothing 
that is unclean or impure, " nothing that worketh an abomina- 
tion, or that maketh a lie, can ever enter. - " In order that this 
might be the case, we must do every thing in the fear of the 
Lord ; and the way to prove we feared Him, was to keep a 
diligent watch over our thoughts, words, and actions, &c. 

Although this was a novel scene to all of them, they behaved 
with great solidity, and becoming attention ; and the peaceful 
covering so evidently manifest to spread and remain over us, 
was truly precious and worthy of commemoration. Although 
the weather was extremely rough and boisterous at the time, 



1834.] CHAPTER XV. 245 

and the sea occasionally bursting over the deck, all was quiet 
and undisturbed below. On inquiry when we broke up, it 
was found that several of the men were not provided with 
copies of the Scriptures. They were of course, in due time, 
all furnished. 



246 CHAPTER XVI. [1834. 



CHAPTER XVI. 

DEPARTURE FROM THE BRITISH CHANNEL, WITH A PAIR WIND, 
15TH OF THIRD MONTH, 1834 VOYAGE TO RIO JANEIRO. 

[The succeeding extracts are from his journal and letters, 
commencing with the last date.] 

After despatching our letters by the pilot on the 15th 
of Third Month, we made sail into the offing at half-past 
four, p.m., and stretching from under the shelter of the Isle 
of Wight, soon partook of a strong and favourable breeze : 
great progress was made during the night ; next morning 
brought an increase of wind along with it. From the state 
of the weather and the harassed situation of the crew and 
other circumstances, although it was the First day of the week, 
we were compelled to give up the idea of assembling together in 
the cabin, and to content ourselves with reading the Holy 
Scriptures twice in the course of the day with the captain and 
mate. At five o'clock, p. m., we were abreast of the Lizard 
light-houses on the Cornish coast, from whence our final 
departure was taken : as the night approached, the land was 
lost sight of, and the wind being strong and fair, we launched 
rapidly away from the mouth of the British Channel. On Second 
day morning, the 17th, the wind veered more to the southward, 
and considerably increasing, soon raised a heavy sea, which 
occasioned one side of the vessel to be frequently buried 
under water. Until now she had scarcely leaked at all ; but 
it soon became needful to pump freely every two hours, and 
occasionally every hour. This was a little discouraging to most 
of us ; but I recollected having heard from a carpenter who 
had formerly sailed in her, that she used to let in a quantity of 
water in rough weather, whenever on that tack. On consider- 
ing the matter, and knowing the great pains that had been 
taken, by our friend W. T., to make her sea-worthy, and having 
witnessed the caulking, felting, sheathing and coppering that 
had been bestowed upon her, I felt satisfied that this leak did 



1834.] CHAPTEK XVI. 247 

not exist in any part which is constantly under water, hut could 
only he in her upper works. This conclusion, I have good reason 
to believe will be found correct, for as the wind and sea have 
been more behind her, and that side not so deeply buried, less 
pumping has been required. 

Third Month \Sth. — Our situation in the cabin was rendered 
more uncomfortable, as from the frequent bursting of the sea 
over our deck, it became necessary to secure the sky-light to 
prevent accident. This reduced us into almost total darkness in 
the day-time, as no light could now penetrate, except through 
the thick glass bull's eyes in the deck, and these were covered 
with a body of water, which rushed continually from side to 
side as the vessel rolled ; so that reading or writing, except by 
lamp-light, was laid aside altogether. 

The 20th, being Fifth day, our usual meeting day when at 
home, my dear Charles and myself sat down together to wait 
upon the Lord ; but although we were scarcely able to retain 
our seats from the motion of the ship, yet I humbly trust 
we were favoured, poor outcasts as we seemed to be, to look 
towards His temple,— to fear Him, and to think upon His name. 
Notwithstanding the weather became more and more tempest- 
uous, yet the fair wind never once forsook us ; but on the 22nd 
the sea ran so high, that it was dangerous for any one to be 
upon deck, and Captain Keen began to fear that we should be 
under the necessity of turning the head of the vessel towards 
the sea and wind ; accordingly the storm canvass was prepared 
in readiness to use, when it should become no longer safe to 
run before a sea, which now followed in mountainous succession, 
rising to an alarming height above the stern of our little flying 
bark, and threatening at times to overwhelm us altogether. 

23rd. — From the boisterous state of the weather, although 
First day had again revolved, we were prevented from col- 
lecting the crew for devotional purposes ; and could only 
read some portions of Scripture as before. By this time 
our little vessel had been pretty roughly handled and tried, 
and had given full proof of her capability. The captain 
acknowledged that she had done wonders, and had greatly 
surpassed the idea he had formed of her, and the crew to a 



248 CHAPTER XVI. [1834. 

man expressed their satisfaction ; and I saw myself no cause 
to alter the favourable opinion that I had constantly enter- 
tained from the first sight of her. We are all aware of the 
advantage which would have resulted, had she been large 
enough to have carried a greater supply of fresh water and 
coals, without being so deeply buried in the water, which con- 
tinually exposes us to the drench of the sea, even in what may 
be termed favourable weather ; and in rough, we are frequently 
debarred from all exercise upon deck in fresh air, to avoid the 
risk of being injured by the wash of the sea. I feel, how- 
ever, grateful a,nd thankful in my present allotment, and for 
the accommodation thus rendered by my dear friends ; humbly 
trusting that we shall be sustained through all to declare the 
mighty acts of the Lord, and to show forth His praise in the 
presence of a people who have not heard His fame, nor seen 
His glory, neither conceived the majesty of His kingdom within, 
of " righteousness, and peace, and joy in the Holy Ghost ;"' 
which stands mercifully revealed in the hearts of those, who 
are concerned above all things to seek first this heavenly 
kingdom, and to believe therein, to the saving of the soul. 

On the 24th there was an evident change in the tempera- 
ture of the atmosphere; the sun shone brightly, and its warmth 
gladdened our hearts, as we sat on a small space near the 
stern of the vessel, which had been preserved pretty free from 
the spray of the sea : the wind, although still favourable, had 
lessened; the white-topped billows had considerably diminished, 
and our deck was this day more free from water rushing from 
side to side, than had been the case for more than a week 
past. Some turtle were seen floating near the ship, and things 
altogether around us began to wear a brightening aspect ; but 
what tended most to enliven and make all things smile, was 
the marvellous condescension of my dear Lord and Master, 
who, in the greatness of his love, was graciously pleased, for the 
first time since I had offered up my all to follow Him in this 
untrodden path of apprehended duty, to open my spiritual 
understanding, and permit me to behold, to a certain extent, 
the nature of the service upon which I should have to enter, 
in some places where my lot may be cast. I now plainly saw 



1834.] CHAPTER XVI. 249 

that before leaving England, I was not fit to be entrusted 
thus far with the secrets of my Master. I believe I could not 
have refrained from imparting them in degree to some of those 
whom I dearly love ; but happily I am now beyond the reach 
of such a temptation. Perhaps I was not then sufficiently 
reduced into a state of preparation suitable for the reception 
of so much of the Divine Will being revealed, nor sufficiently 
humbled into a state of abasedness of self. Greatly do I 
desire for myself and all my dear friends, that we may 
be brought more and more into such a state as to be fit 
and able to bear further portions of the many things which 
our great and heavenly Teacher, in his wondrous and never- 
erring counsel, has to say to such as fear, and love, and 
follow Him in the great work of regeneration : — " I have many 
things to say unto you, but ye cannot bear them now :" and if 
we were but sufficiently willing to hearken to his voice, He would 
still, I am persuaded, not only have many things to say unto 
us as individuals, but unto the church also, by that " Holy 
Spirit which searcheth all things, yea, the deep things of God." 
Then may all our hearts be so cleansed and purified through 
the efficacy of his grace, as to be prepared to receive the pro- 
mised and ever abiding Comforter, who " will take of the 
things of Christ, and show them unto us," yea, "He will show 
us things to come." 

Third Month %0th. — The weather beautiful, and wind 
favourable. Assembled the ship's company both morning and 
evening in the cabin. Whilst sitting together ;n silence in the 
forenoon, I felt an engagement of mind to magnify the loving- 
kindness of our good and gracious helper, and to turn their 
attention as witnesses to the unmerited mercy and favour 
bestowed upon us, by the Lord's having so evidently and emi- 
nently prospered our way ; desiring that gratitude and thank- 
fulness might be felt by every individual ; and declaring, 
unhesitatingly, that if we fear and love Him, He will bless 
and prosper us altogether. It was also with me to remind 
them, that although from circumstances of one kind or other, 
we might not be able to collect together in this way, yet 
nothing should prevent us from fearing and loving the Lord ; 



250 CHAPTER XVI. [1834. 

that in the darkest night, our thoughts were not hidden from 
Him : quoting that expression of the Psalmist, when under a 
constraining sense of the omnipresence of the Deity, " Whi- 
ther shall I go from thy Spirit V &c. May the Lord be 
pleased to lay his Fatherly hand upon them ! 

Fourth Month 7th. — The sea being tolerably smooth, the 
cabin sky-light was opened a few inches, as our health began 
to suffer from want of air. The sun being almost vertical, has 
been very hot and scorching. The effect of being transported 
in about three weeks from the cold winds which blew at the 
Mother-bank, to the burning heat of the sun near the equator, 
can be estimated only by those who have witnessed such a 
change in so small a vessel as the Henry Freeling. The night 
air seems to come off the heated deserts of Africa, charged with 
dampness most unwholesome. 

21st. — After having been nearly twelve whole days and 
nights within five degrees of the equator, we were favoured to 
get to the southward of it at an early hour this morning. 

Fifth Month 5th. — Although hitherto favoured with a 
passage, such as no person on board had ever before witnessed 
for favourable winds and weather, yet it now became consider- 
ably lengthened out from the prevalence of calms and light 
airs of wind, not only whilst in the neighbourhood of the 
equinoctial line, but at a later period. This circumstance 
seemed to point out at once the necessity of our abandoning 
the intention of aiming at the Cape of Grood Hope for a supply 
of water, &c, on account of the advanced state of the winter 
season, and the probability of not being able to reach that 
place before those heavy gales set in, which render its approach 
so difficult : it was also remembered, that if we once made the 
attempt, there was then no alternative left to us, but that we 
must continue to hover about until we did accomplish that 
object, let the weather be ever so tempestuous, as we must 
undoubtedly perish at sea for want of water before we could 
possibly reach Van Clemen's Land, a distance from the Cape 
of Good Hope of more than 6200 miles ; and from our present 
situation to the Cape it is full 3500 miles. After deliberately 
weighing these considerations, it seemed expedient (however 



1834.] CHAPTER XVI. 251 

contrary to our wishes, to visit a place where superstition and 
slavery appear with open face.) to bear down towards the South 
American continent for Rio de Janeiro, and thence procure the 
needful supplies, if permitted to reach it in safety. 

\.0th. — At sun-set a brig was seen upon our lee quarter, 
steering the same course as ourselves, perhaps three or four 
miles distant from us ; she was soon covered up by the night, 
and no more thought of. Being upon the deck, (an usual 
practice with me the fore-part of the night,) between nine and 
ten o'clock, the carpenter suddenly exclaimed, ' Why here's 
the brig P Upon looking, I saw the vessel at a considerable 
distance from us ; but soon perceived by the stars, that she was 
approaching with uncommon rapidity in a most suspicious 
direction, as if intending to cross our fore-foot, and cut us off. 
We watched her very narrowly, expecting every minute she 
would open a fire upon us. She continued to haul directly 
across our head at a very short distance from us ; but we steadily 
kept our course, without the slightest variation, or manifesting 
any symptoms of hurry or fear, or noticing her in any way. 
I felt our situation to be at the moment very critical, know- 
ing that these latitudes, and particularly this neighbourhood, 
are exceedingly infested with piratical vessels, which find 
shelter in the Brazilian harbours as traders, where they fit out 
occasionally for Africa with merchandize, and return with 
whole cargoes of oppressed Africans for sale, landing them on 
private parts of the Brazil coast ; at other times, they act as 
pirates, when it suits their convenience, or are in want of stores. 
This was indeed a trial of faith of no common kind ; but my 
mind was staid upon the Lord, feeling a good degree of resig- 
nation to his Holy will, whatever might be permitted to 
befall us. After watching the vessel with anxiety for some 
time, she passed away, without making the least apparent 
stop. On considering the matter, we concluded, that when 
she saw us at sun-set, we were taken for a Dutch galiot, that 
might fall an easy prey to her ; but when she came up to us 
in the dark, near enough to examine with telescopes the real 
shape of our vessel, we were found of such a suspicious build 
of a non-descript kind, not seen before in these seas, as led to 



252 CHAPTER XVI. [1834. 

the supposition that we were intended as a decoy ; and though 
very tame looking without, yet perhaps fiery hot within, if 
meddled with. From the position she took, there is no doubt 
she expected to throw us into confusion by firing into us, and 
then, in the midst of it, to have boarded us on the weather 
side. There was not the least glimmer of light to be seen on 
board of her ; whilst the Henry Freeling was well lighted up in 
both cabins and the binnacle, and the reflection from our sky- 
lights was well calculated to puzzle and intimidate the crew, as 
this circumstance would be sufficient at once to show that we 
were not a common merchant vessel. The captain, cook, steward, 
Charles, and myself, were all additional persons upon the deck, 
besides the regular watch, which would give an idea of strength, 
unusual in so small a vessel as the Henry Freeling. Every 
thing was conducted with great quietness, not the least hint 
given to any one on board to prepare for an attack : the 
watch below was not even informed of what seemed to await us. 
The Lord only was our deliverer, for she was restrained from 
laying a hand upon our little bark ; and to Him alone our 
preservation is with gratitude and thankfulness ascribed. The 
crews of these pirates consist in general of desperadoes of all 
nations, who frequently commit the most dreadful atrocities 
on board the ships they seize, putting to death all those who 
oppose their boarding them : they are mostly crowded with 
men amply sufficient in number to take and destroy some of 
our large armed traders. This vessel was doubtless a selected 
one for the work : we thought she actually sailed twice as fast 
as the Henry Freeling, which is far from being a slow vessel. 
We saw no more of her, and after midnight I partook of some 
refreshing sleep. 

[It may be here observed, that during their stay at Rio, an 
American captain, who had seen them at a distance at sea, 
going on board, he was asked what he thought of the Henry 
Freeling, when he saw her and his own vessel becalmed, near the 
equator : his answer was, that he did not like the look of her, 
and was glad when he could get farther away from her. There 
is little doubt that we were taken for a pirate by all that 



1834.] CHAPTER XVI. 253 

saw us, which perhaps might be of advantage, except that it 
deprived us entirely of sending letters by any homeward-bound 
ships, as none would have liked to come near, to ascertain what 
we really were.] 

I lth, First day. — The weather being beautifully fine, the 
crew were collected upon deck twice in the course of the day, 
for devotional purposes, &c. 

VLth. — Fine weather, with a fair wind all the day, and 
a prodigious swell of the sea from the south-east. The swell 
was so immensely large, that we concluded that the summit of 
one wave was at least half a mile distant from that of another. 

A little before five o'clock, p.m., land was proclaimed by the 
man at the mast-head ; shortly after, we were able to behold 
from the deck the lofty cliff of Cape Frio on the coast of Brazil, 
about sixty miles east of Rio de Janeiro, just in the position 
and about the distance it was calculated to be, from the true 
time of our chronometers, the lunar observations, and the dead 
reckoning ; all combining to prove the accurate navigation of 
the vessel, and the nautical skill we possess on board of her. 
Although we seem to be destitute of all interest upon this 
coast, beyond that of the welfare of mankind the world over ; 
yet, after being fifty-eight days from England, during fifty- 
seven of which, nothing was to be seen but water and sky ; 
without having spoken another vessel, or even seen more than 
six, the sight of Cape Frio was cheering and animating, and 
raised in my heart a tribute of thanksgiving and praise to our 
never-failing Helper, who hath in mercy sustained us in perfect 
safety, across such a prodigious expanse of mighty waters. 

Fifth Month IWi. — The wind continuing favourable, although 
not very brisk, the whole of the night, considerable progress 
was made to the westward ; but when the day broke, it was 
discovered that a strong current had swept us farther off the 
land several miles than was the case the preceding evening. 
Every possible exertion was made throughout the day, and the 
different headlands and rocky islands upon the coast were so 
far recognized as to enable us to steer with confidence towards 
the mouth of the river, which we entered about three o'clock, 
p. m. We had intended to run up the harbour of Rio till nearly 



254 CHAPTER XVI. [183 i. 

opposite the town ; but soon after passing the fort of Santa 
Cruz, from which several questions were asked, we were 
compelled immediately to anchor, by an order from the guard- 
vessel. In a short time after this, a bill of health was demanded, 
and a certificate, signed by the Brazilian Consul in London, 
but as neither of these could be produced, the vessel was at 
once declared under quarantine ; and as it was in vain to 
remonstrate, quiet submission was all that was left in our 
power, which was manifested by our immediately hoisting a 
yellow flag. Although somewhat prepared for this event, I 
was a little disappointed, having anticipated that we should be 
once more enabled to stretch our limbs upon the shore, an 
exercise from which we had long been debarred. For my own 
part, I had not landed or been absent from the vessel for 
upwards of six months, except the short interval of enjoyment 
in the company of our dear friends of the Committee from the 
Meeting for Sufferings at the town of Eyde, in the Isle of 
Wight ; but I trust, whether we are permitted to land or not 
on these shores, that the same Almighty arm of strength will 
continue to uphold us, which has been hitherto so marvellously 
stretched out for our support. For although we have been fifty- 
nine days from the Mother-bank, yet out of that time twenty- 
one days have been expended in calms and light breezes, fifteen 
of which occurred, while near the equinoctial line, without 
intermission. But the most remarkable thing is, that we have 
never made one tack, from the time of leaving England to our 
anchoring here this day, notwithstanding we have passed over 
more than fifty degrees of north latitude, and twenty-three 
degrees of south, (at sixty miles to a degree,) with upwards 
of forty-three degrees west longitude. Would it then be 
accounted presumption in any one to hope, that He, under 
whose constraining influence, in love unutterable, this voyage 
was prompted, will be graciously pleased to prosper it, from 
the beginning to the end, and cause it ultimately to tend to 
the advancement of the Redeemer's kingdom, in the hearts of 
some of the benighted sons and daughters of the human family ; 
although such blessed effects may never be permitted to come 
to our knowledge or to gladden our hearts. 



1834.] CHAPTER XVI. 255 

[Here they performed a quarantine of five days.] 
21th of Fifth Month. — To-day several hours have been spent 
on shore by Charles and myself, for the purpose of expediting 
the shipment of the needful supplies ; in the course of which we 
had much satisfaction in unexpectedly becoming acquainted 
with two serious persons, both natives of Scotland, at the 
house of James Thornton, a relation of our kind friend 
William Tindall, whose family is one of the solitary few 
in this place, who are desiring to do the thing that is right. 
Although we were amply provided with introductory letters, 
&c, to all the ports of importance throughout the whole 
voyage, viz. : the Cape of Good Hope, the Derwent or Hobart 
Town, New South Wales, Lima, .Valparaiso, Coquimbo, and 
others ; besides letters from the London Missionary Society's 
Secretary William Ellis, to that Society's correspondents 
upon many islands of the Pacific Ocean, where missionaries 
are established ; yet at last we were in some measure compelled 
to enter a port for which, with all our contrivance, we do not 
possess a single document, and are even unfurnished with a 
bill of health. After considering the subject, I told my son 
Charles, that I thought our coming here would not be without 
answering some good end, though at the time there might be 
nothing in view, nor had any thing occurred to give rise to 
such a supposition ; but on our meeting with the two serious 
persons above-mentioned, an opening for some service presented 
to my mind, and from the conversation which took place while 
we were together, it seemed pretty clear to me that we should 
see each other again. Before we parted, I was invited to attend 
a meeting, which is held by the well-disposed English of this 
town every First day evening at seven o'clock, which by them 
is termed a prayer-meeting. I told them, after acknowledging 
their kindness, that I could not give an answer at the moment, 
that I must wait to see what to-morrow would bring forth ; 
and that if the way opened for me to accept the invitation, I 
would take care to be in time. Although it was very evident 
to me that it was no light thing for a member of our religious 
Society to attend such a meeting, and faithfully support the 
different peculiar testimonies given us as a people to bear, and 



256 CHAPTER XVI. [183-1. 

which to some might appear like opposition to or slighting the 
forms and ceremonies which they have been trained, perhaps 
from early youth, to the daily practice of, yet it did not seem 
a time for me to shrink or hold back on that account : leaving 
the matter altogether unfixed, we returned to our vessel for 
the night. 

25tk. — Both forenoon and afternoon the crew were assem- 
bled in the usual manner : at both seasons a quiet feeling- 
seemed to prevail. In the course of the day, the prospect 
of attending the meeting on shore, as a burden upon my 
shoulders, increased as the day wore away ; and believing 
that I should not be clear without giving up to it, accompanied 
by Charles, I set forward, and reaching the shore just as it 
became dark, repaired immediately to the house of James 
Thornton, where the meeting was to be held. I thought there 
would be a propriety in speaking to some of the principal per- 
sons privately before the meeting commenced ; so taking them 
aside, I told them, that although we might have the same great 
and important object in view, yet it was probable that we might 
not all see exactly alike, and therefore I should prefer their 
going on with their meeting as usual ; and if, after it was over, 
we might be allowed to come in and sit down amongst them, it 
would perhaps be the most agreeable on both sides ; at the same 
time, I candidly stated, that we could not engage to kneel when 
they did, neither was it our practice to sing : and that we were 
desirous to offend neither Jew, nor Gentile, nor the Church. 
After some further conversation, it was concluded that they 
should proceed as usual, and that we should sit by, and act, 
as was most easy to ourselves. Accordingly, at the time 
appointed, the company repaired to another room prepared for 
the occasion, where some others were seated in readiness ; and 
amongst these, were several young black people that understood 
English. It was previously arranged, that when the meeting 
was quite over, the certificate furnished me by my dear friends 
of the Morning Meeting in London, should be read, in order 
to account to all present for the appearance of strangers, and 
to open the way for any communication on my part that might 
arise. 



1834.] CHAPTEB XVI. 25 ( 

We retained our seats the whole time, and my mind being 
under considerable weight of exercise, it was a relief to be left, 
as it were, in the quiet. The meeting being concluded, James 
Thornton read the Morning Meeting's certificate ; and after 
commenting awhile on its contents, we were favoured to drop 
into solemn silence, which continued until interrupted by my 
having to state, that it had never been contemplated before 
leaving England, that we should have to touch at a place 
where bigotry, superstition, and slavery stalk unmasked with 
open face, particularly as it had not come within the range of 
the prospect before us. I acknowledged having mentioned to 
my son some days ago, that I thought our coming here 
must be for some object unknown to us at that time ; but 
since we had been sitting together, I found that the Lord 
had a seed, even in this place, that fear Him and think upon 
his name ; and unto these in an especial manner, my heart 
was enlarged in the love of the everlasting gospel, that love 
which would gather all mankind into the heavenly garner of 
rest and peace. I had not proceeded much farther in the 
expression of a desire that their " faith might not stand in the 
wisdom of man, but in the power of God," before I had to 
turn their attention to the solemnity so evidently spreading 
over us, as the crown and diadem of every rightly gathered 
religious assembly ; a feeling not at our command, nor in the 
power of man to produce, and which could only be felt, when 
the Great Head of the church fulfils his gracious promise, — 
" where two or three are gathered together in my name, there 
am I in the midst of them." After this the way seemed fully 
opened, and a door of entrance also for the doctrines of the 
gospel in plainness and freedom. I had particularly to speak 
of the nature of true spiritual worship, and waiting upon the 
Lord, — the necessity of knowing for ourselves the great work of 
regeneration to be going on, — the true faith of the gospel as it 
is in Jesus the Author and Finisher thereof, which worketh 
by love, purifieth the heart, and giveth. victory over death, hell, 
and the grave; — stating that I had nothing new to offer, — 
that " other foundation can no man lay, than that is laid, 
which is Jesus Christ;" — reviving the terms prescribed by 



258 CHAPTER XVI. [1834. 

Himself to those who would become his disciples and followers : 
— " the poor in spirit," were reminded, that to them the 
blessing appertains, and the kingdom belongs : — the woful 
sentence to the unprofitable servant, was contrasted with 
that of the faithful occupier of his Lord's talents ; — the beauty, 
purity, and spirituality of the true gospel church, and the 
necessity and practicability of becoming members thereof, 
while here on earth, was held up to view. Considerable broken- 
ness appeared in some individuals ; and I believe it may be said, 
that Truth rose into dominion, and reigned over all. For 
my own part, I never recollect being more sensible of continued 
weakness and fear from the beginning to the end ; the crea- 
ture was laid low, and I trust was only desirous that all praise 
might be ascribed to Him to whom it belongs for ever. 
This was indeed a precious opportunity, and although not 
obtained without ploughing a furrow six or seven thousand 
miles in length, across the unstable surface of the ocean, yet 
the love, joy, and peace that remain, are a rich and ample 
reward. We reached our little bark in perfect safety, with 
hearts full of comfort, pretty soon after ten o'clock at night, 
while a torrent of rain was falling ; in the midst of which the 
water was so remarkably luminous, that every stroke of the 
oars seemed to dash the fire about us, and the tract of the 
boat was like frosted silver. The boat was manned with 
natives of Africa, now held in cruel bondage in this place ; 
they are, however, treated by us as fellow-men and brethren, 
and truly my heart abounds with love not easily to be 
described, towards these poor creatures. 

Fifth Month 27th. — We were invited to meet some of the 
individuals, with whom the meeting had been held the pre- 
ceding First day evening, at the house of one of them, to 
afford them an opportunity of asking some questions on 
particular points of Scripture doctrine. To this there was no 
difficulty on my part in complying, feeling more than usual 
freedom towards these people. 

After having previously taken what exercise on foot the 
interval would afford, about the time fixed upon we repaired to 
the place appointed. One of those whom we thus met, is an 



1834.] chapteb xvr. 259 

individual of ardent and capacious mind, and of a most amiable 
and benevolent disposition ; possessing- at the same time all the 
advantages of a scholar being acquainted with several languages, 
and well versed in the Sacred Writings ; and yet with all his 
good qualities and talents, he is lamentably bewildered and 
carried away by enthusiastic ideas of the time being near when 
the Messiah will reign personally upon the earth. He brought 
forward several texts of Scripture to prove the correctness and 
solidity of the argument upon which this hope was esta- 
blished, which, according to the impressions upon my mind, 
simply relate to the great and important work of conversion 
and regeneration in the hearts of all true believers, and which 
all have to pass through according to their measure, who are 
washed, sanctified, and justified, " in the name of the Lord 
Jesus, and by the Spirit of our God." It was with me to 
show him the snare by which he was so thoroughly entangled, 
and the effect which it had of causing him to be altogether 
looking without for that kingdom, which can only be found, and 
must, as an indispensable duty first be sought for, " within." 

It occurred to me as a suitable opportunity to bring forward 
the subject of the Scriptures being so frequently termed by pro- 
fessing Christians ' The word of G-od ;' that although many per- 
sons might not be in danger by this practice, of attaching more 
to the letter than belongs to it, yet it was much to be feared that 
its tendency was highly injurious, and opposed to the spirituality 
of the gospel dispensation. I found there was an openness to 
receive this remark, which was not confined to this person 
alone, but extended to another present ; and that they had 
previously felt some doubts on this very important point. At 
last one of them, as if at once convinced in his understanding, 
exclaimed in the words of the apostle Peter, " And this is the 
word, which by the gospel is preached unto you." Several 
other questions were put to us, which I believe were answered 
satisfactorily to them. I trust that the time expended was to 
some edification, and that the noble cause did not suffer, though 
in the hands of such feeble advocates. 

A copy of Bates Doctrines and a pamphlet were thankfully 
received by an individual of the place, who, I am persuaded, 

c '9 



2G0 CHAPTER XVI, [1834. 

will not be disposed to keep them to himself. I was in hopes 
whilst here, of having an opportunity of distributing part of 
our stock of Bibles in the Spanish language ; but I could not 
find any person willing to undertake the risk of their being 
found in his possession. In the course of inquiry on the 
subject, it appeared that a considerable number of copies of 
the Scriptures in the Portuguese language were at one time 
brought into this country, and it is supposed were destroyed, 
under pretence of their being too imperfect a translation to be 
circulated. 

29th. — Having informed Captain Keen last night, that we 
were ready for sea, at an early hour this morning, every pre- 
paration was made for our departure, and a countersign obtained 
from the commandant of the uppermost fort in the harbour, 
to enable us to pass the outermost fort of Santa Cruz. At this 
place our shackles were all struck off, and the ocean set open 
before us. When we arrived within hail of the fort, some 
questions were asked, amongst others, ' where are you bound V 
To Tahiti was the reply, which, agreeing with our entry 
outwards at the Custom house in London, was accepted. The 
countersign was then demanded, and which was immediately 
given by us. This was demanded and answered a second 
time, when ' I wish you a good voyage,' closed the ceremony. 
Our captain having acknowledged the good wish, we took in 
our boat, again trimmed the sails to the breeze, and bidding fare^- 
well to the coast of Brazil, stretched into the southern ocean. 
As rounding Cape Horn was my first intention, it has at 
times passed before me, that if on our leaving Bio de Janeiro, 
the wind should be strong and favourable for steering towards 
it, I should feel a little difficulty in deciding which route to 
aim at ; but I believe I have felt desirous to be guided aright in 
this particular. 

It being Fifth day, Charles and myself sat down together 
in the cabin as usual ; and after deep wading, a degree of that 
spiritual strength was graciously vouchsafed, by which only 
the thoughts and imaginations of the heart can be cast down 
and subdued. 

We were informed on respectable authority, that two-thirds 



1834.] CHAPTER XVt. 261 

of the population of the neighbourhood of ' St. Sebastian,' con- 
sist of coloured people, and that nothing could keep them 
in such a state of cruel and abject slavery, but their having 
been taken from different tribes in Africa, amongst whom a 
most inveterate enmity has constantly existed ; and care has 
industriously been taken to keep perpetually alive such a spirit 
of revenge against each other, as cannot be destroyed even by 
slavery itself. This is spoken of as a politic measure, lest 
they should unite and set themselves free : dreadful indeed 
would the day be to the majority of their white masters, should 
such a thing come to pass, unless controlled by a higher power. 
The slave-trade, though nominally abolished, is still carried on 
to a dreadful extent, in an underhand manner. Many ships 
go away loaded from hence to Africa, and return with large 
cargoes of these unhappy victims, which they land on distant 
parts of the coast, and then come into the harbour, with 
perhaps a few elephants'' teeth, as if from an unsuccessful 
voyage. This is well understood, and winked at. We were 
informed, that five hundred newly imported negroes, might be 
purchased in the neighbourhood at any time. Although our 
tarriance at Rio de Janeiro was little more than a fort- 
night ; yet many of the poor negroes who had been connected 
with us by employment or otherwise, had become much 
attached to us : and some hours after having left the coast, it 
was fully ascertained that only a very slight occurrence had 
prevented three of these people from being secreted on board 



The Roman Catholic religion appears to be rapidly declining 
in Brazil ; but alas ! the religion of Jesus is still afar off to the 
human eye. In two of the principal orders of friars, we under- 
stood that no vacancy occasioned by death is permitted to 
be filled up, so that these must finally die away altogether in 
a few years ; and they are now compelled to render an account 
of their finances, as the property of the monasteries (at one 
time immensely rich) is undergoing a regular transfer to the 
public treasury, in proportion as the original holders diminish. 



262 chapter xv'n. [1834. 



CHAPTER XVIL 

DEPARTURE FROM RIO JANEIRO PROCEED BY THE CAPE OF GOOD HOPE 

FOR VAN DIEMEn's LAND HEAVY SEAS AND STORMY WEATHER 

REMARKABLE PRESERVATION CONTINUANCE OF STORMY WEATHER 

LIGHTENING THE VESSEL HURRICANE FREQUENT LYING TO 

TREMENDOUS STORMS. 

Sixth Month 2nd, T 834. — Since leaving the land, the winds 
have been so strongly opposed to our going round Cape Horn, 
as nearly to put that course out of sight : to-day we are so far 
off the coast of South America as to be exposed to the swell of 
the great South Sea, which is no longer kept from us by a point 
of land which forms the projecting Cape ; this swell is pro- 
digious, and plainly shows the turbulent state of the weather 
in that quarter ; it seems like a final settlement and removal 
of any thing like a doubt in my mind, as to our being in the 
right track at present. After midnight the weather became 
very rough, and the wind inclining more and more southerly, 
rendered our position in sailing very critical. Before four 
o'clock, a. m., two heavy seas broke in upon us, one of which 
stove in a part of the bulwark on the starboard side : happily 
none of the watch on deck were washed overboard. From this 
time things got rapidly worse, and the only alternative now 
left was to bring the vessel to, with her head to the wind and 
sea, under suitable storm- canvass to maintain that position. 
In addition to the great risk attending at all times any circum- 
stance connected with 'lying to, 1 it was a position in which we had 
not yet tried the Henry Freeling . It was not indeed an every- 
day occurrence for a small vessel, which we have had hitherto 
no opportunity of proving under more gentle circumstances, to 
be brought round against a sea, which had nothing to break 
the range of its sweeping influence between her and the south 
pole. Captain Keen manifested great coolness and ability on 



1834-.] CHAPTER XVII. 263 

the occasion ; and soon after day-break all things were ready to 
accomplish our intended purpose : to effect which, an interval 
was waited for, when the blast should lull a little : and whilst 
much depended upon a timely re-action of the sails, so as to 
prevent the vessel from forcing herself with too great violence 
into the opposing waves, as her head came round towards 
them ; at the same time it was indispensably needful to keep a 
sufficient quantity of canvass set, to guard against being over- 
taken and overwhelmed by the mountain waves, which in an 
awful manner were now threatening us behind. A few minutes 
relieved us from suspense and anxiety, — and although heavy 
laden, with our newly recruited stock of water, some of which 
encumbered the deck, — yet we had the comfort to see the vessel 
rise in a lively manner to the surface of the loftiest billows, 
before any material quantity of their contents had time to 
burst over her. As the wind blew directly from an immensity 
of ice, a change so sudden from the great heat we had so 
recently witnessed, to such a cold penetrating blast, was sen- 
sibly felt by all on board. 

10th. — Towards evening it again became stormy with much 
rain ; the sea breaking over us with great violence, scarcely 
any part, even below deck, could be preserved free from wet, 
and all our ingenuity was called forth to preserve our beds 
moderately dry. At times the weight of water seemed too 
much for our little bark to bear, from which she could scarcely 
extricate herself, before another deluge burst in upon her deck. 
A state of desertion was my lot throughout the day, and 
although at seasons I was ready to say, " Lord, carest thou 
not that we perish V yet I was not permitted in the darkest 
moment to castaway my confidence; although for many hours 
it seemed needful for us to stand as with our lives in our 
hands, not knowing how soon they might be called for. At 
midnight the scene was truly awful, the wind blew in a furious 
manner, and the sea raged with increased violence, with heavy 
falls of rain. The mercury in the marine barometer, which 
had been falling all the day, became lower, and the little vessel 
seemed to twist and bend beneath her heavy burden. At this 
moment of extremity, behold a shift of wind to the south-west, 



264 CHAPTER XVII. [1834. 

which instead of taking aback suddenly the little canvass we 
were scudding under, (which might have produced conse- 
quences above all others the most to be dreaded) came regularly 
round ; and the captain, availing himself of this moment, 
directed that the vessel should be ' hove to.' Captain Keen 
came to me shortly after this circumstance had taken place, 
to acknowledge how providentially this change had been 
ordered, being sensible of the favour thus graciously bestowed 
upon us. 

Sixth Month loth. — This date has not failed to awaken feel- 
ings of painful reflection in reference to days which have long 
since passed away, it being thirty-three years since it pleased 
the God of all my mercies to bestow a crown upon the head of 
a poor unworthy creature, even the rich blessing of a truly vir- 
tuous wife, at the close of a meeting at Doncaster. Full well 
at this remote period do I remember the solemn and delightful 
season with which we were favoured, from the beginning to the 
end of the meeting. Dear Thomas Colley appeared largely in 
testimony on the occasion, to the tendering of many present. 
It was indeed an earnest of the heavenly Master's love ; which 
never ceased to follow us through all the vicissitudes of time, 
during a life not a little chequered, for a term of more than 
thirty-two years and a-half, when He was pleased to deprive 
me of my greatest earthly treasure, and to take back that 
which He gave ; but it was His ow T n, I verily believe, even 
His, the same who enabled me to say, in the moment of my 
greatest distress, " blessed be the name of the Lord." In 
looking over the different relatives and friends present on the 
above occasion, there is at this period scarcely one of those 
individuals, at that time about our own age, who now survives ; 
and I find that many of them much younger than ourselves, 
have been summoned from works to rewards : thus, whilst 
many of my contemporaries have finished their earthly career, 
I am still spared a little longer, a living monument of the 
Lord's everlasting mercy, — for the purpose, I humbly trust, of 
declaring unto others what He hath done for my soul, and to 
show forth the praises of Him, who hath translated me out of 
darkness into his marvellous light. And although the sacrifice 



1834.] , CHAPTEB XVII. 265 

I am making may appear great, and be rendered more formid- 
able by the late hour in the evening in which it has to be 
offered ; yet in my estimation it is small indeed, and light as 
the dust of the balance, when the love and mercy, long-suf- 
fering and compassion, of my good and gracious Lord God, are 
brought into remembrance ; who hath redeemed my life from 
destruction, and crowned me with loving-kindness and tender 
mercies,. — to myself incomprehensible, and I am persuaded 
only known in the same degree, to those whose sin is blotted 
out as a cloud, and their transgressions as a thick cloud, by 
repentance toward God, and faith toward our Lord Jesus 
Christ, who came into the world to save sinners, of whom each 
of us, in the depth of self-abasement, can say, " I am chief." 

1 1th. — A considerable press of sail was carried in the hope 
of making the island of Tristan d'Acunha, and two others 
lying at no great distance from it. Next morning, the 18th, 
the weather was rough and threatening, with fog and rain. The 
captain considered it the more needful to obtain a sight of 
the islands ; and relinquishing the design of passing to the 
northward of them, we bore up after day-break, in a south- 
easterly direction, to avail ourselves of the strong but favourable 
wind. As the day advanced, the wind and sea increased, and 
the fog was so dense close down to the horizon, that there 
seemed but little prospect of discovering the land, at a sufficient 
distance to prevent our running directly upon it. As the 
afternoon wore away, the danger hourly increased : but at this 
juncture, the Everlasting Arm of strength, in wonted mercy 
and compassion, was signally displayed for our preservation, 
and in such a manner as wholly to exclude the slightest pre- 
tence of mortal man's having the least share in it. The mist 
cleared suddenly away ; and though but for a short interval, 
yet it was sufficient to discover a lofty rocky island, about half 
a mile distant, standing nearly perpendicularly out of the sea, 
far above the mast-head of the Henry Freeling. We soon 
perceived that this was the island called Inaccessible, and 
appropriately so, as from its vast height and steep approach, 
no landing apparently on the side next to us, could possibly 
have been effected. This seemed at once to relieve our anxiety, 



266 CHAPTER XVII. [1834. 

and the captain now considered all danger as past, and that 
we should safely run between this island and another called 
Nightingale Island, although not able to see it on account of 
the fog, these islands being ten miles asunder. Thus cheered, 
we pursued our course with great velocity, as the wind had 
increased in violence soon after the high rocky island was first 
seen. But in another hour, our prospect was suddenly clouded 
by the appearance of more rugged rocky land on the same side 
of us. This circumstance, for a time, staggered all our hopes, 
as it could not be accounted for ; and of course we knew not 
how soon some unknown lurking reef might wreck our fragile 
vessel, which was scourged on by a hurricane-blast with greater 
speed, it is probable, than at any previous time. In this 
situation, the night was gathering blackness and darkness in 
the midst of a heavy tempest. The captain, though evidently 
unprepared for this mysterious circumstance, conducted every 
thing with calmness and composure, and concluded to haul 
two or three points to the southward, lest a shift of wind in 
the night should drive us back upon these desolate islands. 
He afterwards drew a sketch of these islands, with their 
respective latitudes and longitudes, showing the drift of the 
Henry Freeling, and the manner in which she had approached 
them in the night, and after day-break in the morning ; plainly 
demonstrating the true cause which placed the islands in an 
apparently unknown position as we passed them, exactly show- 
ing why we did not pass betwixt them, as he expected we 
should do, which merely arose from the course having been 
altered to a more southerly direction, unremembered in the 
moment of surprise. Although I have thus entered into the 
above details, yet it plainly appeared to me at the time, and is 
here recorded with humble gratitude to the great Preserver of 
men, that if the weather had continued so impenetrably thick 
and dark as totally to have hidden the islands from our sight, 
still we should have been guided past them in safety, as was evi- 
dently the case when first they were discovered, notwithstanding 
the alarming proximity of their lofty crags and precipices. 

19th. — Before sunset we got sight of the island of Tristan 
cVAcunha. It is fifteen hundred miles from any other land, 



1834.] CHAPTER XVII. 267 

except the two small islands before-mentioned, and is said to 
be upwards of eight thousand feet above the level of the sea ; 
though we are now fifty-seven miles distant, it is still plainly 
discernible, even to my imperfect sight. 

20th. — It was observed that the mercury in the barometer, 
was this morning again on the decline, and by four o'clock, 
p.m., had fallen to 29 - 53. The wind freshened throughout the 
day, and at night blew with such tremendous violence, accom- 
panied with heavy rain and some lightning, as compelled us 
again to seek safety by ' lying to ;' but, however trying to be 
thus disabled from making use of a fair wind when it blows, 
I believe we are truly thankful in having such a source of 
relief from the terrors of the storm afforded to us, poor 
solitary wanderers on the mighty deep. It is three weeks 
to-day since we left Rio, and up to this time we have not seen 
another ship. 

21st. — Still ' lying to,' in heavy gales from the south- 
west, with frequent squalls still more heavy, with rain and 
forked lightning : to use the expression of the carpenter 
who had charge of the morning watch, ' the lightning had 
been flying about like ribbons.' The weather was extremely 
cold and penetrating. Owing to the water searching through 
every little crevice from the working of the frame of the vessel, 
my berth has become so damp, as to compel me to have 
recourse to any part of the main cabin, where most free from 
dropping water. 

Sixth Month 22nd. — ' Lying to,' as yesterday ; the storm 
still raging with unabated violence, squalls, heavy rain, and 
lightning through the night. The sea having risen to a fearful 
height, frequently inundated the deck of the vessel ; and 
from the continual working of her whole frame, our bed-places 
have been unfit to sleep in, the water having found its way 
through numerous chinks. This morning early, a heavy sea 
broke into us, bringing a larger quantity of water upon the 
deck than at any time before. To myself a very remarkable 
and striking event took place this morning. Shortly after the 
vessel had shipped a heavy body of water, I went up the 
hatchway to look round for a short interval ; at that moment 



268 CHAPTER XVII. [1834. 

the seas were running in mountainous succession, and I 
observed that some of the loftiest of the waves were very nearly 
prevailing against our little vessel ; it seemed as if she could 
not much longer escape being overwhelmed by them altogether. 
I made no remark to any one, but soon after we tried to get 
some breakfast : while so occupied, one of the men called down 
to inform us that there was a sight worth looking at on deck ; 
it was a large collection of a species of whale, close by the ship. 
I thought I should like to see them ; there were perhaps more 
than two hundred of these animals close to us, each about 
twelve feet long. When I went upon deck after breakfast 
they were still close to our bows ; and the man at the helm 
said, that they served as a breakwater for us : their being so 
was afterwards mentioned by some other person. At last my 
eyes were open to discover the protection they were affording to 
our little struggling vessel : they occupied a considerable por- 
tion of the surface of the sea, in the exact direction between 
the vessel and the wind and waves, reaching so near to us, 
that some of them might have been struck with a harpoon ; 
they remained constantly swimming in gentle and steady 
order, as if to maintain the position of a regular phalanx, and 
I suggested that nothing should be done to frighten them 
away. It was openly remarked by some, that not one sea had 
broken on board us, while they occupied their useful post ; and 
when they at last retired, it was perceived that the waves did 
not rage with the same violence as before they came to our 
relief. I give this wonderful circumstance just as it occurred ; 
and if any should be disposed to view it as a thing of chance, i~ 
do not; for I- believe it to be one of the great and marvellous 
works of the Lord God Almighty. These friends in need, 
and friends indeed, filled up a sufficiently wide space upon two 
of the large swells of the ocean, completely to obstruct the 
approach of each succeeding wave opposed to the vessel ; so 
that if the third wave from us was coming in lofty foam 
towards us, by the time it had rolled over and become the 
second wave, its foaming threatening aspect was destroyed 
entirely, reaching us at last in the form of a dead and harm- 
less swell. They are very oily fish, but seldom larger than 



1834.] CHAPTER XVII. 269 

to yield about two barrels of oil ; they are commonly called 
black fish. 

Sixth Month 2Brd. — Still 'lying to, 1 sustained through 
another rough and perilous night ; the wintry storm yet 
howling around us. We. remarked, after having just passed 
the shortest day in this climate, that our friends in England 
had returned home from the Yearly Meeting, and were enjoying 
the delightful days of summer at their greatest length. 

Sixth Month 26th. — The tempestuous weather, which our 
little vessel has had of late to contend with so largely, the great 
length of voyage still unaccomplished, at the most unfavour- 
able season of the year, have frequently been a subject of 
serious thought, but more particularly from witnessing, since 
the last heavy gales, considerable and almost daily increasing 
leakage from different parts of the deck, owing to the great 
strain to which her upper works have been subjected, by the 
enormous weight of lumber, together with part of our stock of 
fresh water, upon the deck. After looking at the state of 
things on every side, and taking the different bearings of the 
whole into deliberate consideration, it seemed the most prudent 
measure, in the hope of contributing to the future safety of the 
vessel, and enabling her to perform the service looked forward 
to, in its fullest extent, to lighten her deck, by launching over- 
board, on the first favourable opportunity, every weight of 
spars, &c. that could be dispensed with. As this could not be 
done in rough weather, without the risk of injury both to the 
people and the ship ; and there being less wind and sea to-day, 
than for some time back, it was resolved, if possible, to accom- 
plish it. Accordingly, four heavy logs, an old spare square- 
sail-yard, a heavy spar intended for a top-mast, with many 
other cumbrous weights, which tended to increase the weakness 
of the quarters of the vessel, were cast into the sea without 
accident. It is truly cause of regret thus to sacrifice articles, 
which at a future day may be much needed ; but the necessity 
of endeavouring to relieve the present difficulty and distress, 
compelled us to pass over that, which now can be looked at as 
remote, and may never occur. 

As this step has not been taken suddenly, or hastily deter- 



270 CHAPTER XVII. [1834. 

mined upon in the moment of impending danger, when fear 
might have operated, but is the result of patient and deliberate 
observation, I trust that our dear friends in England will see 
the propriety of our so doing. Several of the articles thus 
thrown into the sea, belonged to the vessel when first pur- 
chased, and I believe the sum of five pounds sterling would 
cover the whole amount of such things as were afterwards 
bought and intended as extra stores. I was disappointed at 
finding on inquiry that the name Henry Freeling, which was 
deeply branded on each of the four logs, had not been pre- 
viously cut out before they were thrown overboard, — lest this 
omission should give rise to a report of our having been wrecked, 
gone to pieces, or foundered at sea, if any of them should reach 
a distant shore, or be picked up by another ship. 

Seventh Month 2nd. — Since the 26th ultimo, the weather 
has been very rugged. To-morrow we expect to be abreast 
of the Cape of Good Hope, but more than one hundred and fifty 
miles to the southward of it, having kept aloof from the coast, 
in the hope of avoiding the currents and heavy gales, which 
prevail in its vicinity at this season of the year. To us, so 
far, it has not proved a Cape of Good Hope, but a Cape of 
constant anxiety and fearful expectation, having been marked 
by tempest after tempest, cold rain, hail, sleet, and lightning.* 
7th. — Still ' lying to C the storm has continued all night, 
and the sea makes very heavy upon us. The mercury in the 
marine barometer sunk to 29-30, then rose a little, and again 
sunk lower in the tube. As the night advanced, the storm 
increased with awful violence. The strength of the wind was 
incredible, and the lightning appalling, with a fall of rain and 
sleet ; the sea broke in upon our little ship in an alarming 
manner. The poor men were lashed upon the deck with ropes, 
to prevent their being washed away ; benumbed with cold, and 
at times floating with the vast load of water upon the deck — 
their sufferings are not easily described. The bulwark on the 

* This passage will probably remind the reader, that when Vasco de 
Gama first rounded the Cape, he bestowed upon it the significant appel- 
lation of ' Cape of the Furies,' which the Portuguese authorities 
thought proper to exchange for its present name. 



ISoi.] CHAPTER XVII. '271 

larboard side was damaged, and the spray reached more than 
two-thirds up the main-mast. In the morning, the seamen 
expressed considerable discouragement ; and I observed a dispo- 
sition rather to make the worst of things. The captain said, 
' he hoped he should not see such another night in this vessel. 1 
One person did not expect she would have kept up until 
morning. When assembled at the breakfast table, I had to 
tell them, with a degree of firmness, that a murmur ought 
not to be heard amongst us, but rather the expression of 
thankfulness, that we are as we are. On looking round at 
the ravages of the storm, I was surprised to find that so little 
damage was done ; and the increase of pumping had been com- 
paratively trifling to what might have been expected from 
the violent and frequent strokes of the sea, and the floods of 
water that had rolled over the deck of the vessel. 

In the darkest part of the night, a distinct luminous appear- 
ance, or glow of light, remained at our mast-head ; a pheno- 
menon only seen in dreadful weather, when the atmosphere is 
highly charged with electric fluid. The sailors call it a corpo- 
sant* I think such an appearance is mentioned in John 
Churchman's Journal, or that of some other worthy. The 
countenances of our men were considerably whitened this 
morning, by the great quantity of salt, which having been 
deposited by the constant wash of the sea, had dried upon their 
faces. 

8th. — Early this morning the storm abated, and at eight a. m. 
we bore away before it to the eastward. In the course of the 
storm yesterday evening, unusual darkness gathered round 
us, when suddenly the wind which blew with great violence, 
increased to a complete hurricane, and roared in a terrific 
manner, and for a while closely threatened our little vessel. 
The force of the wind was so great, that the waves for the time 
almost ceased to undulate, and the surface of the ocean became 
levelled and whitened with foam. At this juncture I was com- 
forted in beholding the calmness and resignation with which 
my dear Charles was favoured. At one time he remarked, 

* (Originally written Corpus Sancti.) See John Woolman's Journal, 
Dublin edition, 1794, p. 212, 



272 CHAPTER XVII. [1834. 

' What a painful situation those people must be in, who have 
not a good reason for being exposed to similar distress, when 
they find themselves overtaken by it. 1 I told him it was for- 
midable enough, even to those who felt themselves in the line 
of apprehended duty. 

9th. — The wind moderate, but the swell of the sea caused by 

. the late tempest continues to impede our progress ; the motion 

however of the vessel is become greatly diminished : Charles 

remarked, " then are they glad, because they be quiet ;" which 

truly was our case. 

13th. — This morning the monsters of the deep seemed 
roused from their secret abodes, probably by the approach of 
elementary strife. Several whales were observed about us : a 
fine spermaceti whale followed for some time close to the vessel, 
exactly in her wake. This was a full grown female fish, and 
was thought to be nearly as long as the Henri/ Freeling. As 
night approached another storm began to threaten. 

Seventh Month \4th. — At ten a. m., it was so tempestuous, 
that we again hugged the howling blast, by 'heaving to :' as the 
vessel came round with her head to the wind, one heavy wave 
broke on board, but happily none of the crew were lost. In the 
afternoon, when it was thought that the storm h'ad arrived at its 
greatest strength, this hope was suddenly extinguished by the 
mercury falling in a short space of time down to 29'50. The 
captain said, ' We have done all we can, — trust in Providence 
only remains.'' Heavy rain succeeded ; but instead of the 
bursting forth of another hurricane, which the incessant 
thunder and lightning led us to expect, it was observed that 
the roar of the wind was lessening ; it changed from north- 
east to north-west, but shifted so gradually in the right 
direction for the vessel, that the change was scarcely felt, and 
the sea fell in full proportion as the wind abated. 

Two or three days previous to this tempest, I felt much 
depressed on account of my Charles, he having drooped more 
than usual, from the effects of the cold weather ; the great 
length of time we had already been the sport of the winds and 
waves since leaving Rio de Janeiro, could not but excite a 
painful and discouraging fear lest his strength should prove 



1834.] CHAPTER XVII. 273 

unequal to the remaining part of the voyage, as we had only- 
passed over about one thousand miles in distance, since 
beginning to traverse the margin of the Indian Ocean ; and we 
are still greatly annoyed by the strong currents and heavy gales 
which prevail from the direction of Madagascar, and are probably 
attracted down the Mozambique Channel, which separates that 
island from the coast of Natal, on the south-east shore of 
Africa. But as the late storm approached, I felt, through 
unmerited favour, increasing peacefulness and tranquillity, 
which nothing during its whole continuance was permitted to 
disturb ; and in the most awful moment of uncertainty and 
impending danger, fear had no place to enter ; this was utterly 
banished by the love of the ever-blessed Master that flowed in 
my heart, and which in the true dignity of its heavenly power 
cast it out : and the language which at intervals continued 
to prevail and occupy the inner man, with a soothing and 
encouraging sweetness, was that of the Psalmist, — " Delight 
thyself in the Lord, and he shall give thee the desires of thy 
heart." Thus indeed was strength truly administered, accord- 
ing to the glorious working of His power, unto all patience and 
long-suffering with joyfulness, to endure and to give thanks to 
the Lord Most High. I should shrink from making any 
remark on the state of my own mind, whilst in the extremity 
out of which we have been so remarkably delivered, did I not 
feel called upon by a sense of gratitude to our compassionate 
Lord ; at the same time a hope gleams through my heart, that 
it will tend to strengthen the faith of some hesitating and 
doubting fellow-travellers who may eventually peruse these 
lines, to " follow on to know the Lord" for themselves ; and 
thus partake of His love, mercy, and life-giving presence, and 
be encouraged to forsake all and follow Him, " nothing doubt- 
ing," wherever He may be pleased to lead : for the declaration, 
• — " Lo I am with you alway," will assuredly be verified in their 
experience, and all earthly things will be estimated but as loss 
and dross, in comparison with the excellence of the knowledge 
of Christ Jesus. 

Seventh Month 22nd. — Whilst lying to in heavy weather the 
forepart of last night, (the fourth time within eight days,) I felt 



274 CHAPTER XYII. [1834. 

much exhausted for want of rest, and not a little discouraged by- 
surrounding circumstances. The almost incessant labouring of 
the vessel, and the heavy strokes of the sea, which have so 
often assailed her battered sides, could not fail to occasion extra 
pumping when it blew hard : although upon the whole, she had 
suffered little since her deck had been freed from dead weights ; 
and yet every returning day seemed to bring a fresh tempest 
with it, which kept the sea unceasingly agitated. All these 
circumstances could not fail to occasion renewed thoughtfulness, 
more especially as we have still more than one hundred degrees 
of east longitude to run down, before reaching our intended 
port, and are so frequently compelled to ' lie to,' for our 
safety, lest the sea should overwhelm us altogether. Thus I 
was letting in fear and doubts, and listening to the tempter's 
insinuations, notwithstanding the multitude of mercies which 
have been showered upon us for our deliverance. Such is 
the frailty of human nature, that when we see the waves of 
adversity boisterous about us, we begin to sink, by letting in 
fear at the prospect, although fully sanctioned at setting out 
by the Lord himself : even the brightest gleam of sunshine 
soon loses its gladdening influence on our minds, unless again 
and again renewed by the ever-blessed Master, who having 
been touched with a feeling of our manifold infirmities, pities 
the weakness of poor mortal dust. After passing through con- 
siderable mental conflict, in contrition I went upon the deck, 
supposing from the great motion of the vessel, that the storm 
had continued all the night, and that we were still ' lying to ;' 
when, to my surprise, I found a bright and beautiful morning, 
the weather apparently entirely changed, the wind fair, and 
the vessel gradually pursuing her route ; but the great and 
diverse swells of the sea still occasioned her to labour hard, 
nearly as much as during the storm in the fore part of the 
night. I could not help feeling ashamed and mortified in 
abasement of self, in finding I had been thus duped by the 
grand adversary, who, ever on the alert and unwearied, had 
found the ' watch 1 neglected in a darkened gloomy hour of 
trial and perplexity ; and thus he improved the opportunity to 
his own advantage, leaving me covered with self-reproach as in 
dust and ashes. 



1834.] chapter xvir. 27-") 

27th. — It is cause of humble admiration and gratitude to 
observe within the last few days, an improvement in the health 
of my Charles ; considering the cold and damp to which he has 
been so long exposed, without having felt the glow of a fire 
the whole winter, and the small portion of exercise that can 
possibly be obtained, beyond what the motion of the vessel 
supplies, he is certainly sustained in a very rem arkable manner. 
I have of late been much comforted by a circumstance brought 
to my recollection respecting him, I feel no hesitation in believ- 
ing, by the good remembrancer, — although many years have 
passed away since it occurred ; but a lively image of the whole 
event is now strikingly brought home to my mind. When he 
was about four years old, it was concluded that the time was 
come for him to begin to attend meetings ; and I well remember 
sitting under the gallery in Sheffield meeting, about twenty- 
one years ago, when he was conducted by one of his brothers 
to a seat at the top of the meeting, for the first time. I had 
been in my seat a short time previously, and on seeing him led 
up the side aisle, it sprang up in my heart to offer him that 
day unto the Lord. Although at the time a pretty strong- 
impression was engraven on my mind which yielded a peaceful 
review, to the best of my knowledge it has since been as much 
obliterated, as a thing that never took place, from that period 
until a few days ago, when it was recalled fresh and fragrant 
to my understanding. 

Seventh Month 28th. — The height of the waves compelled us 
again to ' lie to, 1 under storm-canvass, for thirty hours. This 
gale increased to a violent degree, but differed in most respects 
from all we had previously been called to witness. In all the 
preceding cases there had been a change of a favourable nature to 
cheer us through the dreary tempest ; but now every alteration 
appeared to be against us, serving only to render our situation 
more and more alarming. It did seem as if we were now cast 
off, and left to the fury of the wind and waves ; and notwith- 
standing we had with our own eyes seen as it were Jordan 
driven back, and the waters of the Eed Sea stand as on heaps, 
for our deliverance ; yet now the glorious presence was with- 
drawn, and so completely hidden, that no trace could be 

t 2 



276 CHAPTER XVII. [1834. 

perceived to administer one glimmering ray of hope in the 
midst of our complicated distress. On looking at our forlorn 
situation, and the overwhelming appearance of the storm, the 
fury of which had been only aggravated by every change which 
had so far taken place, it now seemed too late for any thing to 
occur that could operate in our favour, as the sea was running 
in confused heaps different ways in a frightful manner, caused 
by the wind having shifted to different points, and from each 
point blowing furiously. About three o 1 clock in the afternoon, 
the mercury fell lower and lower, when we were overtaken 
with a squall of wind, truly appalling and terrific, which in a 
short time afterwards was succeeded by a second still more 
violent ; but, through the medium of these two dreadful blasts, 
which at first threatened nothing but destruction, our deliver- 
ance was marvellously effected. Such was the fury of these 
two tyfoons, that they actually, in a short space of time, 
changed the wild and disfigured surface of the troubled ocean 
from unruly mountains to a rugged level, by their boisterous 
breath, leaving nothing but a sea white as milk with foam. 
From this time the storm subsided, and at midnight we were 
again enabled to bear away for Van Diemen's Land, distant 
about four thousand seven hundred miles. 

31st. — ' Lying to, 1 with an increasing tempest around us. 
Charles and myself sat down together, it being Fifth day ; 
though " troubled on every side, yet not distressed ; perplexed, 
but not in despair ; persecuted " again and again, but verily 
" not forsaken ; cast down but not destroyed ;"' 1 — however much 
like two poor outcasts tossing on the bosom of the restless 
waters, far from friends and native home, but under a peaceful 
feeling of resignation and poverty of spirit. The barometer 
was low yesterday, but had begun to rise a little : in a short 
time, however, it began again to sink, and dropped down to 
28*50, being an inch lower than when we experienced the 
hurricane in the neighbourhood of the Cape of Good Hope. 
This circumstance spread a gloom over us ; having witnessed 
such dreadful weather about three weeks before, when the mer- 
cury was at 29*50, and knowing the correctness of the barometer 
in former cases, our apprehensions were increasingly awakened ; 



1834.] CHAPTER XVII. 277 

and under a sense that another close trial was not far distant, 
we endeavoured to wait patiently the event, though in painful 
suspense, with, I believe, a full surrender of ourselves to the will 
of Almighty God ; — remembering my poor, scattered orphan 
family and dear relations and friends everywhere, — in earnest- 
ness and brokenness before Him, who knows the anguish of a 
tribulated soul. Towards evening the wind and sea increased 
in such a dreadful manner, that the horrors of the scene cannot 
be faithfully described. It blew a perfect hurricane ; and 
although we had only sufficient storm canvass set to keep the 
vessel's head to the sea, yet she seemed in danger of being 
torn to pieces with the intense pressure, against which she had 
to struggle for some hours together. The captain was much 
alarmed, and said, ' If she gets through this, she will get 
through any thing.' 1 The agitated waters broke in upon us on 
every side, like cascades, frequently loading the deck with their 
weight : the whole frame of the vessel trembled and shook 
with the strain in an unusual manner. This hurricane at 
length became a steady gale of wind, but very heavy. 

Eighth Month Mil. — The weather very boisterous, although we 
were permitted to keep before the wind and sea. To-day we were 
escorted by an unusual number of birds, such as the albatross, 
Cape hen, stormy petrell, &c. On the 5th we were compelled 
again to ' lie to \ and this day, the 6th, we were again ' lying 
to.' At three o'clock, p. m., we were assailed by a most violent 
tempest, with heavy falls of rain, sleet, and hail ; the sea curled 
in an unusual manner, and raging in opposite directions ; — 
our little bark seemed as if she could not long sustain the 
unequal conflict, as the wind kept increasing to a degree almost 
inconceivable, except to those who may have witnessed the 
hurricane with all its furious and angry growl. Every thing 
was done that could be devised for our relief ; but all our efforts 
seemed overpowered, and we could not wholly divest ourselves 
of an apprehension that she must eventually fill and founder 
by the lee with us at last, if the fury of the storm were not 
curbed ; of this, however, there seemed no probability, and the 
approach of night served only to increase its horror, and renew 
its force. In this situation one would have supposed that no 



278 CHAPTER XVII. [18o4. 

relief could have availed short of an abatement of the storm ; 
but true it is, that an increase of its fury produced a circum- 
stance, which at once enabled our little vessel to rise with 
comparative ease to every opposing mountain-billow. At eight 
o'clock, p. m., the wind was so powerfully strong, that it blew 
our new storm-jib away from the duff or bolt-rope altogether. 
Every exertion was made to prevent the total loss of the sail, 
but it napped with such violence as to shake the whole frame 
of the vessel, threatening destruction to all that came near it. 
At length it was lowered clown into the water under the lee 
of the ship, and happily secured, but not without one man 
being hurt by it. For want of this sail, it was now feared that 
the sea would make a constant breach over our deck ; but 
before another sail could be prepared to replace it, it was truly 
relieving to find that the vessel bowed to the seas as they met 
her, in a much more lively manner without it, than she had 
done with it. Thus, in a very unexpected manner, was a way 
made for us to ride triumphantly through the remainder of the 
terrific storm, without any material injury to the vessel beyond 
the loss of part of her bulwark. "This poor man cried, and 
the Lord heard him, and saved him out of all his troubles ;" 
and to Him be the glory and the praise forever. Every storm 
which we had witnessed previously to the last, had been more 
or less accompanied by thunder and lightning, sometimes in 
an awful manner : and although we left England without con- 
ducting chains ; yet thus far, not a flash has been permitted 
to harm us. By way of precaution, the pumps have at times 
been stopped up, to prevent their being split. Such favours 
I desire to record with thankfulness, and to number them 
among the many blessings, which have descended upon us from 
our heavenly Parent times innumerable. 

Sth. — It is now more than ten weeks since we sailed from 
Rio de Janeiro ; we are still more than three thousand 
miles from our desired port, and yet the winds have mostly 
blown from favourable quarters, but often with such violence as 
to render them unavailing, on account of the tremendous seas 
they have occasioned. A larger vessel would have profited by 
many of the gales, which have compelled us to ' lie to ' until 



1834.] CHAPTER XVII. 279 

they have moderated ; when, perhaps, a change of wind to 
a less favourable quarter has succeeded, our progress has 
been much retarded by the old swell yet remaining. What 
little we do gain seems like fetching water from the well 
beside the gate of Bethlehem, at the risk of natural life ; 
yet I am fully persuaded that it has been " good for us to be 
here." 

10th. — The two last days the weather has been very rugged, 
but it became more gentle in the course of last night ; and some 
heavy showers of rain have greatly assisted in stilling the 
swellings of the restless waters ; which allowed our ship's 
company to sit down together in a good degree of comfort, 
it being First day. 

14th. — To-day we have again ventured before the wind. In 
the forenoon, it being the Fifth day of the week, Charles and 
myself were engaged in silent waiting. I sat under a painful 
feeling of great strippedness and desertion, which have frequently 
been my portion of late ; but my Lord knows best what is best 
for me ; and although His blessed will may not at all times suit 
the creaturely desires of a poor finite mortal, yet I think I 
desire to be patiently resigned, and to be able to say in sincerity 
of heart, " I have behaved and quieted myself, as a child that 
is weaned of his mother ; my soul is even as a weaned child ;"" 
humbly praying, that at seasons an evidence may be granted 
that all things will work together for good, although the 
blessed Comforter, who alone can relieve my soul, may be so 
veiled from the view of my mind as to appear far from me. 
By noon the wind and sea had so much risen, that it became 
needful again to ' lie to, 1 without delay. Soon after the 
vessel was brought to the wind, every indication was exhibited 
of another dreadful tempest being close upon us. The interval 
of suspense was short before our fears were realized by being 
again surrounded with all the horrors of a furious storm, which 
continued through the night with unabated fury. 

15th. — The wind shifted several points in the course of the 
gale, causing the white crested foaming billows to run one 
against another in fearful heaps, and breaking as they met in 
every direction, to exhibit one vast ocean of white foam in 



280 CHAPTER XVII. [1834. 

confused agitation, not to be described. As the principal 
weight of this mighty tempest was from the southward and 
westward, in the neighbourhood of the pole ; the wind coming 
off such vast bodies of ice, brought with it most chilling cold, 
and heavy falls of hail or sleet, which added much to the already 
accumulated sufferings of our poor, drenched, and benumbed 
seamen. 

16th. — After midnight the storm became less violent, and 
only blew a gale of wind, which gradually diminished before 
day-break this morning, and the mountainous waves having 
ceased from foaming, though still prodigious, about seven o'clock, 
a. m., we again put the head of our little bark towards the long- 
desired Tasmania ; although but small progress could be made, 
from the lofty swells which remained. During the tempest of 
yesterday, it was very evident that several on board were much 
discouraged at its awful strength. It was acknowledged by 
the captain, mate, and others, that they had never beheld 
such a dreadful sea at any time before ; and yet the little 
Freeling was preserved through it all with comparatively slight 
injury. Such indeed have been the renewed extendings of 
abounding mercy, as ought to be sufficient to cause even those 
of little faith to be ashamed, and to cease any longer to doubt : 
but, alas ! the rod once withdrawn, is soon forgotten; as is the 
loving-kindness of the Lord, when the danger is passed away : 
like Israel of old, we sing His praise, but soon forget His 
works. 

17th. — The weather being more gentle the crew were assem- 
bled twice in the course of the day for devotional purposes. 
The evening was crowned with sweet peace. 

At noon this day we have completed full 1 40° of longitude, 
more than 100 of these since leaving Rio de Janeiro by 
the way of the South American continent to the Cape of Good 
Hope ; and we have yet about 46^° more to accomplish before 
entering the Derwent river, besides several degrees of south 
latitude to fill up. 

Ninth Month 6th. — Since the 17th ult. to this date, the 
weather has been more favourable, though often boisterous. To- 
day strong gales and cloudy ; but the sea although high, still 



1834. J CHAPTER XVII. 281 

admits of our steering a direct course : yesterday at noon 
we were about 340 miles from the southern promontory of 
Tasmania. If the weather be clear to-morrow, and the wind 
continue in this quarter with the same strength, we expect to 
see the land once more in the afternoon. This evening there 
is a rumour of land being i n sight. 



282 CHAPTER XVIII. [1834. 



CHAPTER XVIII. 



VAN DIEM EN S LAND ANCHOR OFF HOBART TOWN MEETING WITH 

JAMES BACKHOUSE AND GEORGE W. WALKER ABORIGINES 

ILLNESS OF DANIEL WHEELER SAIL FOR BOTANY BAY ARRIVAL 

AT SYDNEY INTERVIEW WITH THE GOVERNOR PUBLIC MEETING 

AT SYDNEY RELIGIOUS ENGAGEMENTS. 

Ninth Month 7th. — After sailing rapidly with a strong 
breeze all night, the land was fairly in sight at day-light this 
morning ; but it was too distant to be determined with certainty 
what particular part we saw. Towards noon the south Cape 
of Van Diemens Land, with the land in the neighbourhood of 
Tasman's Head were distinguished ; but the wind had shifted 
almost directly against our vessel, and a considerable swell of 
the sea had risen, although in the morning these were both in 
our favour. In the course of the day we had two satisfactory 
sittings with the crew, it being First day. About five o'clock, 
p. m., the atmosphere assumed a very threatening appearance. 
The sailors could scarcely get in the sails before it blew in a 
furious manner. Our hopes, which had previously brightened 
at the prospect of getting into port, were now unexpectedly 
blighted ; and instead of a probability of this being soon 
realized, we had the mortification to witness a painful reverse ; 
for before midnight we were literally blown off the land alto- 
gether, and our situation rendered hazardous by the neigh- 
bourhood of rocks and shoals. One of these rocks, from its 
exact position being unknown, caused more thoughtfulness than 
others. The storm lasted all night, and brought with it the 
swells of the Pacific ; which meeting those from the edge of the 
Indian Ocean, together with the currents occasioned by New 
Holland, &c, soon raised a cross and outrageous sea. It 



J 834.] CHAPTER XVIII, 283 

was thought that our vessel had not sustained more real 
damage from any storm she had previously encountered 
during the whole voyage, except one, which exceeded it in 
violence. The sea ranged over our deck almost the whole 
night. She was struck several times in different parts by 
heavy seas, and part of the bulwark on the starboard side was 
driven on board. 

Towards morning on the 9th instant, the strength of 
the wind was so greatly diminished, that by eleven o'clock, 
a. m., we made sail, and stretched to the northward again. 
Soon after noon the small islands of Pedro Blanco and 
the Eddystone were plainly ascertained ; afterward the 
main land appeared, and we steered at once for Tasman's 
Head, entering Storm Bay just at nightfall. After beating 
about for the next forty- eight hours with contrary winds and 
great fatigue to the men, we entered the Derwent before dark 
on the 1 Oth instant, and were at last favoured to anchor safely 
off Hobart Town at eleven, p. m., nearly opposite Mulgrave 
battery ; and eventually moored with two anchors, close to the 
garden of the Lieutenant-Governor Arthur. Next morning I 
ascertained, that our dear friends James Backhouse and George 
AVashington Walker were still in these parts and well. 

[In a letter from Hobart Town Daniel Wheeler thus writes :] 
My friends will bear with me whilst recapitulating the gracious 
dealings of our heavenly Father, as set forth in the extracts 
from my Journal. Though many storms and tempests have 
been enumerated, yet not one half of what it has been our 
portion to witness, has been told. It may suffice for me to 
say, that we have been compelled to seek refuge more than 
twenty times from the fury of the hostile elements by ' lying 
to,' with the ship's head to the wind and waves : and this has 
been resorted to only in cases of extreme danger. 

[In the same letter, he alludes to one of the sailors, who, 
it appears, had been remarkably visited, and brought under 
feelings of deep condemnation, and who opened his mind to 
him in a letter : — of this man he remarks ;] a lapse of two 
months had occurred from the time of his first impression, 
before he divulged the secret in that letter. I had perceived 



284 chapter xvnr. [1834. 

in his eye, the anguish of his wounded spirit, but knew not the 
cause until he wrote to me. He had several times been in 
danger of being washed overboard ; and once nearly fell from 
one of the yards when aloft, but no outward danger was 
sufficient wholly to bring down his stubborn heart. But the 
power within was too strong for him, he could not resist it ; 
thus verifying the assertion of the Apostle, " greater is He 
that is in you, than he that is in the world." I think this 
circumstance cannot fail to animate the hearts of all our dear 
friends, particularly such as have been instrumental in any 
degree, towards promoting the great work in which we are 
engaged, and cause them to feel a lively participation in that 
heavenly joy, which welcomes the repenting and returning 
sinner to his Father's house. 

[From a previous extract, it will be observed that Daniel 
Wheeler suggested,] that certain stipulations should be made 
with any person who might be engaged to take the command of 
the vessel ; one of these was, that himself and mate should attend 
morning and evening, when the Holy Scriptures were read ; 
this appears to have been attended to, and the sailors also 
enjoyed the privilege of hearing them read at suitable times. 
From a paragraph in one of his letters, it appears that he had 
been careful to inform them, that he did not consider such 
reading as a part of Divine worship ; but that true worship 
is an act between man and his great Creator, and can only be 
performed acceptably in spirit and in truth. 

[In a letter from Hobart Town, bearing date the 21st of Tenth 
Month, 1834, the following passages occur.] Soon after my last 
letters were finally closed, our dear friends James Backhouse and 
George Washington Walker, returned to Hobart Town : as we 
had previous information of the time they were expected to 
arrive, we were at their lodgings in readiness to receive them. 
They were not strangers to our being here, as the arrival of 
the Henry Freeling had been publicly notified in the news- 
papers, in connexion with my name, as a member of the Society 
of Friends. Our joy at meeting so remote from England, I 
believe was mutual, and can be more easily conceived than 
described ; and it has been since not a little heightened by 



1834*.] CHAPTER XVIII. 285 

our having been favoured and strengthened to labour unitedly 
together, for the promotion of the same great and glorious 
cause, in the different meetings which have been held at this 
place since our arrival, as also in opportunities of a more 
private nature. 

On examination, after reaching this port, it was found that 
several repairs were necessary, both to the upper works of the 
vessel, and also to the sails and rigging, as might be expected 
from the long and tempestuous voyage which we had been 
favoured so safely to accomplish ; but these are not of such 
magnitude as to require more than some blacksmith's work, 
and timber, in addition to our own strength, and stores. I 
think we are unitedly of the opinion, that she is as good a 
vessel as can be put together, and that if she had not really 
been such, she never would have been here. 

With a little exception, our sailors have exceeded my most 
sanguine expectations as to behaviour and conduct in general ; 
and I think no men could have suffered more hardships from 
the weather, than they have endured. For a time we gave 
them some wine, but whether from its becoming fiat and vapid 
by washing about in the cask, when a quantity of it had been 
taken out, or with the change from cold to heat, and then to 
cold again, some of them declined drinking it, on account of 
its not suiting them ; so that they had nothing but water for 
months together. It is a little remarkable, that, although 
they have been sometimes wet, and in wet clothes, not for a 
day or two, but for a week together, — when their teeth have 
chattered with cold, with no warm food, — the sea having put the 
fires out, even below the deck ; and the water filtering through 
the deck on their beds below, and not a dry garment to 
change ; — yet not a single instance of the cramp has occurred 
amongst them, nor the slightest appearance of the scurvy, even 
in those who have before-time been afflicted with it, and still 
bear the marks about them : and with the solitary instance of 
one man, who was forced to quit the deck for two hours during 
his watch, from being taken unwell, every man . and boy have 
stood throughout the whole voyage in a remarkable manner. 
They have been plentifully supplied with fresh provisions and 



286 CHAPTER XVIII. [1834. 

vegetables since we arrived, and with some malt liquor also ; but 
their character for sobriety and temperance, and general good 
behaviour, has warranted every reasonable indulgence likely to 
conduce to their health and welfare. 

My dear friends will perhaps remember, that the Society 
Islands have always been the primary object before my mind ; 
and this originally gave rise to our making the attempt to 
reach them by the way of Cape Horn as the nearest route. 
And although Van Diemen's Land and New South Wales 
are also included in the certificates granted me, yet the Society 
Isles are still the object bright before me, as the first point of 
destination to be aimed at. It is expected that we shall be 
ready to leave this port in about a fortnight, and as it appears 
that our dear friends, James Backhouse and George Washington 
Walker, are now about closing their engagements in Van Die- 
men's Land, and will be ready to proceed hence at the same time, 
we therefore propose conveying them to Port Jackson ; where 
it is my intention to call, for the purpose of recruiting our 
stock of coals, oil, &c, all of which, are extremely high in 
price at Hobart Town, and may be purchased in Sydney at a 
reasonable rate. As our course will be round the northern 
extremity of New Zealand, we shall have but a trifling distance 
extra to perform, by hauling in for the coast of New Holland. 

[Soon after the foregoing was written, Daniel Wheeler 
was taken so seriously ill, with a complaint which settled on his 
lungs, that his recovery seemed doubtful ; he remarks :] For 
a time it almost seemed as if I had come to Van Diemen's 
Land to lay down my head there ; but in this prospect, 
resignation to whatever should be the will of my heavenly 
Father, was the stay and comfort of my mind ; bearing it up 
above the bondage of fear, even to a degree of rejoicing in 
humble trust and confidence in the inconceivable love of Him, 
who " came not to call the righteous, but sinners to repent- 
ance ;" permitting them to know and sensibly to feel the riches 
of that universal heavenly grace, which triumphs over all the 
depravity of human nature, where its operations are sub- 
mitted to ; begetting a faith, that can remove every mountain 
of sin and opposition, and can give the victory over death, hell, 



Itf34.] chapter xvur. 287 

and the grave, to all who believe in its powerful and saving- 
efficacy : who " live not unto themselves, but unto Him who 
died for them and rose again ; and " because He lives, they live 
also,' - ' through the mercy of God, in their crucified and glorified 
Redeemer. The season was particularly late and cold ; deep 
snow was lying upon the mountains in sight ; and cold 
rains almost daily falling in torrents, rendered the streets and 
roads in the town nearly impassable, excepting a few of the 
principal thoroughfares that are macadamized. No regularly 
formed footpaths are yet established in any part of the colony ; 
so that getting about on foot was almost impracticable for 
invalids, even in an advanced stage of convalescence. But 
although our intentions have been thus frustrated, yet I am 
persuaded, that all things which have hitherto been permitted, 
have been mercifully dispensed, and have worked, and will 
continue to work together, for good ; and that the lengthened 
continuance of cold winterly weather has been best for us, and 
will serve the more effectually to brace us, and prepare our 
constitutions for the relaxing and constant heat that we shall 
meet with amongst the Society Islands. Besides the advan- 
tages which have been thus derived, I am firm in the belief, 
that our protracted stay in this neighbourhood will ultimately be 
found to have been in the ordering of Divine wisdom ; however 
apparently at the moment impeding the great object before 
me, which it has been my earnest and anxious solicitude to 
accomplish while the earthly tabernacle retains a good degree 
of strength. By this detention an opportunity was afforded 
for a complete and satisfactory arrangement, not only of our 
own affairs, but of those of our dear friends James Backhouse 
and George Washington Walker. The arrival of a ship in 
this interim, brought out for them a variety of books, tracts, 
&c. ; these were much needed for distribution in Van Diemen's 
Land ; so that it seemed to crown all their labours, and enable 
them to depart in peace. 

During this time we were present at two conferences with 
members of the Wesleyan connexion ; at the latter of these, 
most, if not all, of their preachers were collected. Some time 
back the Wesleyans were very favourable to our friends James 



288 CHAPTER XVIII. [183-4. 

Backhouse and George Washington Walker, and disposed to 
render thein every assistance in their power ; supposing, 
although they were walking among men under a different name 
from themselves, that still in Christian doctrine they were 
nearly agreed, or that the difference was so trifling, as to be 
unimportant. But finding that of late some of their members 
have become convinced of Friends'' principles, a marked 
shyness has begun to show itself; and several attempts have 
been made to prove, that the principles which we profess, are 
not fully supported by Scripture authority. The perceptible 
guidance of the Spirit, it seems, they cannot believe in, notwith- 
standing they profess to be continually under its influence in all 
their religious proceedings : we cannot therefore wonder, that 
our mode of worship and silent waiting upon Almighty God, 
are disapproved of and incomprehensible to them. These con- 
ferences have served to show, that there is a much wider dif- 
ference between them and us, than they had previously supposed. 
However we may be disposed to cherish Christian charity 
one towards another as religious professors, yet I am fully 
persuaded, that whenever the principles of our religious Society 
are thoroughly understood, they will always be found striking 
at the root of a tree, upon which most other denominations are 
feeding ; and this must and will be the case, so long as the 
preachers and teachers of the people are paid for the perform- 
ance of their offices, and are trained up for them. I am 
far from asserting, that there are not individuals of other 
societies, who are truly called to the work of preaching the 
gospel, and who are labouring in the noble cause from pure 
and disinterested motives ; but I do fear that the number of 
these is comparatively small : and it is my belief, that if no 
money was permitted to circulate in connexion with the out- 
ward performance of any religious service, the religion of Jesus 
would soon shake off the defilements with which it has been 
sullied, and again shine forth in primitive purity and lustre, 
" clear as the sun, fair as the moon, and terrible" to sin and 
iniquity, " as an army with banners." O ! that men would 
come to that trUe teaching of the heavenly anointing within 
them, which would abide in them and teach them all things ; 



1834.] CHAPTER XVIII. 2S9 

and which is Truth itself and no lie. Then would they be 
sensible, that they needed no man to teach them ; for the 
teachings of man would be to them as that water, of which 
" whoever drinketh, shall thirst again ;"" but when they have 
tasted of the water given them by the Prince of life Himself, 
which should be in them w ' a well of water springing up unto 
everlasting life," — " whosoever drinketh of this, shall never 
thirst." 

[After making several visits to take leave of their friends, 
previous to their departure, in company with James Backhouse 
and George Washington Walker, they weighed anchor in the 
evening of the 1 1th of Twelfth Month ; having previously had 
a parting opportunity in the family of the lieutenant-Governor, 
George Arthur, who uniformly treated them with kindness 
and hospitality. They had however, no sooner left the quiet 
moorings of the Derwent river, than they had to encounter 
the buffetings of the stormy main. This was more or less the 
case, during the whole passage from the Derwent to Port 
Jackson. In the night of the 19th, they were in considerable 
danger of being driven amongst the rocks by some unknown 
current ; but were favoured to discover and escape the danger 
in time, although the night was dark, and much rain falling. 
Daniel Wheeler adds, although the danger which threatened, 
was evident and imminent, yet our little company were pre- 
served in quietness, and divested of fear. At eleven o'clock, 
next day, the 20th, they saw the light-house and signal-staff 
on the South Head, which forms one side of the entrance of 
Port Jackson.] A timely signal having been made, we got a 
pilot on board on nearing the reef, and immediately worked up 
the bay towards the harbour. At two o'clock p.m., we were 
favoured safely to anchor in Sydney Cove, at a convenient 
distance from the shore; before anchoring, the mail, with 
which we had been entrusted from Van Diemens Land, was 
duly conveyed to the post-office at Sydney-. [They met with a 
cordial reception there, not only from persons to whom they 
had letters of recommendation, but from many others also ; 
marks of respect, kindness, and hospitality were also shown them 
by the Governor and local authorities. Meetings for worship, 

u 



290 chapter xvnr.- [1834. 

on First and Fifth clays, were regularly held on board the vessel 
during their stay, which several persons usually attended. 

[The deplorable situation of some of the aboriginal inhabi- 
tants, is thus described:] 

Twelfth Month 23rd. — After dinner, we landed on an unin- 
habited part of the coast, on the north side of the harbour, 
to obtain sufficient exercise; and accidentally met with an 
aboriginal family, consisting of two females, one of them far 
advanced in years, and three children, the offspring of the 
younger woman. There were two men not far off, who 
belonged to them, but they kept aloof. These women appeared 
to be in a poor state of health, and exceedingly shrunk : they 
could talk a little English, and on our making them some 
trifling presents, and saying that some of us would see them 
again, if they should be there to-morrow, one of them said, 
' You welcome ; come.'' It was affecting to behold the 
degraded condition of these natives of the soil. The state of 
these poor creatures has been rendered abundantly more miser- 
able, since the English have taken possession of their country, 
from the introduction of vices to which they were before 
strangers, particularly the use of spirituous liquors. 

24<th. — We sent some biscuit to the native family on the 
north side of the bay, by the mate and my son Charles ; who 
saw two other families of these people in the course of their 
excursion. Their debased condition is greater than can well 
be conceived, and such as to render every attempt to assist 
them fruitless : if money be handed to them, it is immediately 
exchanged for rum ; or if clothes, they are forthwith sold or 
exchanged for whatever will procure strong drink : such is the 
curse entailed upon them since their acquaintance with the 
British ; who are doubtless chargeable, not only on this score, 
but for much of the demoralization and degradation of these 
harmless people. Whilst dining on shore to-day, we had both 
windows and doors open ; such is the heat prevailing on this 
side of the globe, on what is commonly called Christmas eve. 

26th. — This morning we received a visit from William 
Pascoe Crook, one of the missionaries that first went to 
Tahiti, in the ship Duff, many years ago. The letters he 



1834-.] CHAPTER XVIII. 291 

had very recently received from the Society Islands, enabled 
him to communicate much interesting intelligence, some of 
which was of an encouraging nature, although many mournful 
facts were at the same time related. 

In the evening we went on shore for exercise. On returning 
towards the boat, we were abruptly thanked by a negro for 
what we had done for their colour. At first we did not 
understand what he meant, but soon found he was alluding to 
the exertions of our Society for the abolition of slavery. He 
had come from the Mauritius, on his way home to Jamaica, 
and was waiting for a ship bound for Europe or America, in 
order to get thither. Although the abolition of slavery could 
never have been effected, but through Divine interposition, yet 
it was pleasant to find that any of the instruments employed 
in the work, were remembered with sensations of gratitude. 

27th. — -We called upon the Colonial Secretary, who accom- 
panied us to the government house. We were kindly received 
by the Governor, Sir Richard Bourke ; who, being informed that 
James Backhouse was desirous to visit the penal settlement 
upon Norfolk Island, readily gave his consent ; at the same 
time saying, that no person was ordinarily allowed to go there, 
but under present circumstances there would be no objection. 
He lamented the low state of religion and morality upon that 
island. The account of the prisoners there, as furnished by 
Dr. Marshall, of the Alligator sloop of war, is truly affecting. 
About one thousand persons reside upon the island. When I 
first understood that it was the intention of our dear friend 
James Backhouse, to pay an early visit to the settlement upon 
that island, I shrunk at the thought of going thither ; a 
feeling which was, I believe, induced principally by the desire 
of hastening to Tahiti, without any further sacrifice of time. 
But, as the subject dwelt with weight upon my mind, and as 
I abode under it, without consulting any one, I had a clear 
and lively impression, that if I gave up to conveying our dear 
friends James Backhouse and George Washington Walker 
to Norfolk Island, at this time, it might be the means of pre- 
venting my having to go there at a future day ; not doubting 
that my beloved Friends in England would unite in this mea- 

u 2 



292 CHAPTER XVIII. [1834. 

sure, when all the circumstances of the case were considered. 
The Governor was therefore informed, that I proposed to 
convey them in the Henry Freeling ; but not until he had made 
the inquiry how they were to get there, as no vessels are 
allowed to touch at that island, except those belonging to the 
government, which are but few in number, and seldom go 
thither, and none of them were about to sail at the present 
juncture. It is therefore presumed, that ample time will be 
afforded to our friends, if conveyed there b y the Henry Freeling, 
to perform what service may be called for at their hands, and 
be ready to return to New South Wales by the first govern- 
ment vessel which may arrive after their landing ; or it may be, 
by the second, as duty may demand, or longer tarriance become 
needful. Before leaving the Governor, we had an assurance 
that proper documents and private signals should be furnished 
by the Colonial Office, to enable us to approach Norfolk Island 
without difficulty. An allowance of the usual rations for the 
subsistence of our friends during their residence at that settle- 
ment, was also mentioned. Since I have given up to convey 
our friends to Norfolk Island, my mind has been peaceful and 
easy, and the way has opened with clearness ; a circumstance at 
once consoling and confirming. This island is no great distance 
out of our regular course to Tahiti, and bears from hence about 
east and by north half-north, distant less than one thousand 
miles. 

30^. — At noon we received a visit from Samuel 0. Marsden, 
who has been connected with this colony, in and out, more 
than forty years, as a Church missionary. He has been six 
times in New Zealand, and speaks highly in favour of its 
enterprising inhabitants, with whom he has so frequently 
resided in peace and safety, and amongst whom, he would have 
no fear whatever of dwelling again, if occasion required it. 
His great experience in these parts, the plainness and simplicity 
of his manners, and the abundant store of authentic infor- 
mation he possesses, made his company not only edifying but 
animating.*" 

* This devoted servant of Christ is since deceased ; he died on the 
12th of the Fifth Month, 1838. 



1835.] CHAPTER XVIII. 293 

[During their stay, they had several visits from this inte- 
resting individual, as also from some other pious characters, 
several of whom were occupying prominent stations in different 
religious societies.] 

First Month 3rd, 1835. — To-day a hot wind prevailed, 
which is common in this country, but almost insupportable. 
The thermometer in the cabin standing at 90°, but on shore at 
100°, in the shade. A sudden change took place before two 
p. m., commencing with a tremendous squall of wind : the 
great heat was at once turned into cold. It is this pecu- 
liarity of climate which renders inflammatory complaints so 
frequent and fatal here, affecting the aborigines as well as 
strangers. 

7th. — Having at times for the last two or three days, felt 
my mind drawn towards holding a public meeting with the 
inhabitants of Sydney, and dear James Backhouse unexpectedly 
inquiring whether I had thought any thing of such a meeting, I 
felt a willingness to unite with him, in the freedom of the gospel, 
to appoint one, and to take the necessary steps to procure a 
suitable place to hold it in. The old Court-house was obtained, 
and the meeting was held in the evening of the 11th ; which 
appears to have been a satisfactory and relieving opportunity. 
Notwithstanding another meeting was to be held under the 
same roof at seven o"' clock, appointed by a Baptist preacher, 
yet we had the satisfaction to witness a crowded attendance at 
ours, of nearly five hundred persons ; and many that could not 
be seated, went away altogether, but a large number stood the 
whole time ; perhaps from the novelty of its being the first 
meeting of Friends for public worship held at Sydney, and we 
hope, on the part of many from a desire to be benefited, the 
room was presently filled : several present were persons who 
held public stations in the town and neighbourhood. It was 
upon the whole, from beginning to end, a solid opportunity : 
James Backhouse and myself were largely opened in testimony 
amongst them : James Backhouse appeared a second time, 
and concluded the meeting in prayer. From the quietness and 
solemnity which reigned throughout the whole time of the 
meeting, it might have been supposed that the congregation 



294 CHAPTER XVIII. [1835. 

consisted wholly of persons accustomed to stillness and silence, 
instead of an audience, of which scarcely an individual had 
ever before been present at a Friends' meeting, or was even 
aware of the manner in which they are usually conducted : 
— but the glory was and is the Lord's. 

[The following Third day, the 13th, James Backhouse and 
himself, by invitation, paid a visit to the Governor at his house 
at Paramatta, on which he remarks :] — However humiliating 
such visits may be to myself, they may have a tendency to 
promote the great work, and open the way in the minds of 
those in power, to contribute to its furtherance ; and this brings 
into a willingness to be held up as a spectacle before men for 
the great Name's sake. But on such occasions, great circum- 
spection and watchfulness are increasingly needful, lest any of 
our testimonies should be let fall or compromised, and the 
enemy have to exult in the loss we sustain. [Daniel Wheeler 
adds :] — It was ascertained, whilst on this visit, that it is in 
contemplation to build a large hospital for insane persons in 
the neighbourhood, which afforded an opportunity for James 
Backhouse to furnish the Governor with Samuel Tuke's 
Account of the Retreat, and with his pamphlet, entitled Prac- 
tical Hints ; both these contain important information, highly 
needful for those who are about to establish such an institution. 

First Month 21st. — I have found the advantage of placing 
our sailors, upon rather a different and more respectable footing 
than those of other ships ; and the result has been, so far, that 
we have had comparatively no trouble with them. It is so 
common a thing for the shipping to lose their men here, that 
a few days ago, the question was put to me by General Bourke, 
the Governor, ' Have you lost any of your men V and it is 
satisfactory to know, that some of the strangers who have 
attended our meetings on board, have, in more than one 
instance remarked, (as if of rare occurrence,) that our sailors 
look more like healthy, fresh-faced farmers, than men come off 
a long voyage : the generality of those we see daily, have a 
thin and worn-down appearance, particularly when they belong- 
to ships that supply them daily with ardent spirits ; our sailors 
have each a quart of beer per day, of weak quality, being 



1835.] CHAPTER XVIII. 295 

brewed, as is customary here, with only sugar and hops, both 
of which are very cheap. I found it advisable to keep up a 
desire in the crew, to make themselves acquainted with the 
art of navigation ; and this could not be done without their 
being furnished with materials for its accomplishment, such 
as quadrants, slates, pens, paper, &c. ; and though the expense 
of such things ultimately devolves upon themselves, yet, at the 
moment of purchase, the advance of money has been unavoid- 
able on my part. 

23rd. — Captain Saunders, who commanded the Science, when 
she brought out our friends James Backhouse and George 
Washington Walker, came on board. He related to us the 
extraordinary escape from shipwreck he had experienced off 
Cape Horn, on his return from that voyage ; when the Science 
by one stroke of a heavy sea was dismasted, and turned 
nearly bottom uppermost. The mate and part of the crew 
were washed overboard at the same time, and never seen 
again. Captain Saunders and his companions continued on 
board the vessel in this situation for six days and nights, 
when the floating hull was observed, and taken for a whale, 
by one of the South Sea whalers, which ultimately was the 
means of rescuing them from being wrecked on a barren and 
inhospitable coast, from which they were only about two days 
drift when discovered. The everlasting Arm was signally dis- 
played on this occasion, as they were so near the coast, as to 
be quite out of the usual track of every description of vessel ; 
and yet one was actually brought near enough to descry 
the hull, and save their helpless crew, though at considerable 
risk to themselves. 

First Month 27th. — For the last three or four days I have 
been in a low and stripped situation ; and while anxious to be 
getting on our way towards the islands, I could not come to any 
decision and clearness sufficient to enable me to fix the time 
for our sailing. This morning, dear James Backhouse asked 
me if I had felt any thing as to another public meeting with 
the inhabitants of Sydney. [This subject occupied their close 
and serious consideration, and they unitedly agreed that one 
should be appointed to be held the following First day evening, 



296 CHAPTER XVIH. [1835. 

as the most suitable time, and that extensive notice should be 
given thereof. Daniel Wheeler adds :] I felt relieved, and 
willing to take a share with him in that exercise of mind ; 
which, with me, at all times, precedes a prospect of such magni- 
tude and importance. 

[The old Court-house was again procured, and the meeting 
held on the evening of the following First-day, the 1st of Second 
Month, which was as numerously attended as the former one, 
and proved a relieving opportunity.] 

Second Month 4<th. (Fourth day.) — As James Backhouse 
has for a day or two been under no small concern of mind, from 
an apprehension that an attempt must be made to collect the 
sailors of the fleet now in Sydney, at this time very con- 
siderable ; and as this is not likely to be accomplished, but on 
a First day ; there seems now no probability of our proceeding 
towards Norfolk Island during the present week. The crews 
of the ships had not wholly escaped the notice of my mind, for 
several days previous to James Backhouse mentioning the 
subject to me ; but not in any manner as of pressing obligation 
towards seeking a religious opportunity with this class of the 
people exclusively, but yet sufficient to raise a feeling of unity 
with him in the engagement. Upon inquiry, it seemed to be 
the general opinion that meetings were mostly best attended 
by sailors when held on board of ship ; application was there- 
upon made to Captain John Hart, of the ship Henry JPorcher, 
who readily granted the use of that vessel's deck for the 
intended purpose, in the forenoon of the following First day. 
[The meeting was held accordingly on the 8th, and was attended 
by about 130 persons, and is thus described :] James Backhouse 
was largely engaged both in testimony and supplication. It 
was my lot to keep silence, although I could spiritually unite 
in the labours of the day, under a sense of the states of some in 
particular, of those by whom, we were surrounded. After the 
meeting, a large number of Friends'' tracts, and those of the 
Temperance Society, were distributed, and received with eager- 
ness as the company returned to their boats. 



] 835.1 CHAPTER XIX. 297 



CHAPTER XIX. 



SAIL FROM SYDNEY ARRIYE OFF NORFOLK ISLAND PARTING WITH 

JAMES BACKHOUSE AND GEORGE WASHINGTON WALKER SAIL 

FOR THE SOCIETY ISLANDS EQUINOCTIAL GALE ENTER THE 

TORRID ZONE— MAITEA ARRIVE AT TAHITI FIRST INTERVIEW 

WITH THE NATIVES VISIT FROM THE KING PROHIBITION OF 

ARDENT SPIRITS MEETING OF THE MISSIONARIES AND NATIVES 

AT PAPAOA. 

The day we first landed in New South Wales, we were 
saluted by a most appalling volley of dreadful oaths and impre- 
cations, from some of the poor intoxicated creatures, in the 
garb of sailors, who were standing about the stairs ; but 
now, on quitting its shores, I am thankful in believing that 
we have the prayers and good wishes of many, however 
weak and feeble those are who offer them ; and I think we 
can say, that under a deep sense of utter unworthiness, 
on leaving we were honoured with many honours, on the 
part of some. 

We .sailed on the morning of the 13th of Second Month, 
1835, and at noon, we stretched off the land into the Southern 
Pacific, with a strong opposing wind, which increasing, soon 
raised a troublesome swell of the sea. From the 14th to 
the 20th, we continued to beat against adverse winds, 
although the weather remained fine for the most part. The 
heat below was oppressive, which kept all our passengers 
but myself in a sickly state for the first four days ; since 
which, they have been far from well, as a considerable swell 
of the sea from the north-eastward kept up an incessant motion 
of the vessel.* 

* The following extract from the journal of our friend, James Back- 
house, between Sydney and Norfolk Island, relative to the seamen on 
boardcthe Henry Freettng, will, it is thought, not be out of place here. 



298 CHAPTER XIX. [1835. 



Month 22nd. — Yesterday the weather was fine and 
clear, but the wind contrary. Several flying-fish made their 
appearance ; also an albatros and some smaller birds in the 
course of the day. To-day the weather is still beautifully fine : 
our invalids pretty much restored from sea-sickness, and being 
the First day of the week, portions of the Holy Scriptures were 
read to the ship's company assembled upon the deck. During 
the time of silence in the morning, James Backhouse com- 
pared the management of a ship at sea with the spiritual pro- 
gress of each individual, showing the constant attention at all 
times necessary in both cases, in order to be enabled to steer a 
true and steady course towards the great object of our voyage, 
both as regards an earthly and a heavenly port. The latter 
part of the forenoon we sat down together in the cabin ; towards 
the conclusion, I thought I was made sensible of a renewal of 
strength to wrestle for the blessing. 

26th. (Fifth day.) — In the forenoon we sat down together in 
the cabin, to wait upon the Lord : much poverty and weak- 
ness were sensibly felt. The wind still adverse, with consi- 
derable swell of the sea, but fine and pleasant weather. 

Third Month 1st. (First day.) — To-day we assembled the 
crew, both in the forenoon and afternoon. James Backhouse 
alluded to a text of scripture which had been read, — " Except 
ye eat the flesh of the Son of Man, and drink his blood, ye 
have no life in you ;" . explaining the spiritual intercourse and 

' It is pleasing to see the seamen of the Henry Freeling instructing one 
another in nautical observations and calculations ; the carpenter is a 
good navigator, and since he became a steady man he has taken pleasure 
in instructing the other sailors, who appear to be improving in know- 
ledge and conduct. They strongly exemplify the benefit of temperance 
principles on board ship. They are allowed beer, when it is to be had, 
and as much tea, coffee, or cocoa, as they like. There is no swearing to 
be heard ; and the men have the appearance of comfort, and spend their 
leisure in improving themselves, reading, &c. Happily neither the 
captain nor mate make a foolish mystery about the course of the 
vessel, such as is common on board many ships, by which the sailors are 
kept in ignorance, to no purpose, unless it be to enable the captain and 
officers to puff themselves up with an unworthy conceit of knowing 
more than those under them, and keep the sailors in a state of degra- 
dation, inimical to good morals and conduct,' 



1835.] CHAPTER XIX. 299 

communion of the Holy Spirit with the soul of man, and that 
the blessed partaking of the flesh and blood of the Son of Man, 
' can be witnessed by those only, in whom Christ dwells, and 
they in him,' &c. After dinner the wind became more 
favourable, and gradually increased to a fine breeze. 

Mh. — At day-light, we got sight of land, and gliding rapidly 
towards it, Mount Pitt on Norfolk Island and Philip Island, 
were both plainly in sight soon after breakfast. When near 
enough to the Penal Settlement station, we made the private 
signal, according to written instructions received from the 
government at Sydney. Soon after this, a boat was discovered 
coming from the shore, in the direction of our vessel, which at 
length arrived with a military officer ; who brought us a hearty 
welcome from the commandant Major Anderson, accompanied 
by an invitation to his house. On ascertaining that, although 
the landing was dangerous, it was yet practicable in a suitable 
boat, James Backhouse and George Washington Walker con- 
cluded to make an attempt to return with this officer. When 
all things were ready, and my letters for England delivered 
to the care of James Backhouse, we were thus hastily and 
unexpectedly torn from each other, at a short notice ; and 
although ■ time was only afforded to take an abrupt farewell, 
yet we all keenly felt the moment of separation, but I trust 
with feelings that will lastingly remain, through the frequent 
renewal of Divine love. As the boat was not adapted for 
taking more than two or three passengers, it was agreed that 
upon its reaching the shore, if then practicable, a larger boat 
should be sent off immediately for the luggage. 

5th. (Fifth day.) — The boat not reaching us yesterday in 
consequence of rough weather, at an early hour this morning 
we edged down towards the Penal Settlement, and a boat was 
shortly afterwards discovered making towards us from the 
shore, which eventually proved to be the conveyance for the 
luggage of our dear friends ; being safely loaded, and a few 
lines written to James Backhouse, requesting him to acknow- 
ledge the kindness of the commandment on our behalf, the 
boat put off from the vessel ; when we immediately began to 
beat off the coast in earnest, and passing between the islands 



800 CHAPTER XIX. [1835. 

of Nepean and Philip, at ten o'clock, a.m., once more launched 
forth on the capacious bosom of the Southern Pacific. Nepean 
Island is little more than a large barren-looking rock, but said 
to abound with rabbits : Philip Island exhibits more fertility, 
and abounds .with hogs. The officer who came on board 
informed us, that a party had been sent from the settlement the 
preceding week over to Philip Island, and had succeeded in 
shooting and returning with eighty of these animals. Norfolk 
Island appears from the offing to be about half the size of the 
Isle of Wight, and is richly covered in places with a beautiful 
pine, peculiar to the island, which we had seen growing in the 
neighbourhood of Sydney, having been transported thither by 
the Governor and other individuals. The valleys abound with 
lemons, limes, grapes, guavas, &c. 

For some days previous to making Norfolk Island, my mind 
was at times drawn to consider, whether I might not have to 
land upon it myself, and remain a few days ; but I believe I 
may venture to say, that I did not in the slightest degree 
perceive that it formed any part of my duty to do so ; neither 
on receiving the commandant's invitation, nor afterwards on an 
expression of regret communicated by note from James Back- 
house, did any thing arise in my heart, as if I flinched from 
that service. His note says, ' Much regret is expressed, that 
you did not come on shore, and I hope if you feel inclined to 
come, you will yet do so ; though I do not regret you did not 
come with us, as we got a surf on our backs, and the boat's 
nose upon a rock : but though thus permitted to feel the 
danger of landing, by the good providence of our merciful 
heavenly Father, we were preserved from further suffering. 
If we do not see you again before you proceed to Tahiti, I will 
once more bid you farewell in the Lord. May He continue in 
condescending goodness still to be with you, and qualify for 
every good word and work, to His own glory and your peace ; 
and may His good Spirit still more and more work into sub- 
jection to Himself the shipmen of your vessel, that you may 
have increasing comfort in them.' Having thus been favoured 
to accomplish the landing of our beloved friends and brothers, 
with their luggage, without a detention of more than twent} 7 - 



1S35.J chapter xix. 301 

two hours, however much their absence may be felt, the 
suspense and anxiety with which my mind had been filled, 
from a knowledge of the great risk which at all times attends 
such an undertaking, where there is no shelter from the surf 
of the wide ocean, was wholly relieved and removed. 

It being our usual meeting- day, dear Charles and myself sat 
down together in the forenoon, and although stripped indeed 
as to the outward, yet comforted from a sensible evidence, that 
a most merciful and gracious Lord remains to be " God over 
all, blessed for ever." 

Third Month 8th. (First day.) — Yesterday the weather con- 
tinued unsettled and showery, and to-day the wind is contrary, 
with fresh gales and clear weather. We read portions of the 
Holy Scriptures twice in the course of the day in the cabin ; 
as the state of the weather and a heavy swell of the sea pre- 
vented our assembling upon deck. At sun-set we fell in with 
a shoal of spermaceti whales, one of the largest in sight passed 
by the side of our vessel, at a distance of ten or twelve yards. 
This fish would contain about fifty barrels of oil. There were 
at least twenty of them within a small compass around the 
Henry Freeling, and it is probable they formed but a small 
part of the shoal. 

10th. — Since leaving Norfolk Island, but more particularly 
within the last three or four days, it has been to me at times 
a trying, proving season. The loss of the company of our 
dear friends, with whom we had been closely and sweetly con- 
nected for more than five months, either by sea or land, — the 
steady opposition of the winds since we separated, — the great 
distance we have yet to go, — the advanced state of the season, 
towards the autumn in these regions,— and yet above all, the 
absence of Him in whom my soul delighteth, — combined to 
weigh down and oppress my poor, tossed mind, beyond the 
usual degree. But in the depths, although unable to draw 
nigh, I endeavoured to look towards the holy temple : I 
remembered the Lord, and my prayer was, I trust, permitted 
to come in unto Him ; and He remembered a poor unworthy 
creature, and in His own way and time, was graciously pleased 
to speak comfort, and to seal instruction. The affecting 



302 CHAPTER XIX. ..[183$. 

instance of the dear Son of G-od himself, was brought to ray 
remembrance, " who was made sin for us, who knew no sin," 
and died, " the just for the unjust, that He might bring us to 
God ;" when, in the very act of child-like and lamb-like obedi- 
ence, and meek submission to His holy Father's will, from the 
extreme depth and weight of suffering upon Him for the sins 
of poor, lost, guilty man, He poured forth the agonizing 
query, "My G-od, my God, why hast thou forsaken nier' and I 
am renewedly persuaded that these present trials, and proving 
baptisms, are all in unutterable and inconceivable love and 
mercy, dispensed for the preservation of that precious life which 
is hid with Christ in God. 

15th. (First day.) — Assembled the crew twice in the day, 
for devotional purposes. • During the latter part of the interval 
of silence in the afternoon, petitions were raised in ray heart 
to the throne of grace, for the best welfare of our little com- 
pany. A whole year has now passed away since we sailed 
from the Mother-bank, and although more than seven months 
of that time have been spent upon the mighty deep, and with 
the exception of a few transient intervals, out of sight of land 
altogether; yet such is the boundless and unmerited mercy of 
Him with whom we have to do, that if the question were asked, 
' Lackest thou any thing V 'Nothing, Lord, 1 would imme- 
diately be responded. 

Third Month 1 6th. — This afternoon we were in the latitude 
of Cartes Island, Macauley's Rock, and several others of recent 
discovery, extending from this latitude northward for more than 
200 miles, and some of them level with the surface of the sea ; 
therefore at six o'clock, p. m., we tacked, and stood to the 
southward, rather than risk being driven too near such trea- 
cherous neighbours. 

Fourth Month 1st. — By nine o'clock last night, the wind 
became quite fair ; but in a short time it began to blow strong, 
and the sea rose so rapidly, that at midnight we again hove to 
under storm-sails. As the mercury continued gradually to 
lower in the tube, and the storm to increase with appalling 
violence, there now seemed no doubt but an equinoctial gale 
had overtaken our often-tried little bark. It raged with great 



1835.] CHAPTER XIX. 30o 

fury throughout the night, and returning day seemed only to 
increase its strength. At noon the sea wrought in an awful 
manner, and frequently the white crests of the mountain billows, 
were carried off by the sweeping and irresistible tempest, and 
uniting together flew in one continued mass of drift several 
yards above the rugged surface, with incredible force. Yet on 
this, as well as on former occasions, the Divine Arm of ever- 
lasting love and strength was not only near for our support, 
to compass us about as with a shield, but mercifully to over- 
shadow us with a canopy of peaceful resignation. Not a sea 
was permitted to injure our vessel, and even the weaker part of 
her upper works remained unbroken through it all. How 
correct is the animating declaration of the Psalmist, — "The 
Lord sitteth on the flood ; the Lord sitteth King for ever." 
And is it not encouragingly verified ? " The Lord will give 
strength unto His people :" those that fear, love, honour, and 
obey Him, these are his people ; and " the Lord will bless his 
people with peace." 

Fourth Month 1 5th. — Fresh and favourable gales ; we made 
great progress, and to all appearance, the wind we had been 
so long expecting was fairly set in, and we were once more 
venturing to look forward to a termination for a time, of our 
" perils by sea/' But the pleasant anticipation was shortly 
afterwards disappointed, by its being ascertained that from our 
present position a dangerous reef lay directly across our path ; 
which, at the rate we were sailing, we should probably get close 
upon by the setting sun. As the sea was running pretty 
heavy it seemed doubtful whether we could pass to the south- 
ward of this reef, it was therefore concluded best, as suggested 
by my Charles, that our course should be forthwith altered 
sufficiently to insure our passing it in safety to leeward, which 
was accordingly done. As the exact position of this reef 
cannot be fully relied on, any more than that of our vessel, 
owing to the clouded state of the atmosphere of late, we seem 
to have no outward prop to lean upon through the cheerless 
gloom of darkness; but we well know there is a Power almighty 
and all-merciful, whose compassionate eye never slumbers. 

Fourth Month 2Brd. (Fifth day.) — At two o'clock, p. m. 



304 CHAPTER XIX. [1835. 

yesterday, we passed the tropic of Capricorn, and entered the 
torrid zone. The latitude at noon was 23°* 38' south : by 
lunar distance, well taken this morning, the longitude was 
found to be 142° 36' west. The latitude of Tahiti is 17° 29' 
south, longitude 149° 28' west. As the wind now blows, our 
being so far to the eastward is an advantage, in making it com- 
pletely fair for us. 

27th. — Yesterday, though heavy rain fell near us through- 
out the day, we were not prevented from assembling in the 
usual manner twice in the course of it, it being First day. 
At noon to-day, the island of Maitea was distant fifty miles. 
It would have been relieving to have come within sight of 
this island before dark ; but although the horizon was pretty 
clear at sun-set in that direction, it could not be distinguished 
from the mast-head. Many birds have been daily with us 
latterly, a fact which strongly indicates our approach to land ; 
and the course which these take for their evening flight, speaks 
in plain language where it lies. 

28th. — At day-break this morning, Maitea was in sight ; but 
the wind being light and fickle through the day, it was night- 
fall before we had fairly passed it by. This island is now used 
as a penal settlement for Tahiti. Last evening a sufficient 
number of albicoas and bonitos were caught by the sailors, to 
furnish the whole of us throughout the day with fresh meals ; 
and as it was more than six weeks since we had had one, they 
proved very acceptable. 

This morning, 29th of Fourth Month, about half-past one 
o'clock, the mountains of the long-looked- for Tahiti, were dis- 
covered through the gloom upon our lee -bow. It will be 
eleven weeks to-morrow since we left Sydney, and with the 
exception of the equinoctial gale, we have during the voyage, 
for the most part been favoured with fine weather, but with an 
unheard-of proportion (for these seas) of contrary winds during 
nearly the whole time, completely setting at nought all former 
experience. After leaving Norfolk Island we traversed from 
twenty-nine to forty degrees of south latitude, in the hope of 
finding the westerly winds, which usuaHy prevail, to waft us to 
the eastward ; but could never meet with them to any purpose, 



1835.] CHAPTER XIX. 805 

and since we entered the trade latitudes, to this day, Ave have 
been in constant expectation of meeting with the south-east 
trade-winds, to enable us to fetch the island of Tahiti, and 
have in this been equally unsuccessful. We have, however, 
after traversing various zigzag courses over more than 5000 
miles of ocean by the log, since leaving Sydney, been guided 
to a hairs-breadth, in so remarkable a manner, as to get the 
first sight of the island when nearly dark ; — the moon not being- 
twelve hours old at the time. The darkness and the light are 
both alike to Him, who hath been with us, to bless and pre- 
serve us ; enabling us in degree to " glory in tribulation, - " and 
even to bear privation for His name's sake, — indeed as not 
being worthy to be recounted, because of the love, and peace, 
and joy, which at seasons have been our happy portion. 

SOth. — At noon passed through Matavai bay. A canoe with 
four of the natives came off to us, bringing oranges, guavas, 
and other kinds of fruit ; these we purchased, after much 
bargaining, for a hank of thread and three small needles to 
each individual, although the price they first asked was a dollar 
for each basket ; there were five baskets of fruit. We were all 
pleased with the openness and simplicity of these people. At 
two o'clock p.m., we took the pilot on board, and immediately 
entered the channel within the reefs ; but after getting through 
the most dangerous part, it fell calm, which obliged us to drop 
an anchor for the night, directly opposite the house of George 
Bicknell, so close to the shore, that a mooring hawser was 
made fast to one of his cocoa-nut trees. By this time our deck 
was covered with the natives. Just as we were ready to go on 
shore to take tea at George Bicknell's, to whom, as deputy 
Consul, the mail brought from New South Wales had been 
delivered, the young king (or perhaps it is more correct to 
say, the husband of the queen) came on board, with his 
younger brother and uncle, and several others ; they behaved 
with great openness and cheerfulness, and seemed highly pleased 
to see us. Our captain was personally known to them already. 
They soon looked round the vessel, apparently delighted ; left 
us a basket of oranges, and said they would come again to- 
morrow. To my great rejoicing, the pilot soon after coming on 

x 



306 CHAPTER XIX. [1835. 

board, informed us of the entire disuse of ardent spirits in 
Tahiti ; saying ' rum is no good here. 1 The total prohibition 
of spirituous liquors has been so strongly enforced, that they 
have taken them out of private houses without exception, 
and thrown them away ; and the natives have carried it to the 
length of smelling the breath of people, to ascertain whether 
they had been used, and if found to be the case, a severe fine 
was imposed ; so that a person well known to lead a thoroughly 
sober life was not allowed to have such a thing in his possession, 
but was liable at any time to undergo a search. 

Fifth Month 1st. — At day-break the pilot came on board, 
and the breeze being favourable, the vessel was got ready, and 
run gently down to Papeete Harbour : the water was so clear, 
that the beautifully spreading branches of coral could be plainly 
distinguished as we passed over the most shallow parts of 
the reef. About nine o'clock, a. m., we took up our station 
in a well-sheltered cove or harbour, surrounded by straggling 
houses and plantations of the cocoa-nut tree, banana, bread- 
fruit, orange, and sugar cane, ranging along the edge of the 
sea, on the level land at the foot of the mountains. In the 
forenoon, George Pritchard, the resident missionary came on 
board ; for whom we were bearers of many letters and parcels, 
which proved very acceptable : in the afternoon we visited 
his habitation, and were kindly received by his wife and 
family. George Pritchard very kindly inquired whether I 
wished to be at the worship of the Tahitians, next First day ; 
but I informed him that I believed it would be best for me to 
be with my own crew on that day. 

Having endeavoured to keep my mind exercised to ascertain 
the will of my Lord and Master, it was with me to tell George 
Pritchard that the first step which I had to take, was to request 
a conference with the whole of the missionaries in this district ; 
asking him if they had any stated times for meeting together 
by themselves : he said they had, but a special meeting could 
be convened for the occasion. On considering a little, he found 
that their next quarterly meeting in regular course was to be 
held the second week in the present month. As the month 
was already come in, I thought it would be unreasonable to 



1835.] CHAPTER XIX. 307 

subject the parties to the inconvenience of meeting on purpose, 
as their own meeting would still necessarily have to be held on 
the appointed clay ; more especially as I had several affairs to 
regulate, and preparations to make, to enable us to barter for 
supplies, &c. At present, I see no further than to attend this 
conference, and there produce the certificates furnished by my 
dear Friends in England ; . humbly trusting, that the path of 
my future proceeding will be graciously manifested in due time, 
and strength and perception mercifully afforded to enable me 
to walk faithfully in it. I had been unwell on the 12th 
instant, but having passed a more favourable night, on the 
morning of the 13th instant, I felt no hesitation about pro- 
ceeding to Papaoa, as the day was fair overhead. George 
Pritchard called with a boat, to take Charles and myself with 
him, — he finding three natives to row, and myself two. 

Having understood that on the present occasion, the prin- 
cipal chiefs from all parts of the island would be there, and a 
large muster of the inhabitants residing in this district, it 
occurred to my mind that it would be a favourable medium, 
through which my arrival might be publicly announced to 
all the distant districts, if at a suitable time my certifi- 
cates were read. On mentioning this to George Pritchard, 
and showing him the translation so kindly made before I 
left London by William Ellis, he at once saw the propriety ; 
but said it would be necessary to consult Henry Nott, the 
senior missionary, resident at Papaoa, — George Pritchard him- 
self being a junior : this was a matter of course, and had I 
been aware of the distinction, I should myself have proposed 
it. From the wind having sprung up a fresh breeze against 
us, we were rather late in reaching our destination ; and Henry 
Nott had taken his seat in the meeting before we got to it. 
We followed George Pritchard through a large number -of 
people already assembled, until we got up to Henry Nott ; 
who, on being consulted, immediately consented that it should 
be done, when their service was over. We then took our 
seats, having kept on our hats until that moment : but the 
heat of the climate renders it too oppressive to keep them on 
for any great length of time. We heard of no remark, how- 

x2 



308 CHAPTER XIX. [1835. 

ever, having been made on this head, whatever might have 
been thought. They commenced by George Pritchard giving 
out a hymn, then part of the epistle to the Ephesians was 
read, after which George Pritchard kneeled down and prayed ; 
another hymn was then sung, and was followed by the sermon, 
delivered by Charles Wilson, from a text out of the same 
epistle ; when this was finished, another hymn was given out, 
at his request, and he afterwards finished with prayer. Some 
business then came on relating to the affairs of the Missionary 
Society, when the queen of the island took her seat as its presi- 
dent. We merely sat as silent spectators through the whole of 
this, which from beginning to end was conducted in the Tahitian 
language. As only George Pritchard sat between myself and 
the queen, I observed that she was employed in reading my 
certificates, which had been previously laid upon the table. 
The whole of my certificates were then audibly read in the 
Tahitian language by George Pritchard ; who took great pains 
to give ample explanation whenever needful. The marked 
attention and solidity of countenance manifested by the Tahi- 
tians, was both striking and comforting ; and the solemnity 
which spread over this large assembly had previously covered 
my mind as with a mantle, contriting my spirit under a sense 
that the great Master himself was there. After the reading 
of the certificates was gone through, profound silence reigned. 
I asked if I might say a few words, which was at once per- 
mitted, and George Pritchard agreed to interpret for me. I 
requested him simply to repeat what I said, and I have reason 
to believe this was faithfully done ; and was to the best of my 
recollection after this manner : ' I have no wish to trespass 
upon the time of this meeting. I was desirous that these docu- 
ments might be read, which would account for a stranger being- 
present, and inform all that I came not here in my own will, 
but in the will of my Lord and Master, whose I am, and 
whom I desire to serve to my latest breath ; and would also 
let you know, that I came with the full unity and consent of 
that branch of the Christian Church in England, of which I 
am a member. And now, grace, mercy, and peace from God, 
the Father, and our Lord Jesus Christ, be multiplied upon all 



1835.] CHAPTER XIX. . S0.9 

the inhabitants of this land ; and may the God of peace, who 
brought again from the dead our Lord Jesus, that great 
Shepherd of the sheep, through the blood of the everlasting 
covenant, keep our hearts and minds,' &c. 

After I sat down, a solemn silence again prevailed, until 
one of the natives, a supreme judge, broke it by addressing 
me by name, which he had caught from the certificates ; 
and declaring on behalf of himself and the islanders, that the 
manner of my coming among them was very satisfactory, 
because what had been read and spoken, was in accordance 
with the gospel, which they had been taught, and were 
acquainted with. He also at considerable length touched upon 
the great distance I had come over the deep waters to see 
them, and to do them good ; that in return, their hearts, and 
arms, and habitations, were open to receive me ; duly appre- 
ciating the disinterestedness of the motive that had induced 
the step ; having no trade, nor other object in view. He 
hoped I should visit all their schools, and stroke the heads of 
the children ; that he should now deliver ' them all into my 
hands. I told George Pritchard to say, that the dear chil- 
dren would always have a strong hold, and a strong claim 
upon my heart. Much more transpired that was truly con- 
soling and comforting ; and the missionaries who spoke on the 
occasion, I truly believe, most fully and cordially co-operated 
in endeavouring to explain my views to the people in terms of 
strong approbation. 

Although the above may not be exactly verbatim, it is the 
substance of what passed. When it was all over, Henry Nott 
kneeled down, and concluded the meeting with prayer in the 
Tahitian. The natives then generally rose from their seats, 
and began to flock round us, and to shake hands with Charles 
and myself in a very hearty manner, and without regard to 
order, age, or sex, from the humble peasant to the bronze- 
coloured queen, her two aunts, and the numerous chiefs, who, 
I think, are the stoutest, most giant-like men I ever saw 
assembled together. About 800 persons were collected at this 
meeting ; but the house was so large that it seemed impossible 
to make any accurate estimate ; for my own part, I should have 



310 CHAPTER XIX. [1835. 

supposed the number not less than a thousand. The judge 
before spoken of, in one of his speeches, (for he spoke three 
times,) hinted that they perceived I was not exactly of the 
same description of Christians that had hitherto come amongst 
them, or I belonged to a different body. This, however, did 
not seem to stand in the way. Some days previously to this 
meeting being held, the young king and several chiefs came on 
board to breakfast, six in number. After breakfast, our usual 
reading in the Holy Scriptures was introduced, during which 
they behaved with great attention and propriety; sitting as still, 
in the time of silence, both then and at the pause before break- 
fast, as if accustomed to it. When they were about going 
away, a telescope and a piece of handkerchiefs were presented 
to the king, and a shawl to each of the others ; with which they 
seemed highly pleased. Through the medium of an English- 
man, who had been sent for on the occasion, the king was told, 
that I had something in reserve for Pomare, the queen, ex- 
pecting she also would pay us a visit. They behaved with 
much openness and affability, and told us in plain terms that 
they liked us, because we were like themselves, and did not 
make ourselves very high to them. 

I had a conference with the missionaries of the Papaoa dis- 
trict, who, although only four in number, are capable of ren- 
dering me much assistance in forwarding my views, and 
interpreting to the people. I was fully aware the missionaries 
were under an impression, that I was come out to inspect the 
state of the missions, and particularly that of the schools ; 
private letters had reached them some months ago to that effect 
from London ; but they were informed that now the missionary 
meeting was over, I was waiting as at the posts of wisdom's 
gate, not knowing to what I might next have to turn my hand : 
this explanation at once placed me in a fresh point of view. 
An expression of desire to do all in their power to co-operate 
in the work, in any manner I could point out, was, I think, 
avowed by each individual ; and we parted in brotherly love. 



1835.] CHAPTER XX. 311 



CHAPTER XX. 

TAHITI VISIT OF CHIEFS — THE YOUNG KING MEETING FOR 

SAILORS DISTRIBUTION OF TRACTS, BIBLES, &C. TEMPERANCE 

SHIPS INTRODUCTION OF ARDENT SPIRITS VISIT TO THE SCHOOLS 

ATTEND THE NATIVE MEETING VISITORS ON BOARD JOHN 

DA VIES — MEETING ON BOARD IMPORTANCE OF TRANSLATING AND 

CIRCULATING THE SCRIPTURES TAHITIAN COUNCIL NATIVE 

MEETING. 

Tahiti, 14th of Fifth Month 1835.— This morning, Tati and his 
brother, two of the principal chiefs, and truly great in stature, 
with a grand-daughter of the former, came on board at breakfast- 
time, bringing with them another person of note. They par- 
took of our meal, and stayed over our usual reading in the 
Scriptures ; during which, and in the time of silence, they 
behaved in a solid manner. These are the most elderly chiefs 
that we have seen, and perhaps the oldest upon the island ; 
and they are said to be the principal support of the present 
government. They had been on board once before, but it 
being late in the evening they had not stayed long. I put a 
small cotton dress upon the child, and presented a shawl to 
each of the great men. They invited us to come with the vessel 
to Mairi Pehe, where they reside, and on leaving seemed well 
satisfied with their visit. It being Fifth-day, Charles and my- 
self endeavoured to wait upon the Lord, but under feelings 
oppressively languid from the heat. 

15th. — My mind having for some days past been brought 
into thoughtful solicitude for the best welfare of the crews of 
the vessels now lying at anchor about us, I mentioned it to 
my Charles soon after rising this morning ; and seeing no way 
of being clear of the blood of these poor neglected people, but 
by appointing a public meeting, to be held next First-day, it 



312 CHAPTER XX. [1835. 

was concluded to make the necessary arrangements for so doing. 
There was no doubt that the deck of one of the whaling vessels 
might have been procured for the purpose ; but on considering 
the subject, it seemed best to have the deck of the Henry 
Freeling made use of, lest umbrage should be taken by the 
English sailors, if the meeting was held on board an American 
vessel ; or by the American- sailors, if held onboard an English 
one, in the same calling; both parties considering our own as 
employed on very different grounds from any other in the bay. 
There were six American whalers, and one trading vessel, all 
large and well manned, in the bay; and only one English 
whaler, the Bover, of London. 

I stepped on shore to inquire whether the eleventh hour, next 
First-day, would' interfere with any arrangements the mission- 
aries might have made ; that the work of neither party might be 
marred, and that nothing on our part might appear as done in 
a corner. On learning at George Pritchard's, that nothing- 
would clash if our meeting was held at that hour, and having 
invited him or any part of his family to attend it, we returned 
immediately on board, and were soon after visited by a serious 
and respectable person, who had been sent out in 1825, by the 
London Missionary Society to teach the natives the art of 
spinning and weaving. 

The young king and his brother came on board in a private 
capacity : their visit was much more agreeable than when 
attended by several of the principal chiefs. They stayed dinner, 
and remained on board several hours. The simple habits, and 
gentle unassuming manner of this young man, do not appear 
at present to be liable to alter from his having become the 
husband of the queen. The amiable disposition he possesses, 
and which cannot be concealed, at once renders him an object 
of general esteem. He has evidently acquired considerable 
polish from the intercourse with foreigners, of which lie does 
not fail to avail himself at every opportunity ; and although 
from this circumstance, his manners are much more civilized 
than those of his countrymen, yet now and then the wild 
nature of a South Sea Islander shows itself. They brought 
us some line bunches of oranges, the largest of which contained 



1835.] CHAPTER XX. 313 

eleven in a cluster, and the smallest seven. A sliding knife 
and fork were presented to each, also a three-bladed knife and 
a penknife. Shortly after these guests had left us, Paofai a 
chief, residing near Point Venus, came on board, and made 
signs that he wished to read my certificates, which were accord- 
ingly furnished for his perusal in the Polynesian Ian 



"'lUV'c 



b v ' 



although he could speak more English than any we have yet 
met with. He is -considered a great man, and was more 
modest in behaviour than any we have yet seen of his stamp. 
Having observed, while he read the certificate, that his sight 
was impaired, I presented him with a pair of spectacles ; at the 
same time a pocket-handkerchief and a small hatchet were 
given him ; upon which he said he had no money to pay for 
them. Such an honest confession we had not before met with, 
nor with any person who mentioned payment for what they 
received. He left us with an acknowledgment of the kindness 
with which he had been treated, and I believe both parties were 
satisfied with the interview. In the evening, we were engaged 
in writing notices of the public meeting, intended to be held 
next First day. 

16th. — After breakfast, my Charles went to distribute the 
written notices amongst the shipping. In the forenoon, a 
quantity of tracts were selected, and parcelled in readiness for 
distribution at the close of the meeting to-morrow. 

17th. (First day.) — In the morning the prospect before 
us was rather gloomy. There had been rain in the night, and 
soon after daylight the Mariner whaling vessel put to sea ; 
thus the seamen on board of her were prevented from attending 
the meeting : but I thought there was no reason why they 
should be deprived of their share of the tracts, which had been 
got ready for distribution the day before. As the wind was 
light, there was no difficulty in overtaking her before she got 
outside of the reef. Our mate was accordingly dispatched in 
good time, and succeeded in handing them on board. They were 
received with civility, and the requested application of them 
promised. By the accommodation of. some planks kindly pro- 
vided by the Emerald, our decks were extensively seated, and 
the planks were well covered with canvass, spare Hags, &c. 



314 CHAPTER XX. [1835. 

At half-past ten o'clock, a bethel-flag, with which we have 
been furnished, was hoisted, as a thing understood by all sailors, 
and a little in their own way : this allowed half-an-hour for 
the boats to collect from each ship, in order that the time 
appointed (eleven o'clock,) might be kept to, and the quiet of 
the meeting preserved from late comers on board. Although 
the invitation, with the exception of George Pritchard's family, 
had not been extended by us beyond the shipping in the bay, 
several persons attended from the shore ; — Doctor Vaughan, 
Captain Henry, George Bicknell, and some other white people 
with children, whose copper-coloured skins indicated that they 
were the offspring of Tahitian mothers. The meeting at length 
settled down into stillness beyond our expectation. I thought 
there would scarcely be a single individual then present, except 
our own crew, that had ever before been at a meeting held 
exclusively after the manner of Friends. In this, however, 
I found I had been mistaken, as the mate of the Lancaster 
came on board the next day, and acknowledged he was a mem- 
ber of our Society, though, as he stated, he had not kept close 
to it. He told us, that he little expected to see a Friends'' 
meeting held amongst these islands; but seemed glad of having 
an opportunity to attend one. 

However long the time of silence might be thought, there 
was no restlessness sufficient to disturb the quiet of the meeting. 
Unexpectedly to myself, I felt an engagement of mind to state 
to the meeting, that the religious Society of which I was a 
member, had, from its earliest rise, been called upon to bear a 
faithful testimony to the excellency of silent worship and 
waiting upon God : that it was a noble testimony to the all- 
sufficiency and teaching of that grace, which had appeared unto 
all men, — teaching all, and bringing salvation to all; — "for 
the grace of God that bringeth salvation, hath appeared unto 
all men, &c, looking for that blessed hope and the glorious 
appearing of the great God and our Saviour, Jesus Christ," &c, 
to the end of the text. " For God is a Spirit : and they that 
worship him, must worship him inspirit and in truth:" and 
we are told in holy writ, by the Son, that " the Father seeketh 
such to worship him." I was then carried forth on the nature 



1835,] CHAPTER XX. 315 

of true, silent, and spiritual worship, to a considerable length ; 
and had to state, that my head would not have laid easy upon 
the pillow at a future day, if the attempt had not been made 
to collect the seamen of the fleet : — that sailors were a class of 
men more than most others, separated from their homes and 
regular places of worship, particularly on these long voyages 
upon the mighty deep, for months and months together ; but 
that the ample provision made by the glorious gospel for the 
restoration and redemption of mankind, boundless as its love, 
extended unto all : for He that said, " Let there be light, and 
there was light ;" even " God, who commanded the light to 
shine out of- darkness, hath shined in our hearts, to give the 
light of the knowledge of the glory of God, in the face of Jesus 
Christ.'' , I had largely to proclaim some of the principal doc- 
trines of the gospel, and was helped through, to my humble 
and thankful admiration. It was indeed a glorious, and I trust 
to some, a blessed meeting. I had, I think, more than once 
to call their attention to the heavenly power that reigned 
over us with precious solemnity, as a crown and diadem : 
and before the meeting closed, I had to acknowledge the same 
with prayer and thanksgiving, to the glory and the praise 
of my God. After the meeting was broken up, I requested 
an individual out of each ship to step forward, when two 
hundred and twenty-nine tracts, principally those of Friends, 
were disposed of, including those sent on board the Mariner in 
the morning. 

19th. — The Nassau sailed early this morning for the coast 
of California, to prosecute the whale fishing. The captain was 
furnished with six Bibles and six Testaments, in the Spanish 
language. He said there would be no difficulty in putting 
them into suitable hands, he being well acquainted with those 
parts . 

20th. — The American ship Emerald, being about to sail for 
Manilla and the Phillipine Islands, and Captain Eaglestone 
having kindly offered, on application being made, to forward 
our views, in circulating the Scriptures in the Spanish 
language, he being on a trading voyage, and of extensive 
acquaintance, this morning eighteen Bibles, eighteen Testa- 



316 CHAPTER XX. [1835. 

raents, eighteen Letter by J. J. Gurney on Christianity, with 
five copies of Wilberforce's Practical View, were got ready and 
delivered to that ship. We have met with great civility and 
willingness to lend a helping hand in many of the American 
captains : at the same time, we are frequently sensible of a 
mixture which cannot be reconciled. The foregoing remark has 
no allusion to the inconsistent conduct of the crews. of many of 
the American vessels, which we have fallen in with here, that 
are called ' temperance ships. 1 At first I could not but view 
these with satisfaction, and with a degree of thankfulness, 
as likely to contribute by their example to the welfare of the 
islanders. But, alas ! I now find, with horror and surprise, 
that the word ' temperance' applies only to the ships, and not to 
their crews, none .probably of which are members of a Tem- 
perance Society ; they are merely bound by articles, that the 
voyage shall be performed without any spirits being on board, 
except as medicine, and their sobriety only exists because they 
cannot get the liquor ; when on shore, and unbound by these 
articles, they are lamentably, in many instances, notorious for 
drinking to excess ; and their immoral conduct, at this place, 
makes me shudder for the awful and woful consequences, both 
as regards themselves, and the daughters of Tahiti. Although 
great exertion is made and promoted by the missionaries here 
to stop this overwhelming torrent of iniquity, yet all their 
measures are abortive, and can never be successful, unless 
co-operated with on the part of the masters of the shipping. 
Notwithstanding the disuse of spirituous liquors is rigidly 
enforced at Tahiti, and no person is allowed to have the article 
in his house ; yet this bane of the human race is still to be 
purchased on shore, and the supply is kept up by the American 
ships; it is clandestinely landed amongst the supposed empty 
casks which are sent on shore for water, (an instance of this 
kind took place a few days ago,) and by other methods. A 
considerable quantity was brought in last week by an American 
schooner from Valparaiso, and safely landed ; but has since 
been discovered, the casks destroyed and their contents totally 
lost. By what is said, I do not mean to imply that this gross 
immorality is confined solely to the crews of the American 



1835.] chapter xx. 317 

vessels, because those of the English are perhaps equally 
implicated, but with this difference, they do not assume the 
character of ' temperance ships. ' 

How dreadful and appalling the consideration, that the 
intercourse of distant nations should have entailed upon these 
poor, untutored islanders, a curse unprecedented and unheard 
of in the annals of history ; it is said that one-fourth of the 
whole population is miserably affected with disease brought 
amongst them, and kept up by the licentious crews of the 
shipping. Will not, shall not the Lord visit for these things I 

22nd. — The American schooner Peruvian, came in before 
noon from Valparaiso, with horses. In the afternoon, went on 
shore upon the Queen's Island. On this small spot of ground 
much is concentrated : a small chapel, with sides of upright 
bamboos, (wicker-work,) is standing, with seats and a pulpit, at 
one time probably in use : there were also several pieces of cannon 
in a useless state, one placed on a platform, formed of loose 
stones and coral, and others lying about in a condition equally 
harmless. These have been left as presents by the ships of 
different nations, which have visited these seas, and stand as 
memorials against them, by showing that their dependence is 
upon the arm of flesh for protection : England, France and 
Eussia seem to have been the donors of them. Part of one 
building is fitted up as an armoury, with an inscription to this 
import over the arms, which consist of three worthless muskets 
without locks. We cannot wonder at young and barbarous 
nations being eager to possess weapons of a destructive nature, 
when they see in what high estimation they are held by those 
who are called Christians ; but, alas ! their conduct proclaims 
aloud, that such are not the followers of the Prince of peace, 
nor are living under the blessed influence of the gospel. 

23rd. — The king came on board to breakfast this morning 
by himself, but departed as soon as our reading was over. As 
attending the Tahitian worship has been frequently the com- 
panion of my thoughts for several days past, it seemed best for 
me to be in readiness by having the way opened for the ensuing- 
First day, (to-morrow,) should this be my portion. After com- 
municating this to my son Charles, we concluded to go on 



318 CHAPTER XX. [1835. 

shore, and mention the subject to G-eorge Pritchard. On 
seeing the latter, I told him that my mind had been drawn to 
attend the Tahitian worship to-morrow morning. He asked, 
if I meant to perform service there, or to sit as a spectator. 
' To sit as a spectator,' I replied, ' but if required to speak, to 
have permission to do so.' He then said, ' You must not 
expect to find things in the same order as if you were at 
home ;' and added, ' If you could come on shore about half- 
past eight o'clock in the morning, there would be time to look 
at the schools before the meeting begins : the meeting for 
worship begins at nine o'clock, but a prayer-meeting com- 
mences at sun-rise. 1 I cannot but admire, with reverential 
gratitude and thankfulness, how in every instance of this kind 
that has yet occurred, mountains have become mole-hills, as a 
willingness has been wrought to approach them : and if it were 
not fixing a very high stamp upon ourselves, I should say, 
surely the blessed Master, in like manner as when He sent 
forth His disciples two and two formerly to every place where 
He intended to come, is already not only come, but has con- 
descended to go before, and prepare the way for us poor 
creatures in a remarkable manner, in the hearts of others with 
whom we have to do. In returning we walked along the edge 
of the bay, and were accosted by a respectable, clean-looking 
white man, who has resided here about fifteen years. He had 
been a sailor, but a severe hurt in his right hand and wrist had 
caused his being left at this place. It seemed that he had been 
told we were much at a loss for an interpreter : he wished to 
render us every assistance he could, and was willing to accom- 
pany us wherever we might have to go ; wanting nothing in 
return, as he was comfortably off ; and he was not one that stood 
opposed to the work in which we were engaged : as he had but 
a small piece of land, he was at liberty at any time to attend 
us. We acknowledged the kindness and disinterestedness of 
this offer, and told him, if occasion required it, we should make 
application to him. We think him a suitable person to have 
the care of some tracts for lending out to others, and one with 
whom some of the writings of Friends may be left. 

On First day morning, the 24th of Fifth Month, we proceeded 



1835.] CHAPTER XX. 319 

to George PritcharcTs house about the appoiuted time. We were 
much too early for the school, owing to there being no regular 
time kept amongst the people ; and some having to come from 
considerable distances, are the more likely to be out of season 
when they arrive. The principal teacher, who is a deacon in 
the church, made his appearance ; soon after which we followed 
to the school-house. A considerable number of children were 
collected : the boys sitting at one end of a long building, and 
the girls at the other ; the teacher standing on one side, about 
midway between them. He gave out questions to the boys 
and girls alternately, which were answered in the same way by 
a few of the elder children in a singing tone simultaneously, 
the rest seeming to take but little interest in what was going 
on. We were told, that when the queen resided here, the 
number of children was much greater than at present ; but as 
she now lives at Papaoa, such children as formerly attended 
here, now go to the school at that place. 

It was considerably more than half an hour after the fixed 
time, before we entered (what is called) the church, where a 
large number of persons were collected and collecting. The 
whole congregation were squatted on the floor, the building- 
being in an unfinished state, and no seats as yet provided : 
they appeared to occupy the whole of the floor, which is very 
extensive. While they were proceeding in their usual manner, 
I endeavoured to draw near to the Fountain of Israel, whose 
God is, and ever will be, Him who giveth strength and power 
to his people. My heart was softened in an unusual manner, 
and the creature was brought down into a state of nothingness : 
tears flowed beyond a capability of restraint, as " in the day of 
the great slaughter, when the towers fall, 11 (the towers of pride, 
high-mindedness, and self-exaltation,) and the will of the 
creature subjected to the will of the great Creator; as shadowed 
forth by the prophet, when pointing to the spiritual conflict, 
and the accomplishment of the great work of regeneration in 
the heart of man, at that day when the Lord alone is exalted.* 

* Isaiah xsx. 25. 



320 CHAPTER XX. [1835. 

My mind was in a calm, and I was prepared to stand up when 
the proper moment arrived. At length the singing ended, 
and a universal stillness prevailed over the meeting, probably 
increased by expectation, which had for some time been 
stamped upon the countenances of the whole assembly. 

" God is not the author of confusion, but of peace, as in all 
churches of the saints,'" — were the first words uttered by me ; 
which being interpreted, were followed by, — ' it is not an every 
day circumstance for a stranger thus to speak amongst you, 
probably what you never before witnessed ; but it is according 
to the true order of the gospel that the prophets should speak 
two or three, that all might learn and all might be comforted,'' 
— with more of the text ; repeating again, for " God is not the 
author of confusion, but of peace, as in all churches of the saints ;" 
proceeding with, — ' I have nothing new to offer: the way to the 
kingdom is the same now as in the beginning ; there is no 
variableness or shadow of turning with that God, with whom 
we have to do. The things of time may vacillate and change ; 
but the Rock of Ages remains unimpaired : it changeth not, 
— " the foundation of God stancleth sure, having this seal, the 
Lord knoweth them that are his.' 1 This foundation is Christ 
Jesus : and no other foundation can any man lay than is laid. 
Every man's work will be made manifest, the day shall declare 
it, the fire of the Lord will try it : that only will stand which 
is built on Christ Jesus the righteous, that tried corner stone, 
elect of God, and precious indeed to them that believe, — though 
to the Jews a stumbling block, and to the Greeks foolishness. 
But to them who are called, and who obey, " Christ, the power 
of God, and the wisdom of God." For this cause " God gave 
his only begotten Son, that whosoever believeth in Him should 
not perish but have everlasting life :" — with more on this im- 
portant point. c In looking over this large assembly, the love 
of God has filled my heart as I have sat amongst you : — may 
the Lord in heaven bless you, is the language that has arisen 
therein. It is this love that induced me to come amongst you; 
it is this love that would gather all into the heavenly garner of 
rest and peace. Endless in duration is the mercy of the Lord ; 



1835.] CHAPTER XX. 321 

free and unbounded is His love. His love has been long ex- 
tended to these islands, and covered them as with a mantle. 
This island has had advantages beyond many others.'' I re- 
minded them that many years had now elapsed since the sound 
of the gospel was first heard in their land : they had long had 
many parts of the Holy Scriptures in circulation, which from 
their earliest pages point to the Saviour. It was promised soon 
after the fall of man, that the seed of the woman should bruise 
the serpent's head. Moses declared to the people in his day, — 
" A prophet shall the Lord your God raise up unto you of your 
brethren, like unto me ; him shall ye hear in all things ;" and 
" the soul which will not hear that prophet, shall be destroyed 
from among the people ;" which led to the query, what return 
had been made for all this, and wherein had they been benefited 
by these great privileges. They had run well for a season : 
what had hindered them I What had prevented them, that 
they should have turned again as unto the weak and beggarly 
elements \ If they had obeyed the gospel, this would not have 
been the case : they would by this time have been a pure people 
for their God. That unless there was a thorough alteration 
and change, the blessing intended for them would be withdrawn ; 
and the rod would be administered for their iniquity. Con- 
tinuing, — " Be watchful, and strengthen the things which 
remain, that are ready to die ;" for your works are not perfect 
in the sight of God. "Eemember, therefore, how thou hast 
received and heard ; and hold fast, and repent." There is a 
great work to be done ; for where is your hope when the pre- 
sent generation are summoned from works to rewards, if the 
younger children are not trained in succession? I had to 
call upon the parents to step forward before it was too late ; 
they had all a part to take in it. Tahitian mothers had a 
large share devolving upon them ; much depended upon 
their influence and example in endeavouring to train up their 
children in habits of civilized life, by letting them learn to 
read ; (which at present is much neglected, and disliked both 
by parents and children ;) that so they might partake in the 
advantages which are to be derived from the Holy Scriptures : 
reminding them, that " they that be wise, shall shine as the 

Y 



322 CHAPTER XX. [1835. 

brightness of the firmament ; and they that turn many to 
righteousness, as the stars for ever and ever :*" exhorting them, 
not to be overcome with evil, but to overcome evil with that 
which is good ; that the promises are many, great, and precious, 
which are recorded in Holy Writ, to them that overcome, &c. 
Though, perhaps, more might be expressed than above noted, 
and with some variation as to the words ; yet I believe that 
what is here inserted is the substance and principal part of 
what was uttered. 

Having finished, I took my seat. Soon after this, George 
Pritcharcl concluded the meeting. When the whole congrega- 
tion rose, the elderly people came forward to shake hands ; but 
being pretty near one of the doors, we were soon carried outside 
by the current of people turning that way. There were upwards 
of a thousand people inside of the building, and a considerable 
number outside also : the doors and windows being all open, 
those without could hear about as well as those within. 

28th. (Fifth-day.) — Soon after breakfast, Charles and myself 
endeavoured to draw near in silence before the Most High. 
Although under feelings of great weakness and inability of our- 
selves to maintain the watch against our subtle enemy, yet we 
must not shrink or be discouraged from using our humble 
endeavours to maintain the unequal conflict ; seeing that He 
with whom we have to do, knows that we are but dust, pities 
our frailties and weakness, and regards with an eye of merciful 
compassion his poorest creatures ; yea, even the lone sparrow 
on the house-top cannot fall to the ground without his know- 
ledge. 

Fifth Month 30th. — Yesterday, 0. Wilson and son, from Point 
Venus, dined with us. They came to inquire for some articles for 
the latter, who is about to join the mission likely to proceed to the 
Navigator islands. In the evening, went on shore for exercise. 
William Henry having purchased supplies for our vessel, came 
on board this morning to procure sundry articles of barter goods. 
In the forenoon, had an opportunity of furnishing a respectable 
woman with a Testament, Selection of Advices, John Woolmaifs 
Serious Considerations, and nine tracts on religious subjects. 
This female was taken into William Henry's family when 



1 835. J CHAPTER XX. 323 

a child of four years old : she is well acquainted with the 
English language, and has a numerous family, which she is 
endeavouring to bring up in a praiseworthy manner. The 
influence of her example of industry and notability may be traced 
in the different appearance of the family from that of others ; 
and the result is strikingly obvious in the behaviour and habits 
of the children. She is, doubtless, the offspring of one white 
parent. Her husband is a native, but we have not yet seen 
him : they reside in the neighbourhood of Mairi Pehe. 

Yesterday morning, a native of Dundalk in Ireland, by 
name Murphy, lately arrived in the Peruvian, came on board. 
He stated that his coming here was solely for the purpose 
of procuring a passage to the Sandwich Islands ; but that 
he is not suffered to remain here, for want of proper cre- 
dentials, which are required of such as come to reside on shore. 
It is one of those cases in which we can not render any assist- 
ance, there being a decided lav/ in this country, that prevents 
strangers, under such circumstances, from coining amongst the 
people, and which applies to all foreigners. At the same 
time, it is pretty evident, that a fear of his introducing the 
Roman Catholic religion greatly operates against him ; for 
which it is probable there may be some ground, as he acknow- 
ledges to have been six years at a college in Ireland, training 
for a priest ; but says he never was ordained. He is now 
come from the Gambier Islands, where, he says, there are 
six French Roman Catholic priests and one English : what- 
ever may be the real cause of his coining here, his present 
situation renders him an object of pity. As attending the 
public places of worship here, can only be done to purpose on 
First days, as it is only then that large bodies of the people 
are assembled ; and as it is probable that I may have to see the 
whole population of the island before I can proceed any fur- 
ther ; I have felt a little anxious to avail myself of these 
opportunities, so as not to protract the length of time we 
may have to remain here. In the afternoon my mind 
became more uneasy, and it seemed best to go on shore, and 
make inquiry as to the meetings to be held to-morrow ; but I 

y2 



324 CHAPTER XX. [1835. 

soon ascertained, that George Pritchard had been unexpectedly 
summoned to a distant district, and that notice had been 
generally given of this arrangement. I now found that I 
could not cut and contrive for myself, in my own will, way, 
and time ; but that the Lord's time must be waited for : 
without His approving and sanctifying requisition, our 
creaturely performances, instead of procuring the blessed and 
joyful sentence of " well done," may only place on the 
same woful level with the workers of iniquity, even though 
we may profess to have prophesied in His name, in His 
name cast out devils, and in His name done many wonder- 
ful works. 

Fifth Month %\st. (First day.) — In the forenoon the decks 
being too damp, the crew were collected in the cabin, where 
we were joined by several strangers from the shore, including the 
family of the female who was on board yesterday, and some 
others. After having read the latter part of the epistle to the 
Hebrews, and a portion of the Psalms, we settled down into 
silent waiting, not aware that I should have any thing to offer. 
We continued to sit in this manner, deepening in solemnity ; 
when I perceived that matter was gathering upon my mind, 
which, from, as it were, a mere blank, was now filling under a 
quickening influence, until utterance was yielded to. — " That 
which may be known of God is manifest in man ; for God 
hath shewed it unto him," as we are told in the epistle to the 
Romans ; — " God hath not left himself without a witness,''' 
in the heart of every son and daughter of the human race, 
however circumstanced, or wherever placed, sufficient if attended 
to, and co-operated with on our part, to enable us to work out 
our salvation with fear and trembling. — " He hath shewed 
thee, man, what is good, and what doth the Lord require 
of thee, but to do justly, to love mercy, and to walk 
humbly with thy God." Thus was I led on step by step, 
until strengthened to shew, I trust, that there was no occa- 
sion to look to this minister or that minister, for we all had 
the great Minister of the sanctuary, and of the true tabernacle 
which the Lord hath pitched and not man, — the only true 



1835.] CHAPTER XX. 325 

Teacher of His people ; who continues to teach as never man 
taught. Declaring, — that this was " the grace of Grod that 
bringeth salvation," which " hath appeared unto all men, teach- 
ing us,'" &c. ; — that it was the poor in spirit, on whom the 
blessing was pronounced. In this manner, having turned the 
attention of the company to their heavenly Teacher, to an 
extent never contemplated when my mouth was first opened, we 
again settled down into solemn silence ; and my peace flowed, 
under a consoling belief, that my remaining on board was in the 
ordering of the blessed Master. I have not met with a circum- 
stance since leaving England, more truly cheering to my mind, 
than to find, that the Lord hath even in this place, some of the 
seven thousand, that have not bowed the knee to the image of 
Baal. I pray that I may yet meet with many more like this 
dear woman : — before they went on shore, I had some interest- 
ing conversation with her. 

Sixth Month 3rd. — For the last three days our time has 
been much occupied by persons coming on board, and in 
attending to the exchange of some of our articles for barter, to 
obtain the needful supplies of fresh provisions, fruit and vege- 
tables. 

While on shore yesterday for exercise, we met with an aged 
native, who remembered the first coming to these islands of 
Captain James Cook. It was clear that he was no stranger to 
the circumstances of his death at Hawaii, as he himself alluded 
to the place. Although we had the advantage of an inter- 
preter being with us, yet the age of this man could not be 
ascertained, as no record of births is instituted amongst them. 
In the forenoon, a judge, with whom we were previously 
acquainted, came on board, bringing with him the queen's 
mother, and a third person, to us a stranger. It evidently 
appeared to be one of those visits made only with a view to 
extort something from us in the way of present ; signs were 
made by the female of chopping with an axe ; but as I could 
only talk to her in English, she found there was nothing to be 
got, and I did not consider it at all necessary to satisfy 
demands which were altogether unreasonable ; and especially 
as I knew, that if her wishes had been complied with, numerous 



326 CHAPTER XX. [1835. 

applications would be made by her colleagues, which would 
have been more difficult to refuse. 

Sixth Month 4<th. — The king and his brother came on 
board to dinner, but did not remain long ; their coming now 
is in a plain way, they come and go as they please : we treat 
them with civility, but no longer as strangers, or they us. 
This seems to suit their habits and inclination, which, like 
their bodies, are not accustomed to restraint. They paddle 
themselves off in a canoe, with no other clothing than check 
shirts, with a loose piece of blue cotton tied round the waist, 
and low crowned straw hats on their heads, and a broad blue 
ribbon round them . 

5th. — This morning a respectable Spaniard came on board, 
whom I had seen several times when on shore. He was pre- 
sented with J. J. Gurney's Essays in his own language, with 
which he seemed highly gratified. He had been an officer in 
the Spanish army, and was banished from his country at the 
last revolution in South America : he has resided here about 
three years, and bears a good character. He was promised a 
copy of the Holy Scriptures and other books in his native Ian- 
guage : I never saw any person so much pleased and thankful 
at the prospect of having these books furnished him in this 
country. On inquiry, we found that there are three Manilla 
men here, one of whom was in the canoe at the time. This 
man read very intelligibly in J.J. Gurney's Essays ; and his 
willingness to receive any books we were disposed to give for 
himself and comrades, made us glad that we are in possession 
of such a variety in their language. 

6th. — At George Pritchard's we met with John Davies, the 
missionary from Papara, who has been engaged here about 
thirty-five years ; he is an intelligent elderly man. From his 
long residence he has acquired the greatest fund of information 
respecting these islands and their inhabitants, of any person 
we have yet met with ; which he imparted in a manner to us 
highly interesting, and the more so, as its authenticity may be 
relied on. In speaking of the idols formerly in great repute 
here and in the neighbouring isles, he said, that when expostu- 
lating with the people, and endeavouring to convince them of 



1835. J CHAPTER XX. 327 

the worthlessness of these wooden deities, which can neither 
see nor speak, nor stand, nor go ; the most sensible amongst 
the natives would say, that they did not worship them as God ; 
but that they served only to remind them of God, who is 
invisible, but in some manner connected with those images, — 
how they knew not. He considered that the received opinion 
of these islands having been originally peopled from South 
America, was altogether without foundation; indeed their having 
been peopled from Asia can be proved by striking facts. When 
traversing to the westward, the same language is invariably to be 
found on the islands, though, perhaps, in a variety of dialects ; 
and this may be traced to Sumatra, Borneo, Malacca, &c. : 
and the same tradition as regards a deity may also be traced 
throughout them, more or less in degree, and varying in some 
particulars : but on going to the eastward, the language is less 
and less to be recognized, and eventually disappears altogether. 
The intelligent natives seem to be awakened to a confused idea 
of a general deluge having taken place at some time or other, 
from their having discovered, that upon the tops of the highest 
mountains in this island and others, the same marine sub- 
stances are met with, as they are accustomed to find at the 
bottom of the sea. It has been the opinion of some, that the 
whole of these islands formed at one time a vast continent ; but 
that by an unaccountable convulsion of the earth, this conti- 
nent became water, except the tops of the loftiest mountains, 
which constitute the islands as they stand at this day. 

7ih. (First day.) — Notwithstanding some information had 
spread that I should be gone to Papaoa, yet the state of the 
weather perhaps induced some to come on board about the time 
that we usually assemble the crew together. We had not sat 
long before some others arrived. The forepart of the time the 
children were a little restless, owing to the great heat of the 
place below, the deck being too wet to allow us to sit in the open 
air with safety ; but a solemn feeling spread over our little com- 
pany, and remained with us. My mind was gradually drawn 
into . exercise, and at last I had to break through the silence 
with the expression, — True it is, that " God is no respecter of 
persons : but in every nation he that feareth Him and worketh 



328 CHAPTER XX- [1835. 

righteousness, is accepted with Him." — " It is a fearful thing 
to fall into the hands of the living God." And, " If the 
righteous scarcely be saved, where shall the ungodly and the 
sinner appear?" Also, true it is, that no man can save his 
brother, nor give to God a ransom for his soul : the work is 
our own, &c. It was one of those favoured times, of which it 
may be said, that the latter end surpassed the beginning, 
" because of the Truth." 

10th. — This morning received information that a public 
meeting of the principal chiefs and people of the island was about 
to take place, to consider the case of the supposed Roman 
Catholic. Although I had not been invited to a missionary 
conference which had taken place on this subject, yet I felt my 
way more than usually opened to attend the council of the 
Tahitians, then about to -meet. Accordingly myself and Charles 
hastened to the shore, and landed opposite to the building where 
the people were assembling. The queen with her mother 
and attendants were seated upon the floor, surrounded by 
the chiefs of seven districts. The sister of the principal 
chief, or king of Earotonga, was one of the party. The 
business commenced with the examination of the Irish Roman 
Catholic ; the place was now crowded with people, but the 
examination proceeded very slowly and unsatisfactorily ; 
which I could not help perceiving was entirely for want 
of an able interpreter, who thoroughly understood the 
English language as well as the Tahitian. The people were 
restless and unsettled from this circumstance, the most part 
not seeming to know for what they had come together. 
None of the missionaries appeared willing (for sufficient 
reasons) to have any hand in the business ; and seeing 
the real cause of the dilemma they had got into was still 
undiscovered, it seemed best for me to step forward, at a 
suitable moment, and state plainly to the heads of the meeting, 
that it was impossible for the business to proceed satisfactorily 
unless a competent interpreter Avas appointed ; and turning 
to Captain Henry, who stood near me, I requested him to 
inform the chiefs what I had said. This being done, the 
council agreed that Captain Henry should be chosen ; and he 



1835.] CHAPTER XX. 329 

having consented, things began to move more readily forward, 
until the Catholic made some assertions highly injurious to the 
missionary cause, and offensive to the queen and all her chiefs, 
who felt very indignant on the occasion ; and which I knew to 
be incorrect. There did not seem any other part for me, how- 
ever unpleasant, than publicly to contradict what he had said, 
and to declare that some of the language he had used, had 
never been expressed by the person whom he was charging 
with having uttered it. This for a time caused considerable 
altercation ; but having three witnesses on my side, this 
difficulty was soon got over, and order again restored. The 
examination continued, until the Catholic, unable to prove the 
statements he had made on first coming to Tahiti, and finding 
himself foiled on every side, made a hasty retreat, to all 
appearance not a little offended. One of the chiefs then 
expatiated on the case, as follows : — ' This man (meaning the 
Catholic) held out that he should not come to this meeting ; 
and it is seen that he did come to the meeting. He declared 
that he had a letter sealed with King William's seal, and 
he had no such thing : that he had a letter from the British 
Ambassador at Paris, and he had no such thing ; and now, 
by his running away, he has shown himself to be a deceiver.' 
Then turning the attention of the assembly to my Charles 
and myself, he said, ' On their coming amongst us, we had 
no occasion to ask for letters ; they gave them themselves into 
our hands. It is known to every chief in the island there was 
no trouble with them, because they are not deceivers.'' He 
finished his speech, by proposing that such a man should never 
be allowed to come amongst them. After this the queen's 
speech was delivered by a clear headed middle-aged chief ; which 
concluded with a call upon all her faithful subjects to unite in 
never permitting this Catholic, or any other of the same pro- 
fession, to come to disturb the peace and tranquillity of Tahiti. 
Another chief made a very animated oration, which we were 
informed contained a proposition, not only to banish this man 
for ever from their shores, but to follow him on the sea, and 
not allow either him or his comrades to remain so near them 
as the Gambier Islands, but to banish them from thence, lest 



330 CHAPTER XX. [1835. 

the plague should come amongst them : throwing his long stick 
upon the floor, to describe them as trampled under foot, never 
again to rise. 

11th. — Yesterday we went to George Pritchard's to become 
acquainted with Alexander Simpson, the missionary from the 
island of Eimeo. He had come over to attend the meeting 
that had been appointed for the missionaries of all the districts, 
to take into consideration the arrival of the Irish Roman 
Catholic, above-mentioned. Alexander Simpson's wife and 
daughter were with him. He seems kindly disposed to for- 
ward our views, when visiting the island upon which he resides. 
14^/i. (First day.) — In the forenoon a few strangers 
assembled with our own crew. In the course of the time w r e 
were together, I had a short testimony to bear to the indis- 
pensable duty of loving one another. How can we expect to 
be forgiven our trespasses, if we from our hearts do not forgive 
every man his brother their trespasses. Soon after one o'clock, 
r. m., George Pritchard called, accompanied by Alexander 
Simpson's wife, in a whale boat, to convey Charles and myself 
to Papaoa. We reached in time for the meeting of the 
Tahitians, which consisted of a large body of the people. 
Throughout much of the day, and much of the time also that 
their religious engagements were going forward, my mind was 
under no small weight of exercise, and it seemed doubtful to 
myself whether I should have any thing to communicate or 
not ; but towards the latter part, I only waited for a proper 
interval of silence to stand upon my feet. George Pritchard 
observing this, asked whether I wished to say any thing then, 
or after the next singing was over : but the present moment 
seemed the right one ; which being signified, he exhorted the 
meeting to stillness and attention, and waited by my side 
for me to begin. [D. W. then communicated what was 
upon his mind.] Shortly after this, the meeting broke up : 
when the people drew towards us, and commenced the usual 
ceremony of shaking hands. The queen was present ; but 
I did not know it until afterwards. We called at her house 
on our way to the boat, but she was gone off on foot to 
Papeete. 



1S35.J CHAPTER XX. " 331 

Half-past eleven o'clock, p. m. My mind is peaceful and 
easy, and relieved ; and the G-od of glory has the praise ; who 
thus continues to bear up a poor tribulated way-worn traveller, 
renewing my youth as the eagle's, and as the day is, so causing 
my strength to be. 



332 CHAPTER XXI. [1835. 



CHAPTER XXI. 

VISIT TO BUNAAUIA NATIVE MEETING KINDNESS OF THE PRINCIPAL 

CHIEF POINT VENUS PERILOUS SITUATION MEETING AT POINT 

VENUS VISIT TO PAPARA BEAUTIFUL SCENERY SCHOOL AT 

TEAHUPOO MEETING OF THE NATIVES LETTER FROM THE 

NATIVE CONGREGATION NATIVE MEETING AT PAPARA RETURN 

TO THE HENRY FREELING LETTER FROM THE QUEEN OF TAHITI. 

Sixth Month 16th. — Last night had some conversation with 
George Pritchard about accompanying me to Bunaauia this 
afternoon. It was proposed that we should lodge at the 
house of David Darling, the missionary at that station, in 
order to attend the Tahitian worship at sun-rise to-morrow 
morning. We set out in a whale-boat about three o'clock, p. m. 
our company consisted of Alexander Simpson and George 
Pritchard, with some other members of the missionary families, 
my son Charles and myself, with four Tahitians at the oars. 
We had a fine passage while within the reef ; but on reaching 
the opening which leads out into the main ocean, the rollers 
broke with so much violence, that some of our company 
were discouraged from making the attempt to force a passage 
through it. At length it was concluded to run the boat on 
shore upon a sandy beach, near some of the huts of the natives, 
who sallied forth in a body, and soon hauled her up beyond 
the reach of the surf. Our party being all landed, we pro- 
ceeded on foot, and should soon have reached the mission- 
house, and in good day-light, but having a considerable river 
to encounter, the night overtook us before we had all passed 
over it. This river is rapid, and of uncertain depth ; and not- 
withstanding the bed of it is covered with loose round stones, 
the natives are so dexterous, that an accident but rarely occurs. 
A number of these people soon came to our assistance, and the 
company were all landed safely on the other side. Soon after 



1835.] CHAPTER XXI. 333 

dark we reached the hospitable mansion of David Darling, and 
were received with great kindness by his wife and family ; 
himself being from home among the Marquesan Islands, 
whither he had gone to assist in establishing a missionary. 
At this place we found the wife and three children of J. M. 
Osmond, the missionary at the Taiarapu station. They had 
been tossing about for a considerable time in a clumsy boat of 
their own, not at all likely soon to reach their abode, unless 
the wind should blow from a direction seldom witnessed at this 
season of the year. Being rather unwell in the evening, 
and having passed an almost sleepless night, I felt in poor 
condition when it was time to get ready to attend the sun-rise 
meeting of the Tahitians, on the morning of the 17th instant. 
A large number of the people collected together, and when the 
usual service of their own was gone through, I stood up, and 
George Pritchard interpreted for me, as at other times. 

The principal burden that rested upon my mind, was to 
turn the attention of the people to the light of Christ Jesus in 
their own hearts, that their conversation might be such as 
becometh His gospel. I had to tell them, that although I did 
not understand their language, yet I was fearful for them, 
seeing that for every idle word a man shall speak, he must give 
an account in the day of judgment ; for by our words we 
shall be justified, and by our words we shall be condemned : 
believing and declaring this belief, that a very loose and 
wanton conversation was a besetting sin amongst them. I 
had to remind them of the superior advantages bestowed upon 
these islands, over many others of this part of the habitable 
globe, by the introduction of Christianity amongst them. 
Had they obeyed the gospel, the effect of the evil introduced 
amongst them by distant nations, would have been prevented. 
That the Lord is looking for fruit ; and " the earth which 
drinketh in the rain that cometh oft upon it, and bringeth 
forth herbs meet for them by whom it is dressed, receiveth 
blessing from God : but that which beareth briars and 
thorns is rejected, and is nigh unto cursing, whose end is 
to be burned :" that the desire of my soul was, that the 
lamentation once taken up by the Saviour of the world, might 



334 CHAPTER XXI. [1835. 

never be applicable to them as a people : — " Jerusalem, 
Jerusalem, &c, how often would I have gathered thy chil- 
dren together, even as a hen gathereth her chickens under her 
wings ; and ye would not !" That the love of God had over- 
shadowed these islands in an eminent degree ; and I never 
heard of an instance where the Lord in matchless mercy, was 
pleased to send any of his servants amongst a people, but that 
his love was still towards that people. That Christ Jesus had 
been often preached to them, but they had not obeyed His 
gospel : they must repent and obey ; and the way to repent 
and obey, is to fear God, and give glory to Him. That it is 
the same gospel now, as was proclaimed by the angel, which 
John saw flying through the midst of heaven, having the 
everlasting gospel to preach unto every nation and kindred, 
and tongue and people ; saying with a loud voice, " fear God 
and give glory to him ; for the hour of his judgment is come : 
and worship him that made heaven, and earth, and the sea, 
and the fountains of waters." Desiring that they might be 
sensible of that day, when the Lord's judgment is come upon 
all that is of a sinful and transgressing nature ; that so they 
might indeed fear Him, and in thought, word, and deed, give 
glory unto Him ; and thus be prepared to worship Him in 
spirit and in truth ; for it is such the Father seeketh to 
worship Him. That " God who commanded the light to shine 
out of darkness, hath shined in our hearts," and to this saving 
light I wished to turn them. The people were generally very 
attentive, and a solemn covering was permitted to prevail over 
us. On rising from our seats, they gathered around us in the 
usual way. Being previously acquainted with Utami, a prin- 
cipal chief in that neighbourhood, we met like old friends, who 
knew and loved each other, if his love for me was the same as 
I felt for him. We got out into the air as soon as we well 
could, in order to escape some of the usual greetings, — not 
feeling in a condition, from weakness and exhaustion, to accept 
of all the kindness intended by these people. It is indeed 
worthy of humble gratitude and thankfulness, to witness how 
my gracious Lord, from time to time, has opened the way for 
me amongst the missionaries. 



1835.] CHAPTER XXI. 335 

The printing-office is established at this place : we looked 
into it, but as the principal conductor of this work, David 
Darling, was absent, the press was standing still. The orga- 
nization of the language, so as to admit the translation of the 
Holy Scriptures into the native tongue, is a work, the import- 
ance of which cannot be duly estimated nor conceived, as to 
the happy result, under the Divine blessing, that is in store 
for generations yet unborn ; any more than the extent can be 
defined to which they may be permitted to circulate and diffuse 
revealed truth in the language of holy inspiration. This work 
now considered to be near its completion, has been the labour 
of many years, in a climate wasting to the constitution of 
every European, being oppressively relaxing from the heat. 
Henry Nott has been a very laborious servant in this cause, 
without any regard to the many hardships and privations 
which the earliest settlers had particularly to encounter, and in 
which he deeply shared ; his constitution is now sinking from 
long residence, and the effects of close sedentary application : 
who can doubt for a moment the devotedness of such a man ? 

Whilst here, we were waited upon by Utami, in the capacity 
of chief, to request permission to feed us, as they term fur- 
nishing strangers with a supply of food ; which with them is 
considered the greatest respect that can be shown to a stranger : 
but we were compelled to decline their kind attention, as the 
materials could not be procured from the different parts of 
the district before the morrow, and we were bound to return 
to the Henry Freeling that night, if practicable, as the chrono- 
meters from being locked up in our cabin, could not be wound 
up until we returned on board again. The quantity of food 
usually furnished at such times, is quite preposterous ; con- 
sisting of a hog, fowls, • fish, plantains, bananas, &c, with a 
quantity of cocoa-nuts, and if hinted at, there is little doubt 
that a dog would be prepared, according to the ancient custom 
of the island. As the chief Utami has undertaken to repair a 
building for a school, I agreed to furnish a few pounds of nails, 
and a lock for the door, for his encouragement in this useful 
work. In the course of the day, our boat was brought from 
the place where we landed the preceding evening ; and after 



336 CHAPTER XXI. [1835. 

taking leave of this family, we again re -embarked, and in a 
short time got safely through the most dangerous pass in the 
reef into smooth water, and reached the Bay of Papeete before 
dark, not a little fatigued, and in much poverty of spirit, and 
unable to write for want of sleep. 

Sixth Month 19th. — Principally employed on board. Con- 
sulted in the forenoon with Samuel Wilson on the best mode of 
visiting the district of Point Venus, where his father resides, 
and that of Tiarei, the residence of William Henry. In the 
afternoon we went on shore for exercise until dark. Samuel 
Wilson, with whose plainness and simplicity we were much 
gratified, has kindly offered to accompany us to the distant dis- 
tricts as interpreter. 

20th. — George Pritehard came on board in the forenoon, 
and assisted in arranging a plan for accomplishing our visit to 
the remaining and most distant districts upon the island of 
Tahiti. It was concluded best for us to set off this afternoon 
towards Tiarei. As the wind blew fresh, about sun-set was 
considered the proper time to proceed as far as Point Venus, 
presuming the strength of the wind would lessen as the evening- 
approached. It was proposed that we should remain at Point 
Venus until two o'clock in the morning, and then push for- 
ward so as to reach Tiarei about day-break, before the trade- 
wind set in, which is mostly pretty strong, and generally from 
the quarter to which we were bending our course. All things 
being ready, we left the Henry Freeling soon after four o'clock, 
the wind having materially lessened by the fall of some rain, 
and it still continued to get lighter as we proceeded. As 
there was every indication of clear and serene weather long- 
before reaching the first place of intended destination, it was 
suggested by our native boat's crew, that we should not make 
much stay there, but push forward while the wind and sea 
were gentle. The principal motive for wishing to stop by the 
way at all, was to lessen the fatigue of these men by dividing 
the journey into two parts, so that they might rest between 
them : but they were well aware that the whole distance could 
be performed at once in calm weather, with much more ease 
than if divided and time given for rest, if the wind and sea 



1835.] CHAPTER XXI. 337 

should rise against them, although but in a moderate degree. 
Just before dark we landed upon the shore of Point Venus, 
the place from whence the celebrated navigator Captain James 
Cook, observed the transit of the planet Venus on the disk of 
the sun. Opposite that part of the coast of Tahiti, which we 
had next to traverse, there is no sheltering coral-reef for its 
protection ; so that the remainder of our journey was exposed 
to the whole beat of the Pacific Ocean, and can only be per- 
formed when the weather is moderate. 

Having with us Samuel Wilson, we were readily conducted 
to the habitation of his father Charles Wilson, the resident 
missionary at this station, and were kindly entertained by the 
family. As the passage round Point Venus is very intricate, 
and the water particularly shoal, the boat was taken round 
to the other side, while we were partaking of some refreshment : 
we lost no time in preparing again to embark . The crew met 
us with a native torch, made of the dry branching leaves 
of the cocoa-nut tree ; which with our own lantern, lighted 
the intricate narrow path among the bushes, and was parti- 
cularly useful at the sea-side, the night being now very 
dark. As the night advanced, we were helped by a gentle land 
breeze, so that the labour of the oars was a little diminished. 
There was an experienced elderly native employed at the 
stern-oar of our whale-boat, whose course seemed to be princi- 
pally directed by the white tops of the rolling surf, as it broke 
upon the coast, near to which he mostly kept. Off one rocky 
pointj of land it became needful to turn with a wide sweep 
towards the offing, to escape a projecting ridge of rocks, the 
outermost extremity of which was defined by the termination 
of breakers. By ten o'clock p.m., it was declared that we 
were abreast of Tiarei ; but the night was so dark, that the 
narrow entrance through the reef to it could not be distin- 
guished even by the eagle-eyed Tahitians. The boat's mast 
was struck, and one of the natives stationed in the front with 
Samuel Wilson, to look out ; and her head being turned 
shorewards, we edged gently down towards the foaming 
breakers, which were bursting on the rocky strand with thun- 
dering noise. As the rowing had now altogether ceased, the 



338 CHAPTER XXI. [1835. 

boat drifted only at the rate at which the swell of the sea hove 
her along ; a measure highly prudent, until the dangerous pass 
we had to go through was clearly ascertained ; as was after- 
wards sufficiently demonstrated, though at the moment such 
tardy proceeding might seem to protract the term of suspense. 
Having silently proceeded for some time in this way, and from 
the increasing roar of the restless waters, evidently drawing 
nearer and nearer to the margin of the crags, on a sudden 
there were symptoms of alarm, which could not be mistaken, 
on the part of the boat's crew ; who now perceived that we had 
missed the only entrance that afforded a passage to the shore ; 
and, from our present position, a large lump of rock was in the 
way to the mouth of the channel, which the boat could not 
possibly escape. Our poor Tahitians immediately jumped into 
the sea, and did all they could to save the boat from being- 
dashed to pieces ; but they could not prevent her from striking. 
She however only struck once, and lay quiet, the wave having 
so far receded, that she did not float enough to beat, and the 
next roller that came in, carried her completely over the 
obstruction. But it was difficult for some time to ascertain 
whether the worst was now over or not ; for our men began to 
howl and shout, the meaning of which we could not compre- 
hend : it afterwards appeared, that this was done to rouse the 
sleeping natives on the shore ; who, well understanding this 
yell, shortly came running with lighted torches to our assist- 
ance, and a few minutes placed us once more upon terra firma. 
As the boat could not get close in, one of these men very soon 
had me upon his back, to prevent my getting wet : Samuel 
Wilson and my son Charles were landed in the same way. 
The journey altogether had been more speedy, and in many 
respects more favourable than is often witnessed, until we came 
to the last pinch, when the never-failing arm of Almighty 
power was again displayed in the needful time for our relief. 
As we were strangers to the language of the people, and could 
render them no assistance whatever, and any attempt to direct 
their efforts must only have increased the general confusion, 
we therefore sat silent beholders of what was going forward ; 
committing ourselves to Him, who saw r our perilous situation 



1835. J CHAPTER XXI. 839 

through the darkened gloom, and did not suffer the briny 
waters to prevail against us ; but in love and mercy and com- 
passion, stretched forth his hand to save. As to myself I may 
say, my heart was fixed, trusting in the Lord ; whose loving- 
kindness is better than life. He was with us of a truth, in 
fulfilment of his gracious promise, and we were not confounded. 
I desire to record this signal favour with humble thankfulness 
and reverence, to His praise and to His glory. We soon 
reached the mission-house where William Henry resides, 
to whom we were all personally known ; by whom and his 
wife we were kindly accommodated for the night ; although, 
from their secluded situation, but little in the way of receiving- 
strangers, and at an hour so unseasonable they could not 
have had the least idea of our coming. Much sleep could not 
be obtained, but we passed the night in quietness, and we felt 
refreshed at rising. 

Tiarei, 2\st. — Previously to the commencement of the 
Tahitian worship at nine o'clock in the morning, our time was 
pretty fully occupied with the family devotion and taking 
breakfast ; after which we repaired to the meeting-house, it 
being agreed if I should have any thing to speak to the people, 
that Samuel Wilson was to stand as interpreter. This was a 
relief to William Henry, (and also to myself,) as he had quite 
as much to go through as his strength was equal to, he being- 
far advanced in years. After William Henry had shown us 
to a seat, he went into the pulpit, Samuel Wilson remaining 
not far from us. The difference in appearance and in the 
general deportment of the people, at this distance from the con- 
taminating effects of the shipping, was discernible throughout 
the greater part of the congregation, which was large. Being 
comforted by the sensible presence of the great Master, my 
mind was strengthened in an unusual manner ; but not until 
after a season of humiliating conflict had been passed through ; 
in order, I believe that the excellency of the power might be felt 
and known, and acknowledged to be of God and not of us, nor 
of any thing that we can command or call our own. When 
the usual engagements of the meeting were gone through, I 
stood up, and beckoned to Samuel Wilson to draw nearer to 

z 2 



340 CHAPTER XXI. [1835. 

me. We went into a position a little more central, near the 
table ; and under a solemn covering, after a short interval of 
silence, I said : — ' I am fully persuaded in my own mind, that 
you, my beloved people, will suffer a few words from a stranger, 
who is with you in the fear, and in the love, and I may add, 
in the will of God, and not in my own ; and therefore I stand 
amongst you with innocent boldness, because I seek not yours 
but you, that immortal part in you which must sooner or later 
have a being in endless felicity or in endless misery . 1 Declar- 
ing unto them, that 'there is no alteration in the Christian 
course ; the warfare is continual, and can only be maintained 
and accomplished with burning and fuel of fire, — by the cleans- 
ing operation of that burning, which the spirit of judgment 
produces, and that unquenchable fire of the Lord, which con- 
sumeth the chaffy and transgressing nature in our hearts ; and 
if submitted to, would prepare and purify us (even as He is pure) 
for a kingdom, consisting not in meats and drinks, but in righ- 
teousness and peace and joy in the Holy Ghost; — a kingdom, 
where nothing that is unclean, nothing that is impure, nothing 
that worketh an abomination, or that maketh a lie, can ever 
enter. "Whilst I have been sitting with you, my heart has been 
filled with the love of God towards you ; raising in it a fervent 
desire, that every individual, from the least to the greatest, might 
be numbered among the ransomed and redeemed of the Lord; 
who shall return and come to Sion with songs and everlasting 
joy upon their heads, from whom sorrow and sighing shall flee 
away.*' But I had to tell them that a great and individual 
work must be accomplished before these gracious and prophetic 
promises are realized. The indignation of the Lord must be 
patiently borne for sin and for transgression ; until He should 
arise and plead their cause, and execute judgment for them, 
and in his own time say — it is enough ; and bring them forth to 
the light, even the light of Christ Jesus, in whom they will 
then behold the Lamb of God that taketh away the sin of the 
world. This light shineth in every heart, and is the true light 
that lighteth every man that cometh into the world ; in which 
only the righteousness of Christ Jesus is witnessed to be brought 
forth and beheld. When the precious blood of Christ was shed 



1835.] CHAPTEE XXI. 341 

for the sins of all mankind, He ascended up on high ; He led 
captivity captive, and received gifts for men, even for the re- 
bellious also ; that the Lord God might dwell among them, even 
among sinners, such as themselves and me. That a measure or 
manifestation of the gift of the Holy Spirit is given to every 
man to profit withal ; and well will it be for those who are pro- 
fiting thereby, and faithfully occupying therewith. I then had 
to remind them of the great things which the Lord had done for 
them : that the gospel sound had long been heard in their land ; 
that many parts of the Holy Scriptures had been translated 
into their native tongue, which directed them to the Saviour, 
— to the Word, which was in the beginning, which was with 
God, and was God. After enlarging further, although I think 
what I have stated are the principal heads that were touched 
upon, I sat down poor and empty ; yet satisfied with favour, and 
full with the blessing of the Lord. Instead of the congregation 
beginning to separate immediately in a hasty manner, as we 
have sometimes witnessed, even the dear children kept their 
seats, with the whole of the company ; a delightful pause ensued, 
which was short, but crowned with that solemnity not at our 
command ; during which I humbly trust the thanksgiving of 
many redounded to the glory of God. Silence was at last broken 
by one of the chiefs expressing, on behalf of the assembly and 
himself, their thankfulness and satisfaction, and how welcome 
my visit had been to them ; because, he said, ' You have 
preached to us the everlasting gospel, and have shown to us the 
propitiatory sacrifice for the sins of mankind, Christ Jesus ;' 
with something further, which when interpreted, I was fearful 
attached too much to the creature ; and I requested Samuel 
Wilson to tell them not to look to the creature, but to their 
Creator. The whole of the people still continued together, 
about eight hundred persons ; and seemed as if they knew not 
how to begin to separate, until some person proposed their 
shaking hands with us, which immediately commenced, and 
exceeded all we had before met with. 

On our return, the difficulty of passing through the reef was 
trifling and insignificant ; the light of day had dispelled all our 
fears and its terrors : we could now see what we were about to 



342 CHAPTER XXI. [1835- 

encounter. In a few minutes we were clear of the breakers, and 
spreading our sail, directed our course towards Point Venus ; 
where we arrived in something less than two hours, the wind 
having kept on the increase the whole of the way ; and having 
a fine lively whale-boat that could run from the swell, there was 
no danger to apprehend, so long as it continued to follow her. 
We were soon ready to go to meeting, but a very different scene 
awaited us, for instead of another feast of heavenly dainties, the 
Bridegroom was taken away, and a fast was proclaimed ; — " then 
shall they fast in those days." It was a time altogether the 
most discouraging that had yet befallen us. The continual 
talking arid light behaviour of a large portion of the people 
were truly painful, although several attempts were made 
to restore order amongst them; and the sound of some sharp 
strokes of the long sticks, by the agents employed to keep 
order, was distinctly heard amongst the younger people. I 
requested Samuel Wilson to say, that although I had brought 
nothing with me, a little matter had arisen which I did 
not wish to take away. The attention of the people being- 
somewhat arrested, I proceeded with — " Be not deceived ; God 
is not mocked ; for whatsoever a man soweth, that shall he also 
reap. For he that soweth to his flesh, shall of the flesh reap 
corruption ; but he that soweth to the Spirit, shall of the Spirit 
reap life everlasting.'''' — " The Lord is good unto them who wait 
for Him, — to the soul that seeketh Him ;" and eternal life is 
the reward of all those, " who, by patient continuance in well 
doing, seek for glory, honour, and immortality ; but unto those 
who are contentious, and do not obey the truth, but obey un- 
righteousness, indignation and wrath, tribulation and anguish, 
upon every soul of man that doeth evil, of the Jew first, and 
also of the Gentile ; but glory, honour, and peace to every man 
that worketh good." I then had to turn their attention to the 
sure and only foundation, Christ Jesus ; and to the necessity 
of their believing in his inward and spiritual appearance in their 
hearts :— that without faith it is impossible to please God ; 
pointing to the holy author and blessed finisher thereof, from 
whom alone it is to be derived. Without they live by this 
faith of the Son of God, who loved them, and gave himself for 



1835.] CHAPTER XXI. 343 

them, all their profession of religion is vain. With some fur- 
ther additions, I sat down ; and the meeting soon after closed. 
We called at the house to bid the family farewell, and 
immediately put off for the Bay of Papeete. We should have 
reached the Henry Freeling by dark ; but having lost our pilot 
and interpreter, Samuel Wilson, who remained at home at 
Point Venus, we were twice entangled in the mazy reef, and 
forced to row back again each time to get clear of it. 

Sixth Month 23rd. — To-day employed in arranging matters 
to enable us to set out again for the Taiarapu journey, to visit 
the district where J. M. Orsmond resides. 

QAtth. — A whale-boat having been procured last evening, we 
proceeded after an early breakfast to George Pritchard's ; and 
from thence accompanied by our kind friend Samuel Wilson, 
set forward towards Papara. We reached Bunaauia in good 
time, and were again hospitably received by David Darling's 
family at the mission-house, he himself being still from home. 
After resting our crew more than an hour, we were again seated 
in the boat, fearful of wasting time ; as the difficulty in some 
parts of the passage, going out and in between the reefs, on 
account of the currents which prevail, renders daylight indis- 
pensable in passing through them. We landed at a place 
where a large English barque had been broken up. Here 
we met with three Englishmen, employed in preparing to 
build a new vessel, with part of the materials selected from 
the old one. These poor men seemed to be left in a very 
destitute and neglected situation ; and it is to be feared, were 
strangers to the great work yet to be accomplished for the sal- 
vation of their immortal souls, if not altogether unconcerned 
about it. A parcel of tracts were left for their perusal, which 
was promised by one of them. We reached Papara before 
sun-set, and on landing were met by Tati, with whom I was 
previously acquainted. This man is considered to be the 
greatest orator upon the islands, and one of the few who stand 
as champions for the general welfare of their country. After 
little more had passed than the salutations customary among the 
islanders, the natives began to flock round us as we stood upon 
the beach, when an interesting conversation took place in their 



344 CHAPTER XXI. [1835. 

hearing. Tati began by saying, that the peace and harmony 
which now prevailed, were the result of the gospel having come 
among them. I replied, that wherever the spirit of the gospel 
breathes, there must be peace ; reminding him of the angelic 
chorus, that ushered in this glorious dispensation, — " Glory 
to God in the highest, and on earth peace, good-will towards 
men.'" He said, that the wars which formerly were continually 
breaking out and depopulating the country, had nearly alto- 
gether ceased since the gospel had been brought to them by the 
missionaries. On this I queried, — ' but did you not hear the 
sound of the gospel, before the missionaries came among you ? 
I believe you did ; and that many of you were sensible when 
you committed evil, and were stung with remorse for it ; and 
also that a feeling of peace had been witnessed when a virtuous 
action had been done. Have you not been sensible of this V 
He replied, they knew it was necessary to offer sacrifices fre- 
quently for sin, to appease the wrath of an offended Deity. 
This, I told him, that had disquieted them for sin and trans- 
gression, though at the time they had not known what it was, 
was that gospel which had been preached in and unto every 
creature under heaven. After this, Tati invited us to his 
house, and refreshed us with the milk of the cocoa-nut. He 
said, that although many improvements had been introduced 
by foreigners coming amongst them ; yet we might perceive 
they still retained many of their old habits and customs, allud- 
ing to their domestic arrangements, squatting upon the floor, 
&c. The house exhibited more of an air of comfort and 
industry than any we had before seen : — native cloth, fishing- 
nets, &c, of their own manufacture were lying about. The 
approach of night occasioned us to hasten to the house of 
John Davies, a native of Montgomeryshire, one of the oldest 
missionaiies upon the island, where we were kindly received 
and entertained. 

Sixth Month 25th. — Rising by the break of day, and partaking 
of an early breakfast, we departed, as soon as the family devo- 
tion was over for Tairapu, the south-eastern extremity of the 
island. By the way we landed at Main Peho and visited Samuel 
Henry and family ; he is commonly styled Captain Henry, from 



1835.] CHAPTER XXI. 345 

having been several years the commander of a vessel : he is 
the son of William Henry, the missionary at Tiarei. Here the 
whole process of making sugar was going forward, from pressing 
the juice out of the cane by rollers, and all the different stages 
that it passes through, until reduced to the granulated state fit 
for use. The sun was nigh setting when we reached the mis- 
sionary station to which we were destined ; but the beauty 
and various scenery of this part of the island served to enliven 
the last hour of a long day's exposure to the sun, and to quiet 
in some degree the sensations of hunger and weariness, by 
which we had long been assailed. The stupendous mountains, 
however steep and rugged, were clothed in the richest and 
fullest manner, with every kind of fruit and forest-tree which 
flourish in these tropical climates, where perpetual summer 
reigns ; their luxuriance only now and then interrupted by 
falls of water hurrying down the steep declivities in beautiful 
cascades to the vales beneath : but the noise of these numerous 
cataracts is at once overpowered and lost in the roar of. the 
mighty Pacific, whose waves incessantly thunder in endless 
succession upon the shores and reefs of Tahiti. The rattle of 
our oars on the ocean's glassy surface as we approached near 
the shore, soon drew forth the natives, with the missionary 
John Muggeridge Orsmond, who were ready to welcome and 
assist the strangers at their landing. We had before become 
acquainted with the wife of J. M. Orsmond at Bunaauia; 
this, together with the hearty reception now given us by her 
husband, produced feelings somewhat like those experienced on 
reaching a home : we were favoured to feel refreshed and well 
the next morning. 

26th. — We went to look at the children who had assembled 
for school at sun-rising, with a considerable number of adults 
of both sexes. Every thing here looked clean and comfortable, 
as if under diligent care and superintendence, as did the dif- 
ferent buildings, the whole being in a respectable state of repair. 
Being aware that the children would be gratified by notice 
being taken of them, I shook hands with every individual, 
both young and old, that was collected. Whilst here, the 
people present exceedingly urged our staying with them over 



846 CHAPTER XXI. [1835. 

the next sabbath-day : but as my engagements were such as 
could not be altered, and would prevent my consistently com- 
plying with their request, I asked J. M. Orsmond to interpret 
my answer ; and to tell them, that as the whole congregation 
was to meet me in the afternoon, I trusted that the Divine 
presence would be with us, and if so, we should be satisfied 
with favour, and filled with the heavenly blessing of the Lord. 
In returning from the school, we had to pass through a long 
train of provisions, which the natives had provided in readiness 
to present to us, and which, through the medium of J. M. 
Orsmond, we were informed were intended for our food and 
refreshment. Although this provision was as unnecessary as it 
was undesired, I felt sensible of the kindness and good- will of 
the people towards us, with which, at my request, they were 
made acquainted. The quantity of food thus furnished was 
enormous, sufficient probably to have sunk our boat, if it 
could have been taken into her. Besides large quantities of the 
mountain plantain, and a variety of other vegetables and fruits, 
there were several fowls ; and I observed among them a black 
pig tethered. The native boat's crew, which had brought 
us from Papeete, fared sumptuously for two days on the occa- 
sion ; and I believe the major part was consumed or carried off 
by them, as is customary and expected at such times. 

At four o'clock, p. m., the people assembled in the meeting- 
house ; where I had full opportunity to clear my mind towards 
them. The district on this peninsula being quite distinct from 
those on the other, it was needful that my certificates should 
be read, as none of the people could have previously heard 
them. They were read accordingly, with ample explanation, 
by J. M. Orsmond, before I stood on my feet. The people 
were turned to the light of Christ Jesus in their own hearts. 
They were told that their being members of an outward and 
visible church, would not avail them in the great and awful day 
of account : that they must be memb ers of the true gospel 
church, the church triumphant, whose names are written in 
heaven ; and unless this was attained whilst here, it would be 
too late, for it cannot be done hereafter : there is no work nor 
device in the grave, &c. Showing them how the primitive 



1835.] CHAPTER XXI. 347 

believers, through the blood of sprinkling, that speaketh better 
things than that of Abel, attained to it in their day ; and that 
it is equally attainable at this day, through the purifying 
operations of the Holy Spirit. I urged and encouraged them to 
persevere in this great and important work, earnestly desiring 
that they might not rest satisfied with an empty profession ; 
but that they might come into possession of the inestimable 
pearl, the pearl of great price, the truth as it is in Jesus. 
It was indeed a solid and solemn opportunity, and one of 
those which I afterwards learned left the people hungering, I 
trust, for heavenly bread ; whilst to myself it was productive 
of that soul-enriching peace, which can only be purchased by 
sharing in the blessed Master's cup of sufferings, of which I 
had drank, and under which I had been heavily bowed down 
during the afternoon, before going to the meeting, and there 
also. And now how can I sufficiently acknowledge and declare 
the condescending mercy and loving-kindness of my gracious 
Lord God, who in a particular manner was pleased to warm the 
hearts of those dear people with his life-giving presence ; which 
made it an occasion truly memorable, and caused many of 
them to rejoice and abound with thanksgiving to his praise and 
to his glory. The same evening the deacons of the church, 
Tetohi and Puna by name, came to J. M. Orsmond's house, 
and being seated with us, one of them produced a letter, 
written on behalf of the congregation at Tea-hu-poo ; which, 
being directed to myself, I opened ; it was found to contain the 
address that follows, as literally translated by Samuel Wilson. 

' Tea-hu-poo, 26th of June, 1835. 
' Dear Friends, 

' The ministers, with the Brethren and Sisters in London. 

' Peace be unto you, in the true God Jehovah, and in Jesus 
Christ his Son, who came into the world to save sinful men : — 
we indeed are sinful men. Here is Daniel Wheeler amongst 
us ; and he has made known unto us all the good words of 
Jesus Christ. And comfort has grown in our hearts ; and 
great pleasure has been to us from his words, concerning the 
words of Jesus the Messiah. 



348 CHAPTER XXI. [1835. 

' It was indeed very great pleasure in his saying to us, Jesus 
is the pearl of great price : it is a pearl good within and good 
without. And many have been the good words that he has 
spoken to us. Now indeed we know assuredly he has true 
love to the brethren and sisters in all places where the things 
of Jesus are held. In that love he has come amongst us : and 
indeed our love is grown towards him and his son, in their 
making known on their way the things of Jesus, and in their 
visit of love to all the brethren, and in inviting all to enter in 
to Jesus the Messiah. 

' Signed on behalf of the Church, 

' Puna.' 
At the breaking up of the meeting in the afternoon, I told 
J. M. Orsmond, that I felt so much love to these people, I 
thought I should see them again : . — when he proposed to meet 
me at the out-station on the other side of the peninsula next 
First day but one ; where he said he would collect the whole 
of the people from this place, and from the two other stations. 
I could not speak decisively at the moment, though expecta- 
tion was given that it might probably be so. Since this con- 
versation I have recollected, that on leaving Tiarei last First 
day, we were told that the people from an out-station of that 
district had just arrived, in expectation that we should be 
again at the meeting in the afternoon. It seems right for me 
to go to the out-station on the other side of the peninsula, 
called Tautira; and I find, on inquiry, that the Tiarei out- 
station can be visited at the same time ; but that it will 
require fine weather and a smooth sea to effect it. It must, 
however, be left for the present with Him, who knows the 
thoughts of all our hearts ; before whom I desire to stand in 
humble resignation and willingness to go or to stay, as seemeth 
Him good. The two men who came with the letter before- 
mentioned, (Tetohi and Puna) remained with us until near 
midnight ; and I think it may be said, that by the breaking of 
bread our spiritual eyes were opened to perceive, that the 
great Master was there in marvellous condescension and mercy 
to bless the opportunity. It was indeed a heavenly banquet : 
and some of us who had lain many days in the grave, were 



1835.] CHAPTER XXI. 349 

now, like Lazarus, permitted to sit at the table with their 
Lord. I was reminded of the passover, and was constrained 
to declare amongst them, — ' This is the true supper — this is the 
sacrament indeed, as you call it :' it could not be denied, for 
the Lord's power was over all. One of those present observed 
more than once, ' This is what is so much wanting amongst 
us — spiritual religion : this is what is so much wanting.*' 
[D. W. then proceeds] — Hearken to the invitation of the 
Bridegroom of souls, held forth in the language of holy 
inspiration : " Eat, O ! friends ; drink, yea, drink abundantly, 
O ! beloved. - " Sweet is his voice, and his countenance comely. 
Let us hearken that so we may be favoured to hear it. Let us 
wait for it with our lamps trimmed, and our lights burning ; with 
girded loins, like men that are waiting indeed for the coming 
of their Lord ; for sweet is his voice, even the voice of Him, 
the same and no other, who said, " Behold I stand at the 
door and knock ; if any man hear my voice, and open the 
door, I will come in to him, and will sup with him, and he 
with me." Then let us hearken, so that we may hear ; and be 
ready to open the doors of our hearts, that the King of Glory 
may come in. Blessed and happy are they that hear and 
obey ; they share in the highest, greatest, and richest heavenly 
favour bestowed on earth, by the quickening Spirit of the Lord 
from heaven, upon poor, frail, mortal dust. These " behold 
the King in his beauty,'" and cannot refrain from declaring to 
others, that sweet is His voice, and His countenance comely. 

Sixth Month 27th. — Rose early, and after breakfast took 
leave of the family, and embarked forthwith for Papara. We 
reached Mairi Pehe, (about forty miles,) before two o'clock, 
p. m. ; Samuel Henry rode on horseback to the Mairi, whilst we 
pushed on in the boat, intending to meet together on the spot. 
This Mairi was, during the days of idolatry, considered the 
most sacred place upon the island : it is spoken of by Captain 
James Cook, who visited it when in its full splendour. At 
present it appears to be nothing more than a stupendous heap 
of stones, almost hidden with bushes and trees that have 
grown over it and the neighbourhood of it ; where formerly 
human sacrifices were plentifully offered. Parting with 



350- CHAPTER XXI. [1835. 

Samuel Henry, we continued our course to Papara, and passed 
through the opening of the reef with a strong current, before 
the sun went down. At this place the boys were amusing 
themselves in the surf, by lying at full length on their backs 
upon boards, and letting the rolling, curling breakers whirl 
them precipitately down the liquid slope to the gulf below. 
Some of the boys best acquainted with this slippery sport, by 
watching the proper moment to launch forth, were hurled with 
great velocity to considerable distances, without being dislodged 
from their boards ; while the unskilful would be impetuously 
rolled over by the curling wave, and for a time altogether 
hidden in the foam below. We were received with kindness 
by the ancient missionary John Davies, at whose house we 
passed the night. 

Sixth Month 28th. (First day.) — At nine o'clock, a. m., 
the Tahitian worship commenced. John Davies had pre- 
viously told me, that if I should have any thing to speak to 
the people, he himself would interpret for me. When the 
customary service was gone through, and he came down from 
his pulpit, I rose and stood near him. [When the attention 
of the people was attracted, and stillness prevailed, D. W. 
communicated what was upon his mind ; he adds,] — notwith- 
standing there was reason to apprehend that many would be 
able to collect but a small part of what was said, on account of 
the feeble state of the interpreter, yet it was so evident that 
the Divine presence and power reigned over all, that I had to 
appeal to the people as witnesses to the solemnizing influence 
with which we were favoured. I trust the Lord alone was 
exalted this day and magnified ; and the people turned to their 
true teacher, Christ Jesus ; whose name shall be great in every 
nation, from the rising of the sun to the going down of the 
same. What might be the feelings of others on this occasion, 
I am not aware ; it was to myself a highly favoured, precious 
season, the sense and remembrance of which is relieving, and 
still abiding : and although some days have now passed away 
since this event took place, it yet raises in my heart a tribute 
of thanksgiving, and a song of praise to my great, and boun- 
tiful, and ever merciful Creator and Preserver. 



1835.] CHAPTER XXI. 351 

One part of the return journey from Papara, was attended 
with considerable risk, by a violent current, occasioned by 
some alteration which had occurred in the wind, driving- 
immense bodies of water from the ocean through the open 
parts of the reef, causing broken water in every direction ; 
through the midst of which we were compelled to pass, sur- 
rounded by innumerable spires and stones of coral rock which 
presented themselves in every direction ; and through the narrow 
winding intricacies of which, we were sometimes whirled in a 
frightful manner : we were however safely conducted through 
them all without any disaster ; although the Tahitians were 
thrown into confusion, which added materially to the risk we 
were encountering, by their hastily rising from their seats. 

"We stayed a short time at the house of David Darling, 
and then proceeded with a fresh and favourable wind towards 
Papeete, where we were favoured to reach the Henry Freeling, 
about an hour after dark, and to find all well on board. 

30th. — Yesterday employed on board most of the day. In 
the evening wrote late to bring up my Journal. To-day still 
looking forward towards the Tautira journey ; and I shall be 
thankful to feel clearness and strength from my heavenly 
Father, whether by staying or going. 

[Literal translation, by Samuel Wilson of Point Venus, of 
a letter, received this day, from the Queen, in which she remits 
the port dues on the Henry Freeling.] 

' Tahiti, SOth of June, 1835. 
' I do away with the money for the anchoring of the vessel. 
This is the reason why I do away with it, because thine is a 
visit of love, and not a trading voyage. If it was a trading- 
voyage, it would not be done away with : I would still demand 
the money for the anchoring : but because thine is a visit of 
love, I have not therefore demanded the money. 

(Signed) ' Pomake V.' 

' Health to thee and thy son in your (two) voyaging.'' 
' Na Daniella "YVira. 1 



352 CHAPTER XXII [1835. 



CHAPTER XXII. 



SET OUT FOR TAUTIRA 1 — A. NATIVE 'FEEDING MEETINGS AT 

TAUTIRA VISIT TO HITEA RETURN TO THE HENRY FREELING 

OBSTRUCTIONS TO THE PROGRESS OF RELIGION VISIT TO THE 

QUEEN MEETING FOR THE WHITE RESIDENTS ON EOARD THE 

HENRY FREELING LETTERS FROM HOME DISTRIBUTION OF 

BOOKS. 

1st of Seventh Month. — In the forenoon busily employed in 
preparing packages to send to the stations of Papara and 
Taiarapu, to make some amends for the trouble our late jour- 
ney had occasioned. The eldest son of Tati, the principal 
chief at Papara, came on board to dinner. His behaviour 
throughout would have done credit to a people much farther 
advanced in civilization than the Tahitians. Before going 
away he was furnished with a razor, a pair of strong scissors, 
a pocket-knife, and a pen-knife for his father ; and also with 
articles of the same description for himself, and a work-bag for 
the wives of both parties. Before he left us, George Pritchard 
came on board to bid us farewell, as the vessel in which he was 
about to sail was getting under weigh. He was going to visit 
the missions at the Leeward Islands, forming the Society 
group ; intending afterwards to proceed to the Marquesas, 
to see the state of things there, and to bring back David 
Darling, who went thither several months ago to establish the 
missionaries, Stalworthy and Rogerson, on those islands. Got 
on shore for exercise towards the cool of the day. 

2nd. — Prepared ourselves, expecting that we should have to 
be in readiness to proceed on our way towards Tautira, either 
late this evening, or at a very early hour to-morrow morning, 
so that we might have a few hours to spare to contend with the 
wind, if it should prove too strongly opposed to us. A whale- 
boat and a crew of Tahitians were accordingly provided for 



183-0.] CHAPTER XXII. 353 

our journey. After our interpreter Samuel Wilson came on 
board, we were soon convinced of the propriety of moving 
forward this afternoon, in order to make sure of the object 
before us, as much as lay in our power. With exertion we 
got off at half-past four o'clock, and were scarcely seated in 
the boat, when it was discovered, that the wind which had 
blown favourably all the day, was now changed against us. 
The men had a heavy pull up to Point Venus, (of late years 
called Matavai,) where we landed, and drank tea at Charles 
Wilson's. There was a little delay at the sea-side, while our 
men finished their vegetable meal; we then set forward 
again : but the wind continuing fresh against us, it was eleven 
o'clock at night before it was reported that we were abreast 
of the narrow entrance to Tairei ; and the moon which had 
shone beautifully all the evening, was now sunk behind the 
island, just at a moment when most needed to light us through 
the difficult opening in the reef. But having witnessed before- 
time the danger of missing the passage in the dark, and seeing 
the great utility of timely rousing the sleeping natives, I did 
not fail to urge this precaution being adopted, as soon as we 
began to steer shorewards. As we drew near the breakers, 
the crew shouted and yelled in true native character, until 
answered by one of the people on the shore, who was presently 
seen running with a lighted torch in his hand, and soon took 
up his station directly opposite the narrow pass through the 
reef. On nearing the coast, it was found that we were only 
a few yards to the eastward of it, and sufficiently distant to 
allow of the boat's head being turned in a fair direction, with- 
out touching the rock. A few surges hove us through this 
little gulf into smooth water ; and the crew taking us upon 
their backs, soon placed their burden upon the sandy beach, 
beyond the reach of the agitated waters. 

Upon arriving at the ancient missionary's dwelling, it was 
ascertained that the family were all asleep ; and, however 
undesirable, there was no alternative but that of disturbing 
them, to afford us shelter for a few hours, as the boat's crew 
were too much exhausted, by having had so long to contend 
against both the wind and the swell of the sea, to proceed 

2 a 



354 CHAPTER XXII. [1835. 

further without rest. William Henry himself soon gave us a 
hearty welcome, and allowed us to set out in the morning as 
early as we thought proper, without waiting for breakfast. 

Seventh Month 3rd. — Rising before day, we departed without 
seeing any of the inmates of the house, and continued our course 
towards Tautira. As the morning advanced, the wind freshened 
against us, and before noon was so much increased, that it was 
concluded best to run in the boat at the first aperture that the 
coral clad shore should present for our relief : and just at the 
moment when the united strength of the men was scarcely able 
to impel her forward, we found ourselves opposite to a narrow 
passage, but sufficiently wide, with skilful management, to admit 
of our entering it with safety ; and a native from the nearest 
hut placed himself as a beacon for our guide. On landing, 
the boat was immediately hauled up to secure her from the 
invasion of the breaking surf. From hence it seemed best to 
despatch a letter by a messenger to our friend J. M. Orsmond, 
at Tautira, to say that we had arrived at this point, and were 
only waiting for the force of the wind to lessen, when it was 
our intention to proceed, so as to reach the place of destination 
as early as might be, that evening ; which would allow the 
whole of next day, (Seventh,) for the information to spread, 
in the hope that the meeting-house would be filled with people 
the next morning. 

Having had but little to refresh us since leaving Point Venus 
the preceding evening, two o'clock the next afternoon was rather 
a late breakfast hour ; the resident natives had, however, lost 
no time in preparing some food for us. After our arrival, they 
killed and roasted whole a good sized pig upon hot stones, 
covered over with leaves and then wood ashes, with bread-fruit, 
tarro, and the mountain plantain. When this 'feeding,' as 
they term it, was ready, and the floor covered over to a con- 
siderable extent with the large leaves of the purau-tree, it was 
presented to us in a formal manner, with a bundle of the 
island cloth, made from the beaten bark of the bread-fruit-tree, 
according to the custom of the country. The company then 
sat down upon the floor, consisting of Samuel Wilson, Charles 
and myself ; with the boat's crew close to us, but according to 



1835.] CHAPTER XXII. 3-55 

usage, forming a distinct party. We had a solemn pause before 
beginning to dine, and all remained still until this was over. 
One of our men, who had acted the part of cook, cut up the 
pig, using a knife with one hand, and holding the victim with 
the other : when the carver had separated the pig into a variety 
of shapeless lumps, he threw some of them to us, and the rest 
to his comrades, and the whole was pretty soon out of sight. 
The milk of fresh-pulled young cocoa-nuts furnished our drink ; 
and salt-water, in calabashes, fresh from the Pacific to dip the 
food in, was used instead of salt : this we found to be an ex- 
cellent substitute. When nearly ready to depart, about six 
yards of a piece of cotton handkerchiefs was given to the man 
who had charge of the premises during the absence of the 
owner. It may be said that we dined in public, as the place 
was pretty well crowded with lookers on, principally women 
and children. 

We got nicely out of the creek, and the wind, now much 
lower, although still opposing, allowed us to proceed with less 
difficulty. The day was nearly closing when we reached 
Tautira, situate at almost the easternmost end of the island ; it 
is a straggling village, about ten miles distant from Tea-hu-poo, 
where we had been the preceding week ; the whole belonging 
to the district under J. M. Orsrnond , s care. On approaching 
the mouth of the river, this active missionary was discovered in 
waiting to welcome our arrival. He conducted us to the resi- 
dence (when here) of the queen, at which place we remained 
during our stay in the neighbourhood. In a short time after 
reaching these premises our attention was awakened by the voice 
of a person speaking aloud, in as high a tone as could be well 
imagined. This man, we were told, was the queen's speaker, 
who was come in her name, that of the church, and of the whole 
of the inhabitants, to welcome us to Tautira. On going to him 
at the door, he delivered a sort of congratulatory address, which 
happily was soon over, as he spoke so loud as to make it painful 
to our ears. After partaking of some refreshment, in true 
Tahitian style, the deacons and some others of the congregation 
assembled in the room, and one of them read a portion of Scrip- 
ture, and prayed at considerable length. When this was 

2x2 



356 CHAPTER XXII. [1835. 

finished, a general conversation followed, principally on our 
coming to visit them, and of a serious nature. We retired to 
rest about nine o'clock ; J. M. Orsmond upon a strong bench 
with a back to it, something like a sofa, Samuel Wilson upon a 
mat on the floor, and Charles and myself upon a mat spread 
over a raised frame, and supported by open work, made from 
the bark of a tree, which I thought an excellent bed. At this 
place I found my gimlets particularly useful in keeping my 
clothing a considerable height above the floor, by which they 
were not only out of the damp, but avoided the vermin, which 
were very annoying, and of various kinds. A house-lizard was 
caught upon the wall in the course of the evening ; the house 
had been built several years, but had never had doors, so that 
dogs, rats, &c, had free access to any part of it. It was how- 
ever to myself a peaceful and comfortable asylum. 

Next morning, the 4th, we visited the principal part of the 
village, after having been presented with an ample feeding in 
due form by its inhabitants, accompanied, as usual, by a bundle 
of island-made cloth, and many assurances of welcome. This 
feeding fell into the hands of our boat's crew. A quantity of 
vegetables were unconsumed when the place was left, and they 
took away with them at least seven fowls alive. In the after- 
noon the body of the congregation assembled to receive us, 
when my certificates were read, and three persons spoke in 
strong terms of approbation and thankfulness at our coming 
amongst them, and of the satisfaction that had been conveyed 
to their minds by the language contained in the certificates. 
I had to speak a few sentences to them in reference to the 
certificates, declaring that I had no other motive for visiting 
them, than that the fulness of the blessing of the gospel might 
be theirs ; that some of them then present must have witnessed 
what the effect had been, as far as it had already been faithfully 
embraced ; what then must be the result, when all the dreadful 
passions which pervade the human breast are brought under 
its benign and heavenly influence ? nothing less than peace on 
earth, good will towards men : a prospect at which none of 
them could refrain from rejoicing, and uniting together in 
giving God the glory. On their being informed that my 



1835.] CHAPTER XXII. 357 

intention was to stay with them over the forenoon meeting to- 
morrow, and then endeavour to proceed to Hitea, they came 
forward, and in a pressing manner, desired us to stay over the 
Sabbath, and spend the whole day with them. This, however, 
I could not decide upon at the moment ; and a reason being- 
given, which made its probability doubtful, they were in 
measure prepared not to expect it. Some of the people seemed 
much disappointed at my not being willing to accept of small 
presents of shells, &c. I requested J. M. Orsmond to inform 
them, that I sought not theirs, but them ; to bring their souls 
to God. I have taken care that the value of the feedings we 
have received, should be amply returned in nails, or other 
useful articles, as clothing, thimbles, slates, &c. 

5th. (First day.) — It is a little remarkable, that to-day 
should be the opening of a newly erected meeting-house, of 
large dimensions, only finished yesterday. This building is 
erected upon the site of an ancient Marai, a place where pre- 
posterous scenes of idolatry and superstition had for ages been 
exhibited. At half-past eight o'clock the children of the school 
assembled to be catechized, and at nine o'clock the regular 
congregation gathered. The meeting was well attended ; and 
Samuel Wilson performed the duties, which at other times 
devolve upon the resident missionary at each station. Towards 
the close of their meeting, I was strengthened to stand up, and 
to recite the query of our blessed Lord, — " Who is my mother ? 
and who are my brethren V which led on to the gracious 
answer given by Himself, after looking round upon His dis- 
ciples ; " Behold my mother and my brethren ! for whosoever 
shall do the will of my Father which is in heaven, the same is 
my brother, and sister, and mother. 11 

The people near the place where I stood were very attentive, 
and full opportunity was afforded for me to clear my mind ; 
and the everlasting blessed Truth was set over all. It had 
been previously fixed for us to depart for Hitea as soon as this 
meeting was ended, in order to reach that place in time for the 
afternoon gathering there; yet it did not seem as if I had 
fully done with Tautira. The morning had been rainy, with 
thunder, and the general appearance of the weather now 



358 CHAPTER XXII. [1835. 

became more threatening than before : the wind had shifted, 
and it was blowing strong from the point to which we wanted 
to go. Upon inquiry of those best acquainted with the dis- 
tance from place to place, and the effect which the present 
strong wind and swell of the sea would have in retarding our 
progress, with the probability of our not being able to make 
much headway, in the heavy gusts which frequently broke 
forth, it appeared to be the general opinion, that it was not 
practicable for us to arrive in time for the afternoon meeting 
at Hitea. This, with the information that the natives never 
travel themselves in rainy weather, nor expect strangers to do 
so, determined me without hesitation to remain with the people 
of Tautira, and I had satisfaction in believing, that I should 
be in the right place ; the tempestuous state of the weather, as 
the afternoon advanced, served to confirm the propriety of the 
measure adopted. 

In the afternoon meeting, on standing up, I had to tell the 
people, that however contrary to my expectation, I was fully 
persuaded that my sitting amongst them again, was not only 
in the will of the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ, but 
in his everlasting love to their immortal souls ; in which my 
heart was greatly enlarged. Many solemn and incontrovertible 
truths were brought to my remembrance to speak before them, 
under a fresh and renewed influence of heavenly strength gra- 
ciously vouchsafed ; whereby I was enabled to sound an alarm, 
and to point out the repenting sinner's sure and never-failing 
friend and refuge, Christ Jesus, the Lord of life and glory : I 
humbly hope that the great and adorable name of the only 
true God, and our Saviour was exalted. 

Just as the meeting was about to break up, the attention of 
the people was arrested by an individual asking me in English, 
whether I could speak encouragingly, and with confidence, as 
to the day not being far distant when the reign of the Messiah 
would be universal in the earth. I told him that I could speak 
with the fullest confidence of all the great and precious promises 
recorded in Holy Writ, connected with this important and 
interesting subject. As to the day being not far distant which 
he spoke of, I was one of those who believed, that it was already 



1835.] CHAPTER XXII. 359 

come in the hearts of all, who believed in the inward and 
spiritual appearance of the Lord Jesus by his Holy Spirit, — of 
those who loved Hiin, and obeyed His voice. The substance of 
what had passed was then imparted to the people at large. We 
then separated under a solemn feeling, better and more easily 
to be conceived than described. The weather cleared up in the 
evening ; and a feeling pervaded, as if nothing had been lost 
by the delay, which it had apparently occasioned. 

On the 6th, after a break-of-day breakfast of baked pork, the 
mountain plantain, and cocoa-nut milk, we took leave, and 
departed for Hitea with a favourable prospect. We had not 
rowed much more than an hour, when the trade-wind sprung 
up in our. favour, and drove us along the coast so quickly, that 
by ten o'clock, a. m., we were abreast of the out-station about 
to be visited. On landing, we met with Etoti and Paofai, two 
brothers and principals amongst the island chiefs, then travelling 
towards Papara ; with both of whom I had been acquainted 
from almost the first of our setting foot on Tahitian ground. 
We were informed that the people had been collected the 
preceding day, in expectation of our arrival ; but that the 
weather had accounted for our absence. Having made two 
attempts to see these people, first at Tiarei, and now again 
on returning from Tautira, on each occasion prevented by the 
weather from seeing them assembled as proposed, I at first 
thought that I might venture to move forward towards the 
Bay of Papeete, where we left our vessel lying : but on being 
assured that if I would stay till next morning, a meeting 
would be held in due course at sun-rise, and that many people 
would attend, I found that I could do no less than make the 
sacrifice of another day, by remaining on the spot, however 
inconveniently circumstanced. The idea that I might venture 
to move on, and pass by these people, had been none other than 
a plausible suggestion of the grand enemy ; but I was delivered 
out of his hand. This being agreed upon, we were shown to 
an empty house, like a large bird-cage in appearance ; perhaps 
occasionally occupied, though but little trace of that was to be 
seen. It was built with open lattice- walls, and screens of cocoa- 
nut branches to keep out the wind. The floors were covered with 



360 CHAPTER XXII. [1835. 

withered grass, in a very dirty condition from long use, being- 
laid upon loose earth, in a low and damp situation. There were 
latticed divisions which made four apartments ; but not a door 
either within or without. The people soon brought us a supply 
of food, according to their custom of treating strangers ; and in 
due time beds were prepared for us, consisting of frames of wood, 
supported on posts driven into the ground, and spread with 
clean mats. 

We paid a visit to the resident chief, to whom I was no 
stranger, having seen him more than once on board the vessel. 
At his house a large ' feeding' was preparing, to which we were 
invited, but declined partaking of it. In the course of the 
afternoon we looked round the neighbourhood ; and after 
the evening refreshment of ourselves and boat's crew, the 
governor and the elders or deacons of the church, with a native 
teacher, came to visit us. These were soon followed by a 
number of men, women, and children ; and when the room in 
which we sat, was pretty well filled with guests seated on the 
floor, the adjoining room was occupied by others who were only 
separated from the rest by open lattice-work ; through which 
however they could see and hear, and be heard, almost as well 
as if we had been together in the same room. On inquiring 
of the native teacher, through the medium of Samuel Wilson, 
our interested and highly interesting companion and interpreter, 
whether there was any indication that would encourage a hope 
that some few among the people were desirous to improve in 
those things that accompany life and salvation ; he said, he 
thought, that there were instances where this was discernible, 
and that he himself was very desirous and anxious that this 
should be the case ; that he laboured hard for it, greatly desiring 
to "work, while it is called to-day." I said, where there is such 
a desire in the teacher, and a correspondent one in the object of 
his care, a happy result under the Divine blessing could scarcely 
fail to be produced, — or to this import. I told him, however, that 
although the text he had mentioned might in some degree be 
applicable to the work in which he was engaged, yet I did con- 
ceive it was more so, as regarded the great work of regeneration 
in the heart of man : that this great and important and indis- 



1835.] CHAPTER XXII. 361 

pensable work, could be done only while the light of the day of 
merciful visitation was extended ; and if this unhappily were 
overlooked and neglected, a night of darkness would assuredly 
follow, in which no man can work. u If, therefore, the light 
that is in thee be darkness, how great is that darkness." That 
there was a day of visitation extended to every son and daughter 
of Adam, sufficiently long for them all to work out their own 
souls' 1 salvation with fear and trembling ; and it was also as 
certain, that this day might, from one cause or other, be over- 
looked and withstood, or suffered to pass away unimproved. 
That this was evident from the language of the compassionate 
Saviour, when he lamented and wept over the city of Jerusalem : 
— " If thou hadst known, even thou, at least in this thy day, the 
things which belong unto thy peace, but now they are hid from 
thine eyes." " How often would I have gathered thy children 
together, as a hen doth gather her brood under her wings, and 
ye would not :" — which plainly shows, that her children might 
have been gathered ; but, alas ! they would not, because they 
knew not the day of their visitation ; — their destruction was of 
themselves. 

As we proceeded with this kind of conversation, the company 
more and more settled down into serious thoughtfulness. One 
person, however, seemed very desirous to understand what 
was my real object in coming to their island ; several rea- 
sons were alleged, but they were evidently not comprehended 
or not satisfactory. The spirituality of the gospel dispen- 
sation was gradually brought before the view of their minds; 
and it was strikingly evident, that there was a fertile soil 
or good ground prepared by the ever-blessed husbandman, in 
the hearts of some present, for the reception of the sacred truths 
that were afterwards disclosed to their view. Some of them 
acknowledged that they had never seen things before in the 
same light, but at once yielded an assent from sensible convic- 
tion. The important distinction was explained to them, between 
the Word which was in the beginning with God and was God, 
and the Bible ; a subject on which their ideas were confused, 
from having been accustomed to hear the Scriptures styled ' the 
word of God. 1 After alluding to the memorable conference 



'362 CHAPTER XXII. [1835. 

between the Saviour of the world and the woman of Samaria, 
who, when told she had had five husbands, &c, left her water 
pot and went her way into the city, and said, " Come, see a man 
that told me all things that ever I did ; is not this the Christ V — 
I asked them, if they had not at seasons felt something within 
themselves, which brought to their remembrance sins and trans- 
gressions that had been long ago committed, — things which 
they would be glad to forget, much rather than remember with 
painful retrospect ; — querying, whether they had not long been 
sensible of this, before they ever saw the face of a missionary, 
or heard his voice I On this some of them shook their heads, 
and answered in the most satisfactory manner, with unequi- 
vocal simplicity and sincerity, — yes, that they had, long enough 
ago ; — proving a fact which I have never doubted, since the Lord 
Most High was pleased to reveal the Son of his love to my finite 
understanding, that the gospel has been preached in and unto 
every creature under heaven. I reminded them of the apostle's 
declaration to the Romans, — " That which may be known of 
God is manifest in them, for God hath showed it unto them •£! 
and — " He hath shewed thee, ! man, what is good." This 
I told them was that gospel " which was preached to every 
creature which is under heaven," — to every son and daughter 
of Adam. On their saying they had never heard of this 
before, — S. W. replied, — they had always been exhorted to 
pray for the Holy Spirit, to seek and they should find, &c. ; 
but they said, ' never in this way.' Such a solemnity now 
spread over us as could not be mistaken, even had " the doors" 
been " shut ;" for — " peace be unto you," though not outwardly 
proclaimed, was known and felt to be amongst us, by some 
present. Under this precious, heavenly canopy, I told them, — 
now they might know for what I had come among them, in the 
love of the everlasting gospel ; — that they might be witnesses for 
themselves of the blessings it conveys, and the glorious privi- 
lege to which it entitles, if faithfully embraced. Some of them 
could not forbear expressing their inward state, and their fear, 
from the uncertainty they were in, as to the future well-being 
of their immortal souls. It was indeed a season never to be 
forgotten ; for it seemed as if some of their hearts were laid 



1835.] CHAPTER XXII. 368 

open by the Almighty Searcher, and a willingness wrought to 
confess their sins, and to call on the name of the Lord, through 
the powerful efficacy of redeeming love shed abroad therein, and 
working in them to will and to do of the Lord's good pleasure : — 
to the praise of the riches of his grace be it faithfully recorded, 
in characters which can never be defaced whilst memory holds 
her place. 

At a late hour, we adjourned until sunrise next morning, 
the 7th of the Seventh month, when the people generally 
assembled in a commodious meeting-house. As this was 
a meeting held in regular course, the accustomed duties 
were performed by Samuel Wilson, who acted instead of 
their native teacher. My certificates were then read, which 
seemed to prepare the minds of the people for the solemn 
season, with which we were afterwards favoured. I had 
a fine open time amongst them, during which the path to 
the kingdom was set before them, wherein a wayfaring man, 
though a fool, cannot err : and the state of mind which must 
be attained to by all, before true spiritual worship can be per- 
forir.ed, and accepted by Him, who is worshipped only in spirit 
and in truth, — was, I trust, declared in plainness. I had 
largely to treat on the all-sufficiency of the light, the grace, 
which hath appeared to all men, bringing salvation to all ; 
teaching all men, " that denying ungodliness and worldly 
lusts, they should live soberly, righteously, and godly in this 
present world ;" and commending " them unto God and the word 
of his grace, which is able to build us up, and to give us an 
inheritance" amongst those that are already sanctified by faith 
that is in Christ Jesus. I sat down with a thankful and 
peaceful mind. Before we separated, one of the people stood 
up, and thanked me, in the name of the queen and of the 
church. I requested Samuel Wilson to say, that no thanks 
were due to me : I had done no more than that which was my 
duty to do, and was only an unprofitable servant. After taking 
some refreshment, we proceeded to Tiarei. Our stay here 
was limited, for fear of losing the wind, yet we did not like to 
pass by the mission-house altogether, whose inhabitants we 
might never see again. We had from hence a rapid passage, 



364 chapter xxn. [1835. 

and were favoured to find all well and comfortable on board the 
Henry Freeling. 

Seventh Month 9th. — Since returning from Hitea, my 
attention has been turned towards the white residents 
in this neighbourhood, and I have endeavoured to dwell 
under the prospect of collecting them together, with the 
crews of the different vessels now here, at eleven o'clock next 
First day. 

11th. — After breakfast, went to inquire of Eliza Pritchard, 
(her husband having sailed for the Marquesas Islands,) whe- 
ther there would be any meeting for the English to-morrow ; 
for in the morning, matters had so far opened, that I found it 
best to tell my Charles, I did not see that I could do less than 
endeavour to meet the English residents to-morrow forenoon. 
But little information could, however, be obtained on the sub- 
ject, until late in the evening; when a missionary from a distant 
station came on board to tell me, that he had given notice of a 
meeting to be held on his own account, but that he should be 
glad to turn it over to me. As he had appointed it himself, it 
seemed best to tell him that he must go on with it, but that 
I intended to be there ; and if I should have any thing to 
offer, it would be only according to gospel order. Our captain 
took considerable pains, late in the evening, to spread the 
information, that all persons inclining to attend might have an 
opportunity of knowing there would be such a meeting held. 

12th. (First day.) — Called at George Pritchard's house a 
little before the time appointed, to be in readiness, it being 
near the meeting-house. I met there with the missionary who 
had given notice last evening, who wished me (as he expressed 
it) to begin the service of the meeting. I was best satisfied to 
decline the offer, as he had personally given notice of it, and 
by those to whom he had spoken, it was certainly understood 
to be for himself : if it had been appointed for me, it could 
only begin in silent waiting upon God. It afterwards occurred 
to me, however, that at a proper time it would be safest for me, 
if found needful, to spread the subject before the meeting when 
collected together ; and believing that I should have to speak to 
the people, I availed myself of an interval, after the reading of 



1835.] CHAPTER XXII. 365 

the 14th chapter of Luke, to step upon the base of the pulpit, 
and state, — that as this meeting was not specifically appointed 
on m v account, it might be considered out of order to open my 
mouth in it ; but as we might never have the opportunity of 
meeting together again, I had been made willing to attend it, 
and in the ability which might be given me to minister in it if 
called upon : that such a mode of procedure would still be 
only in accordance with the true order of the gospel : but, if 
any should consider it an intrusion, I hoped they would speak 
and object,. and I believed I should be satisfied, with having 
made this offer. No one spoke, until the missionary said, 
he believed there was not the least objection in the minds of 
any present. [In the course of the meeting D. W. expressed 
what was upon his mind at considerable length. The people 
behaved in a solid manner, and a solemn covering prevailed.] 

13th. — Employed on board most of the day. Omitted 
mentioning that last week a canoe from Tea-hu-poo, and 
another from Tautira, reached the ship : in both these canoes 
were persons with whom we had social and religious intercourse 
at the places where they reside. Their coming afforded an 
opportunity to send clothing and slates for some of the most 
diligent children at the district schools in those parts ; and 
nails suitable for general purposes, to the different congrega- 
tions. As the dear people composing them had abundantly 
more than administered to my wants when amongst them, it 
was a relief to be enabled to return their kindness, and con- 
vince them that in my coming, I sought not theirs, but them. 
I do feel anxious, and I hope it is an allowable solicitude, that 
none may have it in their power to say, that we have in any 
degree been chargeable to them ; and thus far I think there 
are none at whose houses we have been entertained, that have 
not in one way or other been remunerated. 

There are so many aggravated circumstances which con- 
tribute to lessen the desire of the people for religion, that the 
present aspect of things here is truly discouraging ; none of 
these seems to operate more powerfully to produce dislike and 
disgust, than the arbitrary laws that have been made to compel 
the people to attend the places of worship and the schools ; the 



366 CHAPTER XXII. [1835. 

neglect of which has no less a penalty attached to it, than the 
forfeiture of their lands. So long as these things are suffered 
to exist, and the native authorities permit or wink at the 
landing of spirituous liquors from the English traders, from the 
colonies of New South Wales, and from America, (which 
are much more numerous than the former,) hopeless indeed 
will be every attempt to civilize, much more to christianize the 
natives of these islands ; these are disadvantages which must 
ever impede the free course of the gospel. 

15th. — This afternoon went up to Papara in one of our own 
boats, to take leave of Henry Nott. We found him alone, 
and in a very weak and feeble state. He has long been 
unable to attend the place of worship regularly, though near 
his own dwelling. On our return we called to take leave of 
the queen : we found her sitting on the step at the back-door, 
with several of her chiefs squatted round about her, one of 
whom had been reading to the others, until interrupted by our 
approach ; the king was sitting on a wall, eating part of a 
cocoa-nut. For want of an interpreter, I was unable to 
acknowledge the indulgence of the queen, in remitting the port- 
charges on our vessel. Reached the Henri/ Freeling before 
dark. Soon after our return, the carpenter of the vessel was 
seized with violent inflammatory symptoms, which increased 
so rapidly, that a boat was despatched for Doctor Vaughan. 
One of our strongest seamen, has for some days been rendered 
totally unfit for duty by a similar attack, and the apprentice 
is nearly useless with an inflamed leg. Many persons on 
shore, both natives and foreigners, are in a weak state, occa- 
sioned, it is thought, by the coolness of the night air, while the 
sun by day emits a scorching heat. We have great cause to 
be thankful for the blessing of health so graciously bestowed 
upon us, whilst visiting the different stations on every part of 
the island, notwithstanding the great dampness of the lodging- 
places which fell to our lot, and the variety of food, to which 
we were for the most part wholly unaccustomed ; we had also 
been exposed to every sort of weather in an open boat, in 
heavy dews, at times for hours together. The distance travelled 
on these occasions exceeded three hundred miles ; but for the 



1835.] chapter xxu. 367 

most part, under the reefs of shelving coral, which skirt the 
island in many places in a wonderfully providential manner : 
where these do not extend, the swellings of the Pacific had to 
be encountered. The rapid eddying currents, in some places, 
rendered our situation perilous at times ; but the Lord was 
nigh, sustaining us through all, and making our way pros- 
perous, as already recorded in some of the most favourable 
interviews with the people, and, I humbly trust, to the exalta- 
tion of His own great and ever excellent name. Who would 
not fear Him I Who would not serve Him ? 

16th. (Fifth day.) — The fore part of the morning much 
unsettled, by the natives being more numerous on board than 
usual ; but a large ship appearing in the offing, served to 
attract most of them away. This ship proved to be the 
Charles Carroll, Reuben Weeks, master ; out twenty months 
from Rhode Island, in America. It was quite a relief to be 
permitted to sit down in silence this morning, although much 
was found still remaining to cause a painful struggle between 
flesh and spirit. 

18th. — Yesterday, with the exception of taking our usual 
exercise on shore about sun-down, we were busily employed on 
board, amongst other things, in selecting copies of the Scriptures 
in the English, French, Spanish and Portuguese languages; also 
a large number of religious tracts, and some standard works and 
writings of Friends for Samuel Wilson. He leaves us next 
week, on a mission to the Samoas or Navigator's Islands. 
May the fear of man not be permitted to operate on his mind, 
so as to prevent his acting up to what he knows to be right ; 
but may the fear of God more abundantly dwell in him, and 
prevail in him abidingly ; and may the rich aboundings of His 
love in Christ Jesus be the comfort and strength of his heart, 
and his portion for ever. 

This morning, called on board the American ship Charles 
Carroll, for a short time. My mind has at times, both 
yesterday and to-day, been occupied with the prospect of 
holding another meeting with the white inhabitants residing 
in this neighbourhood, together with the crews of the vessels 
in the bay, and any other persons that understand English. 



368 CHAPTER XXII. [1835. 

On considering this subject, it seemed best to hold this meeting 
on board the Henry Freeling. It was late in the afternoon, 
before I ventured to disclose my prospect to my son Charles 
and Captain Keen, lest, instead of being found following my 
heavenly guide, I should be detected in having, though mis- 
taken zeal, got before him, and missed the way. 

Seventh Month 19ih. (First day.)— -Early in the morning, the 
deck of the Henry Freeling, with the assistance of some planks 
furnished from the Charles Carroll, and our own resources, was 
prepared with seats, in readiness for the intended meeting. At 
half-past ten o'clock, our boats and one from the American ship, 
were employed to convey the people on board from different parts 
of the shore, and soon after eleven, the meeting was comfortably 
settled. As there were a number of persons present who had 
never before attended a Friends' meeting, and were wholly un- 
acquainted with the manner in which they are conducted, it 
seemed best, after we had sat for some time, to suggest the neces- 
sity of our endeavouring to restrain all wandering thoughts and 
imaginations, that we might be sensible of the Lord's life-giving 
presence, if peradventure we should be favoured therewith ; and 
also be the better prepared to receive any thing He might please 
to give for expression, for our edification and refreshment, — or 
words to this import. A covering of solemnity now drew over 
the assembly, and continued in a precious manner ; under which 
I was strengthened and raised up to speak of the ways of the 
Lord amongst them ; repeating his expressions to the disciples, 
which so beautifully illustrate the immediate connexion between 
Himself and the church, under the similitude of the vine and 
its branches. — " I am the vine, ye are the branches ; he that 
abideth in me, and I in him, the same bringeth forth much 
fruit : for without me ye can do nothing." And if we stand in 
need of help to wade through the common occurrences of human 
life, how much more needful then is the assistance of his Holy 
Spirit, when thus assembled together for the professed purpose 
of worshipping that God, who " is a Spirit," and must be wor- 
shipped " in spirit and in truth." After this, I had to speak of 
the excellency and efficacy of silent waiting upon Almighty 
God, in order to be qualified for the right performance of this 



1835.] chapter xxii. 3G9 

spiritual worship ; that mankind might be turned to the only 
true teacher of His people, Christ Jesus, without whom we can 
do nothing, but all things, by and through the strengthening 
influence of his Holy Spirit : — contrasting the worship under 
the law, with that under the present glorious gospel dispensa- 
tion, unlimited as to time and place ; but which can never be 
acceptably performed, while we continue in sin and transgression, 
— because it must be offered in the beauty of holiness, and in 
newness of life, through the blessed aid of the Holy Spirit, in 
spirit and in truth. I had strongly to press the necessity of 
every individual's turning inward, and of diligently seeking an 
acquaintance with the manifestation of the Holy Spirit, a 
measure of which is mercifully bestowed upon every son and 
daughter of the human race ; and which, if sought unto, would 
set their sins in order before them, in love and mercy, that they 
might repent and be saved from them. Appealing to them, 
whether they had not been sensible of the strivings of this 
blessed Spirit, when sin had been committed : at the same time 
declaring, that it might be withstood and rebelled against, until 
it ceased to strive ; and they themselves be suffered to go on, add- 
ing sin to sin, without feeling its reproofs and checks. If this 
light (of Christ) in thee be darkness, how great is that darkness ! 
Thus would the day of their visitation be passed over, and they 
know it not ; and this light, if once withdrawn and extinguished 
in Divine displeasure, could never be rekindled, although before 
they might often have been gathered, like Jerusalem of old. 
The heads above quoted may suffice to show the substance of 
what I had to express amongst them, though but a small part 
of the whole. The Lord has been pleased to favour us with 
many blessed meetings ; but this for solemnity and stillness 
excelled. — " Blessed be the Lord God, the God of Israel, who 
only doeth wondrous things ; and blessed be His glorious name 
for ever: and let the whole earth be filled with His glory, 
Amen, and Amen. 11 

Our two sick men continue in a precarious state ; their absence 
from duty seems to protract our stay here : but I believe it 
is in the Divine will. Though sensible of almost daily in- 
creasing infirmities, arising from the deca} T of nature, yet I am 



370 CHAPTER XXII. [1835. 

mercifully supported in humble resignation to whatever may 
yet be in reserve for me ; being fully persuaded and taught to 
confide in the all-sufficiency of that Almighty power, that can, 
at His pleasure, help me to run through a troop of difficulties 
and besetments, and to leap over a wall of opposition and un- 
belief. And as I believe it to be so, why should I not say, in 
the language of the apostle, " I can do all things through Christ 
which strengthened me." 

Seventh Month 20th. — Began to prepare the vessel for sea, in 
the hope that our two invalids will soon be restored to health, 
though at present extremely weak. 

21st.— Received a packet of letters from London, which had 
been left at the island of Eimeo by the Ulitea, on her way from 
Sydney to Raiatea. Our joy may be more easily conceived 
than described, on finding an uninterrupted series of favourable 
accounts from home, as well as, in the general, from others 
whom we also dearly love : they did not fail to raise in my 
heart a tribute of thankfulness and gratitude to the great Pre- 
server of men, our Almighty and merciful Benefactor. 

23rd. — By the mission, which is nearly ready to proceed to 
the Navigator's Islands or Samoas, an eligible opportunity is 
afforded, for an extensive circulation of the sacred writings, 
and other books of a religious nature. We have accordingly 
furnished a supply of the Scriptures in the English, French, 
Spanish, and Portuguese languages. As many white people 
and Europeans are known to be mingled amongst the inhabitants 
of this extensive group of islands ; a large quantity of Friends 1 
tracts, and of those from the Tract Society, were also selected 
for distribution through this channel. 

2^th. — This forenoon the Harmony sailed for the Sandwich 
Islands. In this vessel, the mail brought from Sydney by the 
Henry Freeling, was duly forwarded. It would have been 
better for the people of Tahiti, if she had never entered the 
bay, having been a fruitful source of wickedness, from having 
landed a considerable quantity of rum ; although spirits are 
strictly prohibited by the present laws of that island. If all 
persons who contribute to the destruction of their fellow-crea- 
tures, by this or any other evil practice, were publicly stig- 



1835.] CHAPTER XXII. 371 

matized as the agents of Satan, and at all times shunned by- 
virtuous characters, as unworthy of being noticed while per- 
sisting therein, it might, I think, be a means of compelling 
some of them to desist and to be ashamed of their conduct, and 
deter them from further adding sin to sin, in causing others to 
sin by their means. The Baiatea, a vessel engaged to convey 
the mission to the Samoas, sailed soon after noon for Eimeo. 

In the departure of Samuel Wilson for the Samoas, we have 
lost a most willing, competent, and faithful interpreter : but as 
he was provided for us in a manner altogether unexpected and 
unlooked-for, we may safely trust that we shall be cared for in 
this respect, while amongst the islands of the Society group, 
which we have yet to visit. 

25th. — At the close of the public meeting on board the 
Henry Freeling, last First day morning, Reuben Weeks, the 
master of the Charles Carroll, expressed a desire that a meet- 
ing might be held on board his own vessel, when all the crew 
would be collected together : of this I was afterwards informed. 
This did not escape my recollection, and my attention was fre- 
quently turned to it in the course of the past week, though 
until this morning I did not mention it ; when I did not see 
how I should stand acquitted, without availing myself of the 
offered opportunity, and to embrace it. Having mentioned 
the subject after breakfast to our captain and my Charles, I 
wished to ascertain whether if the meeting should be held on 
board the American ship to-morrow forenoon, it would be 
attended by the whole of the crew. There appearing no doubt 
on this head, I felt willing that Captain Keen should inform 
Reuben Weeks, that I had no objection to the meeting being- 
held on board the Charles Carroll, provided the whole crew, 
without any compulsory measures being adopted, should be 
found willing to attend it ; but that they should be left at their 
liberty to choose for themselves in this matter. It is a regular 
custom, on board whaling-ships, when lying there, to allow 
one-half of the seamen to be on shore daily for exercise ; 
and therefore I am desirous that all who may attend our 
meeting should do it of their own accord ; — it was known that 
only one-half of the ship's company attended our meeting last 

2 b 2 



372 CHAPTER XXII. [1835. 

First day, the other half having claimed the privilege of their 
liberty. As this doubt was removed to my satisfaction, the 
meeting was appointed to be held at eleven o'clock to-morrow 
morning. Care was taken that this intention should be spread 
to all the vessels in the bay, and on the shore also. At noon, 
Reuben Weeks came on board to say, that William Henry, 
the missionary from Tiarei, (now here on account of sickness 
in his family,) had given notice that service for the English 
would be performed by him to-morrow, at their chapel on 
shore, at eleven o'clock. I did not see it my place to flinch 
from the arrangement which had been made as to our meeting, 
more especially as no invitation had been extended from the 
shore to the crews of the shipping. In the evening, I called 
upon William Henry, who having heard of our intended meet- 
ing, at once said that he should countermand the notice he had 
given, and would come himself to our meeting ; not doubting 
but his hearers would be very willing to join him in so doing. 

27th. — Yesterday morning, we repaired on board the Charles 
Carroll, in time to attend the meeting appointed. About 
fifty persons were assembled on the occasion, and the Lord was 
graciously pleased to give us a precious season together, and to 
magnify His ever great and adorable name. With those that 
attended from the shore, were the missionary and his wife 
from Earotonga, Eliza the wife of George Pritchard, and 
William Henry of Tiarei. 

After the meeting had sat a considerable time in silence, it 
was with me to make a few remarks, to wean the expectation 
of the people from words, and to prepare them for a longer 
time of silence, if that should be permitted. I had to tell 
them, that if I were to read to them, or to speak to them in 
my own strength, it would only be an act between one man 
and others ; but that worship, for which very solemn purpose 
we were met together, could only be performed between man 
and his Almighty Creator, who is a Spirit, and must be wor- 
shipped in spirit and in truth, with our spirits, through the 
Spirit of his ■ dear Son. A precious covering of solemnity 
now spread over us, under the feeling of which we continued 
until the time was fully come for clearing my mind amongst 



1835.] CHAPTER XXII. 373 

them, and declaring the mercy, loving-kindness, compassion, 
and faithfulness of my God ; who willeth not the death of a 
sinner, but rather that all should return, repent, and live for 
ever. The means were amply provided by His sending His 
only-begotten Son into the world, that whosoever helieveth 
on him should not perish, but have everlasting life ; who 
came not to kill or destroy, — He came, that we might have 
life ; and that we might have it more abundantly, — declaring 
himself to be " the Way, and the Truth, and the Life :" 
He continues to be so to all such as not only believe in His 
outward appearance on earth, and in His sufferings, death 
and resurrection, but in his inward and spiritual appear- 
ance also in their hearts, and in the operation of his Holy 
Spirit there, — even that of burning and fuel of fire, to the con- 
suming of the chaffy and transgressing nature therein ; and if 
waited for, submitted unto, and abode under, this would pre- 
pare us for an inheritance incorruptible and undefiled, in the 
kingdom of Christ Jesus, that shall never have an end. I had 
largely to treat on the subject of Divine worship, and to point 
out the difference between that under the Mosaic dispensation, 
and that under the gospel : that, with the Jews under the 
former, was outward, ceremonial, and superficial ; but under the 
latter, it was altogether inward, in the inner temple of the heart, 
— simple, but spiritual and substantial, in spirit and in truth. I 
had to declare the beauty, purity, and spirituality of the true 
gospel church, of which none are members, but the ransomed 
and redeemed of the Lord ; who have passed through the great 
work of regeneration, and have been ransomed by the blood of 
Jesus: — with much more of warning, and exhortation, and 
encouragement, as ability and utterance were graciously 
afforded. 

After I sat down, my heart was filled with humble gratitude ; 
and a tribute of thanksgiving and praise was raised to the God 
and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ, who had thus graciously 
condescended to make Himself known amongst us, what if I 
say, by the breaking of the bread of life : under a sense of 
which, I had publicly to acknowledge the same, and that the 
Lord should have the glory due unto His holy name. The 



374 CHAPTER XXII. [1835. 

meeting held longer than usual ; but the weight and solemnity 
so strikingly apparent, (as afterwards openly acknowledged,) 
remained to the last undissipated and undiminished. What, 
indeed, is man, or the son of man, that the Lord Most High is 
thus mindful of him, — that He thus visiteth him. 

28th. — I may mention, for the encouragement of others, who 
at a future day may have to follow in a track similar to this, 
in which it is my highly-favoured and happy lot to tread, that 
previously to attending the meeting just alluded to, I had felt 
very poor, and empty, and disqualified : although without any 
particular feeling of discouragement as to the result. When 
the time came for me to stand up, although weakness and fear 
were my wholesome companions ; yet the further I proceeded, 
the more I was strengthened and furnished for the work before 
me, and was even to the end unexhausted. The remainder of 
the day, and through the night-watches, my peace flowed undis- 
turbed and uninterrupted, as the stream of a mighty river ; and 
a song of praise filled my heart : for I was indeed made joyful 
in the house of prayer, as on the mountain of the Lord ; — to the 
glory of the riches of His grace be it spoken. 



] 835.1 CHAPTER XXIII 375 



CHAPTER XXIII. 

VrSIT FROM MISSIONARIES BARON DE THIERRY MEETING IN THE 

CHAPEL SAIL FOR EIMEO LETTERS FROM HOME ARRIVE AT 

EIMEO SCHOOL— NATIVE MEETING. 



Month 29th. — This day arrived the Frances of New 
Bedford, John Briggs master, whose vessel rode by our side, 
fourteen months ago, when at Rio de Janeiro : it is like meet- 
ing with an old acquaintance, as we were known to each other 
at that time. The chief Paofai came on board this morning ; 
he stayed breakfast, and our reading. He was desirous to buy 
cloth, and to possess one of our iron boxes ; neither of which 
could be spared to him. In the afternoon, Charles Pittman 
the missionary from Rarotonga, came on board. Our two inva- 
lids have been reported in a convalescent state. 

30th. (Fifth day.) — In the forenoon, Charles and myself 
sat down in the usual way, but under a renewed sense of dry- 
ness and barrenness ; which perhaps was the food most conve- 
nient for us, to keep the creaturely part in subjection. Charles 
and Elizabeth Pittman, Eliza the wife of George Pritchard, 
and Mary Darling, paid us a visit. The impaired state of the 
health of Charles Pittman has compelled him to quit his station 
at Rarotonga for the present, being no longer able to attend 
to the duties devolving upon him. His wife is also far from 
well. They have resided about ten years upon the island, 
where their united labour has been eminently crowned with 
success. The circumstance of there being no harbour for 
shipping, except for vessels of very small tonnage, and that 
insecure, although the means of subjecting them to many 
privations, is a great blessing to the people of that island ; 
because they are thereby preserved from the contaminating 
example and effects, which the sailors invariably introduce 
wherever they go ; and to this may, in great measure, be 
attributed the success of Charles and Elizabeth Pittman's 



•376 CHAPTER XXIII. [1835. 

endeavours : at the same time, it is only just to say, they are 
a truly devoted couple, and well qualified by example as well 
as precept, to fill the station they have occupied. They hope 
to return to the island in a few months ; and being desirous 
that the natives might be furnished with cotton dresses, for 
want of which they evidently suffer much in their winter sea- 
sons, it seemed a good opportunity afforded for me to furnish 
them with a stock of knitting-needles, as cotton grows spon- 
taneously and plentifully upon the island : this Was accordingly 
done, together with a knitted worsted vest, as a pattern to 
begin the work with. They need only to commence the work, 
and their wants will soon be supplied ; industry would also be 
promoted, of a kind not too fatiguing, and which they are capable 
of sustaining : hard labour cannot be borne in this climate, and 
I think the ample supply of food provided for them by a boun- 
teous Creator, plainly indicates it was never intended or required. 
31st. — This morning arrived the barque Active from Panama. 
Wishing to ascertain whether she had picked up any letters 
for us on the road, and other particulars respecting her, 
Captain Keen went on board to make these inquiries ; he soon 
returned, bringing with him Charles, Baron de Thierry, as 
he styled himself, who with his wife, five children, and 
servants, had arrived in this vessel, which had been chartered 
by him at Panama. The baron's object in coming with our 
captain, was to inform me, that he was going out to New 
Zealand, exactly as our predecessor William Penn, went to 
establish the government of Pennsylvania ; but I found, on 
investigating his views, that he was a perfect stranger to the 
principles which actuated William Penn in his government of 
that colony : as he was taking with him a military force, with 
arms, ammunition, &c, and a Polish major, (Edward Fergus, 
formerly employed in the staff of Russia, and at Petersburg, 
with whom we soon became acquainted,) to organize these 
troops in New Zealand, and direct their operations as needful. 
I told the baron that I could enter into his plans, just so far 
as they went upon gospel principles, and no further; informing 
him that no weapon more formidable than a constable's staff, 
was made use of for more than sixty years, for the support of 



1835.] CHAPTER XXIII. 377 

the government of Pennsylvania, or while the peaceable princi- 
ples of William Penn and his friends were suffered to prevail. 

Eighth Month 1st. — To-day, I did not feel as if I dared omit 
endeavouring to hold another meeting on board the Charles 
Carroll to-morrow, if that ship's deck could be again procured : 
I did not mention this until the afternoon, wishing to try the 
fleece both wet and dry. On a request being made to Reuben 
Weeks, the master of the said ship, for the use of her deck, it 
was immediately granted, and the crews of the different ships 
in the bay invited to attend the meeting. In the evening the 
invitation was extended to the shore. 

2nd. (First day.) — At half-past ten o'clock, a. m., a 
warning-flag was hoisted on board the Charles Carroll: and 
about eleven o'clock the meeting w T as completely gathered. 
The number of sailors who attended was considerably increased 
by those from the newly arrived vessels. Charles Pittman, 
Mary Darling, and Eliza Pritchard, attended from the shore, 
with Charles de Thierry, his wife, and the Pole, Edward Fergus. 
After the attention of the people had been arrested by the 
object of our meeting together being explained, a general 
silence prevailed. At length, I stood up with the words ; 
" The wolf shall dwell with the lamb ; the leopard shall lie 
down with the kid ; and the calf and the young lion and the 
fatling together : and a little child shall lead them," &c. After 
alluding to the fulfilment of this prophecy in the gospel dis- 
pensation, as shadowed forth by Isaiah, I had to tell them 
that these are the very days in which we live ; every individual 
had a share in it, and a part to act in it, though of general 
application : — that the gospel was not a mere outward declaration 
of good things, but " the power of God unto salvation," to 
all who believe, repent, and obey it ; and that its privileges 
could only be attained through Christ : that the early promul- 
gators of the Christian religion were constrained to turn all 
men to Christ. " We preach not ourselves, but Christ Jesus 
the Lord ; and ourselves your servants for Jesus' sake," was 
the apostle Paul's declaration to the primitive believers, on 
behalf of himself and fellow-labourers : but he himself had a 
more special and divinely authorized commission, communi- 



378 CHAPTER XXIII. [1835. 

cated immediately by the voice of that Saviour, whom he had 
so long and cruelly persecuted, wherever His appearance could 
be found : it was stamped with a double seal, for a two-fold 
purpose, as a minister and a witness of those things which he 
had seen, and of things which were hereafter to be shown to 
him ; in which his Lord would appear unto him, to open the 
eyes of mankind, to turn men from darkness to light, and 
from the power of Satan unto God. That Christ was the 
Light, the true Light, that lighteth every man that cometh 
into the world ; unto whom all mankind must be turned, and 
must come, if they are saved, &c. &c. It was a highly 
favoured, solemn meeting, and owned by the great Master of 
assemblies ; whose power reigned gloriously amongst us, causing 
thanksgiving and praise in many hearts. 

7th. — Walked in the evening to George BicknelFs, and had 
an opportunity of seeing the master of the Olivia schooner of 
Boston, lately arrived from the Paumotu islands. He seemed 
in the last stage of consumption, was unwell when he left 
home, and has been exposed to great hardship amongst those 
islands. His complaint has been much increased and aggra- 
vated by having long to subsist on fish and cocoa-nuts. He 
appeared glad to see me ; and after sitting awhile by the bed- 
side, I began to advert to his appalling situation, winding 
gradually on as matter opened. On saying it was little matter 
how soon we leave this world of trouble, if we are but prepared 
for the event ; he said, ' I am not prepared, and cannot prepare 
myself.'' I told him I was even rejoiced to find he was thus 
sensible of his own inability and weakness, because it was a 
conscious feeling of the want and necessity of the Saviour's help. 
I endeavoured to turn his mind to the dear Redeemer ; but he 
said, ' the time was too short to expect to accomplish the great 
work,' and spoke as if it had been too long deferred. I 
reminded him that the invitation was extended even as late 
as the eleventh hour ; and then mentioned the thief upon 
the cross, with the words, " To-day shalt thou be with me 
in Paradise." He seemed a little encouraged before we 
parted. I was afraid of staying too long, and of causing too 
much excitement, but a prayer ascended in secret for him 



1835.] CHAPTER XXIII. 879 

both then and since. When about to leave, he expressed a 
wish for me to come again, and I hope to comply with it. I 
•was comforted in finding he had got into a place where he 
would want for nothing, and be well attended to. I consider 
it an act of true Christian benevolence in George Bicknell, 
with his large family, to take in, without solicitation, this poor, 
exhausted, sick stranger ; and cheerfully to administer to all 
his wants, without any prospect of remuneration. 

8th. — Busily employed on board, closing our letters for 
England, to be despatched this day by the Active, for Panama. 
Got some exercise on shore in the evening. It has occurred to 
me, since the last meeting held on board the Charles Carroll, 
that the chapel on shore would be the next place for me to be 
in ; although I mentioned it to no one, desiring to see the way 
clearly open, before any steps were taken. 

Charles Pittman came on board yesterday : and in the 
course of conversation said, that it had been thought whether 
I would not come on shore the next sabbath-day, to have 
a meeting ; and that he himself was desirous that some 
arrangement should be made, in which he expressed a willing- 
ness to assist. I told him it was yet uncertain, but that I 
intended calling at George Pritchard's house in the evening. 
On arriving there, I found Charles Pittman under the veran- 
dah, talking to a sailor, who had belonged to the Charles 
Carroll, and had then come to have some conversation on the 
subject of religion. It appeared that this young man had been 
reached, at the last meeting held on board that ship, and was 
desirous of help and advice. He found it very hard work to 
stand against the strong current of evil, to which he was exposed 
on ship-board, amongst a rude and wicked company, who con- 
tinually annoyed him in one way or other. He was encouraged 
to watchfulness, and to perseverance in resisting every tempta- 
tion ; and if faithful, he would doubtless overcome them all, 
through the strength of Him, who for our sakes " endured 
such contradiction of sinners against himself. 11 Whilst at 
George Pritchard 1 s, I inquired whether any missionary was 
expected, or whether any meeting would be held there to- 
morrow, which was replied to in the negative. I said that I 



380 chapteh xxin. [1835. 

felt a little difficulty about their meeting-house, as it belonged 
to the people on shore, and they might be disappointed at not 
finding one of 'their own ministers there; and I could not answer, 
if I attended the meeting, but that it might be a silent one, 
which to some would be a disappointment ; but Eliza Pritchard 
said, they know very well ; I suppose she meant, the manner 
in which the meetings of Friends are usually held. Having 
believed it right for me to hold a meeting there, previously to 
leaving the ship, what had passed served only to show that the 
way was open before me ; and going out, I said, — ' Then I think 
we must venture to give notice to the shipping, that a meeting 
will be held at eleven o'clock to-morrow forenoon.' As we 
returned on board, some information of the intended meeting 
was given by ourselves, and our captain engaged at once to 
invite the crews of the shipping generally, and to spread the 
information more widely on the shore. 

Eighth Month 9th. (First day.) — At the time appointed, re- 
paired to the shore, landing at George Pritchard's, whose family 
with Charles Pittman and wife accompanied us to the meeting. 
The attendance was much larger than at any time before. The 
baron, his wife, and the Pole, appeared amongst others. We 
sat long in silence ; when I stood up, with — ' It was never said 
to the wrestling seed of Jacob, seek ye my face in vain ; " for 
the sighing of the needy now will I arise, saith the Lord." Let 
us remember the example of Jacob, who wrestled for the 
blessing until the break of day, although the angel said, " Let 
me go, for the day breaketh ;" but the patriarch refused to 
grant the request, saying, " I will not let thee go, except thou 
bless me." The result of his faithful perseverance was, that 
his name should be no longer Jacob, but that he should be 
called Israel ; for, said the angel, " as a prince hast thou power 
with God and with men and hast prevailed." After urging 
upon all present, the necessity of our wrestling for the blessing 
this morning, that so we might be numbered amongst the 
princes of Israel, and like him prevail, &c, with some further 
addition, I sat down. The meeting then settled down in quiet- 
ness, and remained long under a solemn feeling ; when 1 had 
again to stand up and declare the blessedness of those who trust 



1835.] CHAPTER XXIII. 381 

in Mount Zion, the city which the Lord hath founded, which 
can never be moved ; whose children are joyful in their King ; 
because poor in spirit, to whom the gospel was preached, and 
is still preached : these are filled with good things ; but the 
rich and the full are sent empty away. It is the poor of the 
Lord's people — the poor in spirit, whose provision will ever be 
abundantly blessed. Yea, they shall be satisfied, — and no 
wonder, when made to partake of that bread which cometh 
down from heaven, — whosoever eateth thereof shall live for 
ever ; for this soul-sustaining bread is Christ, who said, " I am 
the bread of life : he that cometh to me shall never hunger, and 
he that believeth on me shall never thirst/' There is nothing 
in this perishing world to be desired, or worth hungering or 
thirsting after, by those who have tasted of this true and living 
bread that cometh down from heaven. Who would not desire 
to be a citizen of that city which hath foundations, whose maker 
and builder the Lord is \ — this Sion, which he hath founded 
for the poor of his people. There is no other way to accom- 
plish this, but that of doing the will of G-od, and not our own, 
through Christ Jesus, by the help of his Holy Spirit in our 
hearts, &c. I was largely opened to declare many great and 
heavenly truths to these people for about an hour, under a 
weighty feeling of a power to myself irresistible ; all seemed 
brought down and laid low under its dominion, and the pillars 
of my frail tabernacle were shaken. I had to rise a third time 
to say, that if words would avail any thing, I was willing to 
spend and be spent amongst them ; for I had been poured out 
as water for their sake, &c. — turning their attention to the 
Word nigh in the heart and in the mouth, of which the 
apostle spoke ; — commending them to God, and to the word of 
his grace, &c. Returned on board after the meeting. In the 
afternoon read portions of Scripture to our own crew, who had 
been on shore to the meeting in the morning. 

l^th. — Yesterday afternoon, Charles being too feeble to go 
on shore for exercise, I took with me a native boy, and went 
on shore. This boy was born at the Paumotu Islands, and 
had been very useful to us for several w r eeks, and ready on all 
occasions to plunge into the sea, or to bring down the cocoa-nut 



382 CHAPTER XXIII. [1835. 

from its lofty tree ; and never more delighted than when per- 
mitted to accompany us on excursions for exercise, or to search 
for shells among the coral reefs. 

Eighth Month 27th. — For several days past but little has tran- 
spired to vary the customary routine of duties. As regards my- 
self, I have not been able to discern any particular line of service 
called for at my hands ; and hope to be preserved watching and 
waiting as at the posts of wisdom's gate. Vain, indeed, would 
be an attempt to move forward, while the cloud thus, as it were, 
rests upon the tabernacle. In the afternoon went to Taunoa. to 
visit the American captain, who is not expecting to survive many 
days. Here is an affecting and mournful instance of the great 
business of life being neglected or little thought of, until brought 
upon the bed of death. The Olivia, of which vessel he is part 
owner, sailed yesterday, and I thought he would now have nothing 
left relating to worldly matters to harass him, which induced me 
to make the present visit. I humbly trust, yea, I pray, that this 
poor dear man may yet so bow in humble resignation to the 
name and power of Jesus, and from heart-felt conviction confess 
that He is Lord, to the glory of God the Father, as to obtain 
the salvation of his own soul. For, though he is now bowing, 
under heavy judgment, to this power, great is my desire, that 
he may yet bow to it under a sense of the Lord's everlasting 
mercy, and forgiveness ; for mercy still covers the judgment 
seat, even to a hair's breadth : with God all things are possible 
to them that believe. 

Ninth Month 10th. — I told the captain yesterday evening, 
that I did not see any thing to prevent our sailing this morning 
for Eimeo. At an early hour the pilot came on board, when 
the vessel was unmoored ; and there being a light breeze off 
the land, the last anchor was weighed. We were towed out 
of the bay by a boat kindly sent by Captain Davies, of the 
ship Balance of Bristol, Rhode Island. Just as the anchor 
was weighed, a man came from the shore with a packet 
containing letters, the Yearly Meeting's Epistle, &c, from 
England, which had been brought by an English whaler, to the 
Marquesas Islands, from which George Pritchard had arrived 
in the night. We could not but admire how exactly we had 



1835-] CHAPTER XXIII. 383 

been cared for, in being permitted to receive accounts from our 
beloved family at Petersburg, contained in four letters ; which, 
though old dated, were truly acceptable, with letters also from 
some of our dear friends. Having discharged the pilot, cleared 
the reefs, and begun to stretch away from the island, the de- 
lightful employment of reading our letters commenced. While 
sitting on deck, the vessel made a formidable pitch, which occa- 
sioned a loud and sudden crash, as in a moment. It was soon 
ascertained that our mizen-mast was gone by the board, and 
had fallen over the very centre of the stern. Not only the man 
at the helm escaped unhurt, but every other person on board ; 
and nothing short of an Almighty, all-merciful, and all super- 
intending Providence could possibly have screened and sheltered 
us from every harm. My Charles had been sitting for some 
time quite near the mast, but had removed just before from 
the place of danger. Our captain immediately represented the 
vessel as so crippled, that she would not stay, or tack, and 
wished to know whether I thought of proceeding, or of endea- 
vouring to return to the bay of Papeete, which we had just left. 
I paused for a moment, and then signified that we might safely 
proceed, although at the time it was nearly calm, and a heavy 
tumbling sea heaving around us. In a few minutes, however, 
the regular trade-wind sprung up, with a fresh gale in our 
favour, which in a few hours drove us to the desired haven of 
Talloo ; into which the Henry Freeling worked as well as could 
be desired, notwithstanding she had lost one of her wings ; but 
it became dark before she reached the proper anchorage. The 
wreck of the mast, rigging, sails, &c, were all cleared away, and 
got on board, before the strength of the trade-wind set upon 
us, and before the sea had time to rise under it, which soon 
afterwards became unusually heavy. The great superiority of 
a small vessel over a large one was fairly proved to-day, as we 
were beating through a channel beset with coral reefs, in a 
masterly manner, our pilot frequently cried out ' Maitai, 
Maitai f 'good, 1 'good P to denote his approbation ; and would 
occasionally say, in tolerable English, ' She works well.' He 
told us. that one of the American ships now here, beat about 
for five days in the same place, and was towed in at last by six 



384 chapter xxnr. [1835. 

boats, when the wind died away. We just looked into the 
harbour, as we passed, where Cook had formerly anchored, but 
it is more exposed to the heavy seas, which some particular 
winds occasion at times on the coast. 

llth. — Talloo Harbour. Island of Moorea, or Eimeo. — This 
morning sent on board the American ships, for assistance to 
repair the damage recently sustained in the loss of our mast. 
We were soon visited by the captains of those two vessels, who 
brought their carpenters along with them. It appeared that 
the dry rot, even with the deck, had been the cause of the 
accident. On examination, it was concluded best to make the 
same mast do again, which could be accomplished by making 
a tongue below the deck, and securing it with strong iron 
bands, which would only reduce its original height five feet. 
Though this reduction will not improve the look of the vessel, 
in other respects, it may be considered a decided advantage. 
In the afternoon we landed, and for the first time visited the 
school, — the residence of Alexander Simpson, his wife, and their 
little daughter. The children, about twenty-two in number, 
were at play upon the grass-plots in front of the house, which 
gave the place quite an air of English comfort :* this ground is 
fenced in with strong stone walls. We did not purpose 
stopping long, not being acquainted with the safest landing- 
places, nor sufficiently so with the road from Alexander Simp- 
son's, to find our way back to the boat in the dark. 

In one of our letters recently arrived from England, was 
found a copy of a short account drawn up at Shoosharry in 
Russia, by my beloved children, of that illness which deprived 
them of their sainted mother, intended to have a place in the 
Annual Monitor for 1835.-f- The perusal of this document 
brought afresh to my recollection the days of distress and 
affliction, which my endeared family had to pass through in 
the loss of their precious parent, when already almost father- 
less, from my having previously left home, to pursue the path 
of apprehended duty in the South Seas : a wound so deep, 
and but slightly healed,that it can never be forgotten when 

* This is an establishment for the children of missionaries, 
t See Appendix C. 



183.T.] CHAPTER XXIII. 38.5 

touched. But, I believe, that bitterness and anguish of soul is not 
offensive, when not accompanied with repining at the will and 
pleasure of my gracious and compassionate Lord ; who when 
passing through the straits and difficulties of humanity, wept in 
love divine at thf tomb of Lazarus. His compassions fail not ; 
neither is the greatness of His faithfulness to a poor frail mortal 
one particle diminished ; who, in the depth of affliction and 
anguish, still endeavours to breathe in humble resignation and 
sincerity, the language of " thy will be done." 

IZth. — This morning the natives began to visit our vessel, 
but only few in number. One man brought a hog, but seemed 
rather shy at first : taking but little notice of him soon 
brought him to reasonable terms. Having been paid for the 
hog, he went away ; but he soon returned with bananas, guavas, 
ninitas, Sec, in ample quantity, demanding for the whole, 
forty small sized clasp nails, which were given him with a 
little addition. When the heat of the sun lessened, we went 
on shore and drank tea at the school with all the children. 
When about to return on board, Alexander Simpson asked me 
if I would favour them with a few words to-morrow ; meaning 
the sailors that might come on shore, the few white residents, 
and the school family. I said that I thought of being at the 
native meeting at nine o'clock, to which there was no objection ; 
but he still urged my speaking to the English, after the native 
meeting was over. I told him I could not answer for that, even 
if there, as I had nothing, and was nothing ; I said I intended 
to come in time for the native congregation, and then asked, if 
he would interpret for me, to which he at once assented. Thus 
my way is open and provided for upon this island, if it please 
my heavenly Father to qualify me for the work, and open my 
lips ; that in the ability which He alone giveth, I may show forth 
His praise, and cause the thanksgiving of many to redound to 
His glory : for truly without Him we can do nothing as it 
should be done. 

13th. (First-day.) — Although we landed apparently in 
ample time, we found Alexander Simpson's house shut up, and 
the family gone to meeting ; and when we reached the place of 
worship, the singing had already commenced. We remained at 

2 c 



386 CHAPTER XXIII. [1835. 

the door until this was finished, then went in and sat down on 
a form. When the Tahitian exercises were all gone through, 
Alexander Simpson began reading my certificates ; when these 
were finished, I went and stood by his side, to be ready ; and 
when all was gathered into stillness, alluding to what they had 
heard read, I said, — they were now aware that I had left all that 
was near and dear to me on earth, to visit them ; that I had 
sailed over the trackless ocean, during many moons for this 
purpose, in order that I might be found standing in the counsel 
of that most holy will, which is ever excellent ; and that the 
desire of my heart was, that the gospel might not be to them 
an empty sound, or a mere outward declaration of good things, 
but that they might believe, repent, and obey it ; and that it 
might be to them indeed " the power of God unto salvation." 
As I proceeded, I was strengthened as by " the mighty God of 
Jacob," by the extension of that love which enlargeth the 
heart, to declare to the people the unsearchable riches of Christ, 
and the necessity of their coming to the knowledge of Him 
in whom they believed, by the Holy Spirit : that nothing 
short of their being born again, not of corruptible seed, but of 
incorruptible, by this Word of God, which liveth and abideth 
for ever, could make them members of His church, which 
is without spot, or wrinkle, or any such thing. That, unless 
they came to hear the voice of the true Shepherd, and know it 
for themselves, they could never be His sheep, nor be known of 
Him. " My sheep hear my voice," said Christ : — " I know 
them, and they follow me ; and I give unto them eternal life ; 
and they shall never perish, neither shall any man pluck them 
out of my hand. My Father, which gave them me, is greater 
than all ; and no man is able to pluck them out of my Father's 
hand;" — turning their attention more and more to the Holy 
Spirit of the Lord Jesus, that great shepherd of the sheep, 
whose light shineth in every heart ; that so they might come to 
sit under His teaching, and know the voice of the only true 
teacher of His people, who speaketh in righteousness, and is 
mighty to save His people from their sins, but never in them ; — 
appealing to the islanders, if they had not heard his voice in 
their own hearts, reproving them when they had committed 



1835.] CHAPTER XXIII. 387 

evil, &c. That they must be willing to hear it and obey it, and 
to bear the indignation of it for sin and for transgression ; until 
their cause was pleaded, and judgment executed, and them- 
selves brought forth to the light, the light of Christ Jesus, — 
" the true light which lighteth every man that cometh into the 
world," in the secret of the heart ; — the Holy Spirit of Him that 
speaketh in righteousness, mighty to save : that they might 
know Him experimentally to be the "Lamb of God that taketh 
away the sin of the world," from having witnessed their sins 
and transgressions to be washed white in his blood, and 
remembered no more, &c. &c. 

The people were very attentive in the general ; and although 
the house is large, and was more filled than usual by natives 
from distant parts of the island, and others from Tahiti, I felt 
as if I could penetrate its most distant crevices with compara- 
tive ease.* There might be twelve hundred persons present. 
A boat was waiting to convey us on board ; but after having 
passed through the ceremony of shaking hands with a whole- 
sale number, on retiring to the school, I did not feel altogether 
clear of the people ; so concluded to send off the boat, and 
remained on shore to attend the afternoon meeting. 

The meeting gathered again at three o'clock, and was well 
attended, though somewhat smaller than in the morning. An 
opportunity was afforded at this meeting for us to witness the 
ceremony of baptizing a new convert, who had applied for 
admittance into the church as a member. A child was also 
baptized, the offspring, it was said, of one believing parent, the 
mother being then present. When the proper moment seemed 
come, I placed myself by the side of Alexander Simpson ; and 
when all was quiet, I began to inform the people, that a fear of 
not being clear of the blood of my fellow-creatures had induced 
me again to stand before them ; but it was in that love, which 
would gather all mankind into the heavenly garner of rest and 
peace ; testifying the endless duration of the LoixTs mercy, and 
the unbounded extension of his love to all, by sending his only 
begotten Son into the world, that " whosoever believeth in 
him should not perish, but have eternal life. 1 ' My mouth was 

* It is an octagonal stone building, with lofts running entirely round it. 

2c 2 



388 CHAPTER XXIII. [1835. 

again opened to declare largely amongst the people the truths 
of the gospel, and in a pressing manner to urge the necessity 
of the hearts of the parents being more and more turned to 
their children, in order to bring them up in the fear of the 
Lord ; or else all the privileges and advantages which they had 
witnessed to result from the attempts to introduce Christianity 
amongst them, would in all probability be totally lost to their 
children, when their own heads were laid low. Without this care, 
things would soon be as bad as they had been formerly, when 
there was no place of safety nor of security upon the island ; 
when every man's hand was against his brother, and the way 
of peace unknown. I had much to say to them of an arousing, 
encouraging, and warning nature and tendency, with the same 
undiminished strength as had been vouchsafed me in the morn- 
ing, — to the comfort, peace, and relief of my own mind, and 
I trust, with humble thankfulness, to my Maker's praise. 



1835.] CHAPTEK XXIV. 389 



CHAPTER XXIV. 



EIMEO MEETINGS WITH THE NATIVES A MARAI RETURN TO THE 

HENRY FREELING NATIVE MEETING AND WITH THE MISSION 

FAMILIES SAIL FOR HUAHINE PROHIBITION OF SPIRITS THERE 

SOCIAL MEETING OF THE AUTHORITIES DISTRIBUTION OF 

TRACTS SAIL FOR RAIATEA. 

Talloo Harbour, Island of Eimeo, Ninth Month 18^, 1835. — 
Called upon Alexander Simpson to consult about going to the 
other side of the island, to Afareaitu, of late called Griffin's 
Town ; but as he had a serious sore throat, it was not prudent 
for him to undertake the journey on the following day. I now 
perceived, that if I had not given up to attend the afternoon 
meeting at Papetoai last First day, when it opened upon my 
mind, that I must have waited a week longer for want of an 
interpreter, on account of Alexander Simpson's present indis- 
position. Truly it may be said, that the present moment is 
all we have to trust to, or depend upon ; the future may, to us, 
never come ; and time, once past, can never be recalled. Then 
may we be diligently seeking to improve the present, with 
thankfulness for being strengthened to yield obedience to every 
pointing of duty. 

19th. — Finding my attention turned to the children at the 
school, it seemed that to-morrow at eleven o'clock in the fore- 
noon, would be a suitable time to propose for our meeting- 
together, if no difficulty should appear. I accordingly men- 
tioned to Alexander Simpson and wife, that if it would not 
interfere with any of their arrangements, I thought of paying 
a visit to the children to-morrow morning, at eleven o'clock. 
They at once expressed satisfaction with the proposal, and 
said it would be very acceptable. I said, ' Then we will sit 
down together, and see what will be done for us.' 



390 CHAPTER XXIV. [1835. 

20th. (First day.) — Landed in the morning, so as to have 
ample time to walk to the school, and afford an interval suffi- 
ciently long to allow us to cool before going into the meeting, 
the weather being extremely hot. When the time came we 
assembled, as proposed, the children and the family, at the 
school. I fully expected that we should sit down in silence before 
the Lord : but when all were seated, it was proposed that the 
children should read a chapter, and the first chapter of the 
epistle to the Romans was read accordingly. The children 
were then examined, by questions respecting the moral law, 
and the object of our Saviour's coming upon earth. After 
these were gone through, we were favoured to get into silence. 
Having sat for some time, I found my mind getting deeper and 
deeper under exercise, until the time came for me to rise, with 
the words, " We, through the Spirit, wait for the hope of 
righteousness by faith." Sitting in silence may seem a little 
strange to those unaccustomed to the work ; but it has been the 
practice of the religious Society of which I have the privilege 
of being a member, from its earliest rise, to wait upon the 
Lord for the influence of the Holy Spirit ; to be taught by the 
great Teacher of his people, Christ Jesus, the minister of the 
sanctuary and of the true tabernacle, " which the Lord pitched 
and not man.'' 1 I had to tell them that there is no alteration 
in the Christian life ; it is a continual warfare, but with the 
spiritual weapons of burning and fuel of fire, which, if patiently 
submitted to, would purify and prepare us for an incorruptible 
and never-fading inheritance. The universality of Divine 
grace was freely spoken of, and the necessity of watchfulness 
and prayer urged with earnestness, even unto " praying always, 
with all prayer and supplication in the Spirit, and watching 
thereunto with all perseverance." The dear young people 
were tenderly invited to seek after that knowledge which is 
life eternal : to " commune with their own hearts and be still." 
I wanted them to witness the gospel to be glad tidings of 
great joy to themselves, not a mere outward declaration of 
good things to come, but " the power of God unto salvation," 
to every one of them. None could be insensible to the weight 
of solemnity which prevailed, and I had to acknowledge the 



1835.] CHAPTER XXIV. 391 

condescending mercy of that Almighty power, which was 
pleased to OAvn the work ; and also to appeal to those present as 
witnesses to the circulation of that " life," which is " the light 
of men." 

23rd. — With the exception of taking occasional exercise for 
the last three days, have been busily employed in preparing 
despatches for my beloved friends in England, information 
having been received that an English whaler, homeward bound, 
had arrived at Tahiti. On going on shore this evening, we 
found Alexander Simpson so much recruited, that it was con- 
cluded to set off to-morrow morning for the distant station of 
Afareaitu. 

24:th. — Eose early, and left the vessel at half-past six o'clock, 
in the Henry Freeling's long-boat, with a hired crew of natives. 
We took in Alexander Simpson opposite the settlement, at seven 
o'clock, and immediately proceeded towards Afareaitu. Some 
parts of this passage are hazardous, owing to immense masses 
of coral lying near the surface of the water, upon which boats 
are not unfrequently stove ; but by keeping a good look-out, 
we were favoured to pass through the whole of these places, 
which extend several miles, without touching with much 
violence upon any of the rugged cones. About three p. m., 
we reached Afareaitu, and were kindly received and entertained 
by Thomas Blossom and his wife, the former originally came 
out of Yorkshire, and with some of his connexions I was 
acquainted in England. He came out in the Tuscan several 
years ago with Tyerman and Bennet, as an artisan belonging 
to the mission. 

25th. — The bell for the sun-rise worship rung early, and 
when the people were collected, we went to the meeting. At 
a suitable opportunity my certificates were read by Alexander 
Simpson ; after which I had a full opportunity to clear my mind 
amongst these people : and although I had had nearly a sleep- 
less night, and felt in the morning sunk both in body and mind, 
below the usual level of depression in such cases, yet my Lord 
was to me in truth, strength in weakness, riches in poverty, 
and a present helper in the needful time ; and I had largely 
to declare of his love, of his mercy, and of his Truth ; and 



S92 CHAPTER XXIV. [1835. 

to show forth his salvation to the people, as it is wrought 
in the heart through faith in the operation of the Holy Spirit. 
I had also close things to say amongst them, and to show 
them the dreadful consequences of drawing down the Divine 
wrath, if their return for his love and mercy was only neglect, 
disobedience, and rebellion against his heavenly and righteous 
invitation, so largely extended towards them : and to point out 
the snare which had been laid by the great enemy, in the 
introduction of spirituous liquors amongst them, and how they 
had fallen under the temptation, from which, if they had obeyed 
the gospel, they would have been preserved. 

Notwithstanding a messenger had been sent beforehand to 
invite the inhabitants of Matea, a distant village, said to be 
more populous than Afareaitu, yet I think it was reported that 
none had made their appearance at the meeting. On consider- 
ing the subject, I thought that although they would not be at 
the trouble of coming to me, I should not fully discharge my 
duty without going to them. This circumstance seemed likely 
to bring upon us the sacrifice of another night's absence from 
Papetoai, which is by no means desirable on several accounts ; 
yet I felt resigned to give up every selfish consideration, if I 
should only be found in the path of duty. It was at last con- 
cluded for us to proceed to Matea, about a league along the 
coast, but in a direction that our boat's crew did not approve, 
as they hoped we should have returned to Papetoai by a route 
several miles shorter, which may sometimes be taken with 
safety when the wind and weather are favourable. We got 
ready immediately, and set out, taking with us Thomas Blossom 
and wife, their little boy, and a daughter of George BicknelFs 
of Taunoa on the island of Tahiti, about ten years of age ; 
they intending to walk home again in the cool of the 
evening. Having reached Matea we landed, and soon met 
with the principal chief: some rather shuffling excuses were 
made on behalf of the people for not attending the meeting in 
the morning at Afareaitu ; and upon being asked where the 
people were then, he first said, in the mountains, procuring 
food for the queen of Tahiti, who we knew had arrived at 
Papetoai : but when he found there was a disposition in us to 



1835.] CHAPTER XXIV. 393 

go into the meeting-house and sit down, there being no seats 
in the house where we then were, he began to alter his tone. 
Whether he thought we intended to wait for the people, or from 
what other cause, I am not aware, unless he supposed the false- 
hood would afterwards be detected, but he then said, the people 
were all in their huts, and he would send round to them to 
meet us forthwith. They assembled in as short a time as could 
be expected, and when well settled, my certificates were read 
by Alexander Simpson ; who, when he had finished, and given 
ample information respecting me to the people, said, turning to 
me, ' If you have any thing to say to them, I am ready to 
interpret.' I drew towards him, and just stated that I hoped 
to have seen them in the morning at Afareaitu : but although 
this had not been the case, I was not willing to pass them by. 
I then told them, that I had brought nothing with me, and 
had neither store-house nor barn, but that whatever my great 
Master might be pleased to give me to speak, I hoped to do it 
faithfully amongst them. From this I went on step by step, 
until my heart was so enlarged, and my tongue loosed, that I 
declared the Truth amongst them for the space of an hour. I 
have since been comforted in believing, that although many slept 
at the time, yet there were many awake, unto whom my message 
belonged ; and whose countenances bespoke that they were not 
only awake, but awakened to a sense (I humbly trust) of their 
situation; — that they had a soul to be saved, and that "no man 
can save his brother, or give to God a ransom for his soul." 
When I sat down, I thought I was clear, but had to rise again 
in a while, and tell them, under its contriting influence, that I 
had felt the love of God since I sat down, to fill my heart ; and 
that I never knew an instance, where a message had been sent 
to any people, but that the love of God was still extended 
towards them ; adding, that I was not about to multiply 
words, but merely to express a desire that the Lord might 
direct their hearts into this love, and into the patient waiting 
for Christ. 

The wind was against us, and the boat's crew very sulky at 
their disappointment in not going the shortest way back, as 
they wanted, supposing they should have had less work in 



394 CHAPTER XXIV. [1835. 

rowing if they had taken that course. Presently the breeze 
died away, and I made signs to them that we should soon have 
a favourable wind, but one of them said, ' No,' in an unpleasant 
tone. In a short time, the breeze sprung up fair for the boat, 
when they became more cheerful, and before we had got many 
miles farther, they said, it was well for them to go with these 
strangers, for they had brought a fair wind with them. They 
then remembered, that we had a favourable wind the preceding 
day when going in the opposite direction, which is regularly 
calculated upon ; but that we should have it fair again to-dav 
was much more remarkable, because directly opposite the point 
from which the trade-winds almost uniformly blow. We were 
favoured to get through the most intricate and dangerous 
parts before it became quite dark, although we several times 
touched upon the reef : after landing Alexander Simpson at 
the settlement, we reached the vessel in safety, and I believe 
with thankful hearts, though from the lateness of the hour 
and darkness of the night, our return was not expected until 
the following morning. 

On the passage from Papetoai to Afareaitu, we landed to 
examine the remains of the largest Marai (Orua) in the South 
Seas, and not so much dilapidated as many of them. Much 
of the hewn stone work is yet to be seen ; and the upright 
stones are still remaining, placed in a position best adapted to 
accommodate the backs of the priests when praying, and from 
whence they could witness the sacrifices of the wretched human 
victims. 

Ninth Month 27th. (First day.) — This morning awoke early, 
and on endeavouring to ascertain what path I should have to 
move in, I found that the openings which had yesterday floated 
before the view of my mind, were now altogether out of sight ; 
so concluded that I must remain on board the Henry Freeling. 
Just as we were about to assemble together in the forenoon, 
was seen on the shore : a boat was immediately dis- 
patched for him, when it appeared that he was coming on 
board on purpose to sit with us. In the course of the time of 
our being together, my mind was brought under exercise, and 
I had a short and encouraging testimony to bear to the faith- 



1835] CHAPTER XXIV. 395 

fulness of our gracious Lord ; standing up with words to the 
following effect: — although our company is small, and in a 
remote corner of the globe, yet we have the word of a King 
for it, even the " King of saints," that " where two or three 
are gathered together in his name, (in His power,) there He is 
in the midst of them." But it is only such as are gathered 
under a sense of this constraining power and with sincerity of 
desire, who will be benefited. " The race is not to the swift, 
nor the battle to the strong." " Not by might, nor by power, 
but by my Spirit, saith the Lord of Hosts." " Let not your heart 
be troubled, neither let it be afraid ; ye believe in God, believe 
also in me," — was the language of the Saviour to his disciples 
formerly ; and I trust, there are none among us but who believe 
in God and in his Son Jesus Christ. Then let us be willing to 
believe in the Holy Spirit of Christ Jesus. Let us believe his 
words — " It is expedient for you that 1 go away ; for if I go 
not away, the Comforter will not come unto you : I will pray 
the Father, and He shall give you another Comforter, that he 

may abide with you for ever, — even the Spirit of Truth; 

He will guide you into all truth." There is nothing like an 
interest in the Master of the storm ; if we have Him on board 
with us, though in the hinder part of the ship, asleep on a 
pillow, it is enough ; for nothing then can harm us. In an 
earthly race, although many may run, but one obtaineth the 
prize, and that but a corruptible, perishing crown ; but in the 
heavenly race it is not so, for all may run, and all may win a 
crown incorruptible, that will endure, — a prize immortal. "Then 
let us lay aside every weight, and the sin which doth so easily 
beset us, and let us run with patience the race that is set before 
us ; looking unto Jesus, the author and finisher of our faith : 
who for the joy that was set before Him, endured the cross, 
despising the shame, and is set down at the right hand of the 
throne of God ;" where he ever liveth to make intercession for 
those who are willing to come unto God by him. Even so run 
that ye may obtain ! Whilst we continued in silence after I 
had sat down, I believed it required of me to attend the native 
place of worship at three o'clock in the afternoon. 

Before two o'clock, Charles and myself landed, and reached 



396 CHAPTER XXIV. [1835. 

the school just as the children were moving off in train towards 
the meeting. The school principally consists of the children 
and grand-children of the missionaries. We followed, pre- 
viously telling Alexander Simpson, that if I should have any 
thing to say, when he came down from the pulpit, I would 
come and stand by his side. I found that I had a heavy 
burden to throw off; but my trust was in the Lord Jehovah, 
in whom alone is everlasting strength. I sat while they were 
proceeding with the regular service, in much conflict of mind; 
but as has often if not always been the case, casting a thought 
towards my dear brethren and sisters in England, as if they 
were in degree sensible of my situation : and I cannot help 
thinking that such is the precious unity in spirit of the faithful, 
that petitions are constantly ascending from one or other, as 
a lamp that burnetii and never goeth out, to the throne of the 
Majesty on high, on behalf of a poor weak brother, separated 
as an outcast, almost as far from them as the east is from the 
west. For, however distant from each other the members of 
the mystical body may be placed, nothing can separate them 
from the love of God, as it is in Christ Jesus, their crucified, 
risen, and glorified Lord : and therefore, if one member suffer, 
all the members suffer ; if one member be honoured, all the 
members rejoice in heavenly sympathy and joy, in which a 
stranger cannot intermeddle. When Alexander Simpson came 
down from the pulpit, I went and stood by him ; and shortly 
after he had prepared my way, by telling the people to be still, 
I said, — " Verily there is a reward for the righteous : Verily He 
is a God that judgeth in the earth." — " Righteousness exalteth 
a nation, but sin is a reproach to any people." — " The work of 
righteousness shall be peace ; and the effect of righteousness, 
quietness, and assurance for ever." ' I was not aware that my 
voice would be heard any more among you, but my Lord and 
Master hath put it into my heart to stand before you once 
again. As what I speak must be in faithfulness before my 
God, so I must be honest, and deal plainly with you. I am 
come to warn you to flee from the wrath to come ; and to show 
you a snare which the grand enemy, both to God and to man, 
that old serpent the devil, has prepared for you : he has tried 



LS35-] CHAPTER XXIV. 397 

it before, and found it to answer. It is that of throwing 
strong drink or spirituous liquors in your way. You have 
it in your power to resist the temptation ; for no temptation 
will be permitted to assail us without a way being made for 
our escape. Then " draw nigh to God, and He will draw 
nigh to you : resist the devil and he will flee from you." The 
scene of riot and confusion has already begun upon the sister 
island, Tahiti, and the poison will soon reach to this island : 
if you do not resist it, your destruction will be of yourselves. 
If those in authority do not know it, they ought to know it ; 
and if the authorities do know it, and with those under them in 
power, are conniving at it or winking at it, or deriving emolu- 
ment from it, most assuredly the Lord will punish these : He 
will visit for these things. " Shall I not visit for these things, 
shall not my soul be avenged on such a nation as this V was 
the language of the Lord through his faithful prophet to a 
rebellious people formerly. Yea, He will sweep them from 
the face of the earth as with the besom of destruction. 
Nothing is so calculated to destroy the happiness of the people 
as this curse of the human race, and to aggravate that awful 
disease which is now rapidly depopulating these islands. If 
you do not set shoulder to shoulder in resisting this evil, 
what will you do when the wrath of the Lord is appearing I 
" He will laugh at your calamity, and mock when your fear 
cometh;" and the denunciation of the prophet against a people 
that had revolted, and forsaken the Lord their God, will be 
applicable unto you : " Hast thou not procured this unto 
thyself, in that thou hast forsaken the Lord thy God when 
he led thee by the way ? And now what hast thou to do in 
the way of Egypt," in following the fashions and follies, and 
vanities of this world, and in drinking the dark and polluted 
" waters of Sihor," &c. — " Thine own wickedness shall correct 
thee, — thy backslidings shall reprove thee : know therefore, 
and see, that it is an evil thing and bitter, that thou hast for- 
saken the Lord thy God, and that my fear is not in thee, saith 
the Lord of Hosts." Come, then, my beloved people, in the 
fear, and in the dread, and in the love, of the Lord Jehovah I 
warn you, — your only refuge is in Jesus : then turn inward, to 



398 CHAPTER XXIV. [1835. 

his Holy Spirit in your hearts, to " Christ in you the hope of 
glory ;"" submit yourselves to Him as little children, and He 
will leaven all in you into his own pure and heavenly nature, 
and prepare you for a kingdom " consisting not in meats and 
drinks, but in righteousness and peace, and joy in the Holy 
Ghost :" a kingdom into which it is declared that nothing that 
is unclean or impure, nothing that worketh an abomination, 
or that maketh a lie, must ever enter : there, the wicked 
cease from troubling, there, the weary are at rest ; there, the 
morning stars sing together ; there, the sons of God shout an 
endless anthem ; there, all is love and joy, and peace, and that 
for evermore. 1 

t\ Several of the people went out when strong drink was men- 
tioned, but the queen and her party, with all the principal 
authorities and judges from Tahiti, as well as those of this 
island, were present, and remained to the last. Alexander 
Simpson told the people that they must not consider me their 
enemy, for it was in pure love that I had spoken to them : 
and after he had put up a prayer on the occasion, he dismissed 
the assembly. Only one man and one woman ventured to shake 
hands with me. I told A. S. that I had placed him in an 
awkward situation, but the truth must be spoken : it was not 
a time to withhold it. He expressed his satisfaction at what 
had been done, and said it was much better for it to come from 
a stranger. I certainly did not know that so many of the 
authorities were present from Tahiti. I was aware that 
Pomare V. was in the neighbourhood ; but though in the 
meeting, I did not see her, of know she was there. I was 
afterwards informed, that Paofai, one of the principal chiefs, 
was desirous to have spoken to me in the meeting by way of 
reply, but was deterred through fear of giving offence. When 
the meeting broke up he attempted to get to me, but could not 
succeed for the crowd of people. He told Alexander Simpson, 
my informant, that he wished, in reply to my testimony borne 
in the meeting, to have said, on behalf of the natives of these 
islands and himself, that " he hoped I would go to Britain, 
and beg the people to have mercy on them ; and then go to 
America, and beg the people there also to have mercy on 



1835.] CHAPTER XXIV. 399 

them ; because it was these countries that sent the poison 
amongst them." A fact not less true than lamentable. 

Tenth Month 3rd, 1835. — Nothing suitable for recording, of 
a religious nature, has occurred since last First-day. In the 
course of the past week our stock of wood and water has been 
completed, but it is very difficult to procure a supply of vege- 
tables, owing to Pomare and her numerous attendants remain- 
ing so long upon this island ; and we are told they will not 
depart until they have consumed all the food in the neigh- 
bourhood. 

8th. — From the 4th instant employed chiefly in preparing 
letters for England. In the forenoon to-day, Charles and my- 
self sat down together as usual. Much oppressed with heat 
and heaviness in the forepart of our sitting. Towards the end 
more lively, and strengthened to maintain the watch, even unto 
prayer at times. Had close conversation with the heads of a 
family, where we afterwards drank tea. 

10th. — My mind for the last two or three days has been 
looking towards fixing a time for sailing for Huahine, but 
nothing could be clearly discovered. While on shore yesterday, 
spent some time at the school. To-day another opportunity 
with the children and family at that institution has come much 
before me, to take place to-morrow after the native meeting is 
over in the forenoon. After closing in with this prospect, the 
time appeared come for me to tell our captain, that if the deck 
of the vessel were all ready, and the spars secured in the course 
of the day, there would be no difficulty in being ready for sea 
on Second-day ; which he readily admitted, and gave orders 
accordingly. 

11th. (First-day.) — Much rain fell during the night, but 
after day-break the clouds began to disperse, and the day became 
fine as it advanced. This being the case, I felt liberty to con- 
vene the two families aforesaid. We proceeded to the shore in 
good time, expecting to have to wait for the breaking up of the 
native meeting ; but we found, soon after landing, that the meet- 
ing was over, and Alexander Simpson had returned home. After 
sitting awhile, I told him, that we expected to leave the island 
to-morrow, and queried whether we could not sit down together 



400 CHAPTER XXIV. [1885. 

once more, to which he readily assented. We then settled 
down into comfortable and silent waiting : at length the time 
came for me to stand up, though under a sense of much weak- 
ness. After the silence was broken into with a short remark, 
I told them there might not be many words, but the desire of 
my heart was, that we might be sensible of the power which 
was before words were, and would remain when words shall be 
no more : for words shall cease, and declarations come to an 
end ; but the " word of our God shall stand for ever. ,, I had 
to urge the necessity of seeking to know for ourselves the 
Divine Will, and then to do it : that this was the great business 
of life, &c. But knowledge only makes our condemnation 
greater, without obedience keeps pace with it : and truly this 
knowledge can never be attained in the noise and bustle and 
mixture of this world ; nor while we are living in conformity 
therewith. Nor can we expect to be entrusted with such great 
knowledge as the will of God, whilst in a carnal, unrenewed 
state of mind, — according to the testimony of the apostle to the 
Romans, when beseeching his brethren, "by the mercies of 
God, to present their bodies a living sacrifice, holy, acceptable 
unto God, r> as " their reasonable service. 1 ' " And be not con- 
formed to this world," said he, " but be ye transformed by the 
renewing of your mind, that ye may prove what is that good, 
and acceptable, and perfect will of God." I had to declare the 
blessed state of the inhabitants of Mount Zion, where every 
one appeareth before God : they go from strength to strength. 
— God is in the midst of her ; she can never be moved :— He is 
known in her palaces for a refuge. The stream of gospel love 
flowed freely and largely to all present, and great was the 
solemnity that prevailed over us ; such was the condescending- 
mercy and loving -kindness of the Lord to his poor unworthy 
creatures. We then took leave of the whole, not expecting to 
visit them again ; and we returned on board to dinner, under 
feelings of gratitude and thankfulness, and in peaceful serenity 
of mind, not being conscious myself of having any further 
service to attend to in this island. 

12th. — The Henry Freeling being ready for sea, and the pilot 
coming off at an early hour, at five o'clock a.m. began to 



1835.] CHAPTER XXIV. 401 

weigh the anchor, and at half-past six o'clock she was safely 
outside of the reef. Having discharged the pilot, we hore up 
and made sail, with a fine fresh trade-wind, for the island of 
Huahine. At four o'clock, p. at., this island was discovered, 
but as some part of the land is very high, and may be seen 
many miles distant, it was considered impossible to reach it 
before dark ; on this account, it was judged most prudent to 
shorten our canvass, and haul to the wind in good time under 
easy sail during the darkness, with plenty of room to drift until 
the dawn of the morning. At day-break we edged away towards 
the island, and by keeping a good look-out from the mast-head, 
we were favoured to distinguish the outermost point of the pro- 
jecting reef, upon which the white foam of the breakers served 
as a beacon for us to steer by with safety. We beat safely 
through the narrowest part of the channel, and about eleven 
o'clock on the ISth instant we anchored in Fare Harbour, and 
moored with a chain-hawser made fast to a cocoa-nut tree upon 
the shore, there being thirteen fathoms of water close in with 
the strand. Two American ships left this neighbourhood yes- 
terday afternoon, one of them homeward bound: a sail had 
been seen by us the preceding evening before sun-down, pro- 
bably the homeward bound vessel. The Zone, Captain Russel, 
only remained in the harbour. 

Huahine. — Soon after anchoring in Fare Harbour, a well- 
dressed person came on board, as a constable, to prevent petty 
thefts and depredations being committed by the natives who came 
on board; but we did not consider such a person at all needful : 
and having never suffered any material inconvenience of the 
kind at the other islands, his attendance was declined ; I 
thought it would look like distrust on our part, and might 
have an unpleasant, if not injurious, effect upon the people. In 
the afternoon, Charles Barff the missionary, came on board ; 
he seemed very sociably inclined towards us, and disposed to 
render every assistance in his power, when I might feel inclined 
to see the people collected. He translated the queen of Tahiti's 
letter to two of the chiefs of the island of Huahine, then on 
board ; who appeared glad at having an opportunity afforded to 
take off the port charges, saying, they should be sorry to have 

2 d" 



402 CHAPTER XXIV. [1835. 

been worse thought of than the neighbouring islands. I told 
them it was a very trifling affair, but I thought it would not 
have been handsome treatment, if the option of choosing for them- 
selves had not been afforded. At midnight there were tremendous 
gusts of wind from the mountains, with heavy showers of rain. 
We were informed, that a short time ago some of the prin- 
cipal persons who had given away to the temptation of strong 
drink, were the first to come forward to propose that its use 
should be entirely abolished; which eventually was unanimously 
agreed to by the inhabitants. The. reason given for making 
this proposal, was the conviction, that it was taking away their 
lives. Captain Russel told us that there are no spirits to be 
found on shore. One part of his crew go daily for exercise, 
and return every evening in an orderly manner, which would 
not be the case if drink could be purchased. How I should 
rejoice to hear, that these islands are strengthened to stand firm 
against every thing of the kind being landed amongst them ; 
which might easily be effected, by supplies being withheld from 
any vessel attempting to trade with it. Every Christian 
government ought to come forward for the protection of these 
defenceless islanders, from every cruel outrage of such vessels 
as might attempt to enforce by arms the exchange of supplies, 
for rum, muskets and gunpowder. 

Tenth Month 18th. (First day.) — Last evening my certifi- 
cates in the Polynesian language were handed to Charles Barff, 
to read at the native meeting this morning, if nothing should 
prevent my attendance. May the Lord be pleased to exalt his 
ever excellent name, and magnify his power amongst us, until 
the blessed Truth shall rise into dominion, and reign over all, to 
his glory. After an anxious, restless night, in which little sleep 
could be obtained, we arose early, and went on shore in good 
time, to look into the children's school before the meeting took 
place. All our sailors accompanied us, leaving only the Spanish 
cook and the captain, to take care of the Henry Freeling. The 
meeting was large ; but the building would have accommodated 
a much larger assembly. The whole population is said to be, 
by a census lately taken, seventeen hundred and sixty persons, 
including every description ; but I cannot suppose that many 



1835.] CHAPTER XXIV. 4-03 

more than one thousand were present. I sat in much conflict 
of mind : it was a low time with me ; and when my certificates 
were read, and Charles Barff came down from his pulpit, there 
seemed little before me to stand up with ; but after the atten- 
tion of the people was attracted, and a general stillness prevailed 
throughout the assembly, I expressed a desire that " grace, 
mercy and peace might be multiplied,'''' &c, upon all the 
inhabitants of this island ; and then proceeded to declare, that 
for the sake of Christ and his gospel, I had been induced to 
leave all that is near and dear to me in this world, that " the 
fulness of its blessing"" might be theirs ; — desiring that they 
might not rest satisfied with making an empty profession of 
the religion of Jesus, but that they might come to the full 
possession of the Truth as it is in Him ; that so they 
might be washed, sanctified, and justified by His power, in 
His name, and by the Spirit of our God : that Christ 
might dwell in their hearts by faith; that they, "being 
rooted and grounded in love, might be able to comprehend 
with all saints, what is the length, and breadth, and depth, 
and height ;" and know for themselves, the " love of Christ, 
which passeth knowledge, and be filled with all the fulness of 
God ;"" and not be members of an outward and visible church 
only, but of the new Jerusalem church — the church triumphant 
of the first-born : regenerated and " born again, not of cor- 
ruptible seed, but of incorruptible, by the word of God, which 
liveth and abideth for ever."" I had to point out the 
inward purity of heart that must be attained, and is attain- 
able by all, through the precious blood of sprinkling, which 
cleanseth from all sin ; showing them, as ability was gra- 
ciously afforded, the gradual and progressive work and 
nature of their being turned from darkness to light, and from 
the power of Satan to the power of God in their own hearts ; 
earnestly appealing to them, if they had not at seasons wit- 
nessed the workings of this power, and the in-shinings of this 
light, that reproves for sin, and makes manifest every deed of 
darkness. When the meeting broke up, the people flocked 
round us to shake hands, with much apparent warmth and 
sincerity, of which we partook in a large degree. On partino- 

2 d 2 



404 CHAPTER XXIV. [1835. 

from Charles Barff, I told him, that if I was there in the after- 
noon, 1 would endeavour to be in time. We returned on board 
immediately. In the afternoon, saw no other way than that 
of going again to the native meeting, and went early on shore 
for that purpose. Before going into the meeting, I mentioned 
to Charles Barff, that if I found any thing on my mind to say 
to the people, I intended to come and stand by him, at a 
suitable time. During part of the meeting, it seemed as if I 
should have something to communicate, but this prospect 
eventually closed up altogether. When the meeting was about 
breaking up, I suspected that Charles Barff was telling the 
people to stop, taking it for granted that I should have some- 
thing to say, and catching his eye, I desired that he would not 
detain them on my account : he had then to tell them they 
might retire. I sat as a fool among them, though with a calm 
and peaceful mind. Some smiled ; others said, ' pom," 1 i.e. 'it 
is over, there is no more.' I felt however, quite satisfied 
through all, and I trust that my apparent folly will be a subject 
long remembered and wondered at by many, and lead some to 
inquire into the cause. 

22nd. — Early in the morning received a few lines from 
Charles Barff, accompanying a translated copy of a note, 
with the original, from Mauiui, our pilot through the reef, as 
follows : — 

' As 1 know not the names of you two gentlemen, I address 
you thus generally. 

' Dear Friends, — All peace to you after diving through the 
waves all the way to Tahiti. This is my little word, to which 
I desire you two to agree. Compassionate me, and come to 
my little dinner, about one or two of the day — a little friendly 
meeting. May you two be saved by Jehovah. 

' Mauiui.' 

An answer was returned to Charles Barff, that rather than 
disappoint the intended kindness of Mauiui, we purposed 
accepting the invitation. 

It being Fifth day, we sat down together to wait upon 
the Lord. As regards myself, I thought I was sensible of 
something like a renewal of strength to struggle against 



]835.] CHAPTER XXIV. 405 

the infirmities of the flesh, in drawing nigh to the everlast- 
ing fountain. About the time fixed, we repaired to Maium's 
house, and found the company assembled, consisting of the 
lawful queen of the island and her husband, the young- 
queen Maihara, (who is to have full possession of the island 
next week,) and her husband, brother to the husband of 
Pomare the queen of Tahiti, also Mahine the governing chief 
and his wife, and the two chiefs next in rank upon the island 
and their wives, the king of Eaiatea's eldest daughter, and 
several younger branches of the chief families. A plentiful 
supply of provisions was set before us, with a variety of vege- 
tables, such as yams, plantains, sweet potatoes, bread-fruit, 
taro, &c. ; cocoa-nut milk, sweetened lime-juice and water, with 
plain water, were the beverages made use of, though several 
flasks of wine were on the table. The company appeared upon 
the same level ; no distinction of persons was visible : harmony 
and good will were the prevalent feelings throughout. The 
host and his wife waited upon their guests with much delight 
and unwearied attention. It was afterwards ascertained that 
this female had been brought up in the family of Charles 
Barff. 

23rd. — The authorities of this island are in the practice of 
meeting together occasionally, and they usually solicit the com- 
pany of such strangers as may be among them, taking care to 
fix the day for collecting, when these can attend. Several days 
ago we were informed that such a meeting was in contempla- 
tion, and to-day being agreed upon for holding it, Charles and 
myself were invited. The children were collected in the. fore- 
noon at the meeting-house, and afterwards formed no insignifi- 
cant part of the guests at the dinner-tables. We dined out of 
doors, under the shade of large trees adjoining the queen's 
apartments. More than one thousand persons were present, 
including lookers-on, and the festival altogether was highly inte- 
resting. The company was exhorted by several of the principal 
speakers, and the dear children were again and again reminded 
of the privileges enjoyed by these islands in their day and 
generation. They were told, that in the days of superstition 
and idolatry many of them would have been offered as human 



406 CHAPTER XXIV. [1835. 

sacrifices, — that some of the boys might have been permitted 
to live, if their parents were of high rank ; but the girls were 
often sacrificed, and many of the boys thus preserved would be 
afterwards killed, being kept only for the purposes of war. 
But now look round, said one of these orators, at the comforts 
and blessings we enjoy ; and how did they all come, but by the 
introduction of Christianity amongst us ? It was all the good- 
ness, and mercy, and love of Jehovah, in sending the gospel 
among us. Several of these speakers, on beginning, addressed 
themselves to us in terms of welcome and approbation. One 
said, alluding to myself, ' Your address to us last sabbath-day 
in the chapel astonished us : I thought you had got the bible 
in your head. We are happy to have a teacher come among 
us, then we have two teachers, one within and one without. 
You told us, that a mere outward profession of religion was 
nothing ; that it would not benefit us. The Holy Spirit of the 
Messiah in the heart is what we must learn to be acquainted 
with, and that all the work is within ourselves,' &c. He said, 
' We have formerly been a very wicked people ; our island has 
been worse than any other island in these seas. Captain Cook 
said so : he found us so ; we were the greatest thieves he met 
with. Captain Cook shot several of us ; and if we had pro- 
voked him further, he would have shot more of us.* But your 
visit to us is not like his ; yours is in love to our souls,' &c. 
In this manner the time was occupied for the space of two 
hours, when a hymn was sung, and afterwards a short prayer 
made by one of the chiefs ; when the company dispersed with 
as much order and quietness, as the breaking up of a Friends'" 
meeting in England. I could have said- on the spot, " It is 
good for us to be here ;"" for the love of the blessed Master 
flowed through my heart, and softened the creature, as into clay 
fit for the potter's use. 

25th. (First day.) — For the last three days, at intervals, 
the prospect of attending the native meeting this morning has 
been heavy and humiliating ; but there seemed no other way of 

* It was at this island that Captain Cook caused the ears of several of 
the natives to be cut off for committing petty thefts on board the ships, 
and in other respects used them very cruelly. 



183 5. J CHAPTER XXIV. 407 

clearing my mind, and of being at liberty to leave the island, 
than by standing resigned, and willing to be any thing or 
nothing ; to go or to stay, according to the good pleasure of 
that holy will, in the counsel of which, I trust, it is my heart's 
desire to be found walking. Rose early to be in readiness, but 
for want of the means of keeping to any fixed time on shore, 
we found on landing, that the children were coming away from 
school, although half-an-hour before the proper time, for the 
meeting to gather. We remained outside until Charles JBarff 
and his wife came. He asked, if I wished to have the order 
of things any way altered. I told him, no, but that if I found 
it needful, I should come and stand near him at a proper time. 
I sat under much exercise until near the conclusion, when I 
began to see my way sufficiently clear to encourage me to leave 
the seat, and go to the table ; which Charles Barff perceiving, 
exhorted the people to stillness and attention. A solemn 
silence prevailed, until broken by my saying, " Blessed are 
they which have not seen, and yet have believed" in the only 
begotten Son of God ; — enlarging on the love unutterable of 
our heavenly Father in sending his Son into the world, that 
" whosoever believeth on him, should not perish but have 
eternal life." I had largely to speak of the dear Redeemer's 
kingdom, and the necessity of every individual coming to the 
saving knowledge of it in his own heart ; for it had been 
declared by the Saviour himself to be the thing above all 
others needful, and the righteousness thereof first to be sought 
for. He has also told us where it is to be found : the king- 
dom of God is within you : that all things needful should 
be added to those who obeyed this Divine command of — " seek 
ye first the kingdom of God and his righteousness. - " I had to 
set before them the gracious dealings of the Almighty, and the 
blessings and privileges by which they are surrounded, and the 
return that is called for at their hands. Before sitting down, 
I had to speak in a close manner to the heads of families, re- 
specting the rising generation ; that their offspring might be 
placed in a capacity, to inherit the privileges and advantages 
which they themselves enjoy : being confident that if they, the 
parents, were so favoured as to be permitted to enter the 



408 CHAPTER XXIV. [1835. 

kingdom of heaven, none among them could be found who 
would not desire to have their dear children there also : — 
therefore it was their bounden duty to lay these things to heart, 
&c. The meeting concluded in a solemn manner. 

Tenth Month 26th. — The queen and her husband, with two 
of the principal chiefs, and several others, came to dinner ; they 
remained until near five o'clock r. m., apparently well satisfied 
with their visit, — although to ourselves it seemed almost like a 
day lost ; yet it is needful to bear and have patience with the 
childish behaviour of these people, however irksome it may be ; 
it is more especially trying when much disposition to avarice is 
displayed. 

27th. — Engaged on board until four o'clock, p. m. ; many of 
the natives constantly with us, among them several young 
women and younger children of both sexes. They seem to 
enjoy themselves, and I like to see them so comfortable and 
unsuspecting, considering themselves quite safe on board. But 
I cannot help viewing their confidence with suspicion and fear, 
lest the treatment they meet with in our vessel, should induce 
them to venture on board of others at a future day, in the 
same unsuspecting and unprotected manner. In the afternoon, 
took exercise on shore, and ascended a considerable height up 
one of the mountains ; Charles Barff having joined us, we 
accompanied him home to tea. In the course of the time we 
were together at his house, the circumstance of the females 
coming so freely on board the Henry Freeling was mentioned, 
and the fears that I entertained on their account ; but he 
said, c Yours is called the " Praying ship ;" which is the reason 
of their venturing on board as they do."' However pleasant 
and satisfactory it is to know the reason why our decks are 
so crowded with this description of female visitors, yet we 
find to our great regret, that the practice of others in going 
off to the shipping is carried on to a greater extent than their 
missionary is aware of; although things in many respects are 
much better regulated at Huahine than in other places which 
we have visited. What can be expected, while these poor 
islanders are exposed to the notorious crews of the shipping, 
the vicious practices of whom cannot fail to subvert and banish 



1835.] CHAPTER XXIV. 409 

every virtuous feeling ; they are like a swarm of destructive 
locusts, that eat up every green thing wherever they come. 

Although I was favoured with an open relieving season in 
testimony at the forenoon native meeting, on First day last, 
yet I did not feel myself at liberty to leave the island without 
attending one of their meetings, held on other days of the 
week. Although the number of persons who attend on those 
occasions, from various causes, is mostly very small ; it appeared 
to me probable, that such as did get to them, might be con- 
sidered the most valuable part of the community. Before 
leaving Charles Barff, I told him that I did not feel, as I had 
a little anticipated would be the case, at the conclusion of the 
meeting last First day morning ; and that I believed it best 
for me to be at the meeting to-morrow afternoon. Both he 
and his wife gave me to understand that the company would 
be very slender ; yet it did not appear right for me to hesitate 
on that account. 

28th. — We repaired to the meeting-house about the time 
that the people assembled ; and although but few were collected 
when we got in, yet the whole number at last was far more 
considerable than had been looked for or expected. I had to 
revive the holy promise to them "that feared the Lord ;" that 
" spake often one to another, and that thought upon his name." 
u They shall be mine, saith the Lord of Hosts, in that day 
when I make up my jewels ; and I will spare them as a man 
spareth his own son that serveth him. 11 I expressed to the 
people my belief, that they who attend on all such occasions, 
are in general desirous to serve the Lord in their day and gene- 
ration ; and although the number may be few, I would not 
have them discouraged. " The righteous shall hold on his way; 
and he that hath clean hands shall be stronger and stronger. 11 
That much depended on their conduct and circumspect walk- 
ing through life ; as they would be looked up to by others, and 
therefore they had the greater need to take heed unto them- 
selves. On returning to the vessel, I told Captain Keen that 
I knew of nothing to prevent our sailing for Eaiatea on Sixth 
day, the 30th instant. The American ship, Commodore Rodgers, 
arrived to-day, after a passage of six weeks, from Oahu, one of 



410 CHAPTER XXIV. [1835. 

the Sandwich Isles ; a full ship with spermaceti oil, homeward 
bound ; she had been out thirty months from New Bedford. 

29^/i. — After dinner Charles Barff came on board : and 
towards five o'clock, p. m., we went with him to the shore, to 
take leave of his family, in the prospect of leaving them to- 
morrow. Charles Barff purposes not only accompanying us to 
Raiatea, but also to Tahaa and Bolabola : without this pro- 
vision, our touching at any of the islands to leeward of this 
place would have been wholly in vain, there being no mission- 
aries residing upon them. The wife and children of George 
Piatt are now living at Raiatea, during his absence at the 
Samoas, or Navigator Islands, whither he is gone with Samuel 
Wilson. The circumstance of Charles Barff going with us, I 
cannot but regard as a singular interposition of Divine Provi- 
dence in our favour ; as it came about without any intervention 
or contrivance on our part, but originated entirely with him- 
self, — not a hint having been given nor a desire expressed that 
this might be the case : it is however in full accordance with 
the many great and marvellous works which our eyes have 
seen of Him, " who causeth his wind to blow, and the waters 
flow." A large parcel of religious tracts, and several of the 
writings of Friends, were selected this evening for Charles 
Barff, to be distributed as opportunities may offer ; as the 
shipping in general are eager to receive every thing of the kind 
while on these long and tedious voyages. 



1835.] CHAPTER XXV. 411 



CHAPTER XXV. 



RAIATEA NATIVE MEETING A PLACE OF HUMAN SACRIFICE 

BOLABOLA DESOLATING EFFECTS OF INTEMPERANCE MEETING 

WITH THE NATIVES MEETING WITH THE REBEL CHIEF AND HIS 

IDOLATROUS PARTY WRETCHEDNESS OF THE INHABITANTS DIS- 
TRIBUTION OF CLOTHING — SAIL FOR THE SANDWICH ISLANDS 

FLINT'S ISLAND — OAHU. 



Tenth Month 30th. — At nine o'clock, a. m., Charles Barff 
having been summoned on board by our making the signal for 
a pilot, the Henry Freeling weighed and made sail from Fare 
Harbour. When clear of the reef, we ' hove to, 1 discharged 
the pilot, took in our boat, then bore up, and made all sail for 
Raiatea. Soon after one o'clock, p. m., we passed between 
the islands, which form the entrance to the roadstead ; and at 
two o 1 clock anchored in eighteen fathoms water off Uturoa, the 
missionary establishment at the settlement on the north side of 
the island . Charles Barff went on shore to dinner, in order to 
announce our arrival, and be in readiness to attend a meeting 
which was to be held in due course that afternoon. As only a 
small portion of the people would be there, it was concluded 
best for me not to be present, so that the reading my certifi- 
cates might not take place until the whole congregation was 
assembled, the day after to-morrow, First day. Towards 
evening we landed, and went to the mission-house, where we 
were kindly received and entertained by Judith Piatt in the 
absence of her husband : she had a son and daughter at home 
with her, and her eldest son was expected from Bolabola. A 
considerable number of the natives, with Tamatoa the king, or 
chief of the chiefs, with some of the governors of the island, 
soon made their appearance. All the seats in the room, which 
was large, were occupied, and many of the guests were seated 



412 CHAPTER XXV. [1835. 

on the floor : they came to greet us on our arrival, and bid us 
welcome ; at the same time it served as a plausible pretext for 
some to gratify their curiosity, and to scrutinize the strangers. 
We were, however, gratified ourselves, to find that many of 
them seemed alive to inquiry, and apparently desirous to 
improve. We have again been favoured to pass in safety 
from one island to another, and I trust, I have not left any 
thing undone that should have been done. Although desirous 
to move on, yet I am anxious not to be found imprudently 
hastening forward in my own will, instead of patiently and 
resignedly abiding the Lord's time. We brought with us from 
Huahine the son of one of the principal chiefs, whose mother 
is now on a visit to this island, attending the death-bed of her 
father. 

31st. — In the course of the day I have been a good deal 
depressed, at the prospect before me of the native meeting to- 
morrow morning ; but my trust is in Him whom I have been 
favoured to know, in whom I have believed, and who said, 
" Counsel is mine, and sound wisdom : I am understanding, I 
have strength." 

Eleventh Month 1st. (First day.) — Although half-past nine 
o'clock was the time fixed for the native meeting to begin, yet 
the people were observed moving along by the edge of the sea- 
coast, in small parties towards the meeting-house, by half-past 
seven o'clock in the morning. On this account we landed 
earlier than the time agreed upon, that they might not have to 
wait long before our arrival, seeing they could not be blamed 
for not keeping near to the time appointed, not possessing 
the means of ascertaining the hour. On reaching the place we 
found the meeting nearly gathered, and Charles BarfF at his 
post. Perhaps the number collected did not exceed materially 
one thousand persons. Charles Barff began at ar* early 
^period of the meeting to read my certificates. I had been 
under a heavy load of exercise during the time we had been 
in the meeting-house, which indeed had been the case from 
an early hour in the morning : but now the cloud seemed, as 
it were, to rise from off the tabernacle, and my way seemed 
clear to stand up. 



1835.] CHAPTER XXV. 4-13 

A profound silence reigned ; when my soul saluted all present 
in the love of the everlasting gospel in the apostolic language : 
" Now the Grod of peace, that brought again from the dead our 
Lord Jesus, that great Shepherd of the sheep, through the 
blood of the everlasting covenant, make you perfect in every 
good w^ork," &c. A pause now followed, and when the atten- 
tion of the people was firmly fixed, I proceeded with — "Launch 
out into the deep, and let down your nets for a draught ;" 
showing the result of willing obedience to this, and every other 
command of our Lord, even though we may, as it were, have 
toiled all the night and taken nothing : such had been the 
case in reality formerly, as we may conclude from the reply of 
Simon Peter. That the blessing Divine might perhaps be 
witnessed amongst us this morning, if such a disposition was 
happily wrought in our hearts, and increase and extend, as 
from vessel to vessel, until all were filled. " I am the light of 
the world," said Christ ; "he that folio weth me shall not walk 
in darkness, but shall have the light of life." To this I wish 
to turn the attention of all mankind, that Christ may dwell in 
their hearts by faith, which is in Him : then indeed would 
they be effectually turned " from darkness to light, and from 
the power of Satan" to the power of Gfod ; and witness for 
themselves the light of the knowledge of the glorious gospel of 
Christ so to shine in their hearts, as to be to them the power 
of God unto salvation. This was the most attentive audience 
that I have } r et stood before as a spectacle : my heart was 
greatly enlarged, and utterance abundantly given me, far 
beyond what I can convey an idea of here ; tending to turn the 
people more and more to the teachings of the Holy Spirit of 
the great, heavenly, and only true Teacher in their own hearts ; 
which would tell them all things that ever they did, and by 
which they must be converted and born again, or they could 
not enter the kingdom of Grod. The solemnizing power of 
Truth with which we were highly favoured, and of which I 
trust there were many sensible witnesses, reigned over all : 
under the covering of which the meeting broke up, in great 
quiet and order. 

When the people were fairly at liberty, many of all ages 



414 CHAPTER XXV. [1835. 

and both sexes crowded round us to shake hands, in numbers 
beyond all practicability of ascertaining. I scarcely remember 
any previous meeting after which I felt so much heated ; and 
a long walk, exposed to the scorching rays of a vertical sun 
nearly at noon-day, helped not a little to increase this incon- 
venience. I told Charles Barff that I preferred remaining on 
shore, as I was looking forward to attend the afternoon meeting 
at three o'clock. 

By keeping in the quiet, I was refreshed and ready when 
the meeting-time came. The people assembled early, and in 
number far exceeding what usually attend in an afternoon. I 
had again to turn them to that holy Word, which liveth and 
abideth for ever, by which they must be born again. This 
was the hope of David ; he waited patiently for it : he said, 
he waited for the Lord more than they that watch for the 
morning. " My soul doth wait, and in his word do I hope." 
After the meeting broke up, we were spared the ceremony 
of shaking hands by a discussion which took place among the 
people. As this was in a tongue unknown to me, and no 
interpreter came forward, I felt myself at liberty quietly to 
retire. 

It afterwards appeared that a proposition had been made to 
provide a 'feeding' for the strangers on the 5th instant. 
Upon inquiry, I found that it is a voluntary and free-will 
offering of the people themselves, and not arising from any 
constraint or order of the chiefs. This being ascertained, 
I feel a willingness to accept the kindness intended to be 
shown, at the same time hoping that good may come out of it. 
As regards the body of the people at large, this ' feeding,' as it 
is termed, amounts to little more than the great bulk of the 
company bringing their vegetable food with them, and eating 
it when collected together, by general consent at the same 
time. The seamen of the Henry Freeling attended both these 
meetings in an orderly manner. Returned on board to tea, 
under a feeling of poverty and unworthiness. 

2nd. — In the morning, engaged on board. Charles Barff 
came off, bringing with him John Piatt, the eldest son of the 
missionary ; he had returned late the preceding evening from 



1835.] CHAPTER XXV. 415 

Eolabola, to which island he had been with a small native-built 
schooner, to bring from thence a part of his father's cattle, 
many of which are still remaining there. The mission is 
entirely withdrawn from Bolabola, the people having generally 
given themselves up to intoxication, converting even their 
bread-fruit into spirit by distillation. In the afternoon, went 
on shore for exercise : met with Charles Barff ; and after 
going with him to see a patient labouring under a dreadful 
attack of the elephantiasis, went to look at the grave of the 
late James Loxton, with whom I became acquainted when 
in London about two years ago ; he was then a fine young- 
man. In this comparatively short space of time, a fourth 
part of which had been expended on the passage out in the 
Tuscan, or thereabouts, he had arrived at this island, com- 
menced his work, and finished his course : his widow has 
since become a mother, and returned to England with her 
infant charge. 

3rd. — Visited the ancient and extensive Marais at the east 
end of the island, accounted the most celebrated in the South 
Seas, and upon which the sacrifice of human life has been 
witnessed to a horrible extent. One of these was styled sacred 
to the god of wars, another to the god of thieves, &c. A native 
not far advanced in years, who accompanied us, had himself 
been twice present at an exhibition of these dreadful realities : 
many human bones were lying about. To-morrow afternoon 
a meeting is appointed to be held on the island of Tahaa, not 
many miles distant from Raiatea, and sheltered within the 
same coral reef. It being the usual time for holding the 
native meeting, and notice having been sent yesterday of our 
intention to be there, it is hoped that those islanders will 
generally attend on the occasion. Tahaa is under the control 
of the government of Raiatea. 

Tahaa. 4±th. — After dinner set out in company with Charles 
Barff for Tahaa, in a whale-boat, with a fine breeze of wind. 
On landing, we stopped at the chief's house, while the people had 
time to collect. On repairing to the meeting-house but few had 
come ; and for some time the prospect was discouraging, par- 
ticularly to myself, as I felt much depressed, and in a state ot 



416 CHAPTER XXV. [1835. 

more than usual desertion and barrenness. As the number of 
people increased, their general behaviour indicated them to be 
strangers to the important object for which they are in the 
common practice of assembling ; a circumstance which may be 
readily conceived and for which allowance should be made, as 
they are seldom even visited by missionaries at the present 
day. Since the death of James Loxton, and the absence of 
George Piatt on the Samoa mission, they have even been 
without a native teacher. After my certificates were read, I 
seemed to have little to communicate beyond remarking, that 
it would be understood by what they had heard, I had not come 
amongst them from any sinister or private motive of my own, 
but that I might be found standing in the counsel of the Divine 
will : that I sought not theirs but them, — the welfare of the 
immortal part in them. That the special object of my coming- 
was to turn their attention to the power of Divine grace in 
their own hearts. That they were not beyond the reach of 
that eye, which neither slumbereth not sleepeth. " He that 
keepeth Israel shall neither slumber nor sleep ;" and although 
they were left without an outward teacher, yet if they turned 
to this light of Christ in their own hearts, in earnestness and 
sincerity, they would have a Teacher indeed, that teacheth 
as never man taught ; which could never be taken away or 
removed ; and which, if sought after and obeyed, would make 
them the Lord's children, " heirs of God, and joint heirs with 
Christ" in his heavenly Father's kingdom. They would then 
be members of the Lord's church, because the Lord's children ; 
all of whom, it is declared, " are taught of Him : in righteous- 
ness shall they be established, and great shall be their peace." 
I had largely to speak to them on the great and momentous 
work of regeneration, and the only blessed means by which this 
can be effected ; that of obedience to the manifestation of the 
light of Christ, which shineth in every heart, through his Holy 
Spirit, by which we must all be born again. 

I had also to speak on the incalculable value of the Holy Scrip- 
tures : that "all Scripture is given by inspiration of God; and is 
profitable for doctrine, for reproof, for correction, for instruction 
in righteousness, 1 '' &c. ; and they refer to the Saviour of the world 



1835.] CHAPTER XXV. 417 

from the earliest ages of time, as the " seed of the woman, that 
shall bruise the serpent's head." They show forth the gracious 
dealings of the Almighty, and testify his love to man, and are 
replete with heavenly precepts, examples, and parables : still 
the Holy Spirit that inspired the holy men, who in former 
ages gave them forth, is greater than the Scriptures. They 
are a blessed book, the book of books, setting forth the revealed 
will of God; but they point to the Holy Spirit, that takes 
of the things of Christ and shews them unto us. And 
truly there is nothing that can manifest and prove to the 
transformed and renewed mind, what is that good and accept- 
able and perfect will of Grod, but the power of the Spirit 
of the Lord Jesus, which " cleclareth unto man his thought." 
It is not every one that saith, " Lord, Lord, that shall enter 
into the kingdom of heaven," said Christ, " but they that do 
the will of my Father which is in heaven ;" and the will of 
the Father is, that we should believe in, hear, and obey the 
Son. " This is my beloved Son, in whom I am well pleased, 
hear ye him." The meeting at first seemed as if it would be 
unsettled, but it sunk down into quietness as I proceeded ; 
and before it closed, was eminently owned by the Divine 
Master. I think I never observed more attention and interest 
exhibited ; and the countenances of many bespoke the solidity 
of their minds. After noticing several of the people, we 
proceeded towards our boat, which the natives had tolerably 
well loaded with food. After taking a final leave, we were 
favoured to reach Raiatea before dark, and drank tea at the 
mission-house. 

5th. — This morning our decks were crowded with the 
Raiateans, who began to bring on board an abundant supply of 
pumpkins, pine-apples, fowls, &c, for which they bartered at a 
low rate. At noon, went on shore to partake of the feeding 
at Tamatoa's new house, which was opened, for the first 
time, on the occasion of this public dinner. The building, 
although extremely large, was well filled ; and the whole affair 
was conducted throughout in an orderly manner. Many able 
speakers among the people enlarged in an impressive manner 
upon the privileges they now enjoy ; contrasting their present 

2 E 



418 CHAPTER XXV. [1835. 

state, however much below the Christian standard of morality 
and virtue, with the state they were once in, when heathenism 
reigned unmolested, and every man did what was right in his 
own eyes. When these had apparently finished, I told Charles 
Barff that I wished to speak to the people at a suitable time ; 
this he communicated to them, and a general silence soon 
prevailed : my mouth was opened freely to declare the day of 
the Lord amongst them, to the great relief of my own mind ; 
standing up with, — " behold how good and how pleasant it is for 
brethren to dwell together in unity!" &c, declaring the blessed- 
ness of those that believe the gospel, that repent and obey it. 
Such find it not to be a mere outward declaration of good things 
to come ; but the power of God unto salvation, from sin here, and 
to their everlasting comfort hereafter: it proved a solemn oppor- 
tunity. May it long be remembered, to the Lord's glory and 
praise, by the humble thanksgiving of many. Under a peaceful 
feeling took leave of the people and the chiefs, and returned 
forthwith to the vessel. 

Found a canoe from Tahaa, with the native school teacher 
and family, who paid us a short visit, and to whom some trifling- 
presents were made. The natives on shore perceiving our 
return on board, came off with every kind of supply in their 
power to offer, and kept us very busily employed until it was 
time again to go on shore to pay a farewell visit to Judith 
Piatt and family, whose uniform kindness could not well be 
exceeded. At eight o'clock p. m. we took leave, and on 
reaching the Henry Freeling, prepared for sailing in the 
morning, if nothing arose to prevent. The natives were on 
board at an early hour of the morning on the 6th ; and I felt 
desirous to accommodate them by taking their different articles 
that were at all likely to be of use to the ship. As soon as the 
signal was made for sailing, Charles Barff came on board, when 
all our payments were nicely arranged with the bartering 
parties ; and having taken in the pilot, the anchor was weighed, 
and we proceeded from Uturoa towards the western passage 
through the reef. For several hours we were baffled between 
the two islands of Eaiatea and Tahaa, the wind often light, and 
shifting from side to side every few minutes. At length a fresh 



lSo-5.] CHAPTER XXV. 419 

breeze sprung up, and after making a few tacks we got clear of 
every shoal, and into the open passage ; discharged the pilot, 
and made sail to the westward, with a fine trade-wind for 
the island of Bolabola, at half-past one o'clock a. m. Soon 
after five o'clock we entered a fine opening in the reef which 
encircles this island, and worked up into a beautiful and well- 
sheltered haven, sufficiently extensive to contain a great part 
of the British navy. Anchored in fourteen fathoms water, 
opposite the once flourishing missionary settlement at Yaitape, 
in latitude 16° 27' south, 152° 8' west longitude. 

Bolabola, Eleventh Month 6th. — It was ascertained, after 
anchoring in the haven of Teavanui, that there is a pilot for 
the accommodation of such ships as may incline to enter ; but 
as it seldom happens that this place is visited at the present 
day, he was engaged in fishing on the other side of the island 
when we arrived. One of the principal chiefs and many of the 
people have relapsed into their former idolatrous practices ; and 
the intoxicated state of the people has latterly deterred ships 
from calling here, not only from a fear of receiving damage, 
but on account of the few supplies to be obtained. Such vessels 
as do come are mostly American, and they generally ' stand 
off and on,' at a distance, to dispose of rum, in exchange for 
what the islanders can furnish. There is, however, at present 
but little to be had, as the thoughtless part of the community 
(and these unhappily are in power) have converted even their 
bread-fruit into ardent spirits by distillation, and many families 
are now in an unclothed and famishing condition. Charles 
Barff has no doubt but they will be kindly disposed towards 
us ; and I do not feel the least hesitation in coming amongst 
them. 

We found here John Piatt, son of the missionary family at 
Eaiatea, who has brought over a small cargo of plantains, as 
food for the people. In the schooner with this young man, our 
kind friend and interpreter, Charles Barff, looks forward to 
return to his family at Huahine, after doing all he can for us : 
he is now on shore endeavouring to collect the scattered people 
at the meeting to-morrow. There is a little remnant of serious 
natives yet remaining, who have hitherto stood firmly against 

2 e 2 



420 CHAPTER XXV. [1835. 

the practices of those in authority ; and several of them are 
nearly allied to the notorious chief whose name is Mai, to which 
the letter O is often prefixed : this little band there will be no 
difficulty in convening. We could not have arrived here at a 
more favourable moment, as the stock of spirits is exhausted, 
and the growing crops are not yet ready for the process of dis- 
tillation. May the Lord work amongst them, to the exaltation 
of his own great and adorable name : may now be the accepted 
time, — may now be the day of salvation to these poor people, 
— saith all that is within me ! In the afternoon landed with 
Charles Barff for exercise. Saw the relics of several Marais, 
where human sacrifices were formerly offered : continued our 
walk until a bay opened on the other side of the island. Passed 
by one of the dancing-houses, which has been established since 
the introduction of strong drink amongst them. A message 
was despatched in the course of the day to the head of the re- 
bellious party, who has been their leader into every mischief 
and distress that has overtaken them of late ; to invite him and 
his company to attend the meeting to-morrow. These people 
have now taken up a position in a distant valley, for the purpose 
of carrying on their abominable practices more free from re- 
straint: the invitation was stated to be at the request of two 
strangers just arrived from the island of Eaiatea. They returned 
for answer that they could not come to-morrow, but would 
certainly attend on the following day. By this it was under- 
stood that they are in such a reduced, impoverished, and suffer- 
ing state, from their evil habits and ruinous practices, as to 
be for the most part without clothing, and their resources 
exhausted by purchasing rum and other strong drink. 

8th. (First day.) — From appearances upon the shore this 
morning, considerable hopes were entertained that the people 
in the neighbourhood of the settlement, would generally collect 
to attend the meeting. By nine o'clock went on shore, and on 
reaching the meeting-house, (a large and commodious building,) 
we found that the children were in school, and singing a hymn 
before separating. When they had finished, we went into the 
meeting-house, where about five hundred of the natives were 
soon assembled, but none of the rebel party were there, When 



1835.] CI1APTEK XXV. 421 

Charles Barff had finished and come down from the pulpit into 
the reading-desk, I took a station at his left hand. The house 
being very large, and the people seated in a straggling manner, 
I suggested their drawing nearer together and to us ; which 
was immediately complied with in a very rough and disorderly 
manner: and, as they continued unsettled, and talking pretty 
loud, I said a few words, which produced a general silence. 
My certificates having been read, after a pause it was with me to 
say : — Let us humble ourselves under the mighty hand of God 
this morning, — let us prostrate our minds before Him, as a 
people conscious that to us belongs only blushing and confusion 
of face : peradventure He may condescend to lift up the light 
of His countenance upon us, and bless us together; for " God 
is love." " As an eagle stirreth up her nest, fluttereth over 
her young, spreadeth abroad her wings, taketh them, beareth 
them on her wings,'" so the Lord is with his people. I told 
them, that I had passed over many miles of trackless ocean to 
visit them ; that I had come among them in the fear and in 
the love of God : in that love which embraces all, and would 
gather every son and daughter of the human race into the hea- 
venly garner of rest and peace : that this love constraineth us, 
" because we thus judge that if one died for all, then were all 
dead ; and that He died for all, that they which live might 
not henceforth live unto themselves, but unto Him, who died 
for them, and rose again." The burden which rested upon me 
was to turn them from darkness unto the Holy Spirit of Christ 
Jesus in themselves, to " that light which lighteth every man 
that cometh into the world ;" the same that the apostle John 
so fully mentions in his first chapter. That this light would 
show them where they are, and make manifest the state of 
their hearts, setting their sins in order before them ; that so 
they might repent of them, and forsake them. That nothing 
short of " repentance toward God, and faith toward our Lord 
Jesus Christ," will be availing. That this light is Christ : and 
if they believe in it, and have faith in its power, they should 
not walk in darkness, but should have the light of life, accord- 
ing to His word ; " I am the light of the world," said He ; 
" he that followeth me shall not walk in darkness, but shall 



422 CHAPTER XXV. [1835. 

have the light of life." Have you not heard the voice of the 
Holy Spirit in the secret of your hearts \ I know you have ! 
I am sure you have ! Which of you that has come to years 
capable of reflecting upon your past and present life, can say 
that you have not heard this in-speaking voice, striving with 
you, and reproving you, when about to commit sin, and for sin 
committed, — reminding of sin after sin, committed perhaps 
many years ago \ This light not only discovereth unto man 
his sins, but as he turneth to it, and followeth it in obedience 
and heartfelt repentance, his sins are remembered no more 
against him ; they are taken away and forgiven, and though 
once of the darkest hue, are now made white in the blood of " the 
Lamb of God, that taketh away the sin of the world." And 
those who thus turn to hear and obey the voice of the Son of 
God in spirit, although dead in sins and trespasses, yet shall 
they live, and have a Teacher that cannot be set aside, or be 
removed into a corner ; but their eyes shall see their teacher, 
and their ears shall hear a voice behind them, when about to 
turn to the right hand or to the left, saying in effect, " this 
is the way, walk ye in it : 1 " such shall no longer walk in dark- 
ness, but shall have the light of life, &c. Although poor and 
low enough before standing up, yet now my tongue was loosed, 
and my heart expanded in that love and strength, which alone 
clotheth with authority to set the truth over all, and cause 
even the earthly tabernacle to rejoice in the midst of the tribu- 
lations of the gospel ; because its consolations are known and 
felt to abound, and create renewed sensations of gratitude 
and praise, to the glory of God the Father. It was a blessed 
meeting. When it broke up, the people crowded round about 
us in their usual way to greet the strangers. When going to 
the afternoon meeting, I told Charles Barff from present feeling, 
that I believed I should have nothing to say to the people ; 
and so it proved, for I sat as a sign amongst them ; but peace 
and resignation to the Divine will were my dwelling-place. 
Our captain and seamen attended both these meetings. 

Eleventh Month 9th. — A messenger was dispatched early this 
morning to ascertain whether the rebel chief and his party were 
likely to keep their word and come to us ; as I had concluded, if 



1835. J CHAPTER XXV. 4'23 

they failed in fulfilling their promise, to visit them in their own 
valley. The messenger however reported, on returning, that 
the chief would come to us in the forenoon. By ten o'clock 
a. m., information was received that he was near at hand ; 
when we, accompanied by Charles Barff, landed to meet the 
party. They soon arrived, and knowing that the chief had 
objected to go into the meeting-house, this was not urged ; 
but we took up our station immediately under the shade of an 
immense tree, under the wide-spreading branches of which, 
several hundred persons could be sheltered from the scorching 
heat of the sun. The chief, at the head of a large banditti of 
females, first made his appearance ; and on coming near to us, 
said, ' You are come at, a good time, and I hope that one or 
both of you will remain with us and be our teachers.'' I told 
him we were not at our own disposal ; that we must go wherever 
it is the will of the Lord, and that I believed we had many places 
to go to beside that island : we then shook hands with him 
and all his followers. The females were decorated in the true 
ancient heathen style, with garlands of flowers upon their 
heads, and were persons employed to perform for their chief's 
amusement, those disgraceful and abominable dauces practised 
in these islands before the introduction of the missionaries. A 
body of men then followed, each of them throwing one or more 
cocoa-nuts at our feet as they came up ; and those couples 
which had them suspended from a pole, threw them upon the 
ground in a ludicrous manner, which kept the whole assembly, 
and the rabble that attended on the occasion, in constant 
laughter and confusion. Upon the chief beginning to ask some 
questions about us, I proposed that my certificates should be 
read, which Charles Barff at once assented to, when silence was 
immediately proclaimed. Before the reading was finished, 
these wild, thoughtless people were measureably changed into 
an attentive audience. When the reading was finished, all 
remained silent ; and after a pause, I exhorted them to let the 
Lord Grod be their fear, and let him be their dread. — " He is 
not far from every one of us," said I ; " for in him we live, 
and move, and have our being :"" adding, that I had hoped to 
see their faces yesterday with the rest of the inhabitants of the 



424 CHAPTER XXV. [1835. 

island, who gave mo their company ; but as this was not the 
case, it was my intention to-day to have visited them where 
they dwelt, as I could not think of leaving the island without 
seeing them ; for the Lord God, whom I serve, is a God of love 
and of mercy, and willeth not the death of a sinner, but rather 
that all should repent, return, and live. For this he sent His 
only begotten Son into the world, " that whosoever believeth 
on Him should not perish, but have everlasting life." It is a 
fearful thing to fall into the hands of the living God ; for if 
the righteous scarcely be saved, where shall the sinner and the 
ungodly appear. That for the sake of Christ and his gospel, 
I was come amongst them ; for His inheritance is still the 
heathen, and the uttermost parts of the earth His possession. 
That I was a stranger, and knew nothing of the existing differ- 
ences amongst them, and desired to know nothing amongst 
them, but " Jesus Christ and him crucified;" but this I do 
know, that you have not obeyed the gospel : " for if ye live 
after the flesh, ye shall die ; but if ye through the Spirit do mor- 
tify the deeds of the body, ye shall live." — " Be not deceived ; 
God is not mocked; for whatsoever a man soweth, that shall 
he also reap. For he that soweth to his flesh, shall of the flesh 
reap corruption ; but he that soweth to the Spirit, shall of the 
Spirit reap life everlasting. 11 — " Turn ye, turn ye, why will 
you die V Your only refuge is in Jesus ; a measure or 
manifestation of His Holy Spirit is given to every man to profit 
withal ; this is the light of Christ in your hearts, which if 
taken heed to, will place your sins in order before you, in 
matchless love and mercy, that you may repent of them, and 
be saved from them. But if you continue to disregard this 
light, and to rebel against it, it will be your condemnation ; 
and the wrath of God will overtake you. He will laugh at 
your calamity, and mock when your fear cometh : " the wicked 
shall be turned into hell, and all the nations that forget God." 
I warned them, in the fear, and in the dread, and in the love 
of God, to flee from the wrath to come, — to repent, believe, 
and obey the gospel, — to seek the Lord while he may be found, 
to call upon him while he is near. " Let the wicked forsake his 
wav, and the unrighteous man his thoughts : and let him 



1835.] CHAPTER XXV. 425 

return unto the Lord, and He will have mercy upon him, and 
to our God, for He will abundantly pardon. " They were warned 
of the judgments of the Lord that would overtake them if they 
continued in their wicked practices, and entreated to turn unto 
the Lord ; to acquaint themselves with Him and be at peace," 1 "' 
<fec. All was chained down and laid low ; their haughty 
and airy looks were changed into those of serious t nought ful- 
ness by that Almighty power, which controlleth the hearts of 
all men. 

When we separated, the chief came to Charles Barff and 
told him, that old thoughts had been brought into his mind, 
and seemed kindly disposed towards us. We remained on 
shore while some medicines were prepared and administered to 
the sick, and on returning to the vessel, found the chief had got 
there before us, with two of his sons-in-law of the solid party, 
who stayed dinner. One of the females had the audacity to 
make her appearance in the cabin at dinner-time ; but Charles 
Barff knowing the vileness of her character, she was forthwith 
dismissed. The visit of this man was far from satisfactory, but 
it was submitted to, in the hope that hereafter good might arise 
out of it. Our decks were crowded in the afternoon by the 
natives, but we were favoured to pass through it without any 
unpleasant occurrence. They are a proud, haughty people, 
that delight in war ; and since the introduction of strong drink 
amongst them, and the practice of distillation, the missionary 
George Piatt deemed it no longer safe to reside upon the 
island, and removed with his family to Eaiatea, as before-men- 
tioned. It is affecting to witness the degraded and miserable 
appearance they now make for want of clothes, &c. Fowls, 
hogs, cocoa-nuts, pine-apples, &c, were brought on board by 
the solid party in tolerable abundance. Towards evening we 
went on shore, and called with Charles Barff to see several of 
the sick people, of whom there are many, mostly wasting away 
by the disease brought amongst them by the licentious crews of 
the shipping. 

10th.- — To-day our deck has again swarmed with the natives, 
and although the principal part of our crew with our captain 
are engaged on shore procuring water, (a scarce article here,) 



426 CHAPTER XXV. [1835. 

yet there was nothing to apprehend from their numbers. Per- 
haps the treatment met with in our vessel is such as they never 
witnessed before, and we were far from entertaining' a thought 
of danger, although the average number on board was ten of 
them to one of us ; but their deportment has hitherto been 
uniformly gentle and harmless. They are naturally a ferocious 
people, and when not at war with their neighbours, are fre- 
quently engaged in broils amongst themselves. Great is the 
love I feel for them, as a stream in my heart, and particularly 
towards the poor neglected children. To-morrow morning a 
meeting is to be held, to which I have been looking at times 
since last First day afternoon. All my springs are in the Lord 
Most High : when He is pleased to shut, who can open ? Unto 
whom shall I look, or whither shall I go ? for the words of 
eternal life are only with the Lord Jesus — the crucified, risen, 
and glorified Saviour. 

Eleventh Month Wth. — Attended the meeting held at the 
settlement at nine o'clock this morning ; but the persons present 
were few in comparison with those at meeting last First day. I 
was strengthened to declare amongst them, that one hour in the 
Lord's presence is better than a thousand elsewhere : — " I had 
rather be a door-keeper in the house of my God, than to dwell 
in the tents of wickedness ;" for in His presence only there is 
life, and at his right hand are pleasures, durable as the days 
of heaven. I felt much for the upright-hearted little remnant 
amongst them, who are desirous to serve the Lord in their day 
and generation. I wished them to be encouraged to hold on their 
way, for in due time they will assuredly reap if they faint not ; 
although they must expect many temptations and snares to be 
laid for them by the great enemy of God and man, and also by 
their brother islanders ; for those that live godly in Christ 
Jesus, ever suffer persecution. The invitation of the Saviour, 
given when on earth, is still extended for us to come unto Him 
in Spirit : it is there we must learn of Him. — " Take my yoke 
upon you, and learn of me," said he, " for I am meek and lowly 
in heart : and ye shall find rest unto your souls. For my yoke 
is easy, and my burden is light." We shall be taught how to 
pray to the holy Father in faith, believing in the name of the 



1835.] CHAPTER XXV. 427 

Son ; and what we ask, when thus qualified and influenced, we 
shall most assuredly receive for Christ's sake ; and we shall know 
from living experience, that peaceful and easy is his yoke, light 
the burden, sweet the rest. The watch tower is the Christian's 
only safe retreat, his only refuge from the enemy. It is the 
place where prayer is wont to be made, appointed in love to 
man by Him who said, " What I say unto you I say unto all, 
watch. Watch and pray, lest ye enter into temptation." I had 
much more to express amongst them : it was to my own relief, 
and peace, and comfort ; and I humbly trust, if none were 
benefited, that none would be hurt, for it was the Lord's doing, 
and to Him alone belongs the praise ; man is altogether shut 
out and excluded. 

Busily employed on board until evening, then landed and 
explored the neighbourhood for exercise. In the course of our 
travel, drank some excellent juice of a cocoa-nut, taken from a 
tree in our sight, which' with three others, were planted about 
twelve years ago by George Bennet. 

I2tk. — This morning our deck again teemed with the 
natives : they are so eager to obtain some article or other from 
us, that they bring with them for sale the very utensils out of 
their huts ; useful to themselves, but to us of no value what- 
ever. The poverty, disease, and wretchedness of many of 
them is truly affecting, and although mostly of their own 
bringing on, yet they are deeply to be felt for. It being Fifth- 
day, we sat down together in the cabin, as usual; and although 
there was much noise upon the deck with these people, it 
served to make us sensible of our own weakness, and to awaken 
feelings of humility in commiserating the sufferings of others, 
in contritedness before the Lord. It would have afforded great 
satisfaction to clothe the poor naked children of this island, 
had I possessed the means ; but the number is too great for my 
resources : it would have been a difficult matter to effect, 
without creating jealousy or envy between the two parties. 
The children of the most unworthy parents were the most 
destitute, as might be expected ; and yet more seemed due to 
the children of those parents who are struggling to stem the 
torrent of iniquity and dissipation, so alarmingly threatening 



428 CHAPTER XXV. [1835. 

totally to lay waste the already much decreased and emaciated 
population. I was in great hopes that the children of sober 
parents would furnish a plausible pretext for being rewarded, by 
having learned to read and write ; but this did not prove to be 
the case with such as came on board the vessel, except in one 
instance of a little girl, who came with her father to sell her 
own fowl ; on trial, it was found she could write very well with 
a pencil on a slate. After having fitted her with a child's robe, 
she brought me the fowl as all she had in her power to make 
me recompense ; but to her increased delight, I then bought 
the fowl for a thimble, two or three needles, and some thread. 
Dresses were also fitted upon two other children, the next 
deserving ; but in order to select more objects suitable for our 
purpose, Charles Barff was employed, who readily undertook 
to procure a list of the most diligent scholars from a native 
teacher : forty-four garments were appropriated in this manner. 
In the evening visited the shore for the last time. Charles 
Barff being anxious to return to his family at Huahine, any 
further stay at this island would have been useless on my 
part without our interpreter : but its suffering inhabitants will 
not be easily effaced from my memory ; for whose welfare my 
heart is deeply interested, and for whom I must long mourn in 
secret, not having at any time felt a greater drawing of love 
for any people, amongst whom my lot has been cast in this 
southern hemisphere, than for those of Bolabola. As we passed 
along the skirts of the harbour, we were followed by groups 
of the scarcely clad, famishing, dear children, who from their 
eagerness to get near enough to us, might have known that the 
time of our departure drew nigh : their pallid though quick 
and intelligent countenances met us in every direction. We 
returned on board at the close of day-light, and made some 
preparation towards sailing. 

loth. — After breakfast, a chapter in the Testament was read, 
as usual ; and having spent a short interval in retirement 
together, Charles Barff and John Piatt prepared to leave us. 
As soon as the anchor was weighed, our kind friends pushed 
off for the shore ; and, quitting the well-sheltered haven of 
Te-ava-nui, we stretched through the opening of the reef, and 



]835.] CHAPTER XXV. 429 

once more committed ourselves to Him, at whose command the 
vast Pacific rolls. After getting from under the lee of the 
island, the weather proved rugged, and the wind scant : this 
day two years ago, we embarked from London to join the 
Henry Freeling at the Lower Hope, about seven miles below 
Gravesend. Many have been our tossings, and buffetings, and 
provings, since that time: but through that loving-kindness 
which is better than life, we have been delivered out of them 
all ; and are still left to acknowledge, in the grateful language 
of the Psalmist, that "the goodness of God endureth con- 
tinually," and his love and his mercy unceasingly flow, " from 
the river to the ends of the earth." 

Eleventh Month \4>th. — To-day at noon the island of Bolabola 
seventy six miles distant. Strong breezes against us, with 
squalls and heavy showers of rain. The best hog in our stock 
was so tired of his situation, that he sprung overboard and was 
lost ; there being too much sea running for a boat to attempt 
to save him. Towards evening strong squalls, with much 
thunder, lightning, and heavy rain. The foot-rope of our jib 
gave way, but was discovered in time to save the sail. 

16^. — Yesterday the roughness of the weather and the 
harassed state of our people, (several of them still sea-sick,) 
compelled us to relinquish meeting together in our customary 
manner on First days. To-day the weather boisterous, and the 
wind contrary ; after dark, frequent flashes of lightning from 
east to west. Birds of two kinds settled on the mast and 
suffered themselves to be taken, apparently nearly exhausted 
with fatigue. The very unsettled state of the weather, the 
opposing blast, debility of body, and poverty of mind, seem to 
unite in producing fresh trials of our faith and patience ; but 
I trust it will be seen hereafter that all things have been 
working together for good. Had we known what awaited us, 
it is probable we should have still clung to the shelter of 
Bolabola, although for want of Charles Barff our situation would 
have been far from pleasant there. It is not long ago since an 
attempt was made by the rebellious party to seize a vessel, 
which had put into the harbour for supplies : this, however, 
was frustrated by the sober part of the community, who armed 



430 - CHAPTER XXV. [1835. 

themselves, and came forward in time to prevent its success. 
While we were there, the natives came on board without 
restriction by forty or fifty at a time : they were received in 
full confidence ; our boarding nettings were entirely kept out 
of sight, and we felt perfectly safe among them. Some trifling- 
thefts were committed, not worth noticing, although a good 
look-out was kept by our men. The three chiefs next in 
authority to the present vicious ruler, Mai, are all his sons-in- 
law by marriage, and stand opposed to his shameful conduct ; 
they are at present the means of preserving the degree of 
moral order still existing upon the island : they have been 
applied to, to destroy their father-in-law, and rule themselves ; 
but they say, ' He is our father ; we cannot do that : we must 
bear with him. 1 

18th. — Yesterday the strength of the wind abated, but it 
remains still contrary with a heavy swell. At noon our lati- 
tude by observation, 12° 54' south. To-day the weather fine ; 
but the wind still northerly. The Magellan clouds about the 
South Pole are seen every night, but visibly getting lower and 
lower. We hope soon to get in sight again of the North Pole 
star, which has for many months been hidden from us. 

19th. — The wind still contrary. Endeavoured to commit 
my cause to Him who knows the depth of the motive that 
induced our steps being directed to the Sandwich Islands. The 
protracted adverse winds and humiliating state of mind at 
present my portion, could not fail prompting to a strict exami- 
nation of the foundation cause of this movement. I had, pre- 
viously to finishing our visit to the Georgian and Society Isles, 
looked different ways as to the next route to be pursued : 
Rarotonga, Tongataboo, and New Holland, seemed the places 
in regular course and succession in the nature of things ; but 
the Sandwich Islands were often before me. However unde- 
sirable to the natural inclination of flesh and blood in this the 
evening of my day, the prospect might be, of adding several 
thousand miles to our already lengthened distance from home, 
which must be the result of our going thither ; yet, no light or 
brightness shone upon any other track : and therefore, without 
hesitating, as the time of finishing at the southern islands drew 



1835.] CHAPTER XXV. 431 

nigh, I took care that the vessel was provided with water, hogs, 
and vegetables, to be in readiness to proceed, as the way should 
open ; and at length left Bolabola with a peaceful mind, under 
a belief that to proceed to the Sandwich Islands was the only 
safe path for me to pursue, and therefore we at once shaped a 
course towards the equator. This being Fifth day, it was a 
great comfort to have the privilege of sitting down to wait upon 
the Lord, who knoweth the secret exercises of my mind on the 
present occasion. After our sitting was over, I felt relieved ; 
and, I trust, resigned to the dealings of our heavenly Father. 

10th: — Last evening, being in about the latitude of Flint's 
Island, mentioned in Nories List, a good look-out was kept for 
it during the night. This afternoon, just before sun-setting, 
the appearance of land was announced. Upon examining the 
latitude by observation at noon, and the course of the vessel 
since made good, there is no room to doubt that the land in sight 
is Flint's Island, in latitude 11° 30' south, and may be con- 
sidered as accurately laid down. After dark edged away to 
give this land a wide berth, it being uncertain how far its coral 
crags may extend from the main body of it. This island bore 
from us, when last seen, east by north, about ten miles distant ; 
and appeared in the form of three small islands close together. 
It is cause of humble thankfulness that we have not met with 
it in the dark, or under circumstances unfavourable and dan- 
gerous. To-day abiding through favour in the low and peace- 
ful valley ; although under more than ordinary circumstances 
of discouragement, by reason of the increased swelling of the 
lower part of my legs and ankles, from the great and constant 
heat to which we are subjected, together with the want of exer- 
cise, which the incessant motion of the vessel almost precludes 
the possibility of obtaining : but in my straits and difficulties, 
I am endeavouring to " set the Lord always before me ;" believ- 
ing He will not permit me to be greatly moved at what he may 
be pleased to dispense to a " worm and no man, 1 ' as is often my 
state of feeling and condition. 

23rd. — The weather much the same since the 20th instant. 
Yesterday very wet and squally, and although the First day of 
the week, we were forced to let it pass over without assembling 



432 chapter xxv. [18*35. 

the people. As regards myself, poor and low ; endeavoured to 
keep my mind staid, watching unto prayer towards the Lord. 
At our evening reading, my understanding was renewedly 
opened, to comprehend in a spiritual sense some texts of Scrip- 
ture which were read, to my comfort and edification, and I 
hope to my Maker's praise. To-day fair weather, which 
afforded our people an opportunity of drying most of their wet 
clothes. 

2 6th. — Latitude 9° 44' south. Since Second day many 
changes have taken place ; but we have only altered the latitude 
about two degrees. This forenoon we held our little meeting, 
and notwithstanding previously to sitting down I felt hemmed 
in outwardly and inwardly by discouraging circumstances ; yet 
as the struggle was maintained, a gleam of comfort seemed to 
shine as from the Sun of Righteousness, which alone can avail 
and cheer the drooping traveller in the Christian course, and 
strengthen him more and more to walk by faith and not by 
sight ; and less and less to look for support and comfort from 
the perishing " things that are seen " and only " temporal ;" 
whilst the blessed realities which endure, are " not seen, 1 "' but 
are " eternal. 1 ' 

27th — We were favoured this morning, soon after breakfast, 
with a sight of Caroline Island, about three leagues under our 
lee. Although from the present wind and relative positions 
both of the vessel and this island, we could never have touched 
it ; yet it is comforting and relieving when permitted to have a 
distinct view of such lurking neighbours, as it at once places 
all risk of running upon them in the darkness of the night 
beyond the shadow of a doubt. Caroline Island, like many 
others of those beautiful spots which stud the capacious bosom 
of this vast ocean, is so low that nothing was apparent but the 
tops of the trees that grew upon its coral foundation : it is said 
to be uninhabited. This day my sixty-fourth year is com- 
pleted ; and when I look at the lateness of life's hour, and 
consider my present situation, contending with winds and 
waves on this side the globe, and my hands ready to hang- 
down under a sense of weakness and increasing infirmities, it is 
truly appalling. I feel at times ready to faint at the magni- 



1835.] chapter xxv. 433 

tude of the prospect still widely spread before me, and certainly 
I should have fainted long ago, if I had not believed to see, 
and also been permitted to see, to my finite admiration, the 
mercy, the goodness, and the faithfulness " of the Lord in the 
land of the living." He beareth up my often drooping and 
helpless head above the strife of the mighty waters : He sus- 
taineth and upholdeth me by the word of His power, for His 
great name's sake. 

29th. — The weather still rough and unsettled. This is the 
third First day in succession that we have been prevented from 
meeting together in the usual way ; a circumstance that did 
not occur during the long and stormy outward-bound passage 
from England. In this climate, such is the closeness and heat 
of the cabin below, that our toiling sailors soon become drowsy, 
which renders almost useless our assembling any where but on 
the deck, which the weather of late has not permitted. 

Twelfth Month 4:th. — Since the 29th nothing to record, 
(excepting those mercies which are new every morning,) besides 
a series of rough and unsettled weather ; on the 2nd instant 
a sight of the sun was obtained, and our true latitude found 
to be 11° 46' south, having drifted about two degrees to the 
southward, owing to the prevalence of strong northerly winds, 
and the swell of the sea against the vessel. 

Yesterday the weather and wind more favourable, which 
was succeeded by a calm. It being Fifth-day, we held our 
usual meeting in thankfulness for the quiet opportunity afforded 
by the more gentle movement of the vessel. Supported in 
humble resignation to Divine disposal. In the afternoon a 
shark was taken, about seven feet long. 

10th. — No material alteration in the weather since the 4th 
instant, although some progress has been made. On First 
day, the 6th, portions of Scripture were read to the crew in 
the forenoon ; in the afternoon, this was prevented by the 
state of the weather. To-day we sat down together in the 
morning, and I was favoured to feel refreshed. We have 
now a steady trade-wind from the eastward, sufficient to 
allow our making a north course good against an opposing 
swell ; but we are greatly annoyed by another swell more 

2f 



434 CHAPTER XXV. [1835. 

heavy upon the quarter, which makes the motion uneasy, and 
at times violent. 

14?th. — Steady wind from the east and fine weather. Yes- 
terday, assembled the crew twice in the day for devotional 
purposes. About eleven in the forenoon, the Henry Freeling 
entered the North Pacific. At noon our latitude 0° 6' north 
of the equator; longitude about 147° west. This morning 
we have got through a strong current which in the course of 
a few hours had swept us twenty-eight miles to the westward, 
as indicated by the chronometers. 

For more than three weeks after leaving Bolabola, our pro- 
gress was greatly impeded by an almost constant succession 
of contrary wands and rugged weather ; and yet I could never 
see my way to bear up and run back to the islands for shelter. 
I believed on setting out that the track towards the Sandwich 
Islands was the right one for me to pursue ; and yet every 
thing combined to obstruct and frustrate our best attempts 
to persevere. Winds from quarters whence they are seldom 
known to blow in these seas, were permitted to buffet us at 
times strongly, with considerable sea : these, together with a 
succession of drenching heavy thunder rains, made the prospect 
additionally discouraging and gloomy to some on board. 
Although I never hinted it to any one, yet I had pretty much 
concluded that, on reaching the equator, if the northerly blast 
should then appear to be fairly established strongly against 
us, I should be satisfied to bear away before it for the nearest 
port ; rather than any longer persist in beating our little vessel 
to pieces, by contending against its overwhelming force, as 
having done all I could to endeavour to follow the line of appre- 
hended duty cast up before me ; not doubting but the will would 
be accepted for the deed, by Him who knows the integrity of all 
hearts, and who had witnessed our faithful striving, week after 
week, to accomplish its fulfilment : but, on reaching the utmost 
bound of south latitude, yesterday, instead of boisterous and 
contrary winds, we were favoured to cross into the northern 
hemisphere with a leading breeze, and as beautiful weather as 
could be imagined : and such has been our progress through 
the night, that at noon this day, our latitude is 2° 28' north, 



1835.] CHAPTER XXV. 435 

and 146° 59' west longitude by lunar observation. This change 
in a prospect so lately and so darkly clouded, has brought with 
it comfort and strength, and caused gratitude and thanksgiving 
to spring in my heart to our all-merciful and faithful Creator 
and Preserver. 

17th. — Continued to make rapid progress, since the 14th 
instant, to the northward with a side-wind. Yesterday the 
appearance of the weather became very threatening, and the 
swellings of the ocean much increased. A considerable quantity 
of rain fell in the course of the day ; but the clouds most 
heavily charged rode past us altogether unbroken. Charles and 
myself sat down in the forenoon, and towards the latter end 
of our sitting, a small portion of strength was felt, to draw 
nearer to the Fountain of life. 

Twelfth Month 21 St. — The wind rather more in our favour. 
Our progress somewhat retarded by changing several of our 
sails, being too old and thin to trust to, when exposed to heavy 
gusts from mountainous land. Yesterday the assembling 
of the crew for devotional purposes was not omitted. At ten 
o'clock p. m. last night shortened sail, for fear of a supposed 
island being in our route, called Hirst's Island. This island is 
mentioned by Norie, in a chart published in 1833, belonging 
to our mate ; whilst our own private chart, and the ship's 
atlas are silent on the subject. It is probable this island may 
exist, but certainly not in the place laid down ; for we must 
have passed in the dark, nearly over the spot where it is said 
to be, and met with nothing. This circumstance cost us several 
hours of a beautiful wind, without the satisfaction of being- 
able to establish the fact of there being such' an island or its 
true position, for the benefit of other wandering pilgrims on 
this expansive watery waste. 

On the 19th, did not fail, and, I trust, allowably so, to 
remember the mercifully-bestowed, and long-entrusted and 
beloved partner of my bosom ; — a bosom friend indeed, guileless 
and faithful; whose loss to me was indeed great and irreparable, 
but her gain eternal : — humble resignation to the Divine will 
is as a canopy of peace around me, although the loss was such, 
that even time does not lessen its extent. 

2 f 2 



436 CHAPTER XXV. [1835. 

12>rd. — Yesterday the wind fresh and favourable: we got on 
rapidly also through the night, and to-day are still hastening 
onward with a following sea. At noon the latitude 19° 41' north ; 
at four o'clock p. m., longitude 153° 18' west. This morning 
hauled a little more to the westward, to endeavour to make the 
land. Just before sun-set, the sight of land was announced 
from the mast-head ; but the haze about the water's edge made 
it very indistinct, and not visible from the deck to myself, 
until the sun had sunk below the horizon ; when not only the 
stupendous mountain of Mouna Kea, with its snow-clad top, 
which is more than 13,000 feet above the level of the sea ; but 
the lower land towards the north cape of the island of Hawaii 
could be plainly distinguished, at the distance of more than 
eighty miles. Here is a renewed call for thankfulness, after 
such a winding and intricate passage of six weeks, thus to be 
favoured with such a defined, and decidedly excellent land-fall 
before the night closed upon us, — which is now long and dark, 
the,shortest day, in this region, being just over, and the moon 
but in an infant state at present. The mercies of the Lord are 
indeed from everlasting to everlasting, and blessed for ever is 
He, the Lord God of Israel, who only doeth wondrous things ; 
blessed be his glorious name for ever, and let the whole earth 
be filled with his glory : and who can refrain from saying with 
David, '•' Amen and Amen V 

2ith. — This sight of the land enabled us to run through the 
dark under whole canvass without fear, thus making great pro- 
gress ; and this morning the lofty mountain upon Hawaii, from 
our having approached at least fifty miles nearer to it, appeared 
twice as high as it did last evening. Before noon the island of 
Maui was discernible from the deck, and at sun-down Tauroa 
was plainly to be seen. At eight o'clock p. m., off the west end 
of Maui ; reduced the canvass for the night. Our getting into 
Oahu to-morrow is at present uncertain ; the day must declare 
it : at four o'clock p. m. this afternoon, we were one hundred 
and thirty miles distant. 

In a note subsequently written, D. W. adds ; some of 
my beloved friends may be at a loss for the reason of our 
passing by some of the largest islands in the Sandwich group, 



1835.] CHAPTER XXV. 487 

(particularly Hawaii, formerly considered as the chief of the 
cluster,) and aiming directly at one, not one-third its size, and 
much less than Maui. This decision seemed to arise from the 
circumstance of Captain Keen's being a stranger to the other 
islands, and from the information obtained, that there was no 
safe anchorage for a vessel in the winter season, except at 
Honolulu, in the island of Oahu, where there is safety at every 
season of the year. It occurred to me at the same time, that 
if we should be favoured to reach Oahu in safety, and then find 
it necessary to proceed to the other islands, some person might 
be found well acquainted with their different bays, roads, coves, 
creeks, fee, and be easily obtained to accompany us on such a 
visit. These were my motives for what might seem, and did seem 
to some people, beginning at the wrong end of the work, by going 
to leeward, and having to come back again against the trade- 
wind, which is no easy matter. But I have since found, that I 
should have been wrong altogether if I had stopped short of 
Oahu ; for here I found the seat of the government of the islands ; 
and also the head quarters of the American missionary estab- 
lishment : in short, here was the only means of access to the 
authorities of the other islands, and to the missionary stations ; 
and, in some instances, we could not have procured supplies for 
the vessel without an order from the government, or an agent 
of theirs sent along with us. I mention the missionary stations 
as needful to have access to, because it is only at them that I 
can look for an interpreter, and through him that I can speak 
to the native tribes. We therefore passed by Hawaii, Maui, 
and Morakai, at all of which are several missionary stations, 
except the last mentioned, where there is only one. And it 
now fully appears that the step of coming in the first place to 
Oahu, has opened the way in a most satisfactory manner in 
every respect for a visit to the other islands. 

I feel it no light thing to be, as it were, upon the eve of 
again landing upon shores by myself as yet untrodden, amongst 
thousands and thousands of my fellow- creatures, in whose 
sight I must unquestionably appear, " as one born out of due 
time ;" but when I trace the motive of my coming to its 
utmost source, I am favoured to find a foundation firm enough 



438 CHAPTER XXV. [1835. 

to bear me out : and the prospect of another opportunity being 
afforded me, for the exaltation of the dear Redeemer's kingdom, 
at seasons warms and gladdens the heart, rekindling a measure 
of that love which desires the welfare of all mankind the 
world over ; many of whom have long since heard of the name 
of Jesus, the Messiah, at a distance, but know him not as a 
Saviour, nigh in the heart to save them from their sins. 

25th. — The breeze continued until midnight, after which it 
gradually lessened, and at four o'clock a. m., we were becalmed. 
In the forenoon made some progress with light winds, and 
before noon got sight of Oahu ; but the prospect of our getting 
in is now doubtful, the wind having become variable. Towards 
evening the breeze freshened, and enabled us to get considerably 
nearer to the island. The whole of the Sandwich group in sight, 
except Tauai, or Atooi, which lies ninety-four miles to leeward 
of Oahu. Before dark, a sail hove in sight from the westward, 
the first and only vessel we have seen at sea for the last eight 
weeks, or since leaving; Huahine. 



1835.] CHAPTER XXVI. 439 



CHAPTER XXVI. 

SANDWICH ISLANDS ANCHOR IN THE HARBOUR OF HONOLULU 

NATIVE MEETING VISIT FROM THE KING MEETING AT THE 

MARINERS' CHAPEL DISTRIBUTION OF TRACTS, ETC. NATIVE 

MEETING — VISIT OF THE GOVERNOR OF HAWAII HALF-CASTE 

GIRLS' SCHOOL MEETING AT THE CHAPEL NATIVE MARRIAGES 

MEETING AT THE CHAPEL NATIVE GIRLS' SCHOOL. 

Oahu. Twelfth Month 26th. — Plyed to and fro during the dark- 
ness to windward of the island, and at the earliest dawn of day 
bore up for Diamond Hill. As .we neared the entrance, several 
boats were seen coming out. The first brought two or three 
of the resident traders, the second brought the pilot and some 
others, and in the third came the British and American 
Consuls ; the former bringing us a packet of letters from 
our beloved family, as might be expected, all of old date, 
but new to us, and truly welcome; and afresh claiming a 
grateful tribute of thankfulness to Him whose tender mercies 
extend to all His poor unworthy creatures, however widely 
separated. The wind, which at first was likely to prevent our 
getting in, now changed, and bore us quickly through the 
winding narrow channel, into the still harbour of Honolulu. 
The anchor was but just dropped, when Hiram Bingham, the 
senior missionary of the establishment at this place, came on 
board, and offered his services in whatever way we could accept 
them ; at the same time inviting us to become his guests while 
here. We had on board a large packet of letters and parcels 
for him and his colleagues on these islands. It appeared that 
information of our being at the Georgian Islands had long 
since reached this place ; and as soon as our vessel came in 
sight, there was no doubt, from her strange and novel figure in 
these seas, but that we were arrived : this was evidently the case, 



440 CHAPTER XXVI. [1835. 

for the British Consul, Richard Charlton, brought off our letters 
without hesitation. The. natives here being much accustomed 
to see shipping, in general take but little notice of them, and 
seldom visit them ; but they soon swarmed upon our deck, 
attracted by the odd appearance of the Henry Freeling ; and 
we afterwards understood that they gave her the name of the 
' Mast-and-a-half.' We now find it needful to make an alte- 
ration in the day of the month and of the week, to accom- 
modate the time in these islands. Yesterday was with us what 
is commonly called Christmas-day : but we find that to-day, 
(with us the 26th,) is here only the 25th, and is observed 
accordingly. To prevent confusion, we purpose adopting the 
day considered the sabbath here, instead of our own, whilst we 
remain among the Sandwich Isles ; but the ship's log-book 
will still retain the dates and days as when we left England, 
and in it the change will never be observable. 

27th. — In the afternoon landed and made our way to Hiram 
Bingham's habitation ; but not finding him at home, we called 
upon the British Consul, who kindly accompanied us to obtain 
some exercise on foot, it being forty- five days since we had 
had an opportunity of walking more than a few paces at a time 
on the Freeling s deck. Returned to Hiram Bingham's about 
the time his return home was expected, and found him accord- 
ingly. Believing it safest for me not to miss an opportunity, 
if one could be obtained, of seeing a body of the natives col- 
lected together to-morrow, at their own place of worship, I 
mentioned the matter to Hiram Bingham, who readily made 
way for my accommodation, kindly offering his services to 
interpret if I wished to address the people. After partaking of 
an early tea with the family, we returned on board, at ten 
o'clock p. m. Mercifully supported to look forward towards 
to-morrow in humble confidence and hope of that help and 
strength which is almighty, and which has never yet failed to 
deliver me out of every trouble and distress. My trust is in 
the Lord, who alone can bless and cause his own works to praise 
his ever great and adorable name 

28th. (First day.) — At nine a. m., repaired to the house of 
Hiram Bingham, who accompanied us to the native meeting. As 



1835.] CHAPTER XXVI. 441 

the branch of the mission here consists of several families from 
America,* who understand the native language but in a small 
degree, and as some other white people attending the meeting are 
labouring under the same disadvantage, Hiram Bingham pro- 
posed that niy certificates should be first read in English, and 
then to the people in the native tongue ; and this plan afterwards 
appeared more eligible, when it was observed that other persons 
came into the meeting (probably induced by curiosity) who do 
not attend on other occasions, such as the foreign Consuls and 
others from the town. The service performed here by the 
missionary, somewhat differed from what we had seen among 
the Southern Islands. It commenced with a very short prayer, 
which w r e had previously been told was for a blessing on what 
was about to follow ; a portion of the Scriptures was then read, 
and afterwards a hymn was sung. When this was finished, 
the principal prayer, as before explained to us, was offered at 
considerable length, and then another hymn was sung, after 
which the reading of my certificates commenced. I had sat 
under a great weight of exercise, from a belief that I should 
have to stand up when the reading of them was gone through, 
and not without a humiliating feeling of weakness and fear at 
my own insufficiency. Not having for perhaps a year and a 
half heard my certificates read, except in the Polynesian lan- 
guage, I felt quite struck on hearing them in English ; but I 
think the unity and sympathy of my dear brethren and sisters 
at home, never at any time felt so truly precious and strength- 
ening to my bowed-down mind : and the expressions which they 
contain of my beloved family^ concurrence with my leaving 
them, to attend to the call of apprehended duty, were so unex- 
pectedly sounded in my ears, that the weakness of human 
nature could not be repressed, nor the tear of parental affection 
restrained. " Deep called unto deep ;"" the waves and the 
billows passed over, leaving me in a state of nothingness and 
emptiness ; but, perhaps, never more fit to declare of the good- 
ness and mercy of my Lord, in the ability he was graciously 
pleased to bestow. When Hiram Bingham had finished read- 

* The missionaries stationed in the Sandwich Islands are exclusively 
from the American board of missions. 



442 CHAPTER XXVI. [1835. 

ing and explaining my certificates to the people, I went and 
stood by his side, as " a reed shaken with the wind." A 
solemn silence now prevailed over us, until it was with me to 
say — ' It is more than probable that the greater part of the com- 
pany now assembled, never before heard of the existence of a 
Society under the denomination of Friends, (alluding to my 
certificates :) but my beloved people, all such as love the Lord 
Jesus Christ and keep his commandments, are friends, — friends 
universally to God, friends to one another, and friends to all 
mankind. " Ye are my friends," said Christ, " if ye do what- 
soever I command you." All such are members of the same 
society the world over. 1 Then, charging the people to endea- 
vour to draw near unto God, that under the sanctifying influ- 
ence of His power and life-giving presence, our meeting together 
might be rendered a blessing, I was largely opened to declare 
the everlasting Truth amongst them, and to turn them to its 
light in their own hearts, —to the Holy Spirit of Him, who is 
" the true light that lighteth every man that cometh into the 
world ;" in whom only there is life, and who is the only way to 
God the Father, as declared by himself : — " I am the way, the 
truth, and the life ; no man cometh to the Father but by me." 
That a mere outward profession of religion would prove alto- 
gether unavailing to them ; the great work of regeneration 
must be witnessed : — that to be members of the true church 
they must be redeemed with judgment from sin and trans- 
gression, and be converted unto God by the righteousness of 
Christ Jesus, believed in and submitted to through faith in the 
operation of the Spirit of God; who raised Him from the dead, 
with whom also they must be raised from death unto life. 
That we cannot worship God in the manner He requires, while 
we continue in sin and wickedness ; for the prayers of the 
wicked are not heard, — they cannot pray acceptably in that 
state ; their sacrifice is an abomination. The true and living- 
worshippers of the only true and living God, are no longer dead 
in sins and trespasses ; they are redeemed from these by the 
righteousness of Christ Jesus, who came to save his people from 
their sins, and never while they continue in them. That we 
must fear God, and in thought, word, and deed, give glory 



1835.] CHAPTER XXVI. 443 

unto Him, before we can worship Him in spirit and in truth. 
For considerably more than an hour my heart was enlarged 
in the Sowings of gospel love, as a stream bearing down 
every thing before it. A more attentive audience can scarcely 
be conceived, than certain classes of this people, both natives 
and foreigners. The Lord's power had the dominion, and 
reigned pre-eminently, until the breaking up of the meet- 
ing. Every class and variety of the people flocked round 
us, scarcely affording us an opportunity of speaking to the 
members of the missionary establishment. Some of the natives 
endeavoured to thank me through the medium of Hiram 
Bingham ; but I requested him to refer such to the great 
Creator, and not to the creature. One said I had brought 
them a blessing. A number of serious-looking women came 
round us, whose countenances bespoke the love that was in 
their hearts. Troops of the dear children gathered in their 
turn, and seemed delighted to find that they also might shake 
hands with the strangers : some of them would come again and 
again until they found their faces were recognized. We 
seemed to need more hands than we possessed, as frequent 
attempts would fail to shake hands with those that held theirs 
out to us, by others reaching forward and taking hold of ours 
before them, in quick succession. Thus hath my gracious Lord 
been pleased to deal with a poor, unprofitable creature, but who 
is a living monument of His everlasting love and mercy ; 
although he is unworthy of being numbered among the least of 
His servants. Truly His judgments are a great deep ; but His 
love who can declare I It is unutterable, unfathomable, and 
unbounded as His mercy; whose is the kingdom, and to whom 
all power and glory belong for ever. When we got into the 
open road, Hiram Bingham told us the bell was then ringing 
at the Mariners' Chapel, where the English and other foreigners 
meet, if I wished to go to it. I replied, that I believed I must 
go on board to my little family there. 

Slst. — Engaged on board during the forepart of each day, 
preparing despatches for England, and by the numerous callers 
to look at the vessel, and see the newly-arrived strangers : 
the governor of the fort, and some of the principal chiefs, with 



444 CHAPTER XXVI. [1836. 

the governor of the island of Maui, were amongst them. In 
the afternoon took exercise on shore, and called upon some of 
the inhabitants ; engaged in writing till late at night. This 
evening spent some time with the seaman's chaplain, a young 
man appointed and sent out by the Seamen's Friend Society in 
America, to preach at the Mariners' Chapel. While we were 
together, some interesting conversation took place on impor- 
tant subjects. 

First Month 1st, 1836. — This morning a deputation of 
chiefs of the highest order came on board, bringing a letter, 
addressed to me, as follows : — 

' Honolulu, January 1st, 1836. 
' As an expression of friendly regard of Kinau and her 
associate chiefs to Mr. Wheeler, the friendly visitant, they 
beg his acceptance of a few supplies. They are the follow- 
ing : — five barrels of potatoes, five turkeys, five fowls, and 
one hog. 

'-Na 1 'Kinau.' 

Finding upon inquiry that to refuse this present, would 
create much dissatisfaction, because entirely intended as 
a good-will offering, the following acknowledgment was 
returned : 

' Highly sensible of the kindness and hospitable intention 
of Kinau, the governing chief of the Sandwich Islands, and 
the constituted authorities of the same, I assure them of my 
Christian regard in the love of the everlasting gospel, which 
has induced me to visit these isles afar off. 

' I feel and value this token of good-will, in their act of 
generosity, and I do freely accept the supplies so gratuitously 
furnished. 

' With best desires for their present and eternal welfare, 
and that of every age and every class over whom they preside, 
I am her and their sincere friend. 

' Daniel Wheeler. 1 

' Henri/ Freeling, in the harbour of Honolulu, 

<■ First Month 1st, 1836. 
' To Kinau, the governing chief of the Sandwich Islands, 1 &c. 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVI. 445 

Before the business was fully arranged, and the parties gone 
from the cabin, the young king Kauikeaouli arrived, with 
several of his principal attendants.* He was escorted on 
board by the English Consul, accompanied by two other 
foreigners. It appears that the king, although the lawful 
ruler of these islands, has delivered up the executive power 
into the hands of Kinau, and takes no part whatever in the 
administration of public affairs. He is surrounded by a set of 
evil advisers, and there is every reason to apprehend, he leads 
a very unsteady, dissipated life, but is said to possess good 
abilities and an amiable disposition : he talks some English 
and understands much of what is said. He examined every 
part of our vessel very minutely, and might possibly have gone 
to the mast-head, (a common thing with him ;) but our rigging- 
being fresh tarred, deterred him from attempting it. An 
intelligent person, a native of Dundee, was on board at the 
time, though not one of the palace party. To this man I 
mentioned what I thought of the islanders ; and as the king, 
who sat next him, appeared to listen attentively, I spoke 
freely and plainly of the ruin that awaited these islands, if 
the importation of spirits and the use of them were allowed to 
continue ; and unless the private property of the" poor inhabi- 
tants is protected by wholesome laws, firmly executed without 
partiality. At present these people are groaning under an 
arbitrary feudal system, kept up with shameful tyranny on the 
part of the chiefs. I may mention a recent instance that has 
come within our knowledge, which is only a fair specimen of 
the actual state of things here : an industrious native had 
grown a small plot of sugar cane, and when its produce was 
ascertained, his chief who had permitted him to cultivate the 
land, ordered the whole of it to be brought to him, except a 
portion of the molasses. This summons was duly obeyed, and 
the chief afterwards informed him by message, that the next 
year he should take the whole, both sugar and molasses. This 
however so damped the exertion of the poor man, that he did 

* Kauikeaouli is said to mean in the Sandwich Island dialect, ' to hang 
upon the dark blue sky.' 



446 CHAPTER XXVI. [1836. 

not attempt to grow any more ; though, if his chief had insisted 
on it, he durst not have refused, as things now stand. This 
mercenary chief has been one of our visitors on board. 

2nd. — In the evening called upon Hiram Bingham and 
Richard Charlton. On our way to the habitation of the latter, 
accidentally met with the seaman's chaplain, who accompanied 
us thither. While together, I felt best satisfied to make 
inquiry as to the probability of the inhabitants being willing 
to attend a religious meeting held on a First day evening ; and 
being assured that the foreigners would come more freely in the 
evening than in the morning, I believed it best for me to agree, 
that public notice should be given at the close of the morning 
meeting, that a meeting for worship after the manner of the 
Society of Friends, was intended to be held there in the evening 
of next First day, at the usual hour of the place being open : 
the use of the Mariners 1 Chapel having been previously offered 
at any time I might be ready to accept it, with every assistance 
that could be suggested, as likely to facilitate my object. 

3rd. — Having prepared a number of written notices of the 
intended public meeting, we landed and took measures for their 
circulation. Called at the reading-rooms, and looked into the 
chapel, which is over them. Captain Keen was employed to 
spread the information of the meeting both on shore and 
amongst the shipping in the harbour. " The Lord is my 
defence, and my God is the rock of my refuge." 

5th. — Yesterday, as our people were left at their liberty to 
attend a place of worship on shore, Charles and myself sat down 
together in the forenoon : with the weight of the prospect 
before me of the appointed meeting to be held in the evening 
with the public, the quiet season we were favoured with was 
both refreshing and strengthening. We landed soon after dark 
to be in readiness for the time appointed, and repaired to the 
place of worship. The time no sooner arrived, than the people 
poured in from every direction, and soon filled nearly all the 
seats. The novelty of a ' Quaker's meeting,'' and the first ever 
held on a Sandwich Island, might induce many to come out of 
curiosity, who at other times never think of attending a place 
of worship ; and it is probable, that the whole of the white 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVI. 447 

residents were present, besides those who came from the 
shipping, and a considerable number of the natives and half- 
castes, with several of the highest authorities in the place ; so 
that the house was crowded, we were informed, as it had never 
been before. Sitting in silence seemed quite incomprehensible 
to nearly all that were there. The first part of the time 
was unsettled by many whispering and talking, and an indi- 
vidual or two not quite sober, were a little troublesome and 
annoying ; but I think I have witnessed in lands accounted 
civilized, a meeting, from one or other cause quite as unsettled, 
though altogether free from the disadvantages under which this 
was labouring. Having sat a considerable time in silence after 
the meeting was fully gathered, it was with me to say, that as 
the disciples formerly were incapable of feeding a hungry mul- 
titude, until the great Master had blessed and broken the bread, 
so it is at this day. Without Him we can do nothing as it 
should be done ; and it is only when He is pleased to qualify 
any of his servants to proclaim his Truth, that the people can 
be availingly benefited. " Without me ye can do nothing, 1 '' 
was our Lord's declaration; and true it is, — for without Him we 
can do nothing, not even think a good thought, nor restrain an 
evil one ; the spirit truly is willing, but the flesh is weak. That 
the Society of which I have the privilege of being a member, 
has always borne a faithful testimony to the excellency of wait- 
ing upon the Lord, as the all-sufficient and only true Teacher 
of his people. After recommending that we should endeavour 
to wait for the influence of the Holy Spirit to solemnize our 
minds together, 1 sat down. The meeting became much more 
settled after this, though doubtless the patience of many were 
tried before the silence was again broken. When the time 
was come, I stood up with these expressions : "I am no pro- 
phet, nor a prophet's son," but in me you may behold a living- 
monument of the Lord's everlasting mercy ; and although, in 
my own estimation, less than the least child that is alive in the 
Truth, yet to me, even unto me is this grace given, that I 
should declare unto others the unsearchable riches of Christ. 
I have no sinister motive in thus coming among you; the 
comprehensive principle of the gospel, which would gather and 



448 chapter xxvr. [1836. 

embrace all mankind, enables me to call every country my 
country, and every man my brother. It is this that has induced 
me to leave a delightful home, and a numerous and endeared 
family, and every thing besides which a mortal need possess, 
and more, — to visit these " isles afar off;" well knowing, that 
whosoever loseth his life for Christ's sake and the gospel's, 
" the same shall save it." I have no new doctrine to preach ; 
the way to the kingdom is the same that it ever was ; the 
foundation is the same, " Jesus Christ himself being the chief 
corner-stone :" — " for other foundation can no man lay than is 
laid." But although the foundation be from everlasting to 
everlasting, yet if the superstructure is not raised upon it, what 
will it avail \ It is, then, of the greatest importance for each 
of us seriously to examine, upon what we are really building 
our hope of salvation ; for a day of trial will come upon every 
man's work : the day will declare it, and the fire of the Lord 
will try of what sort it is ; when nothing will stand and endure 
the trial, but what is built upon the same sure, immutable 
foundation, which the righteous in all ages and generations of 
the world have built upon, — even Christ Jesus the righteous, 
that tried corner-stone, elect of Grod, and precious indeed to 
them that believe and obey His gospel. I had largely to 
declare of the universality of Divine grace, — that none are 
left short of a measure of it : it hath appeared unto all men, 
and its teaching, if regarded, would bring salvation to all men. 
That " a manifestation of the Spirit," which is no other than 
" the Spirit of grace," is "given to every man to profit withal." 
This precious gift was not limited to a few individual members 
of the church only, but extended to all men universally ; first, 
when our holy Redeemer had suffered without the gates of 
Jerusalem on Calvary's mount. " He ascended up on high, 
led captivity captive, and received gifts for men ;" not for an 
elect, chosen few only, to the exclusion of others, but " for 
the rebellious also ; that the Lord God might dwell among 
them,"" as by holy writ declared. So that every man hath " a 
manifestation of the Spirit bestowed on him to profit withal ;" 
however widely this Divine gift may be diversified in its 
operations, or its administrations may differ, it was obtained 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVI. 449 

through the shedding of His blood, " who died for us, arid rose 
again,' 1 '' — " the just for the unjust, that he might bring us unto 
God. 1 ' All men have an opportunity of becoming members of the 
mystical body of Christ, the true church, if but willing to turn 
to the light of the Holy Spirit of the Lord Jesus, that shineth 
in every heart, — " the true light, that lighteth every man that 
cometh into the world." Although many may think them- 
selves dwelling securely, and spending their precious time, days 
without number, in dissipation, folly, and utter forgetfulness of 
God, rejoicing as in the days of thoughtless youth ; yet they 
will be overtaken at last, when least expecting it, in the midst 
of their sinful course, and brought under judgment. " Rejoice 
O ! young man, in thy youth ; and let thy heart cheer thee in 
the days of thy youth ; and walk in the ways of thine heart, 
and in the sight of thine eyes : but know thou, for all these 
things God will bring thee into judgment." Ask the votaries 
of dissipation and folly, after a dark season of sinful pleasure, 
or rather of wretchedness, if they have not felt horror, remorse, 
shame, and fear, the certain and constant attendants upon guilt, 
and which are nothing less than the effects of the strivings of the 
Holy Spirit, discovering unto them their deeds of death and dark- 
ness ; and which, if attended to, would deliver them out of this 
miserable bondage of Satan, and lead them to the knowledge of 
the Holy Spirit of Him, who is the life and light of men. It 
is true that this light would make manifest all their evil deeds ; 
it would set their sins in order before their guilty minds, in 
tenderest mercy and redeeming love ; that they might forsake 
them and repent, return unto God and live. But, alas ! how 
many turn away from these faithful reproofs of instruction, and 
join in fresh scenes of vice and wickedness ; or with large 
draughts of strong and poisonous drink, endeavour to smother 
and drown the voice of this heavenly witness against sin. But 
this light will search them out at last, although but for their 
condemnation. To those who turn inward unto it, and are 
willing to bring their deeds to its shining, the exceeding sinful- 
ness of sin will be discovered : that sorrow of heart will then 
be begotten, which never faileth to work true and unfeigned 
" repentance toward God, and faith toward our Lord Jesus 

2g 



450 CHAPTER XXVI. [1886. 

Christ. 1 ' It was the desire of my heart that all might be 
encouraged to repent, return, and live, by embracing the means 
so amply provided in wondrous love and compassion, for the 
salvation of all mankind. So great was the solemnity that 
continued to be spread over us, that I had to call the atten- 
tion of the people to it, as beyond the reach and power of man 
to produce. The Lord alone was exalted ; His own arm 
brought him the victory and the praise. 

First Mouthy 8th. — Since the 5th instant, our time has been 
filled up in preparing letters for England, and in making a large 
selection of Friends 1 tracts, with several of their standard works, 
illustrating the principles of the Society ; also numerous other 
tracts for depositing in the reading rooms, fitted up by the 
' Seaman's Friend Society in America.' Some of the tracts 
were for general distribution, the others to lend out for perusal ; 
a copy of each of the standard works to remain stationary at the 
rooms : the total number of the above was 1099. There is a 
large field open for the circulation of publications amongst the 
shipping, which touch here for supplies, &c. ; there are at 
present twelve sail in the harbour. This morning furnished 
some Spaniards on board the Basselas, (which sailed for China 
in the afternoon,) with two Testaments, and some other reli- 
gious works in the Spanish language. English Testaments 
were given to two half-white girls, who had learnt to read in 
English. 

10th. — I have several times throughout the week had to look 
towards the approaching First day, as if I might have again 
to go to the natives 1 place of worship, and, probably, hold 
another public meeting with the foreigners in the evening at 
the Mariners 1 Chapel ; but I could not arrive at sufficient clear- 
ness, to warrant the necessary steps being taken to bring these 
things about. This afternoon, it seemed best for me to go on 
shore to Hiram Bingham, and say, that if I should come to the 
native meeting in the morning, I would endeavour to be at his 
house in time : this matter, though in degree arranged, was 
still left open. It was afterwards agreed with the minister of 
the Mariners 1 Chapel, that if I should have to hold another 
meeting with the foreigners to-morrow evening, care would be 



1836.] chaptek xxvr. 451 

taken to inform him in time, that public notice of it might be 
given, at the breaking up of the morning meeting at his place. 
Satisfied with the steps thus far taken, I returned on board 
before dark, leaving the following morning to decide the work 
of the day ; taking care to have a written notice ready, of the 
intended public meeting to be held after the manner of the 
Society of Friends, if the way should be clear to make use of 
it; but I was not satisfied that it should be forwarded, until 
after the native meeting, if I should have to be there. 

11th. (First day.) — Awaking at an early hour with the pros- 
pect of the native meeting full before me, I made no hesitation 
about setting off to attend it. My Charles, w T ho for some days 
past had had considerable irritation about his throat and lungs, 
was too unwell to accompany me, and it was rather a relief 
than otherwise, that he was prevailed upon to remain quietly 
on board. On reaching Hiram Bingham's, I found him also 
unwell with a similar attack of cold, and unable to act the part 
of interpreter for me ; but he had provided Doctor Judd, the 
physician to the mission, who had studied the language, and at 
one time was intended for an ordained preacher in the establish- 
ment : on this head I was satisfied, if I should find occasion 
for an interpreter. A missionary from Hawaii, now here, was 
to supply the place of Hiram Bingham. When going into 
the meeting, I felt a poor creature indeed, now entirely com- 
panionless, and in the midst of strangers : I was bowed down 
before the Lord, who comforted and strengthened my heart ; 
and I felt resigned and willing, and in degree prepared, when 
the first proper interval offered, to stand up. I had not 
spoken to the stranger about to officiate for Hiram Bingham, 
previously to the meeting ; but just at the time when he was 
about to commence his sermon, I got up, and with some diffi- 
culty waded through a dense body of the natives, who were seated 
or squatted so thickly on the floor in front of me, that I could 
scarcely avoid treading on some of them : I took a station in 
front of the pulpit upon the ground floor ; and Doctor Judd 
observing this movement, came and stood beside me. We 
remained in silence, with the eyes of more than two thousand 
five hundred people fixed upon us, until my mouth was opened 

2g2 



452 CHAPTER XXVI. [1836. 

to declare the cause of my again standing before them ; which 
was, that I might be found in the counsel of the Divine will, 
in order that the fulness of the blessing of the gospel might be 
theirs. That " Christ might dwell in their hearts by faith ; 
that they being rooted and grounded in love, might be able to 
comprehend with all saints what is the breadth, and length, 
and depth, and height ; and to know the love of Christ, which 
passeth knowledge ; that they might be filled with all the fulness 
of God. 1 ' That it was not to the high and the mighty that 
the gospel message was sent formerly, neither is it now ; but to 
the " poor in spirit 11 the gospel was, and is still preached ; 
— and blessed are they; — "blessed are the poor in spirit, for 
theirs is the kingdom of heaven i' 1 — these shall be satisfied with 
favour ; they shall be filled with good things, but the rich and 
the full are sent empty away. For upwards of an hour I had 
to declare the glad tidings of the glorious gospel among them ; 
the people were very solid and attentive : they were encouraged 
" to press towards the mark for the prize of the high calling of 
God in Christ Jesus :" — the Lord's love flowed richly in my 
heart towards these people. The meeting was unusually large, 
owing, perhaps, to the governors of three distant islands being- 
there, viz., of Hawaii, Maui, and Tauai. A number of strangers 
came about me when the meeting separated ; and Kuakini, 
the governor of Hawaii, (well known by the name of John 
Adams,) who speaks tolerable English, wanted to know when I 
should come to his island. I could only say that I was not my 
own master ; but it was not improbable that I should visit 
Hawaii before leaving the group. I got off from them as soon 
as I could with propriety, as the way seemed now fully open 
before me to appoint a public meeting for the whites and half- 
castes, to be held at the Mariners 1 Chapel in the evening. 
Repaired to the shore before dark, in time to be in readiness 
for the meeting ; but the approach of a storm, the thunder and 
lightning having commenced, it is probable prevented some 
from being there, as it was not so large as the one held the 
preceding week, but not the less comfortable on that account. 
After sitting long in silence, I had to express a desire, which 
had quickened upon my mind shortly after taking my seat, 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVI. 453 

that it might not be said of us as of a people formerly, — " This 
people draweth nigh unto me with their mouth, and honoureth 
me with their lips, but their heart is far from me ;" and to 
explain the necessity of drawing nigh and waiting upon the 
Lord, and of persevering to wrestle for that spiritual blessing, 
which makes truly rich, and whereunto no sorrow is added. 
We again dropped into silence, during which, only one person 
went out. In a short time afterwards, I stood up with those 
expressions of the apostle, " We through the Spirit wait for 
the hope of righteousness by faith ;'" by which we are justified, 
and have peace with God the Father, through the Son, our 
Lord and Saviour Jesus Christ ; — even that peace, which the 
world with all its delusions cannot give ; and, blessed be the 
name of the Lord, of Israel's God, neither can it take one par- 
ticle of it away. I had largely to speak of the beauty of true 
spiritual worship, and also of the life and immortality which 
are brought to light by the gospel ; and of the possibility of the 
day of visitation passing over unheeded, and the things which 
belong to the soul's eternal peace being for ever hidden from 
our eyes, for want of walking in the light of the Lord Jesus : 
it was a solemn, comfortable meeting, yielding peace. When 
it broke up the rain fell in torrents, and the streets, in some 
places, were literally running in sheets of water : but for the 
friendly assistance of a stranger, who procured a lantern, we 
could not easily have found our way to the sea-side, so dark 
was the night. The rain fell in such quantities, that the 
water was about our feet in the boat, although she had been 
once emptied out after leaving the vessel. The captain only 
was with me ; and I was thankful that my Charles had not 
ventured on shore that night. 

12th. — In the morning, a native teacher called on board, 
named Tootee, (i. e. Cookee,) after Captain Cook. He was 
born at Huahine, and with another teacher since deceased, was 
sent to these islands several years ago : there was something- 
agreeable about him ; and we find that he is well spoken of bv 
those who know him. 

13th. — This forenoon, Kuakini, the governor of the island of 
Hawaii, came on board ; he was proceeding homeward in his 



454 CHAPTER XXVI. [1836. 

own schooner, but having- to convey the princess Harrietta 
Nahienaena, the king's sister, to the island of Maui, was 
detained until her arrival on board his vessel, which was 
standing off and on, while he paid us a visit during the interval, 
to invite us to the shores of Hawaii. We had a good oppor- 
tunity to show him what must inevitably be the dreadful 
result, if measures are not speedily taken to check the deso- 
lating scourge of rum, with which the American ships are 
deluging these much to be pitied islanders. He is an intelli- 
gent person, and speaks very fair English, considering it has 
been acquired only by intercourse with the crews of the British 
and American whaling vessels. He said that the use of rum 
was prohibited at Hawaii among the natives, and that it was 
only in the hands of foreigners. We told him that the 
foreigners would be the certain ruin of these islands, if the 
government did not lay such a tax upon all spirit dealers, as 
would place this curse of the human race beyond the reach of 
the natives, and render it not worth any person's while to con- 
tinue the sale of it. They have tried, he said, to abolish it here, 
(Oahu,) but could not do it, — adding, ' the king is fond of it ;' 
— at the same time intimating that the princess not being ready 
this morning was owing to the king's being intoxicated last 
night. He said, the merchants here, (who are all Americans,) 
take good care to supply the king with money, and every other 
thing that he wants : by this plan they have him so completely 
in their hands, as to succeed in persuading him, that it is to the 
interest of the islands to allow the free use of spirits. Kuakini is 
about the largest man we have met with ; but he seems to pos- 
sess very little bodily strength in proportion to his ponderous 
bulk, and has very little use of his limbs : he is forty-five 
years of age. He could not climb up our little vessel's side 
without the assistance of two men, and a descent into the 
cabin was quite a serious fatigue : the passage down was cer- 
tainly not sufficiently wide to allow him to make use of his 
unwieldly legs and arms. He told us his sight was failing-, 
asking for a pair of spectacles, which were immediately handed 
to him : although very coarse articles and rusty from the 
dampness of the vessel he seemed glad to have them. He 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVI. ±55 

would have stopped while some fish was prepared ; but the 
arrival of his passenger summoned him away as quickly as he 
was capable of moving. 

Yesterday, arrived the Thetis schooner, from Ascension 
Island. This vessel has had a mutiny on board : her captain 
and several of the crew were murdered by one man in the 
night, a Bengalee ; who himself sprung overboard at last, and 
was shot by one of the surviving sailors. They suffered much 
from the natives, or rather from the runaway sailors, at 
Strong's Island, one of the Pescadores. 

First Month, 1 Uh. — In the evening met with an interesting 
young Spaniard and his sister, the wife of an English merchant 
of California. This young man had been in the United States, 
and spoke good English ; but his sister knew only the Spanish 
language. In the course of conversation, I mentioned having 
some books on board in Spanish, and proposed to furnish some 
of them ; at which they seemed grateful and gladly accepted 
the offer. 

ilth. — Yesterday visited the school for half- white girls, it 
being the anniversary of its establishment three years ago. To 
teach this class of children is a laudable undertaking, and 
highly needful on their behalf. These children are of a descrip- 
tion calculated to do either much good or much harm upon 
these islands, from their knowledge of the native language, 
derived from the mother's side : this, in conjunction with a 
moral education, would tend to assist in the civilization of the 
people at large ; at the same time there is much reason to 
fear their assuming a superiority over the natives, from their 
nearness of kin to Europeans or Americans from whom they 
have sprung. Although little to be proud of on this account, 
yet it mostly happens that they abound in pride and haugh- 
tiness ; and the fathers of such being for the most part runaway 
sailors, rum-sellers, or other profligate characters, their offspring, 
from earliest age, are accustomed to scenes of vice and wicked- 
ness ; the effects of which are not likely to be shaken off as 
they grow up, but rather to render them highly injurious to 
the natives around them, by their unrestrained, immoral, and 
base conduet and example. Not the least difficulty to be sur- 



456 CHAPTER XXVI. [1886. 

mounted, is that of finding suitable employment to keep them 
out of mischief, having been trained in habits of sloth and 
idleness, and ignorance of every domestic and useful occupa- 
tion whatever. We have had a visit from the surgeon of the 
British whaler Corsair, lately arrived from Ascension Isle. 
The Corsair was lost upon the Nautilus Reef, near one of the 
Kingsmill group. This young man, with five seamen, were 
saved in a whale-boat : after enduring great hardship for want 
of food, they were favoured at last to reach the isle of Ascen- 
sion, in the North Pacific. The Corsair was fitting out in the 
West India dock, at the time the Henry Freeling was equipping 
in the City Canal, in 1833. 

18th. (First day.) — Having no engagement on shore, the 
day was spent on board with our own people. In the after- 
noon, two seamen from the Ganymede, of London, on her way 
to the Hudson's Bay Company's settlement on the Columbia 
River, north-west coast of America, attended with our men. I 
had a few words to utter in testimony to the light of Christ 
Jesus, which shines in every heart : and the necessity of bring- 
ing our thoughts, words, and actions to it. Before leaving 
our vessel, these men were furnished with tracts of different 
kinds. 

24sth. — In the course of the week, a prospect of holding 
another public meeting with the foreigners and half-whites in 
the Mariners' 1 Chapel, has at intervals crossed my mind ; and 
yesterday afternoon, accidentally meeting with the missionary 
from the Columbia River, (at present here on a visit,) who 
occasionally officiates as pastor, he asked me in plain terms, 
if I would occupy the Mariners'' Chapel next First day, either 
in the morning, afternoon, or evening. I told him that I had 
thought a little about it ; but it seemed to pass away at the 
moment, and nothing was fixed, although I was not quite clear 
of the subject. To-day it seemed best for me to see this young 
man again, and to tell him, if right for me to do so, I would 
send him a written notice to be read at the close of the morning 
meeting, which would serve as an invitation to all present to 
attend a meeting in the evening, held according to the practice 
of Friends. 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVI. 457 

26th; — On Seventh day evening, having prepared written 
notices of the intended meeting before-mentioned, in readiness 
for distribution on First day morning, and finding freedom to 
circulate them when the day opened, Captain Keen was com- 
missioned to do the needful, in order to spread the information 
that a meeting for worship would be held in the evening, after 
the usual manner of our Society. In the course of the day our 
crew assembled for devotional purposes. The weight of the . 
prospect spread upon my mind, was as a heavy burden through 
the day, raising in me strong cries to Him from whom only 
cometh help and strength, for ability to do His will, and to 
exalt His ever great and excellent name. We repaired in time 
to the shore, and were the first that took seats in the meeting. 
The people gathered slowly, but with quietness ; and the number 
was probably as large as at any time previously. After a con- 
siderable time of silence, beyond all expectation solid, I had to 
supplicate Him who only hath immortality, and dwelling in the 
light ; — that every thing in us that stood opposed to His righ- 
teous principle of light, life, and love, might be shaken and 
removed out of the way ; that that only which cannot be 
shaken may remain, — to the exaltation of His own great 
name, and the establishment of the kingdom of Christ Jesus, 
which shall never have an end. Afterwards the people sat as 
if accustomed to silence. The first expressions with which the 
silence was broken, were ; — As " no man can save his brother, 
or give to God a ransom for his soul ;" so no man can p.erform 
for another the solemn act of worshipping the Almighty 
Creator. If I were to speak to you, or read to you for an hour, 
it would only be an act between a man and his fellow-creatures, 
and not worship ; for worship can only be performed between a 
man and his Maker, who is a Spirit. " God is a Spirit : and 
they that worship Him, must worship Him in spirit and in 
truth. ,, — "The Father seeketh such to worship Him." — "Our 
fathers worshipped in this mountain ;"" said the woman of 
Samaria to our condescending Lord ; " and ye say, that in 
Jerusalem is the place where men ought to worship. Jesus 
saith unto her, Woman, believe me, the hour cometh, when ye 
shall neither in this mountain, nor yet at Jerusalem, worship 



458 CHATTER XXVI. [1836. 

the Father. Ye worship ye know not what : we know what 
we worship ; for salvation is of the Jews. But the hour 
cometh, and now is, when the true worshippers shall worship 
the Father in spirit and in truth ; for the Father seeketh 
such to worship Him." This is the will of the Father, that 
we should hear His beloved Son, Christ Jesus : — " I am the 
light of the world," said He, " he that followeth me shall not 
walk in darkness, but shall have the light of life." The same 
eternal Power who said, " Let there be light, and there was 
light ;"" — even God, who commanded the light to shine out of 
darkness, hath shined in our hearts, to give us the light of the 
knowledge of His own glory, in the face of Christ Jesus : it 
is to this light that all men must be turned, and to which all 
men must come if they are saved. This is the condemnation, 
that light is come into the world, and men are not willing to 
believe in it, because it makes manifest their dark and sinful 
state : they love darkness rather than light, because their deeds 
are evil. " For every one that doeth evil hateth the light, 
neither cometh to it, lest his deeds should be reproved." Such 
continue under the power of Satan ; " but he that doeth truth 
cometh to the light, that his deeds may be made manifest, that 
they are wrought in God ;" — he is turned from darkness to light, 
and from the power of Satan unto God : — he receiveth forgive- 
ness of sins, and inheritance among them which are sanctified 
by faith which is in Christ Jesus, the life and light of men. 
The people were very attentive, and such a solemn stillness 
prevailed the greatest part of the time, that if they could not 
have been seen upon their seats, it would have been difficult to 
ascertain whether any persons were present. It was the Lord's 
doing ; and as is His name, so is His praise for ever ! 

27th. — Yesterday had a satisfactory visit from the Canadian 
missionary stationed on the Columbia river, north-west coast 
of America. He was desirous of information respecting the 
principles of our religious Society, and of possessing a Book of 
Extracts ; from having only one on board the Henry Freeling 
of the new edition, a copy of the old edition was given him, 
with a copy of Bates's Doctrines^ &c. I look forward to fur- 
nishing him with some religious tracts, which may be useful 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVI. 459 

to the North American Indians, amongst whom a mission is 
established ; although the result is hopeless indeed, as these 
poor people are too often paid in rum by the trading vessels, 
both American and British, for their beaver skins, &c. ; which, 
with other causes, is fast sweeping from the face of the earth 
this injured race of mankind. Muskets and gunpowder are 
among the principal articles of barter goods taken to them. 

This afternoon I received a letter from the senior missionary 
here, of which the following extract is part : — 

' I am happy to inform you that to-day we commence a series 
of meetings with the people for their spiritual benefit. The 
hours of service for five days will be sun-rise, ten o'clock a. m., 
two o'clock p. m., four o'clock p. m., in the natives 1 chapel ; and 
a meeting at one of our houses at half- past seven o" 1 clock p. m. 
Probably there will be present some hundreds of the people 
more than usual, possibly a thousand : perhaps our chapel will 
be filled : several of my brethren will be present from the other 
stations on this island. If you will favour us with your assist- 
ance to-morrow at ten, or at four o'clock, I will gladly interpret 
for you, Providence permitting. Shall be happy to see you 
and your son at any of our meetings, — the field is white. 1 

I called the same evening at the writer's house ; and having 
considered the subject, acknowledged the receipt of his letter, 
and told him that I had felt nothing upon my mind towards 
the meetings to-morrow, which he had mentioned. All that 
seemed safe for me to say was, that I had a desire to be 
present when the largest body of the people was collected 
together. It appeared to me that the forenoon of the following 
First day would be the right time for me to be there, which 
was at last fully agreed upon. Whilst at this house, five mar- 
riages were solemnized at seven o'clock p. m., in the room 
where we sat. This ceremony to four couples was performed in 
the native language, and in English to the fifth, the man being 
an American negro. One thousand five hundred and forty-six 
marriages have taken place upon these islands within the last 
year. It is hoped that the institution of regular marriage 



460 CHAPTER XXVI. [1886. 

will be of use to this people ; but it is greatly to be feared, from 
what the missionary himself said, that their solemn vows and 
promises are soon forgotten. 

First Month, SOth. — On Fifth day our meeting was held 
as usual. Yesterday employed in selecting various books and 
lessons for the use of schools. For the last two or three days, 
the prospect before me of attending the native meeting has been 
more formidable than usual, from the apprehension, lest I should 
be found running, if not altogether unsent, without an evidence 
sufficiently strong, that it is my duty to be there. I have 
endeavoured to keep close to the exercise, though in much 
conflict of mind. 

31st. (First day.) — Had an almost sleepless night, but 
towards morning the way seemed to open with relieving clear- 
ness for me to attend the native meeting : landed in due time, 
and called upon the missionary, who accompanied us to the 
meeting. When on the way, Hiram Bingham asked whether 
I would prefer speaking to the people before the service began, 
or after it was over. This question was so unexpected, that I 
replied without proper consideration, that I had rather wait, 
I meant in silence before the Lord ; but he supposed until their 
service was gone through, and of course matters went on in 
their usual way. I felt regret afterwards that I had not more 
fully entered into explanation at the moment. It was after- 
wards proposed by Hiram Bingham that I should go into the 
pulpit with himself and another missionary, saying, that the 
crowd would be so great that he should not be heard if he 
interpreted from the floor. This proposal was declined at 
first ; but on getting into the place, I was convinced that if I 
did not go then, it would scarcely be possible afterwards should 
it be needful, as the floor was already almost a solid mass of 
people; so we proceeded accordingly without delay. I sat 
as one who had the sentence of death in himself, and felt so 
much depressed, that at one time I thought of telling Hiram 
Bingham that I did not expect to have any thing to say to 
the people, but was withheld from doing so. In addition to 
their usual services on these occasions, a child was baptized, 
and it seemed long before all was finished, and general silence 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVI. 461 

prevailed. After a short interval I stood up, when Hiram 
Bingham exhorted the people to stillness. I remarked on 
taking up the time of the meeting, which had already sat long ; 
but that I was induced to stand before them once more to com- 
municate whatever might be given me on the occasion. The 
attention of the people seemed now fully arrested, and after a 
solemn pause it was with me to express the encouraging lan- 
guage of the Lord's prophet, — " Arise, shine ; thy light is come, 
and the glory of the Lord is risen upon thee. For behold, the 
darkness shall cover the earth, and gross darkness the people : 
but the Lord shall arise upon thee and his glory shall be seen 
upon thee." Thus was announced by holy inspiration, the 
light of that glorious gospel morning, then preparing to dawn 
upon the benighted regions of the earth, to dispel the mists 
of darkness from the mind of man ; that sin should no longer 
have dominion over the human race, but that mercy and truth 
should meet together, and love, and joy, and peace through 
righteousness, should prevail from the river to the uttermost 
parts of the earth : that as sin hath reigned unto death, so 
now might grace reign through righteousness, unto eternal life, 
by Jesus Christ our Lord. There is no other way by which 
mankind can participate in the life and immortality that are 
brought to light by the gospel, than that of believing in 
Christ Jesus, and turning to the light of His Holy Spirit, 
which shineth in every heart. I was sure that these beloved 
people (telling them so) were no strangers to the name of Christ : 
but that the bare name is not enough ; I wanted them to 
become acquainted with His power, to save them from their 
sins : without this He would be no Saviour of theirs. The number 
of people present was computed at four thousand and upwards, 
and being placed above them, the heat was almost insupport- 
able : they stood in crowds outside of the six double doors, and 
about a window that was open at the back of the pulpit. The 
building is one hundred and ninety-six feet long, and sixty- 
eight feet wide, and was, to all appearance, as full as the people 
could pack together. The mercy of the Lord is from ever- 
lasting to everlasting, and His truth to all generations of them 
that fear and love Him. We sat a few minutes with Hiram 



462 CHAPTER XXVI. [18SC. 

Bingham's family after the meeting concluded ; and then 
returned on board to our own crew, who were assembled in the 
cabin in the afternoon. 

Second Month 9th. — Whilst at the Consul's yesterday 
evening, with eight or nine other persons, and a general con- 
versation going forward in which I had taken little or no share, 
I felt my heart attracted by that power, at whose approach the 
earth is silent ; and abiding under it, I thought that some- 
thing might arise towards the company present, but in that 
was mistaken. Remaining for some time under sensible weak- 
ness and fear, a public meeting next First day forenoon, at the 
Mariners' Chapel was presented to the view of my mind ; to 
which I was favoured to feel resigned and willing, keeping the 
matter closely to myself. 

loth — Not able to take any exercise on shore since last 
Second day, until yesterday evening, on account of the extreme 
wetness of the weather, it being the rainy season in this region. 
In the course of our walk, called upon one of the missionaries 
for the translation of an article relative to the arrival of the 
Henry Freeling at Oahu, that had appeared in the Hawaiian 
Teacher, a semi-monthly periodical, printed at the mission 
press, and edited by a regularly ordained minister. When 
coming away, without any previous hint on my part, he kindly 
proposed that I should have the Mariners 1 Chapel to-morrow, 
(First day,) either in the forenoon or evening, or both. I 
parted from him with saying, I should turn the matter over 
and let him know, in order that timely notice might be given, 
if the meeting was of my appointing, so that the people might 
be fully aware of its being held according to the established, 
practice of Friends : but I thought it well to wait a further 
time before giving a decided answer, lest it should not come to 
pass ; although the prospect had been again and again before 
me early and late, at intervals, since I first got sight of it. 

This morning, being Seventh day, it seemed best for me to 
move forward by having notices prepared, that information 
might be well spread in good time, both on the shore and on 
board of the shipping. While these were preparing, I went on 
shore to the missionary, and told him that I believed it safest 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVI. 463 

for me to hold a meeting to-morrow in the forenoon : the way 
was now thoroughly cleared for the distribution of the notices ; 
and I endeavoured to dwell under the weight of the responsi- 
bility of this important engagement, which seemed fastened upon 
me. as a knot not easily untied. My mind is often turned 
to the Lord with secret cries for help : greatly do I desire 
that the noble cause of Truth may not be tarnished in my 
hands ; but that His ever great and adorable name may be 
exalted, and the people turned to the power of the Holy Spirit 
of the Lord Jesus, and the creature laid low and kept in depend- 
ence on Him alone ; that the work and the praise may be His, 
unto whom the kingdom, and the power, and the glory, for ever 
belong. In the afternoon spent some time with the manager 
of the book-binding department of the American printing- 
establishment : his wife superintends a school of the native 
children, and with her husband appears to move in much plain- 
ness and simplicity. 

15th. — After a restless night, landed in good time yesterday 
morning in readiness for the appointed meeting ; which was well 
attended by the residents and strangers from the shipping. 
After a time of silence, it was with me to revive among them 
the Divine command, "Be still, and know that I am God ;" 
and that this command must be obeyed before we can come to 
the blessed knowledge of the only true God, and his Son Jesus 
Christ, whom to know is life eternal : — desiring that we might 
humble ourselves before Him, and in the silence of all flesh 
" be still :" peradventure He would graciously condescend to 
overshadow us with his heavenly presence. After recom- 
mending that we should endeavour to settle down in stillness 
of mind before the God of the spirits of all flesh, I again 
resumed my seat. A comforting solemnity soon spread over 
us, under the precious covering of which we sat, until the time 
was come for my standing up again, when it seemed increas- 
ingly to prevail. I reminded them of the expressions of those 
formerly, who were struck with the display of the Divine 
power of the Saviour of the world when personally upon earth, 
■ — " What manner of man is this, that even the winds and the 
sea obey Him V and that the solemnity then so evident was 



464 CHAPTER XXVI. [1836. 

not at our command, but came from Him, unto whom all 
power in heaven and earth is given. Man cannot cause it : 
hath he " commanded the morning since his days, or caused the 
day-spring to know his place V Nay, verily, no more than the 
leopard can change his spots, and the Ethiopian his skin ; — it 
is in the power of Him only, who " declareth unto man what is 
his thought,'" to do this. We must all pass through the great 
work of regeneration, before the kingdom can be entered ; it is 
wrought in the heart through the faith of the operation of God, 
who raised from the dead our Lord Jesus, that great Shepherd 
of the sheep; by whom, and with whom, we must also rise from 
death unto life : but before we can rise with Him, we must 
be willing to suffer with Him ; we must know what it is to be 
crucified with Him, — the lust of the eyes, and the pride of life, 
totally disregarded and set at naught. But these things, which 
war against the soul, must be removed, before we can know and 
be admitted into the fellowship of His sufferings ; and we must 
witness the power of his resurrection, before we can adopt for 
ourselves, from heart-felt living knowledge, the apostolic lan- 
guage of — " I am crucified with Christ ; nevertheless I live, yet 
not I, but Christ liveth in me : and the life which I now live in 
the flesh, I live by the faith of the Son of Grod, who loved me, 
and gave himself for me." There is no obtaining and wearing 
the crown, but by the way of the cross : we must be willing 
to suffer with our suffering Lord ; and it is only such as suffer 
with him, that shall reign with Him in glory. We must be 
willing to bring our deeds to the light of the Holy Spirit of 
the Lord Jesus, which shineth in every heart, and to bear the 
indignation of the Lord, because we have sinned against him ; 
— to sit alone and keep silence, ashamed and confounded, as in 
the dust, because of the reproach of our youth : and it is only 
while we have the light, that we can thus bring our deeds to it, 
and walk in it. He that walketh in darkness knoweth not 
whither he goeth : and if by neglect and disobedience, the light 
in us be darkness, how great is that darkness ! We may sin 
out the day of our visitation ; then the candle of the Lord is 
withdrawn, or put out ; for He hath declared, " My Spirit 
shall not alwavs strive with man." These visitations are the 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVI. 465 

merciful tokens of the Father's love, to draw man to the Holy 
Spirit of His beloved Son in the heart, " the life and light of 
men ;" unto whom, although shining in all, none of us can 
come in our own will and strength, or by any inherent righteous- 
ness of our own. " No man cometh unto me," said Christ, 
" except my Father which hath sent me draw him ; and I will 
raise him up at the last day."''' As no man cometh to the Son 
but by the Father, so no man cometh to the Father but by 
the Son ; according to his word, " No man cometh to the 
Father but by me." By grace are we saved, and that not of 
ourselves ; it is through the boundless mercy and everlasting 
love of God in Jesus Christ. After this manner was I 
strengthened to declare that loving-kindness which is better 
than life, and to testify of that grace, which comes by Jesus 
Christ. The meeting held longer than usual, but ended well : 
I trust the Lord magnified his own power in the hearts of 
some; who is blessed and worthy, and God over all for ever. 
Most of the missionary families were present. 

16th. — Visited the school for native girls, under the super- 
intendence of a missionary's wife ; which, for good order and 
general quietness, is the best conducted establishment of the kind 
we have yet seen. For some time after the formation of this 
school, the children could not be prevailed upon to go forward 
with the regular duties, without an adopted child of the queen's 
led the way, and had the preference shown to her. When 
ordered to break up at noon, or in the afternoon, they would 
all retain their seats ; and when the reason was asked for this, 
would say, ' Let the queen go first ;' although she was a mere 
shrimp, in size, compared with many of the other children, and 
not more than six years old. The school-mistress has taken 
much pains to abolish such an unnecessary and invidious dis- 
tinction, and has not hesitated to punish this child when in 
fault, like the other children, without showing any partiality 
because of her patronage ; for a time this gave great offence, 
but by firmness and steady perseverance the difficulty was at 
last completely surmounted. Most of the children have now got 
the better of yielding such undue servility, although it is said 
that some of the timid still consider this child's word as law. 

9 H 



CHAPTER XXVII, 



[1836. 



CHAPTER XXVII. 

INTERVIEW WITH THE QUEEN PUBLIC MEETING HALF-CASTE BOYs' 

SCHOOL ADDRESS TO THE RULERS OF THE SANDWICH ISLANDS 

VISIT FROM THE MISSION FAMILIES MEETING AT THE CHAPEL 

AN INFIDEL SHIP^ COMPANY— APPOINTED MEETING DEPARTURE 

FROM HONOLULU HAWAII ANCHOR IN KALAKAKUA BAY 

PUBLIC MEETING^ INTERESTING OPPORTUNITY WITH THE MISSION 

FAMILY PROCEED TO KAILUA NATIVE MEETINGS VISIT OF 

THE KING DEPARTURE FOR WAIMEA. 

Second Month 17th, 1836. — This evening repaired to Hiram 
Bingham's by appointment to meet Kinau, the reigning chiefess, 
or queen. Her husband Kekuanoa was there, and Kanaina 
another principal chief and his wife, a woman of higher rank 
than Kinau on her father's side. It proved an interesting 
season ; they were desirous of being instructed in the best mode 
of governing the islands, and benefiting the people. I told 
them, there is but one way to effect this, and that is upon the 
principles of the gospel ; nothing else will stand. Kinau has 
long been desirous of prohibiting the importation and use of 
ardent spirits altogether, and requested some advice upon this 
head. It would require caution, I said ; but that the first step 
would be to stop all further importation ; and that they them- 
selves had better become purchasers of the stock on hand, and 
empty the rum into the river, than that the people should be 
destroyed by its effects ; the dealers would then have no cause 
to complain : that best wisdom should be sought for to direct, 
and that all these things should be conducted throughout in a 
Christian spirit. It is high time something was done to remove 
this evil from amongst the people. They expressed satisfaction 
with the interview, and suggested that we should meet again 
for the further consideration of this important subject, viz. the 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVII. 467 

best manner of governing the islands and benefiting the people. 
Both these females are tall, portly women, of shrewd under- 
standing, and have a gentleness in their demeanour not usually 
possessed by others of the same rank, though on first appearing 
they assume much reserve and austerity. 

18th. — Some time back my mind was attracted towards pre- 
paring something like an address, to be left with those that bear 
rule over the inhabitants of these islands ; which might serve 
to remind them at a future day, that I had not omitted to warn 
them of those evils, which, if suffered to continue, will under- 
mine every effort to improve their condition, both civil and 
religious. The conversation which took place last evening 
seems to have opened the way for something further, and con- 
firmed me in believing myself required, as ability may be 
afforded, to draw up and leave some written document for the 
clearance of myself towards them. 

20th. — Before retiring to rest, I began to feel a little towards 
the evening meeting at the Mariners' chapel to-morrow, and 
the love of the gospel flowed in my heart so encouragingly, 
that a willingness was at once begotten, to give up to a meeting 
being appointed on my account. 

21st. (First day.) — This morning I received a note written 
at seven o'clock a.m., from the American preacher, offering 
his place of worship for an evening meeting. On solidly con- 
sidering the subject, I believe, with an honest desire to do the 
will of my gracious Master, I did not feel easy to let the oppor- 
tunity pass away without availing myself of it ; and therefore, 
in due time sent written information, in order to insure its 
being held as a Friends' 1 meeting. In the course of the day our 
sailors were assembled twice for devotional purposes ; and in 
the evening they attended the public meeting at a quarter past 
seven o'clock, an hour best adapted to the climate and the 
people'. The meeting was larger than looked for, as the weather 
was showery ; a number of strangers were present, who had 
arrived two days previously from Boston, also the most seriously 
inclined of the residents, several branches of the missionary 
establishment, with an increased number of sailors, and many 
of the islanders. We sat long in silence, but under a feeling, 

2h2 



468 CHAPTER XXVII. [1836. 

solemn beyond expression, which chained down opposing spirits. 
When the time came for me to stand up, I had to contrast the 
worship of Almighty God under the Jewish dispensation in 
the outward temple, with that of the gospel in the inner temple 
of the heart ; the latter altogether spiritual, because " God is a 
spirit, and they that worship him, must worship him in spirit 
and in truth." How can we so expressively manifest our fear 
and love in approaching the presence -of infinite purity, as 
in solemn, awful silence, in humble watchfulness of mind, 
endeavouring to detect and suppress every creaturely desire ? 
Words are inadequate, and not essential in the performance of 
worship to Him who is a Spirit, for his Holy Spirit searcheth 
all things ; the most hidden and secret thought is known to 
this all- penetrating, all-searching Power. No offering is accept- 
able to Him, but what He himself prepares ; for " the prepara- 
tion of the heart in man, and the answer of the tongue, is of the 
Lord ;" and the entire prostration of the will of the creature, 
under the preparing sanctifying influence of his Almighty 
power, constitutes the pure, unadulterated offering ; which, 
free from human contrivance and performance, rises a spiri- 
tual sacrifice, acceptable to God, through the Holy Spirit 
of the Lord Jesus Christ, the great and everlasting high 
priest of our profession. The people were called upon to 
behold what manner of love the Father hath bestowed upon his 
creature man, that we should become his sons : for who can 
comprehend the greatness of that love, wherewith " God so 
loved the world, that he gave his only begotten Son, that 
whosoever believeth in Him should not perish, but have ever- 
lasting life :" who can contemplate the fulness and extent 
of love like this, and not feel a grateful tribute to arise, of 
" thanks be unto God for his unspeakable gift !" My soul 
longeth that all mankind may become acquainted with the 
preciousness of this costly gift. It is the same memorable 
and instructive conference of the blessed Saviour with the 
Samaritan woman, when He condescended to answer her ques- 
tion, " How is it that thou, being a Jew, ask est drink of 
me, who am a woman of Samaria V for the Jews have no 
dealings with the Samaritans. " If thou knewest the gift 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVII. 469 

of God, 11 our Lord replied, " and who it is that saith unto 
thee, Give me to drink ; thou wouldest have asked of Him, 
and he would have given thee living water. 11 " The woman 
saith unto him, Sir, thou hast nothing to draw with, and 
the well is deep ; from whence then hast thou this living 
water ? Art thou greater than our father Jacob, who gave us 
the well, and drank thereof himself, and his children, and his 
cattle ? Jesus answered and said unto her, Whosoever drinketh 
of this water shall thirst again ; but whosoever drinketh of the 
water that I shall give him, shall never thirst ; but the water 
that I shall give him, shall be in him a well of water springing 
up into everlasting life. 11 The poor woman perceiving the great 
advantage of possessing water, of which " he that drinketh 
shall never thirst, 11 said, " Sir, give me this water that I thirst 
not, neither come hither to draw. 11 Her expectation was thus 
raised, and her understanding opened more and more to discern, 
from what followed, that she had met with one, from whom 
nothing was hidden, and that knew all that was in her heart ; 
and perceiving that He was a prophet, and by inquiry having 
elicited for the lasting benefit of all mankind, the declaration, 
that the hour was come, " that the true worshippers shall 
worship the Father in spirit and in truth;' 1 — confounded and 
self-convicted, she concluded by saying, " I know that Messias 
cometh, which is called Christ ; when he is come, he will tell 
us all things. 11 Then the Lord of life and glory was pleased to 
reveal himself, telling her, " I that speak unto thee am he. 11 
From what she had heard and felt, she could not for a moment 
doubt ; and leaving her water-pot, went her way into the city to 
proclaim his power, and declare Him to her brethren ; — " Come, 
see a man which told me all things that ever I did : is not this 
the Christ V I was strengthened to make a solemn and con- 
fident appeal to all present, who had attained to years capable 
of serious thought and reflection, if they had not at seasons 
heard the voice of this " unspeakable gift, 11 — bringing to their 
remembrance " all things that ever they did," in order that 
they might repent, return unto God, and live for ever. This is 
the grace that brings salvation, — in this we must all believe, — 
to this we must all come, and hearken and obey its teachings. 



470 CHAPTER XXVII. [1836. 

The above is the substance of what was declared amongst them : 
the people were very attentive, as has been uniformly the case 
at every meeting. 

Second Month 24>th. — This afternoon the Columbia barque 
and Beaver steam-vessel prepared to proceed to the Columbia 
river. Before sailing, they were furnished with a supply of 
tracts, viz. those printed for Friends, for the Religious Tract 
Society, and a number of temperance tracts, which were 
received with apparent kindness. The crews of these vessels 
are amongst the most profligate that have visited the port of 
Honolulu since our arrival ; they are both in the employ of 
the London Hudson's Bay Company. 

Whilst on shore this evening in the direction of Diamond 
Hill, I was suddenly attracted by an appearance of light over the 
hills, which I supposed to be the rising moon ; but I soon found 
it was a beautiful meteor, appearing like two splendid bars of 
light, parallel to each other, travelling towards the north. 
The natives shouted on seeing it, considering it a forerunner of 
the death of one of their principal chiefs. 

25th. — Held our week-day meeting as usual, which proved a 
low, stripped and barren season ; but we must be content to 
suffer with a suffering Lord ; and truly the state of the people 
in this place is affectingly dark, — the prince of darkness reigns 
unmasked, — the lives and conduct of the major part of the 
white residents declare it openly, to whom these remarks prin- 
cipally refer. 

26th. — To-day visited the school of half- white boys. As 
our calling was altogether unexpected, there could have been 
no contrivance whatever to show off to the best advantage. 
Sixteen boys were present : we heard them read, spell, and 
answer a variety of questions, and saw specimens of their 
writing. This school has been established rather more than 
three years, and although no great progress has been made by 
any of the scholars ; yet when we consider the habits in which 
they have been trained, and the baneful examples to which 
they are daily and almost hourly exposed when at home, of 
drinking, swearing, gambling, and every evil that can well be 
imagined, it is surprising that they are as they are. Several 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVII. 471 

of the parents are grog-sellers, and keepers of gambling-houses. 
Some of the children are the offspring of the principal inha- 
bitants, American or English, on the father's side, who live 
with native women, but unmarried. In point of intellect these 
children are equal to any in the world, and some of them parti- 
cularly quick and intelligent ; but none more so than one true- 
born native boy, adopted by a white resident, from supposed 
motives of policy. On hearing them read some manuscript 
verses on ' a little boy that never told a lie,' also a paper 
against committing sin, I perceived something gathering upon 
my mind, and told the master that I wished to say a few 
words before we separated, as we might never meet together 
again. I wished them fully to understand, that the knowledge 
they were acquiring would in reality be of no benefit, but render 
their condemnation greater, unless obedience kept pace with it ; 
reviving the Saviour's words, — " If ye know these things, happy 
are ye if ye do them." That those verses on ' a little boy that 
never told a lie,'' or those ' against committing sin,' even if they 
had them by heart, would be of no avail to them, if they gave 
way to telling lies, or to committing any other sin : for 
" nothing that is unclean, nothing that is impure, that worketh 
an abomination, or maketh a lie," shall enter the kingdom of 
heaven. That the only way to escape falling into temptation, 
is at all times, as much as may be, to consider ourselves in 
the presence of Almighty God ; who sees and knows all our 
actions, and the most secret thoughts of the heart, by His 
Holy Spirit, which searcheth all things, even the deep things 
of God ; every imagination of our thoughts is known to Him, 
nothing can be hid. That some of them were old enough to 
know when they did wrong, either in telling untruths, or when 
in any other way they committed sin ; they then felt uncom- 
fortable and unhappy in themselves : that these are the 
reproofs of the Holy Spirit for sin and disobedience, and if 
attended to would lead to life; and to these I wished them 
to take heed. That the Lord loveth an early sacrifice : He 
delighteth to regard it : that they must have heard what the 
voice of wisdom saith in the Holy Scriptures ; " I love them 
that love me, and they that seek me early shall find me." That 



4/2 CHAPTER XXVII. [1836. 

they could not begin too soon to seek an acquaintance with the 
Lord's Holy Spirit in their hearts, that so they might become 
truly wise. That the great end and object of all teaching and 
all learning, should be to make wise unto salvation. The boys 
were very attentive, and behaved in a solid manner. We 
remained until the school was dismissed, *and then returned on 
board. In the evening we were again on shore, and were 
detained there until after nine o'clock, by a violent storm of 
thunder, lightning, and rain. 

29th. — Yesterday, First day, collected the crew twice in the 
cabin for devotional purposes : our intervals of silence were 
solid and consoling. This afternoon came in the Gryphon, 
from St. Bias, bringing intelligence from America, via Panama, 
in sixty-eight days, of the destruction by fire of a large portion 
of the city of New York. 

Third Month 1st. — Having completed an address to those 
who bear rule over the inhabitants of the Sandwich Islands, it 
seemed best to consult the senior missionary on the subject of 
getting it translated into their language. After having perused 
it, he very kindly undertook to translate it, in readiness to lay 
before the king and chiefs when convened for the occasion, in 
the course of a clay or two. 

\\th. — This morning Hiram Bingham came on board to say 
we were expected this evening at his house, as Kinau the 
o-overnino- chief, with her associates, and the kino- himself, 
would be there ; and that my address would probably be read. 
May the Lord incline their hearts to render unto him His due. 

12£A. — Soon after sunset last evening, we repaired to Hiram 
Bingham's, where the whole of the expected company assem- 
bled, with some others. After tea the address was introduced, 
and read in the native language : the greatest attention was 
manifested by the principals present, and a solemn feeling pre- 
vailed over us. Shortly after the reading was finished, one of 
the females proposed that it should be printed, which was 
confirmed by Kinau, and it appeared to be the mind of all the 
parties concerned : unless this were done, it is scarcely pro- 
bable that the end intended would be answered, as to the future 
rulers of these islands. Kinau remarked, that it was very easy 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVII. 473 

to be understood. Having done what I believed to be my 
part, I can peacefully leave the result to Him, who alone can 
make it subservient to any purpose for his own praise and 
glory, and the well-being of the workmanship of his hands. 
The following is a copy of the address : — 

Address to the Eiders of the Sandwich Islands. 

' As the present and eternal well-being of the inhabitants of 
the Sandwich Islands, is often the fervent and ardent desire of 
my heart, my attention has of late been arrested by the belief, 
that it will be best for me to leave behind a written memorial ; 
which, under the blessing of the Almighty parent of the whole 
human family, " the God and Father of our Lord Jesus 
Christ, - " may have a tendency to remind the governing chief 
and her associates in authority, or those into whose hands the 
government of these islands may be entrusted at a future day, 
of their great responsibility and indispensable duty to God, to 
themselves, and to the people over whom they preside. 

' In order to draw down the Divine blessing both upon 
prince and people, or upon rulers and people, let it never be 
forgotten, that " he that ruleth over men must be just, ruling 
in the fear of God." The fear of God is the foundation-stone, 
upon which every Christian government ought to be erected : 
upon this only it can stand secure and prosper. This fear at once 
makes it safe and permanent, because it "is clean, enduring for 
ever ;" for where the true fear of God prevails over every other 
consideration, the heart is kept clean and watchful against 
every temptation to let self-interest or partiality bear sway, 
either in the case of ourselves or others, when decrees or laws 
are made or enacted, or when judgment is called for between 
man and man. Impartiality is the life of justice, as justice is 
of government. 

When every thing is conducted in this fear in the sight of 
God, divested of partiality and every sinister motive, without 
feeling any painful sense or evidence of condemnation after a 
decision of importance is come to, (and every case is important 
because it demands strict justice ;) then have we confidence 
towards Him, inasmuch as our duty is performed towards 



474 CHAPTER XXVII. [1836. 

Him, and justice has assuredly prevailed ; and having done 
our duty towards God in this decision, it is done also to our- 
selves and to the people. " But if our heart condemn us, God, 
who knoweth all things, is greater than our hearts ;" and we 
may rest assured, that such a decision is not in righteous judg- 
ment : it hath not been come to in His fear, nor in that love 
which is first of all due to Him, and then to our neighbour or 
brother, as unto ourselves. This love would not fail to prompt 
us to do unto others, as we would that others should do unto 
us ; and for want of this, an unjust decision has been made, 
for which we are condemned by the Lord's holy and pure 
witness in our hearts ; it has been made contrary to the com- 
mandment in the old law, and also to the benign principle and 
precept of the glorious gospel, both which are distinguished by 
the heaven-born characteristic of love to God, and love to man. 
" God is love, and he that dwelleth in love, dwelleth in God, and 
God in him.'" Such are the excellent of the earth, and they 
compose the blessed in heaven : they are come " to the spirits 
of just men made perfect," 1- ' and are fit to rule over men : their 
judgment is just and righteous ; they rule "in the fear of God. 1 ' 
The religion of Jesus at once qualifies a man for every station 
of life, in which it pleases Almighty God to place him ; but it is 
the ever-blessed truth in possession, in the inward parts, which 
alone can safely guide out of all error into all truth, and make 
us to know wisdom. A mere profession only will avail us 
nothing, if we are destitute of the true fear and love of God, 
demonstrated by good works : and faith is the root of all, for 
without this we cannot please God ; nor can we fear and love 
that, in which we do not believe. The Saviour of the world 
was holy, harmless, humble, meek, and lowly, just, merciful, 
and full of love ; yea, love itself personified, when among us 
to teach what we should do when He was gone. But He is 
amongst us still, and in us too, an ever-living and perpetual 
preacher of the same grace, by His Holy Spirit in our con- 
sciences ; and by this alone kings and others, whose province 
it is to rule over men, are qualified to promote amongst the 
people whatsoever things are true, honest, just, pure, lovely, 
and of good report; and where these are the fruit and works 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVII. 475 

produced, such a government and such a people must be lovely 
indeed to every beholder. But now let us examine whether 
our justice is complete in the fear and love of God, and to our 
fellow-men, lest we should be deceiving ourselves, and endan- 
gering the well-being of our own immortal souls ; while those 
we are ruling over, shall be finally admitted, with Abraham, 
Isaac, and Jacob, into the kingdom of God, and ourselves 
thrust out : " For whosoever shall keep the whole law, and 
yet offend in one point, is guilty of all :" — in like manner, " he 
that is unjust in a little," is at once upon a level with him who 
is unjust in much. And although we may be faithful and 
strictly just in the administration of the laws themselves, 
without partiality or respect of persons ; yet, if these laws are 
such as to sanction covetousness on the part of rulers, and 
to allow them to grind the faces of the poor by unwarrantable 
oppression and extortion, or to uphold and support themselves 
in vice, luxury, and extravagance ; then this calculation may be 
safely made, that sooner or later the oppressed people will take 
the reins of such a government into their own hands, and rule 
in their turn after the example of injustice and oppression, 
which has been set before their eyes, and under which they have 
so long groaned and suffered, unheeded and unregarded ; unless 
the merciful and righteous Lord should please, in wanted com- 
passion, to gather them to Himself from the face of the earth, 
and permit strangers and foreigners to possess these fruitful 
islands, who for want of firmness and justice on the part of the 
rulers, towards God, to themselves, and to the greatly injured 
aborigines of the soil, are rapidly establishing themselves upon 
it, and prosecuting commerce, some branches of which are 
obviously pernicious. Therefore, they who rule over men 
must be just, ruling in the fear of God : and where they are 
happily thus ruling, they will be truly great, and their reign 
glorious ; every act of injustice will be avoided : love, joy, 
peace, and comfort will prevail in the land ; the population, 
instead of diminishing, will increase and multiply abundantly, 
and the blessing of the Lord will rest upon it. 

' Happy those rulers,' said a wise man, ' who are great by 
justice, and that people which is free by obedience : and they 



476 CHAPTER XX VII. [1836. 

who are just to the people in great things, and humour them 
oftentimes in small ones, are sure to have and keep them from 
all the world. The members of an obedient well-regulated 
family, treated with every act of affectionate kindness, never 
meet with any home so sweet as their own ; besides, long 
experience and holy example tell us, that goodness raises a 
nobler passion in the soul, and begets and gives a more exalted 
sense of duty, than cruelty, oppression, and severity.' Sore 
and heavy judgments are denounced by the Most High in the 
Scriptures of truth, against oppression, and oppressors of the 
poor and of him that hath no helper, — "He that oppresseth the 
poor is a reproach to his Maker ; but he that honoureth Him 
hath mercy on the poor :" and the justice and mercy of rulers 
should shine conspicuously in all their actions. The wicked 
and unjust man and his oppressor, have their portion and 
inheritance appointed of the Lord, and it is declared, " they 
shall receive it of the Almighty : if his children be multiplied, 
it is for the sword, and his offspring shall not be satisfied with 
bread ; those that remain of him shall be buried in death, and 
his widows shall not weep : though he heap up silver as the 
dust, and prepare raiment as the clay ; he may prepare it, but 
the just shall put it on, and the innocent shall divide the 
silver." The Israelites were sorely oppressed in their day, 
but what was the result I the destruction of Pharaoh and all 
his followers. If the poor people of this island and the sur- 
rounding ones are grievously oppressed, either by burdensome 
claims or taxation, they that rule over them cannot be just, 
ruling in the fear of God ; and however they may reconcile 
these things to their own consciences for a time, the Lord's 
righteous judgments will assuredly overtake them.: He will 
plead the cause of the poor and of the oppressed with a mighty 
hand and stretched out arm ; and will rid them of their 
oppressors, for His great name's sake. Now, that justice and 
judgment in which the Lord delighteth, would at once loose 
the bands of wickedness, undo the heavy burdens, let the 
oppressed go free, and break every yoke of exaction and extor- 
tion. The people would then enjoy the comforts and blessings, 
which the Lord in mercy hath bountifully showered down upon 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVII. 477 

them ; they would then feel an interest in the welfare of their 
neighbours, and in their country at large : but if afflicted by 
the pressure of heavy burdens, every feeling of sympathy and 
social interest is benumbed ; they have nothing to loose and 
nothing to gain, and it matters little to them who are their 
rulers; they can scarcely be worse off than they are. If their 
privileges as men and brethren be not consulted and respected, 
the profession of Ohristianty is but mockery ; instruction only 
serves to show them, that their rulers are not just, nor ruling 
in the fear of God : and the pretensions of such rulers to reli- 
gion are vain, more calculated to produce disgust and abhor- 
rence at its restraints, than piety, virtue, and holiness. 

' Although much has been said, and might still be said, 
yet it all centres in one point at last ; — " He that ruleth over 
men must be just, ruling in the fear of God." Such as are 
desirous of ruling in His fear, can only be advised to take 
council of Him on every occasion, by invariably consulting the 
holy witness in their own hearts, which will neither flatter nor 
deceive. If we are truly desirous of obeying the royal law, of 
doing to others as we would ourselves be done unto, let us 
endeavour to place ourselves in the situation of others, and act 
for them as if acting for ourselves, in all cases and at all times, 
without partiality, or respect of persons, whether rich or poor, 
high or low, bond or free, old or young, stranger or friend ; — 
for the same justice is due to all. It would be as presumptuous 
and assuming, as it would be altogether in vain, for any indi- 
vidual to take upon himself to advise in a matter, which involves 
so great a responsibility as that of ruling over men ; — beyond 
simply referring all parties to the righteous and only true and 
safe principle of justice in the fear of God. To fear God and 
keep his commandments, is the whole duty of man in every 
station upon earth, from the loftiest prince to the humblest 
peasant ; and the way to fear Him is, for all of us to bring 
every thought, word and deed, to the light of his Holy Spirit 
in the secret of the soul ; and to watch and pray, and wait in 
this light, to know His holy will, which would clearly discover 
whether the action or transaction we are about to undertake or 
engage in, or decide upon, (whether we be rulers or people, for 



478 CHAPTER XXVII. [1836. 

the question bears on all, and the light shines in all,) is done 
or committed in the fear of God, and in obedience to His com- 
mandments, — which are, that we should love Him above and 
before all, and our neighbour as ourselves. If we do not act 
upon these manifestations, in faithfulness and truth, our heart 
will condemn us ; because what we do, is not done in the fear of 
God, who is greater than our heart, and knoweth all things. 
But if our heart condemn us not, then have we confidence 
toward Him; and whatsoever we ask we receive of Him, because 
we are walking in His fear, and keeping His commandments, 
and doing those things which are pleasing in His Divine sight. 
From the best observation I have been able to make, whilst 
hearing the sentiments of persons high in authority over these 
islands, in addition to an evidence upon my own mind abidingly- 
sealed, I am thoroughly convinced by their own remarks upon 
things of the highest concernment, that they know [what is 
right] well enough : " for that which may be known of God 
is manifest in them, God hath showed it unto them," to the 
praise and glory of his grace. All that is wanting on their 
part, is a constant dwelling near to this precious gift of God in 
their own hearts, watching unto prayer ; " praying always 
with all prayer and supplication in the Spirit, and watching 
thereunto with all perseverance." Then their councils and 
deliberations will be blessed : they will be qualified to judge 
righteous judgment at all times and in all cases, against every 
false tongue, even to the giving " the living child to its own 
mother :" and no weapon formed against them by Satan or his 
agents, shall be suffered to prosper ; for the Lord Most High 
will be their " shield, and their exceeding great reward."" 

' It is an evident sign of a corrupt and unchristian govern- 
ment, when any of its subjects are permitted to suffer perse- 
cution, either directly or indirectly, on the score of religious 
dissent from any particular established form, so long as the 
public peace is undisturbed ; as the ' ' sword of the magistrate 
should be a terror only to evil-doers, but for the praise of them 
that do well :" — " by their fruits ye shall know them." To 
persecute others, because they do not see or think as ourselves, 
is the sure and hateful mark, which can never be mistaken, of 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVII. 479 

the false church, over which the devil presides in full power : 
but the true church, whose holy head is the Lord Jesus Christ, 
never persecuted any; but "suffereth long, and is kind; beareth 
all things ; believeth all things ; hopeth all things ; endureth 
all things; rejoiceth not in iniquity, but rejoiceth in the Truth, - " 
its sure and immovable foundation : love and mercy being the 
chief corner-stone, upon which no other principle shall ever be 
displayed, than that of " doing to others as we would that all 
men should do unto us." 

' Let none consider me an enemy, because I have spoken the 
truth. I pray that the foregoing hints may be accepted in a 
measure of the same love in which they are written, by one who 
desires the eternal salvation of all mankind. 

' Daniel Wheeler.' 
1 On board the Henry Freeling, in the harbour of Honolulu, the 
1st of Third Month, 1836. Sandwich Isle, Oahu? 

\§th. (First day.) — Remained on board through the day 
with our own people. Strippedness and poverty of mind are 
my present portion, and perhaps, food of all others the most 
needful for me. 

[8th. It having been a subject of consideration, whether 
there would not be a propriety in our showing kind attention 
to the American mission, by inviting some of each family on 
board the Henry Freeling, as best suited their convenience, lest 
by an apparent non-intercourse of a social kind betwixt us, 
malicious reports might get circulated by the white residents, 
calculated tomjure them in the estimation of the natives; — and 
also, in the hope of setting aside some false impressions detri- 
mental to their interest, of which there had been already no 
slight indication ; — it was concluded to adopt such a measure : 
we therefore called yesterday evening upon the two oldest 
families, who readily accepted an invitation to visit us. When 
leaving the senior missionary's habitation, a newspaper was 
put into my hand, said to contain the great ' Missionary 
Question,' accompanied with a desire that our sentiments 
might be given on the subject. On examining the paragraph 
alluded to, when returned on board, I found this question 



480 CHAPTER XXVII. [1836. 

had been propounded by the said missionary himself to the 
American board, in these words : ' We are often led to inquire 
(can you tell us ?) why it is that so few who hear the gospel in 
Christian countries, and in the fields of missionary labour, are 
savingly converted to Christ V querying, if the cause of this 
acknowledged and deplored evil arose from such and such 
circumstances as he enumerates at full length. Both, or parts 
of both families came on board the 1.0th instant, as invited. 
The weather boisterous, with frequent heavy rains. 

22nd. — Yesterday and to-day some of the members of the 
missions, both male and female, came on board, but the rough- 
ness of the weather necessarily shortened their visit. In the 
evening attempted to take exercise on shore, and although we 
reached the landing-place, the rain fell so heavily, that we did 
not quit the boat, but returned to the vessel again. In the 
night heavy gusts of wind from the mountains ; at one o'clock 
a.m., the brig Bolivar drove clown upon us, but no injury was 
sustained. Two vessels from Boston are now at anchor outside 
the reef ; this is the third day of their being in this exposed 
situation, and the wind is still so strongly opposed that they 
cannot enter the harbour. 

26th. — But little communication with the shore since the 
22nd instant, owing to the state of the weather. By a news- 
paper brought out by one of the vessels just arrived from 
America, we are furnished with the Epistle of the Yearly 
Meeting, held in London in 1835, of which a present has been 
made to us in great kindness : it was a treat no less welcome 
for not having been anticipated, and to myself particularly con- 
soling, being replete with explanation of the principles and 
views of our religious Society, as held by our worthy prede- 
cessors when they first came forth ; and declaring them to 
remain unalterably the same at this day. I trust the pure 
mind will be stirred up in many of our members to a serious 
consideration, whether we are endeavouring to uphold them in 
their original purity and simplicity, to the eyes of the world, and 
in faithfulness and gratitude to Him ; who called and separated 
those ancient worthies from the many " Lo here's, 11 and " Lo 
there's 11 of their day and generation, to be a people to His praise. 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVII. 481 

We also obtained a copy of an article contained in a late 
Petersburg Journal of Agriculture, in which our own name is 
mentioned in connexion with the improvement of the lands in 
the neighbourhood of that capital, &c. To hear of my beloved 
family being still there, at least when the account was printed, 
which was much later than any tidings we had ourselves 
received, although nothing could possibly be gleaned of their 
present state and welfare, yielded a satisfaction, which those 
only can appreciate, who have been long and distantly sepa- 
rated from all most dear on earth to memory and life. 

27th. (First day.) — The weather still very boisterous. 
Assembled the crew in the cabin twice in the day. In the fore- 
noon it was a dull, heavy season ; in the afternoon more lively. 
I have been much cast down of late by several discouraging 
circumstances. The continuance of heavy rain not only con- 
fines us more on board, but within the narrow limits of our 
little heated cabin below deck. In addition to this, I do not 
see my way clear for leaving the island of Oahu ; while most 
persons around are impatient to be gone, and cannot exactly 
enter into my feelings. The Lord alone knoweth, and to Him 
I commit my cause, and desire to bow in humble resignation to 
His holy Will : if only now and then favoured with a glimpse 
of His heavenly, life-giving presence, (however short, if certain,) 
it will be enough. 

Fourth Month 21st. — Received a visit to-day, by invitation, 
from a white resident and his wife ; whom we were desirous of 
noticing, on account of the good example they hold forth to the 
other white residents, their neighbours : his wife is a native of 
the island, and of good character. They have been regularly 
married, a very rare occurrence here in such cases ; and 
what is still more rare, they are in repute for their moral and 
orderly conduct, whilst most of the white residents are a dis- 
grace to a skin of any colour, and frequently have three or 
four native women as wives. Of course I do not include the 
mission families in these remarks. 

23rd. — In the afternoon the king came on board to take 
leave of us, being about to sail for the island of Maui, and 
his vessel at the time waiting with her canvass spread, in readi- 

2 i 



482 CHAPTER XXVII. [183G. 

ness to convey him away. He gave me a pressing invitation 
to visit him at Waiaruku on the other island : the shores 
were crowded with natives to witness the departure of their 
king. The artillery of the fort announced his final embarka- 
tion ; whilst the shipping in the harbour, and his own brig, 
kept up an occasional firing, as she passed through the channel 
between the coral reefs. One hundred and fifty persons accom- 
panied him as retinue. No exhibition equal to this, we are 
told, has occurred since the departure of Rio Rio for England. 

24<th. (First day.) — In the morning wrote a note to John 
Deill, enclosing a written notice, which he was requested to 
read to the people at the breaking up of the forenoon meeting ; 
■ — that a public meeting for worship, after the manner of the 
Society of Friends, would be held in the Mariners' chapel 
that evening, at the usual hour ; to which the company of all 
persons who inclined to attend was requested. Our captain 
delivered this note to John Deill, and no difficulty appearing 
on his part, notice was then personally given in such direc- 
tions as seemed most likely to insure full publicity. Read 
portions of Scripture to our seamen twice in the course of the 
day. At the time appointed, landed to attend the meeting : 
it gathered slowly, but in the end was well attended. After 
sitting a while in silence, it was with me to point out the 
desirableness of our endeavouring to get into a quiet state of 
mind ; that we might be sensible of the influence of the Holy 
Spirit, to solemnize our minds together, if He should be gra- 
ciously pleased to lift up the light of His heavenly countenance 
upon us, and bless us therewith : we then settled down into 
silence before Him. After a time, one or two persons went 
out, but stillness generally prevailed over the company. When 
the time came for me to stand up, I told them that I had had 
no expectation of my voice being heard again among them ; — 
that my mouth had for several weeks been closed up, and that 
a heavy burden had rested upon my mind ; — to what shall I 
compare it, but to " the roll that was written within and 
without, with lamentation, and mourning, and woe," for the 
inhabitants of that place ; who are crucifying to themselves the 
Son of Grod afresh, and by their example putting him to open 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVII. 4 S3 

shame in the face of the benighted islanders among whom they 
dwell. It was probable that those who were the principal 
causes of this travail of soul, were not among that company ; 
but I could do no less for the clearance of my own mind, 
than publicly advert to this lamentable state of things ; lest I 
should be found short of doing my own duty, though the cause 
of suffering might not be removed : but the disciples of Christ 
must be willing to suffer with their suffering Lord, and to fill 
up that which is behind, that which remains of the afflictions 
of Christ in the flesh, for his body's sake, which is the church. 
Notwithstanding the extent to which sin and iniquity abound, 
such is the wondrous love of Grod to his creature man, that he 
willeth not the death of a sinner, but that all should repent, 
return unto Him, and live for ever : for this, He gave his only 
begotten Son, that whosoever believeth on Him should not 
perish, but have everlasting life ; and blessed are they that have 
not seen, and yet have believed in the only begotten Son of God. 
I trusted that there were many such believers then before me, 
who profess to be His followers : but a bare profession only 
of Christ would do little for any of us ; nothing short of the 
possession of the unspeakable gift of His Holy Spirit, will avail 
us. It is no matter under what denomination of religion we are 
walking before men, or to what outward and visible body of 
professing Christians we may belong, if we are not members of 
the mystical body, of which Christ Jesus is the holy Head and 
everlasting High Priest, — the church triumphant, whose names 
are written in heaven : and there is no other way of attaining 
to this, but by and through Christ Jesus, — by receiving Him 
in the way of his coming. We must be willing to take His 
yoke upon us, and learn of Him meekness and lowliness ; we 
must be willing to submit to the restraining yoke of His 
Holy Spirit upon us, and to bring our deeds to its light, which 
will show us our sins, and our exceeding sinfulness, and cause 
us to feel our miserable condition. As this yoke is patiently 
abode under, the effect will be godly sorrow unto repentance, 
never to be repented of : the glories of eternity will be gra- 
dually opened to our view, and we shall be permitted to behold 
the blessedness of those, who have found rest in Jesus. Our 

2 i 2 



484 CHAPTER XXVII. [1836. 

sins will be removed from us as far as the east is from the west, 
and blotted out for ever for His sake ; and we shall be num- 
bered among those who have returned, " and come to Zion, with 
songs and everlasting joy upon their heads," — ransomed and 
redeemed from our sins by the blood of Jesus, the new and 
living way, and the only May of initiation into membership, 
with those whose names are written in heaven. Unless we 
witness this for ourselves, and know from heart-felt experience 
Christ Jesus to save us from our sins, He is no Saviour of ours : 
and if we die in our sins, where He is, we can never come. 

I stood long among them : and although in the forepart 
of the time it seemed heavy getting on, yet towards the 
end, the life spread over us in an eminent manner, and reigned 
over all. The people seemed as if riveted to their seats, instead 
of rising up and hasting away, when I sat down. After this I 
had to appeal to themselves as witnesses of the power which 
prevailed over us. They still remained stationary after I again 
sat down, until informed that the meeting was over. Such 
was the renewed goodness and mercy of Him, to His poor 
unworthy creatures : but He is " God over all, blessed for 
ever. v> Amen. 

25th. — The way seemed now clear for me to direct that the 
vessel should be completely furnished with wood and water, and 
prepared for sea. In the evening, I went to Hiram Bingham, 
to say that I wished to see the people once again collected ; 
at the same time querying, whether, if the meeting in the 
middle of the week was held in the evening, there would not be 
a fuller attendance, especially if the occasion was made known. 
He immediately proposed, that as their week-day meeting con- 
sisted principally of Church members only, they should come 
together as usual on the Fourth day ; and that he would then 
give notice of a meeting to be held on the Fifth day evening, at 
half-past seven o'clock. This proposal was gratefully accepted 
on my part. 

On observing the of Boston preparing for sea, our mate 

was dispatched with a parcel of tracts, &c, for the use of the 
ship's company ; when he got upon her deck, the chief mate 
came forward, and seeing what he had in his hand, said, ' We 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVII. 485 

do not receive any of those things ; we are all infidels : we 
do not want any thing connected with the Bible : but if you 
will bring us any of the writings of Voltaire, Tom Paine or 

Eousseau, we shall thank you for them : give Captain 's 

compliments to Mr. Wheeler, and say we don't want any thing 
of the kind ; and if you persist in leaving them, they shall be 
thrown overboard."' Our mate returned on board quite discon- 
certed, having never before met with such a reception in the 
Pacific. There is great reason to fear that there are many of 
this description in these parts ; but such an open avowal is rarely 
to be found. Upon inquiry, it appeared that no sailors are 
admitted on board this ship, but such as deny the existence of 
an Almighty Being. 

26th. — Beceiving stone-ballast, to supply the weight of iron, 
hardware, tin, and nails, disposed of from time to time. As 
soon as our wants were communicated to the government, 
without waiting for an arrangement being made by our captain 
for the stone, and its transport, eight canoes of large dimensions 
were loaded and dispatched to our vessel. Writing-paper and 
nails were sent in return for this accommodation, to the full 
extent of its value ; it had been previously ascertained that 
writing-paper was very scarce with those in authority. 

27th. — Until now, every thing like a present to any of the 
parties with whom we have been connected, was studiously 
avoided on our part, as gifts often open a door to blindness and 
perversion ; but the time of our departure being at hand, several 
articles likely to be useful were selected and presented to 
Kinau, and her associate chiefs, as a token of esteem and 
gratitude for the uniform kindness shown us while in the port 
of Honolulu ; these were courteously received. With the 
assistance of the British Consul, a pilot well acquainted with 
all the principal bays, coves, and creeks of the islands was pro- 
cured to accompany us. He could talk a little bad English, 
was a native of Oahu, and went by the name of ' Sugar-Cane."' 
Being an elderly man, and very asthmatical, one of his sons 
was brought to assist in caring for him, and to take his share 
of duty with our crew. 

28th. — Felt much depressed at the weight of the prospect 



486 CHAPTER XXVII. [1836. 

of meeting with the natives in the evening, as before appointed; 
but endeavoured to bear up in humble reliance on the ever- 
lasting Arm of strength ; which is magnified in proportion as 
the creature is laid low, and made sensible of its helpless con- 
dition and utter inability. 

Sat down together in the forenoon as usual ; in the after- 
noon a native schooner through mismanagement ran directly 
against our vessel. Serious injury was anticipated on all sides, 
but it was so ordered that the violence of the shock was broken 
by first one rope giving way and then another, as the pressure 
increased ; until her stem came in contact with one of our main 
shrouds, which made such a powerful resistance before breaking, 
as materially to check her progress, when about to strike our 
hull ; so that the whole damage was comparatively trifling. 
Her commander came on board immediately, with tears in his 
eyes, in great fear lest any on board of us should have been 
killed. This man and his people so fully expected that one or 
both of the vessels must be sunk, that he dispatched a man to 
the shore for boats to save the crews ; this messenger imme- 
diately sprung overboard, and swam so quickly, as to reach the 
shore before the two vessels began to show signs that they 
were not seriously injured. The spectators could scarcely 
believe that we had sustained so little harm. 

After taking tea at Hiram Bingham's we proceeded to the 
meeting appointed the preceding evening, and found a large 
concourse of people assembled in readiness. As this was an 
extra meeting appointed on my account, the people were 
informed that it would commence with silent waiting, and were 
exhorted to stillness. Although it is probable more than three 
thousand persons were present, and many of them strangers to 
the practices of Friends ; yet such was the solemn feeling 
graciously vouchsafed on the occasion, that the greatest order 
and quietness prevailed. However long the interval of silence 
might seem to others, to myself it was remarkably short ; 
before I was strengthened to set forth the necessity of silent 
waiting upon God for the sanctifying influence of His Holy 
Spirit, to enable us to worship Him acceptably, " in spirit and 
in truth."''' I had also to bear testimony to the all-sufficiency of 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVII. 487 

that " grace which bringeth salvation, and hath appeared unto 
all men ; teaching us that, denying ungodliness and worldly 
lusts, we should live soberly, righteously, and godly, in this 
present world ; looking for that blessed hope, and the glorious 
appearing of the great God and our Saviour Jesus Christ, who 
gave himself for us, that he might redeem us from all iniquity, 
and purify unto himself a peculiar people, zealous of good 
works." I was enlarged and strengthened to testify the gospel 
of this grace of my good and gracious God, which bringeth 
salvation, and hath appeared unto all men ; a word of encour- 
agement was strong in my heart to the dear people, and I had 
to remind them, that it was not the rich, nor the mighty, nor 
the noble to whom the call was limited ; not many of these 
were called, — nor many that were wise ; but the poor, simple- 
hearted and unlearned, and fishermen like themselves ; and 
that they were the people unto whom the call is still extended. 
After having sat down awhile, it was with me to endeavour to 
make them sensible of the power, that so eminently reigned 
over all ; recommending them to keep close to it, and it would 
be with them for ever ; because it is " the power of an endless 
life." None attempted to rise up when the meeting was over : 
I requested Hiram Bingham to dismiss them, but they still 
kept their seats, and the same precious solemnity prevailed. 
When we left our seats they began to draw round us to shake 
hands, and bid us ' farewell.'' Most of the missionary families 
were present, and five of their preachers. 

29th. Believing myself clear of the island, every exertion 
was made to be in readiness to leave the harbour on the 
morrow ; and although much impeded by persons coming on 
board, we persevered in making the attempt. Towards noon, 
Kinau, the reigning chiefess, sent on board, to ascertain what 
supplies we were most in need of; and her husband, the com- 
mander of the fort, seemed a little disappointed, on finding that 
hogs and goats were already purchased. They provided us, 
however, with eggs, cabbages, water-melons, onions, turkeys, 
and fowls, sending them off in good time. In the afternoon, 
saw all our accounts settled : drank tea at the Consul's, and 
called upon the whole of the mission, to take leave of them. 



488 CHAPTER XXVII. [1836. 

30th. — Made the signal for a pilot, according to the rules of 
the port, and at eleven o'clock a. m., slipped off under easy sail. 
The morning had been cloudy and squally, but the trade-wind 
was now steady, though strong and scant for our purpose. The 
motion of the vessel was soon sufficiently violent to make almost 
all on board sea-sick . for my own part, although not sick, I 
was otherwise unwell. Towards evening the wind forsook us, 
when we had Eanai Point, and the islands of Morakai, Maui, 
and Tauroa in sight. Calm most of the night, but we had the 
mortification to find that our vessel required much pumping to 
keep her clear of water, owing to her having been so long in a 
heated and dry atmosphere, although almost constantly covered 
with awnings. 

Fifth Month 1st. (First day.) — Early in the morning a 
strong trade-wind set upon us, and soon raised a heavy sea. 
From the state of the crew and other circumstances, the usual 
practice of assembling together was necessarily abandoned ; the 
vessel still continued to require considerable pumping. 

2nd. — Strong gales all the day, with a heavy breaking sea, 
which kept our decks in a constant wash, and rendered it 
impossible to secure and preserve the things in the cabin from 
the salt water. Towards nightfall, we had an indistinct view 
of the island of Owhyee, now called Hawaii. 

3rd. — Notwithstanding the scantiness of the trade-wind, we 
had the satisfaction to find, soon after day-light this morning, 
that there was a probability of our fetching into the neigh- 
bourhood of Kalakakua Bay. About three o'clock p. m., we 
dropped an anchor in ten fathoms water, close in with the 
shore, and near the place where the affray occurred, in which 
the British commander, James Cook, was killed. This bay is 
exposed to the sweep of the Pacific, from south to west : but 
there is a marvellous provision for the safety of vessels which 
touch here, and for enabling the natives to procure a plentiful 
supply of fish. A sea-breeze sets in almost as regularly as the 
day revolves ; but before the swell of the sea has time to rise 
to any material height, the land-breeze comes off the mountains, 
and restores order again upon the ruffled surface : at some 
seasons of the year, it would, however, be very unsafe for a vessel 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVII. 489 

to anchor here ; a few hours is generally sufficient for those 
which do come, to obtain a supply of hogs, goats, &c. No 
canoe came near us for a considerable time after the anchor was 
down, and then they came off very sparingly ; but when the 
first adventurers had had time to return to the shore, and 
report that they had been invited on board, and that we had 
articles for barter, our deck was presently crowded with almost 
all ages and sizes, of the male natives, bringing with them pine- 
apples, pigeons, bananas, ninitas, <fcc, with the different varieties 
of shells which this part of the coast furnishes. They remained 
with us until sun-down, and seeihed well satisfied with their 
visit. It appeared that it would be best to visit the missionary 
station without delay, and to request that a meeting of the 
islanders might be convened purposely, without waiting for 
their usual meeting- day, as a few yards of cotton print would 
be an ample reward for those who took an active part in this 
business, for the extra fatigue it would occasion. By this step 
a much larger attendance would be secured, besides the saving 
of time, which was now particularly important, as the mission- 
aries were shortly to leave all the stations upon this island, 
to attend their annual meeting at Oahu, which holds three 
weeks or more ; and generally, from one or other circumstance, 
nearly two months are required to restore the parties to their 
respective stations again. 

4>th. — Our deck was crowded in good time this morning 
by the natives, bringing with them abundance of their simple 
varieties for barter. In the forenoon we landed, and ascended 
a steep more than two miles in length, and by places almost 
inaccessible. The great heat of the sun, reflected from a nearly 
black surface of volcanic rock, smooth, and glassy, was almost 
insupportable. The native boys and girls were very desirous 
to help me up the hill : some pulled me forward by the arms, 
and others pushing behind, contributed to lessen the fatigue ; 
although this had a ludicrous appearance, I could not well reject 
their kindness. On reaching the mission-house, we were wel- 
comed in a friendly manner by Cochran Forbes and his wife, 
who occupy this secluded habitation. As the native meeting 
was to be held in regular course in the afternoon, it was con- 



490 CHAPTER XXVII. [1S3(5. 

eluded that notice should be given of a public meeting to be 
held to -morrow morning, for our accommodation, in the hope 
o( collecting a large number of the people together ; but a chief 
woman who sat by, stated, that as the king and his large 
retinue were at Kailua. (the next station.) the people who were 
now at home, in their huts, would be engaged in procuring a 
supply of food, and in transporting it to these visitors both to- 
morrow and the next day also. On this account it seemed best 
to hold the meeting this afternoon, and to take measures to 
spread the report of our being come to attend it. A consider- 
able number o( the people were collected at the hour appointed, 
and in due time my certificates were read, and translated by 
the missionary ; and after calling their attention to the import- 
ance of the object for which we were assembled, ability was 
afforded me to declare the Truth amongst them, fully and 
freely, for the space of an hour ; directing them to the light of 
the Holy Spirit of the Lord Jesus, which shineth in every 
heart ; which would not only show them their sins, but would, 
if taken heed to. save from them, with an everlasting salva- 
tion. That as no sin is committed without the thought of 
the heart for its origin, it is the heart that must be watched 
over ; because every thing that derlleth a man cometh from 
thence. First of all. before wickedness is committed, proceed 
■• evil thoughts." and if these are cherished, then sin followeth, 
and darkness and death reign ; but if the watch is faithfully 
maintained, it will lead unto prayer, and that light which is 
" the true light, that lighteth every man that cometh into the 
world." will make manifest the tendency of every thought, from 
what root in us it springs, whether good or evil ; and as we 
choose the good and refuse the evil, we shall be strengthened 
more and more to watch and to pray, even always, " with all 
prayer and supplication in the Spirit, and watching there- 
unto with all perseverance ;" — the light will shine brighter and 
brighter, — we shall no longer walk in death and darkness, but 
shall have " the light of life." In this way the glad tidings 
of salvation were proclaimed amongst them in gospel love. 
Nothing could exceed the attention and solidity manifested 
by these Hawaiians. I humbly trust to the glory of Him who 



1836.] chapter xxvu. 4!jl 

wrought and crowned the work by his solemnizing presence. 
On the left of the ascent to the missionary station, about 
half a mile from the rocky margin of the sea, stands a rough 
but substantial monument, erected to the memory of the late 
James Cook, with the following inscription. ' In memory of 
Captain James Cook, II. N., who discovered these islands in 
the year of our Lord 1778; this humble monument is erected 
by his fellow-countrymen, in the year 1825/ 

5th. — This morning the natives thronged the deck of our 
little vessel. We had agreed to visit the missionary station 
again this afternoon ; but the violent exertion of yesterday 
rendered my dear Charles unfit to risk another such fatigue in 
the heat of the day ; and I thought it best, in order to prevent 
suffering myself from the same cause, to submit to being con- 
veyed upon the shoulders of the people, in the same manner 
as they are accustomed to transport their chiefs on particular 
occasions. Having landed by myself, and procured some willing 
natives, upon promise of rewarding each of them with some 
blue cotton print, I proceeded on my journey. On reaching a 
very steep part of the road, and making signs that I wished to 
walk, they at length consented to set me down ; but they seemed 
quite uneasy until permitted to resume their toil. This I did 
principally on their account, to make the work lighter ; but 
I found it very difficult to persuade them to do it a second 
time at the next steep, until a determination was manifested 
to get down, when I was reluctantly permitted to alight : 
they then would not allow me to climb the hill, without some 
of them pushing behind to help me along. I succeeded in 
getting set down four times : at last my entreaties were alto- 
gether disregarded, and they persisted in hurrying along, 
until we reached the missionary door. My labour was richly 
rewarded by a truly interesting opportunity with these newly- 
acquired^ acquaintances, whose minds were open to receive all 
that I found in my heart to communicate to them. They 
expressed a desire to understand the principles of our Society, 
and inquired if we had any writings of the Society in our 
possession : they were satisfied on this head, with a promise 
of being well supplied, before we left the Bay. The evening 



492 CHAPTER XXVII. [1836. 

proved very wet ; but several serious women came and took 
their stations on the floor in the usual way. 

6th. — To-day the natives seemed to bring on board, to 
.all appearance, all that they possessed, in their eagerness to 
obtain some of our useful articles : their poverty and want of 
clothing are extreme. I purchased many things from them of 
no use whatever to myself or the vessel, rather than send them 
away empty-handed. The missionary family came on board 
about noon, and were furnished with some of our books. A 
variety of things calculated to be useful for children's wearing 
apparel, &c, were presented at the same time, and gratefully 
received. May the Lord direct their hearts into the love of 
God, and into the patient waiting for the Lord of life and 
glory, until they know him indeed for themselves to be in 
them, the blessed hope. After they returned to the shore, the 
number of natives began to diminish. In the evening we got 
all secure to be ready to avail ourselves of the land-breeze in 
the night, to enable us, if permitted, to stretch along the 
coast towards the Bay of Kailua, the next missionary station. 
Various specimens of native cloth were procured to-day : even 
the frames and implements used in making it were brought off, 
in the hope of their being accepted in barter. 

As the king, Kauikeaouli, has arrived in Kailua Bay, the 
body of the people will be necessarily attracted towards that 
neighbourhood from hence, and many of them engaged in 
keeping up a supply of food and transporting it thither, for 
his large establishment ; on which account several hundreds 
will assemble at the place of worship next First day, on the 
occasion of his being there : my mind is bending towards that 
spot, in the anticipation of being strengthened to declare the 
mercy and goodness of my Lord amongst them ; and it is my 
soul's desire that His heavenly presence may be with us. 

At nine o'clock, p. m., got under weigh with a fresh land- 
breeze, and stood off from the coast to secure an offing sufficient 
to warrant our steering with safety shore-ward in the dark, 
clear of all crags. Heavy rain fell just after leaving the bay 
of Kalakakua ; but the rising of the moon soon after midnight 
dispelled every cloud, and the weather continuing beautifully 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVII. 493 

clear, favoured our design. About eight o'clock a.m., on the 
morning of the 7th instant, we anchored near the king's brig, 
which, with three native schooners, was lying in the roads of 
Kailua. This anchorage is more exposed to the swells of the 
ocean than that of Kalakakua, having twelve points of the 
compass without a sheltering point of land. In the forenoon, 
the resident missionary, Artemas Bishop, came on board, to 
welcome us on our arrival ; we returned with him to the shore, 
and on reaching the mission-station were kindly received by 
the family. Here we found a Dr. Gardner, in a declining state 
of health, who had been in the employ of the Hudson's Bay 
Company, on the Columbia river, but had retired in the hope of 
being benefited by the mildness of the air at Hawaii. In the 
afternoon we called at the residence of John Adams, alias 
Kuakini, the governor of the island, with whom I became 
acquainted at Oahu; but he had not returned from his favourite 
employment of fishing, at which he is considered very expert. 
On our way back we sat some time on the floor with a chief's 
widow, who was sick. On the fort established by Tameha- 
meha are yet remaining two enormous idols, which were 
formerly worshipped by these people. They have been evi- 
dently cut out of the solid part of two immensely large trees, 
and carved into forms hideous and disgusting, and truly 
gigantic : and they must have cost excessive labour. Several 
pieces of heavy cannon were lying about, with the Gr. R. 
upon them, which could only be viewed with regret. While 
together, Artemas Bishop very kindly tendered his services, 
placing every thing, as regards the meeting to-morrow, at my 
disposal, and declaring his willingness to act as interpreter. 

On the passage from Honolulu, although our little vessel 
became more leaky than at any time since leaving New South 
Wales, (excepting during the heavy tempest encountered on 
the voyage from Sydney to Tahiti,) we were in hopes that the 
leaks would close up in a few days, but it was discouraging to 
find it still necessary to have recourse to our pumps. Whether 
the Henry Freeling was more injured than appeared at the 
time when the schooner ran into her, before leaving Honolulu, 
or whether the leaking had been occasioned by a seam just 



494 CHAPTER XXVII. [1836. 

above the margin of the copper, which may have opened from 
long exposure to the sun in still water, is uncertain ; we 
cannot, however, take any measure to ascertain this, until 
again sheltered from the never-ceasing swells of the Pacific ; 
but our hope and trust are in the Lord alone. It was remarked 
this morning, although riding in about thirteen fathoms water, 
that the rocky bottom might be plainly distinguished inter- 
mingled with patches of what was to all appearance hard, solid, 
white sand, supposed to have coral underneath : our anchor 
had fallen upon one of these white places, and as it could be 
seen plainly that the bill had made scarcely any impression, 
nor perceptibly sunk, they were thought to be beds of white 
coral, free from sand. 

8th. (First day.) — Reached the shore in good time, and 
accompanied the missionary and his family to the meeting ; 
it was held in a large temporary building close to the sea- 
shore, open on all sides, and widened for the purpose, with 
rows of pillars on the longest sides, supporting the thatched 
roofs of this extra skirting. Large as it was and well packed, 
it could not accommodate the people, and dense bodies were 
ranged quite without the shelter of the roofs ; but being open 
on all sides, those without could hear almost as well as those 
within. When all seemed gathered, the people were informed 
by Artemas Bishop, that if we should remain silent, they were 
to keep themselves quite still and quiet. As I have uniformly 
witnessed the beneficial effects of my certificates being read, I 
had previously handed them to the missionary, who read them 
audibly in English, as many of our nation were present, and 
afterwards translated them, I believe very ably to the islanders, 
who were very attentive. A salutation in the love of the 
everlasting gospel was in my heart to every individual present, 
when I stood up ; desiring that the dew of heaven might rest 
upon them, even unto life, and that for evermore. After 
declaring the fulness of the blessing of the gospel of Christ 
Jesus, if they turned to its light and obeyed it, I had to speak 
of the nature of that true, spiritual worship, which only is 
acceptable in the Divine sight. Vain is the attempt of any to 
draw nigh unto Grod in praise and prayer with the lips, if 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVII. 495 

the heart is not prepared by the Holy Spirit ; pointing out 
the necessity of our waiting for this preparation, in humble, 
reverential silence before Him, who is a Spirit, and discerneth 
the thoughts and intents of every heart, before we can " wor- 
ship Him in spirit and in truth ;" this He requires in this 
gospel day, which long since dawned upon benighted man. 
It was the travail of my soul that they should all come unto 
Christ, who is " the true light that lighteth every man that 
cometh into the world ; and is given for God's salvation unto 
the ends of the earth." We had a highly favoured season 
together, and the language of " peace be unto you,'" flowed 
in my heart richly towards these dear people. When the 
meeting was well gathered, the king and some of his followers 
came in, and stayed the whole time, behaving in an orderly 
manner. When the meeting broke up, those with whom we 
had been previously acquainted at Oahu nocked about us, and 
many others followed their example of shaking hands. Being 
informed that a bible-class was about to assemble in the same 
building, we resumed our seats again : it was conducted on 
the system of learning one verse each day, through the week, 
the whole to be repeated on the First day of the week. The 
children and adults repeated the same words aloud at the same 
time. After this, questions were asked by the teacher, to 
which all the parties answered with one voice. 

Not feeling any warrant to request that the afternoon 
meeting should be held exclusively on my account, it took its 
usual course, although it did not seem safe for me to omit 
attending it. I sat near the missionary, and when the usual 
services were gone through, I told him that I wished to say a 
few words ; on standing up, he rose to be ready to interpret, 
which arrested the attention of the people. After a pause, 
the way opened for me to declare the necessity for " every one 
that nameth the name of Christ, to depart from iniquity,"' 
without which the highest profession of the Christian religion 
is in vain ; and that nothing short of the regenerating power 
of the Spirit of the Lord Jesus in the heart of man, can cleanse 
and purify, and prepare him for that kingdom which shall 
never have an end. It is in the heart that sin hath its origin 



496 CHAPTER XXVII. [1836. 

and root ; and where the disease is seated, there the remedy 
must be applied. Out of the heart of man proceed " evil 
thoughts ;" and it is these that must be watched for and 
detected in the light of the Holy Spirit. I stood up in much 
weakness, but was greatly strengthened, and largely opened 
before sitting down, to testify the gospel of the grace of my 
God, and to ascribe all to the Lord God and to the Lamb, 
who sitteth upon the throne ; who loved us, and washed us from 
sin in his own precious blood, to whom dominion, and glory, 
and praise belong for ever. 

9th. — This morning Kauikeaouli, the king, came on board, 
and fixed to come again in the afternoon to dinner ; this he 
did to our great satisfaction, bringing with him a confiden- 
tial person of respectability. Every opportunity that could 
be desired was afforded to put the king in full possession of 
our opinion as to the real state of things upon the islands, 
and to apprize him of the artful designs of those persons who 
are constantly endeavouring to prejudice him against the 
missionaries, by raising evil reports against them on every 
trifling occasion, under pretence of being his best friends ; while 
they are at the same time his worst enemies, and those of his 
people. They would rejoice to see the missionaries banished 
from the islands, the latter being the only persons capable of 
counteracting their desire to reduce the people to a state of 
slavery : by introducing an extensive growth of sugar-cane, 
and permitting the chiefs to share in the profit with them, they 
would at once compel the natives to labour for them, or in 
other words, to be slaves to their sordid avarice, while a set of 
mercenary foreigners would be enriched, altogether regardless 
of the waste of life they occasion. The king listened with 
great attention, and from the questions he asked, there is no 
doubt, but that he thoroughly understood the substance of the 
whole matter. Although Kauikeaouli does not speak English 
with facility, yet he understands it tolerably well ; and the 
young man who accompanied him, having had a good educa- 
tion, was able to give every explanation required. 

In the evening we drank tea at the mission-house, where 
again Kauikeaouli was one of the company. I sat next to 



1836.] chapter xxvir. 497 

him, but he was now like another person, and took no interest 
in any thing that went forward, seeming quite absorbed in 
thought. During the day, the natives were bartering their 
shells, fowls, and vegetables upon the deck, for our knives, 
handkerchiefs, needles, and fish-hooks. The weather was very 
hot, and the incessant tumbling about of our little vessel, from 
the swell of the ocean unceasingly rolling into this exposed bay, 
contributed to render it very exhausting and fatiguing to 
attend to the wants of the natives ; upon whose well-oiled skins 
the heat seemed to make no impression. The number assem- 
bled at the meeting yesterday was more than 2000 ; but many 
of them had come from the neighbourhood of Kalakakua Bay. 

A large stone building, for a place of worship, is nearly 
ready for roofing at Kailua : on my remarking the very great 
thickness of the walls, I was told, that unless this was the case 
it could not stand, on account of the violent shocks which 
earthquakes frequently occasion : at times the tables and chairs 
rattle on the floors of the missionary dwelling. 

10th. — Our deck again crowded with the natives. The 
missionary with his wife and two children, accompanied by 
Kuakini, the governor of the island, paid us a visit in the fore- 
noon, and stayed dinner on board. In the evening went on 
shore ; and seeing nothing to prevent our proceeding to the 
eastward, took leave of those we knew, and returned on board 
after dark. Preparation being made for sailing, and the land- 
breeze springing up, we left the bay of Kailua about midnight, 
and stretched off under easy canvass, not having the advantage 
of moon-light. In the morning of the 11th instant, the wea- 
ther clear and hot, with light breezes, but not from a favour- 
able quarter. Low in mind, but in the enjoyment of peaceful 
poverty, trusting in Him who only knoweth the extent of 
what is before me. My desire is, to be found in the way 
cast up for me, and that I may leave nothing undone, and no 
place unvisited where it is His will that the ever-blessed Truth, 
by the power of the Holy Spirit, should be proclaimed, though 
it be in weakness and in fear, by such an one as myself, frail 
indeed, and my days fast numbering to a close : but the 
strength of Israel is sufficient for all things required at our 

2 K 



498 CHAPTER XXVII. [1836. 

hands ; and if we are faithful, I am persuaded, that as our 
day is, so shall our strength be. 

12th. — From the lightness of the wind, and the adverse set 
of the current, at sun-set last evening we had nearly drifted to 
the bay of Kailua. The wind having freshened and become 
more favourable, we are this morning in sight of Towaihai Bay. 
In the forenoon we anchored as near the coast as seemed 
prudent, with a heavy swell setting into the bay. With 
the help of ' Sugar-Cane,' our pilot, a native was despatched 
to the missionary station at Waimea, with a letter to make 
arrangements with D wight Baldwin and Lorenzo Lyons, the 
resident missionaries, for collecting the people together as early 
as might be, in order to expedite us on our way to Hilo, in 
Byron's Bay, situated at the southern extremity of the island 
of Hawaii ; and that our vessel might be no longer exposed 
than was absolutely needful, to the risk of encountering, what 
are called by the islanders, Moomookoo. These are furious blasts 
which run between the two lofty mountains, with irresistible 
force, turning the surface of the sea into a white foam, and 
blowing a vessel entirely away from the coast ; and though per- 
haps not producing any serious results, yet it may require 
several days to get her back into the place from whence she 
was driven. As the distance over the mountains from the 
coast to Waimea is more than fourteen miles, the return of 
our messenger cannot be looked for till to-morrow morning. 
On reaching Kalakakua Bay, several days ago, we were 
informed that the station of Waimea, near which we now are, 
was vacant, the missionaries having sailed away for their 
annual meeting ; so that there seemed a probability we should 
have to pass by it : but at Kairua we learned, that the vessel 
they were in, had met with such boisterous weather, that she 
was compelled to put back again ; and the indisposition of one of 
the parties prevented their making a second attempt at that 
time. On inquiring of a native this morning through the 
pilot, this report was found correct ; and that the two families, 
had again returned to their station at Waimea, and were now 
there. This evening the master of the missionary packet came 
on board, and said he was to proceed towards Hilo to-morrow, 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVII. 499 

to bring away the missionaries : that he was to call here on 
his return for the two families at Waimea, and then to call 
at Kailua for the family resident there ; but that he could not 
execute the order he had received, as there were five families 
at these places, and he had only accommodation for three. I 
told him, that if the missionaries at Waimea could stay to 
render me the needful assistance here, I should then proceed 
immediately to Hilo, and after I had visited the people of that 
place, we would then transport the two families from thence to 
the island of Maui ; from which place they would have no diffi- 
culty in getting to Oahu, as vessels are frequently passing to 
and fro between those two islands. To-morrow it is probable this 
matter will be decided ; I desire to stand resigned to whatever 
is the will of my heavenly Father, believing it will not be 
required of me to go to any part, where there is no one capable 
of interpreting between myself and the natives. From what 
we have seen of the people here in the course of the day, they 
appear to be more haughty, and more exorbitant in their 
demands, than at either of the two bays we have previously 
anchored in ; owing perhaps to their having had more inter- 
course with foreigners, and more frequent communication with 
Oahu. 

Charles and myself sat down together in the forenoon as 
heretofore, and I believe shared together in a long, heavy, lifeless 
season : but I humbly trust that I have, in some degree, 
learned in all states to be content, and desire to bear cheerfully 
every dispensation of the Divine Will ; a knowledge of which, 
when moving along in the counsel thereof, is at once the 
strength of my life, and food, administering consolation and 
comfort to the wayworn traveller. 



2 k 2 



500 CHAPTEK XXVIII. [1836. 



CHAPTER XXVIII. 

WAIMEA NATIVE MEETING SAIL FOR KOALA VOLCANO BYROn's 

BAY NATIVE MEETINGS — SAIL WITH THE MISSION FAMILIES FOR 

MAUI ISLAND OF MAUI ANCHOR AT LAHAINA PROCEED TO 

WAIRUKU SCHOOL MEETINGS AT LAHAINA SCHOOL SAIL FOR 

OAHU. 

Fifth Month 13^A, 1836. — The messenger dispatched yester- 
day to Waimea, returned at an early hour this morning, 
bringing a letter from Dwight Baldwin, (with whom we became 
acquainted when at the Georgian Islands last year,) which 
contained a welcome message, and stated that a horse was sent 
down for my son Charles, and a sufficient number of the natives 
to transport myself upon a sort of litter to the station ; at the 
same time informing us, that a meeting might be held with the 
people in their district the same evening, if we left the coast in 
good time after receiving the letter. This being ascertained, 
we hastened to the shore, taking with us ' Sugar-Cane' the pilot, 
who, from his knowledge of the neighbourhood, could point out 
a landing place most free from the breaking surf. Having 
accomplished our purpose in safety, we soon found the natives 
who had been engaged as burden-bearers, and there seemed 
every probability of our setting forward without delay ; but 
when all seemed ready and I had taken my seat, some demur 
began to show itself on the part of the natives ; and we began 
to discover, that nothing would satisfy them but the sight of 
the cloth, which they were to have as payment, and a knowledge 
of the quantity that each man was to receive for his labour. 
Supposing that these matters had been fully arranged for us 
by the missionaries as had been requested, we were quite 
unprepared to answer this demand ; and as far as we could 
understand, the parties were determined not to proceed, without 
it was complied with : as the affair could not be adjusted, I 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVIII. 501 

left my seat again, expecting to have to return on board. A 
number of the natives by this time gathered round us, and 
amongst them was an American sailor ; and finding that he 
understood a little of the language, I requested him to inquire 
whether any other persons then about us would undertake the 
work. After much debate some consented, and being informed 
that whatever the missionaries decided upon as their wages, 
they should be fully paid, a sufficient number came forward, 
and we soon began to move on in earnest. The sun by 
this time had become very hot, and the journey altogether 
extremely fatiguing, from the road passing over mountain after 
mountain with continual ascent nearly the whole distance of 
fourteen miles. I was desirous to lessen the labour of the people 
as much as was in my power ; and walked perhaps more than 
was prudent for a stranger in such a climate at noon day. It 
was late in the afternoon when we arrived at Waimea ; and on 
reaching the mission-house were kindly received by Lorenzo 
Lyons, and Dwight Baldwin and their families. Feeling much 
exhausted with the heat and the harassing journey, I should 
have rejoiced if the meeting had been appointed for the next 
morning: but found on inquiry, that the people would soon 
begin to collect, and that if postponed until to-morrow, but few 
persons would be able to attend, as they would necessarily be 
widely scattered in collecting food for the First day of the 
week, so that they might have nothing to prevent their attend- 
ing the places of worship. I was informed, that on First day 
the meeting would be larger if the weather proved fine ; but if 
wet, the people would not come. These things considered, it 
seemed best to take the opportunity which now presented, 
rather than by delay to run the risk of faring worse, or per- 
haps losing my labour altogether. After some refreshment we 
repaired to the meeting, which proved quite as large as was 
expected. The senior missionary thought it unnecessary to do 
more than explain the nature of my certificates, and this in a 
brief manner ; but perhaps sufficient for the understanding of 
the people. When he had finished, I stood up in great weak- 
ness, desiring that we might endeavour to draw nigh unto the 
Lord in humble reverence of soul. The people were very solid 



502 CHAPTER XXVIII. [1836. 

and attentive ; and although I do not remember having felt 
less ability to minister, or having less matter in prospect, as 
I proceeded, strength sufficient was mercifully and timely 
afforded, to endeavour to turn them from darkness to the light 
of the Holy Spirit of the Lord Jesus in their own hearts, — that 
they might know Him to be a Saviour indeed, to save them 
from their sins ; that so He might be theirs, and they might 
be His, through the never-ending ages of eternity : it is He 
who bringeth unto God the Father, and raiseth up at the last 
day. I stood long among them, and though to myself the life 
never seemed to rise and spread, as at some favoured seasons, 
and my own exhausted state of body was sensibly felt, — yet 
I afterwards found, from the testimony of others, that the 
power of the blessed Truth had been felt amongst them : let 
the Lord be glorified and let them rejoice : but the feelings 
and the sentence of the unprofitable servant most certainly 
were mine. 

Spent an agreeable evening with the two families. From 
the vast quantity of rain which falls on this side the island of 
Hawaii, the dampness of every thing in and about the houses 
is extreme : the bed we lay on would have been very justly 
considered in England, not fit for those who have any regard 
for their health, but we had no alternative ; and after using 
all the means we possessed to prevent being injured, we were 
favoured to witness no ill effects in the morning, though our 
clothing was as if it had been hung in the midst of steam 
during the night. We were, however, glad to see the light of 
the returning morning to liberate us from the consequences 
which threatened. 

1 -ith. — Being desirous of returning to the coast as soon as 
circumstances would allow, we rose early in the morning, and 
after breakfast it was concluded by the missionaries (who had 
the direction of the movements of the Missionary Packet,) 
that instead of proceeding round the southern part of the island 
to Byron's Bay, where Hilo is situated, she should sail imme- 
diately for Kairua and Kalakakua Bays, and return with the 
mission families from those stations back again to Kowaihai 
Bay ; when, if the two families residing here were ready, they 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVIII. 503 

would accompany their brethren to the island of Oahu, to be 
in readiness for the approaching annual meeting of the whole 
mission about to take place. By this measure, the missionary 
families at Hilo were left entirely at our disposal, which at once 
removed every doubt of being able to speak to the people. How 
bountifully are we dealt with by Him, who " openeth His hand 
and satisfieth the desire of every living thing."" At nine a. m., 
taking leave of Waimea, we made the best of our way to the 
coast, expecting to put to sea the same evening ; but the night 
proving rainy and rough, it seemed best for us to remain under 
the shelter at present afforded by the projecting land in the 
neighbourhood of Koala. 

loth. (First day.) — From the state of the weather, it is 
probable if we had remained at Waimea, but few of the people 
would have attended the meeting to-day. Twice in the course 
of the day our seamen were assembled for devotional purposes, 
as we had no communication with the shore ; although I 
thought if an interpreter had been present some of the strag- 
gling natives might have been collected together. At sun-down 
got under weigh, and proceeded towards Koala with a light 
breeze ; but on opening the mouth of the passage, between the 
islands, we found plenty of wind and sea. We stretched off 
the land until two o'clock in the morning, and then stood 
towards Hawaii again, under double-reefed canvass, anticipating 
that before we could possibly reach any of its stupendous crags, 
the day would have sufficiently dawned to expose them to our 
view. 

16th. — Employed through the day endeavouring to beat 
through the passage formed by the islands of Hawaii and 
Maui, about twenty miles wide, with rough blowing weather, 
and the trade-wind directly opposed to our course. Main- 
tained a central position between the islands during the night ; 
but gained very little ground. 

17th. — Early in the morning stood in for Hawaii, — the 
weather rainy through the day ; at six o'clock p m., stood off 
again for the night. Torrents of rain appeared to be falling all 
the day upon the mountains of Hawaii : twenty-six different 
cascades were counted at one time rushing towards the ocean 



504 CHAPTER XXVIII. [1836. 

down the rocky cliffs : every part of the island which we have 
seen seems to consist of huge masses of volcanic substance, and 
the leeward side is truly dreary and barren in appearance. 

18th. — After beating to and fro through the night, the 
weather became more gentle ; but the wind was so fickle that 
there seemed no probability of our rounding the point that 
forms one side of Byron's Bay, at the bottom of which stands 
the village and missionary station of Hilo. In the course of the 
day, made several advantageous tacks close in with the shore, 
there being no appearance of broken water on the margin of 
the coast. The weather proved much more bright and favour- 
able than we had anticipated : we heard a well attested fact 
related by a missionary who had formerly dwelt some years 
at Hilo, that while residing at that station there were only 
six days wholly without rain during the space of two years, 
as by record duly kept of the weather. Fifty-six cascades of 
water pouring oft' the land into the sea were in sight at noon 
to-day. 

This evening, whilst under feeling of poverty and weakness, 
1 was reminded that this day the Yearly Meeting of Friends 
at large sat down in London. This brought afresh my dear 
brethren and sisters, who are endeavouring to do the will of 
our heavenly Father, very near to me in the covenant of life 
and peace ; and a belief that we ourselves shall not be for- 
gotten by some who compose that large assembly, when 
drawing nigh in spirit to the footstool of mercy and love, is 
very precious and animating, though removed from them 
almost as far as the east is from the west. But although 
thus outwardly severed from each other, we have a never- 
failing source of comfort and consolation, in knowing, that the 
one great and heavenly Parent of the universe is equally 
near unto us all, — that in Him we live, and move, and have 
our being, — and that His tender mercy is over all His works ; 
of which my only earthly treasure, and my all on the solitary 
Plains of Shoosharry, form a part. May the blessing of the 
Most High be felt, through the power of the Holy Spirit, to 
rest richly upon us all ; then shall we be in that glorious 
unitv, which inherits life and that for evermore : from which 



1836. J CHAPTER XXVIII. 505 

nothing can separate, because it is in the love of God, in Christ 
Jesus our Lord.* 

19th. — Towards midnight, the flashes from the great volcano 
illumined the atmosphere, and at times had the appearance of 
a stationary light on that part of the coast. At three o'clock 
a. m., it visibly spread and increased its light ; but was even- 
tually lost sight of in the beams of returning morning. 
Having made a successful in-shore slant during the night, at 
breakfast-time weathered the northernmost point, and edged 
away for Byron's Bay, — the wind now shifting more and more 
in our favour. At half-past two o'clock p. m., dropped an 
anchor in seven fathoms water, behind a small reef, which 
affords a good shelter from the swell occasioned by the usual 
trade-wind, which though constantly blowing in during the day, 
through the wonderful provision of an all-wise Providence, 
never is permitted to blow hard for at least nine months out 
of the twelve, which seasons are pretty well ascertained. 
During the intervals of unsettled weather, no vessel would be 
warranted in attempting to seek shelter here. In the after- 
noon, a double canoe came off from the shore, and returned 

* Having had of late a number of letters handed to us by way of 
introduction from one missionary to another, in order to procure the 
needful aid from station to station, I have thought it might afford satis- 
faction to others, to know how we stood in their estimation, after having 
sojourned nearly five months within their borders on the Sandwich Isles. 
As they are all of the same tenor, a copy of one may suffice for the 
whole. 

(Copy,) April 33rd, 1836. To Rev. David B. Lyman and Titus Coan. 
Dear Brethren, 

Allow me the pleasure of introducing to you our Mends, Daniel 
Wheeler, a minister of the gospel, of the Society of Friends, and his son 
Charles Wheeler, who, on an errand of benevolence to the dwellers on 
the isles of the Pacific, have visited this quarter, to co-operate in the 
work of our Master, in turning men from darkness to light, and from 
the power of Satan unto God. I have had the pleasure of interpreting 
repeatedly the warm, earnest, and evangelical appeals of Daniel Wheeler 
to our people, and presume you will feel it a pleasure to assist him in a 
similar way, for the furtherance of his object, and otherwise facilitating 
their intercourse with the chiefs and the people, and cheering their toil 
in a long and expensive voyage. Affectionately your brother, 

Honolulu, Island Oahu. Hiram Bingham. 



506 CHAPTER XXVIII. [1836. 

again loaded with stores, which our vessel had received from 
the Missionary Packet at Kowaihai Bay, and collected at other 
places since leaving Oahu. Taking our pilot ' Sugar-Cane 1 for 
a guide to that part of the strand the most free from surf, 
Charles and myself landed and made our way towards the 
mission-house, meeting with David B. Lyman and Titus Coan 
before reaching their abode. Both the families assembled at 
David B. Lyman's, where we partook of some refreshment. 

20th. — This morning the principal chief and his wife came 
on board to breakfast, and stayed our reading. This chief is 
descended from the late Tamehameha, and certainly, if bulk 
and weight can add dignity to high birth, his wife must also 
be a first-rate personage ; and we are told, that her rank is 
considerably higher than that of her husband. On leaving us, 
she very uncourteously took to herself the power of proclaiming 
the Henry Freeling under Tabu, when the natives who had 
come on board with shells, eggs, &c. to barter, immediately 
sprung into their canoes, and pushed off from the vessel. 
Through the medium of ' Sugar-Cane,' we were made to under- 
stand that all traffic could now only be carried on at a sort 
of market upon the shore. On inquiry made afterwards, it 
appeared that this woman had not the power of preventing 
the natives from trading ; and that she had ventured to usurp 
this authority, in the hope of monopolizing the whole traffic 
herself. It happened, however, that we were not in want of 
many supplies, as we were not intending to recruit our stock 
of fuel at this island, on account of the extra risk to the vessel 
which delay might incur in such an exposed roadstead. In 
the afternoon David B. Lyman and Titus Coan came on 
board ; we returned with them to the shore, and after a walk 
to an old crater not far distant, took tea at Titus Coan's, 
where the other family joined us. At nine o'clock in the 
evening, the flames of the volcano gave the atmosphere an 
unusually bright tinge of light. 

21st. — This morning the circumstance of the vessel being 
' Tabued,' was fully ascertained to be enforced with a view to 
exclude the natives from a share in the traffic, and no other 
than an unauthorized violation of their privileges ; against 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVIII. 507 

which, we thought it right to make a stand. A person who 
could speak a little English came on board at an early hour, 
with a present of a fowl and some potatoes from the chiefess. 
I told him it was a pity she had been at the trouble of sending 
them off, as presents were things we did not accept, and there- 
fore must pay for what he had brought with him. This man 
was told to inform us, that if we accepted the present, it 
would be considered that the chiefess was entitled to furnish 
what supplies might be wanted ; but if these terms were not 
acceded to, and the present was declined, he was then to return 
to the shore to know its value, and the price was to be sent off 
by a native then upon the deck, who was pointed out, that he 
might be known again by us ; word was soon brought that the 
price was a quarter dollar, which was paid forthwith, to pre- 
serve peace and put an end to the matter. The man who 
brought off the present was highly gratified at our declining 
the terms altogether; and there is no doubt but the affair 
soon gained publicity, as canoes kept coming through the day 
with fowls, turkeys, cabbages, bread-fruit, pine-apples, water- 
melons, &c, in an undisguised manner. We afterwards fully 
ascertained that this arbitrary proceeding was a violation of 
the laws of the island, no person whatever, but the governor 
John Adams, alias Kuakini, having the power of interfering 
with the traffic carried on by the inhabitants ; yet such is the 
servile state of these poor people, having been trained from 
infancy to view their chiefs as a race of beings superior to 
themselves, that they would patiently have borne this act of 
oppression, if it had met with our sanction. Drank tea at 
David B. Lyman's, who has kindly undertaken to accept the 
office of interpreter between myself and the people to-morrow. 
Notwithstanding I have now stood before so many thousands 
of these islanders on both sides the Equator ; yet the prospect 
of to-morrow is formidable in my sight. If the weakness of 
human nature was not thus felt, there would, I believe, be a 
danger of our not sufficiently and devotedly seeking after, and 
imploring the strengthening influence of that power, without 
which "we can do nothing," but with it all things. May 
the Lord be our helper, and cause his own works to praise 



508 CHAPTER XXVJII. [1836. 

Him, to the glory of the riches of that grace, which came by 
Jesus Christ. 

22nd. (First day.) — This morning I felt as has uniformly 
been the case, when about to meet for the first time a large 
body of the people at a fresh place ; but I was comforted from 
believing that we should be remembered by some at a time and 
" place where prayer is wont to be made ;" where the Lord is in 
the purified temple, the earthly nature silent, and the heavenly 
Intercessor's only availing help experienced. Attended the 
meeting at the time fixed : sat as one that had lost all 
strength, until David B. Lyman had nearly finished reading 
the Morning Meeting's certificate, when I seemed ready, and 
only waiting the termination of the concluding paragraph to 
stand upon my feet, with my mind centred and the fear of 
man banished far away. After the people were requested to 
settle down in stillness, and endeavour to draw nigh unto the 
Lord with humble reverence, I was strengthened to declare 
amongst them the way of life and salvation, in the word of 
the truth of the gospel, in the love of which my heart was 
greatly enlarged. Eepentance toward God, and faith toward 
our Lord Jesus Christ, the only way to obtain forgiveness of 
sins that are past, and freedom from the thraldom of sin in 
future, were largely pointed out, and the light of the Holy 
Spirit of Christ Jesus, which shineth in every heart, as the 
only blessed medium by which this path is made manifest ; by 
reason of the darkness which prevaileth in man, while held in 
a carnal, and unregenerate state, in bondage to the power of 
Satan, the prince of darkness. The burthen which rested 
upon my mind was, that they might be delivered from the 
power of darkness, and translated into the kingdom of the dear 
Son of God, through the shedding of whose precious blood our 
redemption is sealed, even forgiveness and remission of sins 
that are past, and an interest mercifully granted in that Holy 
Advocate, always present to plead with our heavenly Father, 
the weakness and infirmity of our nature, for the time to come, 
for all those who, in belief and obedience, are willing to come 
unto God by Him. Such, and such only, are turned " from 
darkness to light, and from the power of Satan unto God." 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVIII. 509 

The meeting was not so large, we were told, as at some other 
times ; but the people were very attentive, and bowed down 
under the mighty hand of Him whose power reigned over all. 
After the meeting broke up, we attended a Sabbath school 
for Bible scholars, of all ages and both sexes. It commenced 
with a prayer by a native teacher, and finished with another 
from one of the missionaries. 

We partook of some dinner with Titus Ooan and wife, as I 
felt an engagement to attend the native meeting again in the 
afternoon. It began at three o'clock, and I had again to 
testify of the gospel of grace and truth which came by Jesus 
Christ, from which, such is the universal love of God, none 
are excluded. 

23rd. — By a canoe that came paddling round the vessel, it 
was ascertained that the tabic was still enforced ; and the natives, 
though invited on board, thought it safest to keep aloof. 
Before noon a person was sent to inform us that sundry articles 
were in the market for sale ; but as they belonged to the 
chiefess as before, he was told that nothing would be pur- 
chased belonging to her, at the same time it was stated, that if 
the natives had anything to sell, we would buy from them what 
was wanting. In the afternoon landed, and visited a mag- 
nificent and stupendous waterfall, called the ' Cascade of the 
Rainbow. , The sun was hot and the walk fatiguing ; but the 
exercise was needful before again putting to sea, as from the 
wetness of the weather since anchoring in the bay but little 
had been obtained. We passed by three distinct craters, 
situated in a line stretching inland from the shore, apparently 
at exact distances from each other, and the same size and 
shape in every particular, all declaring the wonderful works of 
the same Almighty power. The cascade of the rainbow ex- 
ceeds the description given of it, and at once excites wonder 
and admiration, exhibiting a mighty torrent of foaming water in 
perpetual roar, rushing down a perpendicular steep of more than 
one hundred feet into a basin of sufficient magnitude to receive 
this never-ceasing deluge. At the back of the fall, towards 
the bottom, a large arch is formed probably by the rushing 
torrent ; and the enormous weight of water falling such a 



510 CHAPTER XXVIII. [1836. 

depth, caused a mist to arise two-thirds of the whole height of 
the surrounding cliffs, which with the sun in a certain position, 
gives rise to the name of the cascade, by displaying a beautiful 
rainbow. While Charles was taking a sketch of the outline of 
this sublime spectacle, I placed myself on a stone in its front, 
surrounded by nine of the natives, who seemed not fully satis- 
fied without being so near as to touch me occasionally. One 
of the oldest of them took no small pains to make me under- 
stand that in former days, when there was plenty, plenty of 
water, (probably after great rain) little native children were 
hurled by their parents into this rainbowed gulph to check the 
increase of population. Afterwards, on mentioning to the 
missionary, Titus Coan, what I supposed this native meant, 
describing as well as I could some of his actions and words, 
he said, that the construction I had put upon them was correct. 

Not feeling any thing to detain me further upon this island, 
we look forward to leave this interesting bay to-morrow night, 
when the land-breeze comes off the mountains, for the island of 
Maui, and expect to take with us the two missionary families 
so far on their way to the annual meeting at Oahu : they*will 
probably escape a portion of sea-sickness by not coming on 
board until near the time of sailing, as the motion of our vessel 
is incessant, from the constant swell of the ocean, which ranges 
round the reef into the bay. It compels us to keep every thing 
secure nearly as much as at sea. 

21th. — To-day procured what supplies were needed. In the 
afternoon took exercise on shore, and towards sun-setting the 
baggage was embarked in a double canoe, which, with the 
assistance of our boat brought off both the families and our- 
selves with two native servants. About eight o'clock p. m., the 
mountain breeze sprung up, when the vessel was got under 
weigh, but the wind soon became lighter, and the great wash of 
water off the land and out of the rivers, combined to sweep us 
towards the reef : before ten o'clock the water began to grow 
shallow, and diminishing from ten to three fathoms, obliged us 
to anchor for the night. The hollow ground swell upon the 
edge of the reef caused violent and constant rolling, without a 
possibility of preventing it in that position. 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVIII. oil 

25th. — Soon after eight o'clock a. m., the sea-breeze made 
its appearance, but before setting in, a canoe came paddling off 
in great haste to reach the vessel, with a couple who were desir- 
ous of being married before the departure of the missionaries ; 
but having neglected to obtain the permission of the principal 
chiefess, this could not be accomplished. There w r as no alter- 
native but that of returning again to the shore about three 
miles off, to obtain the needful sanction ; and having been told 
that we should not wait for them if the wind should spring up 
in our favour, they paddled off again with all the speed in their 
power. Before the wind was strong enough to warrant the risk 
of getting under weigh and clearing the reef, this canoe was 
seen again returning to the vessel from the shore. They would 
gladly have been married in their canoe, but the motion was so 
violent that the parties could not possibly stand upright while 
the missionary performed the usual ceremony. They were then 
taken on board, and to make it easy to both parties, were 
brought down into the cabin, where the rite was performed by 
one of the missionaries demanding answers to several important 
questions ; the other offering up a prayer. The captain, mate, 
and ourselves, were witnesses of this curious exhibition, the 
vessel rolling about in such a manner that they were forced to 
hold themselves by the table and each other, when they stood 
upon their feet : they were both so drenched by the sea that 
had washed into the canoe, that measures were necessary to 
clear the cabin floor from the quantity of water on it, after 
the ceremony was concluded. The husband was clothed in a 
European shirt, with a belt round him ; and his wife in a loose 
cotton robe, reaching nearly to the floor, which comprised the 
whole attire of the parties. I felt a degree of satisfaction at 
what had transpired, and to myself, our detention last evening 
was accounted for. Nothing short of a fear let in by some on 
board, of losing the vessel upon the reef, would have induced a 
willingness to anchor for the night to avoid the apparent danger 
that seemed to threaten. On looking over all the circumstances 
of the case, there seemed a providence in it that these poor 
people might be saved the temptation of violating the laws of 
their country by an illegal procedure, without waiting the 



512 chapter xxvnr. [1886. 

return of the missionaries, which might be most of two months. 
A marriage thus consummated upon the mighty waters, is not 
an every-day transaction, and especially, as I humbly trust it 
may be said, in a place of worship, which the cabin of the 
Henry Freeling has been in many instances, as well as a place 
of prayer and praise ; from whence the spiritual sacrifice has, we 
hope, at times acceptably ascended unto God through Jesus 
Christ, though we be as nothing in his sight, and in our own, 
utterly unworthy of the least of all his tender mercies. As 
soon as the married couple had left the vessel, we at once made 
sail, with a delightful breeze in our favour, for the island of 
Maui. 

We witnessed last evening a scene, in the embarkation of 
the two missionary families, both affecting and highly interest- 
ing. When the moment for their leaving their habitations 
approached, the natives crowded into their houses to take leave 
of them ; and as the train proceeded towards the beach, the com- 
pany increased to a large number, perhaps hundreds. When 
arrived at the edge of the cliff, there was a solemn pause, and 
a prayer was eventually offered up by D. B. Lyman ; after 
which, the final separation took place. The people seemed to 
consider us also as friends about to leave them, and extended 
their good wishes, shaking hands very freely as we retired to 
the boat. Some of them assisted us to launch into the surf, and 
I have no hesitation in believing, that they would have risked 
their own lives to save ours. How different their present state 
to what it was, when these shores were visited by the first navi- 
gators of the Pacific : but what might the situation of these 
simple hearted natives have been at this day, if only men of 
Christian principles had trod their soil, instead of the wicked 
and barbarous crews of the shipping ; who have committed every 
possible excess and outrage, shameful and brutal, upon these 
helpless islanders, to the lasting disgrace and infamy of the 
white skin. 

Before leaving England, I was applied to by our mutual 
friend Thomas Bigg, to make inquiry, should opportunity 
present, for an Englishman supposed to reside on the island of 
Hawaii ; and a letter from his poor mother was committed to 



1836.] chapter xxviii. 513 

my care for him. It appears that the individual in question 
lived in the neighbourhood of Kalakakua Bay, and obtained a 
livelihood as a pilot to the vessels, which occasionally come to 
that side of the island for supplies. He died in the fall of 
1832, leaving a native widow and two children, who, I should 
suppose, were afterwards supported by her relations. The 
youngest child died last year, and the eldest has since been 
carried off, say stolen, by the captain of an American whaler, 
who pretended to have received orders from the god-parents 
(so called) to bring these children to them in America. It is 
probable that this impostor was aware of the lad's abilities ; 
and that by this fabricated tale he might be obtained without 
any cost, now that he had lost his father. In this manner was 
this poor helpless boy torn away, in spite of his tears and 
entreaties to remain with his mother, under pretence of being 
provided for much better in America, than would be the case 
here. The whaler has never returned to this neighbourhood 
since the theft was committed. This account has been princi- 
pally given me by one of the missionaries ; and I cannot for a 
moment doubt that it is substantially correct. The injured 
native mother is now removed by death, beyond the reach of 
the monsters who perpetrate these horrible deeds of cruelty and 
injustice ; but their clay will also come, and will not tarry. 

26th. — In hauling round the point of the island, the wind 
became light ; but a fresh breeze springing up from the south- 
west, enabled us to stem the current and reach the roads of 
Lahaina, soon after twelve o'clock ; we anchored near the 
American ship Newark, a whaling vessel put in for fresh pro- 
visions and vegetables. The smooth water having recruited 
our passengers, the men went on shore, but soon returned, 
bringing with them the resident missionary, William Eichards. 
The captain of the whaler coming on board at the same time, 
kindly made the offer of his boat, which conveyed all our 
passengers on shore at once, with ease. In the afternoon 
Charles and myself landed, and remained at the mission-house 
until sun-down. It appeared that William Eichards and family 
had intended to leave Lahaina on the evening of the following 
day for Oahu, in a small schooner lying near at hand ; this 

9 r 



514 CHAPTER XXVIII. [1836. 

being the only opportunity likely to oner for their conveyance 
to that island in time for their annual meeting. Although I 
had not disclosed what was upon my mind to any one : yet I 
had long believed that I should not be clear of the Sandwich 
Islands, without making an attempt to see the whole of the 
missionary families, when collected together for their annual 
meeting at Oahu ; and it now sprung in my heart to tell William 
Richards, that if he would consent to remain at Lahaina, and 
assist me over the approaching First day, I should feel myself 
bound to convey himself and family, in time for their meeting at 
Oahu if practicable, in the Henry Freeling. These terms being- 
accepted, it was with me to inquire whether the missionary 
at the station of Wairuku, on the south side of the island, 
had sailed for Oahu ; and finding there was considerable proba- 
bility of his being still at his post, it seemed best to make the 
necessary arrangements for proceeding thither without delay. 
A messenger was forthwith dispatched with a letter, requesting 
that the inhabitants of that district might be collected to- 
morrow at the place of worship, as early in the day as could 
conveniently be done. A whale-boat was procured from the 
governor Opeli, as the conveyance best calculated to accomplish 
our object, in contending with the wind and weather in rounding 
one point of the island, where strong blasts prevail from the 
set of the trade-winds, during the greatest part of the year. 

27th. — By two o" clock a. m., the whale-boat manned with a 
native crew came alongside ; and at the cock-crowing as agreed 
upon by all parties, we left the vessel properly equipped for the 
journey. The morning was serene and beautiful, and when 
the day broke the wind began to rise, and to increase as the 
day advanced. On reaching the most critical point, the wind 
was so strong and the water so rough, that for a time it seemed 
doubtful whether the strength of our rowers would hold out : 
they succeeded however in getting under the shelter of the 
coast ; but not without all of us being well drenched by the 
spray of the sea. By eight o^lock, we reached the boundary 
aimed at, beyond which the boat was of no further service ; 
here we landed and hauled it up ; and the men corded the 
oars to a chair we had purposely brought with us. I was thus 



1836.] chapter xxviir. 515 

speedily furnished with a land conveyance, and Charles being- 
provided with a horse, we pursued our route towards Wairiiku, 
about eight miles distant ; he on horseback, and I riding and 
walking alternately, for the relief of my bearers, as well as for 
a change of position. We got to our destination about noon, 
and were kindly received by the missionary family. While 
some refreshment was preparing, we visited the school, consist- 
ing of a large number of children of both sexes. The meeting- 
gathered at three o'clock, which we attended accordingly, — 
myvself in much weariness and emptiness ; but I was strength- 
ened to stand up shortly after the reading of my certificates, 
and remind the people that we were in the presence of the 
Most High Grod of heaven and earth ; before whom " the 
nations are as a drop of a bucket : He taketh up the isles as 
a very little thing :" He not only seeth all our actions, but 
knoweth the most inward thoughts and imaginations of every 
heart. I was carried forward to unusual length, and without 
any prospect of drawing to a conclusion ; the blessed truths of 
the gospel unfolding in continued succession to the view of 
my mind for about an hour and a-half : I afterwards found 
that the meeting had kept increasing, far beyond what was 
anticipated. It was to me a very memorable season, the 
Lord's power was over all ; and I humbly trust His name was 
honoured and exalted, and the kingdom within proclaimed to 
the dear Redeemer's praise. The desire of my heart was, that 
the gospel message might be " glad tidings'" indeed — " of great 
joy " to these people, through " repentance toward God, and 
faith toward our Lord Jesus Christ," wrought by believing in 
the appearance of His Holy Spirit in the heart, and by the 
operation thereof cleansing and purifying from every thing 
that is offensive in the Divine sight : that thus they might be 
made meet to be partakers of an inheritance with the saints in 
light, in the everlasting kingdom. My mind felt peaceful and 
refreshed, and the fatigue of the journey was remembered no 
more. We had to shake hands with a large body of the 
natives between the meeting-house and the missionary's 
dwelling. After spending some time with the family, and the 
night drawing on, we were compelled to renew our travel 

2l2 



516 CHAPTER XXVIII. [1836. 

towards the place where the boat had been left in the morning ; 
and though it soon became dark after leaving Wairuku, we 
succeeded in getting to the right spot. After the people had 
rested themselves, the boat was launched, and we were favoured 
to reach our little vessel about half-past one o'clock in the morn- 
ing. It was to me a memorable day of goodness and mercy, and 
the more so, as it was the anniversary of my dear William's 
birth, which kindled in my heart towards our heavenly Father, 
renewed desires for the welfare of my precious family. 

28th. — Engaged on board until afternoon, then landed and 
arranged with the missionary to meet the people, at nine 
o'clock on the following morning ; at the prospect of which, I 
felt as a worm and no man : but whither could I look for help, 
but unto Him, who hath so often covered my head in the day 
of battle, for His great name's sake. 

29th. (First day.) — Got some rest in the night ; but was 
awakened early by the remembrance of the great weight of 
responsibility resting upon me ; but the voice of my supplica- 
tion was heard, and my prayer was not permitted to return 
again into my bosom in the hour of trouble. At this place 
we found a noble meeting-house, teeming full of people, both 
in the galleries and upon the ground-floor, more in number 
than two thousand, according to the missionary's statement : 
the will of the creature was laid low as in the dust ; but I felt 
the comforting influence of that power, whose " strength is 
made perfect in weakness,"" to be nigh, though the earth 
trembleth and shaketh at the presence thereof. Though a 
stranger to the language of these people, I was sensible that 
my kind and willing interpreter took more than ordinary pains 
to impress their minds with a belief, that I had brought with 
me well attested letters of recommendation ; and as the name 
of William Ellis was well known and remembered among 
them, he took care to state that I had a letter from him also, 
among others ; his competent knowledge and fluent expression 
of the language, while it at once commanded attention, raised 
a degree of confidence, both in them and myself, which was of 
a strengthening tendency. 

On standing up I told them, although for the most part we 



1836.] CHAPTER XXVIII. 1 7 

were strangers to each other, yet we were all of one blood 
and members of the same great human family, and in the 
presence of the Almighty and everlasting Parent of the 
universe, " who seeth not as man seeth ; for man looketh on 
the outward appearance, but the Lord looketh on the heart :"" 
— pointing out the necessity of our endeavouring to get into an 
humble waiting frame of mind, and be still ; that His power 
might be known and magnified, and felt as a crown of solemnity 
over us : — that I had come amongst them in the love of the 
gospel, — that same love of which the great apostle spoke, 
when he said, " the love of Christ const raineth us ; because 
we thus judge, that if one died for all, then were all dead : 
and that He died for all, that they which live should not 
henceforth live unto themselves, but unto Him which died for 
them, and rose again." Strong desires were raised in me and 
expressed, that these people might be brought to an acquaint- 
ance with the Holy Spirit of Him, who thus " gave his life a 
ransom for many. ,, I had to lay open some of their besetting 
sins as a people, and to point out the only way for their deli- 
verance from the power of darkness by which they are bound, 
— which is, to believe in the light of Christ Jesus, which shineth 
in every heart ; for this indeed is He, who by His Holy Spirit, 
speaketh unto them, and telleth them all things that ever they 
did; — who convinceth the world of sin, and by His light makes 
manifest every evil deed, every evil thought and word, and 
leadeth man to repentance, whereby he is strengthened to 
forsake sin, and to live unto Him, who died for us and rose 
again. It was with me to tell them, that the day of their 
visitation was come ; and that salvation by Jesus Christ was 
freely offered to them who believe and receive it, and who open 
the door of their hearts that the King of glory by His Holy 
Spirit may enter in. Ability was richly afforded to exhort, 
warn, encourage and beseech them to turn from darkness to that 
light, which would show them their sins, and bring them unto 
God the Father; and which would raise them up at the last day, 
to an inheritance with those that are sanctified by the like pre- 
cious faith in His beloved Son. It was indeed a high day, a da} 7- 
of light and joy and gladness of heart, as when the Bridegroom's 



518 CHAPTER XXVIII. [1836. 

voice is heard. The meeting held long; and when over, we were 
invited to attend an English service to be conducted by Titus 
Coan ; which I was most easy to decline, and return forthwith 
on board the Henry Freeling, to collect our own sailors. 
Some of the seamen of the American whaler were present, and 
my mouth was again opened to speak of the way of life and sal- 
vation by Christ Jesus, to this little gathering. 

Soon after three o'clock p. m., we again returned to the shore, 
to attend the afternoon native meeting. Not more than half 
the number of the people were present who had assembled in 
the morning. I had again to minister unto them ; but the 
current of life was weak in comparison to what had flowed so 
freely and strongly in the first meeting. The " gospel of the 
kingdom,' 1 was again declared to them ; and I trust the great 
name was magnified, by the praises of His own works, to His 
glory. After taking some tea at the mission-house, we again 
removed to our vessel for the night, as to myself, under the 
feelings of the unprofitable servant, being lamentably deficient 
in too many instances, and in having done that which was my 
duty to do. Blessed be the Lord God, the God of Israel, who 
only doeth wondrous things : and blessed be his glorious name 
for ever ; and let the whole earth be filled with his glory ; 
Amen, and Amen. 

30^A. — In the forenoon landed to purchase fruit, vegetables, 
&c, in the market appointed for the sale of these articles. 
Made a present of a small sized telescope to governor Opeli. 
William Richards having kindly furnished a light waggon, 
Charles and myself proceeded to Lahaina Luna, where the 
high-school is established ; we were kindly received by the 
principals of this institution, who are missionaries ; and spe- 
cimens of the books which have been printed here, charts of 
the Sandwich Islands, and a general atlas, (the plates which 
these were taken from, being the work of the native scholars at 
this school,) were presented to us. The buildings were under- 
going alterations and repairs during the vacation, on which 
account the scholars had been dismissed some days previous 
to our arrival. Returned on board soon after noon, but had 
some difficulty in getting safely through the surf, which had 



1836. J CHAPTER XXVIII. 519 

greatly increased since the morning, owing perhaps to its 
being about high tide. At four o'clock p. m., the missionary 
families came on board, consisting of William Richards and 
wife, with eight children, David B. Lyman and wife, and two 
children, Titus Coan and wife, and an unmarried female in 
the employ of the mission, who, with the native servants, and 
their wives, and young children, amounted to twenty-three in 
number: the whale-boats of the American ship were procured 
for their embarkation. At five o'clock the Henry Freeling left 
the island of Maui ; after reaching the Morakai channel, the 
breeze forsook us, and we were left to tumble about all the 
night in a heavy swell. Nearly the whole of our passengers 
were sea-sick ; several of the females had with them sofa-beds, 
which were fixed upon the deck, and in which they remained 
the greatest part of the time they were on board. 

31st. — Having the advantage of a fine trade-wind in the 
course of the day, about five o'clock p. m. we anchored outside 
the reefs at Oahu in ten fathoms water. Having previously 
announced by a white flag at the mast-head, when passing 
Diamond Hill, that missionaries were on board, a fine double- 
canoe belonging to the king soon reached the vessel, sufficiently 
large to convey all our passengers to the shore at once, with 
their luggage, besides a number of the natives who worked the 
paddles, and had been employed on the occasion. Just after 
the canoe left, a shark from eight to nine feet in length was 
taken by our sailors ; a large portion of which was sent on 
shore by the pilot, ' Sugar-Cane,' for the use of his family. 
These islanders are so fond of the flesh of the shark, that it 
will always fetch a high price in the Oahu market, when 
offered for sale. 



520 CHAPTER XXIX. [1836. 



CHAPTER XXIX. 

OAHU ANNUAL MEETING OF THE MISSIONARIES MEETING WITH 

THE MEMBERS OF THE MISSION ADDRESSED BY THE SENIOR 

MISSIONARY— SAIL FOR TAUAI NATIVE MEETING AT KOLOA 

WAIMEA OPPRESSION OF THE NATIVES FINAL DEPARTURE FROM 

THE SANDWICH ISLANDS. 

Oahu, Sixth Month 1st. — Early in the forenoon, the British 
Consul came on board in a whale-boat, and conveyed us to the 
shore, as our own small boat was in such a shattered condition 
from exposure to the sun, as scarcely to be fit to trust to for so 
considerable a distance, as from our present anchorage without 
the reefs, to the town of Honolulu. After landing, proceeded 
to the missionary establishment, and had an interview with 
the three missionaries from the island of Tauai, about ninety 
miles to leeward of Oahu, who had arrived yesterday in the 
Missionary Packet. Our situation was fully explained to 
them, and it was I believe understood, that unless one of 
them would kindly accompany us to that island, our making 
an attempt to visit the people would be useless. We remained 
on shore until near dark, but were favoured to reach the 
vessel without difficulty, she having displayed a light as a 
beacon to guide us. Whilst on shore we were informed that 
the neighbourhood of New Zealand had been visited, in the 
First Month last, with an awful tempest, in which much damage 
had been done to the shipping ; that Captain Russel, of the 
American ship Zone, with whom we were personally acquainted, 
and to whom we were much attached, in endeavouring to save 
one of the sailors, had himself been washed overboard and lost. 
We met with him last year, at the Society Isle Huahine, and 
were much pleased with his serious and steady deportment. 
Several books and tracts were furnished for the use of the 
crew of his vessel, bv whom he was much beloved. We were 



1836.] CHAPTER XXIX. 521 

informed by the missionary family, that he had been much 
interested at the meeting that was held there with the natives, 
which he had attended. He had determined that that should 
be his last voyage, and so it has proved. I humbly trust he 
has safely entered a haven of eternal rest ; where storm and 
tempest cannot come, nor pain nor sorrow find place. 

2nd. — During most of the day I had to struggle with dis- 
couraging circumstances ; all perhaps needful, to keep the 
creature in its proper place. In the afternoon, landed with a 
view to ascertain from Hiram Bingham, whether one of the 
Tauai missionaries had consented to accompany us to that 
island as interpreter. Hiram Bingham said an adjourned 
annual meeting was about to assemble, and it would afford a 
good opportunity of getting to know what had transpired on 
that subject. The bell soon rang, and we repaired to the 
meeting. At a vacant opportunity the subject was brought 
forward by Hiram Bingham, but nothing came of it, as several 
of the parties were absent. I was afterwards informed that 
one of the Hawaii missionaries was kindly disposed to accom- 
pany us, which I rather viewed with regret, from being aware 
that he would expect to be brought back again by our vessel. 
Our suspense was at last relieved by a proposition from one of 
the Tauai missionaries to go with us, and an assurance that 
he would be ready to depart before the final conclusion of the 
annual meeting. Although this might occasion ten or twelve 
days' delay, yet the saving of time would be considerable, when 
compared with the first offer, which would involve our having 
to return again to Oahu, against a relentless trade-wind, the 
effect of which had been fully tried. The circumstances of 
the case in all its bearings considered, it seemed prudent to 
take the Henry Freeling again into harbour, rather than risk 
her any longer outside the reefs. It is no small trial to be 
thus delayed ; but as it is not to gratify self that we linger on 
the way, the Lord knoweth, I trust we shall yet be able to 
redeem this apparent loss of time, and be favoured to improve 
the future to his praise. 

Although the prospect which had been spread before the 
view of my mind, for some weeks previous to our return to 



522 CHAPTER XXIX. [1836. 

Honolulu, of seeing the whole of the missionaries and their 
families when collected at their general meeting, still remained 
strongly with me ; yet the time did not seem come for me to 
take any steps to accomplish the same, until we had ascertained 
that the whole of them had arrived. Those who were present 
at the opening of this general meeting, concluded I was 
detained until an interpreter was ready to accompany us to 
the island of Tauai, and in a very kind and brotherly manner 
invited us to attend the several sittings of that meeting. The 
manner in which the affairs of the mission to these islands is 
conducted, could not fail to excite much interest in our minds ; 
and although well aware that in our attendance at the meetings 
we should be subjected to witness many things that we could 
not unite in, yet, as they had always allowed us to do that which 
was most easy to ourselves, without a single remonstrance or 
the slightest appearance of dissatisfaction on their part, I was 
not satisfied to let such an opportunity pass away, however 
painful it might prove, without availing ourselves of it : at the 
same time, the unmortified part would gladly have been excused 
altogether. 

3rd. — This morning, one of the Tauai missionaries came on 
board to say, that he hoped to have his business in such a state 
of forwardness, as to enable him to return to that island before 
the final conclusion of the general meeting. A light breeze 
having sprung up from the southward, soon after breakfast the 
Henry Freeling got under weigh, and made sail for the harbour ; 
before ten o'clock she anchored off the fort of Honolulu. Being 
desirous of going to the mission-station at Eva next First day, 
application was made to know whether a missionary would 
return thither to meet the natives on that day ; but it appeared 
that the whole of them will remain here, on account of its being 
the usual time for the celebration of what is called the ' Lord's 
Supper." 1 We were informed that so few of the natives would 
remain within the compass of their own station, that a visit 
would be better deferred until next week. In the evening 
attended one of the general meetings, and had to wade through 
a painful season therein. 

Uh. — The leak before alluded to in our vessel still continuing, 



1836.] CHAPTER XXIX. 523 

although considerably lessened since our getting her into still 
water, it was deemed prudent that such parts of her should be 
well caulked, which were supposed to be the cause of her requir- 
ing so much pumping ; while at the same time the needful 
repairs of the sails and rigging were going forward, in the expec- 
tation of again crossing the Equator, when altogether clear of 
these islands. 

Sixth Month 5th. (First day.) — Eemained on board through 
the day with our own people. In the evening repaired to the 
Mariners' 1 place of worship, where a time of suffering was my lot. 

l§th. — Since First day my time has been pretty fully occu- 
pied in attending the different sittings of the general meeting 
of the members of the mission, as they came in course, and in 
procuring the supplies needful for the vessel, in exchange for 
such articles of barter remaining in our possession, as were 
most in demand. Having deferred going to Eva last week, as 
no interpreter could be procured, to-day I went in search of the 
missionary belonging to that district, and found that he had 
procured a large canoe, with the intention of setting forward 
to-morrow morning at the proper time of the tide, to enable us 
to pass in safety over the shallow places near the shore, and 
thus preclude the necessity of our being exposed to the swell 
outside of the reef. 

1 1th. — In the afternoon left the vessel and proceeded towards 
the Pearl river, at the head of which lies the station of Eva ; 
we were favoured to reach it in less than five hours, though our 
progress was for some time impeded by the giving way of the 
outrigger ; but the natives soon sprung overboard and put it in 
order again. At this place, a prayer-meeting has been insti- 
tuted among the natives, and sixteen of them collected in the 
evening at the house where we lodged : this station has been 
but recently organized. 

12th. (First day.) — Having retired early to rest last even- 
ing, we were seated at the breakfast table by six o'clock this 
morning. The horn was blown in good time to collect the 
people, and at ten o'clock we met about seven hundred of them 
in a shed open on every side, there being as yet no place of 
worship erected. I had largely to declare among them the glad 



52 i CHAPTEli XXIX. [1836. 

tidings of the gospel, turning their attention, as ability was 
afforded, to the just witness for God in every heart. Although 
under feelings of great weakness as to myself, yet the deport- 
ment of the people afforded an encouraging evidence that the 
great Master was near to own the work. The afternoon meet- 
ing was not quite so numerously attended, but it proved even 
more solid than that in the morning. In this meeting I had 
to turn them from the teachings of men, to that power which 
alone can save. For " none of them can by any means redeem 
his brother, nor give to God a ransom for him. 11 But the 
Almighty Father of love and mercy hath amply provided for 
the salvation of all mankind by his Son Jesus Christ, who came 
into the world to save sinners ; " he was made sin for us, who 
knew no sin, that we might be made the righteousness of God 
in Him;' 1 who died to obtain for us the Holy Spirit, that we 
might live and come unto God by Him. The countenances of 
many of these dear people, spoke louder than words what they 
felt : weakness and poverty were my close companions ; yet I 
was favoured with peaceful tranquillity of mind. 

We left Eva at three o'clock this morning, the 13th instant, 
and got well on our way an hour before day-light, through 
the narrow rushy channel, which in places is overhung by the 
spreading boughs of large trees. Although there was very 
little wind, we were annoyed by the swell of the Pacific ; but 
were favoured to reach the Henry Freeling by eight o'clock. 
It had been to me a time of favour, and a day to be remembered 
among the memorable ones of my chequered life ; and the more 
so, when on looking back, it was discovered according to the time 
of England, to be a date on which I had more than once had 
to record the tender mercies of the Lord, for signal and crown- 
ing loving-kindness bestowed upon a poor unworthy creature. 
In the course of the day it was ascertained that the last of 
the missionary families had arrived to attend the general meet- 
ing in a small vessel from Wairuku ; and that the other family 
residing at Waimea, on the island of Hawaii, were prevented 
from attending by an increase of family since we were at their 
dwelling. The time was now fully come for me to request an 
opportunity with the whole of the members of the mission ; 



1836.] CHAPTEK XXIX. 525 

and in the evening I stated my case to the senior missionary, 
who appeared quite disposed to make way for it, by consult- 
ing his brethren at a meeting then about to collect, to which 
we repaired. Most of two hours elapsed before a suitable 
opportunity presented to spread the subject before the meet- 
ing ; but when once understood, my request was immediately 
granted, aud the next evening was fixed for us to meet 
together. 

14th. — Employed on board through the day. In the evening, 
called upon Hiram Bingham who accompanied us to the meet- 
ing. I was shown into the moderator's seat, and the company 
was soon gathered together. After some time in silence, it was 
with me simply to state, that on leaving Honolulu a few weeks 
ago, I had no expectation of returning to it again ; but some 
time afterwards I found that I should not be clear of these 
parts, without endeavouring to see the whole of the missionary 
establishment in its collected capacity. At that time it seemed 
difficult to comprehend how it would be brought about, but I 
felt a willingness and resignation on my part towards its accom- 
plishment : — He that causeth his wind to blow, and the waters 
flow, directed our steps and brought it to pass. As it is pro- 
bable, (I continued) that all are present who will be on the occa- . 
sion, I would suggest that we now endeavour to sink down in 
humble reverence of soul before " the Judge of all the earth," to 
wait for the counsel of His will ; and, if graciously favoured 
therewith, endeavour to do it, to his praise and to his glory. 
The meeting then settled down in silence and remained for" a 
considerable time under a solemn covering ; until I had to speak 
of the order in the church of Christ, and of the preparation of 
heart which every member must pass through by the operation 
of the Holy Spirit, before he can become a part of this glorious 
body, which is without spot or wrinkle ; and the necessity of our 
individually knowing for ourselves the hope of our high and 
holy calling. It was afterwards with me to state, the oppor- 
tunity I had had of seeing them in their different, distant, 
solitary and secluded allotments, and of witnessing their patient 
endeavours to promote the work in which they were engaged. 
Having myself dwelt amongst those whose language I could 



526 CHAPTER XXIX. [1836. 

not understand, I was the better able to feel for them on this 
account with brotherly sympathy ; and I was no stranger to 
the many obstacles thrown in their way, and the numerous 
difficulties that they had to encounter ; but their only 
refuge was Christ Jesus the Lord ; if He was with them, 
they had nothing to fear. 1 had no desire to discourage any, 
but while beholding the vast importance of the work they had 
taken in hand, I was ready to tremble at the awful weight of 
the responsibility which rested upon them. It was not for me 
to judge whether they had been called and chosen for the work, 
or not. I knew that our Lord had declared, " this gospel of 
the kingdom shall be preached in all the world for a witness 
unto all nations ; and then shall the end come." Their being 
called or not called to the work, rested with themselves. It is, 
however, possible for a man to have a zeal for God, but not 
according to knowledge ; and while earnestly endeavouring to 
lend a hand of help to others, he may be neglecting the all- 
important duty of coming to the knowledge of the Lord for 
himself. I believed that many of them were truly and earnestly 
desirous to know the Lord for themselves, and I wished to 
encourage such to follow on to know Him : to seek Him, and 
not to rest contented, until they found Him who said, "seek 
and ye shall find." " The Lord whom ye seek, shall suddenly 
come to His temple, — even the messenger of the covenant, whom 
ye delight in : behold, He shall come, said the Lord of Hosts. 
But who may abide the day of his coming, and who shall stand 
when he appeareth V Nothing that is of man, or in man, — that 
is earthly, sensual or unclean, can stand before Him : the heart 
must be cleansed and purified from every thing that defileth, 
before it can become the temple of a holy, pure, and just God : 
and none is sufficient for these things but He, unto whom all 
power in heaven and earth is given ; who, the prophet declares, 
is " like a refiner's fire, and like fuller's soap ; and He shall sit 
as a refiner and purifier of silver," This heart-searching pro- 
cess we must all pass through : and by yielding in meekness 
and submission to the baptizing operation thereof, we shall in 
due time be given to know and to feel it to be the " messenger 
to prepare the way of the Lord" before Him, who will not dwell 



1836.] CHAPTER XXIX. 527 

in the denied temple of an unclean heart. This ordeal all have 
to pass through in a greater or smaller degree, before they come 
to that knowledge which is " life eternal," — even the knowledge 
of " the only true God, and Jesus Christ whom He hath sent ;" 
who once visited the earth in a body that was prepared for 
Him, but who now visiteth by His Holy Spirit the heart of 
man : who is indeed the heavenly messenger of the covenant, 
to all that seek him, and delight in him, and whose coming is 
sure, because the Lord hath promised. But to those who are 
called and chosen to speak to others in the name of the Lord, 
and to proclaim the glad tidings of that gospel which " is the 
power of God unto salvation, to every one that believeth," a 
larger portion of the " refiner's fire 1-1 is often needful, to purge 
them as gold and silver, and prepare them for the great work 
of declaring " the truth as it is in Jesus," from their own blessed 
and sensible experience. Just in proportion as the Lord's mes- 
sengers are qualified and taught of Him, when commissioned to 
go forth in his name, may we expect that the people will be 
benefited : if our eyes are not first opened, vain is the attempt 
to open the eyes of the blind, and turn them from darkness to 
light. I was largely drawn forth to speak of the vast import- 
ance of the work in which they had engaged, and to arouse 
them to a sense of the responsibility it involved ; recommend- 
ing them to take counsel of the Holy Spirit of the Lord Jesus, 
—for the same shall judge us at the last day. I had much to 
express to them in great plainness of speech, under the over- 
shadowing power of that love which maketh not afraid ; 
reminding them of the many blessed seasons we had been per- 
mitted to witness together, on the different islands, when the 
Divine presence was as a crown and diadem over those large 
assemblies of the people. That " faith which works by love," 
and the true supper of the Lord, were also largely held up to 
their view. 

loth. — Taking the necessary measures to prepare the vessel 
for sea. In the evening met the whole of the missionary estab- 
lishment again ; when the senior, on behalf of his brethren 
and himself, delivered an address, on the subject of our visit to 
these islands ; in which he expressed their satisfaction in terms 



528 CHAPTER XXIX. [18S6. 

of applause, perhaps, better forgotten by us, than remembered. 
I was silent among them ; but when the meeting broke up, I 
told the speaker, I could have added, " Not unto us," &c. 

1 6th. — In the morning, Charles and myself took an early 
opportunity of sitting down together and were favoured to get 
into the quiet, although all was bustle around us. In the 
afternoon went on shore to settle our affairs, and take leave of 
those with whom we had now been several months acquainted, 
and for whom an earnest solicitude was felt. Soon after 
returning on board, we embarked the baggage of Peter J. 
Gulick the missionary, who had engaged to accompany us to 
the island of Tauai, and who resides at the station of Koloa ; 
he, his wife, and five children, with the British Consul and the 
master of the free school, were our passengers. The trade- 
wind being fresh in our favour, and having our pilot ' Sugar- 
Cane' in readiness, at five o'clock we quitted the sheltering har- 
bour of Honolulu and stretched well into the offing, in the 
hope of a permanent breeze at a good distance from the land. 
Having only ninety-four miles to run, an expectation was 
raised of our being in the roads of Koloa by ten o'clock the 
next morning, but the wind forsook us before midnight, and 
the island of Tauai was not discovered until too late for its 
accomplishment. 

L7th. — Got sight of the island at three o'clock p. m., and at 
six o'clock, anchored in the open roadstead of Koloa, just in 
time to land our passengers before the night came upon us. 
Our vessel being observed approaching towards the roads, a 
large canoe belonging to the missionary, was sent from the 
shore ; which, by making three journies to and fro, succeeded in 
carrying the family, and the major part of the baggage, in 
safety to the land. Peter J. Gulick, with his wife and five 
children, remained on board, until their luggage was sent off, 
and were at last placed in the canoe, which, from the rolling of 
the vessel, and the incessant swells of the ocean, was no easy 
task. The father having one of the young children to care for, 
could not render his wife the slightest assistance : the child 
cried, and he seemed very anxious lest an accident should 
happen : but his wife, (while hanging suspended, watching for 



1836. J CHAPTER XXIX. -529 

the right moment, when the canoe coming up, borne by the 
swell, should rise high enough for her to get foothold sufficient 
to induce her to let go all hold of the vessel,) calmly cried out to 
him, ' we must be patient, my dear.' After two or three efforts 
she ventured, and was received in the arms of two of the 
natives, and placed in tolerable security. The youngest child, 
which had for some time been held by the rough grasp of one of 
our sailors, and unconscious of the risk to which it was exposed, 
was now handed, with smiling face, over the side of our little 
reeling bark, in safety to its mother. Although this appeared 
a hazardous enterprise, demanding the utmost care, yet I 
believe they were all safe, as in the hollow of the Divine hand. 

Sixth Month \Sth. — Landed on the island of Tauai, and 
made our way to the missionary station. Having made the 
needful arrangements relative to meeting the people of this 
district to-morrow, I left my certificates with Peter J. Gulick, 
who kindly undertook to convene the natives. After visiting a 
sugar plantation in the neighbourhood conducted by Americans, 
we returned on board. 

ISth. (First day.) — Repaired in good time ta the shore, 
having two miles to go to the native meeting in the heat of the 
sun. By nine o'clock, about eight hundred of the people were 
assembled in an open shed. I was poor, and under feelings of 
great weakness amongst them ; but after reminding them of 
the solemn purpose for which we were brought together, when 
the missionary had finished reading the translation of my cer- 
tificates, the way was opened for me largely to declare the glad 
tidings of great joy to all that repent, believe, and obey the 
gospel ; and to make a solemn appeal to the just witness for 
God in every heart. I felt an earnest engagement to turn the 
attention of these dear people to the Holy Spirit of the Lord 
Jesus, which would discover to them " all things that ever they 
did," would set their sins in order before them, and save them 
from sin with an everlasting salvation. The people were very 
attentive, and under a solemn feeling the meeting broke up ; 
when they flocked round us in the usual manner. I found 
that on account of the weak state of the health of the mis- 
sionary, no afternoon meeting was held ; but the school was 

2 M 



530 CHAPTER XXIX. [1836. 

largely attended : on this occasion, however, the people were 
again assembled for worship, at three o'clock p. m. I felt little 
on my mind towards them, but was fearful of withholding that 
little, and stood for a time under much discouragement ; 
strength was, however, in due time graciously afforded, — and I 
was enabled, to my admiration, to set before the people " life 
and death, good and evil, 11 — and to encourage them not to be 
overcome of evil, but to overcome evil with good. " Let every 
one that nameth the name of Christ depart from iniquity, 11 and 
" live unto Him who died for them, and rose again ; 11 and who 
now by the grace of His Holy Spirit, bringeth salvation to all 
men, hath appeared unto all men, and teacheth all men, &c. 
Although the number present was less than in the morning, 
yet the meeting was no less solemn. Returned on board before 
dark to lessen the risk of staving the boat against the vessel, 
as the constant swell of the sea renders access and egress at all 
times difficult, but much less hazardous by day-light. 

21st. — Yesterday and this morning pretty fully engaged in 
procuring vegetables, Indian corn, &c. In the afternoon went 
up to Koloa, to take leave of the missionary's family, he himself 
being about to accompany us to Hanarei, a station on the other 
side of the island. Towards evening the needful supplies were 
obtained, and Peter J. Gulick, Richard Charlton, (the Consul) 
with three or four natives were embarked. At seven o'clock we 
loosed from the roads, and stretched away into the offing for 
the night, with a fresh gale, but directly opposed to the course 
we were desirous of steering. 

22nd. — On approaching the land again this morning, it was 
found that but little had been gained through the night ; and 
unless the wind veered a little in our favour, there seemed no 
probability of our rounding the head-land which obstructed the 
passage to Hanarei. Employed in plying to windward all day, 
and by midnight our position was such, that day-light only was 
wanted to sanction our taking the advantage of the bending of 
the coast to steer for the entrance of the bay. But when our 
object was nearly accomplished, the wind died away, and a 
strong current set the vessel so rapidly to leeward, that for a 
time there seemed no prospect of our getting in at all : the 



1836.] CHAPTER XXIX. 531 

breeze, however, rallied again, and helped us round the point 
of the reef; and by nine o'clock a. m„ an anchor was dropped in 
ten fathoms water in the midst of heavy rain. 

23rd. — As vessels seldom touch here, our arrival soon brought 
off a number of canoes, and a supply of fresh fish ; butter and 
milk were quickly furnished from the estate of Richard Charlton, 
who had sent an overland messenger from Koloa, to keep a 
good look-out for the vessel, and have these articles in readiness 
on our arrival. After breakfast, our kind interpreter Peter J. 
Gulick went on shore to examine into the state of the people, 
their own missionary and his family being absent at Oahu, 
attending the General Meeting of the mission. Some of our 
people were employed on shore in the forenoon, slaughtering a 
bullock from the stock of Richard Charlton, kindly provided 
for our accommodation, in the expectation that the Henry 
Freeling would return towards the Equator before many days. 

24z$. — Our missionary friend came off from the shore at an 
early hour, to inform us that the natives would be collected 
about half-past nine o'clock. We landed with him in a large 
canoe, conducted by skilful natives, which carried us comfort- 
ably through the surf. As we approached the strand, the 
people collected in a body, and watching the return of the roller 
which bore the canoe a sufficient height for their purpose, it 
was placed in a few moments very safely out of the reach of 
the breakers upon dry ground. The conch-shells were imme- 
diately sounded ; and after waiting some time at the missionary- 
house, we proceeded to the meeting. Here we found, perhaps, 
seven hundred people, all squatted upon the ground in stillness, 
(as no seats were provided,) waiting for the strangers. After 
a time my mind was opened to declare amongst them Christ 
Jesus the Lord ; the light of the knowledge of whose Holy 
Spirit visiteth every heart, to give the glory of God in the face 
of Jesus Christ, and if believed in, and walked in, to restore man 
from a state of sin and death to holiness and newness of life. 
Strength and ability were richly afforded me, to testify the 
love and the mercy of God in Christ Jesus to the children of 
men ; and the people were exhorted to turn to His light whilst 
the day of their visitation was extended, lest they should be 

2 m 2 



532 CHAPTER XXIX. [1836. 

overtaken by the night, wherein no man can work. Although 
the people were very attentive, and great solemnity prevailed 
on the occasion, yet after the meeting broke up, as was the case 
with those held at Koloa, the sentence of death in myself was 
my only portion : at its conclusion they nocked round us in the 
usual way, — many of them, I believe, with love in their hearts. 
At least one hundred and fifty accompanied us down to the 
strand, and saw us safely launched again into deep water. In 
the afternoon landed on the other side of the bay, and had 
full opportunity of witnessing the very low state of these poor 
degraded people, and the filthy abodes of several of them. I 
exchanged needles and fish-hooks for any thing they could 
furnish, even for broken shells, as they seemed to have nothing 
to part with, to purchase such articles as they stood in need of, 
and which they were very desirous to obtain. At seven o'clock 
p. m., departed from the bay, and made sail to the eastward 
with a fair breeze, and heavy showers of rain falling. 

25th. — In the course of this day, we were much baffled with 
variable winds and strong currents ; towards sun-set we anchored 
in five fathoms water, in the road of Waimea, opposite a fort 
formed some years ago by the crew of a Russian vessel. Soon 
after arriving, Peter J. Gullick went on shore to arrange for a 
meeting with the people to-morrow. In the evening, some 
milk was sent off from the missionary station ; its occupants, 
Samuel Whitney and family, are now absent at Oahu, with 
the rest of the mission. 

26th. (First-day.) — Landed in good time to attend the 
meeting. Richard Charlton undertook to conduct us through 
the surf with the natives, having acquired their language from 
long residence among these islands ; we soon met with Peter 
J. Gulick, and proceeded to the meeting together. By nine 
o'clock about one thousand persons were collected, who filled 
every part of the house, except a narrow gallery intended for 
singers, at the lower end of it. I felt as one stripped of every 
thing but a sense of utter weakness and inability, which has 
been the case for several seasons of late ; and although the 
Lord was again pleased to try my faith, that my trust and 
confidence might be centred in Him alone, He again conde- 



1836.] CHAPTER XXIX. 533 

scended to clothe me with strength and power, to declare 
amongst the people the unsearchable riches of Christ. Soon 
after Peter J. Gulick had read my certificates, I stood up ; and 
having awakened their attention and directed them to Him, 
unto whom the cattle on a thousand hills belong, I told them I 
had no desire to multiply words amongst them, lest T should be 
found darkening counsel ; but that my desire was to turn them 
from words to the power of the Holy Spirit of the Lord Jesus 
in their own hearts. My tongue was loosed to declare freely 
the things relating to the gospel of the kingdom, for upwards 
of an hour. No people could be more attentive ; my prayer 
is, that many of them may be enabled to say, from heart-felt 
living experience, — " Now we believe, not because of thy saying : 
for we have heard him ourselves, and know that this is indeed 
the Christ, the Saviour of the world :" — unto whom be ascribed 
glory and dominion for ever. After the meeting was over, I 
found that my interpreter was greatly exhausted by the fatigue 
he had had to pass through, although he offered to attend again 
in the afternoon, but added, that the number of people would 
be much reduced, as no afternoon meetings are held in the 
absence of the resident missionary ; and when at his post, the 
Bible class system is usually adopted. I told him, that if I 
came with a view to see the people again, I should take care to 
be on shore in time in the afternoon. The surf had increased 
since our landing in the morning ; but we were assisted as before, 
by experienced and skilful managers. The weather becoming 
wet in the afternoon, seemed to decide my remaining on board, 
having been informed that the islanders do not like to go out in 
the rain themselves, nor do they expect strangers to do it ; but 
more especially, from not feeling it binding upon me to return 
to the shore again that day. On looking at the subject after 
the time had passed by, although in poverty and depression, I 
did not feel as one that had held back. Had there been a pro- 
bability of a meeting being held, I was scarcely fit to attempt a 
second landing, from pain in my head. In the afternoon, read 
portions of Scripture to our own crew. Late in the night, made 
a fair copy of a short address to the members of the mission, in 
the Sandwich Islands ; at the same time acknowledging the 



534 CHAPTER XXlX. [1836. 

receipt of a joint communication from them in their general 
meeting capacity, signed hy all the members. 

27th. — Engaged in procuring yams, pumpkins, with other vege- 
tables, and live stock, in the prospect of again steering towards 
the Equator. Found it expedient to hire from the natives a 
strong canoe, to assist our operations, as our own jolly-boat is 
now old and very crazy, and altogether unfit to contend with 
the surf upon this side of the island, even when in her best 
condition. On landing we found a considerable body of the 
natives collected together, with a prodigious quantity of various 
sorts of vegetables, fruits, fowls, &c, intended as a present to 
our vessel : the missionary being present, there was no lack of 
an interpreter betwixt us. I told him that we could not accept 
of any thing as a present from these poor people ; and even if 
we could, that the quantity before us upon the beach was 
greater than our vessel could take in with convenience ; at the 
same time I would not object to take what might be useful to 
us, provided they would allow us to make a suitable return. 
It appeared from the statement of the missionary, that the 
people were intending to build a new meeting-house at Koloa, 
by voluntary contribution, and that as this was the case, the 
difficulty could be at once surmounted by the appropriation of 
the amount of the supplies which might be taken by us, 
to that purpose. To effect this, the articles we wanted were to 
be valued in dollar money, which enabled us to pay for them in 
such commodities as could be used in the building in question 
as materials, or in the payment of workmen employed in erect- 
ing it : articles of clothing were much in demand for the latter 
purpose. The people, particularly the females, brought with 
them on this occasion many of the simple native productions of 
the island ; with small quantities of shells, and other ornamental 
trifles in use among them in the days of gross idolatry, but now 
laid aside. These articles were intended as presents from indi- 
viduals then present, so that each person received an equivalent 
for what he had to offer on the spot ; and care was taken that an 
ample return was made to each of them. Needles, fish-hooks, 
and pocket combs, were eagerly sought after in exchange. 
Some native dresses were brought in the shape of a morning 



1836.] CHAPTER XXIX. 535 

robe for a female, made from the bark of the paper mulberry 
tree, and with thread of their own manufacture : this circum- 
stance accounted for the brisk demand for large sized needles, 
to enable them to use their own thread, while a very small 
quantity of our thread was taken. These dresses were mostly 
purchased for scissors ; but knives, combs, and other articles 
were in demand, for native cloth of stained colours. We returned 
on board to avoid the hottest part of the day, as the heat was 
extreme, and the reflection from the white sand on the beach 
almost insupportable. As the sun declined, we landed again 
and pursued our barter trade, until the natives began to retire 
from the shore for the night : crossed the river by canoe oppo- 
site the fort. 

Some years ago, the chiefs of this island had been prevailed 
upon by the Russians to place themselves under the protection 
of that nation, and on that score had ceded one-half of the 
island over to them. After this, the fort was erected; the 
step altogether was found to be obnoxious to some other powers, 
and the Russian government disclaiming the action, as having 
been committed without any sanction on their part, the scheme 
was abandoned altogether, and the blame cast upon its sup- 
posed projectors : be this correct or not, the fort is still in 
existence. Cannon of other nations are to be seen in it, besides 
those of Russia ; and several may be distinguished to have come 
from England, by the Gr. R., &c. upon them. It is probable 
these may have been procured by the chiefs, or their own king, 
with a view to strengthen this place for the security of the 
island. 

28th. — To-day, for the most part employed in embarking 
yams, sweet potatoes, water melons, goats, &c, which had been 
purchased with barter goods. Some molasses had been spoken 
about to a Chinaman who is engaged here as an agent to an 
American master residing at Oahu ; but finding that this article 
was entirely the gain of oppression, we declined taking it on 
that account. — A few gallons were purchased at last from an 
American, who had produced the sugar cane by his own labour, 
which wholly removed all difficulty on this head. On this 
island, it is said that the poor natives are more oppressed by 



536 CHAPTER XXIX. [1836. 

the chiefs, than on any other of the Sandwich group. The 
introduction of two establishments for making sugar, with which 
the chiefs are connected, it seems probable, will eventually be 
the cause of promoting a state of slavery, as oppressive as that 
which has existed in the West Indies : the population, from 
this, and other much to be deplored causes, is rapidly decreas- 
ing ; these sugar plantations were set on foot by two Ame- 
ricans. In one instance, the chiefs find all the labour, and 
have one-half of the profit ; in the other, the scheme is more 
plausible, as the natives are paid a small pittance for their 
labour : but the chiefs are compelled by contract to furnish a 
sufficient number of labourers for their share of the profit ; for the 
sake of which, the contract is more rigidly enforced. This was 
spoken of as being conducted upon a fair principle ; but we told 
them, nothing compulsory could be just. Our friend the 
missionary having left us and returned to his family at Koloa, 
we found the kind assistance of the British Consul very useful 
in our transactions with the natives. At the edge of dark, 
we had all on board, and only waited the land-breeze to waft 
us from the island. At nine oVlock p. m., Richard Charlton 
left us, into whose hands were committed our letters for Eng- 
land, to be forwarded from Oahu, by the first eligible convey- 
ance which might offer after his arrival there. Our pilot 
' Sugar- Cane -1 was now paid off, and all things being settled, we 
took a final departure, and stretched off a south and by east 
course ; leaving these interesting isles of the ocean, amongst 
which, more than half a year of our time had been expended. 
The best welfare of the inhabitants of the Sandwich Islands 
will be an object ever near and dear to my heart, and which, 
however distantly separated as to the body, my spirit will 
earnestly crave. 

Extract from a letter of this date written to an intimate 
friend in England : 

' Time would fail me to tell of the everlasting mercy 

and compassion that have been extended to us-ward, in that 
love which hath compassed about as with a shield, during 
our recent operations in dangerous bays and roadsteads, lying 



1836.] CHAPTER XXIX. 537 

open within a very few points of the compass, to the whole beat 
of the Pacific. In most of these places, we have had to land 
amidst a breaking surf, sometimes in our own boat, and at 
others in canoes, which when managed by the natives, are by 
far the safer, although subject to frequent drenchings from 
the sea. 

I brought with me from London, as recommended by a dear 
friend, a patent water-proof belt, or life-preserver, made by 
Macintosh, of Cheapside ; but I have been ashamed to make 
use of it on any one occasion, and when we have been going to 
land, I have uniformly left it on board the vessel. How could I 
now begin to doubt the loving-kindness of Him, whose good- 
ness hath followed me all my life long ; and dare to distrust 
that never-failing arm of strength, that hath been so often and 
eminently stretched forth for my preservation, by night and 
day, by sea and land, amongst strangers and foreigners, where 
no man cared for my soul, — in cold and heat, — in hunger, 
thirst, and weariness, — amid the din of arms, the noisome 
pestilence and the destruction that wasteth at noon day : how 
often from boyhood to the present day have I been sheltered 
from the rage of the angry tempest ; and how was I supported 
in the iron grasp of affliction, when week after week, tidings of 
family distress assailed me, without the power to lend a hand 
of help, — the parent stock smitten and removed, and the 
branches withering. And after all this, shall I now, when old 
and grey-headed, begin to doubt the heavenly source of help, 
that still strengthens me to proclaim the unsearchable riches 
of his love, to the tribes which inhabit his possessions in these 
uttermost parts of the earth ; when the feelings of decaying 
nature are lost sight of, and the inner man strengthened by 
the might of the Lord's glorious power and sensible presence, to 
my humble admiration. " To whom shall we go," when He 
only hath the words of eternal life ? to whom all power in 
heaven and earth is given. 

Sixth Month 29th. — There being no probability of further 
intercourse with the natives in these parts of the globe, we now 
return to the true time of England, from which we digressed on 



538 CHAPTER XXIX. [1836. 

our arrival at Oahu, to prevent mistakes : but the log book of 
the Henry Freeling underwent no alteration, and is now dated 
the 30th of Sixth month, 1836. (Fifth day.) This morning-, 
being fifty miles from Tauai, the loom of the island under a 
bank of clouds was but just discernible. Cloudy weather, but 
we had a wind that enabled us to steer a steady course to 
the south south-east.* 

* When on the point of leaving the harbour of Honolulu, at Oahu, 
when there could be no further communication between us and the parties 
concerned, a letter was received from the general meeting of the American 
mission, signed by all the members ; of which the following is a copy. 

Honolulu, June 16th, 183(j. 
' Daniel Wheeler, dear friend, 
' We, the missionaries of the Sandwich Islands, feel ourselves happy 
to have the opportunity of reciprocating the kindness and sympathy, 
which you and our young friend, your esteemed son Charles Wheeler, 
have manifested to us and our families, during the period of five and a 
half months, while you have sojourned and laboured with us. We have 
hailed your arrival in this country with gladness, and welcomed your 
visit to our stations with much pleasure. We have read your credentials 
from York and London with care ; and have been cheered by the 
Christian spirit which they breathe. We have been refreshed by your 
interesting account of the origin and progress of your enterprise, and by 
your earnest and repeated evangelical appeals to our people. You have 
seen with what readiness of mind we have interpreted your discourses to 
the people, and endeavoured to facilitate your work. And we now tender 
you our thanks for your kind co-operation in our work, with which you 
have been enabled, by the great Head of the church, to favour us. Your 
design to preach " the unsearchable riches of Christ" in the isles and on 
the shores of this great ocean, for an indefinite but protracted period, at 
such a remove from the comforts of home and all you held dear on earth, 
must, we are aware, (for we are acquainted with the nature of the 
service,) be attended with sacrifices, toils, and cares, in which none but 
the Divine arm can sustain you ; but this arm Divine has thus far sus- 
tained you. For this we would unite with you in thanksgiving " to the 
Father of lights, from whom cometh every good and perfect gift ;" and 
with you would we rejoice in the assurance, that it w T ill sustain you still. 
Take courage, dear friend, and go on with your good work. Do what is 
in your power to pour the light of the sun of righteousness upon the 
people which sit in darkness, upon the tribes on whom the star-light of 
nature nightly shines, and upon the isles over which the day-star of grace 
has arisen. Accompanied and aided by your own beloved son, sustained 



1836.] 



CHAPTER XXIX. 



539 



and guided by the adorable Spirit of God ; may you be enabled to do 
much to dry the fountain of intemperance and licentiousness, which 
threaten such desolations in every quarter of the globe, and to hasten the 
universal diffusion of revealed truth. We bid you God speed, while 
you proclaim to perishing men the glad tidings of salvation, through a 
crucified and exalted Saviour ; while with self-sacrifice and devotedness 
to Christ, you labour " to turn men from darkness to light, and from the 
power of Satan unto God." Pray for us, that we may be found faithful 
in this work, and that the gospel may have free course, and be glorified. 
And now, as you are convinced that our Master calls you to leave us, to 
prosecute the service you have to perform for Him in other isles and 
coasts, we bid you and your son an affectionate farewell ; and part with 
you as with valued friends, whom we hope to meet in peace, when the 
sacrifices, and toils, and trials of a missionary life are ended. " The Lord 
bless thee and keep thee. The Lord make his face to shine upon thee, 
and be gracious unto thee. The Lord lift up his countenance upon thee, 
and give thee peace." Not unto us, but to God be the glory. Your 
affectionate friends.' 



Asa Thurston, 
Hiram Bingham, 
Samuel Whitney, 
William Richards, 
Levi Chamberlain, 
Artemas BrsHOP, 
Lorrin Andrews, 
John Smith Green, 
Peter J. Gulick, 

' To Daniel Wheeler. 



( Signed ) 

Ephraim W. Clark, 
Gerrit P. Judd, 
D wight Baldwin, 
Reuben Tinker, 
Henry Dimond, 
Sheldon Dibble, 
Titus Coan, 
Henry H. Hitchcock, 
John S. Emerson, 



David B. Lyman, 
Ephraim Spalding, 
Richard Armstrong, 
Cochraine Forbes, 
Wm. P. Alexander, 
Edmund H. Rogers, 
Lowel Smith, 
Benj. W. Parker, 
Edwin 0. Hall. 



An acknowledgment of the receipt of this document was sent to Oahu 
by the British Consul, Richard Charlton, as before hinted at ; a copy of 
which now follows, with the substance of what quickened upon my mind 
to the members of the mission. 



' To the Members of the Mission at the Sandwich Islands.' 
1 Dear Friends, 
' Your joint communication, replete with the expression of brotherly 
kindness and regard, was put into my hand just as we were quitting the 
shores of Oahu. Although utterly unmerited on my part, yet I feel 
compelled to accept it, from a belief in the purity of those motives by 
which it was dictated ; while, at the same time, the feeling is awakened, 
that to me belongs only " blushing and confusion of face." I rejoice in 
the opportunity so soon afforded me to acknowledge its receipt, and more 
especially because I had felt my mind drawn towards you, before I saw 
its contents ; desiring more and more that you may individually become 



540 CHAPTER XXIX. [1836. 

acquainted with the binding influence of that love, which many waters 
cannot quench, " unto all riches of the full assurance of understanding, 
to the acknowledgment of the mystery of God, and of the Father, and of 
Christ ; in whom are hid all the treasures of wisdom and knowledge." 
I desire for you, my friends, all that you can possibly desire for your- 
selves ; believing that your principal desire is to be true followers of 
Him, who said, — " If any man will come after me, let him deny himself, 
and take up his cross daily, and follow me." These are the express and 
explicit terms of discipleship, to which unqualified obedience is required ; 
and from which all reservations are inadmissible : let us examine then 
how far these indispensable conditions are submitted to on our part. If 
we profess to follow the great and heavenly example of " Him who died 
for us and rose again," in which all the graces of earthly perfection are 
combined, in all our actions before men, let us, my friends, be complete, 
and do it also in all our words : let our language to and before men be 
like His. Surely we ought to be content to use the language which he 
himself uttered and accepted of men. His words are pure words : they 
are wholesome words : and we ought to consent to the words of our 
Lord Jesus Christ. Then let us be willing to follow the Lord of life and 
glory : if we carry His example fairly out, our speech will bewray us 
and show that we are his disciples indeed : we shall find that this brings 
us at once to the foot of the cross — the daily cross : without this we are 
strangers to the self-denying holy cross ; and if we do not bear the cross, 
we can never -wear the crown. Then let us not fear to confess our Lord 
and Saviour Jesus Christ, nor be ashamed of Him and His word before 
men ; remembering the awful declaration which bears upon all, and applies 
to all, — " Whosoever shall deny me before men, him will I also deny 
before my Father which is heaven ;" and " whosoever shall be ashamed 
of me and my words in this adulterous and sinful generation, of him also 
shall the Son of Man be ashamed, when he cometh in the glory of his 
Father with the holy angels." This has been put into my heart in love 
towards you : in the same love it is written, and in which I trust it will 
be received, from your affectionate friend, 

' Daniel Wheeler.' 

' My son Charles unites with me in an assurance of grateful acknow- 
ledgment and regard for your kind remembrance of him .' 

' P. S. — The oppressed condition of the natives of this island is truly- 
affecting, and prompts me to remind my constant friend Hiram Bingham, 
of the address that was presented to the king Kinau, &c, at his house, 
to whose care the printing of it was committed.' 

' Henry Freeling, in the road of Waimea, Isle of Tauai, 
27th of Sixth Month, 1836.' 



1836.1 CHAPTER XXX. 541 



CHAPTER XXX. 

RE-CROSS THE EQUATOR HERVEV ISLANDS VISIT THE ISLAND OF 

RAROTOXGA FRIENDLY RECEPTION SCHOOL NATIVE MEETINGS 

KINDNESS OF THE NATIVES SAIL FOR THE FRIENDLY ISLES. 

Without entering into the particular details of this voyage, 
which can be but of little interest to those on shore, we directed 
our course towards the equator, endeavouring as much as cir- 
cumstances would permit, to keep to the eastward, in the hope 
of fetching the island of Rarotonga, one of the Hervey Isles, 
in latitude 21° 31' south of the line, and longitude 1 60° west. 
After witnessing the usual variety of changes in the winds and 
weather, and the thunder-storms to which these latitudes are 
subject, we were favoured to cross the equator about three 
o 1 clock in the morning of the 19th of Seventh Month, in health 
and safety, and at noon were in latitude forty miles south ; 
longitude by lunar observation 160° west. Not a single vessel 
was seen during the whole passage ; and although we must 
have passed near several of the islands scattered upon the sur- 
face of the ocean, both north and south of the line, yet none of 
them were sighted until First-day, the 31 st ; when at day-break 
in the morning the island of Rarotonga was discovered about 
seven leagues to windward of us. The morning was then 
calm, but at nine o'clock a. m. we stretched away to the east 
north-east, with a light breeze, there being no alternative, but 
that of endeavouring to beat up to it ; although it was a little 
mortifying to perceive, that the settled trade-wind blew directly 
from it. Having by dint of exertion gained ground, one of the 
missionary stations could plainly be discerned to leeward on 
Second day afternoon. This was known by the appearance of 
a large building, which, with some others about it, was white- 



542 CHAPTER XXX. [1836. 

washed, and had a neat appearance. We then stood to the 
southward until the other missionary station was open to our 
view, and near enough to observe a number of the natives upon 
the look out, who had no doubt descried the approach of a 
strange vessel to their shores. As the wind still blew strongly 
against us, we could not get sufficiently near the coast to entice 
the canoes to come off before the night closed in ; so we hovered 
within a short distance of the island until the next morning, 
the 2nd of Eighth Month : when, at an early hour a boat 
was seen coming from the shore, from the first station observed 
yesterday, which in due time reached the Henry Freeling. We 
were enabled to understand from our visitors, that we were off 
the station of Charles Pittman the missionary, with whom and 
with his wife, we became acquainted at the island of Tahiti last 
year. They were at that time in a weak state of health, and 
it seemed very doubtful whether they would ever be able (par- 
ticularly Charles Pittman,) to return to the island of Rarotonga. 
It was very satisfactory to find they were restored to their duty 
in improved health ; more especially as our way seemed at once 
fairly opened to enter upon this new scene of labour, by the 
means being thus marvellously provided, as there was no other 
resident missionary at that time upon the island. I sent a note 
back by the boat to say, we were now permitted to greet them 
from the very edge of Rarotonga ; and only waited information, 
as to the practicability of our vessel finding a place of safe 
anchorage. This boat was soon discovered to be again coining 
off, and on near approach, Charles Pittman himself proved to 
be on board of her. We had scarcely time to congratulate each 
other after he had reached the deck, before he became sea-sick 
from the tossing of our vessel. As he was unable to converse, 
we concluded to return to the shore with him immediately : he 
remained in the air while we threw off our sea-garments, and 
we then put off together for the shore. He began to revive as we 
got into smoother water, and after landing he soon came round 
again. As we drew nigh the strand, it became densely covered 
with an innumerable host of children, who at once hailed us as 
their friends : it was with difficulty that we could pass along 



1836.] CHAPTER XXX. 543 

for them, as these delighted little naked fellows completely 
choked up the avenue through a grove of bananas, which leads 
to the mission-house, struggling who should first get hold of 
our hands ; and if but a finger could be laid hold of, it seemed 
quite to satisfy them : this banana grove was of Charles Pitt- 
man's own planting. Soon after reaching the house, the floor 
was studded over with natives squatted on every side, the 
elders of the people coming forward to salute us, and welcome 
us to their island. After some consideration and inquiry had 
taken place, it was concluded that the people should be gene- 
rally convened to-morrow morning in that district, and a meet- 
ing held at eleven o'clock a. m. The afternoon, towards sun- 
down, would have been preferred on some accounts, but this 
would unavoidably have thrown us into the dark, and thereby 
rendered our return to the Henry Freeling doubly hazardous. 
After partaking of some simple refreshment, we looked round 
the village of Gnatagnia, and then prepared to return to our 
vessel. When leaving her in the morning, we took with us an 
English union jack, for the purpose of hoisting upon a lofty 
bamboo, or cocoa-nut tree, as a signal for Captain Keen to 
stand in as close to the reefs as was prudent on seeing this flag 
displayed upon the shore, to save the labour of the people in the 
boat, and to afford us every chance of smooth water. When 
this flag was put up, we were told that it was the first time the 
English flag had been planted upon the island of Rarotonga ; 
very peaceable possession had been taken of the island on this 
occasion at any rate, and one in which a most cordial reception 
was strongly evinced, in a degree of that love which casteth 
out fear from every breast, and makes every man a brother. 
We were favoured to get well on board, and then purchased a few 
fowls and vegetables of the native crew, more with a view to 
please, than from a want of fresh provisions. Our meeting 
with the natives to-morrow is now entirely dependent upon 
the elements, a shift of wind may compel us to seek safety, by 
flying from the island before the returning morning ; but 
having done our best, we must cast all our burden and all our 
care upon Him, who alone can bring it to pass ; before whom 
my mind is humbled and bowed down, imploring help and 



544 CHAPTER XXX. [1836. 

strength ; that the righteous cause may not be tarnished in our 
feeble hands, but rather that the Lord's name may be exalted 
and glorified, and the gospel of the dear Redeemer's spiritual 
kingdom faithfully declared to these people ; until the thanks- 
giving of many shall redound to the glory and praise of the 
riches of that all-saving grace and truth which came by Him, 
bringing salvation unto all mankind the world over. 

Eighth Month 3rd. — The morning was beautifully fine, but 
having crept a long distance from the island during the dark- 
ness, and the breeze now being very light, our progress shore- 
ward again was very slow. Although about one-half of our 
masts only could be seen above the horizon when the day broke ; 
yet the natives had the sagacity to perceive, by the position of 
our sails, that we were steering towards the shore, and imme- 
diately put off with Charles Pittman's boat. Our own boats 
had been too long in a dry state, to be trust-worthy ; and as 
there was no harbour that could be entered with prudence, all 
our hands were required on board, as the vessel was liable to 
be blown off to sea at all times. Charles Pittmans boat, although 
a clumsy one, was therefore regarded as a privilege and addition 
to our comforts. From our distance in the offing, it was nearly 
nine o'clock a.m., before this boat got to the vessel; but 
desirous of rendering every assistance in his power, Alexander 
Cunningham (a person whom we had known last autumn at 
Eimeo, and now endeavouring to establish a sugar plantation 
on his own account at Rarotonga,) came off in her : having 
some knowledge of the language, he came principally to interpret 
between us and the natives, should occasion require it. While 
the breeze freshened a little, and the vessel was enabled to steer 
towards the mouth of the channel through the reef, we kept on 
board ; but on approaching the coast the wind began to die 
away, and we then proceeded more rapidly in the boat. On 
landing we were met by several hundreds of the natives, a large 
proportion of them boys ; and after remaining some time at the 
mission-house, we looked into the school for the least scholars : 
some of whom read to all appearance very readily. In the 
large school we heard several of the boys and girls read verse 
after verse alternately in one of the Evangelists ; and were 



1836.] CHAPTER XXX. 545 

informed that fifteen hundred copies of the Four Evangelists, 
had been recently received from England, via Tahiti : some of 
these were read audibly, and we were told correctly. After 
some further examination by catechising, a hymn was sung ; 
the schools then broke up in an orderly manner, and pro- 
ceeded towards the meeting-house. 

While a silent spectator in the schools, the love of the 
Divine Master flowed in my heart towards these dear children, 
— an encouraging and sealing evidence, that strength and ability 
would not be wanting to proclaim the glad tidings of his 
gospel, in his time. The house was filled, and held upwards 
of two thousand people. We remained upon the floor of the 
building, whilst Charles Pittman read my certificates, and 
explained to the people the nature of my visit, I believe to 
the utmost in his power. During this time it was very evi- 
dent, that if Charles Pittman had been speaking by my side, 
half of the people at least could not have heard him, and 
therefore I thought it best to promote his remaining in his 
pulpit by joining him there. I remained quiet, however, until 
he had thoroughly finished, and then went up and stood in 
silence by his side, for a short interval : when it was with me to 
turn the attention of the gazing islanders to the " God and 
Father of our Lord Jesus Christ ; 11 — that the great object of our 
thus being permitted to assemble together, might be fully 
realized, and the blessing which prevailed to the utmost bound 
of the everlasting hills, might rest upon us. After this, I had 
largely to declare the things which belong unto their peace, 
and to turn them to the " Lamb of God which taketh away the 
sin of the world ; 11 — that they might know Him to be so in 
blessed reality, by believing in the light of the Holy Spirit, 
which shineth in every heart, as a light in a dark place ; that 
by taking heed thereunto, they would be made sensible of the 
darkness of their own hearts. It was for this the Saviour died, 
that mankind might no longer walk in darkness, but in the 
light of life ; that as sin hath heretofore reigned in us unto 
death, so now might grace reign through righteousness unto 
eternal life, by Jesus Christ our Lord. It was a solemn season ; 
the power of the Lord reigned over all, and his own works 

2 N 



546 CHAPTER XXX. [1836. 

rendered living praises unto Him and the Son of his love. 
After the meeting broke up, some time was occupied in noticing 
the people, who remained in crowds about us. It was agreed 
with Charles Pittman, that the people at Aaron Buzacotfs 
station, about eight miles distant, should that evening be 
informed of my intention to visit them to-morrow ; and that the 
meeting should be requested to gather at an early hour in the 
forenoon, to allow sufficient time for my return to the vessel. 
While we rested and refreshed, the preconcerted signal was 
made, and the Henry Freeling coming pretty close to the island, 
we got safely on board before dark. 

Mh. — Having an overland journey to perform, I repaired to 
the shore in good time, and with the assistance of eight stout 
natives, to bear me alternately four and four upon their 
shoulders when wearied, this journey was accomplished with 
comparative ease. The great heat of the sun when it shines, 
renders the exercise of travelling on foot too fatiguing to the 
European constitution, and highly imprudent to be persisted in 
beyond short distances. At this station (Avarua,) we had a 
fine meeting, more than 2500 persons being present. My certi- 
ficates were read as usual, and I had largely to publish the 
glad tidings of the everlasting gospel amongst them, to my own 
peace. Although at first standing up I was much depressed, 
as one that had no might and was ready to faint ; yet as I 
endeavoured to keep close to my heavenly guide, strength pro- 
portionate to the day, and confidence, were graciously extended, 
to my humble admiration. Many blessed and encouraging truths 
were given me to spread before the people, to the exaltation, I 
humbly trust, of the Most High God ; and his name and power 
were magnified, who in the greatness of His love and strength 
came to seek and to save that which was lost, — if believed in, 
looked for, and yielded unto, in the obedience of faith. 

The meeting held late, and the people were very solid and 
attentive ; my sympathizing and faithful interpreter could 
not help acknowledging the blessing, with which we had 
that day been favoured, as a crowning evidence. The people 
seemed reluctant to separate ; and many of them followed us to 
the dwelling of the absent missionary, where we partook of a 



1836.] CHAPTER XXX. 547 

repast, which had been kindly prepared for our accommodation. 
The king or principal chief Makea, joined us ; he was desir- 
ous of making a present of supplies for the vessel ; this however 
was declined, and his kind intention acknowledged with gra- 
titude. This chiefs sister, once dined on board the Henry 
Freeling, with Pomare the queen of Tahiti, when we were lying- 
in the bay of Papeite at that island a year ago ; and she was 
mentioned in my Journal of that day, as the sister of the king 
of Earotonga. She was at the meeting, and came to me in a 
very kind and agreeable manner before it commenced, and after 
it was over ; Charles Pittman gave me a pleasing account of 
her stability of conduct and example. Several questions were 
put to us on religious subjects through Charles Pittman, by 
Makea and others who attended ; and I had an opportunity of 
telling them what great things the Lord had done for them, 
and that the principal work they had to do in return, was to 
labour in the vineyard of their own hearts, &c. We got back 
to the GJ-natagnia station before sun-setting, when for the first 
time I found that there was an out-station twelve miles 
distant on the other side of the island, the people of which had 
not been at either of the meetings that had been held. I rather 
shrunk at the receipt of this information, principally I believe 
owing to the continued exposed situation of the vessel, and 
perhaps the weak state of my Charles might throw an addi- 
tional weight into the scale of discouragement on the occasion. 
Without making any remark, I concluded not to stop over the 
tea which was then ready, but return immediately on board, 
under a faint expectation of being on shore again to-morrow, 
and perhaps getting to the out-station in question, called Aro- 
ragne, on the Seventh day ; to be in a state of forwardness to 
leave the range of the island altogether late in the evening, if 
that was permitted, which on many accounts appeared desir- 
able at the moment. I was favoured to reach the vessel at the 
edge of dark. As the evening advanced, blackness and dark- 
ness began to gather to the southward, incessant lightning fol- 
lowed with distant peals of thunder ; at the same time the wind 
began to freshen from the westward, a very unusual quarter, 
as the regular trade-wind almost constantly prevails from the 



548 CHAPTER XXX. [1836. 

south-east, over all others. It was now apprehended that this 
unexpected change in the weather, and the wild appearance of 
the atmosphere, would prove the forerunners of a heavy tem- 
pest ; the captain thought it advisable, under these circum- 
stances, to haul away from the island under a press of canvass, 
which would at any rate remove every apprehension of suffering 
from its crags and reefs. We passed a very rugged night, 
and at four o'clock in the morning, were assailed with a tre- 
mendous squall of wind, which seemed to dispel in great 
measure the most threatening indications of the atmosphere. 

5th. — Heavy rain and rough weather ushered in the new 
morning, and when the day was thoroughly established, we 
were found to be so far off the island, as to render the whole 
length of day insufficient for us to resume our former position, 
so as to have the usual intercourse with its inhabitants. This 
being conclusive, the day was expended in preparing and 
collecting many commodities wanted as presents, and to pur- 
chase supplies of some articles the most needed ; also in search- 
ing out a stock of clothing and materials, for the purpose of 
relieving the wants and sufferings of the poor naked children, 
who were often shivering with the present cold. The climate 
of this island is stated to have become much cooler within the 
last three or four years than it was formerly : the heat of the 
sun is excessive during the day, but the nights and mornings 
are chilly, and the dews very heavy. 

6th. — After a very tossing and almost sleepless night, I felt 
much cast down at the situation of things around us, and 
seemed inclined to lay aside every attempt to effect a landing 
upon the island to-day, although we had got into an eligible 
position for the purpose during the night. I did not feel clear 
of this out-station at Aroragne ; and yet there had been no 
opportunity for an arrangement to be made for it, or the need- 
ful notice given of an intended meeting ; but before getting up, 
the way was made plain before me that would lead to peace and 
tranquillity of mind ; to insure which I found that I must land 
to-day at Gnatagnia, attend the meeting there to-morrow, 
and on Second day go off to the out-station at Aroragne : to 
this I felt resigned, and told Charles, that this was the only 



1836. J CHAPTER XXX. 549 

way for ine to proceed with safety. Every exertion was made 
to push the Henry FreeUag within the range of tolerably 
smooth water ; and the natives who had been anxiously watch- 
ing our motions, on seeing this, launched the boat and put out 
to sea to meet us. The health of my Charles was so favourably 
restored, as to allow him to accompany me ; and having got our 
stores, &c. safely into the boat, we again pushed off for the 
shore, and on landing were welcomed by the cheerful counte- 
nances of the islanders as usual. On reaching the missionary 
dwelling, I told our kind host and hostess, that we were now 
come to take up our abode with them in earnest. On explaining 
the prospect then before me, Charles Pittman expressed much 
satisfaction at the probability of the Aroragne people being 
visited. I left directions with Captain Keen, to stand close in 
with the island once every day if practicable ; and when we 
were ready to embark, the flag should be hoisted by us as before 
agreed upon. The remaining part of the day was fully occupied 
among the people, in making trifling purchases and bestowing 
rewards, &c. 

1th. (First day. ) — After breakfast this morning, the Bible 
was laid before me, according to the usual practice of giving 
preference to the stranger, who at once undertakes to read a 
chapter, and afterwards to go forward with a prayer. When 
I had finished reading, we remained in silence. I had a secret 
hope this circumstance' might lead into serious consideration at 
a future day, as to the practice of Friends on these occasions ; 
and perhaps point out the difference between those whose time 
is always ready, and others who can only move in the ability 
given by Him, who said " without me ye can do nothing." I 
sometimes feel much for some of the former, from a conviction 
that they themselves are at seasons brought under a very 
humiliating sense of being numbered with those who " ask and 
receive not ;" but whilst anxious to be found in the path of my 
own duty, my desire is to be clothed with the heavenly garment 
of charity towards others in these matters. 

The time of the native meeting now drew nigh, at the thought 
of which my mind was greatly cast down ; and yet I felt a sus- 
taining confidence that my being here was in the right ordering. 



550 CHAPTER XXX. [1836. 

for if my own inclination could have been gratified and followed, 
we should have been this morning out of sight of the island 
altogether. Charles Pittman might have observed my sunken 
condition : for previously to setting out for the meeting, he 
seemed desirous to ascertain whether I should speak to the 
people or not. I told him this was very uncertain ; but from 
the manner in which this thing had been brought about, which 
was certainly not in mine own will, it was by no means 
improbable that I might have something to say to them. The 
house was well filled when we reached it, and Charles Pittman 
at once ascended the pulpit, but I remained on the ground floor, 
as one having no part to take in the matter ; and, I trust, in a 
state something similar to that of passive clay, willing to be 
any thing or nothing, to do or to suffer in secret with the 
suffering seed. Charles Pittman went on with the usual services, 
as if he had little expectation of any interference on my part ; 
but when the second singing was concluded, the way seemed 
at once to open for my going to him. On my getting into the 
pulpit, such was my blank condition, that I told him we must 
proceed slowly ; for I should have to look well for the stepping 
stones to get along with safety. We stood some time in silence 
together, when my mouth was opened with our blessed Lord's 
declaration, — " there is joy in heaven over one sinner that 
repenteth, more than over ninety and nine just persons that 
need no repentance. - " Such is the everlasting mercy, and 
boundless love of God to his creature man, that he willeth not 
the death of a sinner ; but rather that all should repent, forsake 
the evil of their ways, return unto Him, and live for ever. For 
this the Saviour came ; not to condemn, but to save a guilty 
world : — Jesus Christ came into the world to save sinners from 
the wrath to come ; that we might have life, and that we might 
have it more abundantly. He purchased for poor, lost, finite 
man, the unspeakable gift of the Holy Spirit, by the sacrifice 
of himself on the blood-stained cross, " the just for the unjust, 
that he might bring us unto God ;" who " so loved the world, 
that He gave His only begotten Son, that whosoever believeth 
in Him, should not perish, but have everlasting life." But 
none can be benefited by the coming and sufferings of the Lord 



1836.] CHAPTER XXX. 551 

Jesus, without an implicit belief iu him. A mere belief in the 
outward fact of His coming in the flesh upon the earth, will not 
suffice : we must believe in the coming of His Holy Spirit into 
our hearts, and in His power to cleanse and save his people 
from their sins. How many in this our day, fall short of the 
knowledge of the only " true God and Jesus Christ, whom he 
hath sent, — which is life eternal, 1 "' — through an evil heart of 
unbelief ! When the Saviour of men was personally upon the 
earth, and men beheld his glory as of the only begotten of the 
Father, full of grace and truth, his mighty works were few in 
some places, because of the unbelieving hearts of the people ; 
and he had frequently to upbraid the doubting, unbelieving 
multitude, for their hardness of heart ; there were also found 
among his own disciples, those that were slow of heart to believe 
respecting Him. " Except ye see signs and wonders ye will 
not believe," — was his language on one occasion ; " but blessed 
are they that have not seen, and yet have believed." Great 
indeed was my desire that these simple-hearted islanders might 
not be faithless, but believing, — that joy unspeakable and full 
of gloiy might be theirs, — that Christ might dwell in their 
hearts by faith, — even He, whom not having seen, they yet 
desired to love. For about an hour and a-half, I was drawn 
forth to plead with these dear people, in the love of the gospel ; 
that they might be reconciled to God, for Christ's sake, for 
their own souls 1 sake, and ours also, because of the Truth as it 
is in Jesus. It was indeed a glorious meeting, and ought to 
be commemorated with humblest gratitude and praise. 

My faithful interpreter was almost overcome with the sense 
of the working of the Lord's almighty power. When the 
spring was closed up, he spoke to me in allusion to my having 
said, on first going into the pulpit, that ' I should have to look 
well for the stepping-stones to get along with safety, 1 — saying, 
that he soon found I had got upon good ground, from the 
feelings he experienced. But the sentence of death was mine ; 
and though I have truly nothing to boast of but weakness and 
infirmity, both of late much and evidently increased, yet how 
can I do less than cause the voice of the praise of my God to 
be heard, by faithfully testifying to that loving-kindness, 



552 chapteii xxx. [1836. 

which is better than life : His work is honourable and 
glorious, — His righteousness endureth for ever. I sat down in 
nothingness and weakness ; the creature was laid in the dust, 
as one that ow r ed unto his Lord, far more than " five hundred 
pence"" many times multiplied, and who had nothing to pay with ; 
— self-convicted too, and as one to whom all that had been 
spoken most fully applied. Although the meeting had held 
long, before I took any part in it, and was then prolonged to 
an unseasonable length, the people retained their seats, as if 
fearful of disturbing the covering which was permitted to over- 
shadow us ; and they continued in stillness, after we came 
down upon the floor to them : but on my remarking to Charles 
Pittman, that they did not seem willing to go away, he said a 
few sentences to them, after which they quietly withdrew. 

8th. — Rose at the earliest cock-crowing this morning, and 
prepared to set forward for Aroragne. The night having been 
squally, and the morning opening with showers of rain, it 
was thought the exposure and fatigue would be more than 
my Charles could support, as the present state of his health 
rendered unwarrantable any thing bordering on risk ; it was 
therefore concluded best that he should remain at Gnatagnia. 
Charles complied with this determination rather reluctantly, 
being desirous of rendering assistance in any way within his 
power, and not liking to be so separated from the scene of duty. 
Charles Pittman and myself moved forward, he on horseback, 
and myself in the usual way, with a body of natives, ten in 
number. In the morning the rain made the work cooler, and 
seemed to make no impression, as it fell on their well-oiled 
skins : the burning and dazzling white sand on which we tra- 
velled, was nicely cooled by the showers, and retained a re- 
freshing temperature while the atmosphere remained cloudy ; 
but on our return in the afternoon, the sun was burning hot, and 
the weather totally changed. Notice having been timely given, 
we found the people prepared to receive us, and the meeting 
was soon collected, to the number of fifteen hundred persons. 
Being a stranger on this side the island, my certificates were 
read as usual at the commencement ; an arrangement always 
preferred by myself, from having so often witnessed it to bring 



1836.] CHAPTER XXX. 553 

the people into stillness and attention, and also to renew a 
fresh feeling of the precious unity and sympathy of my dear 
brethren and sisters far away ; the remembrance of them 
under these circumstances, in the love and fellowship of the 
gospel, brings strength, while it softens the heart. I remained 
upon the floor, with a crowd of natives squatted about me, and 
having now no one near me, that I had ever seen before, I felt 
like a stranger indeed. When the time arrived, I went to 
Charles Pittman, and eventually broke the silence, by reminding 
the people of Him, who knoweth our down-sitting and up-rising, 
and understandeth our thoughts afar off; yea, there is not a 
word in our tongue, but He knoweth it altogether : " all things 
are naked and open to the eyes of Him, with whom we have 
to do." "None of us can by any means redeem his brother, 
or give to God a ransom for him ;" — our salvation must be 
wrought out by ourselves, and that with fear and trembling. 
But sinful and impotent as we are, the means for the accom- 
plishment of this great work, are mercifully placed within the 
reach of all, through the unutterable love of God, in Christ 
Jesus, our crucified, risen, and glorified Lord. In order to 
partake of this great and universal salvation, conferred upon 
mankind by the " God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ, - " 
we must come to the experimental knowledge of Him, who is 
the eternal author of it all. He tasted death for every man ; 
and by the awful sacrifice of himself, not only procured for a 
guilty world the remission of sins that are past, but the 
unspeakable gift of the Holy Spirit. " I am the light of the 
world," said Christ ; " he that followeth me shall not walk in 
darkness, but shall have the light of life." Those who believe 
in this light, and walk in this light, who bring their thoughts, 
words, and deeds to it, and obey its manifestations, are they 
who love Christ and keep his commandments ; for Christ is the 
light : and in thus doing, they love God, — for God is light : — 
" I and my Father are one." " If we walk in the light, as he 
is in the light, we have fellowship one with another, and the 
blood of Jesus Christ His Son cleanseth us from all sin." 
The spring of the everlasting gospel flowed freely to this people, 
and in its authority I was enabled to appeal unto themselves, 



554 CHAPTER XXX. [1836. 

and make them their own living witnesses to the in-shining 
of " the light of the glorious gospel of Christ " in their own 
hearts. That although it was their lot to dwell in a remote part 
of the globe, on a small spot in the midst of the ocean, they 
were alike the objects of everlasting and redeeming love, with 
those who inhabited every other part of the Lord's earth ; 
and for them the precious blood of Christ was shed, as for 
me, and mine, and all mankind. The people were invited 
to repent, believe, and obey the gospel, and they would find 
it to be the power of God unto salvation, through the Holy 
Spirit. And as they came to enjoy the blessedness of those 
who believe in Jesus, and walk in His light in obedience to 
its discoveries, their hearts would be changed, and become 
more and more turned towards their dear children, than is at 
present the case, that they also might with them partake in 
the joys of God's salvation. It was a memorable season, and 
I trust will not soon be forgotten. After noticing the people 
we repaired to a native teacher's house, and partook of some 
cooling refreshment of which we both stood in need. On our 
return to Gnatagnia, we stopped to examine a new place of 
worship, sixty feet square, which is building of coral, or agglo- 
merated sand and shells, and is nearly complete to the roof. 
This structure is carried on under the direction of A. Cun- 
ningham. We reached the mission-house too late to embark, 
on account of there being several matters yet to attend to, 
— though the Henry Freeling was at the time hovering pretty 
near the southernmost end of the island. 

9th. — Several articles being now wanted from the vessel, in 
order to discharge the debts contracted, and yet to be incurred, 
for hogs, vegetables, and labour in the overland journies and in 
the boat, &c, it was concluded that Charles should go on board 
to procure these things ; while I, with the assistance of Charles 
Pittman, endeavoured to procure what was wanting, and made 
every arrangement calculated to forward my intention of quit- 
ting the shores of Rarotonga towards evening. I cannot omit 
mentioning the kind behaviour of the natives last evening after 
our return from Aroragne : they were probably aware that the 
time was at hand for our final departure from the island, and 



1836.] CHAPTER XXX. 555 

the house of the missionary was like a fair the whole time ; 
they seemed to vie with each other in doing any thing they 
thought would please. Several of the young women applied, 
through Charles Pittman, for permission to rub my feet, legs, 
and knees, in the manner in which they are accustomed to 
perform the operation on the persons of their chiefs, when 
greatly fatigued ; saying, that I had had a very long journey 
that day, and must be weary, and in need of what they could 
do. I was not very partial to this method of relief, but did not 
like to appear to slight their simple offer ; but I was afterwards 
surprised to find in how short a time all aches and pains of 
weariness were entirely removed by their persevering diligence, 
— several of them were at work at the same time, and trying 
who could do the most. On this island we had the satisfaction 
to see a great increase of population, the children swarmed about 
its shores like bees, and I think Charles Pittman said, the 
schools were attended by 3000 of different ages and both sexes. 
The houses of the natives are mostly constructed with some 
degree of uniformity, neatly white- washed, with roads to many 
of them made of broken shells, and a public road for travelling 
upon ; and the people seem to live generally in a state of enjoy- 
ment. The fruit and vegetables usually found upon the isles of 
the Pacific abound, as the island is like a well-watered hot-bed. 
The lofty mountains in its centre, obstruct the passage of the 
clouds, and cause an abundant supply of rain. But what con- 
duces most to the comfort and real happiness of the people, and 
causes an increasing population, is the circumstance of there 
being no good harbour for shipping ; they have, consequently, 
very slight intercourse with the English and American sailors, 
and are therefore free from that dreadful disease, the blasting 
influence of which, is fast depopulating every other isle which 
our footsteps have traversed : to this truth may be added 
another, originating in the same cause, — there is no rum dealer 
upon the island ; ardent spirit is a curse entailed upon most 
others by these scourges of the human race, either publicly or 
privately introduced by the shipping. The remains of the 
wreck of the Charles Doggett, an American vessel, were lying 
upon the reefs of Earotonga ; it appears that no lives were lost ; 
the cargo, consisting principally of pearl shells, and cocoa-nut 



556 CHAPTER XXX. [1836. 

oil, was saved by the natives, and the crew had been happily 
shipped off shortly afterwards. This vessel we met with at 
Tahiti last year, she put in twice, and was then in the very act 
of diffusing her rum, muskets, and gunpowder, amongst the 
islands, for cocoa-nut oil, pearl shells, arrow root, &c. She 
was prosecuting another voyage, and had been fitted out at 
Sydney, New South Wales, where one or more of her owners 
reside, and where many others reside who are accumulating 
wealth by a traffic which promotes the destruction of their 
fellow-men. After discharging all our debts, and affording as 
many supplies to our friends, and for the benefit of the dear 
children, as we could spare, we took our last meal with Charles 
and Elizabeth Pittman ; we then bade a final adieu to the shores 
of Rarotonga, and its swarthy tribes, as to the outward, but to 
memory lastingly precious, though as far distant as the east is 
from the west. 

The Henry Freeling anticipated our movement, and 
stretched in upon the coast, when the boat made its ap- 
pearance ; and we were favoured to get safely on board at half- 
past three o'clock in the afternoon. A. M'Donald, and Alex- 
ander Cunningham accompanied us, and returned with the boat 
again to the shore. We got in our numerous articles without 
being materially injured by the spray of the sea, and at four 
o 1 clock filled our sails and bore away to the westward ; cleared 
the southernmost point and its crags before dark ; and at mid- 
night, were at least fifty miles from this interesting and highly 
favoured little island. Besides Rarotonga there are four small 
islands inhabited, which comprise the Hervey group ; but not 
one missionary amongst them all. Our friend, Charles Pitt- 
man, feeble as he is, would, I have no hesitation in believing, 
have freely devoted his remaining strength to our service, and 
united in a visit to them with us, had his fellow-missionary 
Aaron Buzacott been at his own station at Avorua ; but the 
absence of the latter deprived us of an interpreter, without 
which, such a visit would have been in vain : I think I should 
not have been satisfied to pass them by, could one have been 
obtained. The names of these islands are, Mangaia, Atiu, 
Aitutaki, Mitiaro, or Mauki ; their population is estimated at 
5900 people. These islands are now and then visited by a 



1836.] chapter xxx. 557 

missionary from Rarotonga ; such a circumstance must, how- 
ever, be very rare, as it can only occur when a vessel comes 
down from the Georgian or Society group, to range amongst 
them, and collect cocoa-nut oil, arrow-root, &c. ; there are, how- 
ever, some native teachers distributed among them from Raro- 
tonga. This group was first discovered by our countryman 
Captain Cook, and was afterwards named the Hervey Islands. 
It is with much satisfaction I have learned, that our valuable 
interpreter Samuel Wilson, who accompanied us round Tahiti, 
in 1835, is now an appointed missionary by the London society 
to the station of Aroragne, on the south side of Rarotonga. 

Our visit to Rarotonga cannot, I think, on various accounts, 
be soon obliterated from our minds, or pass away as a tale that 
is told : the retrospect of the highly favoured seasons, so con- 
descendingly permitted to crown the different assemblies of the 
people, only brightens the more, as the days are increased 
which throw the scene of such love and such mercy still 
further and further behind. The circumstance of the Henry 
Freeling having to beat about during the whole time, rendered 
it doubly hazardous on her account, and made our different 
trips to the shore much more difficult and protracted ; the 
boisterous state of the weather, and the trade wind coming- 
round both ends of the island, and then • meeting, placed the 
boat and ourselves in a precarious situation, when getting in or 
out of the vessel ; and the wet necessarily encountered in passing 
to and fro by boat ; these are occurrences, which, although at the 
time somewhat irksome and hindering, when over, are not worthy 
to be recorded ; — such was the peace, and love, and sweetness 
that flowed from the everlasting fountain and source of all our 
sure mercies, which even exceeded the hundred fold promised 
to those that leave all for Christ's sake and his gospel : — to 
the praise of Him, whose faithfulness faileth not, be it spoken. 
Before leaving Rarotonga, I received several letters from some 
of the most capable scholars in the school at Gnatagnia, which 
were literally translated to us ; one of which I subjoin as a 
specimen, which will suffice for the whole, as they are nearly in 
the same strain. It is from Tekori, a boy of about sixteen 
years of age. 



558 CHAPTER XXX. [1836. 

' This is my speech to you, Daniel Wheeler, — 

' Read it, that you may know great is our joy in seeing your 
face, and in knowing your speech of God's great kindness to you. 
Attend, — I will relate to you the coming of God's word to us. 
We were heathens formerly, — we did not know the living God 
Jehovah. At that time the devil was our god ; — we worshipped 
him, and did that which is agreeable to his will : — that was our 
condition formerly, Daniel Wheeler. Attend, — then arrived 
the season in which the word of the great God came to us — 
even of Jehovah, and the word of God spread among us in that 
season ; — still listen, — God sent his servants to us, to inform 
us of the true way. Then the light sprung up in the midst of 
us. The word spoken by Isaiah the prophet was then fulfilled, 
chap. lx. verse 1 . " Arise, shine, for thy light is come, and the 
glory of the Lord is risen upon thee." Behold, the light of 
Jehovah came to this land, and the light of Jehovah dawned 
upon us : then the word of God spread on this land. The 
children know the word of God. Pittman taught us unwea- 
riedly, and in this likewise, behold the love of God to us. 

Our friend and brother, Daniel Wheeler, I think of the kind- 
ness of God in conveying you from your land — from Britain. 
You have been directed by God to this land and that land ; you 
have witnessed his loving kindness, — you have seen what has 
occurred in the deep, — the mighty power of God. He will not 
forsake those who put their trust in Him. Friend, when you 
go to visit this land and that land, we will pray to God, that he 
may safely conduct you to the land whither you wish to go, and 
that He may carry you safely to your own land. Friend, now 
go ; we have met, — you have seen our face in Rarotonga, and we 
have seen your face. Observe, one thing yet remains. When 
we shall be assembled with the word of God, of the blessed — in 
that world of joy, the good people of Britain will know those of 
Rarotonga, and the good people of Rarotonga, will know those 
of Britain ; and then will be known the true state of that land, 
and this land. This is a little speech of compassion toward 
you : may you be preserved in your voyaging. And now, may 
the grace of God be granted to us — even so — Amen. 

' From Tekori : that is all I have to say.' 



1836.] CHAPTER XXX. 559 

16th. — Since quitting the neighbourhood of Rarotonga, our 
course has been directed, when the weather would permit, 
towards the Friendly Islands, which lie in a westerly direction 
from the Hervey group, at a distance of from eleven to twelve 
hundred miles ; but having now to traverse near the edge of the 
trade latitude, the winds became much more unstable ; some- 
times they are directly opposed to our proceeding, and often bois- 
terous, with as much sea as our little vessel could at times well 
bear. Nothing material occurred on the passage from Raro- 
tonga : our devotional duties were attended to as usual ; and 
though Charles and myself had much to contend with, from 
the heat of. the climate, and our narrow limits in the cabin, 
during our endeavours to draw nigh unto the Lord, — yet there 
is ample encouragement, notwithstanding human weakness and 
frailty, and the hindering things to which these poor bodies are 
subject, for all to persevere in wrestling for the blessing, with 
the noble resolution of the patriarch, " I will not let thee go, 
until thou bless me.' 1 It was expected I believe by all on 
board, that we should steer for the island of Tongataboo, but a 
variety of circumstances operated upon my mind, to produce a 
determination to aim in the first place at the northernmost 
island, Vavau : this was so fixed with me, that I told Captain 
Keen, before we lost sight of Rarotonga, the conclusion I had 
come to ; he made arrangements accordingly to accomplish the 
object in view. At noon to-day, it was found from accu- 
rate calculation, that the island of Vavau, was only distant 
about 102 miles. As we were now making rapid progress 
towards our destination, rolling away before a strong wind and 
following sea, it was thought that the distance was too short, 
to warrant running on through the night, and the more so, as 
the moon was too young to afford any light, when that would 
be the most needed. Our canvass was accordingly reduced, 
and at nine o'clock p. m., we hove to for the night. 

17th. — At five o'clock a. m., bore up and made sail to the 
westward. At nine o'clock we were cheered with a sight of 
the island, and immediately stood for the northernmost bluff, 
with a fresh trade-wind in our favour. At noon, we were abreast 
of the bluff, and hauled round the different headlands as close as 



560 CHAPTER XXX. [1836. 

was prudent, with a good look out from the mast head for the 
breakers. Although furnished with an ample number of 
nautical charts, yet none afforded specific directions for 
approaching these shores ; and it was perplexing to find that 
a rough sketch printed by Mariner, (who long resided among 
the Tonga Isles, and published a history of them,) in our pos- 
session, disagreed in toto with two first-rate charts we had on 
board ; and yet this imperfect sketch furnished to all appear- 
ance, the best directions for entering Port Refuge, although 
certainly never intended as a seaman's guide. On reaching a 
head-land which we expected would form one side of a spacious 
bay, in which we were hoping to find shelter, it was found on 
rounding it, to our great consternation, that island after island 
began to show itself; until every prospect of finding a port 
seemed closed up : it remained to be determined, whether we 
should run out to sea again, or risk an attempt to find shelter, 
by working into the heart of the group at a venture. Every 
precaution was used to avoid sunken rocks and shoals, and the 
colour of the water was our faithful guide. In the course of a 
few tacks, we seemed to be completely embarrassed amidst this 
host of enemies ; we looked in vain on every side for an opening 
to the place, which we had before anticipated finding without 
any difficulty. At last, as the sun was rapidly setting, there 
seemed no chance of success, or option left, but that of taking 
refuge at sea, instead of in the port that bears the name of 
Refuge. Our captain would gladly have relinquished this 
hazardous pursuit, and made off while there was day-light to see 
the way out again ; but, we had still some hope left, that the 
design would be accomplished, and when as the day-light 
receded, that hope sickened within us, the sight of a ship at 
anchor renewed it again like a charm, and stimulated to more 
persevering exertion. A second ship was now soon discovered 
near the first, and seeing an English jack flying for a pilot, 
they both displayed the American flag. It soon became dark, 
but there was as yet no anchorage, we had sounded in vain ; 
and though surrounded by islands on every hand there was no 
bottom to be found. The place where these ships were seen, 
was now our aim, and at length we succeeded in getting near 



1836.] CHAPTER XXX. 561 

enough to hail the Pacific, of Nantucket, at anchor in twenty- 
eight fathoms water ; but by running a little nearer the shore, 
we found a sandy bottom, with sixteen fathoms upon it, which, 
after tumbling about for two months since leaving the roads 
of Waimea, at the Sandwich Isle Tauai, was accepted with 
thankfulness. What shall we render unto the Lord Most 
High, whose goodness and mercy still follow us in the way 
that we go ? — Yea, he delivereth the poor, and him that hath 
no helper. What shall we say, or what shall we do, but 
wonder and adore, in humble prostration of soul, the fulness 
and extent of that love, which no tongue can set forth or 
declare : it is boundless, as His everlasting mercy, — filling all 
space, and unfathomable as the ocean we traverse. 



2o 



562 CHAPTER XXXI. [1886. 



CHAPTER XXXI. 



VAVAU — WESLEYAN MISSIONARIES NATIVE MEETINGS AT NEIAFU, 

FELETOA, AND HAALAUFULI APPOINTED MEETING FOR SEAMEN 

VISIT TO THE ISLAND OF OTEA MEETINGS AT HIHIFO AT 

MATIKA EMBARKATION OF THE MISSION FAMILIES SAIL FOR 

LIFUKA. 

Vavau, Eighth Month \§th. — This morning the natives began 
early to visit us, nocking on board with their simple articles of 
shells for barter. Although we usually hold our little meeting on 
this day of the week, yet the unsettled state of our affairs com- 
pelled us to relinquish the attempt, from the confusion around 
us, produced by the novelty of our vessel, and the unfitness 
of our own minds. At noon, left the vessel in quest of the 
missionary station. On reaching the head of the bay, two 
missionaries were observed coming towards us in a canoe ; and 
on seeing our boat they returned again to the shore, to point 
out the most suitable place for landing, and to conduct us to 
the settlement at Neiafu. These were Stephen Rabone and 
John Spinney, who had lately arrived from England, via 
Sydney, with their families. In a short time we reached the 
habitation of John Thomas, the senior missionary, who has been 
for several years engaged upon these islands. Here we met 
with a kind and friendly reception, and the same offer of assist- 
ance as had been extended towards us at other places. We 
found the whole mission belongs to the Wesleyan Missionary 
Society exclusively ; these individuals are the first of its mem- 
bers whom we have met with in the Pacific. I left my cer- 
tificates with John Thomas for translation ; and after having 
been cheered by hearing of our dear friends James Backhouse 
and George W. Walker, and of others whom we had known at 
Sydney and Hobart Town, at which places the recently arrived 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXI. 563 

missionaries had spent some time waiting for a conveyance to 
the Friendly Islands, we returned on board. 

19th. — Notwithstanding the weather was so wet as to confine 
us on board, yet the deck was crowded with the natives from 
morning until evening. Small hogs, vegetables, and abundance 
of shells seem to be the whole of their saleable property. They 
are a fine manly race of people, of the most perfect form we 
have yet seen ; and having as yet had but little intercourse 
with foreigners, they are not the victims of wretchedness and 
disease, which the seamen every where introduce. Their skins 
are clean and well oiled, and in general appearance they are 
healthy. The length and roughness of their hair, which is 
uniformly black, gives them rather a wild and ferocious appear- 
ance ; but they are in reality as gentle and docile as little 
children. With the exception of an apron of long wiry grass 
about the waist, they are mostly naked. Taofaahau, on whom 
the title of King George has been conferred by the missionaries, 
is now absent at Lifuka, one of the Haabai Islands. He is 
spoken of very highly, and declared to be a preacher of the 
gospel to the people ; and the queen, Charlotte, fills the station 
of class-leader among the female part of the community. It 
is said, the whole population of the group Haafuluhau, (pro- 
nounced Haah-foo-loo-how,) of which Vavau is the largest 
island ; of the Haabai group, of which Lifuka is the most 
considerable, and a part of Tongataboo, have embraced Christi- 
anity ; the remainder upon this last island are still called 
heathens. John Hobbs and William Allen Brooks, mission- 
aries from the station at Feletoa, came on board this afternoon 
to make our acquaintance. 

Went on shore this evening, principally to inquire at what 
time I could see the people collected to-morrow morning, my 
mind having been turned towards a meeting with them. Find- 
ing no difficulty in the way, and having the promise of John 
Thomas to interpret for me, we returned on board. The evening 
proved wet, with thunder and lightning ; and the vermin, which 
have greatly increased since we have been in these hot climates, 
being joined by a fresh supply of mosquitos from the shore, 
annoyed us extremely, so that there was but little rest to be 

2o2 



564 CHAPTER XXXI. [1836. 

obtained ; to which, the prospect of having new ground to move 
upon, did not fail to contribute. 

2lst. (First day.) — Grot ready in good time this morning, 
and taking the mate and four men in the boat, proceeded to 
Neiafu. On reaching the meeting-house, it appeared that the 
native worship had commenced much earlier than usual, to allow 
of more time for what might succeed it. We remained outside 
the building, lest our appearance should tend to confuse, until 
it was finished, when John Thomas came out and took me to 
his seat. After my certificates were read and explained, I had, 
after a pause, to turn the people to the great Teacher of all 
mankind — Christ Jesus ; who, when on earth, spoke as never 
man spoke, and taught as never man taught : the light of 
whose glorious gospel bringeth salvation to all that believe in 
and obey it. I had been induced to leave all to bring them 
the glad tidings of this gospel, which is the power of God unto 
salvation from sin ; that the fulness of this heavenly blessing 
in all its riches, might be theirs for ever. I was abundantly 
strengthened by the might of my ever gracious Master, to pro- 
claim to these noble islanders, who form but a small portion of 
His " inheritance, 1 '' the grace and truth which came by Him. 
Under a feeling of great solemnity their attention was riveted, 
while listening to the endeavours of a way-worn stranger, to 
turn them from darkness to the light of Christ in their own 
hearts, and from the power of Satan unto God ; whose mercy 
endureth for ever. 

22nd. — In the forenoon, John Thomas, Stephen Rabone, 
and John Spinney came on board ; and the afternoon proving 
very rainy, we could not get on shore. By their coming, how- 
ever, arrangements were made for attending a meeting at Feletoa 
about noon to-morrow. This evening we were informed that 
the Active schooner, a vessel well known to us, had been 
wrecked upon a reef among the Fiji Islands. The captain and 
three others escaped with their lives; but the remaining four 
who were saved from the wreck, were afterwards stripped and 
murdered by the natives. Their destruction appears to have 
resulted from their harsh and imprudent conduct towards the 
islanders. They are said to have been four very wicked people. 



1836. J CHAPTER XXXI. 565 

The Fiji group is considered as part of the Friendly Islands. 
This vessel was in the employ of the Wesleyan Mission, and 
had brought out missionaries from Sydney to this place but a 
short time before we arrived ; and from hence proceeded to land 
missionary stores at the Fiji Islands, and was expected to 
return again shortly to Port Refuge. This dreadful circum- 
stance will tend to stagnate for a time the affairs of the mission, 
as regards their supplies on these islands ; and may possibly 
retard the intended establishment of a mission at the Fiji 
group. 

23rd. — This morning John Hobbs arrived in good time, 
bringing with him two canoes with six natives, who were to 
paddle the Henry Freelings long boat to Feletoa for the pur- 
pose of conveying us to the intended meeting there. We were 
late in reaching our destination, owing to a strong current 
setting against the boat. John Thomas was preaching to the 
people when we arrived, and when he had finished we went 
into the meeting, and sat down. When John Thomas had 
finished his explanation of my certificate, I stood up in great 
weakness and fear, and solemn silence prevailed over the 
assembly, which was large. I had to declare unto them the 
truth as it is in Jesus, even in Him who in due time died for 
all, that all might live ; — the same blessed Jesus, who came on 
earth in the greatness of his love and strength, to seek and to 
save that which was lost ; — who once taught the people in a 
body of flesh, but now teaches all mankind by His Holy Spirit 
of grace, and is the Saviour of all that believe, — the life and 
light of men ; — mighty to save the soul from sin, and lead it up 
to God the Father. I seemed to have little or nothing before 
me but the supply of the moment, from the time of standing 
up to the end. After dining and spending some time in the 
family of John Hobbs, we returned to the boat which was left 
about a mile off ; but the declivity of the foot path was much 
worse to descend than I expected, though its ascent had been 
hard work in the morning. All the missionaries, except John 
Thomas, accompanied us down towards the bay ; but they were 
put on shore before we came in sight of the shipping. On arriving 
at Port Refuge, we were cheered by the sight of an English 



566 CHAPTER XXXI. [1836. 

flag, on board a vessel coming in from sea, which proved to be 
the Lady Wellington, whaler of Sydney, out three months on a 
whaling cruise. 

27th. — Most of yesterday engaged in bartering with the 
natives. The king's brother, who is a useful man to the mis- 
sionaries, dined on board with us. To-day, cloudy weather ; 
heavy rain fell in the night with strong squalls from off the 
high land : the John Adams, of New Bedford, drove from her 
anchorage, and was compelled to let go a second anchor. Our 
vessel was moored with two heavy anchors. The afternoon 
again showery. The natives brought several hogs in the course 
of the day, and a tolerable supply of yams and cocoa-nuts. 
Having been confined on board several days by the state of the 
weather, which of late has precluded the performance of any 
distant visits, and nothing having arisen in this immediate 
neighbourhood, it has been a time of something like resting on 
the oar. 

28^. (First day ) — Long before daylight my mind was 
engaged to examine whether there was any particular track for 
me to move in, as regarded the natives 1 meeting on shore ; but 
I felt, as the morning opened, a poor forlorn creature, enfeebled 
and ready to droop by the way, as one that fainteth, though 
without having any defined prospect in view ; but abiding under 
the humbling influence of that power which softeneth the flinty 
rock, I have found it to be a place of safety, and one that prepares 
the tribulated mortal to partake of a blessed portion of that 
strength, which is perfected only in weakness ; while it prompts 
to watchfulness and resignation to the Divine will. . For the 
last two or three days, while most on board are gladdened 
with the hope of soon seeing the coast of New Holland, and 
entering again the port of Sydney, I cannot discover the 
probable time of our leaving this place, nor what may be our 
next destination : on which ever side I look, obstacles of no 
small magnitude present themselves ; but I am desirous to leave 
all to Him, who alone can make me quick of understanding in 
His fear. " My soul, wait thou only upon the Lord." Spent 
the day on board with our own crew, in the usual way. 

Slst. — Yesterday arrived the American ship Wiscasset, of 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXI. 567 

Wiscasset, Captain Macey, from a whaling cruise, to secure her 
oil by coopering, &c. In the afternoon, some steps were taken 
towards prosecuting a visit to one of the smaller islands, which 
the weather had prevented our attempting last Fifth day. We 
found to-day, that John Thomas had ascertained from some of 
the most intelligent natives, that the tide would flow to-morrow, 
sufficiently early to allow us to pass over the fiats and reach the 
meeting in seasonable time : we were also informed that general 
notice had been given to the people of two other stations, viz., 
Tanea and Eueiki, to assemble at the central station of the 
three, called Haalaufuli, where the meeting is appointed to be 
held. 

Ninth Month 1st. — Left the vessel before sunrise, and called 
upon John Thomas, who accompanied us through the journey. 
We proceeded across, a neck of land to a sandy bay, where 
two canoes were soon in readiness to convey us forward ; but 
as the wind blew strong against us, the natives very kindly 
suggested the propriety of a third canoe being procured, to 
divide the weight more equally ; and by rendering the canoes 
lighter, to lessen the danger of our getting wet by the feather 
tops of the little waves blowing on us from the stroke of the 
paddle : this occasioned some delay, but was no doubt a saving 
of time in the end. At length, however, we were equipped, and 
proceeded with three skilful natives in each canoe, which con- 
tained one of us ; the canoe with John Thomas leading the 
way. The first object was to cross an arm of the sea, to obtain 
the shelter of a high bluff on a headland which we had to pass, 
with numerous islands on our right, which broke off the swell 
of the ocean almost entirely from our route : some of these 
islands are inhabited. About ten o'clock a. m., we landed again 
on the island of Vavau, after a very circuitous passage, but the 
only one by which the extremity of this island can be got at 
from Neiafu. We were soon met by the principal chief, Daniel 
Afu, and several of his people, who welcomed us to their neigh- 
bourhood ; and after spending a short time at the chiefs house, 
the meeting was assembled by the sound of heavy strokes upon 
a hollow piece of wood, a sort of native drum, which may be 
heard at a great distance. The people were soon collected, and 



568 CHAPTER XXXI. [1836. 

after John Thomas had opened the meeting in the usual way, 
and read one of my certificates, all became silent. I had 
largely to declare amongst them the " unsearchable riches of 
Christ," the beloved Son of God, and Saviour of men ; whom 
all men are commanded to hear : whose Holy Spirit speaketh 
in every heart, to bring us to repentance and amendment of life 
in the fear of God. To this heavenly Teacher I was concerned 
to turn them, and to exhort them in the love of the gospel to 
" believe in the Lord Jesus Christ and be saved ;" to believe 
in the power of His Holy Spirit in their hearts, and wait for it 
there : we were favoured with a solemnity, which nothing short 
of this irresistible power can produce. Many of the people 
came to us in a loving manner, when the meeting broke up, and 
hung about while we remained in the neighbourhood. It was 
matter of very painful regret to us to find, that these dear people 
are in the practice, as they feel their minds affected, of break- 
ing out into clamorous groaning, and saying ' Amen 1 with a 
loud voice ; until a stranger is at a loss to conceive in what this 
dissipating practice may end : it is evidently encouraged by 
their teachers. They were this day turned to the teachings of 
that grace in their own hearts, by which all such as happily 
take heed to it, will learn to " worship God in spirit, rejoice in 
Christ Jesus, and have no confidence in the flesh.'" May the 
Lord hasten the dawning of that day, when true spiritual gospel 
worshippers shall abound in the earth to the glory and praise of 
Him, who is alone worthy to be worshipped in spirit and in 
truth ; when living spiritual sacrifices shall ascend, acceptable 
unto Him by Jesus Christ ; and in every place incense shall 
be offered to his ever great and excellent name, — even the sacri- 
fice offered in the " beauty of holiness and newness of life," 
from the pure, contrite, and humble heart, produced by the 
power of the Spirit of the Lord Jesus. 

After meeting we partook of some refreshment at the chiefs 
house, in true native style upon the floor on mats, with the 
milk of the cocoa-nut as a beverage, and the pulpy shoots of the 
banana bruised between the fingers, to answer the purpose of 
washing the hands ; some native cloth from the dress of the 
chiefess served for a towel : this was found a very needful and 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXI. 569 

agreeable part of the entertainment, having had literally to 
tear the food to pieces with our fingers. When our repast was 
finished, we took leave of the chief and his family and others 
present, and returned to the sea-side, and were safely paddled 
back again to the sandy bay near Neiafu. On the way from 
the canoes to the mission house, we called at the king's habi- 
tation ; his daughter, usually styled the Princess Charlotte, 
was at home, a young woman about sixteen years of age, with 
an intelligent countenance ; she was seated on the floor in 
simple native attire ; her brother, a boy, perhaps twelve years 
old, was playing . about. When returning to the vessel, it 
occurred to me that some of the ships now in the harbour would 
soon be ready for sea, and I felt as if I should not be clear of 
the crews, without endeavouring to collect them together next 
First day forenoon : to this I stood resigned, in hopes of feeling- 
some further impression in the morning, if it should be required. 
3rd. — Yesterday, the subject of a meeting with the seamen 
still rested upon me. On awaking this morning I endeavoured 
to watch over every thought that arose ; and after remembering 
my great Creator in humble gratitude for the mercies of the 
past night, my mind seemed as a blank, until the prospect of 
holding a meeting with the seamen of the fleet came before it ; 
this was not a little in the cross to the unmortified part, which 
seemed now ready to shrink. I kept the matter close until after 
breakfast, and then told Charles that I believed it safest for me 
to appoint a meeting for worship to-morrow, at eleven o'clock 
a. m., to be held in the native chapel at Neiafu, if that could 
be obtained. On stating this to John Thomas, he said that a 
missionary was coming down from Feletoa, to preach at the 
hour proposed for holding our meeting ; but that he had no 
doubt of his being willing to accommodate me. In that case, 
I told him that I should give notice to the shipping, that they 
might know what to expect ; as the meeting would be held after 
the manner of the Society of Friends, and would not commence 
with singing ; but we should wait in silence for the influence of 
the Holy Spirit upon our minds, before we could move. In the 
afternoon a sufficient number of written notices were prepared 
and distributed amongst the shipping, leaving the result to Him 



570 CHAPTER XXXI. [1836. 

who knoweth all things; desiring that His great name alone may 
be exalted, and the gospel of the heavenly kingdom may be pro- 
claimed in the heart of man to the Saviour's praise. 

4dJi. (First day.) — This morning much cast down and a 
poor creature, but as one bound to the work of the dear Master ; 
from which I dared not hold back, however human nature might 
be ready to shrink, as the hour of trial approached. Landed in 
good time, and proceeded to the meeting-house at Neiafu. I 
felt depressed from a sense of something like a spirit of opposi- 
tion being present ; but was soon comforted by an evidence 
which I could not mistake, of that powerbeing nigh to strengthen 
the inner man, the all-sufficiency of which to sustain in time of 
trouble I have so often witnessed. I had to sit long in silence, 
but eventually stood up with those instructive expressions of our 
Lord to his disciples, — " Herein is my Father glorified, that ye 
bear much fruit ; so shall ye be my disciples." " He that abideth 
in me and I in him, the same bringeth forth much fruit ; for 
without me, ye can do nothing." From this I was enabled to 
show, that without the blessed influence of the Holy Spirit of 
the Son, we can do nothing, — much less be capable of bearing 
that fruit, by which the holy Father is glorified ; and the 
impossibility of performing that worship which only is accept- 
able in the sight of Him, " who is a Spirit," without the help 
of the Holy Spirit : that therefore it is indispensable, in order 
to the performance of true spiritual worship, to wait in reveren- 
tial silence for a renewal of that strength, which is mighty 
through God to the casting down imaginations, and every high 
thing that exalteth itself against the knowledge of God, — to 
the " bringing into captivity every thought to the obedience of 
Christ," — even to the obedience of the Spirit of Truth in our 
hearts, without which none can worship God in Spirit and in 
truth. It is this influence which can alone prepare our hearts 
to worship, praise, and glorify the God and Father of our Lord 
Jesus Christ ; who is a Spirit, and must be worshipped in 
Spirit and in truth. I had to set forth the admirable adapta- 
tion of the glorious gospel dispensation to the condition of man 
the world over, and the blessed superiority of true spiritual 
worship in the inner temple of the heart, over that which is 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXI. 571 

left in the outer court to be trodden under foot. My mind was 
particularly turned towards those " that go down to the sea in 
ships, that do business in great waters, — that see the works 
of the Lord, and his wonders in the deep. 1, Although such 
may often feel excluded from their fellow-men, shut out from 
every opportunity of religious instruction, and destitute of the 
' means of grace ;' this is evidently not the case, but a delusion 
of the great enemy of God and man ; although it may be often 
held out by those who have a zeal for God, but not according 
to knowledge, of whom the great apostle speaks. For notwith- 
standing it is the lot of seafaring men to spend their days in 
roving upon the mighty ocean, yet the only true and blessed 
means of grace are still within their reach, — even that grace and 
truth which came by Jesus Christ, which hath appeared unto 
all men, and teacheth all men that believe in it. No class of 
men have a better opportunity of attending upon the means 
of salvation ; and although their allotment may be thought 
solitary, yet they are saved from many temptations, and out of 
the reach of the contaminating example of wicked men, to which 
those on shore are daily exposed. They have less to draw 
their attention aside from the great work, and more time to 
work out their souls'' salvation, than many of their fellow- 
mortals : — their nightly watches may be turned to everlasting 
account, in waiting upon the Lord, in looking for the blessed 
hope and glorious appearing of the great God and Saviour, by 
His Holy Spirit of grace. No men have greater need to 
acquaint themselves with God and be at peace ; they are in 
jeopardy every hour, which plainly bespeaks the necessity of 
their being prepared to meet their God, as with their lives in 
their hands. The Lord most High, in his infinite goodness and 
mercy, hath vouchsafed a day of visitation to all men, for the 
salvation of all men ; and it is this visitation that preserveth the 
life of the spirit in man. " Thy visitation," said Job, " hath 
preserved my spirit." The meeting held long, but proved a 
searching solemn season ; and although at first a gloom seemed 
to hang over it, eventually every cloud, or feeling of this kind, 
was scattered by that power, whom winds and waves obey ; and 
it ended well. A considerable number of seamen from the 



572 CHAPTER XXXI. [1836. 

different ships with their captains attended, also the whole of the 
niissionaiw families here, and one from Feletoa, with many of 
the natives, and some New Zealanders connected with the 
shipping, who understand English pretty well. Two of the 
ships in the harbour had intended sailing this morning, but 
were prevented for want of wind. The crews of both were 
furnished with an ample supply of tracts and Friends 1 writings, 
with two Spanish Testaments, for two men of that nation 
employed on board of them. 

7th. — Notwithstanding the security of the harbour in which 
we are privileged to ride, yet the scanty supply of fresh water 
is a serious inconvenience, the nearest spring being four miles 
off, on an island where the empty casks have to be rolled up 
half a mile ; and when filled, which requires much time to 
accomplish, they are rolled back again to the water's edge, and 
towed on board as a raft. Having had no opportunity to pro- 
cure any of this most necessary article since leaving the last of 
the Sandwich Islands until to-day, the stock on hand is very 
small, and can only be recruited by small quantities once in the 
day. Since First-day, we have arranged for a visit to the two 
congregations at the island of Otea to-morrow ; it being agreed 
that they shall meet at the same time under the same roof. 
May the Lord be graciously pleased to go before, and open the 
way in the hearts of these people, to receive the ever-blessed 
Truth in the love of it ; and through the workings thereof, 
bring forth fruit that shall lastingly remain, to His praise and 
their peace. 

8th. — As our vessel was anchored in the track from Neiafu 
to Otea, we waited the coming of John Thomas ; who arrived 
before ten o'clock, bringing with him John Spinney and six 
natives, who were then taken from the canoe and placed in our 
boat with their paddles, for the better accommodation of the 
whole party. On landing at Otea, we proceeded towards the 
other side of the island where the meeting was to be held. In 
crossing the sandy beaches, two of which were in our route, 
exposed to the full blaze of the sun nearly at noon, the heat 
and glare of light were almost insupportable, and the want of 
air when passing through the bush was still more oppressive. 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXI. 573 

We stayed a short time at the house of the chief, whose name 
is Lazarus, a steady going man among the people ; and when 
cooled a little, proceeded to the meeting, where the natives 
were assembled in readiness. Exclusive of the pulpit, there 
did not appear to be a seat in the whole neighbourhood except 
on the floor ; some of the people at last brought part of an old 
canoe into the building, for Charles and myself to sit upon. I 
felt in a very low and feeble condition, both as to body and 
mind ; but when my certificates were read, I stood up with a 
salutation of love in my heart to the people ; which having 
expressed, I had to turn their attention to Him, " Who seeth 
not as man seeth," but who is a Spirit, and looketh on the 
heart : He searcheth all hearts, and understandeth every 
imagination of the thoughts ; and to this man will He look, 
even to him that is poor and of a contrite spirit, that trembleth 
at His word. The Christian religion is a heart-felt work ; it is 
in the heart we must work out our own salvation with fear and 
trembling, through submission and obedience to the power of 
the Spirit of the Lord Jesus, which dwelleth in the contrite 
and humble heart, without respect of persons or of the colour 
of the skin. " Cease from man whose breath is in his nostrils, 
for wherein is he to be accounted of :" — man cannot save his 
own soul, nor blot out a single sin ; and can he do the work 
for another, which he cannot do for himself? My heart was 
greatly enlarged towards the people ; and they listened with 
apparent attention : but there was a feeling of deadness over 
the meeting, greater than we had yet witnessed on these 
islands. After remaining some time at the house of Lazarus 
to refresh and rest, we again crossed the island, and resumed 
our station in the boat : we proceeded round the northern part 
of the island, and visited a splendid cavern, into which we 
rowed with the boat, having a canoe to lead the way, conducted 
by Noah, one of the chiefs of Otea, and two chosen natives 
also well acquainted with the position and entrance of this 
wonderful place. The great height of the vaulted arches above 
our heads, which are almost of gothic shape, from which are 
suspended a variety of huge spiral masses of ponderous weight, 
apparently ready to fall, — the amazing depth and clearness of 



574 CHAPTER XXXI. [1836. 

the water under us, together with the dark and deep recesses, 
which could not be explored for want of a light, exhibited a 
sublime and magnificent spectacle and a specimen of those 
great and marvellous works, incomprehensible to mortal man. 
Fish of large size swam about beneath us, without the least 
appearance of being disturbed by the boat, so great was the 
depth of water between us and them. In knocking off some 
of the spiral crags within our reach to bring away with us, the 
echo produced was alarming, and as if the whole roof was in 
danger of falling upon us. 

9th. — King George having arrived from Lefuka, one of the 
Haabai Islands, this morning paid us a visit : a Saul-like man in 
truth, being higher than the rest of the people perhaps by the 
head and shoulders ; he was naked, with the exception of some 
native cloth round his waist. His moral character is highly 
spoken of, and the great prosperity of the Christian profession 
here, is said to be owing to his promptness in the due observ- 
ance of its rites and ordinances : the laws are said to be good, 
and he insists upon their being executed with rigour. If any 
disobey, or in any way are guilty of a misdemeanour, they are 
severely punished. It is much to be regretted, that the 
punishment of flogging should have been introduced here : it 
has been inflicted lately on several offenders, including one 
woman. This barbarous practice, we have been told, has 
proved beneficial to the people in a moral point of view ; but 
I believe its tendency is rather to blunt the feelings, and harden 
the heart. In the afternoon took exercise on shore until dark. 
Captain Macey of the Wiscasset, a serious man, drank tea 
with us. 

11th. (First day.) — Spent a peaceful day on board, col- 
lected the crew both fore and afternoon for devotional purposes; 
— none of them seemed disposed to attend the meeting on shore. 

Y&th. — Yesterday sailed the brig Lady Wellington : pre- 
vious to her departure, the crew were furnished with a set of 
Friends' 1 tracts, and a Summary of our principles. This morn- 
ing, John Thomas came on board at eight o'clock ; when 
we immediately proceeded down the harbour in the usual way, 
and landed on the western coast of Vavau. The meeting was 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXI. 575 

to be held at Hihifo, about a mile from the landing-place ; 
whither we went, and met with the chief Solomon, at his own 
habitation ; and as soon as the people were collected, repaired 
to the meeting-place. The places of worship at the stations 
distant from Neiafu are like large sheds, standing upon props, 
and open on both sides ; but the ends are made tolerably close 
with coarse matting. As there was no seat in the meeting, I 
remained near John Thomas, who occupied a considerable time 
in the native language, before reading my certificates. When 
he had finished we stood by each other in silence, and the 
people seemed unsettled, as if they did not know what to expect 
next, or to whom they should hearken, first looking upon one 
of us, and then upon the other ; until it was with me to 
caution them against a dependence upon the creature, but to 
endeavour to fix the attention of their minds upon the Creator, 
who is a Spirit and knoweth all things. The darkness hideth 
not from Him, — the darkness and the light are both alike to 
Him, before whom the night shineth as the day. My desire 
was, that nothing might be permitted to beguile them from the 
simplicity of the gospel of Christ, — that they might not rest 
satisfied with a mere hearsay knowledge of his name, as a 
Saviour, but come to the knowledge of his Holy Spirit in 
themselves, and know for themselves His gospel to be the 
power of God unto salvation. It was with me to query, what 



em '-. 



a profession of the Christian religion had done for th 
There had been time for some of them to have witnessed some- 
thing like fruit to be brought forth in themselves ; for without 
a change of heart is known, their religion will profit them 
nothing. I felt an earnest engagement of mind to turn them 
to the power of the Spirit of the Lord Jesus in their own 
hearts ; which would, if believed in and obeyed, cleanse them 
from sin, create in them a clean heart, and renew a right spirit 
within them. Although I had full opportunity to clear myself, 
yet so great was the stream of love that flowed towards the 
people of Hihifo, that after the meeting was over, I found no 
relief : the desire of my heart was as strong as ever, that they 
might not be beguiled by lifeless forms and shadows, from the 
simplicity that is in Christ, the living and eternal substance. 



576 CHAPTER XXXI. [1836. 

After spending some time with Solomon, the chief, who spread 
a table plentifully for our refreshment, accordino- to native 
custom, we repaired to the boat, and proceeded forthwith to the 
Henry Freeling. 

15th. — It was with difficulty that an opportunity could be 
found, on account of the increased number of natives upon 
the deck, to sit down together ; notwithstanding which, the 
way opened to our comfort. We understand that earthquakes 
frequently occur among these islands, at times so violent as 
to stop the clock at the mission-house. On First day last, 
whilst in the meeting appointed for the seamen of the fleet, 
and before standing up amongst them, a considerable shock 
was sensibly felt by the missionary families then present. 
Of this, I was not myself aware, although the frame work in 
the roof of the building we were in was heard to make a 
cracking noise at the time. Last Second day evening, about 
nine o 1 clock, another shock was witnessed at Neiafu, but was 
not perceived by us upon the water : we are told, however, 
that they are sometimes felt on board the shipping, and occa- 
sion a rumbling noise, as if the vessel was passing over a rugged 
rock, and sufficiently loud to alarm the crew. 

1 6th. — Eemained on board the fore part of the day, while 
Captain Keen and Charles, accompanied by Philemon an intel- 
ligent native, ascended Talau a considerable hill on the island 
of Vavau, to form a plan of Port Refuge, for the benefit of 
those who may follow us at a future day. From this point 
they were enabled with sufficient accuracy to describe the 
position of this group of islands, which are said to be one hun- 
dred and two in number, known by the name of Haafuluhau ; 
so that any stranger may direct his course to Port Refuge in 
perfect safety, by keeping a good look out, which is of course 
one of the means dictated by common prudence in such cases. 
The depth of water varies at the anchorage from sixteen to 
thirty-six fathoms, with holding-ground of sand and coral. 
From the direction in which the trade-winds usually blow, a 
vessel has generally to beat against it as soon as she comes 
round the southernmost bluff upon the main land of Vavau. 
The deepest water appears to be on the left hand, the whole 



LS36.] chapter xxxi. 577 

way up to the port ; the distance from the entrance point may- 
be from ten to twelve miles, and there is ample room for the 
largest ship to work with common care. In the evening went 
on shore to consult with John Thomas on the subject of leaving 
our cook, Pedro Nolasko, a Spaniard, who is desirous of getting 
to the Fiji Islands, having heard of the probability of meeting 
with a vessel bound to Manilla, his native place. As he is a 
man of good character, - and not likely by his conduct to injure 
the natives, and there being no objection in the minds of the 
missionaries and the authorities of the place, there seems no 
good reason for refusing to discharge him, agreeably with his 
wishes ; more particularly, as we have just taken on board 
one of the survivors from the wreck of the Active schooner : 
this man was intended to work for his food while with us, but 
he will now come in for regular wages, by filling up the 
vacancy which the discharge of Pedro Nolasko will occasion. 

19ih. — On Seventh day, with the exception of taking exer- 
cise on shore towards evening, we were employed on board 
through the day ; yesterday, (First dai/,) remained on board all 
day with our own people, having no attraction to the shore. 
It was a season of self-abasedness and poverty ; but however 
humiliating, I trust not altogether unprofitable, and one that I 
have found not unfrequently to precede, and perhaps prepare 
for further service in the Great Master's time ; for which the 
prayer of my heart is, that I may be ready ; confiding in Him, 
w T hose power can raise up from utter weakness, and make strong 
for His use. To-day sailed the American ship Wiscasset, 
Captain Macey. This vessel was supplied with some tracts and 
writings of Friends. This evening it seemed best to arrange 
to attend a native meeting at Matika, a few miles from hence ; 
the greater part of which distance can be performed by boat. 
As John Thomas was not likely to be at liberty, John Hobbs 
kindly offered to supply his place as interpreter ; but the situa- 
tion of the neighbourhood is such, that the weather must be 
consulted in the first place. 

20th. — The weather apparently likely to answer for our going 
to Matika ; and John Hobbs having arrived with a suitable 
crew of natives, by nine o'clock we proceeded on our way, 

2p 



578 CHAPTER XXXI. [1836. 

and landed at Feletoa before eleven o'clock a. m. Here we 
got a cool resting place, and after an early dinner proceeded to 
Matika. Feeling unwell soon after, I was not in very good 
trim for moving forward in the hottest part of the day, nor for 
attending the appointed meeting ; but I well knew that He 
who had sustained me thus far, could strengthen me at his 
pleasure, to stand before the people for His great name's sake. 
Having now an interpreter, to whose abilities and qualifica- 
tions in the native language I was a stranger, it seemed like 
venturing upon untried ground. I soon found that I had no 
cause to fear on this head, but rather to dread the quickness 
with which he at once comprehended the drift of what I had to 
say, and interpreted it to the people ; however, although every 
sentence as soon as uttered, was rapidly conveyed to them 
without hesitation on his part, yet with thankfulness I can 
say, that I never felt less difficulty in getting on. I had to 
caution them particularly, not to be deceived in looking without 
for that which is only to be found within ; that so they might 
come to the knowledge of Christ, the light of whose Holy Spirit 
shineth in every heart ; and that they might believe in it to 
the saving of the soul, — that so Christ may dwell richly in their 
hearts by faith, — that He might be theirs, and they might be 
His, in His Father's kingdom for ever. It was a comfort- 
able meeting, arid ended well. Great is my desire for these 
people, that their hearts may be directed to the love of God, 
and to the patient waiting for Christ. How great the respon- 
sibility of those, who take upon themselves to introduce the 
religion of Jesus amongst a simple-hearted people, lest its 
beautiful simplicity be hid from them, by forms and shadows 
of man's own invention ! 

21st. — This morning the Mary Anne, of London, sailed for 
the whaling grounds ; sundry tracts were furnished for the crew, 
also a French Testament for one of them, a native of France. 
A few days ago a native offered amongst other articles for sale, 
a copy of the Holy Scriptures in English. I found on exa- 
mining it, that it had been given by the Seamen's Bible Society 
in London, probably to some ship's library. I purchased this 
book for about eightpence, merely to show the necessity of in- 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXI. 579 

serting, not only the donor's name, or that of the institution by 
which it had been bestowed, but the name of the person to 
whom it was originally given, or the ship's library to which it 
belonged : it would, I think, help to deter from such a mis- 
application. It is very probable that this bible had belonged to 
the library of the Mary Anne, of London, but this was not 
specified, or it might have been returned to that vessel before 
she left the port, and have served to prevent a similar occurrence 
in future. We find that sailors, our own not excepted, regard- 
less of the future, do not hesitate to give articles for a shell or 
two, far exceeding the value of them ; they will part with a 
woollen jacket, as a thing perfectly useless to them, because at 
that particular time, in a hot climate, it is not wanted ; and the 
natives will accept of almost any thing for their shells. If books 
of a pernicious tendency in the English language are found in 
the hands of the natives, such are immediately destroyed ; and 
books of various kinds fall into their hands when bartering with 
the shipping ; they are pleased when they can obtain writing- 
paper, pen and ink, or a pencil. 

Ninth Month 22nd. — Although many natives were on board, 
we were enabled to set aside our bartering, and sit down to 
wait upon the Lord, but it required firm struggling to get into 
quiet introversion of mind ; towards the end a little of that 
strength was witnessed, by which only the foes of a man's 
house can be cast out, and himself left in peaceable possession. 

24th. — Both yesterday and to-day, with the exception of tak- 
ing the needful exercise on shore, as the sun declined, we were 
engaged on board getting things into train, with the prospect of 
shortly sailing for the Harbai group of Tonga isles. Since it 
has come to my knowledge that the strength of these islands 
is to be assembled at Lifuka with king George of Vavau, and 
Josiah (Tubou), the king of Tongataboo, I have not seen the 
way open for me to move in any direction but to Lifuka ; and 
the more I have dwelt upon this subject, the more it appears 
to be the right track for me to pursue. Owing to existing cir- 
cumstances connected with persons and places, it doth not seem 
practicable for me to complete the object which brought us to 
Vavau, of visiting the people, before the end of this month ; 

2 p 2 



580 CHAPTER XXXI. [1836. 

and allowing that it could be satisfactorily accomplished at an 
earlier period, it would be useless to sail for Tongataboo, as 
those competent for the important office of interpreter, will have 
left the island to join their brethren at the general assembly 
about to take place at Lifuka. My earnest desire is, to be found 
in the counsel of the will of our heavenly Father, to be pre- 
served in faithfulness and humble resignation thereunto, and 
favoured to possess my vessel in patience to the end of the race. 
Could I have contrived for myself, I should certainly not have 
selected Lifuka, as the Haabai group is a dangerous archipelago 
of small islands, shoals, and reefs, without any secure place of 
shelter from every wind that blows, and not the least dependence 
can be placed on the published charts of it. But if He that 
" bloweth with His wind, and the waters flow," is graciously 
pleased to direct our way amidst the lurking dangers of the 
deep which await a stranger vessel, who hath so mercifully and 
so often in appalling seasons said in effect, " It is I, be not 
afraid, - " — and this too accompanied with an evidence so indis- 
putably strengthening, that a poor helpless mortal could ex- 
claim in that humble faith and confidence which condescending 
heavenly love alone inspires, "It is the Lord,"" — all fear is 
then cast out, except what is filial. 

26th. — Yesterday (First day,) spent the day on board. 
Collected the sailors twice in the course of the day for devo- 
tional purposes. Engaged the fore-part of to-day on board, and 
in the afternoon went up to JNeiafu, to endeavour to arrange for 
visiting the natives on the north shore. The weather sultry 
and rainy, making the clay soil, of which the neighbourhood of 
the landing place is composed, almost impassable ; and the 
steep descent down to the boat extremely difficult and unsafe. 

27th. — Much rain during the night and this morning, which 
prevented my going on shore ; Charles landed for a short time 
opposite the vessel, but was soon compelled to return. About 
nine o'clock this evening, a shock of an earthquake was sensibly 
felt on board by the trembling of the vessef ; Captain Keen 
stepped upon one of the chain cables, by which we were riding 
at the time, when the shock was more evident, from the con- 
nection of the anchor with the earth at the bottom of the sea. 



] 836.] CHAPTER XXXI. 581 

This is the fourth shock that has been felt since our arrival at 
Port Refuge. Would that the earthly nature in the hearts of 
all around us, yea the world over, were so shaken, that that 
only which cannot be shaken might remain, to the praise and 
glory of God. 

Ninth Month 28#A. — Still rainy weather. John Hobbs called 
on board to-day, with whom an arrangement was made to visit 
a native meeting to-morrow afternoon, should the weather 
permit us to proceed and the people to collect. We learn from 
John Hobbs that the shock of the earthquake last evening, 
was the most severe he had known since his coming to these 
islands ; it was felt on board the American ship Mussel, quite 
as much as on board the Henry Freeling. 

29th. — In our solitary sitting this forenoon, we were favoured 
to witness a degree of strength sufficient for the day, to wrestle 
for the blessing. Soon after three o'clock, John Hobbs and 
ourselves set forward in our own boat, with six able natives to 
paddle ; on account of the falling tide we landed at a place 
much more distant from the meeting to which we were going, 
than would otherwise have been necessary. It was, however, 
much safer for the boat, with which it behoves us to use 
every precaution, to enable her to hold out to the end ; she is 
now leaky and much worse for wear, and was not a thoroughly 
good one when new. 

The heat of the afternoon made the extra walking very 
fatiguing ; and the current of air to which I was afterwards 
exposed, occasioned considerable pain in my head : but such 
was the engagement of my mind, that this bodily annoyance 
was little regarded. After resting awhile at a house built for 
the special purpose of accommodating the teachers, the meeting 
commenced ; and although I was as an emptied vessel, while 
the translation of my certificates was read : yet shortly after 
the reading concluded, my mouth was opened to turn the 
attention of the people to that Almighty power, which " is not 
far from every one of us, 11 dwelling in our hearts by his Holy 
Spirit, except we be reprobates ; "in whom we live and move 
and have our being. 11 He that abideth of old, with whom a 
thousand years are but as one day, and one day as a thousand 



582 CHAPTEK XXXI. [1836. 

years, — from everlasting to everlasting he is God, and changeth 
not. My desire for this people was, that they might become 
wise in heart, by seeking after that knowledge which is life 
eternal, through the operation of the Holy Spirit, which shines 
in every heart ; that they might inherit glory, and be numbered 
among those that shall shine as the brightness of the firma- 
ment, and with them that turn many to righteousness, as the 
stars for ever and ever. The gospel of the everlasting kingdom 
was freely preached to these dear people : it was a memorable 
season, and yielded peaceful relief to my mind. We reached 
our vessel soon after dark. What, indeed, can we render unto 
the Lord for all this ! being nothing ourselves and possessing 
nothing, but what we have received from Him, the God of love 
and praise. 

Tenth Month 1st. — Yesterday engaged on board most of the 
day, making ready for sailing for the Haabai. My attention 
has been drawn at times, in the course of yesterday and to-day, 
towards again attending the native meeting at Neiafu to-mor- 
row ; and John Thomas and Stephen Rabone calling on board 
this afternoon, afforded me an opportunity of mentioning the 
subject. John Thomas kindly agreed at once to make way 
for it, and offered his assistance as interpreter. Although so 
often a partaker of heavenly help and goodness, I am still 
imploring more ; being increasingly sensible of the want of it, 
when looking towards this meeting ; that the name of the Lord 
Jesus may be exalted, to the glory of God the Father. 

Having now every prospect of bending our course towards 
Lifuka, I deemed it expedient to make an offer to convey as 
many of the missionary families as inclined to go to the congress ; 
telling John Thomas, that if they were willing to put up with 
the want of accommodations to which they would be subjected 
in our small vessel, the whole of them might go with us. He 
expressed a fear that such a number would put us to great 
inconvenience ; but I told him, it was themselves that would 
have to suffer the inconvenience, as they would have literally 
to stow themselves as they could upon the cabin sofas and floor ; 
but, perhaps, we might not be out more than one or two nights, 
which would depend upon the wind. The distance is sometimes 



1836. J CHAPTER XXXI. 583 

perforrned in a few hours, when the trade-wind is strong and 
favourable. 

The shock of another earthquake was felt on the night of the 
29th ultimo. 

2nd. (First day.) — This morning I felt a very poor creature, 
both in body and mind; but "knowing in whom I have believed," 
and unto whom " all power in heaven and earth is given, 1 '' I 
prepared to attend the native meeting at Neiafu. We reached 
the mission-house before the bell rung ; and accompanied John 
Thomas to the meeting in due time. I sat for some time in a 
pew constructed for the missionaries ; and when John Thomas 
had finished speaking, I went and stood in front of the people, 
upon the base on which the pulpit is erected. John Thomas 
then came down to me, and a general silence prevailed over the 
assembly, which was large, until broken by myself with the 
words ; — " Watch ye, stand fast in the faith, quit you like men, 
be strong. 1 ' The burden which rested upon my mind was, that 
these people might become the Lord's people, formed for him- 
self, to show forth his praise, — that they might become his 
children, and be taught of Him ; for all the sons and daughters 
of men, which form His church, are taught of the Lord him- 
self : in righteousness they are established, and great shall be 
their peace. — That they might indeed be sheep of the one fold, 
and of the one great and heavenly Shepherd, hear his voice, be 
known of him, and follow him ; and thus be enabled indivi- 
dually to say, from blessed experience, " The Lord is my 
shepherd ; I shall not want. He maketh me to lie down in 
green pastures ; he leadeth me beside the still waters. He 
restoreth my soul ; he leadeth me in the paths of righteousness 
for His name's sake." But the sheep must first learn to know 
the voice of the great Shepherd, when they hear it, from the voice 
of a stranger ; that so they may follow him with safety whither- 
soever he leadeth : those that are the sheep of his fold know 
him, and are known of him. " My sheep," said Christ, " hear 
my voice, and I know them, and they follow me : and I give 
unto them eternal life ; and they shall never perish, neither 
shall any man pluck them out of my hand : My Father, 
which gave them me, is greater than all ; and no man is able 



584 CHAPTER XXXI. [1836. 

to pluck them out of my Father's hand." Thus, the security 
and blessedness of the Lord's children, which compose his 
church, are set forth by its holy Head, the Lord Jesus, that 
great Shepherd of the sheep : and there is no other way for 
any of us to become of this happy number, but that of sitting 
under the teaching of His Holy Spirit, to learn of Him, to know 
His voice and be known of Him, and be His sheep and follow 
Him. He will teach us humility, meekness, and lowliness of 
heart. Such are formed for himself, do show forth His praise, 
and glorify Him before men, by producing the fruit of the Spirit 
in the sight of those around them ; openly declaring by life and 
conversation, that the gospel of Christ is the power of God 
unto salvation, even to those who beforetime were in darkness, 
hateful and hating one another. I was largely opened among 
them; and if it was possible to recapitulate all that was 
uttered, w T ords would still fall short, and fail to describe the 
heart-tendering solemnity which crowned the meeting. To- 
wards the conclusion when about saying farewell to these dear 
people, as one never to see their faces again, that Almighty 
power which alone can soften the heart was eminently con- 
spicuous ; tears could not be restrained, but silently and 
undisguisedly rolled down the swarthy cheeks of the sons and 
daughters of this isle of the ocean. 

3rd. — Early in the morning the Henry Freeling unmoored, 
and prepared for sailing : by twelve o'clock the whole of the 
missionary families, with their servants and luggage being on 
board, we left the well-sheltered harbour of Port Refuge ; and 
retracing our course through the maze of islands into the open 
ocean, stretched away from the shore of Vavau. A large 
number of the natives attended to the last, and hung round the 
sides of our vessel until compelled to let go their hold, evincing 
sincere regret at her departure. One of the chiefs of the island 
of Otea, named Noah, a noble man in person, with whom we 
were particularly acquainted, and whom we highly esteemed, 
wept aloud when he left us, and was heard when the canoe 
was at a considerable distance. He was affected by the whole 
circumstance of parting with all his friends ; but principally on 
account of losing an adopted daughter, who was leaving Vavau 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXI. 585 

for Tongataboo : she had been for a long time an inmate of the 
mission-house. Our passengers consisted of John Thomas, 
Stephen Eabone, John Spinney, John Hobbs, (going to 
reside at Lifuka,) and William A. Brooks, with their fami- 
lies, in all eighteen persons, besides nine domestics. We had 
also William Bunubunu, nephew of the late Finau the 
conqueror of these islands in former days, selected by King 
George, as our pilot for the Haabai group. Soon after getting 
fairly out to sea, the whole of our guests, except two of the 
youngest children, became sick; and some of them remained so 
the whole time. The wind became unfavourable in the night, 
and preveuted our seeing the isle of Aano next morning as 
was calculated upon. [Haanna in the Map V\ 

4th. — When morning came, it was found that we had drifted 
towards the island of Kao, in appearance a lofty mountain of 
regular conic shape rising out of the sea, and evidently of vol- 
canic origin. By ten o'clock a. m., the island of Toofoa was 
fairly opened, and the action of the volcano at the north 
end plainly to be seen, vomiting clouds of smoke into the 
atmosphere, which occasionally burst forth with increased 
strength. It was soon ascertained that getting to Lifuka by 
night, as before anticipated, was quite impracticable, as the 
wind continued to baffle us ; but shifting two or three points 
after midnight, we fetched well to windward, and after making 
one short tack at the entrance of the reef, before ten o'clock 
were favoured safely to anchor off the island of Lifuka, abreast 
of the settlement of Mua, in only three and a half fathoms 
water, on Fourth day the 5th instant. Any vessel less man- 
ageable than the Henry Freelmg, might easily have got upon 
the reef, the entrance is so narrow and intricate, in the worst 
part of which she had to tack. It is probable that few vessels 
so large as ours ever anchored upon the same ground; and 
none, however small, ought to venture without a competent 
pilot on board. It is close to this spot that the Port cm Prince 
was wrecked, perhaps thirty years ago : some of her remains 
are visible at this day, and are frequently dug out of the sand 
by the king's order, for the sake of the copper bolts, &c. Of 
recent date, the Snapper was cut off by the natives and lost 



586 CHAPTER XXXI. [1836. 

upon an adjoining reef, not far from Mua. Soon after we had 
anchored, Charles Tucker, the resident missionary at this place 
came off, bringing with him James Watkin, who had arrived 
the preceding day from his station on the island of Tongataboo. 
A double canoe was procured, which took the whole of our 
passengers and luggage at once to the shore : they were 
safely landed by eleven o'clock, to their great relief. The 
natives soon began to visit us, well pleased to see a vessel at 
anchor off the island, as it is but seldom that such a circum- 
stance occurs. 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXII. 587 



CHAPTER XXXII. 

ISLAND OF LIFUKA NATIVE MEETING — DISTRIBUTION OF BIBLES, &C. 

VISIT OF THE KING MEETING WITH THE MISSIONARIES 

SAIL FOR TONGATABOO ANCHOR OFF THE SETTLEMENT AT 

NUKUALOFA LETTER FROM THE WESLEYAN MISSIONARIES 

DISTRIBUTION OF CLOTHING AND MEDICINES — VISIT TO THE 

HEATHEN SETTLEMENT AT MUA RESTRAINING INFLUENCE OF 

THE MISSIONARIES NATIVE MEETING AT NUKUALOFA. 

Tenth Month 6th. — This morning early, a turtle of prodigious 
size was sent on board as a present from Josiah Tubou, the king 
of Tongataboo, who had arrived here from that island. In 
the forenoon the weather became quite stormy, and the wind 
coming in from the westward, made it uneasy riding in the bay. 
Charles and myself sat down together as usual to wait upon the 
Lord, though in much poverty and weakness. At noon it threat- 
ened to blow strong ; but shortly afterwards the atmosphere 
became more tranquil. There was not so much to be appre- 
hended from the anchor and cables not holding the vessel, as 
from the danger of striking on the rocky bottom, had the swell 
from the ocean been permitted to come in upon us. The hur- 
ricanes which we are told occasionally occur here, are very 
awful, levelling with the earth houses, trees, &c, before their 
tremendous blast ; and they generally, if not always, blow 
from the westward, the only quarter from which we have any 
thing to fear at this anchorage, as the land and the reefs are a 
shelter on every side, but this ; but the Lord's power is the 
same here as in every other place — " mighty to save and to 
deliver" out of every trouble and distress. 

7th. — This morning the natives thronged our decks with 
trifling shells for barter; but the poor creatures have very 
little in their possession to offer. The last violent hurri- 



588 CHAPTEK XXXII. [1836. 

cane with which they were visited, destroyed their bread- 
fruit trees, &c. to considerable extent, and materially injured 
their yams, upon which they are usually supported ; and from 
this serious calamity they have not yet recovered. Many of 
them are now subsisting upon the fern and tea-tree roots ; but it 
is expected that in a few weeks' 1 time, the present complaints of 
famine will be banished by an abundant supply of yams, sweet 
potatoes, &c. In the afternoon we visited the mission-house 
by invitation. While there it was with me to propose having 
an opportunity afforded of seeing the people, when collected at 
their morning meeting next First day. On inquiring about 
some one to interpret what I might have to say to the people, 
James Watkin the missionary then present from Tongataboo, 
was proposed to undertake that part of the work, to which he 
kindly and readily assented. May the Lord be graciously 
pleased to magnify his power, and cause this stranger and 
myself to be faithful to Him, in performing each his office ; so 
that, " that life and immortality ,1 which " are brought to 
light by the glorious gospel," may be declared to the natives 
of Lifuka, and others assembled with them, to our Maker's 
praise. 

8th. — Engaged on board till late in the afternoon with the 
natives. It is probable that the meeting to-morrow will be 
very large, as the inhabitants from the different islands which 
compose the Haabai group, are now assembled at this place, 
besides a vast number from the Haafuluhau group, and Ton- 
gataboo. Oh ! that the Master of assemblies may be there. 
To Him, who only knoweth my motive for coming amongst 
them, I commend them and myself ; humbly praying for help 
in the needful time, lest the cause of truth and righteousness 
should suffer in such weak and feeble hands 

9th. (First day.) — Proceeded towards the shore at an early 
hour. We were met on landing by a swarm of young natives, 
who appeared to be on the look out for us. In half an hour 
the first bell rung to assemble the people : this bell might have 
been spared, as the large meeting-house was filled, and a mul- 
titude still outside, when we passed by on our way from the 
boat to the mission-house : another extensive building was 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXII. 589 

also filled, not far from the largest. The natives were indeed 
gathered together to an extent, which we have not before 
witnessed in the Friendly Islands. 

James Watkin kindly conducted me through the concourse 
of people, into an enclosed place in front of the pulpit on a level 
with the floor : here I remained, until the interval arrived for 
me to take a station by the side of my interpreter, to be in 
readiness to minister to the people, as way should open. I 
felt no hesitation in going up into the pulpit, believing that even 
when the most advantageous position was chosen, but a small 
portion of the people in comparison with the whole collected 
about the house, would distinctly hear what was said ; these 
buildings are open at the side, a circumstance which the nature 
of the climate requires, and which is a special advantage at 
these times, as before has been witnessed by us at Vavau. A 
general stillness now prevailed over this large assembly, which 
I thought might be occasioned in the first place, by the novelty 
of two persons appearing in the pulpit, both standing, and 
both silent. It was not long however before I had to turn 
their attention to Him, unto whom the cattle on a thousand 
hills belong ; before whom, the secret thoughts of every heart 
are laid open. He seeth us as we really are, born in sin, 
and laden with iniquity, helpless, and utterly unable of our- 
selves to do any thing for ourselves ; for, as men and mortals, 
we possess nothing, and are as nothing ; and yet such is the 
love of God even to a guilty world, that of the fulness of His 
Son Christ Jesus the Lord, " have we all received, and grace 
for grace." "God so loved the world that he gave his only be- 
gotten Son, that whosoever believeth in him should not perish, 
but have everlasting life. 11 Who among us can contemplate the 
wondrous mercy and unutterable love, wherewith God so loved 
the world, without feeling a desire to pour forth a grateful 
acknowledgment of " thanks be unto God for his unspeakable 
gift ;" — even the gift of His Son Jesus Christ, by whom came 
that grace which hath appeared unto all men ; by which grace 
alone are we saved from sin and from the wrath to come, 
through faith, and that not of ourselves; for we have nothing, 
and are only sinners. It is through faith which cometh from 



590 CHAPTEK XXXII. [1836. 

the Son of G-od, who loved us, and gave himself for us ; who 
is also " the author and finisher"" of that one true faith, which 
worketh by love, and purifieth the hearts of those who believe 
in its saving, cleansing power ; which giveth the victory 
over the evil propensities of fallen nature, and over every 
temptation of the devil. 

The word of the Truth of the gospel flowed freely to these 
dear people ; for whom my desire was, that they might not 
rest satisfied with making an empty profession of religion, but 
" believe in the Lord Jesus Christ, and be saved." Although 
at the close of the meeting I felt as if my strength was renewed 
for the work, I should, without such sustaining help, have been 
dismayed at the burden which still rested upon my mind. 
After the meeting broke up many of the people flocked about 
us ; amongst others, I shook hands with an aged female of 
rank, considered by the people higher than their king : 
king George himself was one of those who helped to carry 
her on their shoulders — she being unable to walk any con- 
siderable distance. Her placid countenance, and manner 
altogether, bespoke that she had good will in her heart 
towards us ; and the remembrance of the interview, though 
short, always brings with it a feeling of peaceful tranquillity to 
my mind. 

11th. — Yesterday, engaged on board, bartering for the com- 
modities brought by the natives, not being willing to turn them 
back, although what they brought was often almost useless. 
In the afternoon landed and conveyed to be deposited in the 
mission-house, twenty-four English Testaments, and six Bibles, 
six Spanish Testaments, six French ditto, and six Por- 
tuguese ditto ; one French Bible was given to Charles Simeon, 
a native of France, now settled here. Whaling vessels and 
others, not unfrequently at the present day, fall in among the 
different groups of these islands ; by some on board such vessels, 
a copy of the Scriptures is often prized, as we have experienced ; 
and individuals are here and there to be found, of different 
nations, whose lot has been cast among the natives from a 
variety of causes ; some by shipwreck, others by sickness, left 
by the ships to return if they can, or remain the rest of their 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXII. 591 

lives among the natives, wandering from island to island. 
Some marry and bring up children among them. If such 
understand a handicraft business, as that of blacksmith or car- 
penter, ship or boat builder, &c, and there is no ardent spirit 
to be procured, they generally fare well amongst the islanders. 
To-day the natives have furnished a supply of hogs ; but 
it is almost impossible to procure food, except the ninita, 
(papaw) which remains but for a short time in a wholesome 
state. At present the poor people are very destitute of the 
vegetable food on which they are accustomed to subsist, and 
frequently complain and make signs of being hungry ; but it 
is out of our power to supply their wants : they never think of 
killing a hog for themselves, they are mostly reared for sale 
and for the use of the chiefs. In the afternoon went on 
shore with a present for king George, consisting of a large 
chest of tools, a cask of flooring nails, and a ship's compass, 
with sundry articles for his queen Charlotte. Some articles 
had already been given to Josiah Tubou, the king of Tonga- 
taboo, when on board the Henry Freeling. To-day we took 
with us some things considered suitable for his queen Mary, 
so that no preference might appear on our side, more particu- 
larly as Josiah Tubou is an older man, and much higher in 
rank. King George is however very assiduous in giving him 
the preference in every thing. 

13th. — At two o'clock p. m., Charles Tucker, the resident 
missionary at Lifuka, and his wife, accompanied king George 
and his wife Charlotte on board to dinner. On taking our 
seats at the table, I told Charles Tucker that it was our practice 
to endeavour to feel a grateful tribute arise in our hearts to 
Him, from whom all our blessings come ; they were of course left 
at liberty : when Charles Tucker called upon the king to ask a 
blessing, which he did in a serious manner. The parties were 
greatly amused with a set of William Barton's Scripture views, 
&c. ; and I believe were pleased with their visit. We landed 
towards evening, and walked to the other side of the island for 
exercise ; this part is wholly enclosed by a coral reef, which 
enables the people to procure fish in almost any weather. 
When looking towards visiting Lifuka, I thought as the prin- 



592 CHAPTER XXXII. [18*36. 

cipal part of the Tongataboo people, with their ruler, would be 
assembled here, that I might not have to proceed to the latter 
island ; but I do not find that this will be sanction enough for 
me to stay away from it, as it has dwelt much upon my mind 
for several days past ; I therefore believe it safest for me to 
go thither, however opposed to my own inclination : if the 
Lord's presence does but go with me, it is enough; for in His 
presence only there is life, and at His right hand durable riches 
and righteousness, yea pleasures for evermore. The desire and 
prayer of my heart, and I believe it may be added, my greatest 
delight also, is to be found labouring to exalt his great and 
adorable name, and to promote the extension of the blessed 
Saviour's kingdom in the hearts of mankind. On returning to 
the boat in the evening, several of the missionaries were upon 
the beach, when I told James Watkin that I could not pass by 
Tongataboo, offering him a passage with us to his family at 
Nukualofa. Fearing to let the members of the mission sepa- 
rate without requesting a select opportunity with them, I told 
them that I should like us to have an hour or so together, in 
the presence of the Most High, before they separated ; this 
proposal was accepted with openness, and every thing made to 
give way for bringing it about : to-morrow evening at six or 
seven o'clock was mentioned as the probable time for our meet- 
ing together. When we got on board I told Captain Keen, 
that as matters then stood with me, I saw nothing in the way 
to prevent our going towards Tongataboo, and that the water 
casks had better be filled up to-morrow, as the beginning of the 
ensuing week might be looked to as the probable time of our 
leaving this place. It is expected that the Vavau missionaries 
will return .in two or three days from this time. 

] 4th. — Engaged on board bartering with the natives during 
the fore-part of the day. A large canoe came alongside before 
dinner with a present from king George, viz., six spears, two 
bundles of native cloth, a large floor mat, and two orange cow- 
ries, which in days past were considered the most valuable 
ornaments worn by the rulers of these islands, and are very 
rarely met with at present. The bearer of these articles is a 
Portuguese, but understands English ; he said that the king 



1836.] chapter xxxn. 593 

was desirous to obtain from me an English spelling-book. This 
token of the king's good will was verbally acknowledged, and 
the messenger himself presented with a Testament in the Portu- 
guese language. My mind in the midst of many interruptions 
attendant upon bartering with the natives and other duties, 
had, to sustain a heavy load of exercise, in the prospect of meet- 
ing the missionaries and their families in the evening, which to 
my view was no small matter. 

Landed in the afternoon, and drank tea at the mission-house. 
About the time agreed upon, the whole of the families, except 
the wife and young children of John Hobbs, (whose numerous 
family could not be left alone,) assembled in a large room in 
Charles Tucker's house, and sat down together in silence. I 
endeavoured to keep my mind staid in humble dependence 
upon Him, who commands the morning, and causeth the day- 
spring to know his place ; and after dwelling a considerable 
time in silence, it was with me to bow the knee in supplication 
unto Him, who inhabiteth the praises of eternity, and "covereth 
himself with light as with a garment;" — and to ask in the name 
of our Eedeemer, that His life-giving presence might be near on 
the occasion, to subdue in us every thing that stands opposed to 
His righteous principle of light, life, and love; — that His power 
alone may rule, and preserve our hearts, &c. After sitting down 
again, a quiet season was vouchsafed, though a further time 
of silence was to be passed. There seemed much to travail 
under before the way was fairly opened for me, to declare 
the indispensable necessity for each of us to know for ourselves 
the will of God, seeing that Christ has said, — " not every one 
that sayeth, Lord, Lord, shall enter into the kingdom of heaven ; 
but he that doeth the will of my Father which is in heaven." 
That before we are in a state to be entrusted with the knowledge 
of the Divine will, the will of the creature must be laid low, 
and subjected to the will of the great Creator ; our bodies must 
become living sacrifices, holy, acceptable to God ; we must be. 
altogether transformed, and our minds renewed by the power of 
the Spirit of the Lord Jesus, believed in, and operating in us, 
" that we may prove what is that good and acceptable, and 
perfect will of God,"— as defined by the apostle Paul to the 

2 Q 



594 CHAPTER XXXII. [1836. 

Romans. Every thing depends upon this, — to know the will 
of God in the first place, and then to do it. " To obey is better 
than sacrifice, and to hearken than the fat of rams. 11 It is those 
only who do the will of the Father, that shall know of the doc- 
trine of His well beloved Son, in whom he is well pleased. It 
was with me particularly to urge this upon all present, both 
male and female, for both are one in Christ ; — that all might, 
by implicit obedience, know for themselves the will of God, and 
Christ to be unto them wisdom and righteousness, sanctification 
and redemption. The whole of our Lord's precepts must be 
regarded as binding upon His followers ; we cannot choose for 
ourselves, by selecting some parts and leaving others. His 
example must be followed in every thing, in every part, to the 
denial of self in all things. " He that will be my disciple must 
deny himself, take up his daily cross and follow me, 1 ' — these 
are the terms which He prescribes ; we must take up a daily 
cross to our own corrupt wills and inclinations. It seldom 
occurs, that the path chosen for us, or the thing required of 
us, is what we, as creatures, should choose for ourselves, or 
can very readily yield obedience to ; it is against the nature of 
flesh and blood, — it does not suit our inclination ; if it were not 
so, and our will was consulted, there would be no cross to take 
up, — it would be a sacrifice which costs us nothing. We must 
be willing to part with and to suffer the loss of all things for 
Christ's sake ; and in following the great example which He 
hath left us, we must in no part thereof deny Him before men, 
nor be ashamed of Him and his words before men, lest He 
should also deny us, and be ashamed of us, before His Father 
and the holy angels, — according to His own awful denuncia- 
tion against such unworthy followers. 

It was a solid and solemn season, the power of Truth was over 
all. Before leaving the shore, I mentioned the probability of my 
again attending a meeting of the natives on the following First 
day morning, to which no difficulty seemed likely to present. 

15th. — In the afternoon we went on shore, with a view to 
getting things so settled as to insure no failure in my seeing 
the natives to-morrow. James Watkin again kindly undertook 
the office of interpreter ; and I returned on board satisfied with 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXII. 595 

the arrangements agreed upon, and strengthened to look for- 
ward with some degree of confidence and resignation. 

16th. (First day.) — This morning went to Charles Tucker's 
house, to wait until the natives were collected together. On 
the way was much gratified to learn, that it was concluded to 
dispense with many of the exercises usual at their meetings on 
First days. This circumstance had come about without my 
knowledge, although I had before-time mentioned, that the 
meetings lasted longer than the people were able to bear ; being 
densely stowed upon the floor, almost without a circulation of 
air, in a tropical climate. After I had taken my station by 
the side of James Watkin, a general silence prevailed over the 
multitude assembled ; and in due time my mouth was opened to 
revive in their hearing, that — " Whoso is wise, and will observe 
these things, even they shall understand the loving-kindness of 
the Lord."" But the first thing to be done in order to partake 
of the Lord's loving-kindness, which is better than life, is to 
believe in the Lord Jesus Christ ; without this, none can behold 
his wonderful works, nor praise Him, for his great goodness to 
the children of men. When the Saviour of the world was 
on earth, and dwelt among the sons of men, he did not many 
mighty works in some places, because of the unbelief of the 
people ; and it is the same at this day. There is no way unto 
God the Father, but by the Son ; and we can never know the 
Son, to be " the way, the truth, and the life," unless we 
believe in His power to save to the uttermost, all those that are 
willing to come unto God by him. — " For he that cometh to 
God, must believe that He is, and that He is a rewarder of 
them that diligently seek him. 1 ' Without faith it is impossible 
to please him : but how great is his goodness to the humble 
believer that feareth him, — to them that wait for him, — to the 
soul that seeketh him. Yea, eternal life is the reward of all 
those, who by patient continuance in well-doing, thus seek the 
Lord with believing hearts. While tribulation, anguish, indig- 
nation and wrath, will be the portion of unbelievers, and of 
those who are contentious ; who disregard the shillings of the 
true light that lighteth every man that cometh into the world, 
who obey not the truth, or the manifestations of the Spirit of 

2 q 2 



596 CHAPTER XXXII. [1836. 

truth, which convinceth of sin. My heart was enlarged, and 
the way fairly opened before me, to proclaim amongst the 
people the truth as it is in Jesus ; and to tell them that 
salvation was nigh unto them that day : — it depended upon 
themselves, — it remained with themselves, — to " believe on the 
Lord Jesus Christ and be saved." Not merely to believe that 
he came in the flesh, and died for the sins of the whole world ; 
but to believe in the coming of his Holy Spirit into their hearts, 
to purge away their sins, and save them from the wrath to 
come, while the day of their visitation is mercifully lengthened 
out. In the same love which brought me among them, I bade 
them all an affectionate farewell in the Lord. 

Many of them with whom we were personally acquainted, 
flocked round us to shake hands, amongst others, the king and 
his principal chiefs. And now believing myself clear of the 
island, we paid a short and final visit to the mission-house, and 
then returned to the vessel, having no other prospect before me, 
but that of sailing in the morning towards Tongataboo.* 

* The following are copies of letters received while at the island of 
Lifuka : — 

< Lifuka, October 10th, 1836. 
' Dear Sir, 
' We, the Wesleyan missionaries, assembled at our annual district 
meeting, beg leave sincerely to congratulate you upon the hitherto 
successful prosecution of your missionary voyage ; and to express the 
unfeigned pleasure we feel in seeing you in this part of the great mission- 
ary field ; and we trust that your efforts to promote the knowledge of 
the true God, will have had the blessing of God ; and that you will have 
the pleasure of seeing at the right hand of the Most High, many who, 
from among the Gentiles have been turned from darkness to light, by 
your instrumentality. 

' We beg leave too to offer you our best thanks for the kindness you 
have manifested in bringing five of our members, with our families, to this 
place ; and we pray that He, who does not forget the smallest kindness 
done to the least of His disciples, may reward you with every needful 
blessing, both for soul and body : and finally grant unto you and yours, 
Eternal Life, through Jesus Christ our Lord. 

' Signed on behalf of the meeting. 

* John Thomas, Chairman. 
' James Watejn, Secretary.' 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXII. 597 

17th. — Unmoored at the earliest dawn of day. Soon after 
we were ready, our passenger James Watkin came on board, 
with the whole body of missionaries then at Lifuka. Their 
stay was necessarily short indeed, scarcely longer than while 
they delivered up their letters and parcels, for not a few of 
their friends and connexions in Sydney and England. On 
their departure the anchor was weighed, and we immediately 
proceeded towards the opening in the reef ; making all sail, if 
possible, to clear the principal dangers of the Haabai group, 
before nightfall. We had a pilot with us, a native of Tongata- 
boo, well acquainted with the different channels ; but who could 
not understand many words of English. The wind became 

' Lifuka, Haabai, October 17th, 1836*. 
' Dear Friend, 

' We, as Wesley an Methodist missionaries, labouring in the Friendly 
Islands, beg leave at this our annual meeting, to express our sentiments 
to you, in reference to your visiting the various mission stations in these 
seas. 

' We admire the principle which induced you to sacrifice the blessings 
of civilized society, and to quit the land of your fathers, in order to wit- 
ness the glorious effects of the gospel among heathen nations, and preach 
among the Gentiles the unsearchable riches of Cbrist. 

' We doubt not but you have been richly rewarded in your own mind 
for all the sacrifices you have made, and the privations you have been 
called to endure while prosecuting the great work in which you are 
engaged. We rejoice that the Lord has so signally blessed you hitherto 
in your undertaking ; and pray that his kind Providence may still pre- 
side over j^ou, and make your way plain. 

' We have been very much gratified by your visit to this part of the 
great mission field. We hail you as a fellow-labourer in the gospel, and 
wish you God's speed. 

' The very great kindness which you and your excellent son have 
manifested to us in a variety of instances, has produced a deep impression 
on our minds ; be assured you will long live in our affection ; and we 
hope, that your addresses and conversation will produce their desired effect. 

' And now, as you are about to take your departure from this place, 
we commend you to God, and take an affectionate farewell, until we 
shall meet in our Father's house above. We remain dear friend, 
* Yours affectionately, 



John Thomas, 
John Hoffs, 
James Watkin, 
Charles Tucker, 



William Allen Brooks, 
Stephen R a bone, 
John Spinney.' 



598 CHAPTER XXXII. [1836. 

more opposed at sun-set ; and instead of our being in tolerably- 
open water, we were entangled with the long and dangerous reef 
off the island of Anamooka ; and were at last compelled to run 
down to its leeward-most point, in order to get clear of its crags. 
Whilst the sound of the breakers thundering upon the reef could 
be heard, we were still within its reach ; but as the noise became 
fainter, we considered ourselves beyond its outermost point, and 
ventured to haul up to the south south-east, for the night. 

19th. — About ten o'clock were favoured to get sight of 
Eouaigee, owing to a strong current, which had, during the 
night, hurried us away to the eastward ; and the wind being 
strong, by noon the island of Tongataboo was distinctly to be 
seen, though the weather was thick and hazy. By two o'clock 
we were abreast of the settlement of Nukulofa, and were 
favoured to anchor safely in fourteen fathoms water, in a place 
well sheltered, except when the winds blow from the northward 
and westward : the north side of this island is one mass of 
reefs, rocks, and small islands. Twenty-two of these islands are 
in sight from the vessel ; and in several directions the surf 
breaks incessantly upon sunken reefs, which form the principal 
shelter between us and the main ocean. A brig under English 
colours was entering the narrow channel from the southward at 
the same time as ourselves ; but she took a different route from 
us, and anchored off a heathen settlement, several miles distant 
from Nukulofa : she proved to be the Guide, a Sydney whal- 
ing vessel in want of supplies. Soon after having anchored, a 
canoe arrived, and carried off our agreeable passenger and com- 
panion, James Watkin, whose wife could be seen on the shore 
waiting for her husband. Having had but little rest for the 
two past nights, we remained on board ; and the afternoon 
turning out wet, but few of the natives visited the vessel. It 
is indeed renewed cause of humble thankfulness to be again and 
again preserved amidst these dangerous and little frequented 
groups of the Friendly islands ; and particularly during our 
stay at Lifuka, where there were but few feet of water to spare 
between the rocks which were visible, and the bottom of our 
vessel. Had one of those furious hurricanes been permitted, 
which are occasionally witnessed by these islands, her destruc- 



1836.] chapter xxxir. 599 

tion would have been inevitable. The very day after our 
arrival, (as before noticed,) the wind came in upon us, and the 
atmosphere assumed for a time a threatening appearance : but 
after having been shown our critical and helpless situation, and 
renewedly made sensible that there was no refuge, but in that 
power which winds and waves obey, — the storm was hushed, the 
wind gradually shifted to its usual trade-quarter again ; and 
the rod was no more lifted up during our stay of about a fort- 
night. Some of the missionaries, who well knew our dangerous 
situation, were perhaps more alarmed for us than we ourselves 
were, who were comparatively ignorant of many circumstances, 
peculiar to that neighbourhood ; indeed, one of them afterwards 
acknowledged his not having been able to sleep on our account, 
when the change of weather took place, and the clouds gathered 
blackness in the stormy quarter. 

We find that a large portion of the inhabitants of Tongata- 
boo still retain their heathenish practices, and hitherto could 
never be prevailed upon to cast away their idols. They keep 
those who have embraced Christianity in constant alarm, and 
cause them to keep up a strict watch, and to live within strongly 
fortified places, as in a state of actual warfare. 

10th. — A few of the natives came off this morning with some 
poor hogs and a few vegetables ; but for these and for their 
shells, they have learned to ask very extravagant prices, which 
is owing we are told, to their having calls not very unfrequently 
from our men-of-war, who purchase largely their hogs, yams, 
shells, &c, without regard to price. In the forenoon Charles 
and myself sat down together in the cabin. It was a low season 
with me, as when the bridegroom is taken away ; towards the 
conclusion, a degree of strength was graciously afforded, although 
my soul's enemies were still felt to be lively and strong. At 
one o'clock p. m., landed for the first time at the settlement of 
Nukulofa ; but the tide being low we were compelled to sub- 
mit to being carried over a part of the reef, the water being too 
shallow to float our boat. James Watkin, with two children, 
was on the beach, ready to conduct us to his house ; and we 
spent an agreeable afternoon with his family. In the course 
of the time we were there, Abraham a brother of Josiah 



600 CHAPTER XXXII, [1836. 

Tubou the king, came in to see us : — he seems a serious steady 
man, from forty to fifty years of age, and is considered a 
religious character. The settlement of Nukulofa is surrounded 
by tall trees, so thickly planted, that a man cannot pass 
between them, having several sally-ports or entrance gates, 
which are secured at night in a substantial manner. Outside 
this wall of trees, which have rails connected with them, is a 
very deep trench, the coral taken out of which forms an 
additional barrier of defence outside the trees, and renders the 
approach almost inaccessible. It was pleasant to find that the 
missionaries have lived latterly entirely outside of these fortifi- 
cations, without any defence beyond a fence of slender cane- 
work. On returning to the vessel at sun-set, we found a large 
shark hanging to her side, which had been struck with a 
harpoon, by some whalers who had called on board. 

21st. — Landed in the afternoon and made our way to the 
mission-house, taking with us a variety of drugs, and numerous 
articles of clothing for children, for the use of James Watkin's 
family, with a quantity of dresses suitable for the native 
children. It is a great privilege, through the kindness of my 
dear friends in England, to be able to administer, in some 
degree, to the wants and comforts of those to whom I am most 
certainly very greatly indebted ; and without whose kind and 
brotherly assistance, my mouth, in most instances, must have 
been closed, as regards declaring the word of life in the dif- 
ferent islands. 

22nd. — In the morning some of the heathen part of the 
community came on board, and appeared pleased at the treat- 
ment they met with ; some articles they brought were pur- 
chased, by way of gaining their good-will rather than from 
necessity. Abraham, the king's brother spent a part of the 
day with us ; after dinner he was presented with a broad axe. 
Landed in the afternoon, and called upon Thomas Wellard, a 
person connected with the missionaries here, who is about to 
return to Australia, and has applied to me to give him and his 
wife a passage to Sydney ; I can give no answer, it being at 
present uncertain whether a direct course to Sydney from 
hence will be a peaceful one ; time must decide our future 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXII. 601 

destination. All that man can do, is to endeavour to stand in 
the counsel of the Divine will, and in humble resignation wait 
for its unfolding to the finite understanding ; and when once 
ascertained, then to do it with all his might. Go thou and do 
likewise, with all thy might, whoever thou art, who may per- 
haps read these fragments, inscribed by one who has trodden 
the narrow path before thee ; but who, however unworthy of 
the least of all the Lord's tender mercies, is at seasons com- 
forted in believing, that he is on the way to the heavenly city, 
none of whose inhabitants can say, " I am sick. 1 ' 

Finding the necessary arrangements had been made to open 
the way for my seeing the people to-morrow, when collected in 
their place of worship, we returned on board, and found some of 
the poor despised heathen waiting with a quantity of cocoa-nuts 
for sale. These nuts are such as are only fit for hogs, beino- 
too old and rancid for the use of the people, who are very short 
of food at this time. 

2'3rd. — On going to the meeting we found the house quite 
filled, with many standing and squatting outside, and others 
coming towards it. My truly kind and faithful interpreter, 
James Watkin, did every thing in his power to open the way 
clearly for me, by explaining the translation of the Morning 
Meeting's certificate, which he read. The reading was suc- 
ceeded by a time of silence, until I stood up, and was strength- 
ened to express the desire of my heart, that they might all come 
to the knowledge of the truth as it is in Jesus, and be saved. 
That a mere profession of the Christian religion would avail 
them nothing : truth in the inward parts, the Lord desired. 
They must come to know the Holy Spirit of the Lord Jesus, 
(which is the Spirit of Truth,) in their own hearts ; which the 
blessed Saviour promised should come in his name, even into the 
hearts of his followers, and abide with them for ever. I had to 
speak of the greatness of the love of God, in sending his Son 
into the world to save sinners. I doubted not that many of 
them believed in His coming in a body of flesh ; but I wanted 
them to believe in His coming in the Spirit into their hearts. 
I had to contrast their present state, — although it is to be feared, 
in too many instances, making but an empty profession of the 



602 CHAPTER XXXII. [1836. 

Christian religion, and remaining as yet, in great measure, 
strangers to the power of Christ, — with the dark and heathen- 
ish condition they formerly were in, without hope in the world ; 
laden with sin, hateful, and hating one another. Many of 
them had lived long enough to see and know the difference 
between the past and the present ; and to he able to discern what 
are the works of the flesh, and what is the fruit of the Spirit. 
" What fruit had ye then in those things whereof ye are now 
ashamed ? for the end of those things is death," — the sure wages 
of sin : "but the gift of Cod is eternal life by Jesus Christ our 
Lord." They were earnestly entreated, in the love of the gospel, 
to come to this precious gift of God, to turn inward to this 
light ; and they would find to their inexpressible comfort, that 
it is none other than the Holy Spirit of Him, of whom Moses 
in the law, and the prophets did write. It was a precious 
meeting: the people sat as if afraid to move, — such was the 
solemnity that prevailed over us. Power belongeth unto God ; 
and the praise and glory are his for ever. Remained on board 
in the afternoon with our own people. 

25th. — Fakafonua, a heathen chief, who can talk a little 
English, paid us a visit this morning. He had been invited to 
breakfast and was treated with kindness. He behaved in a 
solid manner, whilst a chapter in the Testament was read, and 
during silence. An axe was presented to him before leaving 
the vessel. In the afternoon it was with me to inquire, 
whether it was practicable to obtain an interview with these 
poor heathen people, who though apparently lost sight of, are 
still the sealed inheritance of the Lord Jesus. James Watkin 
said it might be done, and thought the best way would be to 
take them by surprise ; for if notice was given, as I had sug- 
gested, they would only get out of the way. It is true, it may 
only tend to exposure, without any beneficial results ; but this 
must be left : to omit, however, making an attempt to visit 
them, might make work for repentance at a future day, when 
the present opportunity presented to me is for ever gone by. 
May the Lord Most High prepare their hearts to receive, and 
mine to declare to them salvation by Christ Jesus. 

26th. — This morning the fleet from Lifuka made its appear- 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXII. 603 

ance, consisting of seventeen large double canoes. The first 
which reached Nukulofa had on board Josiah Tubou and king- 
George, (alias Taufaahau), the kings of Haabaiand Tongataboo. 
We afterwards, in company with James Watkin, attended the 
king's kava party, assembled in the neighbourhood to welcome 
the arrival of the different parties from Lifuka, who had been 
to attend the general congress. 

26th. — The kava ceremony was performed in the open air, 
the heads of the islands only being under cover, and the 
strangers, when any are present. The people were squatted 
in regular order, forming three sides of a square, in front of 
their king and chiefs. The fourth side was an open building, 
on the floor of which sat Josiah Tubou, with three of his principal 
men on each side of him, the admiral of the fleet directed the 
different proceedings of the meeting, but Taufaahau mingled 
among those who were to prepare the kava. As strangers, 
we were allowed to sit upon the floor of the building, with the 
rulers of the people, which afforded us full opportunity of seeing 
the whole process. The kava root, after being well crushed 
w T ith a heavy pole, was separated into small parcels, and handed 
to different individuals, whose names were proclaimed aloud, 
being chosen for having good clean teeth, and sweet breath. 
When they had chewed a mouthful of the root sufficiently, it 
was placed in a cup made from the banana leaf; these cups 
were finally collected, and their contents emptied into a large 
bowl, employed solely for the purpose. Water was then poured 
into the bowl, and when the chewed root was sufficiently satu- 
rated, a large bunch of very fine shavings, prepared from the 
purau bark was used as a strainer, and the liquor repeatedly 
passed through it, until clear of all apparent sediment. When 
pronounced ready, it is ordered to be served up, and every cup 
that is filled is retained, until the name of the person is declared 
to whom it should be handed. We had to take a share of the 
nauseous liquid, but of course, a little served the turn. Many 
heavy burdens of baked food, each brought upon a pole on the 
shoulders of two men, were laid in front of the king and chiefs ; 
who directed to whom a basket should be given. Many of 
these Were ordered to the men of the fleet, who were numerous 



604- CHAPTER XXXII. [1886. 

on the occasion, as the largest canoes carry at least an hundred 
men. Thanks were repeatedly given to those who had the 
fatiguing part of the work, especially to the kava makers, the 
food bakers, the chewers, the carriers, and the cup bearers. 
Returned on board as soon as the tide was high enough to carry 
us over the outer reef. 

27th. — Before eight o'clock a. m., James Watkin came on 
board, bringing with him five natives, to accompany us in an 
attempt to procure an interview with a body of the heathen, 
residing at the settlement of Mua, in a fortified position. We 
left the vessel forthwith, and proceeded towards the lagoon, at 
the entrance of which a bay of islands in miniature is formed. 
At eleven o'clock, we were abreast of the settlement ; but the 
boat grounding upon a sand-bank, at a considerable distance 
from the shore, one of the natives, Isaackee, waded to the 
landing-place, where a number of the people were collected on 
seeing the boat approach their territory. On being informed 
by Isaackee who we were, and what the object of our visit, 
they denied that the chief was at home. Our man returned to 
us and said the chief was not at home, and that Charles and 
myself might land, but not the missionary. Appearances on 
the shore were not very inviting, as the war clubs were plainly 
seen in the hands of some of the natives. James Watkin 
advised us not to land. I was not satisfied, however, without 
making some further attempt to get among them, and Isaackee 
was dispatched again, to say, that our coming on shore would 
be useless, without the missionary to interpret. He did not at 
all hesitate to go ; but, apprehending some mischief might arise, 
said, on leaving us, ' if they kill me, it will be nothing.' After 
a considerable parley had taken place, our man returned again, 
and said, that 'we might all come on shore;' but now James 
Watkin refused to accompany us, as the objection had appeared 
to be against him only. I felt a little disappointed, but con- 
cluded to land, at all events, without further debate. Charles 
and myself were then conveyed to the shore by our native boat's 
crew ; and although a considerable number of these people im- 
mediately flocked about us, I had not the least apprehension 
of danger, for the fear of man was cast out. We ascertained 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXII. 605 

afterwards that at least twenty muskets were pointed upon us, 
from behind a strong wooden fence, in readiness, had any affray 
taken place. We had in our hands only an umbrella each. 
We proceeded towards the settlement, under an escort of the 
people, until we had passed through the gates of the strong hold, 
and at length reached the habitation of the chief. We found 
him at home, and with a number of his people squatted ready 
upon the floor, waiting our arrival. The chief, perceiving me 
at a loss to distinguish him from the rest, moved aside to the 
log of an old tree, upon which we both sat down together : 
this, I thought, was correct on my part, from the signs that 
he made to me. He could talk a few words of English ; but 
could understand little that I said. I made him understand 
that they had a shipwrecked sailor among them, of whom I had 
heard previously, and made signs for him to be fetched ; but he 
did not make his appearance, and was probably ashamed of being- 
seen by his countrymen. The chief was evidently desirous of 
asking questions ; but I signified that without the missionary we 
could do nothing. Some people then had orders to go for James 
Watkin, who arrived in less than half an hour. During this 
interval the number of people increased, and a root of the kava 
plant was laid at my feet, as a token of good- will towards me. 
An offer of some of the liquor was then tendered, which I 
accepted, to show that I had nothing but good-will towards 
them. Some persons were then appointed to chew the root, 
and prepare this odious drink, which, in due time, was handed to 
me. I drank some of it before them, and handed the remainder 
to one of the people, which I had learned was a usual practice 
in such cases. James Watkin now entered into conversation 
with the chief, and believing that things were going on smoothly, 
I proposed that the translation of my certificate from the 
Morning Meeting should be read. It was patiently and atten- 
tively heard to the end, with ample explanation to elucidate the 
cause of my coming among them. I had then to tell them, 
that the God whom I serve is a God of love and mercy, and 
willeth not the death of a sinner, but rather that all men every 
where should repent, return unto Him and live ; and that such 
is the love of God to his creature man, that he gave His only 
begotten Son to save them from their sins, " that whosoever 



606 CHAPTER XXXII. [1836. 

believeth on Him should not perish, but have everlasting life. 1 ' 
That I was not satisfied to leave their island without telling them 
of the good things which God hath prepared for those that love 
him : I declared that salvation was come nigh unto them, — • 
yea, placed within their reach, and that by Jesus Christ ; — 
He is Lord of all ; through the shedding of whose precious 
blood the gift of the Holy Spirit was received for every mortal, 
whether son or daughter, — for the whole human race, — even for 
the rebellious. I told them, that I did not come among them 
to persuade them to turn to this way of life or that way of life ; 
but to turn them from the darkness they were in to the light 
of Christ, " from the power of Satan unto God.' 11 To this Holy 
Spirit I desired that their hearts might be directed, and to the 
patient waiting for Christ, that they might know Him to be in 
them, " who liveth and abideth for ever."" The above is the 
substance of what I had to express among them ; and though 
some individuals mocked and behaved rudely, saying aloud, ' I 
wish he had done ;' so that James Watkin stopped, and re- 
proved them for their behaviour ; yet the Divine Power was over 
others, and I believe that its influence was felt by the chief, as 
I observed, when I had finished and sat down, that his coun- 
tenance was entirely changed, and he said that, ' I had done 
well in coming. 1 

Afterwards, by way of accounting for their not setting food 
before us, as is their usual custom with strangers, (which I 
firmly believe would have been clone, had it been in his power,) 
he said, that they had very little to eat, and that it would be 
about five months before they could have plenty again ; looking 
forward to the rainy season setting in. This I knew to be the 
case, as the famine in all the Friendly Isles was grievous, but 
more so at Tongataboo, than at Lifuka, as the bread fruit, 
banana, yam, sweet potatoes, &c, were almost wholly destroyed 
by a hurricane ; and they were at this time eating the roots of 
the banana and tea tree. It has been painful to observe how 
many have complained to us of hunger : some would put their 
hands on their stomachs, and exclaim, ' dead, dead. 1 It is, 
however, a certain fact, that in those places where the people 
are under the control of the missionaries, although suffering 
much, they are much better off for food than the heathen part 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXII. 607 

of the community. Some of these, called heathen, particularly 
the chief just alluded to, and the other that came on board our 
vessel, declare, that they perfectly understand the nature of 
Christianity, and the blessing that it bestows, but they say, ' If 
we were to follow it, we should have to give up all our present 
delights, — put away all our wives but one, and all our bad 
habits."' They seem sensible of the sinful condition in which 
they live ; for they say, in effect, ' it is impossible that we 
should be saved, — it cannot be? Their poor bodies very 
generally bear the marks of violence, from the habit they are 
in of lacerating and burning themselves, as an indication of 
mourning for the dead ; this was strikingly apparent. The 
little fingers on both hands had been in many cases cut off, 
and offered as sacrifices to avert the evils they most dreaded. 
This we found to be very general among those who are called 
Christians, but more particularly remarked it to be the case 
with those that are grown up ; the rising generation of these 
now retain them. This circumstance we discovered on shaking- 
hands with them, from their kings and chiefs down to the 
humblest individuals of their tribes, both male and female. 
We parted from this heathen chief in a friendly manner : his 
name is Fatu. It gave me much pain, to hear from his own 
mouth, through James Watkin, that, amidst all the wretched- 
ness of a heathen life, the miseries of his people were greatly 
increased by their intercourse with the shipping ; disease was 
fast sweeping them away. 

It is a lamentable fact, that most of the vessels which touch 
at Tongataboo, come to anchor on the heathen shores, because 
where the missionaries reside at Nukulofa, there is not the 
same opportunity for the crew to indulge in their diabolical 
practices, and promote the sale of rum, &c. While we were at 
Tongataboo, two vessels under the English flag, and one under 
the American, anchored near the heathen settlement ; where, 
it is true, there is much better shelter from the sea, than at 
Nukulofa ; at the latter station, however, the Henry Freelbig 
rode sufficiently secure. Such as do anchor at Nukulofa, are 
uniformly respectable, and the crews under proper restraint : 
it was quite the reverse with those which went to the other 
place, during our stay at the island. It was late in the 



608 CHAPTER xxxn. [1836. 

afternoon before we got back from the heathen settlement 
of Mua. 

28th. — To-day, Josiah Tubou, and Mary, the king and 
queen of the island, with their two sons dined on board, they 
brought with them James Watkin, as interpreter. A prodigi- 
ously large fat turtle, and a quantity of fine yams, were 
brought as a present by our guests. These yams we under- 
stood to have come from Vavau ; that island being hilly, the 
crops in the valleys, were more sheltered from the late storm, 
but as Lifuka and Tongataboo are flat, level islands, no part 
escaped the fury of this sweeping blast. 

No opening presented, during the stay of our royal visitors, 
for any thing like edifying conversation, but I believe the heat 
and the motion of the vessel, made some of them a little sea- 
sick, as the wind was strong and a swell of the sea tumbled in 
upon us. The king, however, expressed his satisfaction with 
the visit, and they were all much pleased with the inside of the 
Henry Freeling. The tide being low, our boat could only 
approach the edge of the reef; but the queen being barefooted, 
had no difficulty in paddling over the coral bottom, a few 
inches under water. The king preferred taking a passage in a 
small canoe, with a single native to manage it. 

29th. — The morning proved boisterous, but we landed for 
an hour about the time of high water, being desirous to speak 
with James Watkin, not feeling easy to let an opportunity 
pass away without improvement, of attending the native meet- 
ing to-morrow, if it should re3t with me to do so. The fleet 
from Haabai, having arrived since last First day, has greatly 
increased the number of people from the other islands. I found 
James Watkin ready as usual, to render me every assistance 
in his power, and the morning was mentioned, if it were con- 
cluded to come, and the weather did not prevent our landing. 
It may be the last opportunity that I shall have to see such a 
body of the Friendly islanders together ; and such an one as 
could scarcely have been calculated on ; and is of rare occurrence 
at any time, if indeed it ever took place before this season. No 
other motive, I trust, prompts in me a desire to avail myself of 
the opportunity thus placed within my reach so unexpectedly, 
than what is induced by that love which embraces the whole 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXII. 609 

human family, and would bind all the children of men in the 
Lord's " bundle of life" everlasting. May the shout of a king be 
heard among these people, and the glorious majesty of the 
spiritual kingdom of our Lord and Saviour Christ, be unfolded 
to their understanding, by the same Almighty power which 
opened the heart of Lydia, in days that are over and gone, to 
His own praise and glory. 

30th. (First day.) — The state of the weather combined 
with other circumstances to weigh down my mind, when look- 
ing towards attending the native meeting; and the secret 
prayer of my heart last evening was, — ' Help, O Lord, for thy 
great name's sake, and for the sake of Him who died, the just 
for the unjust, that He might bring all mankind unto Thee.'' 
The morning was rough and boisterous ; and there not being 
water enough for the boat to pass over the reef into a sheltered 
landing-place, seemed to throw difficulties in the way of our 
getting on shore. This being the position of affairs, I deter- 
mined to take an arm-chair from the vessel to render the 
fatigue of transporting us more tolerable to the willing natives, 
and divide the weight more equally between several men ; two 
of these who had been watching our movements, were seen wad- 
ing towards the edge of the outer reef, as our boat approached. 
We were, however, at last placed safely upon the beach, with- 
out any material inconvenience to ourselves, though the task 
was laborious for our burden-bearers. I felt much discouraged 
soon after day-break, and could almost have reasoned myself 
into a fancied liberty to remain quietly on board ; but it did 
not appear that I should stand acquitted, unless a firm attempt 
to get through was first made on my part : before leaving 
the vessel this gloom was measurably dispelled, and I was 
strengthened to press forward, and with humble resignation to 
bind the sacrifice as to the horns of the altar. 

On account of the inadequate dimensions of the building to 
accommodate the thousands assembled, several hundreds were 
left outside ; but they endeavoured to keep as near as they could 
to the place where the speaker is best heard. James Watkin 
occupied a short space of time in speaking to the people, and 
then left them in expectation of something from my mouth, 
when a general silence prevailed. It was not long before I 

2 R 



610 CHAPTER XXXII. [1836. 

stood up, in great weakness and fear, and told them that I felt 
myself to be indeed a feeble instrument in a cause so great and 
dignified ; but they might remember, that the Lord's servants 
formerly, as now, had nothing of their own with which to satisfy 
the cravings of a hungry multitude. But when the Great 
Master was pleased to command a blessing, the few loaves and 
fishes were so multiplied, that there was much more left, after 
the people were fed to the full, than there had been before they 
began to eat. It is only, as He is pleased to qualify any one 
to speak in His name, and to open the understandings of them 
that hear, that any can be availingly benefited. " Without 
me ye can do nothing, 1 ' said Christ ; and though some may 
feel desirous to follow Him in the way of self-denial and the 
cross, yet when an hour of trial comes, such is the weakness 
of the flesh, that we are ready to shrink for fear of man, for 
fear of persecution ; and are ready to deny Him, who suffered 
for us, — who died that we might live for ever. But although 
without Christ we can do nothing, yet through His strength 
we can do all things ; — through the strength of His Holy Spirit, 
in our inner man, we can do all things to the praise and glory 
of God. It is in the Holy Spirit of Christ Jesus, that we must 
believe ; and so wait to hear His voice, and obey Him in all 
things. This is that heavenly Prophet, of whom Moses spake 
to the children of Israel, whom the Lord their God should raise 
up unto them from amongst their brethren : — " A Prophet 
shall the Lord your God raise up unto you, from amongst your 
brethren, like unto me, (said Moses ;) — Him shall ye hear in all 
things ; and the soul that will not hear this Prophet shall be 
cut off from amongst the people." In due time this was ful- 
filled ; — this Prophet of the Lord was raised up amongst the 
people, — born at Bethlehem in Judea ; in whom the fulness of 
the God-head dwelt bodily ; and of whom the holy Father 
testified, and said, — " This is my beloved Son, in whom I am 
well pleased; hear ye him." This is the Prophet whom we must 
hear in all things, as the children of Israel in that day heard 
Moses in all things ; but with this difference, — Moses was only 
heard while in the flesh upon the earth, and this Prophet 
speaketh from heaven, by His Holy Spirit in the soul of man. 
How needful then for us to wait, and to watch, and to pray, 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXIT. 611 

that we may hear and obey Him, who speaketh unto us from 
heaven in righteousness, and is mighty to save the soul from sin. 
It is by the power of the Spirit of the Lord Jesus, that our hearts 
must be cleansed and purified from every defilement : it is this 
that searcheth all things ; our secret thoughts and imaginations 
are all laid open before it ; and nothing that is unclean or 
impure, that worketh abomination, or that maketh a lie, can 
stand before this heart-searching power of the Lord; which, 
as a fire, consumeth all that cannot bear His righteous judg- 
ments. But if this heavenly Teacher is heard, and obeyed in 
all things, with meekness and resignation, — if we fear to offend 
or grieve this Holy Spirit of the Lord, — it will purify us even 
as He is pure ; and it will prepare us for the reception into 
our hearts of the spiritual kingdom of Christ Jesus. This is 
the kingdom that men are commanded, above all things, first 
to seek ; — with the sure promise of our Lord, that " all things 
needful should be added" unto them. What then remains 
to prevent mankind from receiving the kingdom of Christ 
Jesus, but hardness of heart and unbelief in his spiritual 
appearance in man. We can scarcely suppose that any will 
earnestly seek for that, which they do not believe can be found. 
Hopeless and forlorn indeed is the situation of such as these : 
in vain do they say, that they believe in Jesus Christ as the 
Saviour of the world, and that there is no salvation but by 
Him ; — whilst they remain strangers to His heavenly power to 
cleanse their hearts from sin, for want of believing that He is 
come in Spirit : therefore they know him not. It is a considera- 
tion, as affectingly awful as it is true, — that although He is the 
Saviour of them that believe, yet without we know and witness 
the power of His Holy Spirit to save us from our sins, He is no 
Saviour of ours : our belief is vanity, and will end in vexation 
of spirit ; — we are not among them that believe to the saving of 
the soul, notwithstanding all our profession of religion before men. 
This is the substance of the testimony I had to bear amongst 
these people, though but a part of what I had to say. — Inviting 
and encouraging them, above all things, to seek first and in 
earnest the kingdom of heaven, and the righteousness thereof, 
—and with desires for their present and eternal welfare, I sat 

2b2 



612 CHAPTER XXXII. [1836. 

down. The place was exceedingly crowded, and the people 
were very solid and attentive. A number of English persons 
were present, probably in part from the shipping. 

Spent the afternoon on board with our own people. 

Eleventh Month 1st. — Believing that it would be best for me to 
leave here a copy of the address presented to those in authority 
at the Sandwich Islands, to be translated in the Tonguese lan- 
guage, for the kings and rulers of the Friendly Islands ; the 
subject was this afternoon mentioned to James Watkin, who 
concurred in the apprehension that it would be useful to them. 
Under these considerations, a fair copy was drawn up by Charles, 
and put into the hands of James Watkin, accompanied by the 
following letter, which was addressed to the missionaries at the 
Friendly Islands. 

' Dear Friends, 

' The annexed, as will be seen on perusal, was addressed to 
those highest in authority upon the Sandwich Islands, and was 
presented, when the king and Kinau, (the female in whom the 
executive power is invested,) with several of the principal chiefs, 
were assembled together to receive it. It was translated at the 
time by the senior American missionary, Hiram Bingham ; and 
they afterwards expressed a desire that it should be printed. 
Although its contents may be peculiarly adapted to the present 
state of those for whom it was originally intended, yet as the 
same interest dwells in my heart towards the inhabitants of the 
Friendly Islands, I thought no harm could arise from present- 
ing a copy of it to Josiah Tubou and Taufaahau, the kings of 
Tongataboo and Haabai ; as it is possible that some hints may 
be found applicable, (if not at the present day, in a day that is 
to come,) to themselves, or to those who may succeed them in 
authority : at any rate it exhibits a Christian principle, a 
standard, round which all nations may rally with safety at all 
times, and at every period of their existence. 

' I am your affectionate friend, in the bonds of the gospel — 
the soul's truest liberty. 

' Daniel Wheeler. 

Henry Freeling, off Nukulofa, Tongataboo, 
1st of Eleventh Month, 1836. 



1836.1 CHAPTER XXX11I. 613 



CHAPTER XXXIII. 

T0XGATAB00 MEETING WITH THE FOREIGXERS PARTING INTER- 

VIEWS WITH THE NATIVES AND MISSIONARIES SAIL FROM THE 

FRIENDLY ISLANDS NEW ZEALAND ANCHOR IN THE BAY OF 

ISLANDS VISIT THE MISSION FAMILY NATIVE MEETING AT 

KOUA-KOUA DESOLATING EFFECTS OF INTERCOURSE WITH THE 

SHIPPING. 

Eleventh Month 3rd. — While on shore yesterday afternoon for 
exercise, we saw many fine healthy plantations of yams coming 
forward ; but the poor natives are suffering grievously for want 
of food at present, and yet they do not seem to exert themselves 
to procure an extra quantity of fish, which we find no difficulty 
in taking. 

To-day, sent a quantity of tracts on board the Chieftain, a 
London whaling vessel, having become acquainted with her 
captain. Grot on shore in the afternoon, but the state of the 
tides just now renders these excursions both tedious and difficult. 

Taufaahau, having accomplished his object of escorting Josiah 
Tubou back in safety to his own islands, sailed again with his 
numerous fleet very early this morning; but towards evening he 
was compelled to return by opposing winds and rough weather : 
and to be ready to put to sea again, on the first appearance of 
a change in the weather, he anchored his canoes in the neigh- 
bourhood of the heathen settlements, to the very great alarm 
of those miserable people ; who now fully concluded he had re- 
turned to chastise them for the provoking and insulting conduct 
of which they had been guilty in the morning, when he was 
about to take his departure. The missionary, however, assured 
us that Taufaahau had no intention whatever of meddling with 
them. From what we saw, it is very evident that a trifling 
cause would at once set them all in a flame : both parties carry 



614 CHAPTER XXXIII. [1836. 

warlike weapons about with them. There are at present 
seventeen garrisons upon this island ; such are the fear and 
suspicion on both sides, that they dare not live out of their 
strong holds. The heathen party in Tongataboo, although 
much superior in number to those who call themselves Chris- 
tians, are the weaker body, in consequence of. their own internal 
and perpetual broils, and the dreadful ravages of disease brought 
amongst them by the shipping ; which is indeed as the " noisome 
pestilence, that walketh in darkness," and as " the destruction 
that wasteth at noon-day." 

These remarks have reference to Tongataboo only : at Vavau 
and the other islands which compose the Hafulauhau group, 
and those of the Uaabai, the people almost if not altogether 
are subject to missionary control, with their king at the head of 
religious affairs, nominally at any rate. It is from these islands 
that the heathen of Tongataboo, have every thing to fear, while 
Taufaahau lives : they know that he is a desperate warrior, and 
never fails to carry all before him, when once roused up. 
Josiah Tubou is a very different character, and though leaning 
to the missionary party, is more despised by the heathen, than 
feared ; his power is much greater than that of Taufaahau, who 
being a much younger man, is very submissive and subservient 
to him. If Tubou inclined to go to war, the other would pro- 
bably unite with him at once ; and furnish strength and skill 
not to be resisted, which the heathen are well aware of. It 
seems that a number of these poor people have now gone on 
board the canoes of Taufaahau, that they may get to Vavau, 
and Lifuka, and become Christians, without risking the loss of 
life from their own kindred ; and we are told that many of them 
would be glad to lead peaceable lives, but dare not join the mis- 
sionaries here, for fear of their neighbours : at the same time 
the different tribes are imperceptibly mingling together by mar- 
riages. All these circumstances serve to diminish the strength 
of the heathen party, and gradually to prepare them to renounce 
their abominable practices. 

4th. — From the swell of the sea setting directly upon the 
landing-place for boats, we remained on board all day ; and 
Josiah Tubou, with his brother Abraham, spent the afternoon on 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXIII. 615 

board with us. I feel comfort when looking back, that the oppor- 
tunity of speaking to the people last First day, was not suffered 
to pass over unembraced on my part. It is plain now, that if 
the return of another First day had been waited for, or an excuse 
from the state of the weather been listened to, the precious 
moment would have been lost for ever ; and instead of a peace- 
ful retrospect, now at seasons vouchsafed in mercy to a poor 
unworthy creature, an accusing blot of anguish would have 
rested upon my mind ; which the few yet remaining days of my 
pilgrimage would have been too short to obliterate. It was a 
remarkable circumstance, that so many hundreds of the natives 
should be brought together at Lifuka, and again at Tongataboo ; 
with many of whom we had become acquainted, first at Vavau 
and its neighbourhood, and at Tongataboo. I recognised with 
heartfelt pleasure, Lazarus, the chief of the island of Otea, also 
David Afu, the chief of Haalaufulu, and others, as people dear 
to my best feelings. We have now been here more than a 
fortnight, and I do not yet see a way open for leaving the 
island, an event anxiously desired by some on board, on account 
of the exposed situation of the anchorage, when some particular 
winds set in. Two English vessels, and one American, have 
anchored off the heathen settlements, while we have been here ; 
there the sailors can indulge their licentious habits unrestrained ; 
but as a striking proof of the utility of missionary establish- 
ments, it is not so at Nukulofa. I desire to stand in 
humble resignation, as to any further proceeding here, or 
to leaving the place, and bending our course towards New 
Zealand ; and I trust to be enabled to decide with clearness 
before we sail. 

5th. — The weather being more favourable for landing, we 
went on shore at four o'clock p. m. ; and having found my mind 
drawn towards the remnant of English and other white people 
here, I told James Watkin on his inquiring about arrange- 
ments for to-morrow, that I had nothing in view towards the 
natives ; but to sit with the English, seemed to be my present 
business, if that could be brought to bear. This was readily 
assented to. I have felt a poor creature indeed, for the last 
day or two, owing perhaps to the increased heat of our vessel 



616 CHAPTER XXXIII. [1836. 

under deck ; but the Lord can deliver, and strengthen him 
that hath no might, either in body or mind ; and can at his 
pleasure make quick of understanding in His fear, those that 
trust and hope in his mercy. May He be graciously pleased 
to cause the opportunity to-morrow, to be a time of visitation 
to some; cause the earth to tremble at His power and presence, 
as in days of old, when the sea saw it and fled, and Jordan 
was driven back ; so may every thing in us, comparable to the 
unstable element, flee before Him ; and the ever blessed truth 
reign over all to His glory. 

6th. (First day.) — Landed about ten o'clock in the fore- 
noon : the natives were coming from their meeting as we 
approached the shore : soon after this the white people assem- 
bled together. On going into the place appointed for us to 
meet in, I observed that James Watkin had taken a side seat, 
to show the people that he had no part to take in that meeting, 
and as no hymn book appeared in the hands of any one, it 
seemed as if some pains had been taken to inform them, that it 
would be held after the manner of the Society of Friends. I 
sat down near a table, and as those who attended came in, they 
joined in the silent sitting of the rest. We had not remained 
long in this exercise, before I was made sensible of that power 
being nigh, which alone can soften the rocky heart, and cause 
the earthly nature in man to bow before it ; and abiding under 
it, I had in due time to revive amongst them the language of 
the patriarch Jacob, when wrestling with the angel, — " I will 
not let thee go, except thou bless me ;" desiring that we might 
individually imitate his noble example this morning, and like 
him prevail, and receive that blessing of the Lord which maketh 
truly rich, and satisfieth the hungry wrestling soul with favour. 
It was then with me to state the true intent and meaning of 
our sitting together in silence before the Lord, and the excel- 
lency of waiting upon God, if we believe in the promise of the 
Most High God, in the new covenant of life and power, — that 
he would write his law in the heart, and put it in the inward 
parts of man ; and that he would be their God, and they should 
be his people : and they shall no more teach every man his 
brother, and every man his neighbour, saying, "Know the 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXIII. 617 

Lord, for they shall all know me from the least of them, unto 
the greatest of them," saith the Lord ; " for I will forgive their 
iniquity, and remember their sin no more.' -1 We, therefore, 
desire to know the Lord for ourselves ; and the only way to 
come to this blessed knowledge, is to obey his commands and 
be still. " Be still, and know that I am God : I will be 
exalted among the heathen ; I will be exalted on the earth." 
Here is the great and glorious privilege of the gospel dispensa- 
tion : " the law of the spirit of life in Christ Jesus," is written 
in every heart, to make free from the law of sin and death. 
None are left without a manifestation of the Spirit of Christ 
Jesus ; by which all have access unto God the Father, who is a 
Spirit, and must be worshipped in spirit and in truth. We, 
therefore, in our religious meetings, have no confidence in the 
flesh ; we do not look to man as our teacher, whose breath is 
in his nostrils, to assist us in the worship of Almighty God ; 
but we wait for the influence of the Holy Spirit of the Lord 
Jesus, to prepare our hearts to perform this worship aright. 
A manifestation of this heavenly spirit of grace is mercifully 
given unto all men ; it is " the grace of God which bringeth 
salvation, and hath appeared unto all men," teaching all men 
that believe in it and obey it, to deny ungodliness : even the 
heathen have a measure of this heavenly gift dwelling in their 
hearts ; by which, and through which, they can worship God in 
spirit and in truth ; — "for I will be exalted among the heathen," 
saith the Lord, " I will be exalted on the earth." Before 
sitting down, I told them that I did not feel at liberty to leave 
the island without seeing those of my own colour, to set before 
them the responsible station they held, and how much depended 
upon them and lay at their door, as examples to the sur- 
rounding natives : the superior advantages they possessed over 
these would be heavy in the scale of condemnation, if corre- 
sponding fruit were not brought forth. They professed to be 
Christians ; had been brought up in Christian lands; had long- 
had in their possession the Holy Scriptures, a blessing invalu- 
able, for which we cannot be thankful enough : but they are a 
sealed book, until our understanding is opened by the same 
Holy Spirit, which inspired those holy men who gave them 



618 CHAPTER XXXIII. [1836. 

forth : even the followers of our Lord, when He was upon the 
earth, could not understand them, until their understandings 
were opened by Him. Without Him, we can do nothing. The 
Jews had the Scriptures ; and yet they were the enemies 
of Him, of whom they so faithfully testify : they felt them- 
selves secure, and thought they had in them eternal life ; but 
what said the Prince of life, — " Search the Scriptures, for in 
them ye think ye have eternal life ; and they are they which 
testify of me : but ye will not come unto me that ye might have 
life." So that although they are an inestimable gift out of the 
divine treasury, bestowed upon man by the Holy Ghost, for 
his greatest outward heavenly comfort, to strengthen his hope 
in the promises of God,. of life eternal through that Saviour, 
who is Christ the Lord, — and are " profitable for doctrine, for 
reproof, for correction, for instruction in righteousness, that 
the man of God may be made perfect, thoroughly furnished 
unto every good work ;" and although they are able to make 
wise unto salvation, — it is only " through faith, which is in 
Christ Jesus, - " of whom they so abundantly testify from their 
earliest pages. And yet, if we could repeat them from the 
beginning of Genesis to the end of the Revelations, they cannot 
save one soul, nor blot out one sin. But they direct us unto 
Him, unto whom all power in heaven and earth is given : who 
only hath the words of eternal life ; who is Himself that 
eternal life. To Him, then, we must go to be saved ; in Him 
we must believe ; to His Holy Spirit in our hearts we must 
turn, whose light shineth in all. His long-suffering and good- 
ness will lead us to repentance ; when we look on Him, whom 
we have so grievously pierced, and from whose merciful reproofs 
we have so long revolted, and which we have disregarded with 
hardness of heart and unbelief in his power to save. This light 
in us, will not only set all our sins in order before us, that we 
may repent of them, and forsake them ; but as we abide under 
the righteous judgments of the Lord's redeeming love, they 
will, though they may have been as scarlet and crimson, be 
made white as snow and wool, by the blood of the Lamb, and 
be remembered no more by Him, who redeemeth our life from 
destruction, and crowneth us with loving-kindness and tender 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXIII. 61.9 

mercy, for His great name's sake. Behold then the blessedness 
of those, who know the Lord for themselves ; who have come 
to the knowledge of the only true God, and Jesus Christ 
whom he hath sent, by believing in the power of the Holy 
Spirit, and sitting under its heavenly teachings : — " this is life 
eternal."" 

The foregoing, although but a part, contains I believe, the 
substance of the whole I had to say to them. We remained on 
shore until sunset, by which time the water had arisen high 
enough to allow our boat to come close to the shore. 

7th. — Fixed with James Watkin to visit Fakafonua the 
heathen chief, to-morrow, in his own fortress of Maofanga. 

8th. — Landed early, and called upon James Watkin, who 
accompanied Charles and myself to Maofanga ; the sun was 
very hot, and having little or no shelter, the walk was very 
fatiguing, though the distance is comparatively short. On 
reaching the fortress, we found the entrance closely blocked 
up ; and the keeper inside could not be prevailed upon to open 
to us, declaring that Fakafonua was on board the American 
ship, which we afterwards found to be correct. James Watkin 
returned with us on board ; and on canvassing the subject over, 
he advised me not to attempt another visit. I did not how- 
ever feel satisfied, or as if I had done all that might be done, 
without making further trial ; and proposed to James Watkin 
our endeavouring to fix a time with the chief for my coming, if 
that could be accomplished, by sending a confidential person 
over for the special purpose of doing it. We landed in the 
evening, and after some inquiry, Nathan a nephew of the king, 
was fixed upon to arrange the business altogether. 

9th. — Nathan having fulfilled his engagement, came off to us 
at an early hour, to say, that he had been to Maofanga, and 
succeeded in getting into the fortress from a bush entrance ; but 
could obtain no tidings whatever of Fakafonua. On consider- 
ing the matter I concluded to land after breakfast, and inquire 
whether there were any other places whither we could go, which 
was done accordingly. James Watkin said that the natives 
residing to the westward, came to the meeting at Nukulofa, 
and that the few heathens towards the other side of the island, 



620 CHAPTER XXXIII. [1836. 

were scattered at distances too considerable for us to attempt 
to go in search of them. With me, however, there yet remained 
something to be done ; and I believed it safest for me to 
tell James Watkin, that notwithstanding the trouble already 
incurred, and the disappointment we had witnessed, I should 
like to go again to Maofanga, and if our object again failed, 
as regarded seeing Fakafonua, I believed that I should then 
have done what I could. It was not a pleasant task to tell 
James Watkin this, as I knew he was very averse to having 
any thing further to do with this man : I believe, however, he 
saw that I was bent upon going again to Maofanga, and kindly 
agreed to make another trial to accomplish what I had in view. 
On reaching the fortress we found the entrance blocked up as 
before ; but James Watkin proposed that we should try another 
passage, more private, which he had got a hint of : this we 
reached at last, and found it open, but so narrow that only one 
person could pass through at a time. We soon met with a 
native who told us the chief was there ; and having obtained 
directions to his house, a short walk brought us to the place, 
where we found seven or eight American sailors hanging about. 
It was not long before Fakafonua himself made his appearance. 
Having seen him on board the Henry Freeling, we were not 
altogether strangers to each other. I took a seat on a log at 
his right hand, and the natives took their stations upon the 
floor, with the American sailors and some others. James 
Watkin entered into conversation with the chief, while I 
endeavoured to keep my mind retired in a waiting frame. At 
length I requested that Fakafonua might be told, that I had 
been among many of the islands in the Pacific Ocean with glad 
tidings of great joy to their inhabitants, and I was not satisfied 
to leave Tongataboo, without giving him a like opportunity 
with others to repent and believe the gospel : believing that 
it was not too late for him to be saved, if the terms of offered 
mercy were accepted on his part ; for the Almighty Creator of 
man would have all to be saved, and that He had provided the 
means, that all might repent and live, by his Son Jesus Christ, 
the light of whose Holy Spirit shineth in every heart. I was 
fully persuaded, that at times he had known something of this 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXIII. 621 

light in himself, which had shined upon and shown him his 
sinful state and condition, and which had reproved him, and 
convinced him of his evil deeds ; and though in his wickedness 
and hardness of heart he had rejected and resisted the strivings 
of the Holy Spirit, grieved it, and wounded it, jet a day 
would overtake him at last when its convictions would be too 
heavy for him to bear. " The spirit of a man may sustain his 
infirmities, but a wounded spirit who can bear V I exhorted and 
entreated him for some time, to repent, believe, and obey the 
gospel ; to turn to the light of Christ Jesus in his own heart, 
follow it, and live ; he would then no longer walk in darkness, 
but in the light of life. Fakafonua interrupted me once or 
twice to express his thanks ; and when I stopped, he told James 
Watkin again to thank me, and said, ' I know very well it is 
true. I have thought of these things, and understand, and am 
convinced that it is better to be a Christian ; but I can never be 
one, I am too great a sinner to be saved : I must remain as I 
am. 1 I told James Watkin to tell him, that as he knew and 
understood these things, his condemnation would be greater on 
that account ; and certainly his destruction would be of himself. 
James Watkin then said he thought I had better speak to 
the sailors, who sat and listened with great attention, I replied, 
' there is no occasion for that, — they know very well.' James 
Watkin replied, ' he thought they did not.'' ' Yes,' said I, 
' there is not one of them, but knows very well, that he ought 
to fear God ; and knows when he commits sin, and that he 
ought not to do it, for that which may be known of God, is 
manifest in man : He hath showed it unto him. 1 Afterwards 
I found my mind drawn towards these men, and I was strength- 
ened to declare the Truth among them as it is in Jesus. We 
then took leave of this poor benighted heathen chief, who with his 
people thanked me and shook hands very kindly ; and I believe 
we parted better friends than we met. We were offered the 
juice of the cocoa-nut, and the stupifying kava, both which 
were declined. Although nothing may come of this visit, yet 
it is not for me to calculate upon results, but to leave them, I 
felt relieved, and rejoiced that I had made the effort ; and I 
believe that James Watkin was not sorry at having accom- 



G22 CHAPTER XXXIII. [1836. 

panied me on this errand, now that it was well over. On look- 
ing round, my way seemed now clear for leaving the island, 
and before reaching the mission-house, I told James Watkin 
and Charles, that I knew of nothing to prevent our sailing on 
the following day- We called upon Thomas Wellard and his 
wife, and found their luggage could be embarked in the after- 
noon, and that they had kept themselves in readiness to leave 
their habitation at a short notice. 

We returned on board before dinner, and informed Captain 
Keen, that all things would be ready with us, for leaving the 
roads of Nukulofa to-morrow. In the afternoon we collected 
our linen, &c, from the shore, and took leave of James 
Watkins family, he himself intending to be on board at the 
time of our departure. Isaackee the pilot, was agreed with to 
conduct us into open water, and we bade a last farewell to a 
mass of the poor natives, men, women and children, who had 
crowded to the spot of embarkation, having learned probably 
from the pilot, that we were about to leave their shores finally. 

1 Oth. — Our decks were crowded at an early hour with the 
natives, bringing vegetables and fowls, and a collection of their 
war clubs and other implements of destruction, which we 
rejoiced to take out of their hands. The morning was, for the 
first time since arriving at Tongataboo, calm and cloudy. It 
afforded, however, an opportunity for the natives to dispose of 
what they had, which the usual trade-wind would wholly have 
prevented, as they must have hurried out of the vessel on our 
beginning to move. James Watkin and our passengers came 
on board before eight o'clock ; but the forenoon proving showery, 
and windless, there seemed no probability of our getting off to 
sea. James Watkin returned to the shore, intending to come 
off again to-morrow morning, to see us under weigh ; but at 
three o'clock p. m., the clouds began to disperse : a signal was 
made forthwith for the pilot, and a nimble native dispatched to 
the mission-house to state that we were about to sail. By the 
time the last anchor was up, the parties were on board ; and 
leaving the last of the Friendly Islands, (though not the least 
of them, as an object of our tender solicitude and regard,) we 
steered through the wide spreading reefs towards the open 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXIII. 623 

ocean. James Watkin accompanied us a considerable distance, 
until the shore of Nukulofa could be but dimly seen ; but 
however painful the task of separating, the moment was come 
for it to be done. We waved to each other, while our move- 
ments could be seen in the twilight ; and I believe we parted 
with sincere regret on both sides. If 1 mistake not, we can 
mutually acknowledge — 'though lost to sight, to memory dear."' 
The day beginning to close upon us, and the wind continuing 
light, rendered it impracticable for the Henry Freeling to get 
completely through the passage before dark, when our faithful 
compass became as heretofore, the only guide remaining to us. 
Our pilot, who had been at the mast-head for three hours look- 
ing out for the reefs, left his post when the sun went down, 
wishing to be set at liberty, in order to take up his lodging 
upon a small island at no great distance from us, as he could 
not get back before morning to his own island of Tongataboo ; 
and if he had been compelled to continue on board until we had 
got completely out to sea, which is the common usage, it would 
have been too dark for him to have found the small island, and 
he might have perished in his canoe, if the wind had got up 
strong. He told us in broken English, but very intelligible, 
' Me no like go dead in canoe. 1 This is the same man who ran 
no trifling risk to gain us admittance into the heathen settle- 
ment at Mua. He was of course well paid for his useful ser- 
vices, and his request to leave us immediately granted. Towards 
ten o'clock p. m., the breeze freshening up we got nicely clear 
of the island of Tongataboo, and its many lurking snares ; and 
before midnight hauled round its most western point. 

Wth. — Stood to the south-west, close to the wind. I stood 
resigned as to our destination, whether it should be New Hol- 
land or New Zealand, and endeavoured to leave it to my 
heavenly Father to dispose of us according to his own good 
pleasure ; believing if it was right for us to go to New Zealand, 
we should be enabled to fetch it, though the wind was opposed 
to it at that time. 

12th. — My mind is much weighed down this morning, with 
a load of exercise, which none about me know of ; and this is 
not a little aggravated, by an open avowal, that nearly every 



624* chapter xxxni. [1836. 

one on board was in hopes we should not go to New Zealand. 
It was suggested to my mind by the grand adversary, that as 
the wind was unfavourable for New Zealand, we might safely 
keep away for Sydney, in New South Wales, for which it blew 
sufficiently free. But I was preserved from listening to this, 
and strengthened to conclude, that it would be time enough for 
me to bear up when the distance was accomplished, and no 
prospect remained of fetching the Bay of Islands. Thus 
strengthened and supported, we held on our way. Soon after 
this, the wind became more favourable; but the current and 
leeway together had set us so far to the westward, that it was 
deemed advisable to run still further to leeward to make sure of 
escaping the Pilstart's and Nicholson's shoals. This circum- 
stance, to appearance, would almost set aside the New Zealand 
question altogether. When night came, our captain was so 
fearful of the shoals that the sails were reduced, and the head 
of the vessel turned again towards Tongataboo : this was mor- 
tifying, though, perhaps, the safest policy, notwithstanding the 
wind had now become much more favourable. 

ISth. (First Bay.) — A fresh wind sprung up from the old 
trade quarter, at noon : the latitude 23° 37 south, by observa- 
tion. Our sailors were collected twice in the day for devotional 
purposes. To-day is the third anniversary of our leaving 
London ; we reached the Henry Freeling, soon after nine o'clock 
p. m., at the Lower Hope in the Thames. Many have been 
the trials and conflicts permitted to overtake us ; but abun- 
dantly more have been the mercies of the Lord since that time, 
overshadowing us by night and by day : and truly our strength 
has been proportioned to the necessity in the darkest hour of 
dismay. There has been no lack of any needful thing ; all our 
wants have been abundantly supplied ; and that loving-kind- 
ness which is better than life, has at seasons been eminently 
displayed for our comfort and consolation ; causing the Lord's 
own work to praise Him, and enabling us to give thanks at the 
remembrance of his holiness ; and I trust, in humble resigna- 
tion and devotedness, to renew our covenant, and say, — " Not 
my will, O Lord, but thine be done :" if thou wilt be with me 
in the way that I go, here am I a poor unworthy creature. 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXIII. 625 

1-lth. — Beautiful weather, with the wind free. This day 
completed 180° of west longitude. At noon we were in 179° 
54' east longitude, latitude 25° 8' south, Cape Breton ; New 
Zealand distant 640 miles. 

16th. — Yesterday, the latitude at noon 26° 59' south. To- 
day the wind baffling : a heavy squall and the threatening- 
appearance of the atmosphere, with a heavy swell of the sea from 
the southward, brought us under double-reefed canvass ; but the 
wind did not materially increase. 

19th. — Since the 17th the weather has been rugged, and the 
wind so scant, that there seemed considerable doubt whether we 
should fetch the north Cape of New Zealand ; but we still per- 
severed in keeping close to the wind. To-day the weather is 
more moderate, with less sea, and the wind in a slight degree, 
more favourable. We sensibly feel the cold, since coming a 
few degrees to the southward of the tropic. We trust that we 
shall not be forgotten by Him, who careth for the sparrows, 
and causeth the day-spring of the morning to know his place. 

21st. — Yesterday, assembled the crew for devotional pur- 
poses, both before and after noon. The weather clear and the 
wind gentle from south-east to east south-east. To-day several 
birds have been seen, of kinds that indicate that land is not 
very far off ; and in the afternoon it was rumoured to be in 
sight, but this could be nothing more than a fog-bank. 

22nd. — In the afternoon land was discovered from the mast- 
head, but too distant to determine, with certainty, whether 
it was the North Cape or not. 

2Brd. — The wind being light and scant for our purpose, it 
was noon before we got close in with the coast a few miles to 
windward of the North Cape. Towards evening the wind 
became more favourable, but there was so little of it, that we 
could not approach the entrance of the Bay of Islands, before 
the breeze died away altogether. 

2Mh. — Becalmed until nearly noon, when a breeze sprung 
up from the north westward, which soon freshened, and enabled 
us to push for the Bay. Before six o'clock, anchored in little 
more than three fathoms water, on a muddy bottom, near the 
entrance towards Koua-Koua, after a passage of fourteen days 

2 s 



626 CHAPTER XXXIII. [1836. 

from Tongataboo ; thus we have to acknowledge that through 
the love and mercy of Him, who upholdeth all things by 
the word of his power, we have been brought in safety to 
the desired haven : the Lord of Hosts is his name. 
Several ships under English colours are near our vessel, 
belonging to London and Sydney, and one American whaler. 
Before dark some of the principal store-keepers came on 
board ; it appears from their statements, that an internal war 
is raging amongst the natives, and that some of the mis- 
sionary stations have been totally destroyed, in the neighbour- 
hood of the Bay of Plenty ; and the country around laid 
waste. I find that James Stack, a missionary with whom I 
was acquainted in Englaud, had been compelled to fly, (with 
his wife, who was then on a bed of weakness,) from the scene 
of blood and carnage to this neighbourhood. We learnt from 
a person, lately arrived from Sydney, that our dear friends 
James Backhouse and George W. Walker were in that neigh- 
bourhood a few weeks ago. A few of the natives have been on 
board, but their barbarous and filthy appearance is enough to 
discourage any stranger ; perhaps, these may not be a fair 
specimen, because of their intercourse with civilized nations, 
and their acquaintance with rum. 

25th. — In the morning five or six natives came off, but with 
the exception of a hog, they had nothing to sell worth pur- 
chasing. Two of them appeared to be much out of health 
with the prevalent influenza, which, it is said, has been very 
general. We intended to give each of them a dose of salts ; 
the first who tried them, drank nearly the contents of a 
tumbler glass, but the other before venturing, would taste 
only what his comrade had been drinking, and was quite satis- 
fied with what was remaining at the bottom of the glass, 
without wanting a further quantity. They seemed desirous to 
possess a steel pen, and one was given to each, with which they 
seemed pleased. They appear to suffer very sensibly from the 
cold, as if a large dirty Witney blanket, worn loosely about 
the shoulders and body was insufficient for them. Before 
noon the Post-master Gilbert Maer came on board ; and very 
kindly offered to conduct us to the resident missionary at the 



1836.] chapter xxxnr. 627 

station of Paihia, engaging to call for us in his own boat, 
which he did accordingly : accompanied by our passengers we 
set out, and landed opposite to the missionary establishment, 
consisting of several good houses, occupied by its members, also 
one place of worship: this belongs to the Church Mission. 
The senior and only ordained minister at this place, Henry 
Williams, being from home, endeavouring to restore peace 
among the contending tribes to the southward, we were con- 
ducted to the habitation of the lay minister, Charles Baker : we 
were kindly received by his wife, who was engaged amidst a 
large family, one member of which was not more than a year 
old. Before tea was finished, our host arrived, and confirmed 
the kind treatment of his wife, in a friendly manner : when 
the repast was over, Charles Baker took me into his study, 
when the object of my visit was fully entered into, and an offer 
made me of all the assistance in his power. After attentively 
reading my certificates, he said, he hailed me as a minister of 
the gospel, and a father, &c. Before leaving Paihia, we visited 
for a short interval the wife of the absent missionary, Henry 
Williams, formerly a lieutenant in the British navy : they 
have ten children. We were much gratified with this family. 
It proved a very dark and rainy night, but we got well on 
board. 

26th. — In the forenoon Charles Baker came on board, and 
while with us proposed our calling upon the British resident, 
James Busby : having known his father when at Sydney, 
this offer was gladly accepted. James Busby is the only 
person legally authorized to act for the British government 
here ; but as he is wholly destitute of power, instead of being- 
recognized as Consul, he is styled the British resident ; as 
such, a visit was due to him, as well as on account of his being 
our countryman. We were kindly received, and remained 
several hours under his roof, before he would permit us to leave 
him. His wife and children are now on a visit at Sydney. 
My Charles having a serious pain in the side, owing, perhaps, 
to the wetness of the preceding evening, remained on board 
through the day ; but on my return to him in the evening I 
found him much recruited. Finding, while with Charles 

2s2 



628 CHAPTER XXXIII. [1836. 

Baker, that there would be on the morrow a good opportunity 
to visit one of the native congregations, and that a young man, 
who is a competent interpreter, would be furnished with a 
well-manned roomy boat, I did not feel satisfied to let the 
opportunity pass away without availing myself of it. The 
prospect of moving, as it were, upon new and untried ground 
felt indeed weighty, but I was enabled to cast my burden upon 
the Lord ; for truly he hath hitherto sustained me, and borne 
up my head amidst the floods of many waters. 

27th. (First Day.) — We left the Henry Freeling about 
six (J clock a. m., in a boat belonging to the mission, which had 
arrived with our interpreter. It had lightened and rained most 
of the night, and the morning had every appearance of wet 
weather. It would have been a relief to me, if my Charles 
could have been satisfied to remain on board, but I did not like 
to urge it upon him, being aware that he was desirous of 
attending the meeting : though I rather dreaded the conse- 
quences if he got wet, and thought if the rain kept off until 
after the meeting, and we had dry weather to return to our 
seats in the boat again, it was all I could desire. After rowing 
about two hours and a half, we reached the point of destination 
at Koua-Koua, and found on our arrival at the building, that 
the customary service was going forward, conducted by a native 
teacher : he was at the moment, as we were informed, reading 
the nineteenth chapter of Matthew : we went quietly in, and sat 
down near a table. This was a rough building, lately erected, 
with a few seats for the females only. When the native 
preacher had finished, William Colenzo explained to the people 
the cause of our visit, which we could ascertain by the names 
of the different islands in the Pacific which he mentioned, to 
enable them the better to understand its real object. We had 
not agreed on any particular mode of proceeding ; but when a 
suitable time arrived, I stood up by his side, leaving the event 
to my never failing heavenly Helper. After a solemn pause, I 
warned the people of the necessity of our humbling ourselves 
under the mighty hand of God, the judge of the whole earth, 
whom they had professedly met together to worship. " God is 
a spirit," and without the aid of his Holy Spirit, we cannot 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXIII. 629 

draw nigh unto Him. How can we worship Him in spirit and 
in truth, without the help and assistance of the Holy Spirit of 
truth, when we cannot of ourselves think a good thought, or 
restrain an evil one. After enlarging on the nature of true 
spiritual worship, I had to turn them to the Holy Spirit of the 
Lord Jesus — the light of truth which shineth in every heart. 
My heart was greatly enlarged on this occasion, though a very 
poor empty creature on going into the meeting. 

When the meeting was over, most if not all the people, came 
about us to shake hands, which though somewhat irksome to 
my exhausted frame, was much to be preferred to the practice 
common among theNewZealanders, — of rubbing noses together ; 
of which we only witnessed a few specimens among themselves. 
I felt unwell in the morning, before leaving the vessel, and 
much cast down ; but was now greatly relieved, though pain 
still continued in my head. The rain kept off until we had got 
through the coarse herbage and rushy plants on our way back 
from the meeting ; but we had no sooner resumed our seats in 
the boat than it began to drop, and soon fell smartly : we 
were, however, well prepared for it, so as to keep ourselves 
comfortably dry over head, and about the seats of the boat. 
The Lord sustained me through all this day, and magnified his 
own name among the people at the meeting. It was indeed a 
day which the Lord had made memorable to myself, for divine 
favour ; and on which I completed my sixty-fifth year. Thus 
is the thread of my life lengthened out ; and ! saith my soul, 
that it may be to the praise and glory of Him, who hath so 
marvellously redeemed it from destruction, and crowned me 
with loving-kindness and tender mercies. How can I suffi- 
ciently declare unto others, what hath been done for myself ; 
that they also may come to taste and see for themselves His 
goodness and His love ; and be able to say from heart-felt living 
experience, " mercy and truth have met together, righteousness 
and peace have kissed each other !" 

In a letter to a friend in England written from the Bay of 
Islands some weeks afterwards, the following passages occur: — 

The day my sixty-fifth year was completed, I was strength- 
ened to proclaim the glad tidings of the gospel, for the first 



630 CHAPTER XXXIII. [1836. 

time, to a body of New Zealanders at the Koua-Koua station, 
through an excellent interpreter, to my own peace, and I trust 
the exaltation of the dear Redeemer's kingdom in the hearts 
of the people. My soul rejoices in that I have lived to this 
time, and to see this day, though truly life is only desirable, 
as we are found living " unto Him who died for us, and rose 
again.'' 1 And although bound by earth's tenderest and strongest 
tie, that of a precious family, whose present and eternal wel- 
fare claims our earnest prayer and anxious thought ; yet, with- 
out we are living " unto Him who died for us," our prayer and 
solicitude are all unavailing ; because if we are not living unto 
Him, he liveth not in us ; and therefore we receive not, because 
we ask amiss, in our own way and will of self, and not in His 
name, His power, and for His sake, who died for us and rose 
again. 

" Verily, verily, I say unto you, he that belie veth on me, the 
works that I do, shall he do also ; and greater works than these 
shall he do, because I go unto my Father." John xiv. 12. 
In the first place, have we believed in the power of the Spirit 
of the Lord Jesus, and witnessed it to work mightily in us I 
Have we known those great works fulfilled in us, which are 
promised to him that believeth in the Son, when He shall have 
gone to the Father ? Have we faithfully resisted all the tempta- 
tions of the enemy, and overcome, as Christ overcame ? The 
blessed Saviour of the world " was in all points tempted like as 
we are, yet without sin."" " He knew no sin, though made to 
be sin for us." And if we, who are born in sin, and have lived 
in sin, shall endure temptations at all points, and overcome as 
He overcame, the works that He did, we shall have done also, 
and shall have witnessed our part of the greater works that 
should be done ; not in our own strength, or might, or power, 
but through believing in Christ, in the power of the Holy Spirit 
of the Lord Jesus in our hearts, strengthening our inner man 
" unto all patience and long suffering, with joy fulness," to 
resist every temptation of the enemy, being stedfast in the faith 
that works by love and overcometh. " The works that I do shall 
he do also, and greater works than these shall he do, because,"" 
said Christ, " I go unto my Father." After his precious blood 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXIII. 631 

was shed for poor, lost, sinful man, He " ascended on high'" 
to his heavenly Father, " led captivity captive," and " received 
gifts for men ; yea, for the rebellious also, — that the Lord God 
might dwell amongst them :"" and it is through these inesti- 
mable gifts, received of the Father, that these great works in us 
are accomplished. " The Comforter, which is the Holy Ghost," 
is thus sent by the Father in the name of Him who said, 
" because I go unto my Father." Now if we have received 
this promised Comforter in the name of Jesus, let us " pray 
without ceasing :" this name is the power and efficacy of prayer, 
and what we ask in this name, we shall receive, — " because I 
go unto my Father ; and whatsoever ye shall ask in my name, 
that will I do, that the Father may be glorified in the Son. If 
ye shall ask any thing in my name, I will do it." 

2Sth. — The weather rough, and to us cold. Some of the 
natives came on board in the afternoon. Being desirous of 
purchasing a canoe paddle as a specimen, I was very soon 
offered one for a shilling. Having no money about me I went 
below, and found some quarter dollars, of rather more value 
than a shilling each. One of these quarter dollars was given, 
and a paddle received in return ; but the man perceiving that 
I had still a quarter dollar left, made signs that he wished to 
have that also. I supposed for another of his paddles, which 
he held in his hand ; but on giving him the money, and taking- 
hold of the paddle at the same time, with a stern countenance 
he refused to let me have it, — keeping both the quarter dollars 
for one paddle only. I thought it would not be well to suffer 
this imposition, and demanded one of my quarter dollars back 
again ; but he persisted in retaining both. The other paddle 
was then returned to him, which he took into his hand, and I 
then insisted by signs on having my money back again, and 
the bargain made altogether void. He hesitated for some time ; 
but seeing that I was determined to carry it through, at last 
returned me the money, and we parted without any further 
trafficking. I have no doubt that he will behave in a more 
reasonable manner when he comes again. Upon inquiry, I 
found that nothing will do with these people, but firm decided 
measures ; they are daring, ferocious, and insulting if they 



632 CHAPTER XXXIII. [1836. 

think that a stranger is afraid of them, and are sometimes 
prompted to commit outrages ; but calmness, and steady firm- 
ness generally prevail with them. 

29th. — Breakfasted early, and proceeded to the missionary 
station at Paihia, where taking in Charles Baker, we pursued 
our route to Tepuna, where the first missionary station was 
originally established. Here we saw John King, one of the 
first missionaries that trod the shores of New Zealand, but now 
so far advanced in years, as to be considered at liberty from 
the general work. He has a family of ten children; the two 
oldest sons are cultivating land on their own account. The 
natives now surviving, are so few, and widely scattered, that 
Tepuna is now scarcely considered one of the stations. Our 
visit did not seem to amount to much more than just seeing 
the family, by whom we were kindly received and entertained. 
They appear to have taken up their residence here for life. 
At one time, a considerable congregation used to assemble, but 
the whole is now laid waste, and the natives, owing to war and 
other circumstances, seem swept off the soil. By the wreck 
of the establishment now remaining, it is obvious that this 
station, at one period, must have been an important one. We 
returned on board by six o'clock p. m. Before parting with 
this ancient missionary, he asked me, if I had with me, No 
Cross, No Crown, of which I thought we had a copy : as he 
seemed desirous to see this book, from a former knowledge of 
it, care was taken to forward the volume, the receipt of which 
was afterwards gratefully acknowledged. 

To-morrow we expect to go to Korarareka, but are a little 
apprehensive from every appearance at present, that this will 
turn to small account. To-day, sent a parcel of tracts on board 
the Nimrocl whaler, of Sydney, and the American ship 
Martha, of Nantucket, also a whaling vessel. Arrived, the 
Diana South Sea whaler, from London in sixteen weeks. 

80/A. — The day being cold and showery, and there being 
no prospect of any opportunity of speaking to the people, 
I seem unwilling to run .any risk by going to Korarareka, 
merely to look at the place, which is all that the journey 
holds out. 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXIII. 633 

This afternoon a large ship beat into the bay ; her name not 
yet ascertained. The pleasure formerly arising, on the first 
glance of a vessel, more especially when under the flag of our 
own nation, is now superseded by feelings bordering upon 
disgust, from a knowledge of the accumulated weight of sin 
and wretchedness they are introducing amongst this already 
depraved and degraded race of barbarous natives ; who, 
like those of all the isles we have heretofore visited, with 
one solitary exception, are rapidly wasting from the face of 
the earth, by loathsome disease brought amongst them, and 
renewed again and again, by these circulating mediums of evil. 
In this dreadful picture, the noble natives of the Friendly 
Islands are not included, except at some of the heathen settle- 
ments at Tongataboo. At the other islands of that group, the 
intercourse with shipping has been but small hitherto ; but it 
is greatly to be feared that this evil is on the increase. The 
majority of the people of England, and that of the most 
virtuous part of the community at home, little know the 
ravages their own countrymen are making in these distant 
parts of the world, nor can they possibly estimate the depth of 
the misery, suffering and aggravated distress they are inflicting 
upon these unhappy and helpless islanders. I have no doubt 
that there are many who, if they could see what we have seen, 
would wash their hands of the guilt of partaking of luxuries, 
and even of supposed necessaries of life, furnished from distant 
and foreign climes through such a channel; much less be found 
deriving a profit through the exertions of these agents of Satan, 
who are thus extensively and destructively contributing to 
afflict the human race wherever they go. I would say to all, 
individually, who love the Lord Jesus in sincerity, and are 
openly professing to follow Him before men, — " cry aloud, 
spare not, lift up thy voice like a trumpet," and make known 
the transgression of the people, and the magnitude of their sin. 
" Let every one that nameth the name of Christ depart from 
iniquity ;"" for the Lord himself will assuredly plead the cause 
of the afflicted and helpless, — He will hear the voice of their 
weeping, — He will regard their supplication, — He will receive 
their prayer. When going last First day to the meeting at 



634 CHAPTER XXXIII. [1836. 

Koua-Koua, we met a native taking his wife or daughter in his 
canoe, to one of the ships. Our young friend and interpreter 
remonstrated earnestly with him, and endeavoured to dissuade 
him from his dreadful purpose, but it was all in vain, the man 
pursued his wretched and miserable errand to the bay. The 
chiefs are the principal contractors between the parties, and 
reap the reward of iniquity, which, though comparatively small, 
is sufficient to induce these miserable people to continue their 
infamous and abhorrent traffic, which is regularly systematised 
through the bay : a few hours only elapse, after the arrival of 
a vessel, before she is amply furnished with these poor devoted 
victims. 

Twelfth Month 1st. — In the forenoon we sat together as 
usual, and were favoured to feel a degree of strength sufficient 
to turn the battle to the gate, and check the torrent of dissi- 
pating thought, that prevents the sacrifice from arising, which 
is acceptable only, when offered in spiritual purity. In the 
afternoon went to the mission-house at Paihia ; while there, 
Henry Bobart, a missionary and an ordained minister of the 
Church of England arrived, sent apparently on purpose to 
conduct us to the Waimate settlement. The fatigue of this 
journey, though considerable, would shrink into nothingness, 
if any thing bordering upon certainty might be looked for, of 
an opportunity being realised for the exaltation of the dear 
Redeemer's kingdom among the people ; but from what we 
have already witnessed, this place is more an establishment of 
missionaries and their families, than of a body of seriously 
disposed natives. It will be cause of rejoicing if it proves 
otherwise ; but without going over the ground, the retrospect 
at a future day may be darkened with gloom, from a conscious- 
ness of not having done all in my power to serve the best of 
Masters, in the best of causes, — by losing an opportunity which 
can never be regained, of declaring Christ in man, by His 
Holy Spirit, the hope of glory, to these affectingly benighted 
islanders, — alike with others, the objects of the love of God, and 
part of that inheritance purchased by the Saviour's precious 
blood. 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXIV. 635 



CHAPTER XXXIV. 



NEW ZEALAND VISIT TO THE MISSION-STATION AT WAIMATE 

WAR AMONG THE NATIVES MEETING WITH THE MISSION FAMILIES 

DISTRIBUTION OP TRACTS NATIVE MEETINGS AT KORARAREKA 

ADDRESS TO THE MISSIONARIES SAIL FROM THE BAY OF 

ISLANDS REMARKS ON THE CHARACTER OF THE NEW ZEALANDERS 

ANCHOR OFF SYDNEY RELIGIOUS ENGAGEMENTS THERE 

RETURN TO ENGLAND, 



Month 2nd. — Spent the forenoon on board, and the 
afternoon at James Busby^ with Charles Baker, and three 
others of the missionary establishment. James Busby is an 
amiable man, upright in all his dealings with the people ; and 
decidedly desirous of promoting in others that which he con- 
ceives to be the duty of man. Men of his general character 
are greatly needed to improve the present state of things, 
as regards the best interests of the natives ; while the bad 
example of licentious foreigners might be checked, and their 
influence to a considerable extent diminished. 

3rd. — At eight o'clock a. m., reached the station at Paihia, 
and found that the absent missionary, and senior of the 
establishment, Henry Williams, had returned to his family. 
He had been to the southward to endeavour to persuade the 
hostile tribes, who are butchering and devouring one another 
in a dreadful manner, to desist and listen to terms of peace. 
He reports that they are determined to persevere in the contest ; 
and though he has heretofore been successful in restoring peace 
among them, they now turn a deaf ear to every proposition 
which he made to them. More than six hundred of these poor 
creatures have been slaughtered ; and some of the missionary 
stations in those parts are entirely broken up for the present. 



636 chapter xxxiv. [1836. 

One of their bouses had been destroyed, some of the families 
stripped of every thing, and others had taken refuge in flight. 
Henry Williams brought with him a boy, whose sister had 
been murdered in a recent struggle of the contending parties. 
On leaving Henry Williams and his family, we proceeded 
towards Keri-Keri, in a boat well manned by natives belonging 
to the mission, having sent our own boat and crew back to 
the vessel from Paihia. We reached the station of Keri-Keri 
about noon, and were kindly received by James Kemp and 
his wife : he is the principal resident missionary there. This 
family came originally from Wymondham, in Norfolk. Just 
after our arrival, a messenger appeared with a note to Henry 
Bobart, our conductor, from Waimate, the object of which was 
to prevent our coming forward, until Second day, on account 
of indisposition in one of the families, as the invalid would, no 
doubt, then be recruited. We consequently remained at Keri- 
Keri, and were invited to attend their place of worship, next 
morning, the 4th instant ; this I did not like to shrink from, 
however painful ; although there was nothing before the view 
of my mind, beyond the testimony, which we, as a Society, 
have to bear, against form without life and power, in the will 
of man. I think there were not ten adult natives male and 
female ; nor as many children present, and these belong to the 
household department of the missionaries : the Europeans, who 
were on a raised platform, at the other end of the building, 
were probably twice as numerous as the natives. 

5th. — A note arrived from Waimate, stating, that if the 
weather cleared up, a cart should meet us on the way ; but the 
road was so slippery, the soil being clay, and the horses wholly 
without shoes, that with the present rain, the steep hills would 
be difficult and dangerous to travel over. I preferred going on 
foot to horseback, under all the attending circumstances ; but 
Henry Bobart and Charles rode part of the way, and then gave 
up the horses to native boys, and travelled on foot with me. 
The rain commenced again before we had proceeded far, and 
increased after noon-tide of the day; and having to pass 
through much fern, and high coarse grass, procured us a larger 
share of wet than the rain which actuallv descended. We were 



1836'.] CHAPTER XXXIV. G37 

five hours performing the journey, as from the state of the 
roads and lameness, I could only proceed at a crawling pace. 
Just as we began the last long hill, when my strength was 
nearly exhausted, and breathing difficult, we met the principal 
missionary William Williams, who (having been formerly a 
medical man,) anticipating my situation from what he had 
heard of my age, brought with him a sandwich, &c. I told 
him that a friend in need was a friend indeed. On the strength 
of this, and with frequent stops to rest and recover my breath, 
I was enabled to reach the summit of the hill, and enter Wai- 
mate. Every accommodation within the reach of William 
Williams and his wife, was cheerfully afforded us ; but the 
greater part of our damp clothes we were forced to keep on. 
In this place we found a well-conducted family, and a peaceful 
and quiet abode. When invited to the family devotion in the 
evening, we entered a large room, where thirty boys were 
assembled, the children of the missionaries ; but such was the 
quiet order of the establishment, I did not know they were in 
the house till that time, nor that the house was a school, 
although we had then been three hours under its roof. 

6th. — Rested little during the night, but rose early to join 
the family before breakfast, and remained in the house most of 
the day, on account of my lameness; and the weather continuing 
so wet, the garden walks served only as channels to carry off 
the superfluous water from the surface of the neighbourhood. 

7th. — The weather still showery, but fine at intervals. Had 
an opportunity of seeing the manner in which the natives pre- 
pare the fern root, at present the principal article of their food. 
This root has an astringent property, and is admirably calcu- 
lated to counterbalance the effects of fish and bad potatoes. 
Although well beaten after being roasted, it still retains a strong 
fibre, which is separated from the more pulpy substance in the 
chewing, and thrown away by the eater. It requires good 
teeth to obtain sufficient support from it. 

9th. — Yesterday, my lameness but little gone off, and no 
opening presenting for religious service, my situation altoge- 
ther required continued exercise of faith and patience ; the 
weather was too unsettled to undertake the journey back to 



638 CHAPTER XXXIV. [1836. 

Keri-Keri. This morning, the state of the weather was more 
promising. Before breakfast, it crossed my mind, that it was 
not improbable a proposal would be held out, that if we stayed 
over next First day, an opportunity would be afforded for 
seeing the people collected : after breakfast, I mentioned to 
our host, that as the weather appeared more favourable, we 
should be thinking about returning to the Bay of Islands. 
The anticipated proposal, however, was immediately drawn 
forth, for us to remain over First day, to see the natives 
collected. I then stated, that we left the vessel unprepared for 
so lengthened a visit, but as this offer was now made, I did 
not dare to run away from it, acknowledging at the same time, 
that our clean linen was exhausted. This difficulty was soon 
surmounted by our hostess, who insisted upon getting every 
thing we had immediately washed. At nine o'clock, being 
informed that a considerable number of the natives would be 
collected from a distance, who would not be present on First 
day, it seemed safest for me to attend on the occasion. We 
repaired to the building pointed out, and a goodly number soon 
collected in the place. Finding that the manner of conducting 
the meeting was wholly left to my disposal, we settled down 
into silence, until I was strengthened to declare amongst them, 
in an encouraging manner, the truths of the everlasting gospel. 
I had to turn them inward to the true minister of the sanctuary, 
and of the true tabernacle, which the Lord hath pitched and not 
man ; who teacheth as never man taught, and speaketh as never 
man spake, by the Holy Spirit, in the hearts of the children of 
men the world over. There were some tender people present : 
the Lord's power was over us, and my heart rejoiced. 

10th. — The weather being much improved, I was enabled to 
take what exercise I could bear without retarding the cure of 
my lameness. Late in the afternoon, William Williams in- 
formed me that the usual meeting of the whole establishment 
of missionaries and their families would be held in the evening, 
querying whether I could not join them. I said but little in 
return, but in a while found that I must avail myself of this 
opportunity, and at a suitable interval told William Williams 
that I should like to have a little time afforded me at that 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXIV. 639 

meeting ; and knowing their mode of conducting these meet- 
ings, I mentioned as the best time, the interval, after the 
chapter in the Testament had been read. He directly asked, 
if I wished that any chapter in particular should be selected ; I 
replied in the negative, saying, it would make no difference with 
me. In due time the meeting commenced, when individuals 
were fixed upon by them and named to lead the first and second 
prayer ; when these were gone through, a hymn was sung as 
usual, and then the twentieth chapter of the Revelation was 
read by William Williams himself. When this was concluded, 
we dropped into silence, no doubt, to the surprise of many, as 
but few could have come to the knowledge of the request which 
I had made, from the shortness of the intervening space of 
time. After a solemn pause, I stood up with the words of the 
beloved disciple, when on the Isle of Patmos, in the day of the 
Lord's power and presence in spirit, for the word of God and 
the testimony of the Lord Jesus ; — " Unto Him that loved us, 
and washed us from our sins in his own blood, and hath made 
us kings and priests unto God and his Father; to Him be 
glory and dominion for ever and ever, Amen ;" — declaring that 
this language was what I desired they might be all enabled to 
adopt from their own blessed experience; and proclaiming 
amongst them the glory of the gospel day, — " When the earth 
shall be filled with the knowledge of the Lord, as the waters 
cover the sea." I had to show the indispensable necessity of our 
possessing the true faith of the gospel, once delivered to the 
saints, and still delivered to all true believers in the spiritual 
appearance of its only Author and Finisher, in the heart of 
man at this day ; which faith worketh by love, purifieth the 
heart, and giveth the victory over sin, and the evil propensities 
of human nature. This is the faith of the Son of God, who 
loved us and gave himself for us ; and is only bestowed on the 
simple, humble, child-like, and obedient followers of the lowly 
Jesus, in the way of self-denial and the daily cross ; these 
henceforth live not unto themselves, but unto Him who died 
for them and rose again. The dear children were directed to 
hearken to that voice which saith, " I love them that love me, 



640 CHAPTER XXXIV. [1837. 

and they that seek me early shall find me." I had for some 
time to wade, as it were, against wind and tide; but eventually it 
proved a solid opportunity : the goodliness of man was laid low, 
as in dust and ashes, before the power of an endless life. 

11th. (First-day.) — Since last Sixth day morning, way 
has opened in the minds of those about us, in a remarkable 
manner, as if the ever-blessed Master had directed our steps 
to a place, where He himself intended to come, in his own 
appointed time, in condescending mercy to a poor, way-worn, 
unprofitable servant. It was now proposed by William 
Williams, that I should attend their place of public worship, 
and after the customary service was gone through in the New 
Zealand language, according to their prescribed forms ; he said, 
' if you have a word for the people, I will interpret for you.' 
This was more than I had looked for, or dared to hope, but a 
few days ago. Although not exactly accordant with my own 
views, or if I might have chosen for myself, what I should have 
proposed ; yet I have of late, I think, learned to be willing 
almost to become all things, and to submit to all things, how- 
ever humiliating to the creaturely part, that would lead to an 
opening for me to proclaim to others the glad tidings of salvation, 
through a Saviour's love. At the proper time, we accompanied 
William Williams and family to the place of worship. That I 
might not be at a loss, he said, when they had gone through 
their part, he would come and conduct me to the proper place 
in front of the people, which was raised higher than the platform 
to assist the speaker's voice. We sat on one side of the con- 
gregation, on a low form, attracting the attention of many, by 
retaining our seats, while all, but ourselves, stood, or knelt, as 
occasion required. When all was gone through, William 
Williams threw aside his surplice, and fetched me to the 
appointed spot, where we stood together in silence ; until I re- 
minded the people, that we were in the presence of Him, with- 
out whose knowledge a sparrow cannot fall to the ground : but, 
though heaven is his throne, and the earth his footstool, yet to 
this man will he look, even unto Him that is poor, and of a con- 
trite spirit, and who trembleth at the word of his power. I had 



1836.] chapter xxxiv. CAl 

largely to testify of the love of God, as it is in Christ Jesus, and 
to turn the attention of the people to the light of His unspeak- 
able gift, which shineth in every heart ; who once in a body of 
flesh spoke to man upon the earth, but now speaketh from 
heaven, by the Holy Spirit ; and to all that believe in it, and 
obey it, it is the power of God unto salvation. The counte- 
nances of some of these dear people spoke louder than words, 
that they had fallen upon the stone of Israel, — their brokenness 
could not be hid ; to such, the message of everlasting love 
flowed freely, and I humbly trust, was as a shower upon the 
thirsty soil. It was an open and relieving season : — it was the 
Lord's doing, and, I believe, marvellous in the eyes of some 
present. There were several European families, besides those 
of artizans, attached one way or other to the mission; which, 
with the boys"' school and the natives of the surrounding neigh- 
bourhood, formed a considerable body of the people : but the 
praise w r as His alone, who wrought the work ; and surely some 
of these were constrained to render unto Him of his due. In 
the afternoon we attended the meeting again, but my lips were 
closed up : it afterwards appeared that some were looking for 
words, and were disappointed. 

12th. — Before getting up this morning, I found there was 
something gathering upon my mind towards the children in 
the school ; and knowing that the whole family would be col- 
lected together at seven o'clock, I thought it best to speak with 
William Williams, without loss of time. Meeting him soon 
after, I told him that I wished to have a little time in the course 
of their usual family devotion that morning, mentioning the 
opportunity after the chapter had been read, as most likely to 
answer my purpose, and not to interfere with them ; — for this, 
he readily made way. As the whole company are accustomed 
to kneel down at the conclusion of the chapter, I thought there 
might be a little unsettlement on this account, particularly 
as the boys knew not of the alteration ; however, with a 
simple motion of the master's hand, all remained in still- 
ness. After sitting silent awhile, I revived our Lord's ex- 
pressions, — " Herein is my Father glorified, that ye bear much 
fruit; so shall ye be my disciples," — which were spoken to 

9 T 



642 CHAPTER XXXIV. [1886. 

his immediate followers, when comparing himself and them 
to the vine and its branches, so beautifully illustrative and 
instructive : — " As a branch cannot bear fruit, except it 
abide in the vine, no more can ye except ye abide in me. He 
that abideth in me, and I in him, the same bringeth forth 
much fruit ; for without me ye can do nothing." How then 
can we without Him glorify the God and Father of our Lord 
Jesus Christ, or exhibit in the sight of others that heavenly 
badge, which designates his true disciples. I had, also, to 
remind the younger branches present, of their privileges and 
advantages, far above the lot of many, in being placed under 
such care, in a situation so guarded ; where every thing is con- 
ducted for the promotion of their best welfare, and governed by 
the law of love and kindness : having the Holy Scriptures 
read to them daily, which point to the Saviour, from their 
earliest pages, by holy promises and prophecies, which were 
fulfilled in the fulness of time, to every jot and tittle ; that 
through patience and comfort of them we might have hope ; — 
which are also able to make wise unto salvation, through faith 
which is in Christ Jesus ; and yet they cannot be understood 
without the assistance of the same Holy Spirit, which inspired 
the holy men that gave them forth. We can know nothing 
of the things which belong unto God the Father, but through 
the Holy Spirit of his Son. And although all are not called to 
be apostles, or prophets, or teachers, or workers of miracles, 
yet we are called to glory and to virtue, with a high and holy 
calling ; and to show forth the praises of Him, who hath called 
us out of darkness into His marvellous light, by bringing 
forth the fruits of love, joy, peace, long-suffering, gentleness, 
goodness, faith, meekness, temperance, wrought by the power 
of the Spirit of the Lord Jesus, in our hearts. After bidding 
them an affectionate farewell in the Lord, I sat down. 

After breakfast, preparation was made for our departure ; 
but from one cause or other, this was delayed until near noon. 
During this interval, I called to see the wife of one of the 
missionaries, who had long been an invalid, but is now con- 
sidered in a state of convalescence. It arose in my mind to 
tell her, that it is by these things we live, and by this, is the 



1836.] chapter xxxiv. 643 

life of the spirit, which inherits the kingdom ; and which retains 
in meekness and lowliness, as it is concerned to pray always 
with all prayer and supplication, watching thereunto. Henry 
Hobart and W. R. Wade, accompanied my son Charles on 
horseback, but a cart being provided on account of my lame- 
ness, I was conveyed in it a great part of the way. We reached 
Keri-eri Kby five o'clock ; and having nothing to detain us 
there, proceeded towards the Bay of Islands, as soon as a boat 
could be got ready : we were favoured to reach the vessel soon 
after ten o'clock p. m., and to find all well on board, which was 
cause of thankfulness on my part, as the neighbourhood of the 
Bay is a very dissipated and wicked place. We had been absent 
ten days. 

17th. — Since returning from Waimate, and getting well 
rested, I have nearly got rid of my lameness. In the day-time 
we have been engaged in selecting school materials, for the use 
of the native children, from the stock presented to us by the 
British and Foreign School Society in London ; also a variety 
of religious and temperance tracts, with clothing for the native 
children, to a considerable extent ; these we conveyed to the 
station at Paihia in the evening. On Fifth day we sat down 
together in our usual way, and were favoured to get into 
quiet. For some days I have been waiting to see what was 
likely to open for me, in the line of duty, and now find that 
the minds of some in this neighbourhood have been turned 
towards me, who have it in their power to lend a hand of help, 
to forward the work in which I am engaged. 

This morning, Charles Baker came off to say, that there 
would be an opening for my going to Korarareka to-morrow 
to attend the native meeting ; and that afterwards, there 
would be a meeting held for the English residents in this 
neighbourhood. He also said, that Henry Williams and 
himself had concluded to prepare a notice, stating that a 
member of the Society of Friends would be there, perhaps 
mentioning my name, and would give them an address. To 
avail myself of the opportunity of attending these meetings 
was a duty from which I was not satisfied to shrink ; but I 
could not agree to the notice without its being worded in such 

2 t 2 



644 CHAPTER XXXIV. [1836. 

a manner, that none would be disappointed, if I should have 
nothing to say to them. He said, the notice was so qualified, 
that that would be fully understood by all parties. 

18th. (First day.) — Charles Baker came on board in the 
forenoon, and we proceeded with him up the bay, and landed at 
Korarareka. A considerable time was then occupied in going- 
round to the different huts, (of the natives,) to rouse them up 
and persuade them to attend the meeting. I could perceive that 
Charles Baker availed himself of the circumstance of my 
having been among the islands in the South Seas, with the 
glad tidings of the gospel ; when one of the chiefs immediately 
asked, ' if the people of those islands had listened. - ' I am not 
aware of the reply of our interpreter to this question, though 
we fully understood the sort of conversation going forward, 
by the names of the different islands that were mentioned ; but 
the chief who was then lying on the ground, wrapped in a large 
Witney blanket, seemed determined to attend the meeting, 
though not in the habit of so doing, and quickly starting up 
retired into his hut,— but soon made his appearance again, 
dressed in European clothing, and was about the first man to 
go into the meeting, when the bell rang. Charles Baker 
occupied a short time with them in the native language ; but 
they came in, in such a straggling, careless manner, that they 
had scarcely all assembled before he had finished. The number 
altogether was very small ; but the love of the gospel flowed 
towards them, as numbered among those for whom the Saviour 
died, and rose again, that they might live. The truths of the 
gospel were sounded among them ; and they were invited to 
accept the terms of salvation then proclaimed, — " Believe on the 
Lord Jesus Christ, and be saved." They were directed to turn 
inward to the true light, "that lighteth every man that 
cometh into the world ;" for this light is Christ, the light of 
the world, and the Saviour of the world, who by His Holy 
Spirit, shineth in every heart. In this light they must be 
willing to believe, which would not only show them their sins, 
but if these were forsaken and repented of, would also save them 
from their sins. With more words they were exhorted and 
entreated to repent, believe, and obey. The people were very 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXIV. 645 

attentive and solid : may the Lord soften their hearts, and 
incline them to ponder the things which they heard spoken. 
The interval was short, after this meeting concluded, before 
that for the English residents was to begin. We dined upon 
such eatables as we brought with us in our pockets, and dis- 
tributed what we could spare, to the boat's crew of natives ; 
but we were not in a neighbourhood where a drink of water 
could be readily procured, before the people began to gather ; 
who now appeared in numbers far greater than had been con- 
templated. The families which had attended the missionary 
establishment at Paihia in the forenoon, now crossed the bay 
in their boats to this meeting, amounting, with some well-dis- 
posed persons from the shipping, and others perhaps prompted 
by curiosity, to about seventy persons. While Charles Baker 
went through what he considered himself bound to perform, 
I sat more than half-an-hour, but never under a feeling more 
destitute and more sensible of weakness and inability ; and yet 
the present appeared as an opportunity afforded, to declare 
that the Son of God is come into the hearts of all true believers, 
and in boundless love and mercy is still standing and knocking 
at the door of the hearts of all : that to those who are willing 
to hear His voice, open unto Him, and receive His Holy Spirit, 
He will come in unto them ; and if His purifying and cleansing 
operations are patiently submitted to, with full belief in His 
power to save, — their sins, though many, if repented of, will 
be purged away through His blood, and remembered no more. 
Of this, I had largely to testify, as no new doctrine, but an 
incontrovertible, established truth ; having holy writ for its 
author without us, and an evidence which liveth and abideth for 
ever, within us, even in our own hearts ; for " he that hath the 
Son of God, hath the witness in himself,'''' — His law is written 
in the heart ; — the law of the spirit of life in Christ Jesus, 
which makes free from the law of sin and death. The necessity 
was urged of a serious examination being entered into indi- 
vidually to ascertain whether we really know the law written 
in our hearts, — the law of the spirit of life in Christ Jesus, — 
the faithful witness against sin and transgression ; these keep 
the soul of man in darkness and in death : but he that hath 



646 CHAPTER XXXIV. [1836. 

the Son of God hath life, and he that hath not the Son of 
God hath not life, but the wrath of God abideth on him. We 
were favoured with a solemn season together, though the 
opportunity was brought about in an unusual manner, and 
agreed upon in the first place without my knowledge, or any 
suggestion of mine. 

25^. (First day.) — On Fifth day last, we had a visit 
from Nathaniel Turner, the senior Wesleyan missionary at 
Hokianga, with whom I became acquainted at Hobart Town 
in 1834. From all we have seen, New Zealand is at present 
a barren soil, where religion does not thrive. Without any 
previous knowledge of the real state of things at Hokianga, I 
never saw my way to make an attempt to visit its neighbour- 
hood, either by sea or land. Nathaniel Turner said that the 
state of the road is so bad at this time, that he believed I could 
not, at my age, accomplish a journey thither ; but that they 
should be glad to welcome us, if it could be done. I am fully 
aware that the undertaking would be attended with difficulty 
and fatigue ; but if I felt the same inducement to go there, 
which has hitherto enabled me, as it were " to run through a 
troop" of difficulties, " and leap over a wall 11 of opposition, all 
the statements we have had of the difficulties by land, and 
the danger by sea, should not deter me from endeavouring to 
reach it. 

Having been invited to attend a meeting to be held this 
evening, by the whole of the members of the mission at Paihia, 
at the house of Henry Williams ; and believing it best for me 
to be there, we landed in time to take tea with the family. 
When the meeting was gathering, Henry Williams asked me 
if I would like to read a chapter in the Bible. I declined the 
offer, at the same time requesting that a little time might be 
afforded me when the reading was over ; adding, that if I had 
any thing to say to them, they should have it. The chapter 
had not been long finished before I stood up, which produced a 
general silence. And after referring to the affecting example 
of the dear Son of God, as set forth in the language of inspira- 
tion, — " Lo, I come to do thy will, God, 11 I told them that I 
was among them in the bonds of the gospel, and was desirous 



1836.] CHAPTER XXXIV. (J47 

of being found in the counsel of this will, which is ever excel- 
lent ; and I stood resigned to minister in the ability which might 
be afforded, and hoped to be faithful thereunto on the present 
occasion : declaring, that it is only those that do the will of 
the Father, that shall know of the doctrine of the Son. His 
doctrine shall descend as the dew, and as the small rain upon the 
tender herb, upon those that do the Father's will : they shall 
inherit substance, eternal substance, — the living and substantial 
truth, pure and undefiled, " as it is in Jesus ;" — truth in the 
inward parts, which the Lord desireth. Such are the Lord's chil- 
dren, and compose His church on earth; they are all taught of 
Him : " in righteousness shall they be established, and great shall 
be their peace." " This is the heritage of the servants of the Lord, 
and their righteousness is of me, saith the Lord." There is no 
way of becoming of this blessed number, but by a knowledge of 
the doctrine of the Son, our Lord and Saviour Jesus Christ. 
" This is my beloved Son, in whom I am well pleased ; hear 
him." This is the will of Grod the Father ; and those who are 
faithful in doing this, shall assuredly be taught of the Son : 
they shall know of His doctrine. In this way I was engaged to 
turn the minds of all present, to the teaching of the Holy Spirit 
of the Lord Jesus, which would lead them safely along through 
time, and sustain them in a boundless eternity. This appeared 
to be well received : a solemn feeling spread over us, under 
which we separated. 

31 st. — Most of the week has been employed in preparing 
documents for England, a vessel being nearly ready to sail from 
hence. On Fifth day our little meeting was held as usual. 
On Sixth day, a proposition was made to pay another visit to 
Koua-Koua, next First clay ; but not feeling any thing towards 
it, I declined going. When on shore yesterday, I met with a 

missionary, Wilson, just arrived from the seat of war, 

having been driven with his family from the station occupied 
by him. The account he gives of their vindictive barbarism 
and cannibalism is truly horrifying. On his way, he had to 
pass by a piece of raised ground, upon which the heads of the 
vanquished were placed, with their faces to the sun, as they are 
seen to most advantage in this position. A human heart was 



648 CHAPTER XXXIV. [1837. 

stuck upon a spear as a token of victory. He saw one tribe re- 
turning from the battle-field, loaded with human flesh for them- 
selves and their friends to feast upon. Miserable women and 
children followed in train after the mangled remains of their 
husbands, sons, brothers, and fathers ; themselves captives, and 
doomed to slavery the rest of their days. He saw a child 
amusing himself with putting his fingers into the eyes and 
nostrils of a human head, which had been given him to play 
with. Who can wonder at their hardness of heart, when thus 
trained from infancy to habits of savage cruelty and barbarism ! 
At one place which they were destroying with fire, their conduct 
was really fiend-like. In one instance, a missionary family had 
been plundered by their own congregation : the reason assigned 
for this shameful conduct was, that they expected the mission- 
ary was about to leave the neighbourhood, probably taking for 
granted that the property would fall into the hands of their 
enemies. 

First Month 1st, 1837. (First day.) — Remained on board 
all the day, low and stripped, like her who had lost her Lord, 
and knew not where to find him. Assembled the crew both 
in the forenoon and afternoon as usual. It seems as if some- 
thing was gathering upon my mind towards all the members of 
the mission, in a collective capacity ; and standing in resigna- 
tion, I felt somewhat relieved. 

6th. — Much of our time has been spent on board this week, 
owing to different persons coining from the shore. To-day 
I learned that the missionaries from Waimate, who had been 
generally over at Paihia during the time called Christmas, 
with those from Keri-Keri, had all returned to their own 
stations, which at once set aside my seeing them in a collec- 
tive capacity, which I had a little thought of, but had appa- 
rently been prevented from moving in ; and now the time 
was gone past, this brought me under a painful exercise of 
mind. To-day the wind is so strong as to prevent our getting 
on shore, our vessel tumbling about, almost as if she was 
not in harbour. In the forenoon we held our little meeting, 
which had been set aside yesterday by the confused state 
of things on board. My state was similar to that of the 



1837.] chapter xxxiv. 649 

heath in the desert, which knowetb. not when good cometli ; 
and as the barren mountain top, where there is neither dew, 
nor rain, nor fields of offering : the accuser of the brethren 
seemed to have prevailed against me. I was smitten and 
wounded within ; and a wounded spirit who can bear ? 

7th. — Early this morning the wind, which had been strong- 
through the night lessened, and the rain fell without intermis- 
sion through the day, which not a little contributed to darken 
the gloom already spread over my mind. My Charles at the 
same time was unwell, with a sore throat and other symptoms 
of a violent cold. 

8th. (First day.) — To-day the rain fell at intervals in 
light showers : our sailors were assembled as usual ; and in the 
afternoon two strangers joined us from the shore. I had to 
testify, that the Almighty has not left himself without a witness 
in every heart, which shineth as a light in a dark place ; and 
is no other than the light of the Holy Spirit of the Lord Jesus, 
" the true light that lighteth every man that cometh into the 
world," &c. My mind has since felt more peaceful. This 
afternoon the Chieftain, a British whaling vessel, which was at 
Tongataboo at the same time as the Henry Freeling, arrived in 
the Bay of Islands. 

11th.- — Yesterday, employed in disposing of articles of hard- 
ware, &c. The way seemed now to open with clearness, before 
leaving New Zealand, to draw up an address to the missionaries 
stationed at Paihia, Keri-Keri, Waimate, Tepuna, &c, and all 
the members belonging to the ' Church Missionary Society, 1 
(as it is denominated by themselves,) employed in New 
Zealand ; and as I endeavoured to keep close to this prospect, 
it more and more brightened before me. 

12th. — We held our usual meeting, and although a low time, 
I felt comforted and peaceful. In the afternoon took exercise on 
shore, after having been detained on board, by one circumstance 
or other, nearly a fortnight. As the way opened, I bfgan to 
commit to paper, from time to time, the matter which arose 
towards the members of the mission. 

15th. (First day.) — Believed it my place to remain with 
our people on board, feeling nothing towards the shore ; and 



650 CHAPTER XXXIV. [1837. 

being well aware that the whole neighbourhood of the bay, 
except where missionary interest prevails, answers nearly, if not 
altogether, the description of the place, where Satan's seat is. 

16th. — Engaged in writing a fair copy of an address to the 
members of the mission. In the evening went on shore for 
exercise ; and thinking that those at the station at Paihia, 
might suppose I shunned calling upon them of late, I told 
Charles Baker, that seeing their members could not be collected 
together, as had been the case at the Sandwich and Friendly 
Islands, I was preparing a written address to them ; at the 
same time I informed him, that the time of our departure from 
the Bay was drawing near. This evening the Ganges, an 
American whaler, arrived from the neighbourhood of Madagas- 
car. Not far distant from New Zealand, her boats were engaged 
in pursuit of whales, and affecting to relate, when night came 
on, one boat was missing altogether. There was no trace 
whatever of the cause of this disastrous event : whether the 
boat had been dashed in pieces by a whale, or towed under 
water when fastened to one by a harpoon, or had lost sight of 
the ship, and could not find her again before night overtook 
them, cannot be ascertained. The captain, fourth mate, car- 
penter, and three others, were in this boat when she left the 
Ganges. Three other American whalers have also arrived ; 
and one English merchant ship, from Cloudy Bay, in the 
South of New Zealand. 

17th. — Yesterday and to-day, employed in getting ready for 
sea. Having parted with a considerable weight of iron goods 
out of the hold, and our general stock of stores and provisions 
being greatly lessened, I thought it needful to procure a quan- 
tity of stone, lest the vessel should be endangered by being too 
light in the water, and thus rendered unable to carry sail in a 
comfortable manner. James Busby, the British resident, very 
kindly supplied our wants, from the margin of his estate, which 
is washed by the sea. In the morning called upon Charles 
Baker, and afterwards took leave of James Busby, by whom 
we had been treated with much kindness and hospitality. 

1 8th. — All being ready, at day-break this morning the Henry 
Freeling got under weigh, and dropped down the Bay opposite 



1837-] CHAPTER XXXIV. 651 

the station at Paihia, where we anchored again. We landed 
in the forenoon on the north side, settled our accounts, and 
bade farewell to the parties as we went along. My address 
being copied fairly, and various articles put together to remune- 
rate the natives for their services in boats, &c, we landed in 
the evening for the last time at Paihia, and delivered them with 
the address to the care of Charles Baker, at whose house we 
drank tea. As a reward of industry, and an encouragement to 
persevere, we presented to a native farmer of promise, who goes 
by the name of industrious David, a spade, ship axe, drawing- 
knife, small saw, and a bunch of gimblets. We also gave a Bible 
to a Sheffield woman, the wife of a blacksmith residing in the 
Bay, and numerous articles of clothing to the native children ; — 
two Dutch hoes and a spade for Charles Baker, with sundry 
drugs and glass bottles for James Stack were also landed. We 
called upon all the resident families, and saw those who had 
been forced from their stations to the southward by the war, 
before we returned on board. Before reaching the vessel a light 
land breeze had sprung up ; and the night being moonlight we 
weighed and steered towards the entrance of the Bay with a fine 
breeze in our favour. At half-past nine o'clock, Gilbert Maer, 
the post-master, with whom we had had some considerable 
traffic, who had very kindly brought us off some milk, and accom- 
panied us until clear of all danger, left us in his own boat, with 
a crew of natives, and I believe sincerely desired for us a pros- 
perous voyage. At midnight, we were clear of the islands 
which form the entrance to the Bay, and from which it is pro- 
bable the appellation of the Bay of Islands was originally taken. 
I may long have to mourn, on account of the lamentable state 
of the poor miserable natives of New Zealand, bound down as 
with chains in the service of Satan, and the dupes of his agents, 
who are mingled among them, of a lighter coloured skin, but 
in many instances, it is greatly to be feared, the very scum and 
offscouring of the nations which gave them birth, and not a 
few of these mine own countrymen : however, under all these 
unhappy circumstances, the New Zealanders are a noble race of 
men ; and though far behind-hand in that gentleness and docility 
which characterize the swarthy multitudes of the more sultry 



652 CHAPTER XXXIV. [1837. 

climates, in which the Georgian, Society, Hervey, and other 
isles of the Pacific ocean are placed ; and they certainly possess 
greater energy and firmness of character. This unhappily in 
their present lost and undone and, I may add, betrayed con- 
dition, is only devoted to the most barbarous purposes, for the 
destruction of their fellow-men. But if the day should ever come, 
when the benign principles of the everlasting gospel take root 
and spread among them, soften their hearts, and prepare them 
for that wisdom from above, which is pure, and peaceable, and 
profitable in all things to direct into the love of God and love 
to man, — they would then far outstrip those who have long 
since made only a profession of the Christian religion ; both 
in exalting and promoting the spiritual kingdom of our 
Lord and Saviour Jesus Christ, in the heart of man, to the 
praise and glory of God, and the welfare of their own species. 
With this view of a deeply injured race of my fellow-creatures, 
constituting a part of the innumerable inheritance of the Lord 
Jesus, I leave their shores with a peaceful and easy mind ; — at 
the same time, comforted under a belief, that the address to the 
missionary establishment will now circulate to every member ; 
many of whom could not possibly have been present at a tran- 
sitory interview, however regularly appointed. On looking at 
this subject, I have thought that the conflict of mind I have 
lately had to pass through, might be the means graciously 
vouchsafed, to beget in me a willingness to prepare the address. 
My desire is, that by it, and through it, the great name may 
be exalted, and the kingdom of Christ Jesus in the heart better 
understood and believed in, than heretofore has been the case, 
in the minds of many. May the Lord on high prepare the 
ground, in which it may, as seed, be sown ; and may He bless 
it with fertility to bring forth fruit that will lastingly remain ; 
— that He may be glorified thereby. 

The following are extracts from the address to the mis- 
sionaries in New Zealand. 

' Finding that I have no longer any place in these 

parts, and being at the same time restrained from journeying 
forward, as when the cloud rested on the tabernacle formerly, 



1837.] CHAPTER XXXIV. 6-53 

I have endeavoured to wait in singleness of heart at the posts 
of wisdom's gate. I find that, before being liberated from the 
Bay of Islands, there is something due on my part to the 
members of the mission ; for whom I feel too much love to with- 
hold any thing, that may tend to strengthen or encourage them 
on their way to the everlasting kingdom. 

In communicating what may be unfolded to my view, 
should it be my lot to impart any spiritual benefit, let it be 
remembered, that it is the Lord, from whom alone cometh 
every good and perfect gift, and that the writer is but an 
unprofitable servant. 

Among the different Isles that stud the capacious bosom of 
the Pacific, to which my steps have been directed, opportuni- 
ties have most unexpectedly presented, for seeing the different 
members of the respective missions with their families, concen- 
trated at one place ; but in New Zealand, circumstances not 
only local, but of a deeply affecting nature, combine to render 
this impracticable, if not impossible. I have therefore no 
alternative, but through this medium to salute you on the 
broad basis of the gospel ; which, expanding to earth's utmost 
bound, embraces all, while it ever breathes in angelic unison, 
" Glory to God in the highest, on earth peace, good- will 
toward men." 

We live in no common times, and the present is a day 
of distress and gloominess, as the morning spread upon the 
mountains, before illumined by the brightness of the rising 
sun ; — a day when some, struck with dismay as when a 
standard-bearer fainteth, are ready to exclaim with Elijah the 
prophet of the Lord, — " I only am left, and they seek my life." 
" Oh ! the depth of the riches, both of the wisdom and know- 
ledge of God ! how unsearchable are his judgments, and his 
ways past finding out !" Who among the sons of the mighty, 
at this cloudy season, can develope the strength of the remnant 
of the called and chosen and faithful, when the penetrating 
eye of the holy prophet, strong in the power of the Spirit, was 
ignorant in his day of calamity and distress, that the Lord had 
seven thousand men that had not bowed the knee to the image 
of Baal ? It is enough for mortal man to be allowed to parti- 



654 CHAPTEK XXXIV. [1887. 

cipate in the things that are revealed, and no more is required 
from each of us in return, than sufficient ability is given us to 
perform : our own individual duty is all we have to attend to, 
or shall be accountable for. It is not for us to say, "and what 
shall this man do V lest the reproof should be ours, " what is 
that to thee? Follow thou me." So that while surrounding 
circumstances exhibit ample cause for lamentation, and mourn- 
ing and woe ; still we must not shrink, nor suffer ourselves 
to be drawn aside from following our Lord and Master, by 
searching after secret things which belong unto God, or in 
brooding over results beyond our reach, and our power to 
control. Our insidious adversary will not fail to prompt to 
any exercises calculated to prevent our seeking after that know- 
ledge which giveth life ; and the more plausible the engage- 
ment of mind, the less we suspect that a snare lies beneath. 
It is no matter to him, how near the Christian's path we may 
tread, if not in it ; — we are the more lulled into mistaken 
security : even under the semblance of promoting the cause of 
religion, our attention may be so unsuspectingly but completely 
engrossed, that the great work of labouring in our own vineyards, 
of seeking salvation in our own hearts, may be overlooked and 
neglected. It is of little consequence by what bait the grand 
adversary succeeds; his purpose is fully accomplished, if we 
are but kept destitute of that knowledge which is life eternal. 

To the heart that is upright and fixed, trusting in the 
Lord, the trials and conflicts of time are highest, richest bless- 
ings, operating like a weight of costly treasure on a pillar 
erect; the greater the burden, the firmer and stronger it stands, 
and the closer it presses the foundation. All the sufferings of 
the present time permitted to assail us, are not worthy to be 
compared to the glory revealed in that man ; because he hath 
made the Lord his refuge, and the Most High his habitation, 
in the day of trouble and adversity : he can say from heart- 
felt knowledge, in humble resignation, — " it is the Lord." 

In the course of the last two years, I have had an oppor- 
tunity of witnessing the attempts that are making to benefit 
the benighted inhabitants of various islands in the Southern 
and Northern Pacific Ocean, and have been enabled to visit 



18o7.] CHAPTER XXXIV. 655 

almost without exception, the solitary and secluded allotments 
of those engaged in this important work. Although this 
has been but partially the case in New Zealand, yet opportuni- 
ties have been afforded of seeing the faces of many of the 
members of this extensive mission from remote places, as well 
as of those who reside in this immediate neighbourhood, who 
with others scattered among the different isles, where my lot 
has been cast, are dwelling among strangers, in a strange land. 
Having myself dwelt among a people whose language I could 
not understand, gives me to know the heart of a stranger, and 
to feel for him ; and I also know his only place of safety and 
refuge to be Christ Jesus the Lord : — if He be with us, we have 
nothing to fear, for He is love itself, and " perfect love casteth 
out fear." It is that which revives and animates the fainting, 
wayworn traveller, to persevere in the tribulated path. It is the 
effect of this heaven-born principle, and the true dignity of its 
nature, to sustain the Christian with fortitude and innocent 
boldness, above the torments of fear, and far from the reach 
of terror. 

Although my tarriance has been but short among you, it has 
been long enough to allow me to witness the upright devoted- 
ness of heart and intention, of some whom our intercourse has 
given me an opportunity to know and love ; and to feel and 
sympathize with them. I am also aware of the great difficul- 
ties to be encountered in the prosecution of the cause of truth 
and righteousness, and of the many obstacles thrown in the 
way by the agents of Satan : but if the work be the Lord's, it 
will assuredly prosper, though " the heathen''' should " rage, and 
the people imagine a vain thing ;" however " the kings of 
the earth" may " set themselves, and the rulers take counsel 
together. ,1 " He that sitteth in the heavens shall laugh, the 
Lord shall have them in derision." 

I believe that you are all desirous of knowing the Lord for 
yourselves ; and I feel bound to encourage you to follow on to 
know Him, desiring to be your companion in a pursuit of such 
eternal consequence ; for in the same proportion as we ourselves 
grow in the saving knowledge of our Lord and Saviour Jesus 
Christ : so shall we be in a capacity to benefit others. My 
desire is, that none of us may be contented with saying, we 



656 CHAPTEK XXXIV. [1837. 

hope that we are led and guided by the Holy Spirit ; for I can 
tell you, " in the word of the truth of the gospel," that no man 
led by the Spirit of the Lord can have any doubt or hesitation 
on this account, any more than he can doubt the shining of 
the sun, when he sees it at noon-day : 'the way-faring men, 
though fools, shall not err therein, or be mistaken. If we are 
not in possession of this inestimable gift, the fault is our own, — 
w^e have the word of a King for it, even the King of saints, and 
King of kings ; — " ask and it shall be given you, seek and 
ye shall find, knock and it shall be opened unto you ;" again, 
" if ye then, being evil, know how to give good gifts unto your 
children, how much more shall your heavenly Father give 
the Holy Spirit to them that ask him. 11 But then it must 
be sought in faith, and as by those that have none in 
heaven but the Lord, nor in all the earth in comparison of 
Him. It must be sought as prescribed by the lip of Truth 
himself, '■'■first ,*" and before every earthly consideration what- 
ever : " seek ye first the kingdom of heaven and His righteous- 
ness, and all these things shall be added unto you. 11 Without 
strict compliance with the terms " seek ye first, 11 we ask and 
receive not, because we ask amiss. Let none be discouraged ; 
there is no cause for it. " Heaven and earth shall pass away," 
but the words of our King " shall not pass away ;" his promises 
are yea and amen for ever. " Seek and ye shall find; 11 but 
let us seek aright : for " the Lord is good unto them that 
wait for him — to the soul that seeketh him;' 1 and for the 
encouragement of such as thus seek and wait for the coming of 
the Lord's hoty Spirit, like those who watch for the morning, 
after a dark and dismal night of peril, — for such as these, the 
gracious promise through the inspired prophet is designed, that 
they " through patience and comfort of the scriptures might 
have hope r 11 — " the Lord whom ye seek, shall suddenly come 
-to his temple, even the messenger of the covenant, whom ye 
delight in ; behold he shall come, saith the Lord of Hosts. 11 
The heart of man must be purified and cleansed, before it can 
become the temple of a pure and holy Grod. " But who may 
abide the day of His coming I and who shall stand, when He 
appeareth V Truly nothing in man or of man ; — self must be 
cast out, and all that belongs to it : for " He is like a refiner's 



1837.] CHAPTER XXXIV. 657 

fire and like fuller's soap. He shall sit as a refiner and purifier 
of silver ; and He shall purify the sons of Levi, (the priest- 
hood He himself hath chosen,) that they may offer unto the 
Lord an offering in righteousness ;" — even those whom He hath 
chosen and called to proclaim the glad tidings of His gospel in 
His name and by His power and authority, having their feet 
shod with His holy sanctifying preparation. O ! how great is 
the work to be done in the heart of every individual, before it is 
fit for the reception of this heavenly guest, who only dwelleth 
in the temple of an undefiled heart ! How many baptisms have 
we to pass through, in order to purify and prepare us for the 
knowledge of the only true God, and Jesus Christ whom He 
hath sent " once in a body of flesh on the earth, — but who now 
appears by the eternal Spirit in the heart of every man. We 
have great instruction from the narrative in holy writ, of the 
preparation which Elijah had to pass through on Mount Horeb, 
before he was in a situation to discern the " still small voice." 
He had first to witness " a great and strong wind to break in 
pieces the rocks," — as a figure of that power, which alone can 
subdue and soften the rocky and obdurate nature in the human 
heart ; — " but the Lord was not in the wind." " And after the 
wind, an earthquake," — another needful dispensation for the 
reduction of the creature, and the shaking and separating of 
the earthly part, and every thing in man that cannot abide 
the day of the Lord's coming, or stand when he appeareth. 
— " But the Lord was not in the earthquake : and after the 
earthquake a fire ;" — that searching, consuming, baptising 
element — the fire of the Lord, that consumes not only that 
which is light and chaffy, but also the dross and tin and 
reprobate silver ; that nothing may remain, but what can endure 
and abide the trial, as pure gold.' — " But the Lord was not in 
the fire : and after the fire, a still small voice." This ordeal 
we must all pass through, according to our measure : it is the 
great work of regeneration ; and in order to hear this " still 
small voice," we must ourselves be still, as with our faces 
wrapped in a mantle. The prince of this world must be cast 
out, and his strong holds pulled down ; all our imaginations 
and every high thing that exalt eth itself against the knowledge 

2u 



658 CHAPTER XXXIV. [1837. 

of God must be cast down, and brought into captivity unto 
obedience, before we can know Christ to be in us, " the hope of 
glory. 1 ' The silence of all flesh must be attained : the creature 
must cease from its own willings and runnings and strivings : 
the holy command must be obeyed, — " be still, and know that 
I am God : I will be exalted among the heathen : I will be 
exalted in the earth." Blessed and happy are they, who thus 
seek, and thus find ; and having found, to them the glorious 
day is come, when whatsoever they shall ask the Father in the 
name of the Son, He will do it. Before this day, how vain 
have been our petitions, because not in the name, not in the 
power of the Spirit of the Lord Jesus, but in our own strength, 
time and will. " Verily, verily, I say unto you, whatsoever 
ye shall ask of the Father in my name, he will give it you. 
Hitherto have ye asked nothing in my name. Ask and ye 
shall receive, that your joy may be full. At that day ye 
shall ask in my name, and I say not unto you that I will 
pray the Father for you ; for the Father himself loveth you, 
because ye have loved me, and have believed that I came out 
from God." 

I am reminded instructively of the confirming expressions of 
our dear Lord on another occasion, which prove to me how 
little can be done for the benefit of others, until the great and 
necessary work is first wrought in ourselves. Addressing 
Simon with the other disciples, he said, " Simon, Simon, behold 
Satan hath desired to have you, that he might sift you as 
wheat ; but I have prayed for thee that thy faith fail not ; and 
when thou art converted, strengthen thy brethren." As a 
stream cannot rise higher than the fountain from which it 
issues, so it is impossible for any to instruct others further 
than they themselves have learned in the school of Christ. 
Let us then seek, until we find the prize immortal. Let us 
be determined to know nothing, save Jesus Christ, and him 
crucified. Let nothing on earth prevent us from coming to the 
life-giving knowledge of the Holy Spirit of this crucified, risen, 
and glorified Lord, in our own hearts ; for unless we are cru- 
cified with Him to the world, and the world unto us, we can 
never rise with Him into life. And why should not we in this 



1837.] CHAPTER XXXIV. 659 

our day, be as complete as the Colossians, to whom the great 
Apostle writing, said, " and ye are complete in Him, which is 
the head of all principality and power ; in whom also ye are 
circumcised with the circumcision made without hands, in 
putting off the body of the sins of the flesh, by the circumcision 
of Christ; buried with Him in baptism, wherein also ye are 
risen with Him through the faith of the operation of God, who 
hath raised Him from the dead." The great apostle of the 
Gentiles and his contemporaries preached " Christ crucified, 
unto the Jews a stumbling block, and unto the Greeks foolish- 
ness ; but unto them which are called, both Jews and Greeks, 
Christ the power of God, and the wisdom of God," unto salvation. 
Alas ! we may see and believe from the conduct and conversation 
of thousands in this our gospel day, and these too in the higher 
walks of life, as well as in every other, without exclusion of sex, 
age, or condition, — that however this may be overlooked and un- 
heeded, the same will judge these unhappy mortals at the last 
day. They will then remember how they have been striven 
with on particular occasions, when the Lord's visitations have 
been extended towards them in love indescribable ; staining the 
glory of this world in their sight ; wooing, entreating, warning, 
and as when reasoning " of righteousness, temperance, and 
judgment to come, 11 making them afraid ; stirring up the pre- 
cious principle of life, procured by the shedding of a Saviour's 
blood ; — as when " an eagle stirreth up her nest, fluttereth over 
her young, spreadeth abroad her wings, 11 to strengthen, cherish, 
and save. A day will certainly come upon them as a thief 
in the night, unless averted by " repentance toward God, and 
faith toward our Lord Jesus Christ," when such will have, in 
spite of themselves, to look upon Him whom they have so long- 
pierced ; when they will find this " still small voice" to be the 
voice of the Lord in Spirit, " powerful and full of majesty," to 
the guilty soul. The judge standeth at the door — He who 
when on earth in the body prepared for him, told those who 
then disregarded His holy voice, that his words should judge 
them at the last day ; — " I judge no man," said he ; — " the word 
that I have spoken, the same shall judge him in the last day." 



660 CHAPTER XXXIV. [1837. 

Then let us press toward the mark for the prize immortal, 
the prize of the high calling of God in Christ Jesus : let us 
be found striving together for the faith of the gospel ; until we 
all come into the unity of the same, and thereby grow in grace 
and stature from measure to measure, unto the measure of the 
stature of the fulness of Christ Jesus our Lord. Let us not 
stop short, until we have obtained the like precious faith, once 
delivered to the saints ; — the true faith of the gospel, which 
worketh by love, purifieth the heart, and giveth victory over 
sin, death, hell, and the grave. A historical or traditional 
faith, or one that admits of a continuance in sin, is dead and 
unavailing ; but the faith of the gospel is a living, operative 
principle, — an impenetrable shield : it quencheth the fiery darts 
of the wicked, disarmeth sin, justifieth its happy possessor, 
and giveth peace with God, through our Lord Jesus Christ ; 
from whom alone it must be obtained, and for it we must all 
come to Him, in the humility and simplicity of little children ; 
of whom is the kingdom of heaven, though they be upon earth 
"the poor in spirit. 1 '' It is Jesus alone who imparts this 
heavenly treasure, — faith : He is the blessed author and finisher 
of it, and from him we must receive the precious gift into our 
hearts. " The righteousness of God is revealed from faith to 
faith,"" to those who walk in the obedience thereof ; it is indeed 
the life of the just, a glorious reality to those who are cruci- 
fied with Christ, and live thereby. These can adopt the apos- 
tolic language, and say from blessed experience, " I am crucified 
with Christ : nevertheless I live ; yet not I, but Christ liveth 
in me : and the life which I now live in the flesh, I live by the 
faith of the Son of God, who loved me, and gave himself for 
me. 11 " Happy is that people that is in such a case : yea, 
happy is that people, whose God is the Lord." In Him they 
live ; in Him they die ; and with Him they are everlastingly 
blessed. 

The love in which this is dictated, still flows in my heart 
towards you, and in the same I trust it will be received. And 
now let me commend you in apostolic language, " to God, 
and to the word of His grace, which is able to build you 



1837.J chapter xxxiv. 661 

up, and to give you an inheritance among all them which are 
sanctified ;" — even that eternal word, which liveth and abideth 
for ever.* 

' I remain your affectionate friend, &c. 

<d. w: 

Henry Freeling, of Paihia, Bay of Islands, 
First Month 18*A, 1837. 

* A copy of a letter from the missionaries at Paihia. 

' Church Missionary Society's Station, Paihia, Bay of Islands, 
" New Zealand, 18th January, 1837. 
' Reverend and dear Sir, 

' Before you bid adieu to New Zealand, we take this opportunity of 
expressing the pleasure, and, we hope, the edification we have derived, by 
your unexpected coming to this country . 

* We had heard of your benevolent mission to other islands of these 
seas ; but we now have to record the higher gratification of having seen 
you and your affectionate son amongst us. 

'We regret, that circumstances of war and tumult have not made it 
desirable for you to visit the more extensive field of our labour, south of 
the Bay of Islands. But we do hope, that the places favoured by your 
Christian example and addresses, may have seen and heard to profit, and 
that " at the last day" it may be found that your sojourn here has not 
been in vain. 

' One effect of your visit to New Zealand has been to remind us, tbat 
though " there are differences of administrations, it is the same spirit" 
which actuates the whole of Christ's mystical body, " the Church of the 
first-born, wbose names are written in heaven." With gratitude, also, 
we have to acknowledge your liberal bestowment of school-books, tracts, 
clothing for natives, medicines, &c, which will remain behind you as a 
memorial of your Christian kindness. 

' The pleasure of our meeting together, is, alas ! now embittered by 
the painfulness of separation ; — but our high calling entitles us to the 
privilege of a friendship, which is not interrupted by distance or time. 
We cannot, however, at your advanced age, and the immense distance 
which will ere long separate us, but be solemnly reminded of the affect- 
ing words of the venerable apostle to the elders of Ephesus, " And now 
I know that ye all among whom I have gone preaching the kingdom of 
God, shall see my face no more !" 

' It is our earnest prayer to God for you, that if consistent with His 
will, you may be spared to return to our beloved native land, and to the 
bosom of your family, to tell all your eyes have seen of " what God hath 
wrought among the Gentiles by the ministry of reconciliation." 

' Pray for us, that the word of the Lord may have free course, and be 



662 CHAPTER XXXIV. [1837. 

[No circumstance attending Daniel Wheeler's visit to the 
South Sea Islands, appears to have more painfully affected his 
feelings, than the observation forced upon him from place to 
place, of the demoralizing and devastating effects of the inter- 
course of the natives with the crews of vessels visiting their 
shores. In some letters, not forming a part of his Journal, he 
thus alludes to the subject.] 

We find that the voyages of the whaling-vessels are much 
longer than formerly, their success being more precarious and 
uncertain, owing to the increased number of ships engaged in 
that employ, which constantly disturb a great breadth of ocean, 
by looking over several hundred square miles of its surface 
every day ; so that the fish are becoming scarcer, and more 
shy than formerly. We should rejoice to hear of any cause 
that would reduce the number of shipping which visit these 
islands for supplies, and to refit ; as they only tend to diminish 
their population, by bringing spirituous liquors amongst the 
people, and by keeping alive a disease, the ravages of which 
are destroying whole families, both old and young, to an extent 
little contemplated in England, and truly painful and dis- 
tressing to be an eye-witness to, and which is greatly aggra- 
vated by the use of ardent spirits. Surely, something will be 
done to stop this desolating scourge of the human race. It is 
the suffering case of an afflicted, injured people, and calls for 
the attention, and that speedily, of the legislature of every 
country, but particularly of England and America, which are 
the nations principally implicated in this dreadful traffic. 
Scarcely a ship arrives, but what has for sale rum, muskets, 

glorified in New Zealand ; and that we may be delivered from unreason- 
able and wicked men. 

' Finally, Reverend and dear Sir, we bid you farewell, and remain in 
the bonds of Christian friendship. 

i Yours, very affectionately, 
' Charles Baker, { James Stack, 

William Colenss, William Thomas Fairburn. 

' P. S. — A difference of location of several of our brethren, and the 
absence of some from home, will not allow of their signing their names ; 
■but we can confidently say, they fully agree with us in this expression 
of our sentiments.' 



1837.] CHAPTER XXXIV. 663 

and gunpowder, for all of which the natives are extremely 
eager : many of these are denominated ' Temperance ships, 1 
and yet are engaged in producing madness amongst the 
natives, by furnishing the means of intoxication, at the same 
time supplying them with weapons of destruction to complete 
their misery. We saw much of this whilst our lot was cast 
amongst them : and although in certain of the islands the use 
of spirits is forbidden, and the article itself destroyed when 
found, yet, even in those, there are too many who carry on the 
trade in an underhand manner ; and of late its effects have 
been more and more apparent. Those who have it in their 
power effectually to stop it, are in their hearts desirous that it 
should be allowed ; they not only like it themselves, but are 
fully aware how profitable the sale is to those that deal in it. 
Again, if my friends at home could witness for themselves the 
state of many of the islands in these seas, which we have 
visited, — lamentation and mourning and woe, must inevitably 
be their portion. Rum, muskets, and gunpowder, are articles 
brought in great abundance, particularly by the American 
ships, many of which are styled ' Temperance ships.' It is an 
incontrovertible fact, that vessels of this description have landed 
larger quantities of spirits on some islands than any other class 
of ships. On almost every island the population decreases, and 
the dreadful ravages made by disease is much aggravated by 
the use of spirits. 

[After giving an affecting description of the consequences of 
disease, and mentioning that he had, in as many cases as his 
stock of medicine would allow, successfully checked and eradi- 
cated it, he adds : — ] 

The island of Bolabola is one that has suffered most of any 
by the introduction of spirits, as it has caused the people to 
distil their bread-fruit, and every kind of food capable of pro- 
ducing spirit. I can never forget the abject wretched state of 
these people, with scarcely rags to cover them, in want of 
every thing, and possessing nothing to purchase any thing 
with, their little property being consumed in order to obtain 
spirits : the famished appearance also, of the more than half- 
naked children, who abound, will long retain a place in my 



664< CHAPTER XXXIV. [1837. 

memory, in that love which must ever intercede on behalf of, 
and plead the cause of suffering humanity. The little things 
used to come on board to us ; and when on shore, we were 
surrounded in a few minutes by delighted groups of them. 
My heart often revisits Bolabola, and gladly would I bind 
up her wretched inhabitants in the Lord's bundle of life for 
ever. 

20th. — Yesterday, the weather was fine and wind fair. In the 
evening, the island of New Zealand was scarcely distinguishable 
from the deck. We are now steering a course for New South 
Wales, I trust, in the right line of things, to reach the port of 
Sydney, having nothing on my mind towards any other place. 
Not having sat down yesterday, we held our little meeting 
this morning ; the forepart was more lively than sometimes, but 
the latter, as regards myself, was unusually heavy. At sun- 
down, three whaling vessels were in company together. As 
night approached, a heavy swell from the north-east, and a still 
heavier from the southward, increased upon us, after having 
fairly passed the isles of the three Kings of New Zealand. The 
vessel lurched with such violence and suddenness, owing to 
these cross and heavy swells of the sea, that about ten o'clock 
p. m. the topmast was carried away. By midnight, the frag- 
ments of the mast, and the shattered rigging and sail were 
rescued and properly secured. 

24:th. — On First day, the weather being too rough for us to 
admit much light into the cabin, and the heat being oppressive 
in the vessel below deck, our crew were not assembled as at 
other times. Fair wind and heavy sea through the day. Our 
captain ascertained that seventy miles had been lost in forty- 
eight hours, by an opposing current ; to which cause the cross 
swell and agitated state of the sea might fairly be attributed. 
To-day, our people were employed in substituting our flying jib- 
boom for a topmast, which as a jury mast, will help to drive 
us along ; but in point of strength it is much inferior to the 
old topmast, which came from England with us, and has stood 
ever since ; happily no one was hurt when the accident of 
losing it occurred, which ought to be remembered with thank- 
fulness of heart. 



1837.] CHAPTER XXXIV. b'65 

26th. — To-day, the weather is favourable with less wind ; 
we made but little headway. We sat down in the forenoon 
in much poverty and strippedness, and yet under a peaceful 
covering. My Charles complains to-day of much pain in his 
side, owing I believe to the great damp in the cabin, pro- 
duced by our having been closely shut up, to prevent the sea 
from getting down in a wholesale manner ; but the water makes 
its way through so many places in the decks, as to make every 
article of clothing and bedding too damp for use : we have, 
however, no alternative, and hope, in a few days, again to see 
better times. A sight of New Holland, will, I trust, revive 
and animate us. 

27th. — Gentle breezes and fair all night. At three o'clock 
a. m., Lord Howe's Island was discovered upon the lee-bow, 
and at day-break Ball's Pyramid on the weather-bow. At ten 
o'clock, passed between them with breeze from north north- 
east. Upon Lord Howe's Island, there are three Englishmen 
residing, who have women from New Zealand as wives. It 
appears that they have raised hogs, potatoes and cabbages, 
sufficient for the supply of fourteen whaling vessels in a year. 
We are, this day at noon, four hundred miles from the shores 
of New Holland. Charles seems better this morning. 

28th — The heat of the atmosphere quite oppressive, and 
below deck almost insupportable. After midnight the light- 
ning was extremely vivid all round us, with thunder at times 
awfully loud and near the vessel ; the rain falling in torrents, 
and the wind flying about, first on one side, and then on the 
other. At five o'clock a. m., the breeze became strong and 
steady from the south south-east, which enabled us to pursue 
our course. 

29th. (First day.) — A portion of the Scriptures was read 
to the crew, only three of whom attended. The air much cooler 
since the thunder-storm. The state of feeling with me, both 
as to mind and body, for the last two days, cannot be easily 
described ; the former, as if it had never known good ; and 
yet the loss could not be felt, if the possession had never been 
witnessed. It is, however, to myself a relieving proof or 
evidence that a spark of life still remains, for that which is 



666 CHAPTER XXXIV. [1837. 

dead cannot feel : but outward circumstances, which affect the 
body, also bear upon the mind, though imperceptibly, and at 
the moment unthought of as having any share in the mental 
conflict. Below deck the water filters through upon us in 
many places : the deck above us is drenched again and again 
by the breaking tops of the waves ; the motion of the vessel is 
so violent and incessant as to admit of no rest, either sitting or 
lying, and walking is altogether impracticable. Perhaps, the 
motto of ' Brighter hours will come, 1 is particularly appro- 
priate in our case ; and we may yet be permitted to realize the 
fact itself, and the language of David exultingly be ours, — 
" God hath spoken in his holiness ; I will rejoice."" 

SOth. — A fresh gale all night ; but the moon rising about 
midnight, enabled us to run towards the land without fear. 
At daylight, several parts of the coast could be seen, from Port 
Stephen to the eastward. At eight o'clock a. m., the light- 
house upon the South Head appeared. Strong breezes with 
considerable sea from the southward and eastward. Soon 
after getting sight of the Heads, which form the entrance into 
Sydney, a bark was seen standing into the offing, that had just 
come out of the harbour. Not knowing but that she was one 
of the homeward bound for England, and thinking this might 
possibly be an opportunity of letting our dear friends know of 
our return to New South Wales, from the isles of the Pacific, 
the Henry Freelings flag was hoisted immediately, but, on 
getting nearer to her, she was found to be a whaling vessel, by 
the number of boats which she carried. At ten o'clock, took 
in a pilot and bore up for the harbour, and before two o'clock 
were safely anchored in the Cove. In the evening, moored 
close under the government domain, about thirty yards from 
the shore, by the side of the Jessie, of Liverpool. Here we 
found several ships preparing to take in cargoes for London, 
also the Rattlesnake and Victor men-of-war. Our arrival was 
soon known in the neighbourhood. Abraham Davy was 
shortly on board, and our dear friends James Backhouse and 
Greorge Washington Walker were not long before they reached 
us : our joy was mutual at seeing each other's faces again, and 
I trust that our hearts were filled with gratitude and thankful- 



1837.] CHAPTER XXX1W 667 

ness to Him, who had sustained us through all, and brought it 
about for His great name's sake. It was afterwards ascer- 
tained, that a number of letters from England and home were 
lying in store for us. Accounts of the welfare of our beloved 
family at Shoosharry, beyond my most sanguine expectations, 
were received up to within seven months of the present 
date ; not having heard of them for nearly two years, they 
seemed now restored to us again, as a treasure enhanced in 
value an hundred fold indeed, but still far beyond the reach 
of full possession. Humbled under a sense of the Lord's 
everlasting love and faithfulness, my heart rejoiced before 
Him. 

Second Month 2nd. (Fifth day.) — Attended the meeting 
in Sydney at eleven a. m., held in a comfortable building, 
erected for the purpose during our absence from these shores. 
Twelve persons were the whole number present : it was a 
silent meeting. May faith and strength be more and more in- 
creased, if consistent with the Divine will, and a door effectually 
opened for the word of the gospel to be declared amongst these 
people ; that the name of the Lord may be glorified, and the 
way of life and salvation, as it is in Jesus, set before them, to 
the exaltation of the blessed Saviour's spiritual kingdom in the 
heart of man ; of the increase of whose government and peace, 
there shall be no end, but the earth shall be filled with His praise. 



[Daniel Wheeler and his son remained at Sydney until the 
30th of Seventh Month, when they sailed for Hobart Town. 
Much public service did not devolve upon him whilst at Sydney ; 
when health permitted, he regularly attended the meetings for 
worship on First and Fifth days, kept up by a few individuals 
professing with Friends in that town, which were not unfre- 
quently resorted to by others. Soon after their arrival at 
Sydney, agreeably with arrangements made on leaving England, 
the Henry Freeling was sold, the ship's company were dis- 
charged, and the numerous surplus stores belonging to the ship 
disposed of ; these engagements undertaken in an exhausted 
state of health, occupied much time. 



668 CHAPTER XXXIV. [1837. 

The following extracts from his journal and letters, refer to 
this period.] 

To John Kitciiing. 

Sydney, Third Month 3rd, 1837. 

I consider it no small favour that our crew have 

passed through the voyage amongst the islands in so exemplary 
a manner. Their good behaviour was remarked and commented 
on by the missionaries and others, at various places. They 
seemed to consider themselves bound to do nothing that would 
be likely to bring reproach on the vessel, on account of the 
object which she was engaged to promote. Instead of being 
shunned and feared as dangerous people by the missionaries, 
which is the case with the generality of sailors, they were 
looked upon as quite a different class of men, and treated with 
marked kindness on account of their orderly deportment. 
Towards the latter part of the voyage, their patience began to 
get exhausted : they longed for home ; and on reaching New 
Zealand they were like people " weary in well doing ;" but I 
think this arose in great measure from our unavoidably coming 
into close contact with other vessels, where they could not fail 
to be assailed with continual jeers ; and the ridiculous stories 
as to the supposed strict discipline they were under in our 
vessel, (such as their having to pay a dollar for every oath they 
swore,) seemed to make them think they really were rigidly 
treated, and their just rights withheld from them. Two or 
three of them at one time seemed desirous of settling in New 
Zealand ; this served to amuse, and keep their thoughts 
engaged, and I promised them their discharge on reaching 
New Holland. Sometimes in the night watches, I used to lay 
before them the comfort they might enjoy when they got to 
England, if they took proper care of their money ; and some of 
them seemed quite to enter into the idea of not having to go to 
sea again, which with a little assistance might certainly have 
been realized. 

It was my earnest desire on first setting out, that our voyage 
together might truly be one towards the kingdom of heaven ; 
but now, if I except two or three individuals, every hope of 



1837.] CHAPTER XXXIV. 669 

this kind has vanished, and has been exchanged for the painful 
certainty, that after all the advantages they have enjoyed, and 
the victory they seemed to have gained over the temptations 
which in former days had so often prevailed over them, they 
have again relapsed to their old degradation. Perhaps they 
may not have gone to the full extent that it is common in this 
horrible place ; yet there is little doubt that they have nearly 
got through their money in a dissipated manner. 

However much this is to be deplored on their account, it is a 
consolation that nothing of the sort occurred while they belonged 
to the Henry Freeling, and that whatever infamy they may 
bring upon themselves, it is altogether unconnected with that 
vessel, and cannot bear in the least on the object of her late 
voyage. Their conduct here is thought nothing of, and passes 
unnoticed amidst the general mass of wickedness with which 
this place overflows. Let the conduct of those sailors be ever 
so notorious, no one asks to what ship they belong ; the thing 
is so common, and of hourly occurrence. 

To the Same. 

Sydney, Third Month 18th, 1837. 
Our dear friends James Backhouse and George W. 



Walker took their departure from these shores last First day, 
the 12th instant ; so that we are sitting desolate, and somewhat 
resembling those that are forsaken ; but, alas ! not amongst an 
afflicted people. Would that I could say so ; but instead of 
this, I think this is as wicked a place as any I have seen, which 
have not been a few in my day. Pride and haughtiness abound, 
and lamentable ignorance of spiritual religion is manifest on 
every side : indeed few seem to make even an outward pro- 
fession of it. Drunkenness appears to be the prevailing sin, 
which leads to the most deadly amongst the working part of 
the community, although it is not confined to their grade. The 
major part of the lower order are bound in the fetters of popery ; 
and for the most part are prisoners who have obtained tickets 
of leave, or they are what are called assigned servants, many of 
whom have been accustomed to crime from their very youth. 
The contrast is very and painfully striking with what we have 



670 CHAPTER XXXIV. [1837. 

seen among the poor and benighted islanders, with whom our 
lot has lately been cast ; the situation of many of these may 
be considered enviable, when compared with the miserable 
wretchedness of many here, who consider themselves Christians. 
Cursing and bitterness resound continually through the streets ; 
and extortion and deceit prevail almost universally among 
the shop-keepers, on whose promises hardly any dependence 
can be placed. Many have amassed considerable wealth by 
extortion and the sale of spirits ; and having risen only as 
from a dung-hill, are living as if there was no God, no 
judgment, and no world to come, — and length of days at their 
command. Those who come out as settlers are generally of 
a better stamp, though even among these there is little stability 
of character. 

This is the state of the rising and fast nourishing colony 
of Sydney and its neighbourhood ; but the most grievous 
thing we witness is the miserable condition of the aborigines 
of the country, who are frequently seen rolling about the 
streets in groups, altogether intoxicated ; whilst their ema- 
ciated frames declare, that they are fast wasting from the 
surface of the earth. They too, are following the dreadful 
example set before them, of cursing and swearing in the 
English tongue, which they have learnt from their exter- 
minating visitors. 

How long we may have to remain here, I know not ; but I 
desire to be resigned to wait the blessed Master's time. 

Third Month 26th. — In the forenoon meeting yesterday I 
had a close, searching testimony to bear, — standing up with the 
words of our Lord, — " If thine eye offend thee, pluck it out : it 
is better for thee to enter into the kingdom of God with one 
eye, than having two eyes, to be cast into hell fire ; where their 
worm dieth not, and the fire is not quenched." Stating that I 
believed it safest for me to revive these expressions in their 
hearing, lest there should be any present who were sensible 
that something stood in the way between them and eternal life ; 
and though this might be dear to them as a right hand, a right 
foot, or a right eye, it w T ould be their soul's true interest to 



1837.] CHAPTER XXXIV. 671 

pluck it out, or cut it off, and cast it from them, before it was 
too late to enter into life, even halt or maimed or with one eye, 
and before the day of the Lord's visitation was passed away 
for ever. Entreating all to lay aside every weight and every 
burden, and that sin which most easily besets, and " run with 
patience the race that is set before us, looking unto Jesus 
the author and finisher of our faith ; who, for the joy that was 
set before Him, endured the cross, despising the shame, and is 
set down at the right hand of the throne of God." 

Fourth Month 3rd. — Yesterday the forenoon meeting was 
better attended than is frequently the case ; in the course of 
which it was with me to recite the words of the Saviour to his 
disciples, — " If ye love me, keep my commandments ;" — stating 
my belief that it would be difficult to find any who profess to 
believe in Christ, who have not a hope that they love Him. 
But let us prove what ground we have for this hope by the 
test of obedience, and examine how far we really have obeyed 
the commands of Christ : His commandments, as His pro- 
mises, are " yea and amen for ever." " Seek ye first the 
kingdom of God and his righteousness." Have we obeyed this 
important command I Has this been the employment of our 
life, as the first and primary object of our search, by which 
all things needful shall be added unto us I Or have we only 
occasionally remembered it, whilst following with eagerness 
after the follies, and vanities, and riches of the world ; instead 
of laying up for ourselves " treasure in heaven ?" Have we 
been securing to ourselves the enduring riches of eternity, by 
seeking this kingdom as it should be sought, " first " before all 
other things ? It is time for some of us who are advanced in 
life, diligently to examine how we stand in this important 
search, and more especially so for those who make mention of 
His name before men. It is evident, that those whom our 
Lord enjoined to " seek first the kingdom of God," were fearful 
that whilst in pursuit of this heavenly treasure, they should 
fall short of the food and raiment necessary for their poor 
perishing bodies. " Behold the fowls of the air :" " Consider 
the lilies of the field," &c, said our Saviour, as encouragement 
to these of " little faith." 



672 CHAPTER XXXIV. [1837. 

8th. — Attended the funeral of the wife of William Satterth- 
waite. The privilege of interment in the ground recently be- 
queathed to the Society of Friends, was granted at his request, 
his wife having formerly been a member. This being the first 
interment at Sydney conducted after the manner of Friends, 
it is probable that many would have attended out of curiosity, 
had not the morning been extremely wet. The whole was con- 
ducted in a consistent manner. I had to remind those present, 
that to our own Master we must stand or fall : the work is 
our own, and the reward is our own. " No man can save his 
brother." And although nothing said or done by the living 
can possibly affect the dead ; yet the dead are often powerful 
preachers to the living, warning them to flee from the wrath 
to come, by preparing for their latter end. " For we must all 
appear before the judgment seat of Christ, that every one may 
receive the things done in the body, according to that he hath 
done, whether it be good or bad." " Every man's work shall 
be made manifest, for the day shall declare it." Blessed and 
happy are they that are building on the ancient and sure 
foundation, which the righteous in all ages have built upon ; 
— even Christ Jesus, that tried corner-stone ; — " unto the Jews 
a stumbling block, and unto the Greeks foolishness ; but unto 
them which are called, both Jews and Greeks, Christ the 
power of God, and the wisdom of God." This is a stone of 
stumbling, and a rock of offence to all unbelievers now, as in 
the day when this declaration was made ; but to those who 
believe, it is " a chief corner-stone, elect, precious, ,, — and the 
blessed means appointed for the salvation of all mankind, who 
are willing to submit to the power of the Holy Spirit of the 
Lord Jesus in the heart. Although it was a scene never 
before witnessed here, those present were very attentive and 
solid, and I had peace : it appeared afterwards, that two Jews 
were present in the grave yard. 

9th. (First day.) — In the forenoon meeting I had to set forth 
the righteousness of Christ Jesus ; without which, none can 
enter the kingdom of heaven. There are many highly professing 
Christians in this our day, who like the Scribes and Pharisees 
of old, have a righteousness of their own making ; but a more 



1837.] CHAPTER XXXIV. 673 

excellent righteousness must be attained to, than any that man 
is capable of clothing himself with, before the heart is converted 
unto God. " Except your righteousness exceed the righteous- 
ness of the Scribes and Pharisees, ye shall in no case enter into 
the kingdom of heaven," was declared by our Lord. Now this 
righteousness which excelleth, is of the Lord ; and none but His 
children who have been taught of Him, are acquainted with it. 
There are many who take upon themselves to teach others the 
way to the heavenly kingdom, who " being ignorant of God's 
righteousness, and going about to establish their own righteous- 
ness, have not submitted themselves to the righteousness of 
God."'' 1 Nothing but the righteousness of Christ Jesus believed 
in, and operating in our hearts, by the power of the Holy 
Spirit, and submitted to on our part, will be availing. It is 
this alone that can purify us as He is pure, and procure for us 
an entrance into the everlasting kingdom of " righteousness and 
peace, and joy in the Holy Ghost." Whatever may be our 
profession before men, if we have not the righteousness of 
Christ Jesus, we shall be like the poor man of whom we read ; 
who, destitute of the wedding garment, was speechless, when 
the question was put to him by the king, — " Friend, how 
earnest thou in hither, not having a wedding garment ?" After 
this manner I was largely opened amongst them. Some 
strangers were present, but the whole number did not, I think, 
exceed eighteen persons. The evening meeting was smaller, 
but held under a comfortable quiet. 

15th. — This week the passengers from the ship Lady 
Macnaughten have been landed; after being some weeks under 
quarantine, which the vessel was subjected to on arrival. We 
understand that there has been great suffering among them 
during the latter part of the voyage for want of the actual 
necessaries of life : many of them have been swept away by a 
contagious disorder, which prevailed on board. It is much to 
be regretted that no efficient measures are in force, to protect 
the emigrants from the cruel rapacity of some of the ship 
owners and agents. 

23rd. (First day.) — This morning attended the funeral 
of William Satterthwaite. During a solemn pause before the 

2 x 



674 CHAPTER XXXIV. [1837. 

coffin was lowered into the grave, I had to call the attention of 
the by-standers to the awful instance before us, of the necessity 
of being prepared individually for the great change : " prepare 
to meet thy God," was sounded among them. None of us 
know how soon the undeniable messenger may be sent to our 
houses : — are we then acquainted with the appointed means of 
salvation ? Nothing will avail us in that hour of extremity, 
but an interest in the Lord Jesus, unto whom all power in 
heaven and earth is given. He died for the sins of all mankind, 
that all mankind might live. Are we acquainted with the 
power of his Holy Spirit in our hearts. Have we not felt this 
power in our hearts when we have committed sin, convincing 
us of sin, and reproving for it. Have we bowed to it in obe- 
dience, and acknowledged its might, and thereby known its 
sufficiency to save from our sins \ If so, we have hearkened to 
the voice of the well-beloved Son, in spirit. But if we have 
resisted this power when striving with us, set it at naught, and 
rebelled against it, the day will yet come upon us, when we 
shall have to bow before it, but it will be in judgment for sin 
and transgression unrepented of, in anguish of heart for having 
thus disregarded the Holy Spirit, purchased by the blood of the 
Lamb of God. There might be some present of various reli- 
gious sentiments ; but however our opinions differ in some 
things, in one we shall all agree, that we must all die, and all 
stand before the judgment seat of Christ : then, how needful it 
is for us to be ready, when called upon to return the spirit unto 
God who gave it, with joy and not with grief. 

30^. (First day.) — In the forenoon meeting it was with 
me to revive the language of the apostle when addressing the 
primitive believers, who had witnessed the beauty and spiritu- 
ality of the gospel dispensation, when every man may sit under 
his own vine, and under his own fig tree, and none shall make 
him afraid ; which is realized at this day, to all true believers 
in the second coming of the Lord Jesus, by the Holy Spirit in 
the heart of man ; — " The anointing which ye have received of 
Him (Christ) abideth in you, and ye need not that any man 
teach you ; but as the same anointing teacheth you of all things, 
and is truth, and is no lie, and even as it hath taught you, ye 



1837.] CHAPTER XXXIV. 675 

shall abide in Him. 1 ' What a great and precious privilege it 
is to be permitted to sit as at the feet of Jesus, to hear the gra- 
cious words that proceed from Him ; it is the one thing needful 
for all to do, — the part which Mary chose, and which our Lord 
declared should never be taken away from her. It is this 
inward teaching of the Holy Spirit, that I want all to believe 
in, and be acquainted with for and in themselves. Those who 
have received from Him the anointing which abideth, are 
qualified to give an account of the hope that is in them, 
not only in meekness and fear, but from heart-felt knowledge 
of the coming of the Son of God in spirit. " We believe and 
are sure that thou art that Christ," said Simon Peter, when 
many had turned back and walked no more with Him, on 
account of the narrowness of the path which leads to life. 
" Will ye also go away,' 1 said our Lord to the few remaining 
disciples: — "to whom shall we go V ' said Peter, — "Thou 
hast the words of eternal life ; and we believe and are sure, 
that thou art that Christ, the Son of the living God. 11 Of 
this, and of the blessedness of those who come to this know- 
ledge, I had further to impart. 

[It was whilst at Sydney that Daniel Wheeler received the 
deeply affecting intelligence of the death of his eldest son, 
William Wheeler, who had succeeded his father in his agri- 
cultural concerns in Russia. He died on the 24th of Eleventh 
Month, 1836, at the Sand Eock Hotel, near Niton, on the Isle 
of Wight, to which place he had resorted for a more genial cli- 
mate : his illness was a consumption, which rapidly terminated 
his life. The first intelligence of this event came to hand in a 
public journal, and proved a keen stroke ; but was borne with 
much Christian resignation. The life of William Wheeler had 
been marked by watchfulness and prayer ; and a conscientious 
regard to the pointing of Divine wisdom in the discharge of his 
religious duties, as well as by an active and diligent attention 
to his concerns in business ; — his end was eminently crowned 
with peace, and an humble and confiding trust in redeeming 
mercy.] 

Fifth Month SOth. — A letter has reached us by way of 
Hobarton, from our beloved Joshua, conveying the long 

2x2 



676 CHAPTER XXXIV. [1837. 

anticipated confirmation of the painful report already in our 
possession, that our dear William has finished his earthly 
course.* Although we have lost what never can be regained in 
this world ; yet the accompanying particulars of his last days 
administered great consolation and relief, and raised in my 
heart a tribute of humble thankfulness to the great Preserver 
of men, who indeed " loveth his own unto the end ;" at once 
removing all my doubts, and causing me in the depths of 
distress, to triumph with admiration at the loving-kindness of 
the Lord to the poor and to " him that hath no helper." On 
reviewing with calmness the provision which has been made 
for every exigency of the case, I was constrained to acknow- 
ledge, that had it been practicable, I could not have made any 
arrangement more satisfactory to myself ; so that while I am 
enabled to say Amen, so be it, to this dispensation of His holy 
will, who wrought the work, — I can rejoice in the sustaining- 
belief, and give thanks at the remembrance of His holiness, 
that the loss sustained is only ours ; to the dear departed soul 
it is eternal gain, through the tender mercy of God in Christ 
Jesus. And now, some things which at first sight only seemed 
to aggravate and add to our affliction, appear to have formed a 
part of the great whole which has been vouchsafed, by having 
in degree prepared our minds for the mournful event, of which 
we were afterwards more fully to be informed. Although the 
tidings received through a channel so unexpected and abrupt, 
plunged us at once into deep affliction, as a stern harbinger of 
woe ; yet even this could afterwards be viewed as a blessing in 
disguise, gradually to lighten the weight of an overwhelming 
reality, and lessen the density of the gloom about to envelope 
us. " By watering, he wearieth the thick cloud," saith Job ; 
so doth the tear of affection when shed in meekness and sub- 
mission, soften the heart's keenest anguish, until the dark cloud 
of grief dissolves into resignation to the Divine will, and is 
sanctified to the praise and glory of God. For some days my 

* His son Joshua was removed by death about four years after ; his 
decease took place at Clifton, on the 29th of Third Month, 1841. He 
was mercifully permitted, towards the close of life, to enjoy a trembling, 
but we trust a well-founded hope of acceptance. 



1837.] CHAPTER XXXIV. 677 

dear Charles could not divest himself of the idea, that such a 
report might have got into the newspaper accidentally and 
without any foundation in fact ; but this slender ray of hope 
was of short duration. 

Sixth Month Wth. (First clay.) — Since the 30th ultimo 
my pen has been laid aside as to a record of passing events, 
either outward or inward. My harp has been hung, as it were, 
upon the willow, and my lips have been sealed ; but at seasons 
my heart has been softened by the love of God, and my peace 
has been permitted to flow as the stream of a mighty river, 
sheltered from every ruffling blast, and too strong to be impeded 
by trifles. In the meeting this evening a word of encourage- 
ment was spoken to the poor and needy, that are hungering 
and thirsting after heavenly food, and looking to the Lord alone 
for their souls' nourishment : verily the Lord will hear them, 
and they shall be fed. 

\Sth. — Since last First day, various have been my trials and 
provings ; but the Divine hand has sustained through all ; and 
by letters now received from England I am greatly comforted, 
inasmuch as the belief so strong in my heart, of the mercy and 
compassion of my God, is more than ever confirmed as regards 
the close of my precious William, — in several particulars far 
more abundantly than I could have conceived ; and above all, 
in the certain evidence that He hath crowned him with ever- 
lasting life : — I had nothing more to ask. " The Lord hath 
heard the voice of my weeping; — the Lord hath heard my 
supplication ; — the Lord hath received my prayer ;" and the 
kingdom, and the power, and the glory are His, for ever. 

26th. — The way seems now to open more and more for 
us to leave this place : I humbly pray that we may be rightly 
directed, both as to the time, and the next place of our 
destination. 

At our morning meeting yesterday several persons attended, 
who were evidently unaccustomed to sit in silence : they stayed 
till near the conclusion of the meeting. A Friend who has 
lately come to settle here, spoke a few words, though perhaps 
from diffidence too long withheld, to the effect that, the most 
eloquent language, if the heart be not right, however esteemed 



678 CHAPTER XXXIV. [1837. 

among men, is an abomination in the sight of God, who seeth 
not as man seeth. " Man looketh at the outward appearance, 
but the Lord looketh on the heart." 

Seventh Month 10/A. — On First day the 2nd, both the meet- 
ings were held in silence throughout : this cannot be wondered 
at, when the expectation of many that attend on these days is 
evidently placed upon man, instead of gathering inward to the 
great Teacher of his people. Yesterday, the forenoon meeting 
was also held in silence : in the evening the new covenant and 
its holy Mediator Christ Jesus, were proclaimed amongst the 
people, to my own relief. A solemn feeling was vouchsafed, 
under which we separated. 

17th. — The fore-part of the morning meeting yesterday was 
greatly disturbed by persons coming in, and shortly going out 
again : towards the conclusion more settled quiet prevailed. 
The evening meeting was altogether more comfortable. The 
complaint of the Most High, through the holy prophet to His 
people formerly, it is greatly to be feared is equally applicable 
to many professing Christianity in this gospel day, as when 
uttered by Divine inspiration, in that period of degeneracy : — 
" The ox knoweth his owner, and the ass his master's crib ; 
but Israel doth not know, my people do not consider. - " I was 
largely opened to speak of the means mercifully afforded to all, 
through the blood of Jesus ; by whom alone we can come to a 
saving knowledge of God the Father, and of His beloved Son, 
on which knowledge eternal life depends. 

During the past week a cargo of male convicts arrived from 
London ; and one of female convicts from Dublin. A vessel 
also came in with male emigrants from Scotland ; and another 
with females from Ireland ; the former having lost twenty-three 
of her passengers in typhus fever during her voyage, was placed 
under quarantine on arrival. 

loth. — Attended the funeral of our landlord, who died after 
a severe illness four days ago. It was not a pleasing task, to 
bear our public testimony against the forms and practices 
adopted on such occasions ; but I did not feel satisfied to absent 
myself. The service was performed according to the usual 
forms of the Episcopalian establishment ; and although con- 



1837.] CHAPTER XXXIV. 679 

sisting of Scripture language was painfully inapplicable to the 
occasion. Our standing the whole time with our hats on, 
might be a new thing in the colony, but no notice was openly 
taken of it. 

22nd. — Arrived the Marian Watson from Hobarton. Went 
on board and secured our passage on her return. Two days 
ago we very accidentally ascertained, from a public print, that 
the house and furniture where we are lodging are advertised 
for sale almost immediately. This circumstance, for want of 
any previous notice, has subjected us to much inconvenience, 
and no light expense, as the Marian Watson will not be ready 
for sea for some time to come, so that we must occupy fresh 
quarters in the mean time. It may, however, serve renewedly 
to remind us, that here we have no continuing city of habita- 
tion ; but if when the conflicts of time are ended, we should be 
mercifully favoured to reach one that hath foundations and is 
everlasting, every earthly change and suffering will be light as 
the dust of the balance, and not worth a thought ; save only as 
they may have contributed to work for us a far more exceeding 
and eternal weight of glory. 

2Uh. — Having with much fatigue removed all our baggage 
to an hotel near the head of the cove, to be in readiness for 
embarkation, we expected to have ample time to make our 
final arrangements in a comfortable manner ; but my Charles 
is so much indisposed, that I scarcely know whether to venture 
the risk of removing to Hobarton at this inclement season. 
He does not, however, appear willing, notwithstanding present 
discouragements, that the voyage should be delayed. Our 
lodgings are so infested with rats, that little undisturbed rest 
can be obtained at night ; though we have exerted all the skill 
we are masters of, in blocking up their numerous holes, and 
have the assistance of an excellent cat. 

SOth. (First day.) — In the forenoon attended the meeting; 
I had to bear testimony to the power of Truth in the heart, 
if believed in and submitted to. Just as we are concerned to 
dwell near to this power in our daily walks through life, shall 
we be permitted to witness its influence upon our minds, when 
met together for the purpose of worshipping that God who is a 



680 CHAPTER XXXIV. [1837- 

Spirit, and must be worshipped in spirit and in truth. It was 
declared by the Saviour of the world, when personally on earthy 
that where two or three are gathered together in His name, 
there is He in the midst of them. But it would be well for 
us all to examine, whether we are met in His name ? whether 
His name, which is His power, doth rule and reign in our 
hearts I whether our thoughts are brought into obedience to 
the Spirit of Truth \ None can meet in His name, in the 
expectation of witnessing His presence in the midst of them, 
but those who are subject to his power. It is for want of sub- 
mission to this power in our hearts, that so many sit in dry 
places, where there is neither dew, nor rain, nor fields of offer- 
ing. Such go from meetings as they came, barren, unfruitful, 
and unrcfreshed; yet the Divine promise stands fast. "Where 
two or three are gathered together in my name, there am I in 
the midst of them." 

31s£. — Left the colony of New South Wales, with a gentle 
and favourable breeze. There are on board ten prisoners in 
chains, with a guard of five soldiers, making up with the 
captain, crew and passengers, thirty-nine persons. 

[After a voyage of eleven days, they reached Hobart Town, 
where they rejoined our friends James Backhouse and George 
W. Walker. Here again the ministerial labours of Daniel 
Wheeler, appear to have been pretty much confined to the 
meetings for Divine worship, kept up in this town by persons 
professing with Friends, and regularly held on First and Fifth 
days.] 

[Extract from a letter dated Hobart Town, Eighth Month 
16th, 1837.] 

It is encouraging to observe, that the number of 

those who profess with us in this place is considerably increased, 
since our visit three years ago ; but the house where they meet 
is so small, that the addition of Charles and myself amounts 
almost to an inconvenience, and the members are not in a 
capacity of themselves to remedy the difficulty. On First day 
last, in the morning, eight persons appeared in the ministry ; 
and I think the persevering manner in which several of these 



1837.] CHAPTER XXXIV. 681 

attend, under very discouraging circumstances, and the solid 
deportment they manifest, is a strong indication of their having 
found something, which "the topaz of Ethiopia cannot equal" 
in value, nor the wealth of the universe purchase. About forty 
persons were present. Of the above individuals alluded to as 
having spoken, six are of those who have joined the Society by 
convincement. I am told that occasionally a still greater number 
than this open their mouths ; and is it not a natural consequence, 
that as the heart belie veth unto righteousness, with the mouth 
confession is made unto salvation. If these were to hold their 
peace, would not the very stone3 ciy out ? In my apprehension 
it does not necessarily follow, that such as these must become 
hereafter, or be extensively employed as gospel ministers ; 
although they are thus constrained, like the tenth leper that 
was cleansed, to return and give glory to God, from a sensible 
conviction of the working of the power of the Spirit of Him, 
who speaketh in righteousness, is mighty to save from sin, and 
that to the very uttermost. I need not say more of these 
interesting people, as I find from dear James Backhouse, that 
their case is already known to Friends in England in every 
particular. 

22?icl. — We attended a meeting of the temperance society, 
held in Hobart Town : my mind is more and more impressed 
with the great importance of this institution, from a conviction 
that next to the gospel of life and salvation, and the circulation 
of the Holy Scriptures, it is of the highest importance to the 
well being of the human race. Nothing stands more opposed 
to the benign influence of the gospel than intemperance. I 
believed it my duty to speak on this important subject. 

27th. — In the forenoon the little meeting house was filled. 
James Backhouse had good service both in testimony and sup- 
plication. The afternoon meeting was somewhat smaller : 
James Backhouse had again to exercise his gift. Although 
much of what was expressed during the day passed before the 
view of my mind, yet not feeling what I deem sufficient qualifi- 
cation to warrant my standing up, I had no part in the vocal 
service ; and although under much poverty of spirit was not 
conscious of having withheld what should have been uttered. 



682 chapter xxxiv. [1837. 

Tenth Month 1st. (First day.) — In the forenoon an individual 
who has attended meetings for some time, expressed a few words 
under much exercise of mind : he said, it has been strongly 
impressed upon his mind to say, " the meek shall inherit the 
earth," — adding, and the humble Christian doth inherit all 
things. After some other communications, I had to remind 
the meeting that the two mites cast into the treasury by the 
poor widow, were of more value than all that had been given by 
the rich ; these gave of their abundance, but she had given all 
that she had. It is not the magnitude of the offering that in- 
sureth its acceptance with the Lord : He seeth not as man 
seeth. " Lebanon is not sufficient to burn, nor the beasts 
thereof for a burnt offering." — " To obey is better than sacrifice, 
and to hearken to the voice of the Lord than the fat of rams."— 
" If ye know these things," said our Lord to his immediate 
followers, " happy are ye, if ye do them." Knowledge will 
profit us little, unless obedience keeps pace therewith. It is not 
the hearers of the law, but the doers, that are justified in the 
sight of Almighty God. " It is not every one that saith unto 
me, Lord, Lord,"" said Christ, " that shall enter into the king- 
dom, but he that doeth the will of my Father which is in 
heaven." Therefore whilst we labour after humility and 
resignation of mind in sincerity to say, " not my will but thine 
be done," — let us at the same time be earnestly desirous to 
ascertain what is the Lord's will concerning us. But this can 
never be done in the noise and mixture of the world ; it must 
be sought for in retirement, in the silence of all flesh, and that 
more frequently than the returning morning, and in the night 
watches also. We cannot reasonably expect to be entrusted 
with a knowledge of the Divine will, if we conform to the world 
and its practices. " Be not conformed to this world, but be ye 
transformed by the renewing of your mind ; that ye may prove 
what is that good and acceptable and perfect will of (rod." 
The judgments of the Lord must pass over the transgressing 
nature in our hearts to redeem us therefrom ; and it is only by 
and through the righteousness of Christ believed in and ope- 
rating in us, that our minds can be transformed and renewed 
unto God. The meeting was in the fore part very unsettled 



1837.] CHAPTER XXXIV. 683 

and discouraging, but it ended well under a very solemn 
feeling. 

31st. — Not feeling bound to remain any longer on this side 
of the globe, we this day engaged places in the Lloyds, which 
arrived yesterday with part of her cargo of oil, to load out here 
for London. 

Eleventh Month 3rd. — Accompanied J. Backhouse and G-. W. 
Walker on board the Eudora, who were about to proceed to 
some of the South Australian settlements. We did not think 
well to add to their unsettled situation by remaining long on 
board ; but soon took leave, parting from them in much love, 
and under a feeling of Divine regard. Whether we shall ever 
meet again in this world is very doubtful ; and as regards my- 
self at least, I consider it a final parting ; yet we know the Lord 
can lengthen out our days at his pleasure. To Him I desire to 
commend both them and ourselves. The Eudora was crowded 
with passengers, and in my apprehension a very undesirable 
vessel to sail in ; but our dear friends seemed to have no alter- 
native left. 

27th. — This day completed my sixty-sixth year. May the 
Lord be graciously pleased to make me more and more, a living 
monument of his everlasting mercy ; and to humble me before 
Him under a sense thereof, until He shall say " it is enough." 

30th. — Visited a young man in the hospital, who has just 
arrived here as a convict. His family were formerly in com- 
fortable circumstances in England. He appears to have long 
strayed from the paths of virtue ; but the laws of his country 
have now arrested his wild career, and he is sensible of his 
deplorable situation. I was led to commiserate his case, think- 
ing it very possible, that though the hand of human justice 
has overtaken him, and he is doomed to several years of pain- 
ful and degrading exile ; yet that in reality he may not have 
been more evil-disposed than some others, who have escaped the 
laws of man, who and have in a still greater degree transgressed 
the laws of a righteous God, and been still more offensive in 
His sight. Amongst these I feel willing to number myself, 
remembering as I write, the words of the compassionate Saviour, 
— " Or those eighteen on whom the tower of Siloam fell and 



684 CHAPTER XXX1Y. [1837. 

slew them, think ye that they were sinners above all men that 
dwell in Jerusalem ? I tell you nay ; but except ye repent, 
ye shall all likewise perish. 11 

Twelfth Month 7th. — Received a letter from our cousin John 
Kitching, communicating the mournful intelligence that my 
precious Jane had finished her course, and entered into rest. 
These tidings had truly flown apace, as it still wanted eight 
days to complete the fourth month since they were dispatched 
from Petersburg. Although this was sudden at last, and truly 
overwhelming for a time, yet the mercy and goodness of our 
heavenly Father soon changed the strain of sorrow, into that 
of adoration and thanksgiving, — binding up all the wounds of 
affliction in the healing virtue of His everlasting love : for her 
end had been truly peaceful ; death was deprived of its sting, 
and the grave of its victory. Thus, the eldest and the youngest of 
my flock, have been gathered, since we left them, into the arms 
of everlasting mercy ; whilst we are left a little longer in this 
vale of tears. May the Lord Most High be graciously pleased 
to prepare us also in like manner, for the heavenly kingdom. 

After calling upon all our friends and acquaintance for the 
last time, and desiring their welfare in the utmost signification 
of the word ' farewell, 1 we embarked on board the Lloyds, late in 
the evening of the 9th; and early next morning, being First 
day, the ] Oth of Twelfth Month 1837, we began to glide gently 
down the Derwent towards Storm Bay. We should have been 
rejoiced if the First day could have been spent in harbour ; but 
I believe the captain was desirous to get to sea, in order to keep 
his crew from getting intoxicated on shore, which often happens 
on such occasions, and causes serious delay to the shipping. 

In the course of our stay at Hobarton we paid several satis- 
factory visits to the Lieutenant-governor Sir John Frank- 
land and his family. Although the sphere in which they are 
accustomed to move, is not one that comports with those who 
profess to be followers of the lowly Jesus ; yet we were not 
satisfied to shrink from such exposure altogether, however the 
non-compliance on our parts with the usual practices at such 
times, might entitle us to the appellation of fools by some of the 
more gay and thoughtless part of the company ; if however the 



1838.] CHAPTER XXXIV. 680 

watch was properly maintained, our conduct may prove 
beneficial to others, by leading them to inquire into the cause 
of our differing so widely in life and conversation from our 
fellow-men. 

[The voyage to London, by way of Cape Horn, was com- 
pleted on the 1st of Fifth Month, 1838.] 

[The following are the closing extracts from the South Sea 
Journal :] — 

After a voyage of four months and twenty days from Van 
Diemens Land, and the changes from heat to cold twice expe- 
rienced during that time, my own health seemed scarcely to 
have been impaired ; but from the weakly state of my dear 
Charles, whose constitution had been much shaken by a 
lengthened illness previous to our leaving Europe, he was less 
able to bear the total want of vegetables for many weeks, to 
which we were exposed, and the small quantity of fresh water, 
and that of a quality scarcely wholesome, to which we were 
subjected the latter part of the passage. With these disadvan- 
tages, which there is reason to believe contributed to reduce his 
already diminished strength, he landed in a very feeble and 
languid condition ; but I humbly trust, he is under the imme- 
diate and protecting care of the great Physician, who alone hath 
power to heal, and to bless every endeavour to restore. 

I should not be satisfied to conclude this unconnected and 
imperfect narrative, without saying, how greatly I have been 
aided in the course of this religious engagement by the mission- 
aries from different societies in Europe and North America; 
who very kindly acted as interpreters on my behalf to the 
native congregations on the islands where my lot was cast, and 
opened their meeting-houses for our accommodation in the most 
brotherly manner ; to whom, for this assistance and Christian 
kindness many ways exhibited, we feel gratefully and highly 
indebted. 

I may also be allowed to add at the same time, that having 
been encouraged by my dear friends at home to accept the 
company of my son Charles Wheeler, I have found him very 



6*86 chapter xxx tv. [1838. 

useful and strengthening to me, during our long sojourn in 
foreign parts, in a variety of instances, and on many important 
occasions.* 

For the best welfare of the dear and interesting people, who 
inhabit those isles afar off, which in the love of the gospel, I 
have thus been drawn forth, and enabled to visit, — a petition 
however feeble, must ever dwell in my heart ; and on whose 
behalf I would earnestly and affectionately crave the fervent 
aspirations of all my dear brethren and sisters, when it is well 
with them : and may they unite with me in commemorating the 
mercy, loving-kindness and faithfulness of Him, who for His 
great name's sake, and for His beloved Son's sake, wrought the 
work, — hath so marvellously sustained us through every season 
of trial and conflict, and delivered us out of every distress : that 
the thanksgiving of many may resound to His praise, to whom 
the kingdom, and the power, and the glory, belong for ever. 

* Notes respecting the South Sea Isles, &c., by Charles Wheeler, 
being extracts from letters to his family, 'will be found in the Appendix. 



1838.] CHAPTER XXXV. 687 



CHAPTER XXXV. 

ATTEXDS THE YEARLY MEETING IX LOXDOX OF 1838 HIS PROS- 
PECT OF RELIGIOUS SERVICE IN AMERICA VISITS HIS FAMILY IN 

RUSSIA, EIGHTH MONTH, 1838 SAILS TO NEW YORK, FIRST 

MONTH, 1839 TRAVELS IN THE UNITED STATES ATTENDS 

YEARLY MEETINGS OF PHILADELPHIA, VIRGINIA AND NEW YORK. 

Shortly after leaving England on my way to the islands of 
the Pacific, an unfading evidence was granted me that I should 
have to visit North America, after the service on which I was 
then entering should he accomplished. Such a marvellous 
unfolding of the Divine will as to the future, so condescendingly 
vouchsafed and permitted to make an impression on my mind at 
so great a length of time before-hand, could not fail to support, 
comfort, and strengthen me in every season of trial and con- 
flict both inward and outward, which I had afterwards to pass 
through ; and although at seasons my mind was put closely to the 
test, it was again and again renewed from the heavenly treasury 
of living faith, to strengthen my confidence in its holy Author 
and Finisher : for the brightest gleam of that soul-sustaining 
loving-kindness which is better than life, soon loses its lustre, 
unless renewed from time to time by Him in whose presence 
only there is life. 

The statement which I felt called upon to render to the 
Yearly Meeting held soon after our return to England was very 
short, as my beloved friends were already in possession of the 
extracts from my Journal ; and the time was not come for me to 
disclose how I had been favoured with such an evidence before- 
hand of a safe return to the land of my fathers. My exercise of 
mind during the Yearly Meeting may more easily be conceived 
than described : and though my countenance might sparkle 
with joy at once more beholding my brethren and sisters in 
religious fellowship, my heart was full of a subject which 
nothing could relieve but disclosure ; and that seemed denied, 
until the appointed days were fulfilled that the seal should be 



688 chapter xxxv. [1838. 

opened, and the thing proclaimed as on the house-top. At 
times I would gladly have taken counsel as to the right path 
of proceeding with my concern ; but it seemed my place not to 
confer with flesh and blood, but to keep my eye steadily fixed 
on that Almighty power, which alone can qualify us like the 
left-handed sons of Benjamin, to throw a stone to a hairV 
breadth . 

Eventually my way opened with clearness to attend Balby 
Monthly Meeting, and York Quarterly Meeting in the Sixth 
Month ; and having returned the certificates granted five years 
and a half ago, after a brief statement of my late journey, and 
mentioning the earnest of a return in safety, which the Lord 
had granted me, I had to inform Friends that I no longer 
stood before them as one returning, but as one requesting a cer- 
tificate to enable me to visit various parts of North America. 
As regarded my children, for whom I think I felt more than 
for myself, I remember telling York Quarterly Meeting when 
my concern was laid before it, that though human nature keenly 
felt the separation from, and would gladly remain in possession 
of its greatest earthly treasure, yet I did believe I could not 
promote the welfare of my beloved family in any manner so 
much, as by my own faithfulness to what I apprehended to be 
the duty required of me. A certificate was granted, setting me 
at liberty to pursue the prospect then before the view of my 
mind. That I might not be chargeable in the sight of any, 
with neglecting to look after the affairs of my own household, it 
seemed best for me before embarking for America, to visit the 
residence of my family on the plains of Shoosharry ; although if 
my own inclination only had been consulted, I should have 
preferred, on several accounts, proceeding immediately across the 
Atlantic, after having passed the Morning Meeting in London. 

[This visit to Russia was satisfactorily accomplished : setting 
out on the 1st of Eighth Month, Daniel Wheeler passed about 
as many weeks at his former abode as he had been years absent ; 
returning through Finland and Stockholm, he reached London 
again on the 22nd of Tenth Month, and finally embarked from 
Liverpool on the 25th of Eleventh Month following. It was 



1838.] CHAPTER XXXV. 689 

no small trial to leave behind, in a drooping state of health, his 
son Charles, the faithful companion of his long journeyings. 
From the boyhood of the latter they had, with but little excep- 
tion, dwelt under the same roof ; and after the very close associa- 
tion of the last few } 7 ears, almost by day and night, the separation 
now demanded was more than ordinarily painful to him. In a 
letter from D. W., written at sea, it is thus alluded to. 

Twelfth Month 26th, 1 838. 
Having for so many years had the society of my 



dear Charles, under all circumstances, and through each wintry 
season as it revolved, I have never before felt so friendless and 
childless, as is now my portion. This circumstance, and the 
recollection of the bereavements which have befallen us about 
this dreary season, combine to darken the shade of the gloomy 
picture, with a deeper hue than it is wont to have, when clad in 
its' own natural and beautiful, though cheerless garb. Truly 
may I say, " I had fainted if I had not believed,*" to see the 
loving-kindness of the Lord, and the greatness of his goodness, 
which is laid up for them that fear Him, and that trust in Him 
before the sons of men. In the time of trouble He doth hide 
them in His pavilion, in the secret of His tabernacle shall He 
hide them ; He shall set them upon a rock. Although weak 
and feeble, and utterly unworthy in my own estimation, without 
might or power, storehouse or barn ; yet, through that "mercy" 
which is " from everlasting to everlasting,'" I am at seasons, 
whilst floating on the mighty deep, permitted to feel an inward 
support in the belief, that I am moving in my heavenly Father's 
will, — for truly it is not in mine own,' — there is one that knoweth 
and judgeth righteously : of this thing I am sure and certain from 
incontrovertible evidence, and herein is my rejoicing and hope. 
Let none be cast down or discouraged ; for greater is He that 
is for us, than he that is against us : and although many are 
the trials of faith and patience, the deep baptisms, and the tri- 
bulations which the Lord's children have to pass through, yet 
He delivereth out of them all ; and He will deliver, and that to 
the very uttermost, all that in sincerity trust in Him. And how 
doth He mercifully vouchsafe unto such, in the abounding of 

2 Y 



690 CHAPTER XXXV. [1838. 

His love, a blessed portion of that " peace which passeth all 
understanding, - " to sustain them in the way that they should go. 

[Towards the conclusion of his voyage to America, he thus 
writes.] 

First day, Twelfth Month, 30th, 1838. We have seventeen 
cabin passengers, and amongst this number, several very disso- 
lute characters ; who have passed most of the voyage in drink- 
ing and gambling, almost day and night : but the succession of 
storms which have followed us of late, and their disappoint- 
ment at not reaching our port as they expected, upon which event 
they have even risked several sums of money, — seem at length 
to have brought them to their senses in a remarkable manner. 
This morning, I found my mind brought into deep thoughtful- 
ness ; and was willing, if way should open, either to do or to suffer 
on their account. I thought of mentioning the subject to one 
of my fellow-passengers, of whose integrity of life and conver- 
sation I have had some proof; but no opportunity offered, until 
he came to me, saying it would be very agreeable to some of 
the company, and to the captain, if I would address them when 
assembled together. I told him the subject had rested with 
me, and that if we could have a time of silence, if any thing 
arose for expression, it should not be withheld. This he 
readily undertook to arrange, and at a fixed time, the whole 
party was collected. I was not aware that this person had 
previously selected a Psalm to be read by himself, until all was 
quiet ; he then opened the Bible and commenced : it was the 
thirty-seventh Psalm, and it appeared very appropriate to the 
occasion. A general silence followed, until my mouth was opened 
to declare what arose in my mind in the " word of the truth of 
the gospel ;" setting forth the terms of discipleship, and the 
necessity of a preparation of heart, before true worship can be 
offered ; it was at considerable length, and to my own peace 
and comfort. They appeared measurably sobered, and have 
passed the afternoon in a rational manner, some of them for 
the first time since coming on board. We had a heavy blow 
last night, and lost the main-top sail before morning, which I 
think contributed to humble them. 



1839.] CHAPTER XXXV. 691 

31st. — This evening we were saluted with the joyful sound, 
from a fast sailing clipper schooner, ' Do you want a pilot V 
which being answered in the affirmative, ' then heave to 1 was 
the word. Our decks rang with the cheers of all on board I 
believe, but myself, when our courses were hauled up, and the 
main-yard immediately thrown to the mast. The pilot soon 
boarded us to leeward, and the ' guessing' shortly commenced, 
— such as, ' I guess you are from Liverpool V ' I guess you 
have had pretty smart weather?' &c. For my own part, I 
' guessed - ' from the rapid motion of the clouds, that we should 
have another rough night, and so it proved. As the ship was 
beating to windward, the crew were toiling incessantly through 
the whole of it; and such was the noise, and confusion on board, 
that very little sleep could be obtained. 

[The Extracts which follow are from Daniel Wheeler's 
Journal and letters.] 

First Month 1st, 1839. — This morning the Never Linte 
hills were in sight, and we worked up the bay amidst fields of 
floating ice, drifting from the mouth of the Hudson river. The 
morning was so foggy in the neighbourhood of the city, that 
the signal of the telegraph announcing the approach of the 
George Washington, was not discovered by the ' look out,' 
so that we were within three miles of the wharf at New York, 
before a steamer came to assist us through the ice. By the 
way, I think the method of steering the American steamers is 
admirable : the helmsman is stationed in the fore part of the 
vessel, where he can see all before him, instead of being in the 
after part, where he can scarcely see any thing for the masts, &c. 
of his own vessel : he is also sheltered from the weather in a large 
lantern, the windows of which, he can open or shut at pleasure. 
Before noon we were at our desired haven, and I trust that 
some of our hearts were filled with gratitude and thankfulness. 

Though unexpected and a perfect stranger, as by some means 
I had left England, without any introductions for New York, 
I was kindly received on shore by John R. Willis. In the 
afternoon, it was finally arranged that I should become an 
inmate with J. and P. Olapp. 

2 y 2 



692 CHAPTER XXXV. [1839. 

2nd. — Attended the week-day meeting for worship and the 
Monthly meeting held at its close. In the former, I had a 
short testimony to bear to the faithfulness of that God with 
whom we have to do. 

4th. — Had a most unexpected visit from my much loved 
friend Stephen Grellet, who had come from his home at Bur- 
lington to see me. He struck me as very little altered since 
we parted in Petersburg twenty years ago. It was truly 
delightful to meet him again, though the interview could not 
fail to awaken many painful recollections of clays that are past, 
when our little family circle was unbroken, and, as far as we 
can expect enjoyment while on earth, happy in itself. But 
though many seasons of sorrow were brought to remembrance, 
the never failing mercy of the Lord could be traced to have 
compassed us about as with a shield, for His great name's sake, 
from the time of our separation up to this very day. 

6th. (First day.) — In the early part of the meeting this 
morning I was greatly bowed down ; but in the Lord's time was 
raised up to declare the way of life and salvation, and the 
necessity of the whole heart being given up to follow tho Son of 
Man in the regeneration. In the afternoon I had to revive the 
words of tho apostle, — " the weapons of our warfare are not 
carnal, but mighty through God to the pulling down of strong- 
holds ;" — querying, what we knew of this for ourselves. 

] 5th. — We were favoured with a blessed meeting, when the 
poor in spirit were declared to be those, to whom the gospel was 
ever and is still preached. Elizabeth Coggeshall afterwards 
knelt down, and gave the glory to Him, who had thus conde- 
scended to grant us that drop of heavenly refreshment. 

20th. — In the forenoon meeting, I had to declare the necessity 
for all to come to the knowledge and possession of true faith ; 
which can only be obtained from its ever blessed author and 
finisher. 

2'3rd. — Attended the Select Meeting at Westbury, where I 
had to encourage Friends to faithfulness in the maintenance of 
that cause, which is as precious at the present day as when 
David replied to the remonstrances of his elder brother, " What 
have I now done ? Is there not a cause V Although in the 



1839.] CHAPTER XXXV. 693 

promotion of this dignified cause, we may certainly have to v 
drink of the cup which the Master drank of, and be baptised 
with the same baptism that he was baptised withal. The 
disciple is not above his master, nor the servant above his 
lord, &c. 

24tth. — Attended the Quarterly Meeting, in which I had to 
sound an alarm amongst Friends, declaring that the Most High 
will have a church, He will have a people for himself, that shall 
show forth his praise. Many were willing and ready to join 
in the " Hosanna to the son of David ;" but how few were found 
to confess Him, and to stand by Him, at the blood-stained 
cross : one betrayed his Master, another denied Him, and they 
all forsook Him and fled. I stood long on my feet, and had 
peace afterwards. 

On the 25th, the meeting for public worship was again held, 
and I was largely opened amongst them. The young people 
were earnestly entreated to hearken to the voice of wisdom, and 
offer an early sacrifice to the Lord : and I had to acknowledge 
the loving-kindness of the Lord in spreading the mantle of His 
heavenly presence over us, to my own comfort, and I trust to 
the satisfaction of my brethren also. In the evening, some 
opportunities were afforded to address large companies of 
Friends, assembled at each other's houses. 

27th. — Attended the meetings for worship, and had service 
in both, to my own peace. 

28th. — Set out for Burlington, accompanied by Samuel Clapp 
and Wager Hull by steam-boat to Amboy, from thence by 
rail-road : the route led by the house and grounds of Joseph 
Buonaparte, on the banks of the Delaware. A heavy storm of 
wind and rain on the 26th, had raised the water in many parts 
to an unusual height, and occasioned much loss of property by 
sweeping the quays even of heavy articles, such as coal. The 
rising of the Delaware had spread large masses of ice over the 
neighbourhood ; and the railroad by which we have travelled 
was in places entirely hidden by the water, which was still too 
high to be confined within its usual limits. The car in which 
we rode held about forty persons, with a stove in the middle of 
it, well supplied with fuel, which made it sufficiently warm. 



694 CHAPTER XXXV. [1839. 

Reached Burlington as it became dark, and were soon conducted 
to the abode of dear Stephen Grellet. Remained here over 
their preparative meeting on the 31st, and had an opportunity 
of calling on many Friends. 

Second Month 1st. — Took leave of the family, where my 
residence had been delightful, and which reminded me of dwell- 
ing in a nest of turtle doves. Friends of this place appear to 
live in much harmony, and have not witnessed many of those 
afflicting circumstances, in which many other meetings have 
shared, from the Hicksite apostacy. Proceeded to Philadelphia 
in company with my country-people Thomas and Elizabeth 
Robson, S. Grellet and other Friends ; crossed the Delaware 
opposite the city by steam bridge : we lodged at the house 
of Ellis Yarnall, a quiet retreat indeed. Next day I attended 
and had service in the Select Meeting. 

'■)r<l. (First Day.) — Attended the meeting for the Western 
district in the morning, and was largely engaged therein. In 
the afternoon was at the Arch Street meeting, and from the 
oppressive heat of the house, had to labour under discouraging 
circumstances as to the body, but was enabled to declare the way 
of the Lord amongst them. 

■1th. — The Quarterly Meeting was held this day : it was the 
largest meeting of Friends I ever saw, except the Yearly Meet- 
ing in London : the attendance was greater, perhaps by one- 
third, on the women's side of the house, than on the men's ; 
and this is more or less the case wherever I go. I had to press 
upon Friends the necessity of attaining that state, which cha- 
racterizes all the living members of the gospel church. 

8th. — Attended the meetings in the northern and western 
districts, and had good service therein. The former is con- 
sidered the largest in Philadelphia. 

On the 12th, 13th, and 14th, I attended the North, the 
Orange Street and the Arch Street Meetings, in all of which 
my mouth was opened. 

On the 15th, I visited an afflicted family, the mother having 
died two days before. After seeing the corpse, we had a con- 
triting opportunity with the father and children, under the wing 
of the Prince of Peace. Coming to Philadelphia seems to have 



1839.] CHAPTER XXXV. 695 

opened a wide door for me in the minds of a large body of 
Friends, and 'gives strength again to move forward : leaving 
New York has I trust been in the right ordering, in which I 
humbly pray to be preserved. 

11th. — At the forenoon meeting under much discouragement. 
Had to stand some time amongst the people, and to insist on 
the necessity of our doing the will of the Holy Father, if we 
would know the doctrine of the Son ; unto those thus found in 
obedience, his doctrine shall distil as the dew, and a3 the small 
rain upon the tender herb : they shall inherit substance, and 
shall certainly know that they have not followed cunningly 
devised fables, but living and substantial truth. 

Third Month 11th. — Since the last entry very much confined 
to the house with an attack of influenza, which has prevailed 
here very generally. My mind has often been brought very 
low ; but my gracious Master has been pleased to enable me to 
stand resigned to every dispensation of His holy will. Many 
Friends have called to console and comfort me, and the esti- 
mable family with whom my lot has been cast, have lost no 
opportunity to administer to my relief in every way ; so that 
in every thing I have abundant cause to give thanks to Him, 
through whom all my wants have been so mercifully supplied. 
Yesterday got to meeting, and had a short testimony to bear, 
— that the path to the kingdom changeth not, but is the same 
now as in the beginning ; and this way is Jesus, the first and 
the last, the Alpha and the Omega, the beginning and the 
ending, the bright and morning star. 

17th. — At the Western district meeting. Shortly after 
gathering, the silence was broken by one of the Hicksite 
preachers. His doctrine was guarded, and condemnable rather 
for what he had not spoken, than for what he did speak. I 
thought that those who really knew what he was, were cer- 
tainly blame-worthy in not apprising the elders, so that the 
meeting might not have been disturbed by him. The dis- 
courses of these people are frequently very extravagant ; deny- 
ing the divinity of the Lord who bought them, in terms little 
short of blasphemy. 

\9th. — Attended the North meeting, after which the pre- 



696 CHAPTER XXXV. [1839. 

parative meeting was held. In the meeting for worship, seven 
ministers were present, but not a word spoken. It is truly and 
sorrowfully a low time, in which the rightly concerned must be 
willing to suffer with their suffering Lord, and be crucified with 
Him, in the spiritual Sodom and Egypt of the present day. 

20th. — Attended the Western meeting ; after which the 
Monthly Meeting was held. I have been silent in several 
meetings of late, and at times much depressed from day to day. 
In the meeting for worship, a Friend from another meeting 
spoke encouragingly to my state, as one acquainted with the 
Lord's dealings, and the trials his servants have to pass 
through. 

2Uh. (First day.) — Attended the Western district meet- 
ing in the morning, which was much disturbed by the indispo- 
sition of a female who had to retire, and by an alarm of fire. 
My mind was under exercise, and a woman Friend standing 
up, led the way for my declaring, that the Lord most assuredly 
is looking for fruit, even the fruit of the Spirit ; afterwards 
reciting the words of our Saviour to his disciples, — " Herein is 
my Father glorified, that ye bear much fruit ; so shall ye be 
my disciples. Every branch in me that beareth not fruit, He 
taketh away ; and every branch that beareth fruit, He purgeth 
it, that it may bring forth more fruit, ,, &c. I felt somewhat 
relieved at the close of the meeting. 

In the evening attended a meeting appointed by Elizabeth 
Robson for the young people particularly. Dear Elizabeth 
Bobson had to speak of the blessedness of those who take up 
the cross, and follow the Lord Jesus, and of the impossibility 
of serving two masters : towards the conclusion she suppli- 
cated on their behalf. It might be termed a solid meeting ; but 
it seemed to me that the minds of too many of our young- 
people have already been so much dazzled with the glare of 
creaturely activity and excitement, as to have but little relish 
for the plain but incontrovertible truths of the gospel in their 
primitive purity. O ! the beguiling influence of human wisdom ! 
how doth it corrupt from the simplicity that is in Jesus : it 
strikes at the very life of spiritual Christianity 

25th. — The day rough and cold with showers of snow. My 



1S39.] CHAPTER XXXV. 697 

health through favour is much restored : my only want is 
more and more of the Divine presence, and more ability to exalt 
the cause of truth and righteousness in the earth. 

26th. — Attended the North meeting, after which their 
Monthly Meeting was held, and my certificates were read. 

27th and 28th. — Attended the Orange Street and Arch Street 
meetings, after each of which the Monthly Meeting was held. 
At all the Monthly Meetings I have recently attended, it is 
very painful to witness the number of young persons who are 
leaving the Society. These for the most part were minors 
when their parents became Hicksites ; and as they become of 
age, are disowned for non-attendance of meetings. Others, 
again, are selling their birthright for a mess of pottage ; and it is 
evident, from the inconsistency of conduct of hundreds in this 
city, how lightly they esteem the principles in which they have 
been educated. Alas ! Alas ! what will they do in the end. 

31s?. — Attended the meeting now held as the wreck of the 
once large and comfortable meeting of Merion, consisting of 
thirty-six to forty persons. I had to stand up amongst them 
and testify, that "the law is holy, and the commandment 
holy, and just, and good :"" — that the true worshippers are 
no longer under the law of sin and death, but under the law 
of the Spirit of life in Christ Jesus, which makes free from the 
law of sin and death. They are not under the dominion of sin, 
but under grace, — that grace and truth which came by Jesus 
Christ : the Truth hath made them free, and they are free 
indeed. It is only such that can worship the Father in the 
beauty of holiness, and in newness of life. 

Fourth Month 1st. — Accompanied Israel Morris to Haver- 
ford. Here is established a school for Friends 1 children, where 
the higher branches of learning are taught, at present to about 
seventy boys ; but as the vacation is near at hand, and pre- 
parations making for an examination before that commences, I 
saw no part of the usual routine of the institution. 

4th. — Attended the meeting at Haverford. It was a rest- 
less and trying time to me. I had to revive among them the 
passage, beginning — " Let not the wise man glory in his 
wisdom, neither let the mighty man glory in his might. Let 



698 CHAPTER XXXV. [1839. 

not the rich man glory in his riches ; but let him that glorieth, 
glory in this, that he that understandeth and knoweth me, that 
I am the Lord, which exercise loving-kindness, judgment, and 
righteousness in the earth ; for in these things I delight, saith 
the Lord. 1 ' 

7th. (First day.) — Attended both meetings at Burlington, 
having come by steam-boat yesterday. In the forenoon I 
stood up with these expressions, — the royal Psalmist, than 
whom none could bear a more ample testimony to the loving- 
kindness, mercy, and faithfulness of the Lord, had neverthe- 
less his share of trial, and had at seasons to mourn as a dove 
in the absence of his Beloved ; as when we find him making the 
solemn appeal, — " Will the Lord cast off for ever, and will He 
be favourable no more V &c. In the afternoon, I revived the 
words of our dear Redeemer, — " Strive to enter in at the strait 
gate ;" — which strait gate remains to be the only way to the 
kingdom. If "we live after the flesh, we shall die: but if we 
through the Spirit, do mortify the deeds of the body, we shall 
live :"" the life of the Christian is a continual warfare, — the 
flesh against the Spirit, and the Spirit against the flesh ; but 
the weapons of his warfare are inward and spiritual, and 
" mighty through God," &c. 

8t7i. — Spent the afternoon much to my satisfaction with our 
ancient friend John Cox, eighty- seven years of age : he is a 
minister, and alive in the Truth. In the evening J. J. Gurney 
arrived from New York, whom it was very pleasant to meet 
again. 

9th. — Returned to New York, and found J. Clapp and 
family well, and as kind as heretofore. The next day attended 
the meeting here, which proved satisfactory. I had to allude 
to the blessedness and peace that are the portion of the children 
of God, who have been ransomed from their sins by the blood 
of Jesus, and redeemed by submission to the operation of His 
Holy Spirit in their hearts : reviving the language of the pro- 
phet, — " Look upon Zion, the city of our solemnities; thine 
eyes shall see Jerusalem a quiet habitation, — a tabernacle that 
shall not be taken down." Several others spoke. 

11th < — Returned by rail-road to Philadelphia, having the 



1839.] CHAPTER XXXV. 699 

company of Anna A. Jenkins and her companion from Provi- 
dence. 

12th. — Attended the Meeting for Sufferings, which was large, 
nearly all the members being present. The subject of slavery 
came before it ; and the case of the oppressed slaves, as well as 
of the slave-holders, was treated with much feeling. Many 
Friends seem under much concern on this subject ; and on 
account of those of our numbers who have joined the Coloniza- 
tion Society, which is not unlike sanctioning the continuance 
of this cruel system. May the Lord be graciously pleased to 
break this inhuman yoke asunder. 

loth. — Attended the first sitting of the Yearly Meeting of 
ministers and elders : it was a low time with me, and I believe 
with others also. 

\Mh. (First day.)— Attended the meeting in Twelfth 
Street, in the fore-part of which Anna A. Jenkins appeared in 
supplication. A young minister followed in a lively testimony ; 
after which I found an exercise which I was enabled to throw 
off, and had to encourage the young man who preceded me. A 
Friend who sat by me, afterwards said, that he was sensible 
when my concern came on, it was suddenly ' like a flash,' and 
so it was ; under the feeling of which, I stood up almost imme- 
diately, and was afterwards comforted. 

loth. — The Yearly Meeting at large sat down. I little 
thought that it would be my lot to break in upon the solemnity 
that prevailed, until a short interval before I found that I could 
do no other than petition on the bended knee, that the Lord in 
his everlasting mercy would be pleased to lift up the light of 
His heavenly countenance upon us. After taking my seat 
again, my soul was melted in humble contrition before Him, 
who liveth for ever and ever. 

The Yearly Meeting continued by adjournments until the 
1.9th instant inclusive, and was an exercising time, on account 
of the too general departure from, and ignorance of that light 
and truth, which distinguished the meetings of our worthy 
predecessors in so eminent a manner. On the subject of meet- 
ings for worship, I had one remark to make ; and to declare 
that if ever we suffered the righteous testimony to the teach- 



700 CHAPTER XXXV. [1839. 

ings of that Divine grace which hath appeared unto all men, to 
fall to the ground, or be lowered by departure from a silent 
waiting upon God for the blessed influence of the Holy Spirit, 
to enable us to worship Him aright, — the glory would 
depart from our Israel, and nothing be left us but an empty 
name. 

On the morning of the loth, before the sun was up, the love 
of Grod flowed through my heart towards our beloved sisters 
in their Yearly Meeting ; but this blessed visitation soon passed 
away as a morning cloud, leaving not a trace behind : and yet 
it was in the same glorious manner, but shorter and in a less 
degree, as that which once prompted me to visit the distant 
isles of the ocean. I felt no more of it, although my mind 
often recurred to the manifestation during a time of great 
sensible weakness and self-abasement for several successive 
sittings ; wherein was remarkably verified the necessity for the 
feet of the priests to stand firm in the bottom of Jordan with 
the ark of the testimony, until all the people had clean passed 
over. When all the minutes were gone through, and the 
principal cases disposed of, dear Elizabeth Robson came into 
the men's meeting : before this scarcely any thing in the line 
of ministry was offered by any one : but now the seals seemed 
to be loosed. E. R. was highly favoured, and bore an awaken- 
ing testimony among us. This opened the way for me to 
follow, exhorting all to turn to the Lord with full purpose of 
heart, in the very depths of humility. My soul had mourned 
over the low state of things among us : the sorrowful and 
manifest declension, which had so greatly marred and defaced 
our religious Society, might be traced to our having departed 
in heart from that precious principle of light and life, bestowed 
in redeeming mercy on every individual of the human race. It 
is high time to lay aside the unfruitful works of darkness, and 
to put on the whole armour of light ; for the day is far spent, 
and the night is at hand. 

On the 19th, the prospect above-mentioned again revived before 
me, and in the afternoon I thought I could not allow the meeting 
to conclude without making some attempt to bring it about. I 
hinted my situation to an elder in the meeting-house yard, when 



1839.] CHAPTER XXXV. 701 

our meeting was gathering, who advised me to proceed with it ; 
and as soon as the clerk had opened the meeting, I spread my 
concern before it, and Friends rising in quick succession with 
a word of encouragement, I was soon set at liberty. I had 
full opportunity to clear my mind in a crowded meeting, to my 
own great relief ; and perhaps some longing desires might be 
raised in the hearts of individuals after that purity of heart 
and life, in which the Lord delighteth : the result I desire to 
leave to Him, who seeth the end from the beginning. As the 
men's meeting gathered, my exercise had become stronger and 
stronger, in tender mercy confirming me that it was of the 
Lord ; and truly His heavenly power and presence went with 
me, and enabled me richly to open the way of life to my 
beloved sisters, and to encourage them to press toward the 
mark for the prize immortal, the high calling of God in Christ 
Jesus. I understood afterwards, that no other time during 
the whole Yearly Meeting, would have been so seasonable as 
the one^ I was pressed to resort to. Trust in the Lord, O ! 
my soul ! 

21st. — Attended both meetings ; in the forenoon I had to 
deal very plainly : in the afternoon was silent. 

23rd. — Attended the funeral of Timothy Paxton, a worthy 
elder, whom I had visited in the course of his sickness. The 
crucified Saviour was declared to a large assemblage, including 
I suppose many Hicksites, but all was quietly received. 

27th. — Proceeded to Wilmington and was kindly received 
at the abode of Samuel Hillis. This city is built in a well 
chosen situation, with the noble Delaware in its front, and 
the Brandy Wine and Christiana rivers navigable up to the 
wharfs. At the foot of the Brandy Wine, many mills are 
established, where the bulk of the American flour that is ex- 
ported is dried and ground. 

Attended both meetings in Wilmington, in which I had 
some service. In the afternoon an ancient Friend spoke, 
which opened the way for me to quote the apostolic declaration, 
— " That which may be known of God, is manifest in man, for 
God hath showed it unto him ;" — making a solemn appeal to 
some present, whether they were not treating the Spirit of the 



702 CHAPTER XXXV. [1839. 

Lord in their hearts, as His holy person was treated when on 
earth by the Jews ; when " He was despised and rejected of 
men, a man of sorrows and acquainted with grief.'' 1 Assuredly, 
a day will come when He who now pleadeth with them for 
their own soul's sake, in matchless love and mercy, shall be 
their judge. " I judge no man. The words that I speak, the 
same shall judge them at the last day. 11 

Fifth Month 3rd. — Went over two whaling vessels, lately 
returned from the Pacific, — in one, found a poor solitary New 
Zealander ; of course little could be done in the way of con- 
versation, as he spoke but little English. One of these vessels 
had been out only twenty-two months, the other nearly four 
years, and at last returned with only a scanty cargo. 

4th. — Attended the Monthly Meeting : to myself a lifeless 
season. A number of young persons at schools kept by Friends 
in this neighbourhood attend meetings ; which tends very much 
to make them unsettled and unsatisfactory, as some of the boys 
particularly are very restless, and appear insensible of the true 
intent of our meeting together. I found that unless they came 
to meetings, their teachers would have to remain at home with 
them, and Friends on this account make allowances, and bear 
these things with much Christian charity. 

nth. (First day.) — Had good service in the forenoon 
meeting, declaring the blessedness of those who do the will of 
the Father, by hearkening to the voice of His well-beloved Son. 
In the evening I had a public meeting, to which the inhabitants 
at large were invited : a considerable number assembled, but 
the house was not filled. It was an exercising time to myself, 
arising in part from the weight of responsibility resting upon 
me, and partly from having an intoxicated individual seated 
directly before me, who fell asleep, and leaned forward so much 
that his hat fell twice from his head, An attempt was made 
to persuade him to go home, but did not succeed : he eventually 
roused up, I was informed, and listened attentively. I sat 
pretty long before I felt strength to stand up. At length the 
following expressions crossed my mind, and brought with them 
the ability to testify, that " the God of Israel is He that giveth 
strength and power to his people. Blessed be God !" I had 



1839.] CHAPTER XXXV. 703 

abundant cause as on many former occasions, to magnify that 
Almighty power, which enabled me to declare His mercy and 
His truth among the people ; enlarging my heart, as I pro- 
ceeded to speak with innocent boldness of the things of His 
kingdom. It was with me to set forth the glories of the 
present gospel day, and to query how far we were individually 
contributing or otherwise to promote its fulness, as we have 
each a responsible part to act in the great work. My late 
visit to the South Seas was adverted to, and the message with 
which I was charged by Paofai, and of the principal chiefs 
of the island of Eimeo, was faithfully delivered.* I had to 
point out the dreadful national responsibility we were incur- 
ring, and the imperative necessity for all earnestly to consider, 
whether they were clear of contributing in any manner to 
the sacrifice of those poor islanders, who are fast vanishing 
from the surface of the earth, in consequence of their inter- 
course with foreigners ; reviving the words of the prophet of 
the Most High, " shall I not visit for these things ; shall not 
my soul be avenged upon such a nation V It was a solemn 
opportunity, and was overshadowed by the wing of everlasting 
love : so that my soul could truly say, I trust with humble 
reverence, at the end as at the beginning, — " Blessed be God," 
who alone "giveth strength and power to His people. 

10th. — Attended the meeting this day, which was a highly 
favoured season. A precious remnant was present, capable of 
appreciating this signal instance of Divine regard vouchsafed 
even in this degenerate day, as a brook by the way. 

11th. — Took leave of Friends, and left Wilmington by rail- 
road, with a peaceful mind. We crossed the noble Susquehanna 
river at Havre de Grace, and several branches of the Ohesapeak 
bay and the Gunpowder water, on the way to Baltimore : we 
reached this city early in the afternoon, where I am now 
kindly entertained at the house of Dr. Thomas. The passage 
of the Susquehanna, which I have just mentioned is by steamer, 

* " Go," he said, " to Britannia, and tell the people to have mercy on 
us ; — and then go to America, and tell the people there to have mercy on 
us ; for it is these countries that send the poison amongst us ;" alluding 
to the introduction of rum, &c. See page 398. 



704 CHAPTER XXXV. [1839. 

and is so managed that from leaving the railway car on one 
side, till again seated in a fresh car on the other side, the pas- 
senger is constantly under cover, so that whatever be the 
weather, he is provided for. 

11th. — In the forenoon meeting I was closely engaged, 
standing up with the words of the blessed Redeemer, — " Ye 
worship ye know not what." However abrupt and unpalatable 
the accusation might appear, I found that I had no other course 
to take. Many Hicksites were at the meeting, for whom what 
I had to say might have seemed to have been previously pre- 
pared, if I had known that they would have been at the 
meeting: it was, however, a solid meeting. The afternoon 
meeting was silent as to myself, but we had the ministry of 
another Friend to satisfaction. 

lith. — Believing that I could do no less than endeavour to 
meet the sailors, and others connected with a sea-faring life, 
arrangements were made for this purpose ; and the privilege 
obtained of the use of the Bethel chapel, when it was ascer- 
tained that the stranger for whom it was requested was not a 
Hicksite: the meeting was held at a suitable hour in the 
evening, and was considered large. As regards myself, it was 
a low season ; and I believed while sitting in silence before 
them, that but few were present of the description whom my 
soul longed after. I was strengthened to declare the everlasting 
gospel amongst them ; but seemed led along to a class making 
much higher profession of religion than those whom I expected 
to assemble. It w T as I believe, considered a satisfactory meet- 
ing ; but the feelings of the unprofitable servant were mine. 

loth. — Called on some of the sick and afflicted, to my own 
comfort and peace. In the evening a large number of Friends 
and others collected at the house of Dr. Thomas, where a pre- 
cious opportunity was vouchsafed to us. 

16th. — The week day meeting held in course was small, but 
very precious to a living remnant. I had much to say among 
them of an encouraging and comforting nature ; but I hope it 
was done in such a manner, that none could take that to them- 
selves which belonged to another : the terms were rigidly 
specified. I had to commemorate the tender mercy of our 



18-39.] CHAPTER XXXV. 705 

God, and the continued regard of our holy High Priest, Christ 
Jesus ; whose presence was livingly felt amongst us. It was a 
blessed season to myself; and I. believe will not soon be for- 
gotten by some others. 

In the afternoon, took leave of my truly kind host ; and 
accompanied by Samuel Carey, proceeded by railway towards 
Virginia. After crossing the Patapsco river, and passing 
through the city of Washington, we were embarked on board a 
steamer ; we proceeded down the spacious Potomac, as far as 
the head of Potomac Creek, which runs up from Chesapeake 
Bay. Here we were packed in crowded clumsy stages, and 
conveyed nine miles to Fredericsburgh, where we were again 
seated in a railway car, holding about sixty persons ; many of 
them in rocking chairs, which seem quite a sine qua non with 
all classes here. We reached the station near Taylorsville 
about four o'clock the next morning ; but as this is merely a 
boarded shed, where whiskey and cider are sold, we walked on 
to the village, carrying our luggage with us. Here we found 
comfortable quarters ; but owing to some failure of letters, a 
carriage which was to have met us here was not to be found. 
We were now in a land of slavery, and the delay which this 
disappointment occasioned, afforded some opportunity of remark- 
ing the effects of the system ; but although perhaps here, in its 
mildest form, both the country and the people wear an aspect 
of wretchedness and poverty, quite striking to a stranger. The 
land has grown tobacco, until in places it can scarcely cover 
itself with a plant of any kind. Here and there a patch of 
Indian corn is to be seen, which, with hogs, seems to constitute 
the principal food of the inhabitants. In the afternoon we hired 
a pair of horses that had been ploughing, a very old shabby 
vehicle, and equally shabby harness, and set forward for Mont- 
pelier in Hanover county. Had to ford a small river by the 
way, in the middle of which the horses became awkward, pro- 
bably from a desire to drink ; when the harness broke, and the 
poor animals drank their fill, whilst our negro driver repaired 
• damages, cutting up parts of the harness to strengthen what 
had given way. The weather was very sultry, and we reached 
the mansion of Nathaniel C. Crenshaw, just at the commence- 

2z 



706 chapter xxxv. [1839. 

mcnt of a heavy thunder storm. Wo wero most hospitably 
received, although a large party of Friends had already assem- 
bled, like ourselves, on their way to the Yearly Meeting of 
Virginia, to be held the next day at Cedar Creek, five miles 
distant. 

18th. — Attended the Select Meeting in tho forenoon, which, 
though small, was satisfactory ; and afterwards tho Meeting 
for Sufferings. 

19th. (First Bay.) — The peoplo collected for the forenoon 
meeting in great numbers. The neighbourhood of the meeting 
house exhibited such a display of equipages, as I could not have 
supposed the country hereaway was capable of making. Many 
of the coloured people also attended. The meeting house was 
built before the separation, and therefore of large dimensions, so 
that there was room for all ; but for a time wo were much dis- 
turbed by the very loose behaviour of some of our well dressed 
white visitors. I was grieved with their conduct, and at length 
told them, that in order to get into a settled state, it would be 
well for each individual to consider in whose presence we were 
assembled, as became men and Christians, &c : we were after- 
wards favoured with a solemn season together. A few went 
out, but the more solid part remained, until the meeting ended. 
At my request a public meeting was held that afternoon. 
It was not so large as that in the forenoon, but the company 
were much more solid ; and I humbly trust the great Name 
was exalted that day, and His power felt to reign in the hearts 
of many. 

20th. (Second Bay.) — It is the practice for the business of 
the Yearly Meeting to commence this morning. The men and 
women usually sit together for a short interval, and then the 
shutters are drawn up, which separate them into distinct meet- 
ings ; but before this could be done, the .people flocked in so 
numerously, as almost to compel the holding of a meeting for 
worship with them; and through favour it proved a season 
worth coming several hundred miles to witness. It was, I 
believe, a day of solemn warning and renewed visitation to « 
many, and particularly to the young people in membership with 
us. I felt bound to revive among them the fatherly invitation 



1839.] CHAPTER XXXV. 707 

of the Most High, " Come out of Babylon, my people, that ye 
be not partakers of her sins, and that ye receive not of her 
plagues." " Come out from among them, and be ye separate, 
saith the Lord, and I will receive you : and I will be a father 
unto you, and ye shall be my sons and daughters, saith the 
Lord Almighty." Let not the Babylonish garment, nor the 
wedge of gold, be in our camp ; but save yourselves from this 
untoward generation, &c. The Lord's power was felt to prevail 
among us, to the softening of many hearts, and the encourage- 
ment of the faithful of this sequestered little flock. On the 
way afterwards to the house of Walter Crewe, in company with 
his daughter, and Samuel Carey, we experienced a marvellous 
preservation from being hurled down a precipitous bank. Owing 
to something being wrong about the harness, one of the horses 
got off the road, and dragged the other with him ; and had the 
driver attempted to turn them again, we must have been over- 
turned. Our escape seemed brought about by the horses being 
kept as it were before wind and sea, directly end-on, and almost 
on their haunches, sliding straight down the hill to level ground 
below. Had the carriage been turned ever so little on one side, 
it must immediately have toppled over, and probably would 
have rolled several times over before it reached the bottom ; and 
yet such was the mercy extended to us that no one was hurt, 
and neither carriage nor horses apparently injured. Such un- 
merited favours demand our humblest gratitude. 

Attended the different sittings of this Yearly Meeting 
on the 21st and 22nd. In the afternoon of the latter day, 
the business was nearly concluded, and I took leave of 
Friends, being desirous of attending the Yearly Meeting in 
New York, which is fast approaching. I was comforted in 
the belief, that in this Yearly Meeting, although small indeed 
to what it formerly was, there is yet a living remnant, to 
whom the cause of truth is precious. May the Lord preserve 
them, in this land of oppression ; and may their hands be 
unpolluted by the blood of the suffering sons of Africa. We 
set out the same afternoon, and were favoured to reach Balti- 
more the next morning, and were again hospitably received 
by Dr. Thomas and family. During the night there was a 

2 z 2 



708 CHAPTER XXXV. [1839. 

succession of thunder and lightning : my attention was much 
attracted by the brilliant little lamps of the fire-fly, which were 
perceptible between the flashes of lightning, pursuing their 
nightly excursions, and filling their place in the marvellous 
works of this beautiful creation, according to their order and 
the part assigned them ; showing forth the praises of their 
Almighty Creator. 

Rested on the 23rd, and the next morning, again left my 
kind friends of Baltimore, and pursued my way alone to 
Philadelphia, where I reached the abode of my ancient friend 
Ellis Yarnall the same night ; and finally got to my quarters 
in New York on the 25th : here I found many Friends from 
Canada and other parts arrived for the Yearly Meeting. 
Attended the various meetings as they came in course, and sat 
for the most part in silence. 

31 s£. — The last sitting of the Select Meeting was held. In 
this I had to state in plain terms my fears as to the present 
state of the ministry ; and had to remind Friends of the devas- 
tation in our Society in England, from this very cause of 
unsound ministry having crept in among us. My mind found 
some relief. 

In the evening attended a meeting appointed at the request of 
Elizabeth Eobson for the young people, in which she had largely 
to labour amongst them, in the love of the gospel, — I trust 
to the relief of her own mind, and to the benefit of many. It 
appeared from the different epistles, that there is a prospect 
of a succession of burden-bearers amongst the young people, 
which I sincerely desire may be amply realized ; but to myself 
the prospect is very gloomy as regards our Society in this land. 
Sixth Month 2nd. — In the forenoon, J. J. Gurney appeared 
at some length ; and greatly do I desire that lasting impres- 
sions may have been made on some : but alas ! how often doth 
the ear listen with gladness, and even the heart desire to become 
acquainted with those things that accompany life and salvation, 
whilst it still remains in the unregenerate state, for want of that 
self-denial and daily cross to our corrupt wills and inclinations, 
without which we cannot advance one step nearer the heavenly 
kingdom. 



1839.] CHAPTER XXXVI. 709 



CHAPTER XXXVI. 

ATTENDS NEW ENGLAND YEARLY MEETING, ETC. VISITS NOVA 

SCOTIA AND CANADA RETURNS TO PHILADELPHIA AND PRO- 
CEEDS TO OHIO ; ATTENDS THE YEARLY MEETING AT MOUNT 
PLEASANT RETURNS TO ENGLAND. 

Sixth Month 7th, — Embarked in tlie steamer for Newport, 
Rhode Island, with a company of two hundred and seventy- 
five passengers, including several Friends. We were favoured 
with a beautiful night, and rounded Point Judith next morning 
under the most favourable circumstances : this point being 
exposed to the swells of the Atlantic, is often a \erj rough part 
of the voyage. We reached Newport at five a. m., and pro- 
ceeded in stages towards New Bedford, arriving by noon at 
Francis Tabor's ; where I found a family dwelling much in the 
ancient style and simplicity of our early Friends, both the 
heads being elders in the Society. Here I was again a 
stranger, and without any defined prospect of duty before me. 

The next day the 9th, being First day, my path was greatly 
opened ; and at the close of the forenoon meeting the way was 
clear for me to request that a meeting should be appointed for 
the inhabitants generally, seamen, and those connected with a 
seafaring life ; which was arranged for the following evening. 
We were favoured with two comfortable meetings that day ; 
and in the evening, before separating from a large company 
assembled at the house of a Friend, it was with me to recognise 
that Almighty power, which " maketh the outgoings of the 
morning and the evening to rejoice ;" and to acknowledge the 
unspeakable favour, after a day full of mercy and full of love, to 
be sensible that the heavenly wing still overshadowed us, — a 
great and precious privilege, demanding all our admiration^ 
gratitude, and humble praise. 



710 CHAPTER XXXVI. [1839. 

10th. — In the afternoon attended the funeral of a young 
person who died after a severe illness, occasioned by sitting on 
the ice, when heated and fatigued, six months ago. Many 
were collected on the occasion, and after two other Friends 
had spoken, I had to urge the necessity of our individually 
becoming acquainted with Him, who is " the resurrection and 
the life ;" and thus be prepared for the day of death appointed 
unto all men. The meeting in the evening was largely 
attended, and proved a solemn season. Friends of New 
Bedford were hearty in the cause, and had taken great pains 
to apprize their fellow-townsmen by advertisement, the cir- 
culation of hand bills, and in some instances, by personal 
application. Notwithstanding the responsibility was heavy 
upon me, and tho prospect truly formidable, I was supported 
under it to my own admiration ; well knowing Him in whom I 
had believed, by His heavenly grace, to be sufficient for me in 
all things. That Almighty power which is the crown and 
diadem of every religious assembly, was mercifully pleased to 
own our gathering, and this evidence of Divine regard was 
acknowledged, I trust, to His glory and praise. 

I came here poor and low enough ; and now how eminently 
have I witnessed the gracious dealings of the Lord for His 
great name's sake ! My heart feels more and more con- 
strained to trust with humble confidence in Him, and to 
cast all my care and burden upon Him alone ; desiring 
earnestly that self may be so kept down, that the Divine 
glory may be the only motive to action, in my feeble endea- 
vours to promote the precious cause of truth among my 
fellow-creatures, as from time to time, I may apprehend 
recpiired of me. 

13th. — Came to Nantucket by steamer on the 11th, and 
was kindly received by Prince Gardner and family, with 
whom I am now staying. Yesterday visited several sick and 
infirm persons; I trust the time was profitably spent. I tried 
the fleece last night until pretty late, and at length concluded 
it safest for me to propose that a public meeting should be 
held here this evening ; and Friends uniting in this prospect, 
notice has been given of the same. 



1839. J CHAPTER XXXVI. 711 

This morning attended the week-day meeting, and although 
a considerable body of valuable Friends was collected, every 
thing was like iron and brass about us ; my mouth was com- 
pletely sealed up, until the meeting was about two-thirds over, 
when a Friend stood up in the body of the meeting and 
expressed a few gentences. This was what had to be waited 
for, and now my bonds were broken asunder, and my tongue 
loosed. Thus " day unto day uttereth speech," and instruc- 
tion is sealed to the mind, more and more to cast our care 
upon Him, who careth for us, — although wholly unperceived, 
until He is pleased to reveal Himself to our finite under- 
standing. 

Newport, BJiode Island. Sixth Month 22?id. — Unable from a 
variety of circumstances to resume my pen until this day. The 
public meeting on the 13th proved a highly favoured season, 
and much larger than the one held at New Bedford. Thus 
was this, (to me) eventful day rendered memorable to the very 
close, through Him who doeth all things well. At an early 
hour the next morning embarked with a goodly company of 
Friends on our way to the New England Yearly Meeting ;* 
and reached the house of Edward Wing at Tiverton the same 
evening, the 14th instant, having travelled by land and water 
about one hundred miles. Here I found a house apparently 
filled with guests ; but was cheerfully accommodated, our host 
telling us they were never so full, but that one more could be 
admitted. In these parts, their neighbours of other societies 
freely open their doors to Friends on such occasions. 

1 5th. — Attended the Select Meeting, and the Meeting for 
Sufferings at Plymouth, eight miles farther; and the same 
evening continued our course towards Newport, reaching the 
house of David Buffam before sun-set, about two miles from 
this town. Here I found a hospitable family, and many 
Friends with whom I had already become acquainted. 

16th. (First day.) — Attended the meetings for public wor- 
ship, to which the town's-people flowed like a living stream. 
The Meeting-house holds, I was informed, about two thousand 
people ; and it was so filled before the appointed time, that it 
* Held at Newport, Rhode Island, 



712 CHAPTER XXXVI. [1839. 

was difficult to reach the gallery. In the morning, after our 
aged friend Elizabeth Ooggeshall had broken the silence by a 
solemn petition to the throne of grace, I had largely to declare 
the way of life and salvation, to my own comfort and relief; 
though no light matter to have to stand forward in the pre- 
sence of so many weighty ministers and elders of both sexes. 

The Yearly Meeting was considered large; and was favoured 
at seasons throughout its sittings with the Divine presence. 
Although it comprises many living members, yet there was 
much found to mourn over, and render getting along very 
heavy work, when the true state of the Society was opened out 
by the answers to the queries. There were many present I 
believe, who could say with the prophet, — " I was bowed down 
at the hearing of it, I was dismayed at the seeing of it." An 
address was drawn up by the Committee of Correspondence, 
and sent down to the different Quarterly Meetings, containing 
much excellent advice, very applicable to the state of things, in 
many of the meetings. Non-attendance of meetings, want of 
love, and in several instances an attachment to military parade, 
were the principal causes of mourning. 

The last sitting of the Yearly Meeting was held yesterday 
the 21st, and many Friends left Newport last evening ; but the 
foggy state of the weather having prevented the arrival of the 
usual steam-boats, some hundreds, I suppose, are still in the 
boarding-houses. I met here my country-people Thomas and 
Elizabeth Robson ; also John Wilbur, my acquaintance in Old 
England. To-day I am lying upon my oars, and resting a little ; 
it is probable that Providence may be the next point of destina- 
tion ; but I am waiting to see what to-morrow will bring forth. 

Whilst looking round a little at New Bedford, I met with 
Matthew Luce, a captain who has made several voyages up the 
Baltic ; but what makes the circumstance worthy of record, 
and attaches me to him, is the fact of his having been a fellow- 
passenger from Constadt to England with my ever dear and 
lamented William, a few weeks before his decease. Finding 
that, during the voyage, Captain Luce had rendered much kind 
assistance to this darling object* of my hopes in his weak and 
declining state, I could not but feel him greatlv endeared to 



1839.] CHAPTER XXXVI. 713 

me. He spoke with much feeling of dear William's pious 
resignation, and humble but firm confidence in the arm of 
everlasting strength ; and that although he had no care-taker 
with him, or precious acquaintance to lend a hand of help, yet 
he comforted himself in the belief, that this and every other 
lack would be supplied : telling Matthew Luce that he con- 
sidered him an instance of what would be cast up for him in 
his friendless condition. Matthew Luce said he considered it 
quite a privilege to have been with him. To hear this from so 
authentic a source was indeed very comforting and cheering to 
my heart, in the midst of a renewed sense of the treasure I had 
lost ; and to find that he had been thus cared for, when in 
a peculiar manner cast out, as it were, upon the wide world. 
Truly, — " as the mountains are round about Jerusalem, so is 
the Lord round about his people, from henceforth and for 
ever," however widely separated from their families and con- 
nexions, I can abundantly testify. 

23rd. (First day.) — Attended both meetings at Newport : 
in the forenoon many attended besides members, and I had 
good service. In the afternoon meeting Elizabeth Robson was 
drawn forth to minister among them. 

2Uh. — Attended a public meeting held at my request. The 
evening proved wet ; and the gathering not so large as was 
expected, but remarkably solid : and I was favoured with an 
open time among them. My mind afterwards felt peaceful ; 
and I think I never was more sensible that help and strength 
had been administered in the needful time. 

25th. — Came to Lynn by way of Providence and Boston, 
arriving about sun-set ; and was kindly entertained at the 
house of Isaac Basset. Before reaching Providence, the site 
of the dwelling, and burying place of Mary Dyer was shown 
me ; and before crossing the ferry to East Boston, the place 
where she was executed, with Marmaduke Stevenson and 
William Robinson. 

26th. — Attended the week-day meeting of Friends at Lynn ; 
where we had renewed cause to bow in humble reverence to the 
great Preserver of men, for the extension of His goodness to 
His poor unworthy creatures, wherewith he was pleased to 



714 CHAPTER XXXVI. [1839- 

comfort us together in an eminent degree. After a long silence, 
and a female Friend had expressed a few sentences, I had to 
revive the sealed promises to the wise, and to them that turn 
many to righteousness, in the words of Daniel the prophet ; 
and to declare the sure way for every individual to be numbered 
with those, who inherit such transcendant glory. — " Behold, 
thus shall the man be blessed that feareth the Lord.'" — " The 
fear of the Lord is the beginning of wisdom." — " The secret of 
the Lord is with them that fear Him ; and He will show them 
His covenant" of light, life, and truth ; — which, if obedience 
keep pace with knowledge, will make us wise in heart, and 
enable us so to let our " light shine before men, that others 
seeing our good works, may glorify - " God in the day of their 
visitation ; and be strengthened more and more to follow after 
righteousness, that their example also may produce the like 
happy result. Thus many, by our faithfulness, may be turned 
to righteousness ; and the language of inspiration will be 
fulfilled, — " They that be wise, shall shine as the brightness of 
the firmament, and they that turn many to righteousness, as 
the stars for ever and ever. 1 ' The Lord was with us of a truth, 
to the tendering of the hearts of many. Reached the house of 
Abijah Chase of Salem, that evening. 

27th. — Sat with Friends of Salem, in their usual meeting. 
I had a close testimony to bear, and, I trust, did not withhold 
any part of what came before me. Returned to Lynn in the 
afternoon. 

28th. — In company with several Friends, went to Boston. 
As no Friends reside there, we put up at the Marlborough, 
which is one of the first hotels in the city ; and is a Tem- 
perance house, where we were well accommodated. In the 
evening attended a public meeting appointed for me : and for 
which arrangements had been carefully made before-hand. We 
met in a house belonging to Friends, nominally at half-past 
seven ; but it was much later before the meeting became toler- 
ably settled. I had largely to labour among them, but found 
it heavy work : J. D. Lang, a Friend from the State of Maine, 
was present, and his company very acceptable to me, though 
he sat by me in silence. 



1839.] CHAPTER XXXVI. 715 

29th. — Returned as far as Providence, in company with W. 
Jenkins ; and next day the 30th, attended meetings there. In 
the forenoon it was a dull season ; — one of those when deep 
calleth unto deep. E. Robson was present, but both of us were 
silent. The expectation of the people being too much upon the 
poor instruments, was wholly disappointed, and found to end 
in vanity and vexation of spirit ; while we sat as fools among 
them : I would that this might operate as a sign, that man can 
of himself do nothing. 

In the afternoon a public meeting was appointed for Elizabeth 
Robson, and good attendance given : E. R. had the whole 
weight of the service ; and was helped through to my admira- 
tion and rejoicing. The day altogether was one that confirmed 
me in my belief of the sympathy and fellow-feeling of the living 
members of the one body. In the morning we shared the 
humiliating but wholesome season together ; and in the after- 
noon were favoured to share in the love of the Master, which 
flowed to both in an encouraging manner. Before E. R. had 
uttered one word, I believe I could have foretold what she 
would say ; such is the fellowship of the gospel flowing from 
the one holy Head : and how precious is this unity, in the one 
Spirit, even as we are called in the one hope of our calling, — in 
the one faith and baptism of the same gracious Lord. It was 
a highly favoured meeting. 

Seventh Month 1st. — Was conveyed by W. Jenkins as far as 
New Bedford ; and on the 2nd embarked in the steamer for 
Nantucket to attend the Quarterly Meeting. Near one hun- 
dred Friends in company arrived the same afternoon. 

3rd. — Attended the Select Meeting, which was a low time ; 
in which I had to speak of the awful responsibility attaching to 
those in the stations of ministers and elders : and to warn those 
present, of a day of farther trial awaiting our Society ; which, 
from its nearer approximation to the world, would have more 
difficulty to maintain its standing, than in former instances, 
when Friends, like Israel of old, dwelt more alone. 

In the afternoon attended the funeral of a young man whom 
I had seen on his dying bed when last here. 

4<th. — The meeting for worship was held, and several search- 



716 CHAPTER XXXVI. [1839. 

ing testimonies were borne, in which a warning voice went 
forth to the young people. The business of the Quarterly 
Meeting was completed the same day. Returned to Provi- 
dence next day. 

1th. (First day.) — Attended both meetings, in which I 
had some service. 

8th. — Had a public meeting with the inhabitants. It was 
not large, but proved a very solemn and favoured time. Few, 
I believe, were present, but such as had something of the true 
hunger begotten in them ; and I trust that these were fed 
with food convenient for them. The Lord was my helper, in 
humble thankfulness be it spoken. 

On reaching this place on the 5th, I received accounts of 
the declining health of my dear Charles. I trust that these 
things, although deeply painful, may not be suffered to trouble 
me, nor hinder the service of the blessed Master ; but rather 
have a tendency to promote His cause, by keeping me clothed 
with humility, and watchful towards Him in His fear and in 
His love ; who so often filleth my heart with His praise. 

]0tli. — In company with Anna A. Jenkins, attended the 
meeting at a public school belonging to Friends, arid had some 
counsel to offer, which perhaps might hurt neither teachers nor 
scholars. 

11 th. — Shortly after the week-day meeting gathered, a 
thunder-storm * came on, and lasted for some time in a very 
awful manner, doing considerable damage in the neighbour- 
hood. Had some service of an encouraging nature to the little 
ones. In the evening, at a public meeting held in a Temper- 
ance boarding house. It was well attended, and proved a 
comforting season, although commenced under feelings of much 
strippedness. Some sailors were present, and many of the 
wives and connexions of seafaring men. 

12th. — Accompanied by Reuben Peckham proceeded to 
Lynn. 

lit A. (First day.) — Had a public meeting in the evening, 
which was well attended and proved an open time ; utterance 
being freely given. It was cause of thankfulness with me, and 
the more so, as I had felt unwell during the afternoon, and 



1839.] CHAPTER XXXYI. 717 

for a time had been doubtful whether I could attend the 
meeting. But my gracious Master was pleased not only to 
raise me up for the work, but abundantly to strengthen and 
furnish for it, beyond what has often been vouchsafed to me. 

17th. — Eeached Portland by six o'clock a. m., accompanied 
by Samuel Boyce. Arrangements were immediately made 
for holding a public meeting that evening. It was smaller 
than anticipated, but on the whole was a solid comfortable 
season. I found it very hard and exercising work to bear a 
testimony to the Truth, under existing circumstances at this 
place. Lodged at Peter Neild's, expecting to leave in the 



of them had attended the public meeting. 

18th. — Attended the meeting, which was small. After a 
plain stranger Friend had twice said a few words, I was opened 
out amongst them, to my own peace of mind, though in much 
plainness of speech. 

19^ — Left early by stage for North Berwick, passing in 
the course of the day, a large Sharker's settlement, and were 
favoured to reach the house of John D. Lang, the same 
evening. Since being in Portland my mind has been much 
turned towards an infant people residing in Nova Scotia, who 
make profession with us ; and I felt freedom to make several 
inquiries as to the best mode of getting there ; but did not 
see how I could proceed farther without a suitable companion. 
At one time, I intended passing through North Berwick, and 
endeavouring to reach Newbury Port the same night, but 
not feeling quite easy to do this, I concluded to stop there 
accordingly. 

The next day, the 20th, I found that J. D. Lang had been 
looking towards visiting Nova Scotia in the fall of the year, 
and had a certificate from his Monthly Meeting, granted some 
months ago, still in his possession. It soon appeared that he 
had given up to accompany me. To myself this was a con- 
firming evidence that my going to Nova Scotia was in the- 
ordering of the great Master, who had thus led me in a way 
that I knew not, and in paths that I had not heard of, to a 



718 CHAPTER XXXVI. [1839. 

companion of his own chasing ; of whose intentions, and having 
a certificate in readiness, I had not had the slightest intimation. 
Our hearts in this thing soon became as the heart of one man, 
bound together in the bonds of the everlasting gospel. 

J. D. L. accompanied us to Newbury Port, where efforts 
were made to arrange for a public meeting to be held the next 
day ; but it appeared that so many meetings of the Univer- 
salists and Methodists would occur that day, that it would be 
unwise to attempt it, however much desired. As I had done 
all that I could to obtain a meeting with the inhabitants of this 
port, having purposely come about eighty miles to the place, 
my mind felt easy on the subject. 

21st. — Attended the meeting at West Newbury where the 
neighbours came in, and a comfortable season was vouchsafed 
to us. In the afternoon travelled about twenty-eight miles to 
Lynn, and reached the house of Isaac Basset in good and I 
trust in safe keeping. The next day took leave of J. D. Lang 
and went to Providence. 

24th. — Attended the Monthly Meeting, in which I had to 
bear testimony to the ample and simple means for salvation 
bestowed on every mortal, through Christ the Saviour, who 
died that we might live. In the evening went by railroad to 
Stonington, and there embarked in the steam-boat, with two 
hundred and seventy-five passengers for New York. 

25th. — Arrived at John Clapp's in good time this morning, 
and after attending to some needful arrangements, left the 
city the same day, via Providence and Lynn to Boston, where 
we arrived on the 27th, and prepared to embark in the 
Boundary sailing-packet for East Port, which is the boundary 
port of the United States, my friend J. D. Lang having arrived. 

Left Boston on the 28th, and entered the passage towards 
East Port on the 30th. Saw several Indians in their canoes 
fishing, as we entered the Narrows. In the hope of meeting 
the steam-boat on her way from East Port to St. John's, in 
the British province of New Brunswick, had our luggage pre- 
pared and brought on deck. The paddle of the steamer was 
heard for some time before she could be seen, the fog was so 
dense ; but her captain told me afterwards, that he saw our 



1839.] CHAPTER XXXVI. 719 

mast-heads above the fog, and had steered for us. We got 
safely on board the steamer, to my rejoicing, having scarcely 
ever been more uncomfortable, or suffered more for want of 
rest, than while in this packet. Reached the city of St. John's 
the same evening. Here we found two members, and several 
more or less connected with the Society, in all about twenty 
persons, with whom we had a sitting. My companion broke 
the silence, and we were afterwards favoured with an open time. 
I trust that some were encouraged to hold on their way, and 
the lukewarm and indifferent, as well as those who had been 
wholly neglecting the Lord's talent, were warned and entreated 
to avail themselves of their day of visitation. Returned to 
the steamer, and started at midnight for Windsor, in Nova 
Scotia. Arrived there early next day, and proceeded by stage 
to Halifax, which we reached the same night, the 31st. 

Eighth Month 2nd. — Having secured places to Picton 
yesterday at an early hour, this morning repaired to the 
coach office, and found that instead of a covered carriage, an 
open waggon was provided for our conveyance, and this to all 
appearance very unequal to the journey. After crossing the 
water by steam to Dartmouth, we mounted our vehicle, and 
proceeded much better than we had calculated on, through a 
very rough and uncultivated country. The roads were in 
fair order, and small detachments of a British regiment 
were employed for their farther improvement. On reach- 
ing the first station, twenty miles distant, we found to our 
great mortification, that at least one of the horses had to 
continue at its post, though perhaps changed to another posi- 
tion in the team. Lodged for the night at Truro, a pleasant 
country village. Reached the neighbourhood of Picton next 
day, and when within three miles of the town, a Friend seeing 
our garb as we passed, came out of his shop by the way side 
to greet us. This was James Kitching ; and we had intended 
stopping at the house of his brother, some distance further on : 
but finding that he was from home, we at once concluded to 
accept the hearty invitation of J. K., whose cottage was 
hard by. The father of our host, who made one of this large 
family and their apprentices in the shoe-making business, was 



720 chapter xxxvr. [1839. 

originally a member of Society, and had emigrated from 
Whitehaven seventeen years ago. In the evening after a 
portion of the scriptures was read, we had a religious oppor- 
tunity with the family, and were comforted together. 

4th. — Sat down with the little remnant that meet regularly 
at J. Kitching's. Several persons attended, until every seat 
was occupied. Notwithstanding there was a precious seed in 
this company, we found it hard work to wrestle against those 
who are making only a lifeless profession of the Truth, and are 
led away by the pursuit of the perishing things of this world, 
to the neglect of those which are of eternal consequence. It 
was however a season, in which the Lord's faithful children 
were contrited together. 

In the evening attended a public meeting in the meeting- 
house of the Seceders from the Scotch kirk, for which arrange- 
ments had been made the day before. For some time it was 
heavy work to labour amongst them, but towards the latter 
part, the blessed Truth had the dominion ; and although some 
went out, yet a number of the weightier spirits seemed loath 
to separate from under the precious covering that prevailed. 

5th. — Early in the morning the stage stopped to take us up, 
when we took leave of this family, who had become dear to us 
in the love of the gospel. J. Kitching accompanied us the first 
stage, where we breakfasted ; and before separating, we were 
refreshed together in that love which makes one in the Lord. 
Travelled hard till nightfall, and got to Halifax by one p. m. 
the next day. The 6th, having previously engaged horses, after 
dining on wild raspberries and milk, we resumed our journey 
in an open waggon, and reached Windsor about midnight ; 
not without difficulty procuring a lodging place, many persons 
having arrived to embark in the same steamer with ourselves 
on the following day. We had been travelling nineteen hours. 
After it became dark, about fifteen miles from Windsor, we 
found that a bridge over which we had to pass, was broken up 
and impassable. As we drew near it, we were hailed by two 
negroes, who told us we could not go that way, but must drive 
through the water, across which they had themselves waded. 
These men were on their way to Halifax, and had it not been 



1839.] chapter xxxvr. 721 

for them, we must have been quite at a loss how to dispose 
of ourselves for the night. My companion J. D. Lang, to 
lighten the waggon we rode in, had at the last halting place 
agreed to join another traveller who had overtaken us in a gig, 
and like ourselves was going to Windsor. As we were then in 
advance of the gig, we waited on that side of the w T ater till they 
came up, as they were equally strangers to the state of the 
bridge ; and in due time we drove through the water in com- 
pany. I thought the Divine arm was in this thing. 

7th. — Left Windsor in good time, but our progress was 
greatly retarded, by having to take in tow a vessel, which 
had only just been launched. Soon after ten at night, the 
fog became so dense as to oblige us to anchor until day-light, 
when we again pursued our way, still towing the other vessel, 
and reached the town called St. Johns, by ten o'clock a. m., 
of the 8th. We were kindly received at our former quarters, 
and arrangements were immediately commenced to procure a 
meeting with the inhabitants the same evening : the Wesleyan 
Methodist meeting-house was cheerfully granted for the pur- 
pose. At the first collecting of this meeting, things appeared 
not a little discouraging ; but before its conclusion our com- 
passionate Lord condescended to magnify His power amongst 
us in a remarkable manner, and to own it with the life-giving 
influence of His heavenly presence. 

9th. — Early this morning we again embarked in the steamer 
for Annapolis on the other side of the bay, touching at the 
village of Digby by the way. About twenty-five miles farther 
is Annapolis, where we were favoured to land safely that after- 
noon. This neighbourhood and for many miles up the river, 
is thickly studded with farm-houses, at the foot of a high 
mountain. On landing we were met by an individual connected 
with Friends, who eventually took us to his residence, about 
fourteen miles up the country. 

10th. — In the evening attended a public meeting in the 
Wesleyan meeting house at Bridgetown : being a Seventh 
day, and the hay-harvest in progress, it was small ; but a com- 
fortable season was vouchsafed, and the blessed Truth was freely 
declared to the people. 

3 A 



722 CHAPTER XXXVI. [1839. 

\lth. (First Day.) — Rising early, we crossed the North 
Mountain to Chute's Cove, where a number of people were col- 
lected, some of whom profess with us. Both my companion 
and myself had a searching testimony to bear among the latter, 
and an awakening one also to others present, amongst whom 
were some tender spirits. As another meeting had been ap- 
pointed to be held at Bridgetown that afternoon, there was but 
little more time than was necessary to take some refreshment, 
and again to cross the mountain. This was heavy work for both 
man and beast, as the road in many places lay over steep bare 
rocks, where it was difficult for the horse to obtain foot-hold. 
The distance is said to be eight miles ; but it took us three hours 
to perform it. We were favoured to arrive in time for the 
meeting, for which the use of the Baptist meeting house had 
been granted : this proved the largest meeting we had in these 
parts, and was mercifully owned by the Master's presence. 
Both J. D. Lang and myself had largely to declare the word 
among them, and I believe we both felt peaceful minds after- 
wards. 

12th. — Returned to Annapolis by stage, which was merely 
an open waggon. We soon found there was no probability of 
the people being collected, so as to hold a meeting to profit, as 
they were fully engaged in the fields with their harvest ; and to 
many of them it would have been difficult to convey the requi- 
site information. 

13th. — At two a. m. went on board the steamer, not in- 
appropriately called The Maid of the Mist, on account of the 
misty atmosphere of the bay. After touching at Digby, where 
we waited an hour and a half before the mail-bags were given 
out, we had to make a considerable round to take in tow a new 
vessel ; but on reaching the point, we had the mortification to 
find she was not yet launched, and we should have to wait in 
an exposed situation until high- water, then six hours distant. 
Every appeal to the captain, and even the threatening of a 
lawyer passenger were disregarded, so that instead of getting to 
' St. Johns 1 by nine in the morning, it was not till long after 
sunset that we entered the harbour. 

14th. — Took passage in the same comfortless boat to East 



1839.] CHAPTER XXXVI. 7 '23 

Port, State of Maine ; here our luggage was slightly examined, 
as coming from a foreign country. Went forward again by 
stage to Bangor, on the Penobscott river ; thence by steamer 
to Portland on the 16th ; and finally reached the house of my 
dear companion J. D. Lang, at North Berwick, on the 17th. 
I trust with feelings of thankfulness for the many deliverances 
we had witnessed in the course of our journey. A considerable 
quantity of religious tracts, and the writings of Friends were 
circulated, and in some instances deposited as libraries, along 
our route. 

18th. (First Day.) — At the meeting at North Berwick, to 
which several seeking people came ; we were favoured with a 
blessed season. In the afternoon attended a funeral at Dover, 
thirteen miles distant. The meeting was not held at the 
regular place, but at the house of the deceased. 

20th.— Attended the Monthly Meeting at Dover. The 
meeting for worship was a heavy season, as when " death is in 
the pot ;" the one succeeding it was equally painful. 

21 st. — Attended the Dover Select Meeting. We sat long in 
a low state, as in the deeps ; when it was with me to break the 
silence with this language,' — " Awake, ! north wind, and 
come, thou south ; blow upon my garden, that the spices 
thereof may flow out. Let my beloved come into his garden, 
and eat his pleasant fruits ;" endeavouring to show the neces- 
sity of our being willing to pass through that stripped wintry 
state, in which nothing can live that is not of the Lord's 
planting, and which can prepare our hearts to bring forth fruit, 
such as the beloved of our souls delighteth in. Several others 
spoke to the edification of the meeting. The Quarterly Meet- 
ing commenced with a large meeting for worship, in which I 
had some labour : it was the first yet held in a new meeting- 
house. 

22nd. — Feeling bound to attend the Ohio Yearly Meeting, 
and having the opportunity of accompanying William Deweese, 
we set out together this day, and reached New York on the 
25th ; the latter part of the journey in the steamer Lexington. 
I was no stranger to the character of this vessel, and had on a 
former occasion avoided travelling by her ; but now I had no 

3 a 2 



724 CHAPTEU XXXVI. [1839. 

time to lose, and trusting in that Almighty power, which has so 
often been my preserver, we were favoured to reach New York 
without accident. Here I found distressing accounts from my 
family. In addition to the continued indisposition of clear 
Charles, it appears that the health of my eldest son Joshua had 
so much declined, as to oblige him to return to England. I 
cannot but feel tried under this increased affliction, but I desire 
to be resigned to the will of my heavenly Father, in the belief 
that he doth indeed not willingly afflict the children of men. 
Attended the forenoon meeting for worship, and was strength- 
ened to declare among them the way of salvation from sin. 

On the 26th, we reached the house of my kind friend Ellis 
Yarnall of Philadelphia. Whilst here, I felt best satisfied to 
write to my children, holding out the probability of my return- 
ing to England after the Ohio Yearly Meeting, if the way 
should appear to open for this measure with clearness. Reached 
Harrisburgh, the capital of the State of Pennsylvania, the next 
day, and from this place proceeded by packet drawn by three 
horses on the Pennsylvania canal, along the beautiful valleys of 
the Allegany mountains, eventually crossing the Susquehanna 
river by a long and well constructed bridge. Beyond Lewis- 
town the valleys become wider and better cultivated, and the 
general appearance of things strikingly different to what we had 
lately seen in the State of Maine, in New Brunswick, and Nova 
Scotia. 

28th. — After a night disturbed by passing many locks, we 
are still winding our way through beautiful valleys, backed 
although rather more distantly by well-wooded mountains. 
Have employed the interval of leisure in bringing up my journal 
which had fallen into arrear, believing that I shall not soon have 
a more favourable opportunity. 

On the 29th reached Hollydaysville, where the railway over 
the Allegany mountains begins. Drawn sometimes by loco- 
motive, at others by stationary engines, then by horses, and 
eventually descended an incline, and again proceeded by canal 
to Pittsburgh. From this town we proceeded by steamer along 
the Ohio river to Mount Pleasant, where we arrived on the 1st 
of Ninth Month. The Yearly Meeting is held here. 



1839.] CHAPTER XXXVI. 725 

Ninth Month 2nd. — The Yearly Meeting at large com- 
menced, when my certificates were read, and I had to give the 
meeting some account of the Lord's merciful dealings with me. 
The Yearly Meeting ended on the 7th, and was favoured to its 
close with great solemnity. In the last sitting of the Select 
Meeting, I had some remarks to make on the great responsibility 
of those in the station of elders, who, if not anointed from on high, 
are incapable of discerning from whence the ministry proceeds ; 
and to add my belief, that there is a ministry growing in the 
Society, which, if not checked, would fill the minds of the 
hearers with things like " the abomination of desolation," 
spoken of by the prophet, — that would stand in the holy 
place, where it ought not, — in the place of vital religion, — and 
would make truly desolate and destitute of the presence of the 
Lord. It was the elders of Ephesus who were sent for, and 
charged to take heed to themselves, and to the flock, by the 
great apostle. Set out the same evening in company with 
several Friends, on my return towards Philadelphia, which 
we reached on the 12th, after a fatiguing journey. 

15th. (First day.) — In the forenoon meeting I was largely 
engaged in declaring the blessed Truth. I had taken cold, and 
my cough troubled me during the early part of the meeting ; 
but on standing up, to my admiration, it was no more felt. 
During the silent part of the meeting, it had been suggested to 
me, when in expectation of having to speak, that it would be in 
vain to attempt it on account of my cough, which would be 
immediately excited by raising my voice ; but this I believe 
to have been the work of the enemy, who was a liar from the 
beginning ; for I stood long without once coughing, to my own 
great relief. 

16th. — Went to Burlington, and spent the night at the 
house of dear S. and R. Grrellet. In the evening many Friends 
came in ; and we were comforted together by the life-giving 
presence of the gracious Master. 

22nd. (First day.) — In the forenoon my mouth was opened, 
and my heart enlarged to declare, in the love of the gospel, the 
new and only way to the everlasting kingdom. In the after- 
noon, silent. 



726 CHAPTER XXXVI. [1839. 

25th. — At a marriage in Twelfth Street meeting-house, 
Philadelphia, which was numerously attended by the public ; I 
was strengthened to declare the day of the Lord amongst them, 
and to show that it is not to the mighty or the noble, not to the 
wise or the prudent, that the things of the heavenly kingdom 
are revealed ; but to the weak and despised, to the unassum- 
ing and child-like : rehearsing the beautiful and instructive 
acknowledgment of our blessed Saviour, — " I thank thee, O ! 
Father, Lord of heaven and earth, that thou hast hid these 
things from the wise and prudent, and hast revealed them 
unto babes : even so, Father, for so it seemed good in thy 
sight." 

26th. — Took leave of Friends as extensively as time and 
circumstances would permit ; and the next day proceeded to 
New York. Here I examined the British Queen steamer, and 
the Mediator packet ship ; and concluded, for various reasons, 
to take passage in the latter. 

Tenth Month 1st. — Finally embarked for England. Several 
kind friends accompanied us as far as the vessel was towed out 
to sea, returning with the steamer. Forty passengers were on 
board, twenty of whom are in the cabin. May the Lord pre- 
serve me in watchfulness and prayer amongst them. We were 
favoured to get sight of the Scilly Islands on the sixteenth day, 
when the wind changed and blew strong from the eastward, so 
that we did not anchor on the Mother Bank till the 23rd 
instant. The comapany on board proved one of the most 
agreeable that has ever fallen to my lot. 

Left the vessel at Portsmouth, and after writing to inquire 
where the wreck of my family were sojourning, crossed the Isle 
of Wight to Niton, where I was comforted by the particulars 
I gleaned of the close of my precious William ; and I had an 
opportunity of acknowledging personally, the Christian kindness 
of several whose hearts had been opened to administer to the 
comfort of his last days. Spent a solitary evening at the hotel, 
and occupied the chamber whence his immortal spirit had re- 
turned unto God who gave it, purified I humbly trust, through 
the blood of Jesus, and prepared for an admittance into the 
everlasting kingdom. 



1839.] CHAPTER XXXVII. 727 



CHAPTER XXXVII. 

ALARMING ILLNESS OF HIS SON CHARLES, THEN IN FRANCE, DANIEL 

WHEELER PROCEEDS THITHER BEFORE THE DEATH OF CHARLES 

RETURNS TO ENGLAND AGAIN SAILS FOR NEW YORK LAST 

ILLNESS AND DEATH. 

On the 25th of Tenth Month, I learned that my children had 
left England, with the idea of wintering in the South of France ; 
but that my dear Charles had been so much exhausted with 
travelling before they reached Paris, that the hope of continuing 
the journey had been relinquished. I also learned that they were 
accompanied by our true friends Wilson and Charlotte Burgess, 
which was quite a relief to my mind. Having now accom- 
plished my mournful purpose, and visited at Southampton 
the grave of my first-born, I should have proceeded immediately 
in the track of my children ; but that several circumstances com- 
pelled me first to return to London. This detained me till the 
29th, when having obtained my passport, I went down to Dover 
by the night mail, intending to join the steamer for Calais in 
the morning. The day, however, proved so stormy, that it was 
with some difficulty I could procure a boat to take me on board 
the steamer, at that time hovering off the Foreland. At 
length I succeeded in hiring a stout boat with five men, who 
were willing to make the attempt. The risk was not a little ; 
but on viewing the storm, and remembering the situation of my 
drooping child, who had so faithfully shared all my toils and 
cares during our long voyage in the Pacific, the thought of 
danger was at once outbalanced ; and trusting in Him who knew 
my motive for making the attempt, at a suitable moment we 
launched into the surf, and were favoured to get well off the 
strand ; and the steamer being judiciously placed to enable us 
to reach her, I was favoured to gain her deck without accident. 
After leaving the coast the captain soon found that we could not 
fetch Calais, and very prudently bore away at once for Boulogne, 
without making any fruitless efforts to reach the other port. 



728 CHAPTER XXXVII. [1839. 

After a lonely winterly journey, arrived in Paris late in the 
evening of the 31st, and the next day was favoured to reach 
the bed-side of ray sinking Charles, in the little town of St. 
Germains, twelve miles distant. The peaceful feeling that 
pervades the atmosphere around him is, I humbly trust, an 
earnest that the arms of everlasting mercy are open to receive 
him, when the awful change shall come. I found him appa- 
rently in a far advanced stage of consumption, and my dear 
Joshua looking very much shrunk, and altogether in very 
delicate health, although not actually confined to the house. 

Extract from a Letter to Sarah Smith. 

St. Germain's, [so called,] near Paris, 
Eleventh Month 2nd, 1839. 
Little did I then anticipate that it would ever be 



my lot to address thee from this neighbourhood ; but I was 
very unexpectedly prompted to look towards crossing the 
Atlantic, if only for a season, should the way fairly open after 
the close of the Ohio Yearly Meeting, and the step be approved 
by my American friends. During the first sittings of the 
above meeting, I felt discouraged, and doubts arose in my 
mind whether I could possibly clear myself towards that large 
assembly so as to feel at liberty when it was over, as I had 
been prevented by the lowness of the water in the Ohio from 
arriving in time for the two public meetings held previously to 
the sitting down of the Yearly Meeting ; but at the conclusion 
an opportunity was afforded me of seeing the whole body of 
Friends collected under one roof, I suppose two thousand 
persons ; when to my unexpected consolation, a most relieving 
season was vouchsafed. During the last sitting, I had a full 
opportunity with women Friends, and afterwards in the men's 
meeting, before the concluding minute was read. I now felt 
perfect freedom to leave Mount Pleasant, and proceeded east- 
ward the same night. 

We have the comfort of having our friends Wilson and 
Charlotte Burgess with us ; so that amidst our sorrows we are 
still favoured with many blessings which sweeten the bitter 



1839. J CHAPTER XXXVII. 729 

cup ; and when I reflect that I have not to grieve for the mis- 
conduct of my children as having brought this affliction upon 
themselves, my heart is humbled under a sense that the present 
dispensation is of the Lord ; — desiring to bow very low before 
Him, and believing that it is by these things we live, and in 
all these things is the life of our spirits. Our dear friends will 
I hope remember us, as I am sure we stand in need of the 
prayers and sympathy of the faithful, if ever any poor creatures 
did, under the accumulated trials of a dark and cloudy day ; 
that so we may be preserved in humble resignation to the 
unerring will of our heavenly Father, and that others may see 
by our patience, the blessed effects of the power of the Spirit 
of the Lord Jesus, " in word, in conversation, in charity, in 
spirit, in faith, in purity." 

[Although it is not proposed here to record the details of 
illness which follow in Daniel Wheeler's M.S. journal, it was 
thought that the following sketch which occurs after the 
decease of our brother, possessed sufficient interest to warrant 
its insertion.] 

Although my dear Charles had been nearly two years in a 
critical state of health, and for the last six or eight months 
rapidly declining, he did not appear entirely to lose the idea 
of recovery, until about a fortnight before his decease : of its 
great uncertainty he was fully aware. In the early part of 
his illness he would say, ' if it be the will of my heavenly 
Father, I could enjoy life a little longer ;' but in its more 
advanced stages he would acknowledge, that ' life is no longer 
desirable, under such an accumulation of suffering : but the 
will of the Lord be done.' About twelve days before his close, 
he said to me, ' I am going, — I see it plainly ;' and then 
adverted to a check which had occurred in his disorder, and 
had been the means of allowing him to see all his family ; 
speaking of it as a mark of Divine condescension, quite incom- 
prehensible to himself. ' It is one of the links in that chain 
of providences, with which I have been so marvellously encom- 



730 CHAPTER XXXVII. [1839. 

He used frequently to compare his own case with those of 
others in the family who had preceded him. Speaking about 
this time of dear William, he observed, ' I know little about 
his death, but I know how he lived ; he fed on heavenly food. 
O ! that I were as much prepared for the change as he was, 
— to him, to die was but to sink into his Father's arms ;' — 
adding with much emphasis, ' blessed are those who can die as 
he did.*' 

He often spoke of his own unworthiness, saying, that his 
only dependence was on the mercy of God in Christ Jesus ; 
and on this he seemed to rest without a sense of fear. Once 
or twice, when referring to the composure he felt, he said, 
' surely I am not self-deceived ;*■ shortly adding, ' O ! no ; it 
cannot be that the mercy, which has so signally followed me up 
to the present time, should now forsake me. 1 

On one occasion, he said to one of his brothers, 'heed not 
the world, nor the things thereof: 1 I wish I had heeded it less ; 
and once when in great bodily extremity, he exclaimed, ' here 
is the end of pride !' 

He frequently engaged in fervent prayer for patience and 
support, for the pardon of all transgressions, and a release in 
the Lord's time. Three days before his death, he was heard 
to say, — ' " Bless the Lord, O my soul ! and forget not all His 
benents. v> Even though He slay me, I will trust in Him. 
Blessed be His name, He has granted me a little relief. One 
crowning mercy yet remains ; and for this I desire to wait His 
time. O ! grant me grace for this. Thou, O Lord ! art full 
of compassion and gracious, or thou wouldest long ago have 
abandoned a wretch like me : even yet I feel my proneness to 
rebel. O ! let thy Holy Spirit support me through the few 
fearful hours that may remain ; and grant me patience to wait 
thy time. I ask it for the blessed Saviour's sake.' 

A text on which he frequently dwelt, was that in Revela- 
tions, " They shall hunger no more, neither thirst any more," 
&c. ; and perhaps his own sufferings from thirst, which were 
at times distressing, led him to realize more fully the blessed- 
ness of those thus set free from the infirmities of the flesh. A 
few clays before his death, when parched with fever, and 



1840.] CHAPTER XXXVII. 731 

much exhausted, he exclaimed, ' I shall soon be where all is 
rest, and more than rest, 1 referring to the passage, " Eye hath 
not seen," &c. 

One evening when in a very suffering state, he remarked, 
that this was a new kind of conflict to him, — he had long 
been accustomed to mental conflict ; but such positive physical 
suffering, he had neither known nor imagined. On being asked 
which he thought the more difficult to endure, he replied, that 
in his present state, he greatly preferred the contest allotted 
him ; but, that when in health, when the mind was vigorous, 
he thought the mental struggle less severe. 

On the morning of the 5th, (of Second Month, 1840,) we 
thought him very near his close ; but he afterwards revived, 
and seemed disappointed at being again delayed. On the same 
day, when in severe pain, he supplicated thus : ' O ! Lord, if 
it please thee, grant me a little patience ; for without thy holy 
aid, it is past all mortal endurance. 1 As evening approached, 
he seemed to have an extraordinary dread of the coming night, 
exclaiming despondingly, ' another night, another night ;' and 
truly it proved a season of severe conflict, though the last of 
mortal suffering. About nine p. m., a change was noticed, 
which he soon detected himself, — saying, that he thought he 
was dying ; and shortly afterwards, ' ! Lord, if it please thy 
righteous will, release me. Blessed be thy holy name V A 
short time before the close, on being asked if he felt peaceful, 
he replied calmly, ' I feel no fear.' He bade us separately 
farewell ; and I believe his last connected expressions were, — 
' You are very kind — the Lord Almighty bless you. 1 The 
pains of the body seemed all he had to contend with : the 
struggle continued until four a. m., when he quietly expired, 
being apparently sensible till within a few minutes of the last. 

Dear Charles's desire that I should pray for him, when on 
the bed of sickness, often tended greatly to my own humilia- 
tion, it being at that time frequently my lot to be as one 
unable to pray even for myself ; and when the spirit of suppli- 
cation was at seasons permitted to influence my mind, it was 
not that length of days should be added to his life, or that it 
should be shortened ; but that the will of his heavenlv Father 



732 CHAPTER XXXVII. [1840. 

should be done, whatever it might be ; and that all his afflic- 
tions might be sanctified to his eternal benefit : and strong 
were my cries to the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ, 
that though the dear sufferer might not be permitted to give 
us any strikingly comforting assurance of his being " accepted 
in the beloved ;" yet that an evidence might be vouchsafed of 
his having been admitted into that heavenly kingdom, which 
shall never have an end. On looking at his remains some 
hours after his departure, to my unspeakable comfort, I saw on 
his placid countenance that evidence for which I had besought 
the Lord. In the midst of death, there was a sweet angelic 
smile, surpassing that of life, — its loveliness none can describe. 
In the course of the illness of my dearest Charles, and the 
frequent opportunities we had of close converse on subjects of 
the highest importance, he never once brought into view his 
having forsaken all from an apprehension of duty to accompany 
me on the long voyage in the South Seas. To have reminded 
him of a sacrifice which had cost him so much ; and which I 
humbly believe was not only called for, but accepted at his 
hands, by Him who had prepared the offering, would but have 
raised a feeling of honest indignation in his mind, — that an idea 
should be entertained of any merit being due to him, or that 
he had any act of dedication to lean upon, or to plead his cause. 
On the contrary, he seemed truly to possess nothing of his 
own, but the infirmities incident to the frailty of human nature ; 
often dwelling on his own unworthiness of the least of all 
the Lord's mercies extended to him, and alluding to them in 
humblest gratitude. Doubtless it was best that he should 
cherish so humble a view of himself; and I never found it my 
place to throw out any hint, by way of encouragement to his 
often drooping mind : preferring to commit him into the hands 
of Him who judgeth righteously, whose compassions fail not ; 
and who never faileth freely to forgive all that have nothing of 
their own to pay unto their Lord, — who are truly poor and of 
a contrite spirit. 

[The remains were removed to Southampton, and] interred 
within a few feet of those of his beloved brother William : dear 



1840.] CHAPTER XXXVII. 733 

Maria S. Fox kneeling at the grave side, offered the tribute 
of thanksgiving and praise to that gracious Being, who had thus 
prepared and taken to Himself, him for whom we mourned. The 
meeting afterwards proved a solemn, and I trust, an instruc- 
tive season, wherein the life-giving presence of the great Master 
was felt. 

My attention was next turned towards finding a suitable 
situation for my dear Joshua, whose declining health rendered 
it needful to remove into some of the more sheltered parts of 
the island ; and the west being strongly recommended, we made 
our way towards Bristol, and succeeded in obtaining apartments 
for him at the Hot Wells, (sheltered by the stupendous cliffs 
from which the place above takes the name of Clifton,) which 
were considered very suitable for him in his present weak state. 

Third Month 8th. (First day.) — Attended both meetings 
at Bristol ; and in the forenoon had to declare the Truth among 
them, to my own relief. 

Feeling my mind attracted towards Balby Monthly Meeting, 
I set out in time to attend the Select Meeting at Sheffield on 
the 11th : I was comforted in beholding the addition that had 
been made to their numbers during my absence ; and my mouth 
was opened amongst them, in an encouraging manner. Next 
day attended the Monthly Meeting. In the meeting for wor- 
ship that preceded it, my heart was enlarged towards my dear 
friends; and the way of life and salvation was proclaimed 
amongst them. 

15th. — Attended the meetings at Dewsbury, in both which 
my mouth was largely opened. 

23rd. — Bristol. Through all the vicissitudes which have of 
late attended my tribulated path, the inhabitants of the western 
world have been renewedly brought to my remembrance, under 
a feeling of that love, which would gather all mankind into the 
one great sheep-fold of rest and peace, — though I have felt no 
liberty to take any decided measures iill lately : but the wav 
has within the last few days so remarkably opened, as to remove 
every doubt from my mind of the propriety of making prepara- 
tions for my departure thitherwards. 



734 CHAPTER XXXVII. [1840. 

Finding it was in vain to attempt seeing my long loved 
friends in other parts of Yorkshire, I took leave of my Sheffield 
friends on the 1 8th, and proceeded to London, where a place 
was secured for me in my favourite ship the Mediator. After 
settling some affairs there, I returned to this place, to spend 
with my children the few days yet remaining, till the sailing 
of the packet. 

27th. — At the week day meeting in Bristol, I stood up with 
the words, — " Then restored I, that which I took not away ;" 
stating that these expressions had attracted the attention of my 
mind ; and although the mysterious language of inspiration, 
I believed they might be understood by all who had passed 
through the great work of regeneration. The Lord Jesus 
restoreth the heavenly image in man, which was lost by trans- 
gression : and which the shedding of His precious blood had 
placed all in a capacity to have restored to them, who believe 
in Him, and are willing to submit to the power of His Holy 
Spirit in their own hearts. The poor of the Lord's people were 
encouraged ; and the heaven-born sons and daughters of Zion 
strengthened to trust in their God. 

28th. — Took leave of dear Joshua,* and accompanied by my 
dear S., went to Portsmouth to meet the ship, which was to 
leave London on the 26th. The next being First day, know- 
ing of no Friends residing in this town, we remained at home, 
and enjoyed a quiet and peaceful Sabbath together before the 
Lord, — something like a little passover before the painful 
moment of separation which was fast approaching ; it brought 
with it the bitter cup of which we had before so largely 
partaken, but now under the pressure of more sorrowful 
circumstances. 

30th. — Embarked in the Mediator ; it was late before our 
final departure, and it grew dusk soon after sailing. 

3lst. — Worked all day against a head- wind, of sufficient 
strength to confine the major part of our company to their 
berths. To myself, I seemed like a poor outcast among them ; 
and could I not have felt something like a foundation cause for 
being there, sufficiently firm for me to ground an appeal in 
* Joshua Wheeler survived till the following spring. 



1840.] CHAPTER xxxvn. 785 

brokenness of spirit to Him from whom nothing can be hid, 
there would have been nothing for the feet of the mind to rest 
upon. It is no light matter, at my age, to embark single- 
handed for the American shore ; but I have been so mercifully 
led, guided, and sustained through all my late trials, that I 
dare not for a moment doubt my being in my right allotment ; 
and particularly because of the peace and love which have not 
unfrequently been permitted to flow through my heart, since 
having again forsaken all that is dear to me in this world for 
the blessed Master's sake. 

Fourth Month 1st. — The wind backed so far to the south- 
ward of west, that we made a good slant down the British 
Channel. In the night the Mediator was enabled to point to 
the right course, though with nothing to spare. 

2nd. — Wind to the eastward of south, and in the night be- 
came still more favourable, when all sail was crowded to the 
breeze, and every advantage taken of it. Eventually it became 
a strong breeze from the north-east. The ship now made rapid 
progress, and but for an old north-west swell, the motion would 
have been comparatively trifling. On the 3rd we were found 
to be in longitude 13° 30' west ; and now the 4th, being Seventh 
day afternoon, we are still rolling on with a fair wind, though 
its strength has somewhat lessened. Yesterday before break- 
fast the sea made its way through the cabin windows, some of 
which had been raised for the admission of air. Happily no 
material quantity of water got in, though it ran to the far end 
of the main cabin; my cabin escaped, which I consider a 
privilege and favour. 



Here our dear father laid down the pen never to resume it, 
except to address a few trembling lines to his children from his 
sick bed. It appears that after he had been about a week at 
sea, he took cold, which soon settled on the chest, and was 
accompanied by great oppression of the breathing, and inability 
to use a recumbent position. As there was no surgeon on 
board, he could not have the medical treatment which his 



736 CHAPTEK XXXVII. [1840. 

symptoms so urgently demanded, and though in every other 
respect he received the utmost attention and kindness, his dis- 
order gained a fearful ascendancy during the three following 
weeks which he remained on ship-board. A few days before 
the vessel reached her destination, he was so extremely ill that 
his fellow-passengers doubted his surviving till they entered 
their port. He had himself, however, no apprehensions on this 
head ; and on the 28th of Fourth Month, he was landed at New 
York, in a very feeble and suffering state. He was imme- 
diately taken to the house of his kind friend John Olapp, from 
whose family he was favoured to receive the most unremitting 
and tender care, during the remainder of his illness. 

The change from the inconvenience of ship-board, to com- 
fortable accommodations on shore, combined with the tender 
assiduities of the dear friends around him, appeared to be re- 
freshing to him. The night after landing he rested well, and 
the next morning seemed so much better, that those around 
him felt quite cheered respecting him. Towards the evening 
of the 29th, however, he became greatly oppressed, and lay in 
a very suffering state. After passing a restless night, in the 
morning of the 30th the oppression returned with increased 
violence ; and from the coldness of the extremities, and the state 
of exhaustion to which he was reduced, it was thought by his 
medical attendant that he could not long survive. On being 
informed of this by a dear friend, he replied calmly, ' All has 
been done that could be done ; only write to my dear children 
how it is. The work has been going on with the day. Love 
to all my friends on this side of the Atlantic, as well as the 
other. It is a great thing to be clear of pain. I want nothing 
but the love of my heavenly Father, and I witness it.' After 
remaining for some time in this state, the oppression gradually 
subsided, and he enjoyed some hours of tranquil sleep. This 
refreshed him much, and towards evening he had so far rallied, 
as himself to address a few lines to his distant family ; they 
are written in a very tremulous and almost illegible hand. In 
these he remarks, ' I have been landed a very sick man in this 
city ; but my most gracious Lord hath borne me up in a mar- 
vellous maimer through a multitude of distress and difficulty, 



1840.] CHAPTER XXXVII. 737 

for His great name's sake, and for His dear Son's sake ;— to His 
own everlasting praise be it spoken :' — thus evincing, that 
thankfulness and love to our heavenly Father, so con- 
spicuously the covering of his mind in the time of health, still 
pervaded his spirit on the bed of languishing. 

For several succeeding days his disorder fluctuated greatly : 
at times he appeared very comfortable, and then again laboured 
under great oppression. On the night of the 1st of Fifth Month, 
a friend sat up with him, whom he had not seen since his 
return to England the preceding autumn. On observing him, he 

said, ' Ah , I have had a suffering time since I left America ; 

hut I have been mercifully directed as to an hair's breadth.'' 
Then spreading out his hand, he added, ' Yes, plainly, as if I 
had had a scroll of directions in my hand.' Towards morning, 
when apparently in a very exhausted state, he said to those 
around him, ' Well now, my dear friends, I want to be left 
entirely alone with my heavenly Father ;' and several times 
during his illness he made a similar request. 

On the 2nd, he was bled from the arm, which produced 
considerable relief to the breathing : the following day the 
bleeding was repeated, and again the oppression appeared to be 
diminished by it. During the operation, he remarked to his 
medical attendant, — ' without blood, there is no cleansing.'' 
Dr. Willet replied, — it is " the blood of Jesus that cleanseth us 
from all our sins." ' Yes,' said his patient, ' but not in our 
natural unregenerate state : when we are in the light, as He is 
in the light, then I believe it will cleanse us from all our 
sins. Yes,' he added with much emphasis, ' I know it.' 

Through the day he appeared more comfortable ; but in the 
evening the oppression returned, accompanied by great pros- 
tration of strength. This continued nearly an hour; when a 
little revived, he said, ' I have had a hard struggle. At one 
time I did not know but it was the cold sweat of death.' 

On the 4th, 5th and 6th, he remained in a suffering state. 
On the morning of the latter day, after making some arrange- 
ments respecting his papers, &c, he said he had now done with 
the things of this world ; he had no wish to live, but for the sake 
of his family, and that the Lord Jesus might live in him ; — He 

3 B 



738 CHAPTER XXXVII. [1840. 

had been his guide for many years, and he had declared His 
name unto thousands : he had no hope but in Him ; — He was 
the same Lord over all. It was not the prospect of an imme- 
diate release that led him to speak thus, for he did not see 
that ; but it was in his heart, and he must say it while he had 
words. Many other remarks he made at this time, in a very 
impressive manner, and with a strong voice. After this he had 
some refreshing sleep. 

In the afternoon of the same day, he received a visit from 
his beloved friend Stephen Grellet, which proved an occasion 
of deep interest. His mind seemed to overflow with admira- 
tion of the goodness of his dear Lord and Master, which had 
constantly attended him in his varied pilgrimage. He recapitu- 
lated briefly what had occurred since he left America, alluding 
to the consolation he received at the death of his beloved 
Charles, when he was made to rejoice in the midst of grief. 
He added, ' the Lord is good to them that love and fear His 
name. Great things hath He done for me, — things so won- 
derfully marvellous, that they would hardly be believed were 
I to tell of them. If I have experienced any shortness in my 
journey Zionward, it has been on my side, not the Lord's, — 
for He has been faithful, and his promises have been and 
remain to be, yea and amen for ever. Whilst I was on 
shipboard, and thought by some of the passengers to be nigh 
unto death, how did the Lord appear for my help and consola- 
tion ; and since I have been in this chamber, how has He 
appeared for my comfort in the night season ; and I have been 
enabled to sing hymns of praise and thanksgiving unto Him. 
When the ship made her soundings, I made my soundings 
upon that Rock, whose foundation is from everlasting to ever- 
lasting. I saw that I should be safely landed, though ex- 
tremely weak in body ; and I was enabled to say, should the 
Lord see meet to raise me up, and strengthen me still to show 
forth His wonderful works to the children of men, or cut the 
work short in righteousness, " Thy will O God, not mine be 
done." I do not see how the end will be.' 

He spoke of the last First day he had spent in England, and 
of the precious season before the Lord, which he had then 



1840.] CHAPTER XXX VII. 739 

enjoyed. It was like a little passover, but whether unto death 
or unto suffering, he could not tell. 

For several succeeding days, the disorder appeared very 
stationary : he lay in a languid state, but apparently suffering 
little positive pain. On the 11th, he received a letter of sym- 
pathy from a kind friend, who remarked that he felt a very 
comfortable assurance that the Lord would still continue to 
protect him, &c. The dear sufferer said that he was too ill 
to write himself, but wished those about him to do so, and to 
tell his friend that he believed it would be as he had said ; 
adding, ' I feel the Saviour to be near me every hour of 
the day. 1 

After this period, considerable mitigation of the symptoms 
occurred, and for two successive weeks, he appeared to be 
slowly gaining ground, so that his anxious friends were ready 
to take comfort in the hope that his life might yet be spared 
to them. For a time, he seems himself to have participated 
in this expectation ; and a very cheering letter written on the 
13th to his children, led them also to indulge the hope, that 
the bitter cup might for the present be permitted to pass from 
them. His full heart seemed to overflow with the love and 
praises of the Lord, for all His rich mercies towards him ; 
and in the feeling of some degree of returning health, he was 
afresh animated to pursue with unreserved dedication of soul, 
the service of his dear Lord and Master. 

On the 19th, he addressed a few lines to his family for the 
last time, which breathed the same spirit of encouragement 
and thankfulness as his preceding letter. The following is 
an extract. 

My very dear Children . 
I wrote you a few lines on the 13th instant, by the Stephen 
Whitney packet-ship for Liverpool ; and again, through Him 
who died that we might live, I am enabled this day to send 
you a still better account of myself; at which, with me you 
will rejoice in the true fear that keepeth the heart clean. You 
must accept it in the gross, as in the present state of my 
convalescence, it is impossible for me to delineate one-half of 

3 b 2 



740 CHAPTER XXXVII. [1840. 

the Lord's gracious dealings with me. — I trust I shall 

be able to ride out for air daily in a short time. The weather 
here is very hot, which makes writing more irksome to me than 
it otherwise would be ; but I know that you will make every 
allowance for me. Scatter abroad my love, wherever you go, 
— take as much as you can desire for yourselves, and believe 
me, 

Your ever affectionate father, 

Daniel Wheeler. 

At this time he had rallied so much, as for several days to 
be able to rise and be dressed, and to walk with assistance into 
an adjoining room ; and the improvement in his appearance, 
and the cheerfulness of his spirits quite encouraged those 
around him. Soon, however, these pleasing prospects were 
overcast, and the last fondly cherished hope of his restoration 
to health entirely faded. On the 26th of Fifth Month, he 
appeared rather drooping, and more feeble than before ; and 
after passing a most restless night, on the morning of the 
27th, he sank into a state of insensibility, accompanied by 
a convulsive movement of the hands and feet : in this situa- 
tion he continued several hours. When partially recovered 
from it, a kind friend called to see him. On being told 
she was present, he held out his hand, saying, ' thou seest 
a poor creature.' ' Yes,' she replied ; ' but rich I trust in 
the Master's favour.' ' If it were not so,' said he, ' I should 
be poor indeed.' She was afterwards engaged in supplication 
by the bed-side, fervently imploring the continuance of Divine 
love and mercy towards him ; but he seemed scarcely suffi- 
ciently collected to be aware of what was passing around him. 
Towards evening, the stupor was in degree relieved, and he 
passed a more tranquil night than the preceding one. 

In the morning of the 29th, he laboured for some time under 
great oppression of the breathing ; when this had a little sub- 
sided, our friend Jacob Green, who was about returning to his 
home in Ireland, called to take leave of him. At the conclusion 
of their interview, our dear father observed that as to himself, 
he had no doubt : — he had the same faith that had been with 



1849.] CHAPTER XXXVII. 74)1 

him through life, founded upon the gospel of Christ ; and which 
enabled him to say with the apostle, " nevertheless I live, yet 
not I, but Christ liveth in me ; and the life which I now live, I 
live by the faith of the Son of God, who loved me and gave 
himself for me." 

3Qth. — This morning, in reference to the ship in which he 
had come over from England having again sailed, he remarked 
that the captain had gone and left him ; but added in a moment, 
' if my heavenly Father cares for me, I shall fear nothing : He 
will carry me safely through : — He is my only hope.' For 
several days after this, the dear sufferer remained in a very 
sinking state, and the measures resorted to in the hope of 
relieving the disorder, added to his debility. 

On the 3rd of Sixth Month, a friend from a distance who 
had come to see him, remarking how glad he should be in any 
way to help him, our dear father replied, — ' I have but one 
Helper, but He is Almighty.' 

On the 6th, when his kind hostess entered the room, he was 
engaged in vocal prayer, but she was unable to collect much 
that he said. On some friends who were leaving the city 
calling to bid him farewell, he said they must leave him in the 
hands of his heavenly Father, — to his love and mercy. He 
could not tell half what had been done for his soul ; but the 
time might come when it would be proclaimed as on the house- 
tops. On a previous occasion, when the same friends were 
seated by his bed-side, one of them remarked, that it was a 
great favour to see him preserved in so much calmness and 
quietness. ' Ah, he rejoined, you would think so, if you knew 
all ;' at other times he intimated the favoured state of his mind. 

For several succeeding days he remained in a state of great 
feebleness and exhaustion, apparently without much suffering, 
except from occasional oppression of the breathing, and gene- 
rally in a drowsy state ; so that he entered very little into con- 
versation of any kind. During this period, he took extremely 
little nourishment ; and his weakness increased rapidly in 
consequence. From the state of the mouth and throat, he 
could not swallow without pain and difficulty ; and on ono 
occasion as one of his affectionate attendants was urging him 



742 CHAPTER XXXVII. [1840. 

to take something, — saying she thought he stood in need of it, 
he replied — ' I think not ; and when there is need, my heavenly 
Father will enable me to take it, for there is not a pang I 
suffer, but what is known to Him ; and I have evidence, that 
though far from home and my native land, I am not forgotten.'' 
Thus mercifully was he sustained, and his faith and confidence 
permitted to remain unshaken, amidst the sinking of nature. 

On the morning of the 12th, he appeared unusually feeble, 
though not apparently worse in other respects. He was wheeled 
into the adjoining apartment as usual ; and shortly afterwards 
remarked to one of the family, who had most affectionately 
watched over him, ' perhaps this day will end all your cares and 
troubles.' It was an unusual remark ; but as it was supposed 
to arise from the feeling of present weakness, it did not excite 
any particular alarm. The heat of the weather being oppres- 
sive, he was placed in a current of air, and was almost con- 
stantly fanned. His mouth he said was better ; but still it was 
with difficulty that he was induced to make the effort to take 
any nourishment. In the afternoon, one of those around him 
making some allusion to his returning to England, he remarked, 
— ' it is very doubtful whether I shall be permitted to return 
to England.' His friend expressed her hope that it might yet 
be permitted ; for though he felt very weak at that time, his 
symptoms were better than they had been : his only answer 
was an incredulous smile. After this he was supported from 
one bed to another ; but it was observed that his steps were 
more faltering than before. 

Between four and five o'clock that afternoon, a young friend 
who had been much with him during his sickness, and had 
watched by him a part of the preceding night, called to take 
leave, as he was about to attend a distant Yearly Meeting. 
Our dear father acknowledged his kindness, adding, — ' give my 
dear love to all my friends. God reigneth over all : His mercy 
and goodness have never failed me. The end I have not been 
able to see.' 

About eight in the evening, being offered some tea, he 
remarked, that he could not see it ; and it was evident that 
his sight had quite failed. Shortly afterwards he fell asleep ; 



1840.] CHAPTER XXXVII. 743 

but his breathing was more laboured than usual. This being 
observed, he was twice asked if he was comfortable, to which 
he replied, ' yes. 1 The difficulty of breathing continued, and 
he was turned partly on one side, which not arousing him, 
his friends became alarmed ; various means were resorted to, 
but nothing seemed to afford any relief. In this state he con- 
tinued, apparently breathing with the same difficulty as before, 
till a little after twelve at night, when he gently passed away 
without sigh or struggle. 

The funeral took place on the 1 5th of the Sixth Month : 
it was largely attended, and proved a season of much solem- 
nity ; in which survivors were loudly called upon to follow 
the departed, as he had heen concerned to follow Christ. 
Afterwards at the grave side, the voice of thanksgiving and 
praise ascended to Him, who had sustained His devoted fol- 
lower through all the conflicts and trials of his pilgrimage, — 
who had prepared him for Himself through the sanctifying 
operation of His grace, — and had now been pleased in His 
abounding mercy to gather him in peace into the heavenly 
garner, even " as a shock of corn cometh in in his season." 



744 



CHAPTER XXXVII, 



CONCLUDING REMARKS. 

It is far from being the intention of the Editor to attempt any- 
elaborate delineation of the character of the subject of these 
Memoirs : — this he thinks will be best gathered from the 
correspondence and memoranda which have preceded. There 
is however one feature, on which he hopes the reader will 
bear with him, whilst he offers a few remarks, which appear to be 
called for by the peculiar opportunities for observation which 
he enjoyed, — viz. the mingled fidelity and tenderness with 
which his beloved father sustained the responsible character of 
a parent. In reverting to this particular, those who enjoyed 
the privilege of a filial relationship, feel that they have abun- 
dant cause to rise up and call him blessed. From their early 
years, the benign influence of his devout and pious spirit 
was forcibly felt ; and it is now a mournful satisfaction to the 
survivors to recollect, that their earliest impressions of good 
were associated with the affectionate counsels of their departed 
father. His was not the language of precept only, — that of his 
strikingly consistent example was still more powerful. It was 
impossible to observe from clay to day the thankful, cheerful, 
humble frame of mind which he so uniformly manifested, — -his 
watchfulness to check every rising of improper feeling, — and 
above all, the deep reverence and filial love which pervaded his 
heart towards the great Author of every mercy, — without being 
made sensible of that blessed and all-pervading principle, which 
regulated the daily tenor of his life. His children at once 
loved and honoured him ; for while he possessed their entire 
confidence, and the fullest hold on their affections, they knew 
that he was unflinching in the refusal of whatever he felt to be 
inconsistent with his principles or their highest good. Not- 
withstanding the kindness of his nature, and the strength and 
warmth of his parental feelings, his known firmness precluded 
all hope of inducing him to yield to their inclinations, when 
these stood opposed to their eternal interests. Many perhaps 
may have been more systematic in their instructions ; but few 



CHAPTER XXXVII. 745 

could keep more steadily or practically in view the superior 
importance of heavenly things. 

From their early years, he patiently laboured to imbue the 
minds of his children, with the love and fear of the Almightj^. 
He instructed them diligently in the holy Scriptures ; and 
endeavoured to explain in a manner suited to their capacities, 
the truths they contain. He was also persevering in his 
efforts to exhibit to them the example of the righteous of 
other generations : and especially that exemplification of the 
fruits of his own principles, which the lives of the early 
members of our Society so strikingly display. For this pur- 
pose he set apart a portion of time daily, in which he read 
to his family works of this description ; a practice that was 
continued up to the period when his religious labours called 
him from them. Perhaps some might be ready to think that 
such a course would be found irksome by the young ; but cer- 
tainly in the present instance the result was widely different, 
and his children can now recall the feelings of solemn interest 
and enjoyment that often attended these readings, and the 
short period of quiet by which they were invariably followed. 
It was also his custom each evening, when his children had 
retired to rest, to visit their chambers, and endeavour to direct 
their hearts to their great Creator and Preserver. On these 
occasions, he would repeat, or teach them to repeat passages of 
Scripture, or poetry of a devotional character, to which his own 
admonitions were frequently added ; and he generally closed 
these sweet and well remembered seasons with a solemn pause : 
during which, doubtless, his pious spirit was often engaged in 
committing them to the Lord. 

As his children advanced towards maturity, instead of re- 
laxing his watchful care, he felt that there was need rather of 
redoubled vigilance to shield them from surrounding danger. 
Ever anxious for their best welfare, yet deeply sensible that 
through Divine grace alone, their youthful minds must be 
awakened, quickened, and enabled to lay hold of a Saviour's 
love ; he was earnest in imploring for them this heavenly gift, 
and diligent in watching for opportunities to impress upon them 
the importance of spiritual things. One instance of the con- 



7-16 CHAl'TER XXXVJI. 

descension of the Lord in hearing and answering his prayers 
may be here introduced. As his eldest son attained the age of 
manhood, earnest were the cravings of his father, that the Lord 
would direct his heart " into the love of Grod, and into the 
patient waiting for Christ.'" He knew well that to the natural 
man, the things of God must ever be a mystery; and he longed 
that through submission to the operations of the Spirit of truth 
they might be opened to his understanding. Often with 
parental tenderness he silently watched the opening convic- 
tions of his inquiring mind, and as opportunities presented, he 
laboured to explain to him the views he had himself received. 
At one time the sentiments of his son on these all important 
subjects were exceedingly unsettled, and he passed through deep 
mental conflict before he yielded to the light of Divine truth in 
his soul, which dispelled the doubts and reasonings by which 
he was assailed. It was at this period, that one evening his 
father and he being alone together, they had much conversation 
on the points which then pressed heavily on the mind of the 
latter. Before retiring to rest, his father handed him the Bible, 
and requested him to read a chapter : he took the book and 
read the third chapter of Malachi. Deep seriousness overspread 
his countenance, and after a considerable time of silence he 
repeated, ' The Lord whom ye seek shall suddenly come to his 
temple, even the messenger of the covenant whom ye delight 
in ;" — and he shall be " like a refiner's fire, and like fuller's 
soap :" adding, ' yes, he will come into his own temple, the 
temple of the heart, and there do his own work. I never under- 
stood this chapter before, nor saw, as I now see it, the spiritual 
nature of the gospel dispensation. - ' The impression thus made 
was not soon effaced ; and it was evident to his thankful and 
rejoicing parent, that the prophetic declaration was indeed ful- 
filled in his experience, — that the Lord had come into his 
temple, and was there working to the purifying of his soul. 
The change which gradually succeeded was most striking; 
clearly evincing to those around, that the day had indeed dawned 
and the day star arisen, in a heart long oppressed with dark- 
ness, and a prey to many doubts. In reference to this period 
his father once remarked with much emotion, — " this kind can 



CHAPTER XXXVII. 747 

come forth by nothing but by prayer and fasting, 1 '' intimating 
the long continued exercise of soul through which he had been 
led on behalf of his son. 

Two avenues to evil, he guarded with especial jealousy in his 
domestic sphere, — the introduction of books of an injurious 
tendency, and the association which he allowed to his children. 
"With respect to reading, he was liberal in supplying whatever he 
thought calculated to improve or expand the mind, and furnish 
profitable exercise to the understanding ; but very few produc- 
tions of a frivolous or hurtful nature escaped the vigilance of 
his watchful eye. On these occasions, he regarded not the 
inclinations of those he so tenderly loved ; and he has been 
known, when works that he disapproved had been lent to his 
young people, to return them himself to the parties from 
whom they came, accompanied by a frank avowal of his senti- 
ments respecting them. With regard to society for his family, 
his situation in a foreign country, far separated from those of 
his own religious views, would doubtless have appeared to 
many to present unusual difficulties. These he endeavoured 
to obviate, by rendering home as pleasant and cheerful as pos- 
sible, and thus leaving his children little to desire beyond its 
precincts. Perhaps few domestic circles ever presented a 
happier scene than his own, while its links were permitted to 
remain unbroken. Doubtless the result of such a system has 
been to make the changes and separations, inevitable in a 
world of fluctuation and mutability, fall heavily on the hearts 
of survivors ; but the shelter thus afforded to their inexperience, 
and to the unfixed principles of early years, was an invaluable 
safeguard ; and they can now look back with grateful hearts to 
the wisdom and care of their departed parent. If his labours 
have not always been attended with adequate results, his 
children can freely, though with shame acknowledge, that the 
fault rested not with him but with themselves ; and as respects 
those who have been called from this state of probation, the 
survivors are permitted to believe the counsels and prayers of 
their pious father were blessed on their behalf, and that they 
■ were made partakers of that redemption which is in Christ 
Jesus, and favoured to know their robes washed and made 



748 CHAPTER XXXVII. 

white in His precious blood. And how full of consolation is 
the belief, that their spirits are now united with his, who so 
fondly and faithfully watched over their early years, — shielded 
them from temptations to surrounding evil, — and turned their 
feet into the path that leads to blessedness : — " Therefore are 
they before the throne of God, and serve him day and night in 
His temple : and He that sitteth on the throne shall dwell 
among them. They shall hunger no more, neither thirst any 
more ; neither shall the sun light on them, nor any heat. For 
the Lamb which is in the midst of the throne shall feed them, 
and shall lead them unto living fountains of waters : and God 
shall wipe away all tears from their eyes." 



APPENDIX. 



120. 



LETTERS OF THE EMPRESS ELIZABETH TO HER MOTHER, RELATIVE 
TO THE LAST ILLNESS AND DEATH OF HER HUSBAND, THE 
EMPEROR ALEXANDER OF RUSSIA. 

Dear Mother. 
I was not in a condition to write to you by the post of yesterday. To- 
day, a thousand and a thousand thanks to the Supreme Being, there is an 
evident improvement in the state of the Emperor, this angel of patience 
in the midst of his sufferings : for whom, upon whom, will God manifest 
His infinite mercy, if not upon him ? Ah, my God ! what bitter moments 
have I passed. And you, my dear mother ! I figure to myself your anxiety ; 
you have received the bulletin, you have seen to what we were reduced 
yesterday, and last night. But "Wylie* himself says to-day, that the state 
of our dear invalid is satisfactory. He is excessively weak. My dear 
mother, I confess to you that I am not myself, and that I cannot say more. 
Pray with us, with fifty millions of men, that God will deign to complete 
the restoration of our beloved invalid. 

Elizabeth. 

Second Letter, which soo?i followed. 

I have lost all — the angel is no more ;— dead, he smiles upon me, as he 
was wont to do whilst living. There now remains to me only you my 
dear mother, with whom I wish to come and weep, and to be present at 
the interment. I shall remain near the deceased, and shall follow him as 
fast as my strength will permit. 

Elizabeth. 



B. p. 124. 

In the Petersburg Gazette, of the date of Twelfth Month 15th, 1825, is 
contained an account of this insurrection ; the extract from which, 
although originally intended for insertion, want of space has compelled us 
to omit. 



C. p. 384. 

EXTRACTS FROM THE ACCOUNT OF THE LAST ILLNESS OF JANE, WIFE 
OF DANIEL WHEELER, INSERTED IN THE ANNUAL MONITOR 
FOR 1835. 

It was on the 10th day of the Twelfth Month, 1832, N. S., that the 
fever which was to terminate the life of our dear mother first appeared ; 
* Sir James Wylie, a Physician. 



750 APPENDIX. 

but its form was for some days so mild, and our fears were at that time 
so strongly excited by the situation of another member of the family, who 
appeared to be on the very brink of the grave, that at first little apprehen- 
sion was entertained of its serious nature. At length, however, the high 
degree of excitement which was obvious, amounting to a degree of 
delirium, awoke us to a sense of the awful reality ; but rational conversa- 
tion was already nearly impracticable, and we have no reason to think 
that our beloved parent was sensible of her situation, till within a few 
hours of her final change, which took place on the 19th of the Twelfth 
Month. During this brief period, she appeared quite free from delirium, 
and remained composed and sensible nearly to the close ; but her strength 
was so completely exhausted, that her attempts to speak, which were 
many, mostly ended in a tremulous inarticulate motion of the lips, which 
lefl those about her painfully unconscious of the meaning which she 
appeared solicitous to convey. Her countenance was, at this time, beauti- 
fully serene and peaceful ; and once the words " Jesus " and " God " were 
clearly distinguished, though the import of the sentence could not be 
collected. At another time, observing one of her children in tears, she 
said distinctly, and with the utmost composure, — ' Look up for help :' 
thus proving at once the tendency of her soul in the hour of extremity 
towards the great object of the Christian's faith and hope ; her conscious- 
ness of her own situation, and of surrounding circumstances ; and her 
practical reliance on that Omnipotent Arm, which alone was sufficient to 
support at such a moment. 

At length her respiration, which for some hours had been laborious, 
became more gentle, till the beloved sufferer passed away without 
sigh, groan, or struggle, leaving those around her bed unable to fix the 
precise moment at -which the spirit fled. A holy calm spread itself over 
our feelings, and we remained for some time as silent as she on whom 
we gazed. The swell of sorrow seemed completely hushed, and the silent 
tribute of thanksgiving ascended to Him who had graciously led our 
departed mother all her life long, and had at last, in infinite mercy, taken 
her to Himself. It was a moment of solemnity and favour, never to be 
forgotten by us ; in which all doubting was swallowed up, and the soul 
reposed, with a richness and fulness of peace, altogether indescribable, 
on the boundless goodness of God. 

The external circumstances of our bereaved family at this junc- 
ture, were, in some respects peculiarly trying. One of us was still 
alarmingly ill, and the others were shattered by disease, or worn down 
with anxiety and watching; in the middle of a Russian winter,— our 
beloved father, as has been stated, absent, — and not having a single 
member of our own Society, out of the family, within our reach, we 
could not but feel our situation : and a new difficulty immediately arose 
respecting the interment of the mortal remains of our departed parent. 
No burying-place belonging to the Society of Friends existed here, and 
the adoption of any of those possessed by other bodies of professors, 
was not satisfactory to the minds of some of us. But Divine good- 



APPENDIX. 751 

ness never faileth those who trust Hira, and desire to obey Him. 
The precise path of duty became gradually plain, and way was ulti- 
mately made, in a manner we had by no means anticipated, for the 
enclosure of a small space of ground near our dwelling, for the purpose of 
interment. This necessarily produced delay, and the successive illness 
of three of the survivors still farther postponed the performance of the 
last sad duty to our deceased mother, and drew our attention from the 
dead, by most painful solicitude for the living. In mercy, however, the 
lives of these were spared ; and on the 28th day of the Third Month, 1S33, 
our mournful and solitary band, bowed down at once by sickness and 
sorrow, followed to her isolated resting-place, the remains of our late 
venerable mother.* 

He who had graciously promised, that where two or three are 
gathered together in his name, there will He be in the midst of 
them, was pleased to support our afflicted and drooping minds, and to 
strengthen us for the painful duty which succeeded. Thus through 
the mercy of Him, whose " compassions fail not," a day, the anticipation 
of which had been so appalling, was crowned with peace ; and we felt in 
its close, that the tribute of praise and thanksgiving was due to that 
Gracious Being, who had thus been pleased to manifest His strength in 
our exceeding weakness. 



THE FOLLOWING STATEMENT OF THE RESULT OF DANIEL WHEELER S 
AGRICULTURAL LABOURS IN THE NEIGHBOURHOOD OF PETERSBURG, 
WAS RECEIVED TOO LATE FOR THE INSERTION OF A REFERENCE TO 
IT IN THE BODY OF THE WORK. 

The land placed under Daniel Wheeler's care in 1818 consisted chiefly 
of certain parcels in the immediate vicinity of Petersburg, the cultivation 
of which to private enterprize appeared impracticable, on account of their 
barrenness, or their marshy nature. At the time of D. W.'s departure 
in 1832, about three thousand English acres were in full cultivation, on 
part of which fifteen farms had been established, varying in extent from 
thirty-five to one hundred-and-five acres each. About two thousand seven 
hundred acres more had been drained, the cultivation being either left to 
other hands, or was in progress, when D. "W. resigned his appointment. 
Besides the improvement thus effected in the neighbourhood of the 
capital, the most satisfactory evidence of the utility of the undertaking 
had been afforded, by the extensive adoption of various implements and 
methods of culture, heretofore unknown in Russia ; and by the considera- 
tion which agriculture and rural economy in general had obtained. The 
suggestion of letting out land to free tenants, had not met with all the 
success that could have been desired. 

* Some of our readers may not, perhaps, be aware, that such is the severity of the frost 
noar Petersburg, that no difficulty -would arise in keeping the remains for the long period, 
which circumstances rendered expedient. 



752 APPENDIX. 



EXTRACTS FROM THE LETTERS OF CHARLES WHEELER, RELATIVE TO 
THE SOUTH SEA ISLANDS, ADDRESSED TO HIS FAMILY. 

South Pacific, Second Month 26th, 1S35. — Some fresh marine phenomena 
were seen to-day, among which none were more beautiful than a species of 
jelly fish, (probably Pyrosoma Atlantica,) in form resembling a glass tube, 
six or seven inches in length with one end closed, and covered with opaque 
protuberances. With these the ocean was illuminated at night in a brilliant 
manner, and many of those that we took exhibited, on being touched, a splen- 
did phosphorescent light, sufficiently strong to show the time by a common 
watch, when it was placed near a single specimen. They showed perhaps 
few signs of animation, excepting this power of emitting or retaining light 
at pleasure. Several other species varying in form and size, are numerous 
here, but from their half liquid and perishable substance, it is almost im- 
possible to preserve them. Probably most of these several varieties are 
luminous ; some of them are of a mushroom shape, (medusa Pelluceus) 
and have the power to move along through the water by dilating and re- 
tracting their richly fringed head. Grampuses, sharks, porpoises, dolphins, 
and some small striped fishes, called by the sailors, pilot fishes, are common 
in this part of the Pacific. The little pilot fishes attract a good deal of 
notice from their propensity to accompany the vessel : they are seen for 
hundreds of miles, (perhaps I might say thousands of miles,) frolicking 
close before the vessel's stem, and occasionally darting aside after some 
particle that attracts them for a moment from their favourite position in 
the van. On the morning of the 27th, a sail was discovered a-head, and 
watched with shipboard interest, as it gradually augmented in size, till 
about noon a large whaler 'brought to' close alongside us. English 

colours were displayed on both sides, and Captain , of the Elizabeth 

of Sydney, accompanied by the surgeon of the vessel, came on board. 
They had been out eight or nine months, and succeeded in securing 1200 
barrels of oil — which amounts to about one-third of a full cargo. After 
obtaining a few fresh provisions for some of their oil, and accepting some 
tracts, &c, our visitors returned to their ship, and in a few hours we lost 
sight of each other. The call from these marine sportsmen was quite an 
incident in our monotonous life ; though from the natural and acquired 
characters of the parties, such interviews are not generally productive of 
much enjoyment. What a strange life is that of a whaler, roving the wide 
ocean for months and years in quest of fish, — banished from almost every 
comfort that the humblest landsman may ordinarily possess ! But the 
prospect of gain reconciles to present privation, and the promise of hope 
stimulates to exertion, and supports them in their dangerous career. There 
were five men at the mast heads of this ship, looking out for whales, as 



Ai'PEXDIX. 753 

she ranged over the blue swelling expanse. The space of ocean sur- 
veyed by these rangers is incredibly large. If we estimate the horizon 
as seen from the mast head at about thirty six superficial miles, which are 
changed every hour and a half, nearly three hundred square miles will be over- 
looked in twelve hours ; and there are several hundred ships employed in 
the South Seas. Each of these is probably out from two to four years at 
a time. 

Third Month 5th, 1S35. — The settlement on Norfolk Island, which is on 
the south shore, has a neat and respectable appearance, the houses beino- 
built of limestone, and with some degree of regularity. The whole popu- 
lation is about one thousand persons, and of these the greater part are 
prisoners of the lowest grade. The boats which came off to our vessel 
were each of them manned with six or eight convicts, and two or tbree 
armed soldiers. Two government vessels were cruising round the 
island, waiting an opportunity to land their cargoes. One of these had 
brought about seventy prisoners, who had risen during the passage from 
Sydney, and very nearly succeeded in taking the ship. They would be 
tried, and it was the opinion of an officer who was speaking of the circum- 
stance, that some of them would be executed. 

Papeiti Bay, Tahiti,* Fifth Month Is'.— There is nothing, perhaps, in 
Tahitian habits more striking or pitiable than their aimless, nerveless 
mode of spending life. The community, with the exception of a few 
foreigners or foreignized natives, might seem to exist to fish, pluck and 
eat fruit, bask in the sun, dabble in the water, or frolic on the sand. I 
mean to say that things have this appearance j and that according to our 
notions, their habits are deplorably indolent ; and it is difficult to imaoine 
any very dhTerent state under then- circumstances. From the size and 
strength of their frames, they would appear to be of a stock capable of 
great exertion ; yet they seem to inherit all the lassitude and inactivity of 
tropical residents, and the climate is so extremely hot, that by day every 
movement is an effort. Their wants are few and remarkably supplied, 
clothing being an incumbrance, desired only because associated with ideas 
of superiority, and tolerated occasionally in compliment to imported 
notions ;— and food of the kind most adapted and grateful, teeming around 
them, almost independently of their care. If the faculties were developed 
and all effeminating indulgence discarded, I cannot but think that an 
adult Tahitian would be a more respectable human being than he now is 
even though external circumstances remained the same 

Their outward circumstances, there can be no doubt, have derived 
material benefit from the introduction of Christian teachers and civilized 
regulations, so far as they have been introduced : these, beside preventing 
certain Pagan enormities amongst the natives, constitute a valuable check 
to the vicious and overbearing conduct of foreigners, which so lament- 
ably sullies the history of these islands. Adventurers of all kinds are not 
now at liberty to take up their abode on shore, without reference on the 
part of the government, to their respectability and motives in coming ; but 

3 c 



754 APPENDIX. 

certain credentials or recommendations, as we are told, are required, with- 
out which no one is encouraged or openly allowed to remain. This is a 
very useful restriction, as previously to its adoption, the most worthless 
characters have caused much disorder and misery by settling among the 
natives and marrying, to remain only till caprice has dictated the desirable- 
ness of a move, when their families have been deserted without scruple or 
redress. 

Trial by jury, which has been introduced here, is a great blessing, and 
one which perhaps Englishmen are better able to appreciate than any 
others, from their long experience of its value at home. The Tahitian 
jury consists of six men instead of twelve ; but the principle, as I under- 
stand it, is precisely the same. 

Fifth Month 1 3f/t. — After attending a missionary meeting held at Papaoa, 
Charles Wheeler remarks : ' We were pleased with the appearance and 
manners of the chiefs, and with what we saw of their queen. Some of 
the former are fine intelligent men, and in their general appearance 
reminded me of North American Indians. Many speeches were made by 
the principal chiefs, who avowed their sentiments with great animation ; 
and throughout the whole affair, very considerable order, and respectful 
demeanour were observed by all parties. The queen is a decidedly intel- 
ligent looking woman, of about four and twenty years of age : and has by 
no means an ignoble appearance ; though her artless, unassuming manner 
and simple attire, accord little with our notions of regal dignity. Her 
dress was much less showy than that of many of her inferiors, and far from 
inelegant. A long robe of beautifully white muslin flowing loosely round 
her figure, a little embroidery and silk about the neck, and a jet black 
bonnet, comprehended all that was apparent. 

We have since been visited by the king, (properly speaking he is only 
the queen's husband,) and some of his chiefs, who breakfasted on board 
our vessel. The former appears to be about twenty years of age ; and is 
a mild, intelligent, unassuming youth. His countenance is not strictly 
handsome, but it is truly Tahitian and pleasing ; and his slender form, 
dark expressive eye, and gentle manner, — which are completely Asiatic, — 
give something feminine to his appearance. The chiefs who accompanied 
him were of a much sterner school, and all of them considerably older than 
himself. They behaved with great propriety and good nature, and con- 
versed in a friendly, sensible manner, expressing their satisfaction with 
the frank, unceremonious way in which they had been received. Before 
they left us, a telescope was presented to the king, and a shawl to each of 
the party. Nothing like selfishness was shown by the leading personage, 
who did not attempt to select the best article for himself ; but taking that 
which happened to be next him, he allowed the rest of the company to do 
the same. The chiefs playfully vied with each other, as to who should 
take charge of their master's property, which was left in their hands. On 
going away, the king asked the steward for a little bread for the queen. He 
had evidently relished this article himself as a rarity, and therefore I sup- 
pose intended her to share. They were all dressed in the native style, 



APPENDIX. 755 

but in foreign articles of good quality. A fine white shirt, and an ample 
piece of print wound round the waist, and reaching to the knees, with a 
straw hat encircled by a broad ribbon or piece of silk, seems to be the 
favourite dress. 

16th. — We took a walk for exercise along the high road, which is a path 
formed by the soil thrown out of two ditches, affording in dry weather, a 
tolerable causeway. The want of bridges over the rivulets that cross it on 
their way from the lulls to the sea, obliges passengers to wade through 
the water occasionally, or else adopt a mode, to which, on this occasion we 
were compelled to have recourse, — that of getting a native to carry them 
over on Ids back. The formation of these roads is an occupation in which 
criminals are employed by way of penalty : so many fathoms of the queen's 
road, or so many fathoms of sea-wall on the queen's island, are frequently 
imposed as punishments on male, and the making of a certain quantity of 
native cloth or matting, on female delinquents ; and these punishments, if 
equitably put in force, are well adapted to the people. 

It is a singular fact that there are no wild beasts on any of the Pacific 
islands, lying distant from the continent of Asia. 

Sixth Month 16th. — The remains of idolatry have been so effectually 
destroyed, that scarcely a trace of them is to be found. Perhaps the 
objects most intimately connected with them are the natives who persist 
in rejecting the profession of the gospel, a numerous class even now. The 
government compels all to attend worship, it is said on pain of forfeiture 
of landed property ;* but this coercion of course does no more than enforce 
a ceremony, — if indeed from its unchristian character, it does not operate 
rather as a hinderance to the progress of Christianity. The portion of the 
community not professing the new religion, often retain the true native 
dress, and are thus conspicuous among their professing countrymen, who 
have to a great extent adopted foreign articles of clothing. 

Eighth Month 9th. — After a sojourn of three months and a half at Tahiti, 
during which considerable opportunity for observation has been afforded, 
I shall now offer a few remarks, that may enable you to estimate more 
easily its present state. Without reference to what it may have been, my 
observations will apply simply to what it is at the present moment. 

I need not describe the geographical position of Tahiti : it is the largest 
island in the Georgian and Society cluster ; and considered to be about one 
hundred miles in circumference. Together with Eimeo, (a small adjacent 
island to the westward, subject to the same government and laws) the popu- 
lation is estimated at upwards of 10,000 persons ; there is no doubt that the 
above is a tolerable approximation to the truth, and that, however it may 
have been formerly, the islands are now very thinly peopled. In fact, the 
interior of Tahiti is not inhabited at all, — the low lands next the sea, which 

* A. respectable resident told us, that one flagrant instance of this came within his know- 
ledge some time back. A poor man had been out fishing, and returned too late for the week 
day service. He was tried, and his laud was taken from him by men empowered to enforce 
this abominable regulation. It is not enrolled in the Tahitian code of laws, but is said, to be 
a ' command ' only. Remove the penalty, and the command might very safely remain un- 
repealed. 

3 c 2 



756 APPENDIX. 

constitute but a small portion of the whole, being universally selected by 
the natives for the place of their abode. Upon this fertile margin alouo- 
the coast, their little huts of poles, mats and thatch are scattered with 
great irregularity, — not in well defined clusters or villages, but singly or 
otherwise as the course of a stream, or the boundary of a plantation, may- 
suit best. The mountainous tracts inland are little frequented, although 
from the luxuriance of the vegetation, I conclude that many parts are 
capable of cultivation. Some fruits are produced spontaneously, and in the 
remoter valleys these are never gathered by human hands. The highest 
ridges, reckoned about 7000 feet above the ocean, are covered with rich 
forests, whose verdure never fades ; and the deep shade of valleys, vocal 
with the thunder of descending waters, is of course still more prolific of 
vegetation. But whatever the inland districts may produce, or may be 
capable of producing, the low tract of country stretching along the circum- 
ference of the island, seems to be fully adequate to maintain the present 
population, without requiring much culture or care on the part of those 
who gather the fruits. The taro, (caladium esculentum,) an excellent 
farinaceous vegetable, the yam (Dioscorea alata) and the sweet potatoe 
(Convolvulus batatas,) involve some little labour ; but many of the fruits 
demand only occasional weeding from the overwhelming growth of guavas 
and protection from the ravages of hogs, with which the place is overrun. 
The gigantic cocoa-nut tree bears fruit without intermission the year round 
and furnishes at once the means of shelter, food, and clothing. The leaf is 
used for mats, and thatch, and fuel ; the bark is converted into cloth • the 
timber is valuable for many purposes ; the nut shell is the native basin • 
the kernel is ground up into a nutritious food ; the milk is universally 
drunk ; and the ripe nut affords abundant oil, both for home use and ex- 
portation. The bread fruit too is highly prized : as a vegetable it is both 
palatable and wholesome, and from the bark of the large trees is made the 
cloth in common use by the Tahitiaus. Oranges, lemons, limes, melons, vis. 
(spondlas dulcis;) papaw, (carica papaya;) bananas, (musa sapientum j) 
pine apples and pumpkins abound among the indigenous and exotic fruits 
and vegetables of this island. If the shore is thus teeming with sponta- 
neous provision for the wants of the inhabitants, the surrounding ocean is 
not less prolific in affording an endless variety of iish. Turtles, shell-fish 
and many half-animated marine substances used as food, are found within 
the reefs. 

When I mention the reefs, I cannot forbear making a few remarks on 
these extraordinary natural break-waters, which are of the highest value 
to the South Sea Islands. Take Tahiti for instance. "Without this coral 
breast-work there is not a single harbour in the island ; but with it, the 
coast, with few exceptions, is sheltered from the ocean, and circumnavigated 
with safety in the smallest canoe. In one or two places the coast is exposed ; 
but excepting these openings, and a number of narrow passes for boats or 
ships, a bank of sand and coral, nearly even with the surface of the water, 
varying in distance from the beach from half a mile to perhaps a mile and 
a half, extends round the whole island, and defends it from the sea. On 



APPENDIX. 757 

this wonderful barrier, the mighty swell of the Pacific breaks in ceaseless 
thunder, from age to age ; but within the providential limit the raging 
deep is chained, and all is tranquil as a lake : ships of the largest size may 
enter and ride securely, and the light canoe of the native has a safe access 
to every part of the coast. We have all heard of coral reefs long ago ; but 
till we reached this place, I may confess I had not the least idea of the 
characteristic peculiarity, in the natural shelter furnished by them among 
the South Sea Islands. 

The government of Tahiti is nominally vested in one person, but as might 
be expected, the principal chiefs possess a large share of power. The queen 
and two of the most influential chiefs entertain a very friendly feeling 
towards the missionaries, and consequently their wishes are consulted, 
and their interest supported in most cases ; but there is an opposite faction 
who would doubtless be glad if it were otherwise. Although Pomare 
appears to favour the cause of the missionaries, and by enforcing the laws 
against the sale of spirits, &c, to consult the welfare of her people, she is 
by no means a woman on whose principles full dependence can be placed. 
At a national assembly held annually, when nearly the whole population 
of the island come together to see, hear, and enjoy themselves, — which 
took place a week or two back at Papaoa, she is said to have sanctioned 
great disorders, and allowed some of the ancient heathen customs, of a 
shameful nature, to be indulged in. 

In almost all the dealings which we have had with the natives, one prin- 
ciple of action appears predominant, to obtain all they can : and this is in 
precise accordance with the practice of our countrymen among them. 
The people of the neighbourhood of the Bay, labour under the disadvantage 
of being constantly exposed to contact with unprincipled foreigners, who 
encourage what is wrong, and introduce large quantities of ardent spirits 
among them, in spite of the legal prohibition. This fact alone is enough 
to account for the prevalence of vice, and sordid venality ; and the formal, 
unwilling conformity to established restrictive regulations. 

But though much of evil may be underneath, and great thoughtless- 
ness may be obvious, yet there are doubtless alleviating exceptions ; and 
external tranquillity is for the most part preserved. 

It is nearly impossible for a visitor, who cannot even speak the language, 
to pronounce with much certainty on a subject of such moment, as the 
religious state of the community. Certainly appearances are unpromis- 
ing ; and however unwilling to adopt such a conclusion, there is reason to 
apprehend that Christian principle is a great rarity. Far, however, be it 
from me to depreciate the labours of those who have been the instruments 
of the change produced in this island. So far from considering the bene- 
ficial results of their efforts as unimportant and insignificant, I regard 
them as of the highest moment, and as fully equal to what could in reason 
have been anticipated. In my opinion, if nothing more had been effected 
by the Tahitian mission than the translation of the holy Scriptures into 
the language of the country, every sacrifice that has been made, would 
have been abundantly rewarded. But the translation of the Sacred Writ- 



758 APPENDIX. 

ings is not all. Idol worship, the adoration of nonentities or of supposed 
divinities, in the form of images, with all the frightful train of debasing 
ceremonies and human sacrifices, are abolished. Open infanticide, which 
prevailed to such a dreadful extent, is done away ; and some degree of 
attention is paid to the improvement of the minds of children. Many 
salutary civil restrictions have been introduced, and a check imposed on 
the unbridled licentiousness of foreigners. 

There is a singular custom prevailing in Tahiti, which I have not yet 
noticed. Every child possesses an indefinite number of adopted parents, 
who, at its birth, or perhaps even before, promise to cherish and assist it in 
after life, in case of need. This practice confers great independence on 
the children, who remain with their real parents, only so long as is agree- 
able to them ; and if maltreated or corrected, they take up their residence 
with another family, to desert it hereafter in the same way. This is a 
great barrier to the right management of the native children, who can at 
once forsake their parents, should the correction or restraints they impose 
become irksome to them. 

The Tahitian mode of living is certainly very much in the simplicity, 
or perhaps more properly in the rudeness, of nature. Their houses afford 
a shelter from the rain, and a receptacle for their little property ; which 
consists of a few imported articles of clothing for special occasions, some 
food, nets, sleeping mats, and a display of firelocks : comforts, conveni- 
ences, and luxuries, (according to our ideas,) are for the most part unknown. 
One apartment usually accommodates the whole household, which 
generally consists of individuals of all ages, more or less related to each 
other, and herded together in considerable numbers. When at home, the 
usual employment of the men appears to be the preparation of food or oil, 
gardening and making nets, and that of the women the manufacture of 
native cloth, cooking and sewing ; but both sexes are very frequently 
found unemployed, — perhaps smoking, or playing with a ball and string. 
The men ordinarily wear very little clothing : the women a loose piece of 
print or calico thrown round the waist, leaving, except in the presence of 
foreigners, or when ' dressed out,' the upper part of the figure nearly or 
entirely exposed. The young children frequently go quite naked. A true 
native hut contains neither table, chair nor bed, — the reed-covered soil 
which forms a floor, serving the purposes of all. The food is spread on 
leaves, and the people sit round on their heels, squatted on the ground ; and 
when recumbent, they lie upon mats, covered with folds of their native bark 
cloth. This cloth is made from the bark of several trees, — a large propor- 
tion of what is used here, from that of the bread fruit tree. This is beaten 
into thin sheets, which are rendered tenacious by the gum they contain, 
when properly dried in the sun. "When fit for use, this ingenious substitute 
for woven goods resembles coarse paper : it is, however, less easily torn, and 
generally somewhat thinner. It forms but a harsh, uncomfortable drapery, 
and will not bear properly washing, being injured by moisture, without 
much friction ; but habit and necessity render it tolerable, and it is very 
readily made. When dressed for chapel, the men generally wear a foreign 



APPENDIX. 



759 



shirt, and a piece of print or blue cotton wrapped round the waist : the 
women a similar girdle of some light material, and either a kind of loose 
gown, or a shawl, of calico, thrown over the shoulders, with a bonnet 
generally made of pressed paper, in imitation of straw, and profusely 
decorated with broad bright coloured ribbon. The last mentioned article 
is in very extensive use, and is sold to great advantage by almost every 
body here. I was one day trying to purchase a piece of ornamented native 
cloth, and offered an equal length of English print for it ; but the owner 
refused this remuneration, demanding a similar length of ribbon instead. 
The gay colours worn by the whites are, of course, zealously imitated by 
the poor natives, whose clothing seems to be adopted rather from vanity, or 
deference to foreign customs, than from necessity or a sense of decorum. 

Taloo Harbour, Island of Elmeo, Ninth Month 12th, 1835. — This is a most 
romantic spot, surrounded by almost perpendicular hills, towering nearly 
four thousand feet, with a broken fantastic outline. As in Tahiti, there is 
a margin of lowland next the water, which produces abundant crops of 
fruit and vegetables ; but the proportion of this fertile soil is small, and as 
a whole, probably, this is the less productive island of the two. Its scenery 
is wilder and more diversified, and the ridges are much more angular and 
rugged than those of Tahiti, some of them, where huge black rocks and 
foliage blend in the obscurity of distance, resembling the broken fragments 
of a stupendous ruin. Many parts are nearly perpendicular for hundreds 
of feet, and of course quite inaccessible. The summit of a mountain that 
skirts one side of Taloo Harbour, extending for a considerable distance at 
an elevation of three thousand feet, is yet so narrow, we are told, in some 
places, that a man cannot walk along it, but is obliged to push himself 
forward in a sitting posture, grasping the mountain with his legs. 

On the 23rd, arrangements were made for visiting the opposite side of 
the island, where a number of natives, and one English family reside. The 
direction of the trade-wind rendered the longest route most eligible, and 
we pursued our course among coral rocks within the reefs. In a few hours 
we arrived opposite a famous entrance through the reef, formerly held 
sacred on account of a large marai, called Orfia, situated on the beach near 
it. Here we landed and explored the marai, with its ruined piles of rock, 
its consecrated enclosures, praying-stones, and venerable grove of Aitos 
and Tamanus.* The whole neighbourhood is overgrown with trees and 
climbers, and the ruins are so completely dilapidated, that it is difficult to 
appreciate the original design. Many smaller heaps of stone, and the 
remains of pavements, steps, and praying-stones are seen near the principal 
pile, — the whole forming an enduring relic of superstition, and a proof of 
the laborious zeal of idolaters. After surveying this gloomy grove, once 
associated with scenes of horror and death, we continued an intricate 
passage through innumerable beds of coral, till we reached Afareaitu, and 
were cordially welcomed by the resident English family. 

* The Tamami (calophyllum Inophyllum,) was formerly held sacred in the South Sea Islands. 
It is a noble tree, — in general appearance something resembling the oak. 



760 



AI'PIlXDIX. 



Ninth Month 27th, 1835.— We heard some days since that more ardent 
spirits have just been brought to Tahiti by a schooner from Valparaiso, 
which is now trading in them. When we left Tahiti, another American 
vessel was there selling all she could of this destructive poison ; in fact, the 
chief articles of barter for cocoa-nut oil and arrow-root that she seemed 
to have, were fire-arms and brandy, and these she was retailing round the 
coast. Her supercargo told me himself, that he had sold all the brandy he 
could get rid of, and between one and two hundred muskets. He is quite 
a youth, but well enough suited for the task he has undertaken, being a 
profligate, thoughtless fellow, initiated into the trade, whjch he avows his 
intention to continue. What could be more completely barbarous than 
this traffic, carried on with uncivilized nations at the present day ; and that 
too by professing Christians ! 

During the afternoon of Tenth Month 15th, we rambled for exercise on 
the public road, along the coast, and saw a curious salt-water lake, situ- 
ated about two miles to the northward of the harbour. It is a magnificent 
sheet of water, encircled by mountains and tropical forests ; and probably 
would have been still more gratifying to eyes less familiar with the water 
than ours. There is, however, an essential distinction between the pros- 
pects to which we are accustomed, and inland lake scenery. The charac- 
teristic of the former is ceaseless fluctuation, — that of the latter unbroken 
tranquillity. 

Among the enclosures of the natives here, there is greater indication of 
industry than we remarked in Tahiti, and many of the houses are built in 
the civilized manner, with windows, plastered walls, &c. Nevertheless 
the dwellings Ave have seen have by no means a comfortable aspect, and 
the general effect of the native settlements is not particularly pleasing. 
Unfurnished, dirty huts, surrounded with lumber, the remains of food, &c, 
naked children, and all but naked parents, working, or rolling about, 
smoking or playing, sleeping or waking, as the case may be ; with groups 
of half starved hogs and dogs occupying every corner in the neighbour- 
hood, do not constitute the most delightful objects, though viewed in the 
far-famed South Sea Islands. 

Our afternoon ramble on the 17th, led to the site of William Ellis's 
residence. The vicinity is completely overgrown with guavas, and the 
most authentic traces of its former occupant are discoverable in some fine 
fruit-trees, planted in the immediate neighbourhood of the house. We 
afterwards took tea at the mission-house, and were shown the press which 
is occasionally employed in printing native lessons, laws, &c. 

Or the afternoon of the 24th, we accompanied one of the missionaries 
on an excursion up the salt-water lake mentioned before After walking 
about two miles, we embarked in a canoe, and were pushed along the 
shore by a man with a long pole ; — a method adopted where the water is 
shallow, as the most expeditious mode of propelling their light barks. In 
about au hour we reached the farther end of the lagoon, distant perhaps 
five miles from the place of embarkation. The banks as we went along 
appeared thickly wooded and very thinly inhabited, exhibiting little 



APPENDIX. 761 

variety, beside the occasional remains of rnarais, of which there are a 
great number. Our native conductor pointed out the particular pile of 
stones appropriated to his family, on which he had himself offered gifts to 
the supposed gods of Tahiti. He mentioned having been present on one 
occasion when a human victim was taken near this lake : — he was a boy at 
the time, and was rambling along the bank, when a party of men, led by 
a chief, approached the spot where he was, and where also the object of 
their pursuit happened to be. The chief, when he discovered his victim, 
bade him climb a cocoa-nut tree, which he of course instantly did. He 
ordered him to pluck some nuts for them, and when this was done, to 
break off a leaf, and come down. The leaf was to form a basket 
for his own body to be carried in. On coming down he was forthwith 
dispatched. Our informant run away in great fear, while the murderers 
laughed at his terror, and exulted in their easy capture. 

Fare 1 Harbour. Huahine. — In personal appearance, there is no percep- 
tible difference between the natives of this island and those of Tahiti ; and 
from what we have seen, their progress in civil, social, and religious 
improvement is precisely similar. I think more pains have been bestowed 
on their instruction ; but, as far as our observation has extended, they 
occupy much the same position as their Georgian neighbours in the scale 
of civilization, mental development and morality. On the whole, I should 
suppose a larger proportion of the population is more or less acquainted 
with the rudiments of reading and writing ; though many are ignorant of 
these, and it is not impossible that less constant intercourse with the 
shipping may have prevented some of that licentious degradation, which 
peculiarly characterizes the vicinity of sea-ports. Only one ship has been 
here during our stay, but in her case considerable irregularities were 
committed. The use of spirits is just now generally laid aside, and doubt- 
less this salutary regulation will tend to prevent many evils. 

Raiatea. — The natural scenery of Raiatea resembles what I have already 
described in the other islands, but is for the most part less picturesque 
than any other we have yet seen. It is a much larger island than Huahine, 
and is supposed to contain fourteen or fifteen hundred people ; the whole 
of whom belong, nominally, to the settlement of Uturoa, though they are 
of course found scattered round the coast, as most convenient to them- 
selves. Tahaa, a smaller island, containing a population of four or five 
hundred souls, subject to the same government, is situated a few miles to 
the northward, and is included within the same reef as Raiatea. This reef 
is precisely similar to what we have before seen, and extends round the 
two islands at a considerable distance, affording several excellent harbours, 
to which commodious channels furnish an easy access. The one in which 
we are lying is entered from the eastward, through a fine passage between 
two small islands, and is a spacious basin, capable of containing a large 
fleet, with a passage at the opposite end to leeward of the island. Nothing 
could well be more convenient ; and although from the circumstance that 



762 APPENDIX. 

its shelter, the reef, is as usual low and hare, good tackle is required in the 
anchorage ; yet this stupendous barrier affords a most complete defence 
from the ocean. Coral and shells are plentiful, but the latter rather dear. 
Provisions seem to be rather lower than at Tahiti, where more competition 
diminishes the value of foreign articles of barter. Even there, things are 
very cheap for the most part. The common price for a good sized hog is 
six or eight yards of print, or from three to four dollars. Horned cattle are 
plentiful in all the islands we have yet seen, and are principally the property 
of the missionaries. When several ships can agree to take an ox among 
them, beef is sold at about 2d. per lb. Broad print, or cotton dyed a blue 
colour, is a favourite article of barter, and is always sold by the fathom, 
this length being convenient for the garment worn round the waist. A 
fathom is reckoned to be worth nearly a dollar, — about four times its 
value in England. Gaudy coloured ribbons are about the same price. A 
musket costing at home perhaps 12s. is sold at Tahiti for seven or eight 
dollars. 

On the afternoon of Eleventh Month 2nd, we walked out for exercise 
along the settlement of Uturoa, which extends some distance by the sea- 
side, and called to see an old chief who is said to have been the principal 
instigator of the last war with Bolabola ; to which perhaps more than to 
any other obvious i-eason, the present deteriorated condition of this people 
and the miserable falling away in Bolabola must be attributed. Beside 
the numerous evils inevitably incident to a nation engaged in hostilities 
with its neighbours, it is from this fatal period that both islands date the 
general introduction of spirits ; which has proved no less detrimental to the 
community than fighting. Here, happily, the law has been passed for their 
prohibition ; but in the other island their ravages still continue. We saw 
four pieces of cannon taken from the Bolabolans, which were used in the 
late contest ; originally brought by a trading vessel from New Zealand, and 
sold to the poor natives at the rate of eighty hogs each. They are said 
to have belonged to the unfortunate Boyd, and to have been raised from 
her wreck by the New Zealanders. 

On the 3rd of Eleventh Month, we started in company with C. Barff and 
a little boy on an excursion to the famous niarai of Tabutabu Atea, — situ- 
ated in the district of Apoa. The wind being against us all the way, it was 
a hard pull of about twelve miles, which occupied nearly three hours, and 
unfortunately for us it rained at intervals most of the time. The object of 
our curiosity is situated on a projecting piece of low land, running from 
the base of a considerable hill to the beach, and retains abundant features 
to identify it with the late system of horrors. An enormous banyan tree 
grows quite near it, and which could not fail to attract our notice and ad- 
miration. Like all other specimens of this extraordinary tree, it consists 
of a column of matted fibrous trunks, intersecting, supporting, or distorting 
each other, surmounted by a fine head of foliage ; from which fall those 
slender, cord-like tendrils which connect roots and branches, and thus fur- 
nish the means of continual increase in size. Exclusive of these junior sup- 
porters, what maybe called the stem of this enormous and complicated fabric, 



APPENDIX. 763 

measured by paces forty-six yards in circumference ; and I should think 
at least twenty men might conceal themselves in its truly gigantic mass. 
Between this natural curiosity and the marai, under the shade of a grove 
is seen the space of ground appropriated to the dances, once so much in 
vogue here, in celebration uf their abominable orgies. 

Bolabola, Eleventh Month 11th. — In the afternoon we walked through the 
settlement, and saw several sick and infirm persons. My father distributed 
several pairs of spectacles where they seemed to be most needed, among 
the more serious uatives who coidd read. One of these, a cripple, we 
found in his hut with his Bible before him, and two muskets hanging over 
his head : he is a constant attender of the school, acting as teacher as well 
as he is able. On om walks here we have generally been attended by 
a group of children, who frolic round the strangers, and afford much 
amusement by their sprightliness, wildness aud curiosity. They are really 
fine, intelligent little creatures. Some of them look healthy, but too many 
bear marks of the prevailing disorders, which have been deplorably 
neglected among these islanders. A more invaluable present could 
scarcely be sent to them than a good supply of drugs, — particularly 
calomel, salts, sulphur, ipecacuanha, opium and rhubarb. It is true, in 
many places there is no one to administer them, and in others they would 
not be administered to the greatest advantage, for want of professional 
knowledge ; but if sent to the care of some of the missionaries, they would 
confer a great blessing. C. B. does much in relieving the poor creatures 
around him, by his own exertions in this way. 

South Pacific, Eleventh Month 19th, 1S35. — However deficient my accounts 
of the islands we have just left may appear, it would be no difficult matter 
to add considerably to the interest felt in their perusal, had my object 
been merely to draw a pleasing picture. I have noticed the causes which 
operate in producing the very false impression which certainly is produced 
by reading the reports of some former visitors. There are many circum- 
stances connected with the South Sea Islands, peculiarly fascinating and 
poetical, and these have been made the most of by some of their deline- 
ators. My wish, that a simple statement should produce a simple and 
correct impression, has induced me to confine my remarks pretty much 
to matters of plain fact, more or less intimately connected with our own 
progress or the object of the voyage. 

Of Tahiti, I have already given you some particulars, also of Eimeo. 
The government, laws, and people of the other Georgian Isles are essen- 
tially the same, and the state of society not materially different. The 
same compulsory system which obtains in Tahiti, ensures for the present 
in Eimeo an external attention to the services of the chapel ; but the 
very existence of this detestable regulation indicates unsoundness. The 
fact that the poor native is subjected to a penalty if he absents himself 
from the chapel, and the sight of a man with a stick ransacking the 
villages for worshippers, before the hour of service,— a spectacle we have 



76 i APPENDIX. 

witnessed, — are so utterly abhorrent to our notions, that I cannot revert 
to the subject without feelings of regret and disgust. 

The general appearance of the country, and of the inhabitants of 
Huahine, is similar to Tahiti, and the popular habits seem nearly the same. 
The soil is exceedingly prolific, demanding but little labour. Hogs and 
domestic fowls are pretty numerous, but horned cattle are only found in 
the possession of the missionary and a few others ; and indeed it is unde- 
sirable that they should increase much, as they certainly are a great nui- 
sance among the native plantations. In Tahiti and Eimeo they abound 
and run wild, preying upon the fruits and damaging the fences in parts 
that cannot be easily watched. 

Both Raiatea and Tahaa are fine fertile islands, capable of supporting 
ten times then- present population ; but there is no prospect of increase 
under present circumstances ; and if the sweeping bane of ardent spirits is 
re-admitted, the numbers will rapidly decline. Even in Huahine, where 
things are undoubtedly better managed and the people more instructed, 
the number of births and deaths are just about equal. C. B. told us 
that he hoped during the present year there would be a small preponder- 
ance in favour of the former. The more abandoned portion of the com- 
munity scarcely ever have families, and many of the children that are 
born are miserably diseased, so that a little aggravation of circumstances, 
such as a return to general intemperance, would make existing causes ade- 
quate for a speedy extermination. I trust, however, these islanders may be 
preserved, after having survived the bloody era of human immolation, 
infanticide, and other pagan atrocities,— from falling victims to vices intro- 
duced and kept up by ' Christians.' 

But of all the islands in the Society group, Bolabola exhibits at the pre- 
sent time the most melancholy spectacle. It is indeed a lovely island, and 
wants only a moral and industrious population, and a consistent united 
government, to ensure its national prosperity. But, exhausted by the late 
struggle with Raiatea, the chiefs divided among themselves, all moral 
restraints disregarded by one faction, and every excess openly sanctioned ; — 
the other party, who still adhere nominally to the cause of the missionaries, 
left to support their own principles, — there is Uttle of a pleasing nature to 
be said respecting it. The more sober part of the people seemed tractable 
enough ; but it is scai-cely to be expected that they will maintain their 
ground, associated with and related as they are, to the lawless faction. 
At the time of our visit the fruit season had not arrived, and consequently 
the means of distillation were not within their power ; but a few weeks 
would furnish them with an abundant harvest of bread-fruit, &c, and it 
was greatly feared, that last year's excesses would again be indulged in, 
and a famine produced by the consumption of every article of food in the 
making of spirits. 

The people here have much less of foreign clothing than the natives 
of the other islands,— possessing fewer opportunities of obtaining it, and 
having wasted their means in drinking. This circumstance alone prevents 
many from attending chapel, when a missionary is here. Whatever their 



APPENDIX. 765 

motive might be, the better sort appeared extremely eager to supply 
themselves -with clothing, and would part with almost any thing tkey 
possessed, (which is not much, poor creatures !) to obtain a bit of print 
or calico. 

The settlement is composed of wicker huts, with the exception of one or 
two dilapidated houses, the chapel and the mission-house. The island is 
extremely fertile, producing vast quantities of bread-fruit ; but it is by no 
means well supplied with water, and on this account can never become 
a general resort for shipping, although it possesses a most magnificent 
harbour. Ve saw a spring or two, which furnish a constant supply ; but 
the water usually found among the natives is nearly unfit for use, except 
during the rainy season. 

As a missionary station, it is at present abandoned ; but we saw nothiug 
about the chiefs and people of the more respectable party particularly dis- 
couraging. On the contrary, I feel no doubt tbat a large portion of the 
inhabitants, whose interest in every point of view it would certainly be to 
protect such a resident, are capable of appreciating the value of a conscien- 
tious missionary. The lawless faction are at present incorrigible ; but the 
removal of their leader would no doubt terminate their career, and this is 
an event by no means improbable, if he persist in his present intemperate 
habits. One of his sons fell a victim to intemperance only a few weeks 
back. 

Sandwich Isles, Oahu. — On the 7th of First Month, 1836, we visited the 
mission establishment and looked through the printing, binding, compos- 
ing-rooms, &c. Two presses are kept at work : at present printing the 
New Testament, a geography, the Hawaii newspaper, — (Ke Kumu Hawaii,) 
— and a music-book for a volume of hymns. The newspaper last year was 
twice its present size, and sold for twice its present price, which is half a 
dollar annually : it was published every fortnight, and 3500 copies were 
circulated. Probably its circulation will be much increased this season. 
It is a small but neat paper, containing information on subjects calculated 
to interest the people, such as natural history, and particular occurrences 
in the islands ; and the demand indicates a relish on the part of the 
natives for such a source of instruction and amusement. We were pleased 
with the machinery on the establishment, which is in good repair, and is 
worked entirely by natives, under the direction of a foreign printer aud 
binder. 

There are at present residing in Honolulu, belonging to the American 
Board of Missions, two ' ordained' ministers, a doctor, a book-binder, a 
printer, and a ' secular agent.' A missionary from one of the other islands 
is here just now with his family. The above are all married men, although 
one or two of their number are quite young ; and they all reside in the 
same neighbourhood, forming quite a community among themselves. 

The end of the week is almost universally adopted in Oahu as a time 
for riding on horseback ; and accordingly the roads and commons swarm 
with the gentry of the neighbourhood, who vie with each other in risking 



766 



APPENDIX. 



their necks. Foreigners, native nobility, and others, are seen galloping 
abont in all directions, to the discomfiture, or at least the ' bodily fear' of 
sober pedestrians. The Sandwich Island women are really very adroit on 
horseback : but the posture in which these amazons choose to exhibit, 
violates every feeling of refinement. 

22nd. — Some efforts have lately been making on the part of both natives 
and foreigners, in the way of petitioning the government here for the 
suppression of spirit-selling, which is increased to a shocking extent. 
The king, unhappily, is fond of drinking himself, and moreover derives 
considerable emolument from the licenses to vend this pernicious article ; 
so that surrounded as he is by ill-ad visers, there is little hope that any 
alteration will take place at present. Many of the foreign residents 
defend the sale and use of spirits ; which is one principal source of profit 
with some of them. The village of Honolulu is supposed to contain about 
two hundred foreigners, and we can only hear of two houses among those 
who are traders, not more or less concerned in the sale of spirits. There 
are at present about fifteen grog shops, where all kinds of distilled 
liquors are sold at a very low rate. 1 have not yet seen a single native 
intoxicated, and really believe the drinking is almost exclusively confined 
to the foreigners and half-castes. 

One of the white inhabitants was killed in a drunken quarrel just before 
our arrival ; and a captain narrowly escaped the same fate a few days 
since, having the temporal artery cut in a tray on shore. 

Among the sailors, the evil of drinking is greatly upheld by masters 
and owners of ships, Avhose practice has a tendency to perpetuate the 
grievance which they pretend to deplore. How absurd on board vessels 
lying at anchor, in a hot climate, where the men are in a state of almost 
continual excitement in consequence of what they get when on shore, to 
give out regularly to each man, and even in some cases to each boy,sm allow- 
ance of rum every day ! 

On the 2nd of Second Month, I accompanied Captain C. and his sister 
on an excursion inland, to see the famous mountain pass of Oahu. It is 
situated about seven or eight miles up a fine valley, which stretches across 
the centre of the island, behind the village of Honolulu. After crossing 
the plain of lava which lies along the coast, our route was along a winding 
path, through brooks and foliage and steep ravines ; which by a very gradual 
ascent led us eventually to the verge of the precipice. Here the most 
imposing spectacle is presented. Before us — from the bare torrent-worn 
rocks which surmount this giant barrier — was spread a wide undulated 
tract of country, bounded by the then tranquil ocean, and varied by woods, 
meadows, and sheets of water, all distinctly exhibited at one view beneath 
our feet. The point on which we stood is the verge of a precipice, perhaps 
eight hundred or a thousand feet high ; which is ascended from the east- 
ward by a winding staircase track, leading from rock to rock, in some 
places nearly perpendicular. From this track the frightful depth is in 
many parts concealed by bushes and projecting points of the cliff; a cir- 
cumstance which makes the danger of ascent and descent much less than 



APPENDIX. 767 

it could otherwise be : but from the dizzy summit, the eye fathoms at a 
glance the tremendous void below. On the left was seeu the termination 
of a cliff, which towers like a pillar from the vale beneath high into the 
air above our heads, with a boldness and sublimity altogether indescri- 
bable : on the right, a bank of rich foliage rose from the plain to 
the very summit of the mountain, with a richness and grandeur equally 
beyond the reach of words,— though less striking to the eye. The huts of 
the natives scattered over the country below, were seen like specks on 
the green surface ; and the white dwelling of the missionary at the Kolo'a 
station was just discoverable on the distant shore. Behind us lay the fine 
romantic slope, by which we had reached this truly imposing pass, skirted 
by a chain of luxuriant hills on each side, and covered with an exuberance 
of vegetation peculiar to the tropics :— the harbour and its floating occu- 
pants and the dim expanse of ocean beyond it, terminating the prospect 
in the west. After collecting some curious plants and land-shells, and 
feasting our eyes on the magnificent scenery of the place, Ave commenced 
a return towards the inhabited world, and arrived safe in Honolulu soon 
after sun-set. 

These islanders, like all the other uncivilized tribes whom we have seen, 
are fond of tobacco, and carry the practice of smoking it to a singular 
extreme. They inhale the fumes into the lungs, and quickly feel their 
stupifying effects. In some of the islands, the use of it is made illegal ; 
and we have heard of an instance in which a strange expedient was 
resorted to, in order to supply the place of this narcotic ; — this was to 
press two or three of the arteries in the neck till dizziness was produced, 
and the individual fell down insensible, recovering after some time, as from 
a fit of intoxication. Tims stupor and forgetfulness are proved to con- 
stitute great part of the gratification supposed to be afforded by smoking. 
The missionaries are very often censured for trying to suppress the use 
of tobacco ; but the Sandwich islanders cany smoking to such an extent, 
that their influence seems very properly directed to abolish it. 

17th. — The harbour has been a good deal disturbed by the yells of a 
band of north-west-coast Indians, who are quartered on board a hulk at 
anchor near us. These poor fellows come here to receive payment for 
their furs, and for services which the ships obtain from them on the coast ; 
and they being fond of rum, and rum being very plentiful among their 
employers, the result might be easily predicted. Howling, dancing, and 
drumming on a piece of wood form their amusements, to which quar- 
relling and fighting may be added. One of them was drowned a short 
time since close to our vessel, by falling into the water by night in a state 
of intoxication. 

These Indians differ widely in character and appearance from the 
South Sea Islanders. They are wary, intelligent people, rather Jewish 
in their expression of countenance, and not so handsome as the Polyne- 
sians. Their heads are remarkably large, — their faces broad and eyes 
deep, — hair long, straight and black, and complexion swarthy. Their 
language is particularly disagreeable to the ear : few of their words are 



768 APPENDIX. 

properly articulated ; but the whole business of enunciation is referred to 
the throat, which seems half blocked up with spasms and contortions to 
produce the requisite sounds. They have frequently been on board to sell 
shells, and appear very friendly and harmless, though by no means so 
childish and simple as Tahitians. Fire arms, rum, tobacco, and clothing 
— for use rather than ornament, — are what they most crave. 

Fourth Month 6th, 1S36. — I was invited to join in another equestrian excur- 
sion, with my former kind companions ; and a remarkably fine day proved 
highly propitious to our enjoyment, — although previous rains, which ren- 
dered the steeps less accessible, prevented our ascending the mountains so 
far as had been proposed. We reached suflicient elevation, however, to 
obtain a magnificent view of the coast, village, harbour, and ocean, and to be 
surrounded by rich hills and dales, which blend with indescribable loveli- 
ness. The valleys — literally huge ravines between the heights, which con- 
duct the fertilizing streams to the shore, are but thinly inhabited ; but they 
teem with exuberant vegetation. The mountains are very finely wooded, 
and the more open parts of the hills are studded over with cattle. As we 
were situated when at the highest point of our journey, the deep vales 
spread beneath us with an enchanting variety ; and summit rising over 
summit into the clouds, marked the multitude of hills which stretch towards 
the coast in wild fantastic ranges. Punch-bowl Hill, a brown volcanic 
mound of a circular form, probably about five hundred feet high, looked 
quite diminutive from oiir superior elevation, and its fortified top was 
completely exposed beneath us ; though from the harbour, this hill appears 
large. You can scarcely form an idea of the exhilarating feeling, which 
the mind experiences on these noble heights in a tropical climate. Here 
all is wild, and bold, and majestic ; the air is pure and cool, and the soli- 
tude is unbroken by a sound less romantic than the lowing of herds, the 
murmur of descending waters, or the simple notes of songsters dwelling 
unseen in the wooded recesses. The eye,— accustomed below to parched, 
naked plains,— here luxuriates on the smooth slopes, the deep shades, or 
the towering forest-clothed peaks and ridges, and the lungs inhale new life 
and vigour in the free, bracing atmosphere of a more genial clime.- If to 
the smiles of surrounding nature are super-added the rare delights of con- 
genial society, the wanderer and the exile might almost be tempted to 
forget for a moment that the wide world separates him from his home. 
But such an illusion roust be of short duration : a descent soon restores 
the less pleasing reality of common life in the desert of a strange land. 

Island of Tanai, Sandwich Group, — Koha Station, Sixth Month 20th, 1836. — 
Being kindly furnished with a steed and conductor, I undertook an excur- 
sion along the sea shore to see a curious cavern in the rock, through which 
the surf rushes to a considerable distance underground, and hurls a column 
of foam with tremendous force into the air, like a magnificent fountain. 
There are several such cavities in the lava, on the shore of this island ; the 
largest we saw lies a considerable distance from the anchorage at Koloa, to 
the westward. The coast is composed of rude masses of lava, extending in 



APPENDIX. 769 

every rugged form along the margin of the sea, and occasionally rising into 
huge perpendicular cliffs. The phenomenon in question, is merely caused 
hy a passage which leads from beneath the surf, when it rolls up the 
strand, and opens like a well, some little distance inland, sufficiently re- 
moved from the breakers to give the fountain an isolated appearance. 
When a heavy swell breaks on the shore, the air in this unexplored cavern 
is driven with tremendous noise through its sounding caves, and from one 
or more mouths is projected amomentary blast of white foam, to the height 
probably of twenty or thirty feet. As the wave retires, all is still on the 
black broken rocks ; the mouth of the cave looks like a natural well, 
half-filled with masses of stone, which conceal its depth ; but as the rolling 
billow thunders towards the coast, a deafening noise is heard underneath, 
which increases in violence till it ends in a fierce loud hiss, as steam dis- 
charged from the valve of a steam-engine ; and in a moment afterwards, 
a cloud of water and foam is driven high into the air. 

The geographical position of the Sandwich Islands, in a commercial point 
of view, is a valuable one ;— in the North Pacific, they form an intermediate 
link between two distant continents, and thus facilitate an intercourse 
which is now considerable, and will probably become much more so here- 
after. As a resort of the whalers, and of traders to the north-west coast 
of America, they are likewise important : at Honolulu alone about one 
hundred and thirty ships touched during last year, and at other places the 
number was very considerable. 

A constant trade breeze, which during great part of the year sweeps 
across the group from the eastward, renders the atmosphere exceedingly 
salubrious : probably between the tropics no situation is more healthy. 
To an English constitution the climate is undoubtedly relaxing, and would 
probably, apart from all causes which contribute to increase its effect 
but which are not inseparable from it, exhaust the animal system more 
speedily than a colder clime. The human constitution, like the vine, seems 
periodically to require a season of comparative repose, which these seats of 
perennial summer do not furnish ; early maturity and premature decline 
characterize the residents in these sunny, stormless regions. The winter 
here, a cooler, more irregular, showery season than the summer, is called 
* the rainy season,' but this epithet, as generally understood, is not quite 
appropriate ; the continued drenching rains that mark that period in Tahiti, 
we certainly did not see. The rain which fell during our stay, (and the 
season was considered rather unusually wet,) did not I believe exceed what 
generally falls in England during the corresponding season. 

Eight islands constitute this cluster, to which might be added several 
small ones lying near the others, which are not usually enumerated ; 
the present population of the group, as determined by a census taken by 
the missionaries in the present year, is 110,000. In 1826, it was said to be 
about 155,000, so that if these numbers are correct, and the past is a spe- 
cimen of the future, it will not require many more years to depopulate the 
islands altogether. 

In the instance before us, the injury is evidently to be referred, not to a 

3 D 



770 APPENDIX. 

succession of open hostilities, but to a complication of causes, in increasing 
operation. Among these, disease and immoral habits are no doubt the 
principal ; but there are others of no trifling character. Association with 
foreigners has increased the wants of the chiefs, without furnishing any- 
corresponding means of supplying them, and in consequence of this, the 
poor people are more heavily burdened than formerly. They are con- 
tinually obliged to labour without receiving any remuneration, and to 
furnish an indefinite amount of property in the form of taxes or tribute, in 
order to retain an inch of ground ; and this last evil is increased by every 
addition to the size of their families. A large number of the more enter- 
prizing natives now avoid, at least for a time, the impositions of their 
chiefs, by going as sailors in the whale ships ; emigration too, is said to 
be eagerly sought by the poor, dissatisfied people, who are anxious to try a 
change, in the hope of amending their condition. 

Many of the above evils arise, as you will perceive, out of the moral 
degradation of the people, and I cannot for a moment doubt, that could 
they be really formed into a temperate Christian community, there would 
be no danger whatever of their national extinction, so long as they retain 
their independence. May the purifying influence of the gospel of our Lord, 
which lias already made some progress among them, correct the disordered 
state of society which now prevails, and avert the fate which threatens 
this people ! 

Of the Sandwich Islanders, as a race, I think highly. They are intelli- 
gent, grave, inquiring, and peculiarly inoffensive and docile. No one who 
has seen much of them, can, without great injustice, refuse to admit that 
the minds of these natives are quite capable of improvement and elevation : 
there are difficulties connected with their instruction, but the ground-work 
of natural capability is indisputably there. Less volatile and playful than 
Tahitians, their gravity might in some cases, be mistaken for moroseness ; 
but no people could be more conciliating and ready to oblige than they 
generally are. Their curiosity is excited by every thing new, which is 
brought under their notice, and to prove their observation, we need only 
look at the improvements and conveniences which they have adopted or 
ingeniously imitated. In connexion with their docility, they sometimes 
appear childish ; but this apparent imbecility arises from their simplicity, 
and a consciousness of their ignorance and circumstantial inferiority to 
many whom they meet from the civilized world. In some of their actions, 
however, where no such considerations weigh, — as for instance, when they 
have to deal with lawless and abandoned foreigners, they prove that they 
neither fear nor venerate a white skin, merely as such. 

[Speaking of the dress of the islanders, C. W. remarks,] the garland 
worn on the head by chief women, is a costly decoration, it is said to be 
worth fifty or sixty dollars. It is formed of yellow feathers, which one 
species of mountain bird furnishes in small numbers ; it is said that each 
bird does not supply more than two or three small feathers ; these are 
arranged like the swan's down neck-bands of Europe, and are glossy and 
silky in the extreme. Lord Byron procured two of these costly garlands 



APPENDIX. 771 

for some ladies of rank in England, a few years since. In the remoter parts 
of the islands, the females still retain their old garments, which happily 
are very much out of use among the more civilized. A piece of native 
cloth wound round the waist, and a loose, shapeless frock, either of print 
or native cloth made in imitation of print, extends from the neck to the 
ankles, with ample sleeves, and sometimes with a frill or collar. This dress 
almost entirely conceals the figure, and is a very rational and becoming 
garment, in which they look well. Their hair, which is usually strong and 
black, is allowed to grow long, and either tied in a knot on the top of the 
head, or regularly parted in front and set off with combs, curls, &c. Shoes 
and stockings are scarcely ever seen. Of course there are many of both 
sexes in the principal sea-ports, who approximate very considerably towards 
the European style of dress, and exhibit a great variety of costume ; but 
these are exceptions to the general rule. 

The Sandwich Island female countenance is often coarse and unfemi- 
nine, — expressive, — but not of those qualities which we most admire : in 
many, intelligence is conspicuous, and they have fine keen eyes. Their 
movements are particularly awkward and ungraceful. Like the Tahitians 
both sexes are accustomed to sit cross legged, or still more commonly, 
squatted on their heels. 

The appearance of the native dwellings, gardens, &c, is indicative of 
much greater industry than any thing seen at Tahiti ; but as to civiliza- 
tion or comfort, I will say but little. The huts strikingly resemble in 
appearance old hay stacks, having sides as well as roof of thatch : they 
are, however, well adapted to the climate, being at once a protection 
from the heat and the cold. One of the king's houses, and the native 
chapels which we have seen, are composed of this very homely material. 
The dwellings of the chiefs are more or less modelled upon those of the 
white residents. Some of them are really quite respectably furnished, and 
capable of containing the rare elements of comfort and convenience. 
The American missionaries, excepting in some places where stations 
have been but recently occupied, are uniformly provided with comfortable 
houses, built, as nearly as circumstances will admit, in home style and often 
of home materials ; neat stone, or coral, or mud-brick walled cottages, 
shingled or roofed with zinc, plastered, and floored and ceiled ; the wood- 
work in some cases imported from America, whereby the natives are 
furnished with models, and they have already, in several instances, availed 
themselves of the advantage. 

Idolatry, so far as the adoration of images is concerned, may be said 
to be nationally abolished in the Sandwich Islands. This fact does not 
imply that all have even nominally embraced the Christian religion ; but 
a small part of the whole population belong to the church by any right 
of membership. At one station, not very long ago established, in a dis- 
trict where hundreds usually attend the services in the chapel, we were 
informed, I think, that the number of church members did not exceed 
fifteen or sixteen. The missionaries find it needful to be constantly on 
their guard against hypocritical profession. 

3d2 



772 APPENDIX. 

The influence of irreligious foreigners, who are scattered over nearly all 
the islands of the Pacific, constitutes probably the greatest external 
hinderance to the moral improvement of the natives, which the mission- 
aries have to encounter. They may be styled the missionaries of Satan, 
diligently engaged in extending his kingdom, and counteracting with the 
efficiency of well-instructed agents, every attempt to diminish his power ; 
— and unhappily these labourers are not few. The Sandwich Island 
government has adopted certain regulations, which discountenance the 
settlement of seamen, who might choose to leave their vessels ; but in one 
way or other many contrive to take up their abode. Men arrested and 
confined in the fort at Honolulu are bought out perhaps by a dram-shop 
keeper, who can easily pay himself afterwards out of the wages of his 
purchase. Dollars will effect almost any thing with the chiefs : most of 
their sentences passed on criminals can be commuted for money, and that 
legally. 

I am not aware of any public measures which tend to discourage foreign 
traders from settling in the islands. They cannot buy land it is true, but 
they may rent it for a stated term of years. The steady determination of 
the government, not to sell an inch of ground, is a measure of excellent 
policy ; and I hope neither king nor chiefs will ever be persiiaded or 
frightened out of it. Whenever they sell the soil, they give away their 
strength, and this is already insufficient to govern their unruly white 
subjects. 

The present is a critical time in the history of these islands, and many 
of the more reflective and sagacious natives are fully sensible of the fact. 
While the aboriginal inhabitants are rapidly on the decline in point of 
number, tLe foreigners are increasing, and acquiring an ascendancy which 
threatens the downfall of the former as a nation. The government is inef- 
ficient, partly from the character of the king, who is very much influenced 
by the whites and half castes, whose interest leads them to encourage his dis- 
sipated, thoughtless course of life, — and partly because his native simplicity 
and inexperience, are ill adapted to cope with designing adventurers who are 
ready to take every advantage. The remote locality of the islands in these 
seas, so inaccessible to the eye of philanthropy and the hand of unbiased 
justice, is greatly against them. Who is to represent them in civilized 
countries ? Who is to defend their insulted rights in the respective islands, 
■ — to advise them what measures to pursue, and with an impartiality that 
levels all petty distinctions of nation or complexion, to stand forward in 
the cause of religion, equity, and humanity ? If foreigners encroach 
upon the common prerogatives of nature, the laws of England and America 
are no laws in the Pacific ; but if Pacific islanders infringe on the assumed 
or usurped privileges of the subject of a powerful nation, a sloop of war 
is dispatched to inflict punishment — a punishment too often dispensing 
ruin, alike to the innocent and the guilty, by an act of bloody retribution. 

The first missionaries who settled on the Sandwich Islands arrived about 
fifteen years since ; and though several families have left the ground and 
returned home, subsequent reinforcements have augmented the number to 



APPENDIX. 773 

nearly thirty families, including physician, printer, bookbinder, &c. Some 
of the original pioneers have acquired an excellent knowledge of the 
native language, and by these it has been reduced to writing, and numerous 
translations made from the English into it. The New Testament is 
published in a neat 12mo. volume : the Bible itself has not yet been 
circulated ; but many parts have been printed, and probably the entire 
Bible will appear before long. A vocabulary, a grammar, a work on geo- 
graphy, the rudiments of arithmetic, natural history, astronomy, mathe- 
matics, with small works on several familiar subjects calculated to interest 
and instruct, have been issued ; beside selections from Scripture in various 
forms, and several hymn books. There is also as already noticed a semi- 
monthly newspaper, which is no doubt the medium of much information ; 
and is calculated to amuse and incite to application many of the young 
people. Great interest is evinced in the new works as they appear, and 
they are bought up with eagerness. 

The time of the missionaries is devoted almost exclusively to their pro- 
fessional duties, so far as the unavoidable cares connected with recent 
domestic establishments will permit. The principle on which they are 
supported, leaves no inducement to engage in trade in order to maintain 
their families. The board at home supplies them with every thing they 
require through their ' secular agent,' a person whose office it is to provide 
for all their necessities on the spot. He is applied to for whatever they 
stand in need of, furnishes conveyances to and fro, transmits their letters, 
books, &c, and in fact acts the part of general agent to them all. But 
though all partake of the common stock, no narrow prescriptions or restric- 
tions in regard to their several expenses and arrangements, reduce the 
families to one level : each one does as he sees best according to his habits 
and necessities, with the understanding that all extravagance will be stu- 
diously avoided. 

As an organized body, destined to operate in a given field, and to pro- 
secute a given object, I think the Americans in the Sandwich Islands 
afford a highly creditable example ; and certainly, as regards the personal 
character of many of the labourers, their evident exclusive desire to benefit 
the natives by imparting what they themselves value, their openness to 
receive the suggestions of others, whose ideas and views may differ, and 
their intellectual qualifications, — they form a highly estimable community. 
They are Congregationalists by profession, and probably their acknow- 
ledged principles recognize the lawfulness of war ; but several individuals 
among them, with whom we conversed on this subject, appeared practically 
convinced of its utter inconsistency with the gospel of peace. Oaths are 
happily not in use in the Pacific, so that our Lord's command in this respect 
is not, so far as I am aware, judicially abrogated among the natives by pre- 
sumptuous man. 

In the public assemblies for worship, the Sandwich Islanders generally 
behave with decent quietness, without the vigorous application of sticks, ot 
even the exhibition in terrorem of these unhallowed appurtenances of a 
house for religious worship. Their habit of coming in and going out 



774 APPENDIX. 

during the services, is not yet broken off, although attempts have been 
made to correct it. 

The wives of the missionaries are in the habit of meeting certain classes 
of the natives for the purpose of instructing them ; some assemble the 
adult female members of the congregation, — some teach the children, and 
one in Hololulu has charge of an infant school. An effort is now making 
to teach the people to manufacture cotton cloth, and some good common 
material has been already produced ; which if attainable by all would con- 
stitute an important improvement on the present paper coverings, and 
make the islanders less dependent on a foreign supply. It appears to me 
that literary education alone, is not what this people most need : a system 
adapted to benefit them, ought to exert a more general influence. What 
they require at the present time for their moral and civil melioration, is a 
class of plain, honest, industrious settlers, who would furnish domestic 
models for their imitation : not men who merely come to make money by 
their exertions, but such as would come from a sense of duty to live among 
the people, and by leading them on towards improvement aud civilization, 
through the silent but potent means of personal influence and example, 
endeavour to raise their present low condition. The mission families are 
of course now exerting an excellent influence in this way ; but their 
number is small, their efforts are divided among a variety of objects, 
and they ordinarily belong to a class of society, somewhat more refined 
and intellectual than the persons to whom I refer : their sphere in fact 
is a different one. 

The missionaries, wherever we have been, form an important civil defence 
for the poor natives, which the overbearing and unjust encroachments of 
foreign adventurers render needful. They occupy the opposite scale : 
while others combine to support their individual interests, or the more 
general interests of commerce and national aggrandizement, the missionary 
takes the part of the islander : he informs him of his just right, remon- 
strates for him against injustice, and what is more important still, he con- 
stitutes a continual witness of the lawless conduct, in which unprincipled 
men indulge abroad. We may perhaps have met with a few singular 
instances, in which other foreigners occupy something of an equal, neutral 
ground — not exclusively bent on the support of one side ; but I must con- 
fess I should find it difficult to point out half a dozen cases of much effi- 
ciency, independent of the missionaries. The latter, from the very nature 
of their circumstances, as agents of absent benevolence directed towards 
the native population, in constant correspondence with the better part of 
the community at home, almost necessarily serve as a salutary check. 
This is perhaps indicated with sufficient clearness by the fact, that they 
are universally hated and dreaded by the contrary faction, wherever they 
reside. 

And now before I finally leave the Sandwich Islands, I will just remark, 
that our visit to them has afforded us an opportunity of becoming 
acquainted with some of our trans-atlantic brethren, which I cannot but 
highly value. I own, in order to judge of the American character, we 



APPENDIX. 775 

ought to see it in America ; but still, for obtaining a general idea of it, the 
white community we have left, affords probably a favourable opportunity : 
the numerical proportion of English residents with whom we had inter- 
course, is quite small. To both classes indeed, we are indebted for much 
kindness and many polite attentions ; for which, as wanderers and strangers, 
we could not but highly appreciate and feel grateful. For myself, I can 
say, I shall always recur to our visit to this remote corner of the earth, with 
feelings of peculiar and lively interest. 

On the 19th of Seventh Month, 1836, we re-crossed the equator, and 
entered once more the southern hemisphere. The sinking North star 
was watched with considerable interest, although the Magellan clouds, and 
the beautiful Cross of the South, more than compensate for his loss. Per- 
haps the sky between the tropics never exhibits a more imposing aspect 
than during a short space subsequent to the sun-set. The whole west is 
tinged with the most delicate shades of colouring, — from the rich amber to 
the deep, bright blue of ether, which intermingle from the gilded horizon 
that conceals the sun, up to the regions of the starlit hemisphere above. 
My father has a particular admiration of this evening exhibition, and 
delights to contemplate it, in these almost cloudless latitudes. The 
shades of colouring which encircle the bright region where the sun has 
just set, have something of the prismatic hues about them ; but they are 
less defined, and spread richly from the ocean to the high vault of blue 
overhead, with a vastness and beauty almost indescribable. Before the sun 
sets, the atmosphere is usually mottled with light fleecy clouds, which fly 
in the direction of the trade-wind till the heat of day is gone : after- 
wards the cool air condenses them, and they are dissipated in the form of 
dew, leaving an atmosphere of cloudless purity. 

While crossing the trade latitudes this time, it has appeared as though 
the wind is perceptibly affected by the rays of the sun ; for during the day 
the breeze is often light ; but when the heat of his beams is felt to the 
westward of our horizon, and the air consequently rarified to leeward of us, 
the force of the wind increases. 

South Pacific, Eighth Month 10th. — Rarotonga, or as in the charts, Orurule, 
is the principal island in the Hervey cluster ; all of which are inhabited. 
Rarotonga contains a population of . . . . 7000 
Magnica is supposed to contain ..... 1800 

Atui ditto 1600 

Aitutuki „ 1800 

Mitiaro and Mauki together, about .... 700 

Rarotonga is a lovely island, about thirty miles in circumference, and 
nearly circular in form. It is obviously of volcanic origin, although I am 
not aware that any crater is known to exist on its surface. Calcined stone 
and cinders are abundant ; and the marked, ragged outline of its peaks 
and ridges, indicates significantly the convulsive agency which has been 
employed in their formation. 



776 APPENDIX. 

The shores are built up by coral architects, and exhibit a curious instance 
of coralline formation intermingled with upheaved masses of original rock, 
■which protrude in some places through the former, in a way that would lead 
to the supposition that sub-marine eruptions of comparatively recent date, 
have encroached on a super-stratum of coral, which has been progressively 
rising round the coast. Coral sand and shells, &c, consolidated by the 
action of the elements, in some parts of the shore, form beds of fine, 
available stone, probably as durable as ordinary free-stone, of which the 
natives are beginning to find the value, as a building material. 

The highest mountain is, I should think, four thousand feet high, possibly 
rather more than this ; and others of somewhat inferior elevation occupy 
the central districts, and ensure a constant supply of moisture to the 
lowlands. These districts team with bread-fruit, plantains, bananas, 
citrons, limes, vis, papaws, taro, sweet potatoe, sugar-cane, cocoa-nuts, 
palms, and many other tropical productions of majestic growth. Every 
thing flourishes with an exuberance and richness rarely surpassed. 

The island is divided into four parts, governed by separate, indepen- 
dent chiefs. These are at present happily united in the wish to pro- 
mote the tranquillity and improvement of the country, by seconding the 
efforts of the missionaries. It is now eight or nine years since the latter 
settled among them, and although assailed by many difficulties and dis- 
couragements, their residence has been cheered by continued kindness on 
the part of the people, of whose friendly conduct and docility C. Pittman 
gives the most gratifying account. It is doubtless the civil and political 
interest of the islanders to retain their missionary instructors ; and there- 
fore in the absence of particular causes of complaint or dislike, it is not at 
all surprising that they should behave courteously to them : I think too, 
that the character of the Rarotonga natives is superior to that of their 
windward neighbours. They appear to possess finer feelings, and less 
slothful, effeminate minds than the Tahitians. In their wars before the 
introduction of Christianity, it is said they never practised any of those 
fiend-like barbarities, which the luxurious, mild Tahitian was guilty of ; 
such, for example, as dealing out indiscriminate vengeance in cold blood, 
on the defenceless and the innocent ; beating the body of a dead foe to a 
pulp, and when dried in the sun in a flat form, wearing it as a cloak, &c. 
On the contrary, though furious and bloody in the moment of passion, 
these warriors are said to have even relented of their deeds of death ; and 
in some instances, to have repaired with their personal efforts the desola- 
tions of war, which their enemies had suffered. They appear to be more 
irascible than the Tahitians or Sandwich Islanders. "We hear that the 
boys are often seen fighting each other, with a spirit and rancour that 
would probably frighten the children of Tahiti ; although, more docile, 
lively and harmless little urchins, than they are on ordinary occasions, 
cannot well be imagined. As proof of their sensitiveness and excitability 
of feeling, I may remark, that it is no uncommon thing in Rarotonga, for 
the party who thinks himself aggrieved, to commit suicide. We were 
informed that such a death frequently occurs ; and during our short stay, 



APPENDIX. 777 

one man hung himself in consequence of a quarrel with some other native; 
even women are guilty of this crime. 

As a people, the natives of Rarotonga are certainly more energetic and 
industriously disposed, than some of the other islanders. They only want 
a motive, and they will not shun labour and persevering effort. There is 
no difficulty in getting work done, if an adequate inducement is offered. 
No sooner was it known that we wished to obtain curiosities, than they 
set to work to furnish them : they refitted their neglected war-caps, col- 
lected shells, brought specimens of timber hewn with great labour, and 
actually manufactured a number of new drums out of solid wood. Some 
of their sashes, mats, baskets, &c, are made with great labour ; and their 
large canoes, which Avere formerly used in war, exhibited in their decora- 
tions great ingenuity and pains. Some of the figures which form the 
heads of these canoes, are really quite neatly sculptured, considering 
the tools with which they have been made ; and the carving is executed 
with considerable regularity of design. 

The native dwellings are mostly situated along the shore, forming 
several straggling, irregular villages, which are half concealed in foliage, 
and are connected by raised foot-paths, wooden bridges, &c, so as to be 
easily visited from all parts of the coast. Many of the more modern 
houses are wattled buildings, and look respectable and capable of being 
made comfortable dwellings, if the owners possessed but the requisite 
materials. The original huts were constructed in the bird-cage style of 
Tahiti. In some respects, I think the modern plan of building greatly 
superior to the one formerly in vogue ; although really in point of comfort, 
with their habits, the difference to the natives is not so striking as might be 
supposed. White-washed walls, without glazed windows or boarded 
floors, destitute of all furniture but a few mats, and some dried reeds 
or grass for a carpet,— have a poor, stable-like appearance. However, 
time will, I trust, introduce a change of habits, and furnish with 
civilized conveniences, apartments certainly better calculated to receive 
them, than the open railed huts formerly in use, and which are still not 
uncommon. 

Out of the seven thousand persons on this island, about three thousand 
are estimated as children ; they are, with few exceptions, receiving some 
kind of instruction. Great numbers can read and write, and if the utility 
of these acquirements is not quite so obvious as could be wished, at least 
it is probable that the time passed in school by so large a portion of 
the young inhabitants is more innocently employed than it would be else- 
where : a compulsion is used on the part of the chiefs to compel them 
to learn, which is abhorrent to our free notions. A considerable 
number of copies of the four Evangelists are now in circulation, and one 
cannot but rejoice, that many of the people can read them with ease ; 
otherwise I confess their close application to the study of reading and 
writing, when we know that neither pen, ink, nor paper, and but very 
few printed pages, are within their reach, has appeared to me as of com- 
paratively little value. Corporal punishment is unhappily tolerated in the 
chools here. Under the immediate eye of C. P. there is no danger of much 



778 APPENDIX. 

severity, but he cannot see every where : natives are empowered to 
act as teachers, and it cannot be expected that moderation and discretion 
will always be observed, particularly when the scholars are obliged 
to attend. The influence of fear is in itself an evil, and therefore I 
regret its existence at all. 

Out of the whole population of the island, I understand not more 
than one hundredth part are regularly initiated into church membership. 
Candidates for admission pass through an ordeal of classes, as they are 
termed, which is intended to prevent the easy introduction of hypocrisy 
and unsound profession. 

The bulk of the people, I rejoice to say, are independent holders 
of property, which is as much their own as the land belonging to 
the chiefs, unless forfeited by a breach of the law. But by virtue of a 
right acknowledged from time immemorial, obtained by usurpation and 
superior power, and upheld by superstition and ignorance, the word of a 
chief is absolute law among the uncivilized tribes ; and his views and 
wishes are studiously followed by the multitude, who seem to feel a 
pride in maintaining his influence, and venerating his generally huge, 
unwieldy person. The chiefs of ltarotonga support the interests of the 
missionaries, take part in person in the services which are performed in 
the pulpit or the desk, and live on terms of intimacy and courtesy with 
the families of their instructors. 

C. P. is a zealous, active and amiable man, whose individual influence is 
most salutary upon those by whom he is surrounded. His health unhappily 
is extremely delicate, but with care it is possible he may yet be spared to 
his family and pastoral charge for a considerable time. 

Some years back the manufacture of calico was introduced into this 
island and met with more encouragement and success than under the 
protection of the Tahitians. Some of the people learned to spin and weave 
tolerably well, and traces of their skill are visible at this day ; but this 
most needful provision for the destitution of the islanders has not become 
by any means so generally useful as could have been wished. Under their 
circumstances, destitute of the facilities for its manufacture which civi- 
lized countries would supply, the natives find making calico a tedious and 
laborious affair ; and consequently it has been very much relinquished : 
although for want of the requisite supply of bark, which has been rendered 
extremely scarce, in consequence of a hurricane that destroyed many of 
the bread-fruit trees a few years ago, the poor people are miserably in want 
of clothing. When a vessel touches for provisions, cotton goods in the 
way of barter are easily obtained ; but this source is by no means adequate 
to the supply of a dense population. The common dress of the adults is a 
piece of native cloth wound round the waist and extending to the knee ; 
in-doors occasionally, and generally out of doors, a large loose piece of cloth 
is thrown round the bust and held on with one arm. They have little to 
say, but look very observing, and display great acuteness and cheerful- 
ness. The women are more nearly white in complexion than any other 
of the Pacific islanders we have seen, and often have pleasing faces 
and well formed graceful figures. 



APPENDIX. 779 

The amount of disease among this people is exceedingly small, when 
compared with other islands, and the adult population generally look 
healthy and comfortable. The place we visited literally swarmed with 
children, and the population is rapidly increasing. In two districts which 
contain about 3700 souls, between the Seventh Month 1834, and Sixth 
Month 1836, the births and deaths were in the proportion of 248 to 100. 

The mission establishment, at which we were kindly entertained during 
our stay, wears quite a respectable, orderly appearance ; indeed the settle- 
ment of Gnatagnia altogether has a flourishing aspect, — the houses being 
neat buildings, and the chapel and school houses commodious structures. 

There are several striking natural curiosities on one of the other islands. 
Huge subterranean caverns, which extend under the body of the island, 
and exhibit the most wonderful spectacle of its kind perhaps existing in 
the Pacific, are said to be found in Atiu, where beautiful specimens of 
spar are also obtained. 

But to take a final leave of Rarotonga : — the island seems indeed to 
possess those features, which imagination loves to trace in her ideal picture 
of a South Sea paradise. The scenery is picturesque and the soil fruitful ; 
the natives retain much of their primitive simplicity, uncorrupted by 
contact with the vile, sordid, money-hunting world ; who spread the vices 
and misery of civilization without its blessings, wherever they go. It is 
true they are but half reclaimed from barbarism ; their minds are un- 
tutored, and their ideas low and childish ; but they at least appear willing 
to receive instruction, and they are blessed with a missionary who is 
earnestly endeavouring to impart it. 

Port Refuge, Vavau, Eighth Month 25th. — We were visited by the captain 
of a whaler, who was not long ago embroiled in a quarrel with the 
natives of this place. He insisted on cutting fuel without paying for it, 
and landed with arms to accomplish his purpose. But for the inter- 
ference of the missionaries, in all probability a contest would have taken 
place, attributed no doubt at home to the ferocity of the Vavau natives, 
who assaulted his men while procuring needful supplies for the vessel. 
The last time this individual was here, he carried off by force several 
natives of this island, landing them afterwards at the Navigator's, where 
"they still remain. Other cases of the kind might be mentioned. 

Ninth Montlt 1st, 1836. — Our route in visiting the station of Haalaufuli, 
led through winding passages, between the groups of small islands, 
which surround the mainland in the south and south-west directions, and 
furnish considerable variety of wooded landscape and tranquil lake 
scenery ; but it is destitute of that boldness and magnificence of outline, 
characteristic of many other South Sea Islands. The shores are mode- 
rately low, and covered with dense matted forests, which extend to the 
water's edge, and seem to flourish amid masses of bare rock without a 
trace of soil. In some parts there are precipices which exhibit stupendous 
piles of stone thrown together in the utmost confusion about these 
unexplored caverns and overhanging ruins, the restless waters murmur, 



780 APPENDIX. 

and the sea fowl finds an impregnable retreat. The tide undermines 
the shore, and flows in some places far under the land ; we passed one 
insulated rock, which is supported by a comparatively insignificant pillar, 
— all the rest of the original base being washed away : the appearance of 
this rock is the more curious, from its being surmounted with vegetation 
and a large tree. Coral of a thousand forms and colours is seen under 
water in the shallows ; and among its variegated branches the gorgeous 
fishes of the Pacific, exhibiting hues as rich and brilliant as the peacock's 
train, or the butterfly's wing, seem to sport secure from all enemies but 
those of their own kind. Sharks are said however to find shelter in the 
thick coral grove, where masses of consolidating roots and branches 
become gradually overgrown with fresh vegetation, which conceals the 
dark labyrinths below from the eye of day. These monsters are numerous 
and occasionally destructive : we have seen a man who has lost both his 
arms by the bite of one of them. Since lying here, we have seen a number 
of them, and caught one of considerable size. A hog which escaped from 
one of the ships lying near to us was devoured almost as soon as he 
reached the water, and before a boat could overtake him. They were 
formerly deified here, as well as in Tahiti, and were dreaded with more 
reason than many others of the South Sea divinities. 

Ninth Month 8th. — About a mile from the place of our re-embarkation 
there is a large cavern, which it was agreed that we should explore before 
returning to the harbour ; so, piloted by some natives who Live near the 
spot, we coasted along towards the open sea ; till the object of our curi- 
osity appeared in sight.* I had observed it as we beat up to the harbour 
on the day of our arrival, and was glad of the opportunity now afforded of 
investigating such a wonderful recess. The entrance is under a kind of 
natural portico of rock, of great height, which leads into the principal 
cavern : the passage is broad and the water deep ; so that our boat and a 
canoe entered together with ease, and navigated the interior of the vault, 
which is lighted froin the entrance. After passing the vast archway of 
rock which forms the mouth, the scene is magnificent in the extreme, 
and called forth an involuntary burst of surprise and admiration. The roof 
is an amazing height, with pendant masses of stalactite, which garnish 
with indescribable richness the variegated concave above. Beneath, is a 
beautifully transparent surface of water, which reflects the walls and arches 
in a moving mirror, and reveals a world of submarine life and beauty 
beneath; caves, rocks, beds of coral and petrifactions richly coloured, 
and the painted finny tribes of the Pacific roving in perfect security, 
among these romantic watery glens. The walls are encrusted with spar 
of various colours, but principally of a bright blue, whose descending 
columns look like the ruins of a marble edifice, built not with the puny 
regularity of art, but with the wild unstudied magnificence of nature's 
inimitable architecture. On the left hand, is an arched passage into 
another apartment, whose recesses are indistinctly visible, which can be 
explored in a similar manner ; and in front is a winding ascent, between 
high walls, which must be traversed on foot. By stepping from crag to 
* See Memoirs, p. 573. 



APPENDIX, 



781 



crag along the irregular sides of this passage, and holding by projecting 
points and ridges for some distance, you reach a floor of solid earth, which 
leads at length to another circular dome of great height, composed of 
somewhat darker materials, which are hut partially illuminated by a 
small opening at the very summit. Here all is silent, dismal, and 
damp : untraversed caves leading to an unknown distance in utter dark- 
ness, open from the side of this gloomy vault. We would gladly have 
attempted to penetrate further, but being destitute of torches, it was 
impossible to proceed with any degree of safety. We obtained specimens 
of the stalactite, and after rousing the echoes of tbe cave, commenced a 
return to the anchorage. This most imposing cavern is situated opposite 
the entrance of the channel which leads to the harbour of Port Refuge, 
and consequently is exposed in heavy westerly gales to the full lash of the 
ocean. I leave you to imagine what a spectacle must be exhibited in the 
interior of the cave, when it is invaded by an infuriated surf. 

Ninth Month 16th.— The summit of Talau, in this island of Vavau, is com- 
puted to be one thousand feet above the level of the sea, and the ascent is 
rugged and circuitous, through a dense forest, matted together with thou- 
sands of climbing plants, creepers and vines, which very much increase the 
difficulty of traversing it. Such a rich chaos of rock, foliage, gigantic ferns 
and cocoa-nut trees, you can scarcely imagine ; and flying foxes and birds 
of brilliant plumage gave animation to this splendid wilderness. 

At Sea, Eleventh Month Uth, 1836.— The Friendly Islands is a name origi- 
nally given by Captain Cook when he first visited these comparatively 
friendly shores. In this general appellation is included Tongataboo and 
its inferior island neighbours, — the Fiji group, which lies a few leagues to 
the westward, and is very little known, — the Haabias, a cluster of low 
coral islands, eighteen of which are inhabited, — Haafuluhau which consists 
of Vavau, and above a hundred small islets by which it is almost encircled 
— the Hamoa or Navigator's Islands which lie to the north-east, and 
several less important insular tracts of land, interspersed among the above 
enumerated groups. Of these only a few have been occupied by mission- 
aries, and with some inconsiderable exceptions, the profession of Christi- 
anity is confined to Tonga, Haabai, and Haafuluhau. To these places our 
visit was confined, and to them of course the following remarks exclusively 
apply. 

To begin with Haafuluhau, which we first visited. The island of "Vavau 
includes the larger portion of the land settled on by natives, which this 
group possesses, and is supposed to contain a population of 3000 souls. 
The other islands of the group collectively augment this number to about 
5000, which is the whole amount of the native population, according to the 
estimates of the missionaries. The king has renounced idolatry and em- 
braced the doctrines of Christianity ; he has put away all his wives but one, 
become a local preacher and a class leader in the Methodist Society, and 
seems willing to be guided and advised by the missionaries in every under- 
taking. The queen is a class leader, and a teacher in the schools, and 



782 



APPENDIX. 



nearly the whole population of these islands on which missionaries reside, 
have been admitted into the church. There are no less than one hundred 
and seventy native local preachers, who are employed in all parts of the 
Haafuluhau group, and thirty chapels in which there is service three times 
a week. The people thus led by their king and chiefs, attend diligently 
to the instructions of their teachers, and have already acquired consider- 
able Scripture knowledge, and a taste for reading and writing. 

The Haabai group is situated a little more than a degree to the south- 
ward of Haafuluhau. They are inhabited by a similar race, who speak the 
same dialect, and are now united under one government. Very few ships 
visit this group, as it possesses no good harbour, and the character of the 
inhabitants and the policy of the rulers deter white men from settling. 
Lifuka, although by no means a fine island, has been selected as the seat 
of royalty, and it now contains a mission establishment. This group which 
consists of eighteen inhabited islands, is said to contain a population of 
4564. The profession of Christianity is universal here. 

A few leagues to the southward of Haabai lies the island of Tongataboo, 
at present under the government of Tubou, a relation of king George, who 
is expected to succeed him. The country and its inhabitants correspond 
very nearly with what is found in the two before mentioned groups, but 
the civil condition of the people is much less favourable. The population 
is estimated at 7000 persons, and of these upwards of 1000 are Christians 
by profession ; the rest still retain their old superstitions. There are 
seventeen fortified towns or villages on the island, one of which Nukua- 
lofa is occupied by the adherents of the missionaries, at the head of whom 
is king Tubou. 

One cannot but deeply regret that the pacific principles of the New 
Testament are not fully professed by those who are sent to " preach glad 
tidings," and to " publish peace" among these teachable islanders. How- 
ever feelings of personal piety and benevolence may, and I rejoice to 
believe, do actuate many, if not all of these individuals, to desire and 
to labour for the continuance of harmony and good-will,— still their 
doctrines are defective ; and they tolerate and recommend a dangerous 
middle course, — a course, which the spirit of the gospel forbids, and which 
has never yet proved adequate to avert, among Christians, the shocking 
incongruity of mutual destruction. I never can at all comprehend how 
the doctrines of our blessed Saviour, the Prince of Peace, and the right to 
destroy a brother mortal are to be reconciled ; nor have I ever been able 
to contemplate without a feeling of wonder, men really lovely for the 
Christian graces they exhibit, surrounded by instruments of death, avow- 
edly destined to be used with their own hands against the lives of their 
deluded fellow-men. 

Slavery, that ' execrable sum of all villany,' still prevails to a certain 
extent among the heathen party ; although even this monster is rendered 
less destructive by the' proximity of a better system. Tonga slaves are 
made such in the most capricious manner possible ; a word or any slight 
offence may subject a man to be condemned to the lowest servitude, 



APPENDIX. 783 

without any trial, and when once sentenced to slavery the curse is 
hereditary. 

The natives who still remain in their heathen state are more destitute 
of clothing and other foreign articles, than their neighbours : they look less 
cleanly, and less regularly and adequately fed ; their persons are fre- 
quently mutilated by wounds received in fighting, and disfigured with 
sores or burns, inflicted according to superstitious custom, as indications 
of grief or respect for the dead. From the very recent introduction of 
Christianity, many of these external marks of heathenism are seen among 
the professing natives ; but these are not the effects of a cause every 
day in operation as in the other case, but merely the relics of departed 
folly and madness. Some of the poor women in the heathen settlements, 
who torture themselves according to ancient usage, are really appalling 
objects : their hair cut off, their cheeks burnt and bruised with a rough 
instrument, till they look purple, and other parts of the body more or 
less disfigured with wounds thus self-inflicted, give them a frightful 
appearance, and furnish a sad demonstration of the reigning power 
of superstition. I have seen a woman spotted over with scars in this 
way like a leopard. This practice was formerly in use among the 
men likewise : they commonly have one round scar under each eye, and 
some have many rings burnt in the flesh of the arms. The custom too, of 
cutting off the little finger on the death of a relative or superior, was very 
common ; and most of the older men are destitute of one or both of these 
minor members, which have been thus sacrificed. Nay, the absurd prac- 
tice has extended to the children, and if a chief is dangerously ill, many 
little fingers are even yet occasionally amputated to avert his death ; but 
this, like the cutting and burning of the skin, is abolished among the pro- 
fessors of Christianity. 

In a commercial point of view, the three sections of the Friendly islands 
which we have visited, are not of much importance, and probably never 
can be so. The harbour in Vavau has great disadvantages from the incon- 
venient depth of water for anchorage, excepting in one small part ; also 
from the want of good fresh water for the supply of the shipping : among 
the Haabai group there is no secure anchorage at all. In Tongataboo, 
though one part of the harbour is safe, and the produce of the country is 
valuable for the whalers, the water is very inferior. All three groups are 
subject to earthquakes, also to very destructive gales. 

"With the exception of Kao, Tufua, and Haufuluhau, these islands furnish 
the most complete specimens of coral formation that we have yet seen, on 
a large scale. I have no doubt they have been rendered habitable by the 
progress of marine vegetation, and the subsequent accumulation of coral 
sand, and decomposed vegetable substances, which covered the islands as 
soon as they reached the surface of the sea. Coral obviously forms the 
fathomable ground-work : the soil is quite superficial, and underneath is 
coral rock and salt or brackish water. One of the Haabai islands is said 
to rock frightfully during heavy gales, which tends to prove its incomplete 
solidity under water ; and some others exhibit various indications of 



784 APPENDIX. 

hollowness. Constantly recurring earthquakes, and the" volcanic crater 
in Tufua, which disgorges a vast quantity of combustibles and smoke 
from the subterranean furnace beneath, indicate the proximity of great 
igneous operations under ground ; and I think there is rational'ground 
for concluding, that the whole island has at some time been raised by 
this sub-marine agency. They are for the most part fertile, producing 
abundance of tropical vegetation, which, under different management, might 
be increased and improved by culture to almost any extent. The trees and 
plants most common, are similar to those found in the other groups, with 
comparatively few exceptions. The fruits most abundantjare shaddocks, 
papau apples, pine apples, melons, and citrons. The orange, so common else- 
where, is very scarce andof bad quality ; but the papau, introduced into these 
islands at the same time, has more than compensated for the deficiency, — 
being produced in perfection, and in exhaustless quantities. To this 
exotic fruit the islanders are indebted for a valuable supply of food during 
their periodical seasons of scarcity, and their more formidable occasional 
famines, which occur after the ravages of a hurricane or a strong westerly 
storm. The yam is peculiarly obnoxious to injury from the wind, and on 
this precarious, though excellent vegetable, which is the staple food of 
the Friendly Islanders, their sustenance to a great extent depends. Other 
more hardy vegetables have been hitherto most improvidently neglected, 
the people have consequently been subjected to great scarcity after these 
violent storms, and but for the papau fruit must have endured much 
greater hardships. The cultivation of the sweet potatoe is becoming more 
common, and will no doubt tend in future to prevent the evils alluded to. 
The vegetables most cultivated are the yam, bread-fruit, taro, sweet pota- 
toe, plantain, and a root resembling the yam, which we had not before 
seen. Cocoa-nuts grow spontaneously in great abundance, on almost all 
these low sandy islands. 

The climate of the Friendly group, judging from what we saw, is very 
fine, — preferable to that of Tahiti, where several months of the year are 
rendered almost unavailable by incessant rains. No season appears to 
merit the epithet rainy, although the summer months probably furnish a 
larger quantity of downfall than the rest of the year. On the whole, there 
appears to be rather a deficiency than otherwise, owing no doubt to the 
lowness of the islands, and the sandy nature of the soil. During our stay 
the thermometer ranged principally between 75° and 85° : a temperature 
very pleasant to residents in the torrid zone, but somewhat enervating to 
the human constitution, which as in the other islands of the Pacific, attains 
very early to a state of maturity, and is subject to a correspondingly pre- 
mature decline. 

As regards the character of the islanders, I prefer that of the Friendly 
Isles, to that of any other natives of the Pacific whom we have seen. 
Such a preference may be more than is generally awarded them ; but 
several reasons might be alleged for the relative estimate that has been 
formed of them and the other islanders. Many of the voyagers who visit 
this ocean, are men of miserably low moral feelings and habits, and as 



APPENDIX. 785 

such, they unite in eulogizing the natives whose manners are most con- 
genial to their own. On this account, the voluptuous effeminate Tahitians 
are spoken of in high terms, though they certainly will not bear com- 
parison with these more sober, and manly islanders. I think these people 
are less prone to sensual indulgence than either the Sandwich, Georgian, 
Society or Hervey islanders. But if less depraved, I do not think them 
at all less sensitive or susceptible of the kindly emotions : they evince 
quite as much affection towards each other, and towards their children. 
They are not so volatile and frivolous as Tahitians, and perhaps they may 
not be quite so quick and lively as the Hervey islanders, but their gravity 
and good sense are accompanied by nothing particularly austere, much 
less ferocious : on the contrary, they are gentle and affable as children. 

Their domestic habits resemble those of the other groups. Their houses 
are small fragile huts with thatched roofs and matted floors, — no windows, 
or doors, and scarcely any furniture. The flexible character of the 
building materials is a great security to the inhabitants during the earth- 
quakes which frequently occur, and on this account it seems undesirable 
to alter the style of building which prevails, although in themselves, 
Tongese dwellings are comfortless looking places. 

The dress of the natives is almost exclusively native cloth, loosely 
wrapped round the figure in irregular ample folds. A few of the 
leading men who officiate as preachers, &c, and some of the females con- 
nected with the kings and chiefs, possess articles of foreign clothing for 
particular occasions ; but on the whole, the national costume is much more 
completely retained than in any other groups we have visited. Individuals 
of both sexes wear the hair cut short, so as to leave a thick covering 
for the head, and this they friz out with great pains till it assumes the 
appearance of wool ; — using lime or white clay to make the hairs stand 
out and exhibit the proper bushy appearance. The women commonly 
wear much less than the men, and the children have the top of the head 
shaved, or the hair cut very short, leaving merely a fringe round the head, 
a few inches in width. 

They make great use of cocoa-nut oil for anointing their heads and 
bodies, and it seems probable this practice has a salutary effect. It softens 
the skin, which might by continual exposure to a hot sun become callous 
or irritable ; particularly as the people are so much in salt water. 

Healing the sick is a most important means of influencing the minds of 
the untutored natives of Tonga. If a man has derived benefit from the 
medicine prescribed for him by a missionary, he very naturally leans to the 
6ide of his benefactor, and often joins his party. The value of English 
remedies is known and acknowledged among these islanders. 

According to missionary information, 23,000 persons have renounced 
idolatry in this group, within the last ten years. Of these 9000 are 
members of the Wesleyan Society, 329 are local preachers, and 1100 are 
school teachers. 

I cannot but acknowledge the kindness we received from the Wesleyan 
missionaries and their converts in these islands. Several of the former 

3 E 



786 APPENDIX. 

are interesting persons, whose society we enjoyed, although as might in 
reason he expected, we could not on all points think, see, and feel alike.' 

The Tonga dialect has heen reduced to writing, and large portions of the 
Bihle are in circulation, hut the whole has not yet appeared. Several small 
hooks of a preceptive and devotional character, and one or two intended for 
the use of schools, containing the rudiments of grammar, &c, are printed, 
and no douht others are in progress, and will ere long he puhlished. 

The Hamoa or Navigator Island's dialect differs from the Tongese, and the 
Fiji forms a third variety in the groups already occupied hy the Wesleyans : 
probahly several others exist among the neighbouring islands, but these 
are as yet little known. It appears that the Fiji tongue has several 
striking peculiarities quite unknown to the other dialects of the Pacific. 
For instance, the sound of th is found in it, if I am correctly informed, and 
syllables do not necessarily end with vowels, as in all the other known 
varieties of the Polynesian. But there seems to be quite a distinct cha- 
racter about the Fiji islanders altogether : their appearance indicates a 
mixture of the black Asiatic races, and their manners are very barbarous. 
Their knowledge of several branches of manufacture is decidedly superior 
to that possessed by any of the other tribes. They display great labour 
and ingenuity in carving weapons, basket-making, canoe-building, making 
a variety of showy ornaments for the person, and in the manufacture of 
earthenware utensils for culinary purposes. They evidently belong to a 
distinct family, no doubt derived originally from the same source as the 
other Friendly islanders, but amalgamated with the Malay or negro. A 
few years will develop more fully the national character of these formid- 
able warriors : two missionaries are now among them with promising hopes 
of success in their arduous undertaking. I think it not improbable, that this 
section of the group contains the most energetic and intelligent division of 
the Friendly islanders, although at present without doubt the most way- 
ward and contentious. 

New Zealand, Twelfth Month 3rd, 1836.— While halting at Keri Keri, 
we visited a cascade situated on the river of that name, which affords a 
highly picturesque spectacle. The fall is about seventy feet perpendicular, 
and the spacious valley beneath it beautifully verdant, and furnishing a 
variety of vegetation which we had probably never seen surpassed. The 
name of this cascade is the same in signification as one in Hawaii, called 
the ' cascade of the rainbow,' — no doubt in both cases in consequence of 
the effect produced by the sun's rays passing through the spray. Like 
the still more imposing fall in the Sandwich isles, there is a deep cavern 
extending behind the projection of water, which adds greatly to the effect 
produced on the eye. 

First Month 13th, 1837. — "We were told that all the merchants, even the 
few who have renounced the sale of spirits, — deal in muskets and ammuni- 
tion. You can form little idea of the quantity of these articles that has 
been brought to New Zealand : it is astonishingly great. I remember to 
have heard a missionary state, that in one pa or native fort, — of which he 



APPENDIX. 787 

was speaking, the chief had in his possession about a ton of gunpowder. 
Many dreadful accidents, as you may suppose, occur with such a for- 
midable combustible, thus kept in the huts of these poor reckless natives. 

While mentioning war, — the darling passion of uncivilized men, — I am 
reminded of a remark made by a New Zealand chief to one of our mission 
friends, who was conversing with him on the subject of a future world. 
The warrior expressed his disapprobation of the opinion which the mis- 
sionary advanced respecting the life to come, saying, 'If this be true, 
what is to become of the warrior ? If there are no pas to attack, he will 
have nothing to do.' How much more consistent are the present practice 
and the anticipated paradise of pagans, than the lives of the majority of 
Christians and their professed expectations of a scriptural heaven ! The 
warrior of New Zealand sees in a moment, that his warlike tastes are 
incompatible with a world of peace and angelic blessedness ; while his 
more enlightened antipodes lay claim to both ! 

The notions of these aborigines on points connected with an invisible 
existence, appear to be extremely vague and various, — much less definite 
and refined than the superstitions of the other islanders we have seen. 
A belief in a future state, and in superhuman agency, appear to be 
universal. The New Zealanders cannot properly be called idolaters, 
having no objects of adoration in the form of images or idols ; although 
there are many things to which they attach a sacred character, regarding 
them rather as charms or spells than as divinities. The term which in all 
the dialects of the Pacific islands that we have visited, is used to express 
Deity— Atua, Odua, Akiia, &c, — which are all but variations of the same 
word, is here too used to designate something sacred, but with an extent 
of application that renders it almost incomprehensible. The New Zealand 
ideas of the Almighty seem to be much less definite than those entertained 
by the other islanders, and this term is correspondingly vague in its appli- 
cation. 

My allusion to this subject recalls an anecdote which pleased me much 
at the time I heard it from the lips of our venerable friend Samuel 
Marsden. He was talking one day to a New Zealander of the ideas 
entertained by these natives respecting a Supreme Being, and asking him 
what their god was ?— what he was like 1 The warrior placed his hand 
so as to produce a shadow on the trunk of a huge tree that stood near 
them, and told his interrogator to look at that. 'There,' said he, 'is our 
god :— he exists but you cannot touch him or injure him ;— he is before 
your eyes, yet you can discern no substance in the form you see and know 
to exist' — or to this effect. Is not this a beautiful illustration to come 
from a New Zealander ? 

A disturbance occurred to-day on board one of the ships lying by us, 
which very nearly ended disasterously. It happened on board an English 
whaler, commanded by a captain, who appears to be much more of a 
gentleman in manner and conduct, when among his countrymen, than 
most of the masters of these ships,— but who countenances just as much 
license on board his vessel as the worst of his profligate brethren. A chief 



788 APPENDIX. 

from a neighbouring pa, who supports all that is vile among the ships, 
was on board this whaler, with great numbers of his male and female 
dependents, — the latter of whom were quartered on board,— when either 
lie or one of his men brought some spirits from their canoe, which the 
mate of the ship immediately seized and threw overboard. This irritated 
the natives, and pistols were produced on the quarter-deck to intimidate 
them. In a while however, the dissatisfaction appeared to subside, and 
suspicion was banished from the minds of the whites. When all was thus 
quiet, the old chief seized the mate by the throat, and waving his toma- 
hawk over him made a signal to his followers to occupy the deck. In an 
instant, the ship was covered with naked men, and every instrument 
resembling a weapon was in the hands of the natives. Not one-half the 
ship's company was on board, and therefore no resistance could be made, 
so nothing occurred likely to exasperate farther ; and after some time, an 
old man interfered, recommending that the affront offered to the chief 
should be made up over a glass of grog : this was in some sort done, and 
the matter ended without any bloodshed. One of our seamen was on 
board the ship at the time and saw the fray: he determined if violence 
should ensue to jump overboard, and try to regain his own more peaceable 
vessel by swimming, in which resolution one of the ship's crew joined. 
When the chief went away, he seemed still unreconciled, and threatened 
to be revenged, and during the following night we heard muskets fired in 
his pa, indicating defiance, in answer to which a cannon shot was returned 
by the vessel, with the idea, we concluded, of proving to the excited 
natives, that she was ready to encounter them. Had the whole ship's 
company been on board at the time of the disturbance, there is little 
doubt but a bloody contest would have been the result. 

Fint Month 16th — The white residents, missionaries and others, are at 
present preparing a petition to the British government, praying that the 
state of New Zealand may be taken into consideration, and measures 
adopted for the protection of British property in this country. The object 
of this petition - is evidently to induce the government to send a force into 
New Zealand, which shall be able to secure the possessions of the whites 
from all injury, in case of such being attempted ; and at the same time to 
compel the fighting tribes to make peace. This is a most critical step in 
the progress of New Zealand civilization ; and I sincerely hope that no 
unjust measure will be adopted ; — in fact, without the most glaring incon- 
sistency, our government cannot interfere, coercively, at all. It has long 
since declared the independence of New Zealand, furnishing the chiefs 
with a national flag, which has been formally recognized and honoured as 
such : how then can an armed dictator be placed on the island, who shall 
be empowered to enforce submission to his requisitions ? As for the 
danger to which British property is said to be exposed, I do not believe it 
is now in any danger from natives in this part of the country ; and whites 
are amenable to their respective governments, and consequently ought to 
be placed at the disposal of proper agents of those governments, who ought 
undoubtedly to be sent into the land. The proximity of the colonies would 



APPENDIX. 789 

render the authority of a Consul quite adequate. In parts of New Zealand 
where property may be somewhat insecure, there are no establishments of 
any moment, excepting those which on their present footing, ought to be 
prohibited instead of being protected, — being the sources which supply 
those very arms that are liable to be employed in their demolition, and 
which serve greatly to aggravate these very contests with which we now 
wish to interfere. By what possible right can we command the warriors 
whom we have formally declared independent, to desist from settling their 
disputes by force of arms, whilst our own subjects are providing them with 
the means of doing so ? We cannot interfere with British subjects who 
circulate rum and weapons among the conflicting clans, and yet we think 
it very proper to compel those clans to abstain from using the weapons so 
acquired. 

About two hundred signatures are already procured to the petition in 
question ; aud it is to be hoped that the proportion of spirit dealers and 
traders in arms who have joined in it, will be specified. Do we wish to 
prevent New Zealanders from destroying each other, which is assigned as 
one of the objects of the petition ? Well, then, stop the sources which 
furnish three-fourths of the means : make it a crime to bring cargoes of 
these pernicious articles, and to build stores round the coast for the traffic 
in them— a traffic which we in f,act protect, if we revenge the destruction 
of property that consists of little else beside these and the native produce 
obtained in exchange for them. Let us prevent in this way, our own 
countrymen from spreading firebrands, arrows, and death among the 
aborigines, and we shall in great measure avert those wars which threaten 
the extinction of the people, even before the vices of Christians (which are 
no less infallibly destroying the natives where war is not raging) have cut 
them off. If disputes still arise, and native spears and clubs are used to 
settle them, we are certainly not answerable for those who may perish ; 
and in plain English, I think, that so far as we are concerned, the islanders 
have a full right to decide their differences in the same way as Christian 
nations, until by lawful means we can induce them to act more sanely than 
we do ourselves. To compel them to remain at peace, (and that too, with- 
out providing any other means of adjusting their quarrels in a more 
humane manner,) is in my opinion no other than " to do evil that good 
may come." Not that we can for a moment suppose that good would come, 
if such a policy were to be adopted ; on the contrary, if the fate of the 
New Zealanders be fixed now, it would be no less certain then. If we 
endeavoured to prevent mischief by sapping the root of the evil, as I have 
above said, the people might no doubt be gradually influenced by good 
men to change their present savage mode of life, and so be preserved from 
extinction ; but the moment a British force enters New Zealand, the 
country becomes a dependency of Britain, and as such the aborigines of 
the soil will perish as in all our other colonial possessions. 

While reprobating severely the attempt which is now being made, I am 
aware that a wish to prevent disorder may have a place in some miuds, 
and that a zeal for the extension of Christianity may operate in others. I 
likewise know that a petition for protection does not necessarily specify 



790 APPENDIX. 

the mode in which it shall be sent, but these considerations are of little 
value. No supposed good can sanctify evil means ; and if unjustifiable 
measures are not suggested to our government, they must, judging by past 
experience, be calculated on as the only probable results. I as heartily 
wish the warriors of New Zealand could be induced to suspend their 
sanguinary operations, as any one can do who deprecates the horrors and 
crimes of war ; but never will I subscribe to the doctrine, that it is lawful 
for us to use brute force in compelling them to desist. 

First Month 2Sth. — The Bay of Islands by no means furnishes a specimen 
of New Zealand generally, being the resort of numerous foreigners, and its 
neighbourhood but thinly peopled with the aboriginal inhabitants. There 
are various tribes in the vicinity of the Bay, and scattered over the 
northern islands, who occupy in peace their little potatoe-grounds and 
fortified villages, which are studded over the fern-clad hills that mark the 
country not covered with pine and caui-ie forests. These tribes are not 
under one common government, but are independent fraternities, subject 
only to their respective chiefs ; so that within a short distance you find 
natives living soberly and professing Christianity, and barbarians with 
rudely carved figures stuck round their stockade fortifications, their 
tabued ground, and all the brute license of heathenism. Several villages 
quite near the Bay refuse to have any connexion with the missionaries, 
and these are of course the haunts of run-away sailors, convicts and grog- 
sellers, who in fact perpetuate the present wretched pagan abominations, 
and if possible, degrade the natives lower than they would otherwise be. 
It is said there are five or six hundred white men to the northward of the 
Thames, thus scattered among the natives, and leading the most abandoned 
lives. 

The ' Church Missionary Society ' has five stations on the nothem part 
of this island, where missionaries are at present residing. Five stations 
bave been formed on the river Thames and about the Bay of Plenty, but 
two of these have been lately abandoned on account of the unsettled state 
of the native tribes in that part of the country : one mission house has been 
plundered and burnt, and one or two of the missionaries have been exposed 
to considerable personal danger. The latter circumstance cannot of course 
be wondered at ; it is rather remarkable that during these popular tumults 
the persons and property of the Society's agents have been uniformly held 
sacred, scarcely an instance of violence having occurred among them, 
although they have been frequently placed in the heart of savage warfare. 
These eight stations are managed by about two dozen missionaries, most 
of whom have families with them. A schooner belonging to the Society 
is kept constantly plying between the several posts accessible from the 
sea, transferring the families or their property, as expediency or necessity 
may dictate. The contending clans have avoided making enemies of the 
missionaries, regarding them as a neutral party, and as such even among 
barbarians, entitled to protection ; an instance or two to the contrary have 
unhappily occurred recently, in which the teachers appear to have been 
identified in some degree with their adherents, though even in these cases 
their persons have not been injured. 



APPENDIX. 791 

The Wesleyans have occupied a part of the western coast, their head 
quarters being at Hokianga, but we did not see any of their establishments. 
We were told that the country where they are located is more populous than 
those parts where the Church Missionary Society agents are employed, some 
of whose stations are entirely deserted, Keri Keri and Tepuna more parti- 
cularly. Waimate, the inland agricultural settlement, has not many natives 
near it, but there are several tribes scattered round the neighbourhood, 
within a moderate distance, whom the missionaries visit and instruct. The 
same may be said of Paihia ; though the villages near the Bay of Islands are 
hostile to the missionaries, yet there are several places up the rivers Kaua- 
kaua and "Waikate, where the people listen to their weekly instructions, and 
have made some progress towards improvement. The whole numerical 
amount of these teachable natives is insignificant, indeed one hundred 
persons is considered a large congregation in New Zealand. 

The Church Missionary Society, and several individuals belonging to 
the mission hold large parcels of land which have been regularly purchased 
of the natives, partly for the present use of the mission, and in part as a 
provision for the rising families of its members. The children are not as 
among some other missionaries whom we have visited, destined to be sent 
home at a certain age, nor do the parents anticipate the expiration of a 
term of years, when they and their families will leave the ground, and take 
up their abode in England or the colonies. The church missionaries came 
out with the intention of remaining, and of establishing their children 
after them in their adopted country, and several of the sons of the earlier 
missionaries are already settled on farms, from which they expect to obtain 
a competency. In this way large portions of the country will soon be 
colonized by Europeans, for it is an acknowledged fact that English stock 
flourishes abundantly in New Zealand. Several of the mission families 
are very large, and though the second generation will doubtless assume 
something of the Creole temperament and appearance, yet the Anglo New 
Zealand natives enjoy robust constitutions, and suffer very little from 
disease. "With such prospects of a permanent residence in the country, 
no attempt is made to prevent the children acquiring the native language ; 
although in itself I imagine familiarity with native habits and intellectual 
and moral degradation, must be nearly as injurious here as in any of the 
other islands, where the policy of seducing the children from contact with 
barbarism, has induced the parents to prevent their learning the language 
of the people. 

The New Zealand missionaries keep great numbers of native servants 
about them, and really this practice appears highly advantageous under 
present circumstances ; for from the character of the people it would be 
extremely difficult to obtain much ascendancy over them in any other 
way. Induced by motives of self-interest to submit while young to some 
degree of restraint, and to receive instruction from their patrons, it is to 
be hoped their wild, wayward, vicious habits will be corrected, while at 
the same time, their situation brings them within the religious influence of 
the missionaries. 



792 



APPENDIX. 



The New Zealanders are by far the rudest and most warlike islanders 
that we have seen, (if I except the few natives of the Marquesas and Fiji 
groups, whom we met with occasionally among their more docile neigh- 
bours ; and the accounts we have received from residents here, confirmed 
every unfavourable impression, that their appearance can make on the 
mind of a stranger. I confess I never thought the difference between 
these and the other Pacific islanders, was so very striking as it appears to 
be. They resemble North American Indians to a degree that you would 
scarcely credit, both in appearance, habits, and Jewish customs. They 
possess an invincible determination, an independence which acknowledges 
no restraint, not reconciled by a supposed decree of fate, and a restless 
martial daring, accompanied by an undying spirit of revenge, perhaps never 
more strongly exhibited in the human character. The heart of a New 
Zealander seems almost insensible, in many instances at least, to the softer 
emotions, and he does not possess terms to express such foreign influences, 
(i latitude, meekness, lowliness, grace, and repentance, affection and 
thankfulness are alike unknown to him ; while martial epithets and words 
significant of cruelty and violence are abundant and elaborately explicit. 
There seems to be an untameable spirit and pride about them, which 
renders a concession almost impossible : they will rather die than yield, — 
a principle no doubt greatly fostered by their Spartan education, which is 
calculated to infuse into the minds of mere children, the hardihood and 
recklessness of the tiger. Their notions about 'satisfaction' might have 
been formed in imitation of the famous ' laws of honour.' Every offence 
must be resented or expiated, and where actual warfare is not the con- 
sequence of a false step, plunder is liable to follow the smallest insult. 
They are said to procure an insult or a false accusation merely as a pretext 
for demanding satisfaction. The intelligence of the New Zealanders is 
universally admitted, and from what I saw of them I was led to conclude, 
that they possess greater versatility of mind than their tropical neighbours, 
and perhaps quite as much aeuteness. They seem to experience little or 
no difficulty in acquiring a knowledge of reading and writing, even in 
places unvisited by regular instructors. I saw, just before leaving the 
country a very fairly written letter, addressed to one of the missionaries 
by a native who lived at a distance, and who had only occasionally visited 
the station. 

Their appearance is very Asiatic, — swarthy complexions, bald, marked 
and often spare countenances, with dark, restless eye, black, straight hair, 
somewhat raised cheek-bones, and irregular broad mouths ; athletic but 
not generally graceful figures characterize the appearance of the men, 
whose faces, hips, and thighs are often scored with deep tatoo. A shark's 
tooth, a bird skin, or a piece of iron drawn through the ear, and a filthy mat 
or blanket thrown round the figure, and occasionally exposing every part, 
in many instances complete the decorations of these aborigines, and render 
their exterior far less pleasing than that of many other Pacific islanders. 
The women, who have been praised as furnishing perfect models of beauty, 
are I think more pleasing than most of the other islanders. They are 



APPENDIX. 793 

not however so gentle, nor are their habits so accordant with our notions 
of female propriety, being often extremely dirty in their personal appear- 
ance and domestic management ; but their countenances are expressive, 
and their features well formed. The lips are frequently disfigured with 
tatoo, which gives them a singular and unpleasant appearance, like that 
of persons who have been eating black-berries. 

The British resident has made one attempt to unite the principal chiefs 
in a sort of council, in which they might act collectively ; and in theory 
he succeeded so far as to induce them to consent that each one should no 
longer act singly, but that in affairs of importance the collective opinions 
of the chiefs of the ' united tribes of New Zealand ' should constitute a 
decision. The members of this national council signed a formal declara- 
tion of their independence, and agreed to meet annually for purposes of 
government. But unhappily these auspicious indications were very tran- 
sient, and the perverseness of some exasperated individuals, who could not 
support the dignity of civil rulers, frustrated the design altogether. On the 
occasion of a dispute about some land which had been sold, the national 
assembly was convened at the 'resident's' place of abode near the Bay of 
Islands, to decide the case. This was readily done, but the vanquished party 
in the rage of disappointment, flew to their more congenial arbitrators — 
their muskets — and fired upon the assembly. Some lives I believe were lost 
on the occasion, and it has never since been deemed expedient to call 
together such unmanageable counsellors. It is very much to be regretted 
that the untoward conduct of a few lawless individuals has, for a time at 
least, set aside a noble attempt to benefit by justifiable means this dis- 
tracted country. 



London : Printed by Johnston and Barrett, 13, Mark Lune. 



ERRATA. 

Page. 

171 — 8th line from foot. Instead of" Boyer's Isle," read Bryer's Isle. 

222 — 4th line from foot. Instead of "and the language," read that the 
language. 

270 — Note. Instead of " Vasco de Gama," read Bartholomew Diaz. 

468 — 6th line from foot. Instead of " It is the same memorable and instruc- 
tive conference," read It is the same which ivas testified of in the 
memorable and instructive conference. 

498 — 9th line from foot. Instead of " Kairua," read Kaihia. 

502 — 3rd line from foot. Instead of ditto, read ditto. 

556 — 7th line from foot. Instead of " Avorua," read Avarua. 

574 — 11th line from (op. Instead of "Lefuka," read Lifuka. 

579 — 10th line from foot. Instead of " Harbai," read Haabai. 

643 — 4th line from top. Instead of " Hobart," read Bobart. " 

691 — 17th line from top. Instead of " Never Linte," read Never Sink 

703 — 10th line from top. Instead of " and of the," read one of the. 

713 — ■ 4th line from top. Instead of "precious," read previous. 

Ill — 20th line from top. Instead of " Sharker's," read Shakers'. 

726 — 3rd paragraph. The latter half, beginning " We were favoured," should 

be a separate paragraph, 
ib. — 20th line from top. Omit the word "were" after "passengers." 
ib. — 26th line from top. Instead of " comapany," read company. 

780 — 14th line from foot. Instead of " stalactile,*' read stalactite. 

781 — 20th line from foot. Instead of " Haabias," read Haabai. 

786 — 17th line from top. Instead of " the black Asiatic races," read the black 

and the Asiatic races. 
791 — 12th line from foot. Instead of "seducing" read secluding. 









= v0o„ 



: J/ 



:%**** 




V- A^ O. ■ ■■ * * <3 ,A N ■'• y * ft s 






.,# % 




Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
0,> -, Treatment Date: April 2006 

": PreservationTechnologies 

- K^i^ A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 

rVanh*irru Tn\junchin PAIfiftfifi 



A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVA' 

1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberrv Townshio. PA 16056 












"> ^ X JC 



^ .* N 




































* .^ 









- 









tS .^v 



^ --, 






' 





















OO' 









*\. ~f ' fc 















^ ^ 







e. 












